Cisco System Installation and Upgrade Manual for Contact Center Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)
Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici
Télécharger le pdf : http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/voice_ip_comm/uc_system/UC6.1.1/cc_system_ins_upg/siumc611.pdf
Voir également :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Cisco-ONS-15400-Seri..> 01-Jun-2013 22:22 1.5M
Cisco-ONS-15400-Seri..> 01-Jun-2013 22:22 1.5M
Cisco-ONS-15400-Seri..> 01-Jun-2013 22:22 1.6M
Cisco-ONS-15400-Seri..> 01-Jun-2013 22:21 1.6M
Cisco-ONS-1540-Serie..> 01-Jun-2013 22:21 1.6M
Cisco-System-Install..> 01-Jun-2013 22:21 1.8M
Cisco-MGX-8850-VISM-..> 01-Jun-2013 22:21 1.6M
Cisco-Regulatory-Com..> 01-Jun-2013 11:33 1.5M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 11:08 4.9M
Cisco-ONS-15310-CL-a..> 01-Jun-2013 10:55 2.4M
Cisco-Small-Business..> 01-Jun-2013 10:55 2.5M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:55 2.7M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:54 1.6M
Cisoc-Upgrading-the-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:54 2.6M
Cisco-Regulatory-Com..> 01-Jun-2013 10:54 1.6M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:30 4.8M
Cisco-Telephones-IP-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:28 2.4M
Cisco-UCS-C200-Serve..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 2.6M
Cisco-ONS-15454-Refe..> 01-Jun-2013 10:26 3.0M
Cisco-Unified-IP-Pho..> 01-Jun-2013 08:01 2.3M
Cisco-Meraki-Cloud-C..> 01-Jun-2013 07:55 2.3M
Cisco-IPSec-Negotiat..> 01-Jun-2013 07:52 2.1M
Cisco-ASA-5500.htm 01-Jun-2013 07:45 2.1M
CiscoSecurityApplian..> 01-Jun-2013 07:35 2.0M
Cisco-Telephones-IP-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:28 2.4M
Cisco-UCS-C200-Serve..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 2.6M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 4.8M
Cisco-ONS-15454-Refe..> 01-Jun-2013 10:26 3.0M
Cisco-Unified-IP-Pho..> 01-Jun-2013 08:01 2.3M
Cisco-Meraki-Cloud-C..> 01-Jun-2013 07:55 2.3M
Cisco-IPSec-Negotiat..> 01-Jun-2013 07:52 2.1M
Cisco-ASA-5500.htm 01-Jun-2013 07:45 2.1M
CiscoSecurityApplian..> 01-Jun-2013 07:35 2.0M
Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:45 2.0M
Cisco-836-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38 1.6M
Cisco-837-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38 1.6M
Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:37 1.8M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 10:04 4.1M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:44 3.5M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:40 3.0M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:34 2.9M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:29 2.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:24 3.7M
CiscoPrimeNetworkCon..> 04-Sep-2012 09:17 3.0M
XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:55 2.1M
XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:35 4.9M
Cisco-IOS-XR-XML-API..> 03-Sep-2012 18:29 4.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:25 5.0M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:20 5.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:15 5.9M
Cisco-IOS-XR-Carrier..> 03-Sep-2012 17:10 4.5M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:07 4.3M
Cisco-Introduction-t..> 03-Sep-2012 16:57 4.2M
Cisco-Security-Appli..> 03-Sep-2012 16:54 4.2M
liendocumentationcis..> 28-Jan-2012 10:29 5.2K
white_paper_c11-4621..> 28-Jan-2012 10:24 55K
cisco.htm 26-Jan-2012 17:35 1.5M
liendocumentationcis..> 26-Jan-2012 17:32 5.2K
liensdocumentationci..> 26-Jan-2012 17:31 5.0K
CiscoASA5500.htm 01-Jan-2012 22:26 3.3M
ciscoVPNClientAdmini..> 01-Jan-2012 12:56 223K
Cisco7600SeriesRoute..> 01-Jan-2012 12:51 2.7M
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
System Installation and Upgrade Manual
for Contact Center
Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)
Text Part Number: OL-15524-01NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CCVP, the Cisco logo, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn is a service mark of
Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar, Aironet, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo,
Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step,
Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, iQuick Study,
LightStream, Linksys, MeetingPlace, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, PIX, ProConnect, ScriptShare, SMARTnet, StackWise, The Fastest Way
to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and TransPath are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship
between Cisco and any other company. (0711R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the
document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.
System Installation and Upgrade Manual for Contact Center, Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)
Copyright © 2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
CONTENTS
OL-15524-01 1
Preface 7
Purpose 7
Audience 7
Organization 7
Related Documentation 8
System Installation for Contact Center
CHAPTER 1 Planning Your System Installation 1
Cisco Unified Communications System Overview 1
Scope of this Installation Documentation 2
System Installation Overview 2
Installation Types 3
Release Sets 3
Legacy Deployment and Installed Base Release Sets 3
Greenfield Deployment Release Set 3
System Installation Roadmap 4
Components Installation Overview 4
System Installation Strategies 8
Single-Stage Installation Using New Hardware (for Greenfield Deployments) 8
Single-Stage Installation Using New Hardware (for Legacy Deployments) 8
Multistage Installation using New Hardware (for Legacy Deployments) 9
Multisite Phased Installation 9
Interoperability and Compatibility Portals 9
CHAPTER 2 Preparing for Your System Installation 1
Before You Begin 1
System Installation Approach 3
Release Set Versions 3
Software Version Matrix 4Contents
4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
System Installation Dependencies 6
CHAPTER 3 Performing Your System Installation 1
Deployment Models 1
Single-Site Model 2
Multisite Centralized Model 3
Multisite Distributed Model 5
Clustering over the WAN Model 5
Installing Components 6
Single-Stage Installation 6
Multistage System Installation 7
Postinstallation Tasks 9
Related Documentation 10
Compatibility Guides 10
Component Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents 10
System Upgrade for Contact Center
CHAPTER 4 Planning Your System Upgrade 1
Cisco Unified Communications System Overview 1
Scope of this Upgrade Documentation 2
Release Sets 2
Upgrade Roadmap 3
Upgrade Overview 4
Existing Components in Base Release Set 4
New Components and Features in Target Release Set 5
Components Not in Target Release Set 5
System Upgrade Paths 6
Upgrading from IPC Systems Test Release Sets 6
Upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications System Release Sets 7
Upgrade Paths to Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) 7
System Upgrade Strategies 8
Single-Stage Upgrade Using Existing Hardware 9
Single-Stage Upgrade Using New Hardware 10
Multistage System Upgrade Using Existing Hardware (Hybrid System) 11
Multisite Migration (Hybrid Network) 12Contents
5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
CHAPTER 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade 1
System Upgrade Approach 1
System Upgrade Dependencies 2
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Upgrade and Compatibility Considerations 2
Upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications Manager 6.0(1) to Release 6.1(1a) 2
Cisco Unified IP Phone 3
Backward Compatibility Issues 4
Backward Compatibility Scenarios 4
Upgrade Release Versions 6
Release 6.0(1) and Release 6.1(1) Software Release Sets 6
CHAPTER 6 Performing Your System Upgrade 1
Deployment Models 1
Single-Site Model 2
Multisite Centralized Model 3
Multisite Distributed Model 3
Clustering over the WAN (CoW) Model 4
Upgrading Components 5
Single-Stage Upgrade 6
Multistage System Upgrade 6
Upgrading Contact Center Test Beds 8
Related Documentation 8
Compatibility Guides 8
Component Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents 9
I NDEXContents
6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-017
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Preface
Purpose
This document provides installation and upgrade information about contact center components and
configurations that have been tested and verified as a part of Cisco Unified Communications system
testing. It consists of two parts:
• Part 1: System Installation for Contact Center—Provides the system-level information required to
install contact center components in Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1).
• Part 2: System Upgrade for Contact Center—Provides the system-level information required to
upgrade contact center components from Cisco Unified Communications Release 6.0(1) to Cisco
Unified Communications Release 6.1(1).
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
Audience
This document is intended for system administrators who are familiar with the various hardware and
software components included in the Cisco Unified Communications System family of contact center
products. Readers should have the technical and product knowledge to install, configure, manage, and
troubleshoot the system described.
Organization
The document is divided into the following topics:
Topic Description
Part 1: System Installation for Contact Center
Chapter 1, “Planning Your System Installation” Provides an overview of the system installation, a
list of components in a typical contact center
environment, and different installation strategies.8
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Preface
Related Documentation
Related Documentation
The Cisco Unified Communications System Technical Information Site at
http://www.cisco.com/go/unified-techinfo is your one-stop location for all system-level documentation,
resources, and training. This site provides a suite of interactive documentation that covers details of the
system architecture and components, installation and upgrade information, troubleshooting, topology
diagrams, and related information.
The sites specific to IP telephony or contact center system applications for Cisco Unified
Communications System Release 6.1(1) are:
• Cisco Unified Communications System for Contact Center Release 6.1(1) at:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipcc611/index.html
• Cisco Unified Communications System for IP Telephony Release 6.1(1) at:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipt611/index.html
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.
Chapter 2, “Preparing for Your System
Installation”
Discusses the general approach for the installation
of contact center components, installation release
set versions, and software dependencies and
considerations.
Chapter 3, “Performing Your System Installation” Provides information about the installation order
and process for all contact center components
configured in specific deployment models.
Part 2: System Upgrade for Contact Center
Chapter 4, “Planning Your System Upgrade” Provides an overview of the system upgrade
requirements, the targeted release sets involved in
the upgrade process, and upgrade paths and
strategies.
Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade” Discusses the general upgrade approach for the
different contact center components, upgrade
release versions, and software compatibility
considerations.
Chapter 6, “Performing Your System Upgrade” Provides information about the upgrade order and
process for all contact center components
configured in specific deployment models.
Topic DescriptionP ART 1
System Installation for Contact CenterCHAPTER
1-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
1
Planning Your System Installation
This topic provides an overview of the primary components typically deployed in a contact center
environment and the installation processes for contact center components. It also describes the types of
installations and various installation strategies.
This topic contains the following sections:
• Cisco Unified Communications System Overview
• Scope of this Installation Documentation
• System Installation Overview
• System Installation Strategies
• Interoperability and Compatibility Portals
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
Cisco Unified Communications System Overview
The Cisco Unified Communications System is a full-featured business communications system built into
an intelligent IP network. It enables voice, data, and video communications for businesses of all sizes.
The Cisco Unified Communications System is defined around commonly deployed enterprise topology
models in North America and European & Emerging Markets (EUEM).
Cisco Systems provides an integrated system to meet customer needs. The system contains a number of
communications products that are designed, developed, tested, documented, sold, and supported as one
entity. This system is built upon individual IP telephony and contact center products including, but not
limited to, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly known as Cisco Unified
CallManager), Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management Enterprise (Unified ICM), Cisco Unified
Customer Voice Portal (Unified CVP), Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise (Unified CCE), Cisco
Customer Response Solutions (CRS), and voice-capable gateways and routers.
Cisco Unified Contact Center solutions allow you to move beyond today's contact center to a customer
interaction network by creating a better customer experience, making customer-service agents more
efficient and productive, improving contact center reporting, and extending the workforce with expert.
mobile, and remote agents.
Cisco Unified Communications System testing is a process for specifying (designing) and validating the
interoperability of enterprise voice products to ensure that they work together as an integrated system.1-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
Scope of this Installation Documentation
Scope of this Installation Documentation
The installation procedures that are described in this document are intended to provide a high-level guide
to installing the Cisco Unified Communications System. This document provides installation
information from a system perspective and only for the products that are part of Cisco Unified
Communications System Release 6.1(1).
The Cisco Unified Communications contact center system should have the following basic
characteristics and requirements:
• A deployment that is based on Cisco recommendations and guidelines for network design,
architecture, and deployment models
• A new greenfield system deployment or integration with a legacy system deployment
• An installation of these systems, not an upgrade from previous software versions
Note If you have a legacy system with PBXs and other such products that need to interoperate with the Cisco
Unified Communications system, see Interoperability and Compatibility Portals for interoperability and
integration information.
Because of the variety of the installations and the complexity of the procedures that are required to
completely set up a contact center system, this document does not provide installation procedures for:
• Individual standalone components and features of these components
• Third-party coresident applications such as antivirus, security, and remote access
• Additional third-party off-board applications such as operator console, and billing and accounting
• Server replacement (hardware installation) for components
Refer to product-specific installation documents to perform the installation and configuration of the
contact center products.
• Product-specific installation documentation for all Cisco voice products is available at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/voicesw/tsd_products_support_category_home.html
• Links to component-specific installation documents for all contact center components in the Cisco
Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) are available at:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipcc611/Component_Installation_and_Configur
ation_Guides.html
Also see Related Documentation in Chapter 3, “Performing Your System Installation”.
System Installation Overview
This section includes the following sections:
• Installation Types
• Release Sets
• System Installation Roadmap
• Components Installation Overview1-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
System Installation Overview
Installation Types
The following types of deployments should be considered when installing and creating a contact center
environment:
• Greenfield deployment—A completely new installation of the Cisco Unified Communications
system, using no existing equipment.
• Legacy deployment—A new installation of the Cisco Unified Communications system combined
with existing legacy equipment, such as TDM PBXs and third-party adjuncts, which may require
long-term co-existence and integration or eventual migration to the new installation.
• Installed base (“brownfield” deployment)—An existing Cisco Unified Communications system,
which requires an upgrade/migration from a previous system release to the current system release.
For more information about upgrading an existing installation, see the system upgrade topics later
in this document.
Note When performing upgrades, be aware of backward compatibility issues such as coexistence and
interoperability with sites on previous system release versions.
Release Sets
A release set is defined as the combination of products, components, and software versions that were
tested to work together as an integrated Cisco Unified Communications system. A particular system
release is also referred to as a release set.
Legacy Deployment and Installed Base Release Sets
If you are dealing with a legacy or “brownfield” deployment, you need to be aware of interoperability
issues between legacy or existing component versions and the Cisco Unified Communications System
Release 6.1(1) component versions.
You can browse a previous system release set by product release version in a summary matrix. Use the
following links if you are unfamiliar with the version content of release sets deployed in contact center
environments:
• Cisco Unified Communications System Release Summary Matrix for Contact Center at:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/ccmtrix.htm
• IP Communications System Test Release at:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/ip_tele/gblink/ipcmtrix.htm
You can also see Interoperability and Compatibility Portals for information about support for legacy
products and third-party product interoperability with Cisco contact center products.
Greenfield Deployment Release Set
If you are dealing with a greenfield deployment, be aware that certain features, applications, and
components are part of the Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) family of products and
have been tested and verified for interoperability and compatibility.
Based on your specific network design, you may choose to install all or some of these features,
applications, and components. For a list of components that apply to a contact center environment, see
Components Installation Overview. 1-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
System Installation Overview
For information about the Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) contact center
components and their software and firmware versions, see Release Set Versions in Chapter 2, “Preparing
for Your System Installation”.
System Installation Roadmap
Table 1-1 provides an overview of the tasks that are performed in the installation of the Cisco Unified
Communications contact center system.
Components Installation Overview
The Cisco Unified Communications contact center environment consists of four primary software
components:
• Call processing infrastructure consisting of Cisco Unified Communications Manager components
• Contact center routing and agent management provided by Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise
(Unified CCE), which is based on the Unified Intelligent Contact Management (Unified ICM)
software that includes the CallRouter, Logger, and Peripheral Gateway components
• Queuing and self-service provided by either Cisco Customer Response Solutions (Cisco CRS,
implemented as Unified IP Integrated Voice Response (Unified IP IVR)) or Unified Customer Voice
Portal (Unified CVP)
Table 1-1 Overview of Installation Tasks
Task Remarks
Step 1
Perform preinstallation tasks. See Before You Begin in Chapter 2, “Preparing for
Your System Installation,” and refer to the tasks
that are described in the individual product
installation documents.
Step 2 Install and cable the hardware. —
Step 3 Install and configure the software for the
components to enable functionality between the
installed components.
See Chapter 3, “Performing Your System
Installation.” and refer to the configuration tasks
that are described in the individual product
installation and configuration documents.
Step 4 Initialize installed components and ensure that
components are functional.
• Applications at the system level (such as cold
start, elapse time)
• Each application at the node level
Step 5
Perform verification and validation testing in
between installing components to ensure that the
installed components interoperate.
—
Step 6 Integrate between Cisco and third-party or legacy
products to ensure interoperability.
See Before You Begin in Chapter 2, “Preparing for
Your System Installation,” and refer to the tasks
that are described in the individual product
installation documents.
Step 7
Perform postinstallation tasks. See Postinstallation Tasks in Chapter 3,
“Performing Your System Installation”.1-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
System Installation Overview
Note Typically, in most contact center deployments, you need to install only one of these
components for queuing and call treatment purposes. However, if you want to deploy a
parent and child model, you will need to install both components.
• Agent desktop applications consisting of the Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) or Cisco Telephony
Integration Object Server (CTI OS) desktop software
In addition to these core components, the following Cisco hardware and software products are required
for a complete contact center deployment:
• Cisco Unified IP Phones
• Cisco gateways and gatekeepers
• Cisco LAN/WAN infrastructure and components
• Cisco security components
• Network management tools
Table 1-2 provides a an overview of primary components in the Cisco Unified Communications System
Release 6.1(1) product family that can be installed and configured in contact center environments.
Note Some of the listed components might not apply to particular installations. Therefore, if there is an
application, component, or feature listed that you do not require in your environment, you need not
include them in your deployment.
Table 1-2 Primary Contact Center Components in Cisco Unified Communications System
Component/Application/Feature Purpose
Communications Infrastructure and Wireless Components
Switches and routers Cisco switches and routers provide switching and intelligent routing services
that can deliver voice, video, data and Internet access, wireless, and other
applications and provide high-speed connectivity among users, applications,
and communications systems.
Gateways and gatekeepers Cisco gateways and gatekeepers are optimized for data, wireless, and IP
Communications, and support IP-to-IP connectivity between independent
voice-over-IP (VoIP) networks and analog phone gateways using your existing
phone equipment.
Firewall and security components Security components include firewall and policy enforment services, antivirus
software, and domain and web server hardening.
Firewall Services Module (FWSM) allows any port on the device to operate as
a firewall port and integrates firewall security inside the network
infrastructure.
Policy enforcement services can protect networks from unauthorized access.
These services combine with VPN services to enable businesses to securely
extend their networks to business partners, remote sites, and mobile workers.
Wireless components Wireless components provide for secure, scalable, cost-effective WLANs with
real-time access to instant messaging, e-mail, and network resources.1-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
System Installation Overview
Cisco Unified Presence (as SIP Proxy
server)
Static routes are configured in Cisco Unified Presence to route incoming calls
to Unified CVP from the gateway, to transfer calls to the VXML gateway, and
to transfer calls to agent devices on Unified Communications Manager.
Cisco Unified Presence is added as a SIP Proxy server under Device
Management in the Unified CVP Operations Console.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager and Call Processing Devices
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Unified Communications Manager provides the call-processing functionality
to Cisco Unified Communications contact center networks.
Note Make sure that you obtain the required licenses to peform the
installation.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
services
A variety of services must be activated on the publisher, subscribers, and TFTP
servers that are essential for call processing in the Unified Communications
Manager cluster.
Cisco Unified IP Phones (SIP and SCCP) Use different methods like auto-registration and Bulk Administration Tool
(BAT) to install and add Unified IP Phones to the Unified Communications
Manager database.
Cisco IP Communicator IP Communicator is a software-based application that delivers enhanced
telephony support through the PC. It is designed to meet diverse customer
needs by serving as a supplemental telephone when traveling, a telecommuting
device, or as a primary desktop telephone.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
cluster (integration with switches, routers,
gateways, gatekeepers, JTAPI client and
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Telephony client and Unified ICM)
Install the JTAPI client on the Unified Communications Manager PGs and the
Unified Communications Manager Telephony client on the CRS system to
enable communication with the Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Configure dial plans, route points, groups, device parameters, and the JTAPI
user to set up call processing and policy rules in Unified Communications
Manager to enable interaction with switches, routers, gateways, gatekeepers
and Unified ICM.
Unity Connection Unity Connection combines voice messaging, integrated messaging, speech
recognition capabilities, and call-routing rules into an easy-to-manage system
for midsize organizations with up to 1,500 users.
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise and Contact Center Components
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise
software
Unified CCE combines Cisco’s IP telephony products and Unified ICM
software to create an IP-based contact management solution that provides
intelligent call routing, network-to-desktop computer telephony integration
(CTI), and multimedia contact management to contact center agents over an IP
network.
Note You can install Unified CCE using either the legacy installation or the
simplified installation (Cisco Unified System Contact Center (Unified
SCC) implementation).
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
(integration with Cisco Unified Contact
Center Enterprise)
Unified Communications Manager provides call processing to the Unified
CCE applications, but requires configuration changes to support Unified CCE
such as CTI and JTAPI capabilities.
Table 1-2 Primary Contact Center Components in Cisco Unified Communications System (continued)
Component/Application/Feature Purpose1-7
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
System Installation Overview
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact
Management Enterprise software
Unified ICM software provides the intelligence needed to make call-by-call
routing decisions for your call center using a combination of multichannel
contact management, intelligent routing, and network-to-desktop computer
telephony integration (CTI) capabilities.
This software includes the Rogger (CallRouter and Logger), Peripheral
Gateways (Generic, Unified CCGE, and Unified SCCG), RT
AW/Webview/HDS servers and Unified ICM Support Tools.
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact
Management Enterprise setup
Configure skill groups, device targets, labels, agents, scripts and others on
Unified ICM to provide call routing capabilities.
Cisco Security Agent (on the Unified ICM
server)
The agent provides intrusion detection and prevention for the Cisco Unified
ICM server and controls system operations by using a policy that allows or
denies specific system actions before system resources are accessed.
Computer Telephony Integration Object
Server (CTI OS)
CTI OS is a server-based integration point for third-party applications and for
deploying CTI applications that provide desktops for use by call center agents
and supervisors. Configuration and behavior information is managed at the
server, simplifying customization, updates, and maintenance.
Cisco Agent Desktop server Cisco Agent Desktop is a computer telephony integration (CTI) solution that
provides agents and supervisors call control capabilities, such as call answer,
hold, conference, and transfer, and ACD state control and so on.
CTI OS and Cisco Agent and Supervisor
Desktops
CTI OS includes the CTI OS Server, CTI OS Agent/Supervisor Desktop,
CTI OS Toolkit, and Client Interface Library (CIL).
Cisco Agent/Supervisor Desktop includes the Desktop Administrator, Agent
Desktop, and Supervisor Desktop.
The desktop applications provide productivity tools for agents and supervisors.
The desktop allows supervisors to view agent states and call information, to
send text messages to agents, to record conversations, and to provide advanced
monitoring functions. You can select which application to deploy in the
Unified CCE system.
Cisco Customer Response Solutions system Cisco CRS (Unified IP IVR) provides IP-based Interactive Voice Response
(IVR) and queueing capabilities for the Unified CCE system.
Note Make sure you obtain the required licenses to perform the installation.
Cisco Customer Response Solutions system
setup
Configure media dialog groups, Unified Communications Manager Telephony
connection, Unified ICM connection port, Voice Response Unit (VRU) scripts,
applications, prompts and others on the CRS system to provide call routing
capabilities.
Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal system Unified CVP provides a call-management and call-treatment solution with a
self-service IVR option. Automated speech recognition (ASR) and
text-to-speech (TTS) capabilities enable callers to obtain personalized
information and conduct business without interacting with a live agent.
Note Make sure you obtain the required licenses to perform the installation.
Cisco Security Agent (on the Unified CVP
and Cisco CRS systems)
The agent provides intrusion detection and prevention for the servers and
controls system operations by using a policy that allows or denies specific
system actions before system resources are accessed.
Table 1-2 Primary Contact Center Components in Cisco Unified Communications System (continued)
Component/Application/Feature Purpose1-8
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
System Installation Strategies
System Installation Strategies
This section discusses the installation strategies for contact center components in the release set being
deployed. Details of individual components installations are not described unless additional information
or clarification is required.
Installation of new networks in Cisco Unified Communications contact center environments (using new
hardware) is supported via a flash-cut or a shrink-and-grow approach.
Single-Stage Installation Using New Hardware (for Greenfield Deployments)
A completely new network is built using the components and software versions in the current Cisco
Unified Communications System release set. The new system is operational once it is turned on and the
required software is installed and initial configuration is completed.
Single-Stage Installation Using New Hardware (for Legacy Deployments)
A new network using the components and software versions in the current Cisco Unified
Communications System release set is built alongside the legacy network. The new network is staged
and configured to support the production environment.
In this strategy, you can implement the release versions on the new hardware and migrate all users from
the existing legacy network to the new network in a single installation window using a flash-cut
installation process.
Because interoperability is not required with the legacy system, components of the legacy system need
not be upgraded and can remain at their original release versions. After all users have been moved to the
newly installed system, the legacy system is decommissioned.
Cisco Unified CVP (integration with Cisco
Unified Presence)
Cisco Unified Presence is added as a SIP Proxy Server under Device
Management in the Unified CVP Operations Console. Static routes are
configured in Cisco Unified Presence to route incoming calls to Unified CVP
from the gateway, to transfer calls to the VXML gateway, and to transfer calls
to agent devices on Unified Communications Manager.
Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer Unified OUTD provides outbound dialing functionality that can be “blended”
with the existing inbound capabilities of Unified ICM software. Related
components that require installing and configuring include the Unified
Outbound Campaign Manager and Media Routing Peripheral Gateway
(MRPG).
Supervisors and agents setup This enables Unified Communications Manager, Unified ICM and gateways to
route calls to the different types of supervisors and agents within and outside
the contact center environment such as CAD, CTI OS, Remote Agents and
Cisco Unified Mobile Agents.
Cisco Unified Operations Manager Unified Operations Manager provides comprehensive monitoring and
diagnostics for the entire system. It performs automatic discovery of the entire
system and provides contextual diagnostics for rapid troubleshooting.
Table 1-2 Primary Contact Center Components in Cisco Unified Communications System (continued)
Component/Application/Feature Purpose1-9
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
Interoperability and Compatibility Portals
Multistage Installation using New Hardware (for Legacy Deployments)
A new network using the components and software versions in the current Cisco Unified
Communications System release set is built alongside the legacy network. The new network is staged
and configured to support the production environment.
This strategy uses either a flash-cut or shrink-and-grow installation process or a combination of both to:
• Deploy all the applications in one installation window (flash-cut) or in several installation windows
(shrink-and-grow).
• Migrate all the users in one installation window (flash-cut) or in multiple installation windows
(shrink-and-grow).
After all users have been moved to the newly installed system, the legacy system is decommissioned.
Multisite Phased Installation
For large enterprises with many sites, you can install one site at a time in multiple phases. Depending on
whether it is a greenfield or legacy deployment, within each site, you can either employ the single-stage
or multistage installation strategies described in this section.
Interoperability and Compatibility Portals
For information about support for legacy products and third-party product interoperability with Cisco
Unified Communications contact center products, see the Cisco Interoperability Portal at:
www.cisco.com/go/interoperability
For compatibility and interoperability information about Unified Communications Manager, Unified
Contact Center Enterprise, CRS and other Cisco Unified Communications contact center products, see
the following sites:
• Cisco Unified Communications Compatibility Tool:
http://tools.cisco.com/ITDIT/vtgsca
• IPCC Enterprise Software Compatibility Guide:
http://cisco.com/en/US/docs/voice_ip_comm/cust_contact/contact_center/ipcc_enterprise/ipccente
rprise7_2/design/guide/lPCC_Compatibility_MATRIX_6_6_07.pdf
• Cisco Response Solutions (CRS) Software and Hardware Compatibility Guide:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/sw_ap_to/crscomtx.pdf
• Cisco Computer Telephony Integration Option: CTI Compatibility Matrix:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/custcosw/ps14/prod_technical_reference_list.html
• Cisco Unified Communications System Release Summary Matrix for Contact Center:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/ccmtrix.htm
• IP Communications System Test Release Matrix:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/ip_tele/gblink/ipcmtrix.htm1-10
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 1 Planning Your System Installation
Interoperability and Compatibility PortalsCHAPTER
2-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-xxxxxx-01
2
Preparing for Your System Installation
This topic provides information that you should review before the actual installation process such as the
general installation approach, release set software and firmware versions of the contact center
components being installed, and dependencies impacting system installation.
This topic contains the following sections:
• Before You Begin
• System Installation Approach
• Release Set Versions
• System Installation Dependencies
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
Before You Begin
Before you install and configure the Cisco Unified Communications contact center family of products,
make sure that you have performed the required planning, design and implementation activities that are
part of the Cisco Systems product deployment and lifecycle model.
Note See the Cisco Unified Communications System Technical Information Site at
http://www.cisco.com/go/unified-techinfo for comprehensive system-level deployment and lifecycle
model information.
This section lists some, but not all, of the required planning, design and implementation activities:
Prepare and Plan Phase
• Review preinstallation planning guidelines from Steps to Success at:
http://www.cisco.com/web/partners/support/steps-to-success/index.html
• Assess your business and technical requirements such as call flows, capacity and critical features,
and incumbent dependencies.
• Consider integration for legacy and third-party products (see System Installation Overview in
Chapter 1, “Planning Your System Installation”).2-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-xxxxxx-01
Chapter 2 Preparing for Your System Installation
Before You Begin
• Assess system passwords requirements and create a password synchronization and maintenance
strategy.
• Assess your services and support strategy for training and lifecycle support.
Design Phase
• Develop a high-level and low-level design including product and component selections appropriate
for your needs.
• Use the recommendations of the Cisco Solution Reference Network Design (SRND) documents at:
http://www.cisco.com/go/srnd
• Review system description, architecture, and testing information for contact center systems at:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipcc611/index.html
Note The results derived from conducting the tasks in the prepare, plan, and design phases indicate which
Cisco Unified Communications System components apply to your business requirements and should be
part of your overall deployment.
Implement Phase
• Confirm the design and special feature considerations developed during the design phase.
• Develop an implementation plan and a migration or integration strategy.
Note The implementation plan derived from the implement phase should drive the staging, phases
and deadlines of the system installation.
• Review preinstallation and planning documents such as site surveys, equipment lists, and
product-specific documents.
• Conduct hardware installation and verification tasks at each site such as:
– Catalog and inventory the equipment.
– Install equipment in data racks.
– Complete cabling and other physical connectivity tasks.
– Verify all units power up correctly.
– Capture rack layout, cabling, port-specific details, and so on.
• Conduct software installation and verification tasks at each site such as:
– Check that all the required installation discs are available for each system component being
installed.
– Check that all the required installation discs are available for software applications, including
third-party applications.
– Access and download the license files required to install and operate the appropriate software
at: http://www.cisco.com/go/license2-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-xxxxxx-01
Chapter 2 Preparing for Your System Installation
System Installation Approach
System Installation Approach
After you perform preinstallation tasks, install each Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly
known as Cisco Unified CallManager) cluster and its associated contact center components at one time,
before installing the next cluster.
The installation sequence of the contact center components should also be dictated by the following
considerations:
• The relative importance of the service that these components provide. For example, basic phone
service is considered to be of greater importance than supplementary services or voice messaging
services.
• Integration and configuration of the system components to ensure interoperability.
Table 2-1 provides the general approach to installing a contact center environment.
Release Set Versions
This section provides the software versions of the Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)
contact center components. It contains the following sections:
• Software Version Matrix
• System Installation Dependencies
Table 2-1 System Installation General Sequence
Procedure Remarks
Step 1 Install and configure network infrastructure such
as switches and routers, wireless, and security
components.
These components should be installed first to
ensure that the infrastructure is able to support the
services that the Cisco Unified Communications
System components required.
Step 2 Install the operating system on system servers and
install and configure directory and network
services.
These services include LDAP, DNS, NTP, and
DHCP servers.
Step 3 Install call processing components such as Unified
Communications Manager clusters.
Make sure that you complete all initial setup and
configuration procedures that are required.
Step 4 Install and configure the contact center
components based on your requirements and the
interdependencies of components.
See System Installation Dependencies for
information.
Step 5 Install and configure gateways, gatekeepers,
network management tools, and other third-party
services and applications.
—
Step 6
Complete postinstallation tasks. These tasks include system validation and
verification.2-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-xxxxxx-01
Chapter 2 Preparing for Your System Installation
Release Set Versions
Software Version Matrix
Table 2 lists the release versions of the Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)
components in the contact center test environment.
Table 2 Software Versions for Contact Center Components in Cisco Unified Communications System
Release 6.1(1)
Category Component Release Version
Call Control Cisco Unified Communications Manager1
6.1(1a)
Cisco Unified Presence1
6.0(2)
Contact Center Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management and Cisco
Unified Contact Center Enterprise
7.2(2)
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management and Cisco
Unified Contact Center Enterprise Operating System
Win2003 SP2/
Win2003 R2 SP2
Cisco Unified ICM Support Tools (Server and Agent) 2.2(1)
Cisco Customer Response Solutions (Unified IP IVR) 5.0(2)
Cisco Customer Response Solutions (Unified IP IVR)
Operating System
2003.1.2a SR5
Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal 4.0(2)2
Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Operating System Win2003 SP2/
Win2003 R2 SP2
Voice Mail and Unified Messaging Cisco Unity Connection 2.0
End Points and Clients Cisco IP Communicator 2.1(1)
Cisco Unified IP Phones (7921 (Wireless), 7940, 7940G,
7960, 7960G, 7962, 7970, and 7970G)
Bundled with Unified
Communications
Manager
Network Management Cisco Unified Operations Manager 2.0.2
Security Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Switch Firewall Services Module
(FWSM)
3.2(2)
Cisco Adaptive Security Appliance (ASA) 5540 Services 8.0(3)
CiscoWorks Management Center for Cisco Security Agents 5.0.0.216
Cisco Security Agent for Unified Communications Manager Bundled with Unified
Communications
Manager
Cisco Security Agent for Customer Response Solutions 5.0.0.217-3.0.6
Cisco Security Agent for Unified Intelligent Contact
Management
5.0.0.210-3.0.1
Cisco Security Agent for Unified Customer Voice Portal 5.2.0.203-2.2.12-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-xxxxxx-01
Chapter 2 Preparing for Your System Installation
Release Set Versions
Communications Infrastructure Cisco 3725, 3745 (Unified CVP VXML, voice/data, H.323,
SIP, and MGCP gateways)
12.4(15)T3
Cisco 3825, 3845 (Unified CVP VXML, voice/data, H.323,
SIP, and MGCP gateways)
12.4(15)T3
Cisco AS5400HPX, AS5400XM (Unified CVP VXML,
voice, H.323, and PSTN gateways)
12.4(15)T3
Cisco AS5850 (PSTN and voice gateway) 12.4(15)T3
Cisco 3745 (gatekeeper) 12.4(15)T3
RSVP Agent (on 37xx and 38xx platforms) 12.4(15)T3
Cisco 7206 (core/WAN router) 12.4(15)T3
Cisco 871 router 12.3(8)Y12
Cisco Catalyst 3750 (access switch) 12.2(25)SEE2
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (core switch, Supervisor 2) CatOS 8.5(8)
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (MSFC, Supervisor 2) 12.2(18)SXF8
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (Supervisor 720) 12.2(18)SXF8
Cisco CSS 11501 Content Services Switch WebNs 7.50.3.3
Cisco Communication Media Module (CMM) 12.4(15)T3
Wireless Cisco Aironet Access Point 1240AG 12.3-8.JA2
Third-Party Products McAfee Antivirus Enterprise 8.0.0 Patch
Version: 11
1. For important information on servers on which the component software is running, see System Release Notes for Contact Center: Cisco Uniifed
Communications System Release 6.1(1) at: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/uc611/relnotes/rnipc611.htm.
2. For important information on engineering specials associated with Unified CVP Release 4.0(2), see System Release Notes for Contact Center: Cisco
Uniifed Communications System Release 6.1(1) at: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/uc611/relnotes/rnipc611.htm.
Table 2 Software Versions for Contact Center Components in Cisco Unified Communications System
Release 6.1(1) (continued)
Category Component Release Version2-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-xxxxxx-01
Chapter 2 Preparing for Your System Installation
System Installation Dependencies
System Installation Dependencies
The components within each release set are compatible with each other and will interoperate correctly.
As you install individual components of the integrated system, the overall system may not be operational
until all components have been installed or some initial configuration or setup is completed to ensure
that the already installed components will interoperate with the newly installed component.CHAPTER
3-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
3
Performing Your System Installation
This topic provides guidance for the installation order of components for a Cisco Unified
Communications System Release 6.1(1) contact center deployment. This information is to be used with
the information from the planning and design phases as input to the implementation plan. The
implementation plan drives the staging, phases and deadlines of the system installation.
This document does not describe installation procedures for individual components. This information is
included in the installation documents for the components. See Related Documentation for references to
these documents.
This topic contains the following sections:
• Deployment Models
• Installing Components
• Postinstallation Tasks
• Related Documentation
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
Deployment Models
This section describes the general order of installation for each Cisco Unified Communications System
deployment model. Because each model can include different components, compare these deployments
to your deployment to best understand the installation process that is applicable in your environment.
The following sections list the installation sequence of components in the various deployment models in
the Cisco Unified Communications contact center test environment:
• Single-Site Model
• Multisite Centralized Model
• Multisite Distributed Model
• Clustering over the WAN Model3-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Deployment Models
Detailed information about these contact center deployment models at different sites is available at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipcc611/Review_Tested_Deployment_Models.html
and in the following documents:
• System Description: Cisco Unified Communications Release 6.1(1) at:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/uc611/sysdesc/index.htm
• Solution Reference Network Design (SRND) for Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise,
Releases 7.x at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/custcosw/ps1844/products_implementation_design_gui
de_book09186a008057a473.html
After you determine the general installation sequence, use one of the installation strategies that is
described in Installing Components to install your components.
Single-Site Model
A single-site deployment refers to any scenario where all voice gateways, agents, desktops, phones, and
call processing servers (Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly known as Unified
CallManager), Unified ICM/Unified CCE, and Unified IP IVR or Cisco Unified CVP) are located at the
same site and have no WAN connectivity between any Unified CCE software modules.
In the single-site model, install the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components such as:
– Core and access switches and routers
– Cisco Unified Presence (as a SIP Proxy Server for Unified CVP implementation)
– Security components
– Wireless Access Point(s)
2. Directory and network service components such as:
– Domain Controllers (including Active Directory)
– LDAP Directory
– NTP Server
– DHCP Server
– DNS Server
– TFTP Server
3. Call processing components such as:
– Cisco Unified Communications Manager (Cisco Unified IP Phones are installed at the same
time)
– Cisco IP Communicator
4. Messaging components such as:
– Cisco Unity Connection
– Voice Recognition Server (optional)
5. Media resources such as:
– Conference bridges
– Transcoders 3-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Deployment Models
– Music-On-Hold servers
– Media termination points
– RSVP Agents
6. Contact center components such as:
– Cisco Unified ICM system (CallRouter, Logger, Peripheral Gateway, CTI OS and Cisco Agent
Desktop (CAD) servers)
– Real-time Administration Workstation (at least one)
– Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
– CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
– Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
– VoIP Monitor
– Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server or
CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
7. Voice and data gateways and gatekeepers
8. Network management tools (such as Cisco Unified Operations Manager)
9. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers (such as Cisco Security Agent, JTAPI software)
10. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers (such as antivirus, backup agent, management agent
(SNMP))
Note For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be
installed on a separate MCS server.
11. Cisco and third-party adjunct applications or endpoints on other servers
Multisite Centralized Model
A multi-site deployment with centralized call processing refers to any scenario where call processing
servers (Unified Communications Manager, Unified ICM, and Unified IP IVR or Unified CVP) are
located at the same site, while any combination of voice gateways, agents, desktops, and phones are
located remotely across a WAN link or centrally.
In the multisite centralized model, install the central site first and then install the remote sites.
Central Site
In the central site, install the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components such as:
– Core and access switches and routers
– IOS Gatekeepers
– Cisco Unified Presence (as a SIP Proxy Server for Unified CVP implementation)
– Security components
– Wireless Access Point(s)3-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Deployment Models
2. Directory and network service components such as:
– Domain Controllers (including Active Directory)
– LDAP Directory
– NTP Server
– DHCP Server
– DNS Server
– TFTP Server
3. Call processing components such as:
– Cisco Unified Communications Manager (Cisco Unified IP Phones are installed at the same
time)
– Cisco IP Communicator
4. Messaging components such as:
– Cisco Unity Connection
5. Media resources such as:
– Conference bridges
– Transcoders
– Music-On-Hold servers
– Media termination points
– RSVP Agents
6. Contact center components such as:
– Cisco Unified ICM components (CallRouter, Logger and Peripheral Gateway)
– Real-time Administration Workstation (at least one)
– Cisco Unified System Contact Center Gateway (Unified SCCG) and Cisco Unified Contact
Center Gateway Enterprise (Unified CCGE)
– CTI OS and Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) servers
– Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
– CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
– Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
– VoIP Monitor
– Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server or
CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
7. Voice and data gateways and gatekeepers
8. Network management tools (such as Cisco Unified Operations Manager)
9. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers (such as Cisco Security Agents, JTAPI software)
10. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers (such as antivirus, backup agent, management agent
(SNMP))
Note For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be
installed on a separate MCS server.3-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Deployment Models
11. Cisco and third-party adjunct applications or endpoints on other servers
Remote Site
For the remote site(s), install the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components such as:
– Core and access switches and routers
– Voice and data gateways
– Security components
– Wireless Access Point(s)
2. Cisco Unified IP Phones
3. CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
4. Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
Multisite Distributed Model
In this model, each site has its own Unified Communications Manager cluster, treatment and queue
points, Peripheral Gateways, and CTI Server. However, as with the centralized call processing model,
sites could be deployed with or without local voice gateways. Some deployments may also contain a
combination of distributed voice gateways (possibly for locally dialed calls) and centralized voice
gateways (possibly for toll-free calls) as well as centralized or distributed treatment and queue points.
The multisite distributed model includes several Unified CCE and Unified Communications Manager
cluster sites interconnected by ICT or H.323 trunks.
Install the components in each cluster site and any small remote sites as listed in the Multisite
Centralized Model section.
Note The installation of each cluster site should be treated as a separate stage in the overall system installation.
Clustering over the WAN Model
In the Clustering over the WAN (CoW) model, a single Unified Communications Manager cluster with
its subscriber servers and Unified CCE components are split across multiple sites connected via a
QoS-enabled WAN. This model provides the redundancy of the distributed model with the simplicity of
administering a single Unified Communications Manager cluster and Unified CCE installation.
Install the central sites first where CoW is implemented and then install any remote sites as listed in the
Multisite Centralized Model section.
Note Install clustered components in the same installation period and stage at each of the central sites.3-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Installing Components
Installing Components
After you review the general install sequence for your specific deployment model, install your
components based on the following installation strategies:
• Single-Stage Installation—Recommended for small single-site and multisite deployments.
• Multistage System Installation—Recommended for medium and large single-site and medium
multisite deployments.
• Multisite Phased installation—To install large, multisite contact center deployments to the Cisco
Unified Communications release set using the multisite phased installation strategy, you can use
either the single-stage or multistage system installation information listed in this section.
See Chapter 1, “Planning Your System Installation” for additional information about the above
installation strategies and Chapter 2, “Preparing for Your System Installation” for the software release
versions of the components in the release set being installed.
Note After you install the system software and applications, you may also need to install client software such
as Cisco IP Communicator, CTI OS and CAD desktop software, and others, on the client desktops.
To install each component, see the product-specific installation document for detailed information. See
Related Documentation for a list of this documentation.
Single-Stage Installation
The single-stage installation process is recommended for small single-site and multisite installations and
can be performed in a single installation window.
Table 3-1 lists the recommended order in which to install components. See Chapter 2, “Preparing for
Your System Installation” for the software release versions of the components in the release set being
installed.
Table 3-1 Single-stage Installation Order for Contact Center Components
Order Components Being Installed
1 Switches and routers
2 Security components
3 Wireless components
4 Directory and network services
5 Call processing components
6 Media resources
7 Messaging components
8 Contact center routing components
9 Agent management components
10 Agent desktop client software
11 Queuing and self-service components1
12 Gatekeepers and voice and data gateways 3-7
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Installing Components
Multistage System Installation
A multistage system installation is the recommended approach for medium and large single-site and
medium multisite installations. In this installation process, components are grouped together for
installing in several stages or installation windows. Within each installation window, there is a
recommended order for installing each component.
The grouping of the components into the stages may vary depending on the size of the networks being
installed. For smaller networks, several separate installation windows may be collapsed into a single
installation window. Additional stages may be necessary for larger sites.
After each installation window, we recommend that you verify that the operation of all basic and critical
call types remains unaffected before you initiate the next installation stage listed in the table. We also
recommend that you maintain a list to track the components that have been installed and the ones yet to
be installed.
Table 3-2 lists the recommended order in which to install components in stages and the sequence within
each stage. See Chapter 2, “Preparing for Your System Installation” for the software release versions of
the components in the release set.
13 Network management components
14 Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers
15 Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers2
16 Cisco and third-party applications on other servers
1. In most deployments, you need to install only one of these queuing and call treatment components. However, if you want to
deploy a parent and child model, you should install both components.
2. For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be installed on a separate MCS
server.
Table 3-1 Single-stage Installation Order for Contact Center Components (continued)
Order Components Being Installed (continued)
Table 3-2 Multistage System Installation Order for Contact Center Components
Stage Component Groupings Installation Order of Components in Each Stage
1 Switches and Routers 1. Core Switches
2. Access Switches
2 Security components 1. Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Switch Firewall Services
Module (FWSM)
2. Cisco Adaptive Security Appliance (ASA) 5540
Services
3 Wireless components 3. Cisco Aironet Access Point 1240AG
4 Directory and network services 1. Domain Controllers (including Active Directory)
2. LDAP Directory
3. NTP Server
4. DHCP Server
5. DNS Server
6. TFTP Server 3-8
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Installing Components
5 Call processing components 1. Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster
(Cisco Unified IP Phones are installed along with the
cluster)
2. Cisco IP Communicator
6 Media resources 1. Conference bridges
2. Transcoders
3. Music-On-Hold servers
4. Media termination points
5. RSVP Agents
7 Messaging components 1. Cisco Unity Connection
8 Contact center routing components 1. Real Time AW/HDS/Webview
2. Cisco Unified ICM Progger / Rogger
3. Peripheral Gateway, Unified SCCG, Unified CCGE
9 Agent management components 1. CTI OS Server
2. CAD Server
3. Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
10 Agent desktop client software 1. CTI OS Agent/Supervisor Desktop
2. CAD Agent/Supervisor Desktop
11 Queuing and self-service components1
1. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice
Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
-or-
2. CRS (Unified IP IVR)
12 Gatekeepers and voice and data gateways 1. IOS Gateways (SIP, MGCP and H.323)
2. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal VXML Gateway
3. IOS Gatekeepers
4. Cisco Unified Presence (as SIP Proxy for Unified
CVP)
13 Network management components 1. Cisco Unified Operations Manager
14 Cisco applications coresident on MCS
servers
1. Depends on the applications being upgraded
15 Third-party on-board agents on MCS
servers2
1. Depends on the applications being upgraded
16 Cisco and third-party applications on
other servers
1. Depends on the applications being upgraded
1. In most deployments, you need to install only one of these queuing and call treatment components. However, if you want to deploy a parent and child
model, you should install both components.
2. For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be installed on a separate MCS server.
Table 3-2 Multistage System Installation Order for Contact Center Components (continued)
Stage Component Groupings Installation Order of Components in Each Stage3-9
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Postinstallation Tasks
Postinstallation Tasks
After you complete the tasks in the implement phase and install the contact center components in the
Cisco Unified Communications System release set, be aware of the following postinstallation phases and
related tasks.
Note See the Cisco Unified Communications System Technical Information Site at
http://www.cisco.com/go/unified-techinfo for comprehensive system-level deployment and lifecycle
model information.
Operate Phase
Ensure that the newly-installed contact center system is fully operational by performing tasks that
include the following:
• Manage the newly installed network by conducting:
– Fault and performance management at the platform level—Use the Real-Time Monitoring Tool
(RTMT), which is a client application, to monitor CPU, memory, disk space, processes, and
critical services.
– Network management at the system level—Use Unified Operations Manager to perform
SNMP/HTTP/syslog monitoring, track device and inventory status, and monitor logical
relationships and physical connectivity in the network.
• Conduct Day 1 operations (cutover to customer) tasks such as:
– Train administrators to support end-users to use the newly installed contact center system.
– Provide documentation including as-builts, equipment inventory lists, topology diagrams, and
unique design or feature considerations.
– Explain the engagement process with Technical Assistance Center (TAC) support and the tasks
to perform before contacting TAC.
• Conduct Day 2 operations (post-cutover) tasks such as:
– Enforce security with the appropriate anti-virus security software, where applicable.
– Provision for system password synchronization and maintenance.
– Implement data backup and restore. For more information, see Backing up and Restoring
Components at:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipcc611/Backing_Up_and_Restoring_Com
ponents.html
– Plan for release set management and system and security patches updates.
Optimize Phase
During this phase, perform system optimization tasks such as:
• Tune and resize the network for better performance
• Perform configuration cleanup procedures such as deleting user IDs that are no longer in use.
• Set trace logs and reporting levels to ensure optimal performance.3-10
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Related Documentation
Related Documentation
The following sections list compatibility guides and installation documentation for Cisco Unified
Communications System components:
• Compatibility Guides
• Component Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
For information about support for legacy products and third-party product interoperability with Cisco
Unified Communications contact center products, see the Cisco Interoperability Portal at:
www.cisco.com/go/interoperability
Compatibility Guides
For compatibility and interoperability information about Unified Communications Manager, Unified
Contact Center Enterprise, CRS and other Cisco Unified Communications contact center products, see
the following sites:
• Cisco Unified Communications Compatibility Tool:
http://tools.cisco.com/ITDIT/vtgsca
• IPCC Enterprise Software Compatibility Guide:
http://www.cisco.com/application/pdf/en/us/guest/products/ps1844/c1609/ccmigration_09186a008
031a0a7.pdf
• Cisco Response Solutions (CRS) Software and Hardware Compatibility Guide:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/sw_ap_to/crscomtx.pdf
• Cisco Computer Telephony Integration Option: CTI Compatibility Matrix:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/custcosw/ps14/prod_technical_reference_list.html
Component Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
Table 3-3 provides a listing of contact center components and URLs for related component release notes
and installation and upgrade documents.
Table 3-3 Component-Specific Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
Components Release Notes Installation and Upgrade Documents
Cisco Unified Communications
Manager
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/voicesw/ps556/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/voicesw/ps556/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact
Management
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1001/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1001/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
Cisco Unified Contact Center
Enterprise
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1844/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1844/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR) http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1846/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1846/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html3-11
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Related Documentation
Cisco Customer Voice Portal http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1006/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1006/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1001/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps524/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Telephony Integration Object
Server (CTI OS)
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps14/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps14/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps427/prod_release_notes_l
ist.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps427/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Unity Connection http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6509/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6509/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco IP Communicator http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/voicesw/ps5475/prod_release_notes_l
ist.html
—
Cisco Unified Operations Manager http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6535/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6535/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco Unified Presence http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6837/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6837/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco Series 800 Routers http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps380/prod_release_notes_list
.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps380/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco Series 7200 Routers http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps341/prod_release_notes_list
.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps341/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco Catalyst 3600 Series
MultiService Platforms
— http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps274/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco AS5400 Series Universal
Gateways
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/univgate/ps505/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/univgate/ps505/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco AS5850 Series Universal
Gateways
— http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/univgate/ps509/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco 3700 Series Voice
Gateways/Gatekeepers
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps282/prod_release_notes_list
.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps282/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Table 3-3 Component-Specific Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
Components Release Notes Installation and Upgrade Documents3-12
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 3 Performing Your System Installation
Related Documentation
Cisco 3800 Series Voice Gateways http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s5855/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s5855/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco Catalyst 3550 Series Access
Switches
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps646/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps646/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Switches http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps708/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps708/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Unified IP Phone 7900 Series http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/phones/ps379/prod_release_notes_lis
t.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps646/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Aironet Access Point 1240AG http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6521/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6521/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco IOS Software Release 12.4 T http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6441/prod_release_notes_list.html
—
Table 3-3 Component-Specific Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
Components Release Notes Installation and Upgrade DocumentsP ART 2
System Upgrade for Contact CenterCHAPTER
4-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
4
Planning Your System Upgrade
This topic provides an overview of the upgrade process for contact center components, the software
releases that are involved in the upgrade process, and the different upgrade strategies that can be used
based on the size of the customer network.
This topic contains the following sections:
• Cisco Unified Communications System Overview
• Release Sets
• Upgrade Roadmap
• Upgrade Overview
• System Upgrade Paths
• System Upgrade Strategies
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
Cisco Unified Communications System Overview
The Cisco Unified Communications System is a full-featured business communications system built into
an intelligent IP network. It enables voice, data, and video communications for businesses of all sizes.
The Cisco Unified Communications System is defined around commonly deployed enterprise topology
models in North America and European & Emerging Markets (EUEM).
Cisco Systems provides an integrated system to meet customer needs. The system contains a number of
communications products that are designed, developed, tested, documented, sold, and supported as one
entity. This system is built upon individual IP telephony and contact center products including, but not
limited, to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly known as Cisco Unified
CallManager), Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management (Unified ICM), Cisco Unified Customer
Voice Portal (Unified CVP), Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise (Unified CCE), Cisco Customer
Response Solutions (CRS), and voice-capable gateways and routers.
Cisco Unified Contact Center solutions allow you to move beyond today's contact center to a customer
interaction network by creating a better customer experience, making customer-service agents more
efficient and productive, improving contact center reporting, and extending the workforce with expert.
mobile, and remote agents.4-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
Release Sets
Cisco Unified Communications System testing is a process for specifying (designing) and validating the
interoperability of enterprise voice products to ensure that they work together as an integrated system.
Scope of this Upgrade Documentation
The upgrade process discussed for this Cisco Unified Communications System release addresses
different upgrade paths and strategies, preparation for the upgrade operation, order of operations such as
the sequence in which the contact center components should be upgraded, and other dependencies such
as backward compatibility of software.
This topic only provides information related to upgrading components that are present in the base release
set that is to be upgraded. See Release Sets for more information.
This topic does not provide installation, upgrade or backup procedures for:
• Components that are not part of the existing production network and are being newly added as a part
of the target release. This information is available in the individual component documents.
• Individual standalone components such as Unified Communications Manager, Unified CCE, and
Unified CVP. It only addresses the upgrade procedures of Cisco Unified Communications System
components from a system-level perspective.
See Table 6-3 in Chapter 6, “Performing Your System Upgrade” for a list of URLs to
component-specific release notes and installation and upgrade documents. When performing the
actual component upgrades, see the product-specific upgrade documents for detailed information.
• Third-party co-resident applications (although they can be used during the upgrade and backup
process) such as:
– Antivirus
– Security
– Server management
– Remote access
• Additional third-party off-board applications such as:
– Operator console
– VoIP recording
– Billing and accounting
• Server replacement (hardware upgrade) for components. See the documentation for the individual
components for this information.
Release Sets
A release set is defined as the combination of products, components, and software versions that were
tested to work together as an integrated Cisco Unified Communications system. A particular system
release is also referred to as a release set.
A base release or release set is defined as the starting release set that is being upgraded. A target release
or release set is defined as the ending release set to which the base release set is being upgraded.4-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
Upgrade Roadmap
The systems that are involved in the upgrade and discussed in this document include:
• Base release:
– Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.0(1)—Based on your specific environment,
this release set may be the deployed software release that is being upgraded. For detailed
information about the deployment models and topologies developed to test this release set, see
Review Tested Deployment Models for Contact Center.
• Target release:
– Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)—The new software release set that is the
goal of the upgrade process, regardless of your base release set. For detailed information about
the deployment models and topologies developed to test this release set, see Review Tested
Deployment Models for Contact Center.
For detailed information about the software versions of the components in the base and target release
sets, see Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade.”
Upgrade Roadmap
This section provides a roadmap of the high-level upgrade tasks:
Step 1 Review your hardware and software requirements. For instance, verify that the deployed hardware
configurations and operating system support the target release and are ready for an upgrade.
For a list of supported MCS servers for Unified Communications Manager 6.0, see the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Server Upgrade Program at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/voiceapp/ps378/prod_brochure0900aecd8062a4f9.html
Step 2 Perform all required hardware equipment checks. For instance, verify that the DVD ROM drive in the
server where you plan to perform the upgrade tasks is operational before you start the upgrade process.
Step 3 Upgrade the existing network components from the base release set to the target release set. For a list of
existing components, see Table 4-1.
Note The existing network should include components that are already supported by the base release
set.
Use the recommended upgrade paths defined in System Upgrade Paths and the upgrade strategies
described in System Upgrade Strategies to perform the upgrade. The upgrade paths and strategies you
select should depend on a number of factors, such as:
• Base release set currently deployed in your network
• Size of the network and number of sites
• Topology of the network
• Presence or absence of shared components among sites, for instance, a Unified ICM system that
spans multiple clusters
Step 4 Install any new components supported by the target release in the network and configure them. For a list
of new components and their installation and configuration documents. see New Components and
Features in Target Release Set.4-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
Upgrade Overview
Step 5 Remove and/or replace any components from your network that are not part of the target release or have
reached EOL (end-of-life) and/or EOS (end-of-sale). Follow proper procedures to uninstall these
components. For a list of components that should be removed/replaced, see Components Not in Target
Release Set.
Note See the EOS and EOL website for a list of recommended replacements at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/prod_end_of_life.html. For Cisco EOS and EOL policy, see the
information at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_end-of-life_policy.html.
Upgrade Overview
This section lists the components included in the base release set involved in the upgrade process, the
components that have to be newly installed for the target release set, and components that must be
uninstalled because they are not part of the target release set.
This section includes:
• Existing Components in Base Release Set
• New Components and Features in Target Release Set
• Components Not in Target Release Set
Existing Components in Base Release Set
Table 4-1 contains a listing of components that are part of the base release set that is being upgraded to
Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1),
Table 4-1 Existing Contact Center Components in Base Release Set
Component
Cisco Unified
Communications System
Release 6.0(1)
Cisco Unified Communications Manager X
Cisco Customer Response Solutions (Unified IP IVR) X
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management and Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise X
Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal X
Computer Telephony Integration Object Server (CTI OS) X
Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) X
Nuance (Scansoft) Open Speech Recognizer (OSR) X
Nuance (Scansoft) Open Speech Media Server (OSMS) X
Nuance (Scansoft) Speechify X
Cisco CSS 11501 Content Services Switch X
Cisco Unity Connection X4-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
Upgrade Overview
New Components and Features in Target Release Set
No new components were added to the Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) release
set.
Components Not in Target Release Set
No components were removed from the Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) release
set in relation to the base release set.
Note For a list of recommended replacements (if any) for components that are no longer supported or sold,
see the EOS and EOL website at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/prod_end_of_life.html. For
Cisco EOS and EOL policy, see the information at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_end-of-life_policy.html.
Cisco IP Communicator X
Cisco 3725, 3745 (Unified CVP VXML, voice/data, H.323, SIP and MGCP gateways) X
Cisco 3825, 3845 (Unified CVP VXML, voice/data, H.323, SIP and MGCP gateways) X
Cisco AS5400HPX, AS5400XM (Unified CVP VXML, voice, H.323 and PSTN gateways) X
Cisco AS5850 (PSTN and voice gateways) X
Cisco 3745 (gatekeeper) X
RSVP Agent (on 37xx and 38xx platforms) X
Cisco 7206 (core/WAN router) X
Cisco 871 router X
Cisco Catalyst 3750 (access switch) X
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (core switch, Supervisor 2) X
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (MSFC, Supervisor 2) X
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (Supervisor 720) X
Cisco Communication Media Module (CMM) X
CiscoWorks Management Center for Cisco Security Agents X
Cisco Security Agent X
Cisco Unified Operations Manager X
Cisco SCCP Unified IP Phones X
Cisco SIP Unified IP Phones X
Table 4-1 Existing Contact Center Components in Base Release Set (continued)
Component
Cisco Unified
Communications System
Release 6.0(1)4-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Paths
System Upgrade Paths
This section provides the general information required to migrate from a common starting point leading
up to the latest Cisco Unified Communications System releases. System releases include the following
types of releases:
• Major release—Marks the beginning of a major new release version. This release type typically is
based on a major release of at least one of these components: Cisco Unified Call Manager, Cisco
Unified Customer Voice Portal, Cisco Customer Response Solutions.
• Minor release—Adds features and fixes to an existing major release. This release type can consist
of revisions to existing components and new versions of components.
• Maintenance release—Contains bug fixes for one or more of the components. This release type is
based on an existing major or minor release.
Upgrading from IPC Systems Test Release Sets
If you plan to upgrade from an IPC Systems Test release set to the Cisco Unified Communications
System release set, be aware of the following possible upgrade paths.
Note You can access a complete listing of all the IPC Systems Test releases at:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/ip_tele/gblink/ipcmtrix.htm
• Major IPC System Test to Major IPC System Test. For example, System Test 3.0 to 4.0 (not
indicated in graphic).
• Major IPC System Test to Minor IPC System Test. For example, System Test 4.0 to 4.1 (indicated
by horizontal arrow in Figure 4-1).
• Minor IPC System Test to Minor IPC System Test. For example, System Test 4.1 to 4.2.
• Minor IPC Systems Test to Major Cisco Unified Communications System. For example, from
System Test 4.1 to Unified Communications 5.0.
• Minor IPC Systems Test to Minor Cisco Unified Communications System. For example, from
System Test 4.2 to Unified Communications 5.1(1).
Refer to Figure 4-1 for a visual representation of the upgrade paths.
Note The horizontal arrows represent the upgrade paths within an individual release, The vertical arrows
indicate the upgrade paths from one release to the next. 4-7
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Paths
Upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications System Release Sets
If you plan to upgrade from an Cisco Unified Communications System release set, be aware of the
following possible upgrade paths.
• Major Cisco Unified Communications System to minor Cisco Unified Communications System. For
example, Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.0(1) to Release 6.1(1).
• Major Cisco Unified Communications System or minor Cisco Unified Communications System to
Cisco Unified Communications System maintenance release. For example, Cisco Unified
Communications System Release 5.0(1) to Release 5.0(2) and Release 5.1(1) to Release 5.1(2).
• Minor Cisco Unified Communications System to major Cisco Unified Communications System. For
example, Cisco Unified Communications System Release 5.1(1) to Release 6.0(1).
• Cisco Unified Communications System maintenance release to major Cisco Unified
Communications System. For example, Cisco Unified Communications System Release 5.0(2) to
Release 6.0(1).
See Figure 4-1 for a visual representation of some of the upgrade paths.
Figure 4-1 Upgrade Paths for IPC Systems Test and Cisco Unified Communications System
Releases
Upgrade Paths to Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1)
Figure 4-1 illustrates the upgrade path available for Cisco Unified Communications System
Release 6.1(1) in contact center environments:
• Major release Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.0(1) to minor Cisco Unified
Communications System Release 6.1(1)
IPC System 4.X IPC 4.0 IPC 4.1 IPC 4.2 IPC 4.3 IPC 4.4 IPC 4.5
CUCM* Ver.
4.1(2)SR1 4.1(3)SR1 4.1(3)SR2 4.2(1)SR1 4.2(3)
UC System 5.X
UC 5.0 UC 5.0(2) UC 5.1(1) UC 5.1(2)
CUCM* Ver.
5.0(2) 5.0(4) 5.1(1) 5.1(2)
UC System 6.)0 (1
CUCM** Ver
IPC System 4.X IPC 4.0 IPC 4.1 IPC 4.2 IPC 4.3 IPC 4.4 IPC 4.5 (Win2K to 2003 Upgrade)
CUCM* Ver. 4.1(2)SR1 4.1(3)SR1 4.1(3)SR2 4.2(1)SR1 4.2(3) 4.3(1) (CUCM**)
UC System 5.X UC 5.0(1) UC 5.0(2) UC 5.1(1) UC 5.1(2)
CUCM** Ver. 5.0(2) 5.0(4) 5.1(1) 5.1(2)
UC System 6.x
UC 6.0(1) UC 6.1(1)
CUCM** Ver. 6.0(1) 6.1(1a)
186180
Legend
CUCM** = Cisco Unified Communications Manager
IPC = IP Communications System Test Releases
UC = Unified Communications System Releases
CUCM* = Cisco Unified CallManager 4-8
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
System Upgrade Strategies
This section discusses the upgrade strategies for all components in the target release deployment
scenarios. Details of individual components upgrades are not described unless additional information or
clarification is required.
The following upgrade strategies are available for use when upgrading to the target release:
• Single-stage upgrade using existing hardware (flash-cut)—All components in the network start at
the base release set and all components can be upgraded to the target release set within a single
maintenance window.
• Single-stage upgrade using new hardware (either flash-cut or shrink-and-grow)—A parallel network
should be built using new hardware and prestaged with configuration to support the existing
production network.
All users can then be moved from the existing production network to the new network in one of two
ways:
– In a single maintenance window using a flash-cut upgrade process
– In several maintenance windows using a shrink-and-grow upgrade process (where a single
maintenance window is used to implement the new release versions on the new hardware, but
multiple windows are used to migrate the users)
Note We recommend that you do not use backup and restore procedures to perform the prestaged
configuration on the parallel network. In many applications, you are required to use the same
hostname and IP address for the backup as well as the restore process. This can prevent you from
creating a truly parallel network, as two systems cannot exist on the same network with identical
hostnames and IP addresses.
The above upgrade strategies involving the single-stage upgrade approach are appropriate for small
sites (fewer than 300 seats) with a smaller number of components in the network.
• Multistage system upgrade using existing hardware (hybrid system)—The components in individual
sites can be upgraded from the base release set software to the target release set software in stages,
during separate maintenance windows.
At the completion of each intermediate stage, the network within each site exists as a hybrid system
with a mix of the following:
– Some components are operating on the base release set
– Other upgraded components are operating on the target release set
Note Hybrid system refers only to interproduct versions, not to intraproduct versions. For instance, all
Unified Communications Manager servers in the same cluster, or all servers that are part of the
same Unified ICM system, will remain at the same software version.
The multistage system upgrade approach is recommended for medium-to-large sites (ranging from
301 to 1,499 seats for medium and 1,500 to 4,999 seats for large) with a greater number of
components in the network.
• Multisite migration (via hybrid network with release set interworking)—Components are upgraded
from the base release set software to the target release set software on a site-by-site basis, during
separate maintenance windows. 4-9
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
At the completion of each maintenance window, a hybrid network exists within the multiple sites
with a mix of the following:
– Sites whose components are operating on the base release set
– Sites whose components are operating on the target release set
– Sites whose components are a hybrid system as described in Multistage System Upgrade Using
Existing Hardware (Hybrid System)
This model assumes that sites may be upgraded independently. However, with the multisite
migration strategy, you must account for distributed applications with shared components among
sites. For example, if you have deployed a distributed Unified ICM system or a
Unified Communications Manager cluster using Clustering over the WAN (CoW), then these sites
must be upgraded concurrently.
Users can be moved in stages from the existing production network to the new network operating on
the target release set software.
The multisite migration strategy is recommended for large multisite environments (more than 5,000
seats) with a large number of components in the network.
Single-Stage Upgrade Using Existing Hardware
All components in the network start at the base release set and all components are upgraded to the target
release set software within a single maintenance window. Because all components are upgraded within
a single maintenance window, interoperability is not required between the base and target release sets.
The single-stage upgrade on existing hardware approach is typically not recommended for large
customer sites and networks, because it has to be performed within a single maintenance window.
Figure 4-2 shows an example of the single maintenance window that is involved in the single-stage
upgrade on existing hardware approach.
Figure 4-2 Single-Stage Upgrade Using Existing Hardware
IP
U
3rdr
Partyart
IP
U
3rd
Party
All products upgraded
and all users migrated
in single maintenance
window
Component on version from base release set
Component on version from target release set
Before After
232391
IP
U
3rd
Party
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E4-10
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
Single-Stage Upgrade Using New Hardware
A parallel Cisco Unified Communications System network should be built using new hardware and
prestaged with configuration to support the existing production network. All users can be then moved
from the existing production network to the new network operating with the target release set software
either in a single maintenance window (using flash-cut) or in several maintenance windows (using
shrink-and-grow).
The single-stage upgrade on new hardware approach is not recommended for large customer sites and
networks for the following reasons:
• The upgrade cannot be performed within a single maintenance window.
• The expense of a complete new parallel network is significant.
Figure 4-3 shows an example of the maintenance windows that are involved in the single-stage upgrade
on new hardware approach.
Figure 4-3 Single-Stage Upgrade Using New Hardware
Parallel environment
built and products
upgraded
Users migrated in one
to N maintenance window(s);
no inter-networking with old system
Move users to new system
Component on version from base release set
Component on version from target release set
Before After
232392
IP
U
3rdr
Partyart
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E4-11
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
Multistage System Upgrade Using Existing Hardware (Hybrid System)
Individual components and/or sites can be upgraded in stages, from the base release set software to the
target release set software, during separate maintenance windows. At the completion of each
intermediate stage, the individual site exists as a hybrid system with a mix of the following:
• Some components operating on the base release set software
• Other upgraded components operating on the target release set software
The multistage system upgrade on existing hardware is the recommended approach for medium-to-large
networks. In this case, individual components within a single site and/or individual sites in a multisite
environment are progressively upgraded over the span of several days or weekends.
This type of staging is required because:
• Sufficient time may not be available (maintenance window) to take the system out of service for the
complete upgrade of all the components involved.
• You must test existing functionality following the upgrade.
• You must test new functionality following the upgrade.
You can view a staged upgrade as a series of maintenance windows separated by intermaintenance
window intervals. During each maintenance window, one or more components of the system or a subset
of the components is upgraded.
Customers typically have a maintenance window during which service disruptions are likely to have
minimal impact and affect only a limited number of users, for example, during the night or during a
weekend.
Before the staged upgrade is completed, the whole network exists in a partially upgraded state where
some components have been upgraded to the target release set software and the remaining components
are operating with the base release set software.
Backward compatibility of the components is critical during the staged upgrade, so that target release
set components are able to interoperate with the base release set components. If any component is not
backward compatible, this can potentially result in prolonged periods of service outage spanning several
maintenance windows (possibly several weeks).
Therefore, during multistage upgrades, it is mandatory to have interoperability between the base and
target release set software versions. For more information about software and backward compatibility
considerations, see Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade.”.4-12
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
Figure 4-4 shows an example of the maintenance windows that are involved in the multistage system
upgrade on existing hardware approach.
Figure 4-4 Multistage System Upgrade Using Existing Hardware (Hybrid System)
Multisite Migration (Hybrid Network)
Components are upgraded from the base release set to the target release set on a site-by-site basis during
separate maintenance windows.
At the completion of each maintenance window, a hybrid network will exist across multiple sites. Within
each site, either a single-stage or multistage system upgrade strategy can be used to upgrade that
particular site’s components from the base to the target release set.
Interworking can be expected among sites with pure base release set versions and sites with pure target
release set versions as shown in Figure 4-5. However, interworking will not be possible between these
pure sites and hybrid system sites. For more information about software and backward compatibility
considerations, see Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade.”.
Note A component that is common to multiple sites, such as a shared Unified ICM system, may impact the
interoperability itself, the order in which sites may be upgraded, or which sites must be upgraded
concurrently.
Users can be moved in stages from the existing production network to the new network operating with
the target release set software. The number of users on the existing base network will shrink while the
number on the target network will grow correspondingly.
This migration process can span several weeks and, sometime months, if necessary. During this upgrade
approach, it is essential that the two networks, existing and new, are able to communicate with each
other.
Component on version from base release set
Each stage / maintenance window upgrades some products resulting in
migrating all users to a hybrid system. Only hybrid systems as
defined here are allowed
Component on version from target release set
Before After intermediate stage(s) After final stage
232393
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E4-13
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
Figure 4-5 shows an example of the maintenance windows that are involved in the multisite migration
approach.
Figure 4-5 Multisite Migration
Site with pure base release set versions
Site with pure target release set versions
Site with hybrid system (base and target release set versions)
Inter-working between
pure 6.1(1) and pure
7.0(1) sites
Before After intermediate stage(s) After final stage
232394
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IPIP
U
3rd 3rd
Party Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
IP
U
3rd
Party
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CUCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E
MP CUCCX/E CCUCCX/E UCCX/E4-14
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 4 Planning Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Strategies
Table 4-2 provides a summary of the preceding upgrade strategies.
Table 4-2 Summary of Upgrade Strategies
Single-Stage Upgrade Multistage System Upgrade Multisite Migration
Recommended for type of
deployment
• Small single-site
• Small multisite
(fewer than 300 seats)
• Medium single-site
• Medium multisite
(301 to 1,499 seats)
• Large single-site
(1,500 to 4,999 seats)
• Large multisite
(5,000 seats and more)
Maintenance Window 1 Multiple Multiple
Interoperability between
releases at component level
Not Required Required Required
Interoperability between
releases at site level
Not Required Not Required for medium
single-site and large
single-site
Required for medium multisite
Required
User migration Complete in one stage Partial until final stage Partial until final stage
Upgrade time period One time slot, for example,
during a weekend
maintenance window
Several days to weeks Several weeks to monthsCHAPTER
5-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
5
Preparing for Your System Upgrade
This topic discusses information to be aware of before the actual upgrade process such as the general
upgrade approach for the different contact center components, upgrade release versions of components
involved in the upgrade, and release version compatibility.
This topic contains the following sections:
• System Upgrade Approach
• System Upgrade Dependencies
• Upgrade Release Versions
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
System Upgrade Approach
The general approach is to upgrade each Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly known as
Cisco Unified Communications Manager) cluster and its associated contact center components at one
time, before upgrading the next cluster.
For each cluster, upgrade the components in the Cisco Unified Communications family of contact center
components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components, including core and access switches, routers, and security components.
These components should be upgraded first to ensure that the infrastructure is able to support the
services required by Cisco Unified Communications System components.
2. Contact center components
3. Application clients including Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise (Unified CCE) Agent and
Supervisor Desktop clients, and others
4. Call processing components such as Unified Communications Manager clusters
5. Cisco voice gateways
6. Cisco gatekeepers
7. Application servers including Cisco Unified ICM Support Tool servers (Security applications are
not included)5-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Dependencies
See Chapter 6, “Performing Your System Upgrade” for detailed information about the order in which the
above components have to be upgraded.
The upgrade sequence of the contact center components should also be dictated by the following
considerations:
• The criticality of the service that these components provide. For example, basic phone service is
considered to be of greater importance than supplementary services or voice messaging services.
• Backward compatibility of the software releases of these components.
See Upgrade Release Versions for tables on each base release set, which indicates which components
need to be upgraded before or after upgrading Unified Communications Manager, or if the upgrade order
does not matter.
System Upgrade Dependencies
Components within each release set should be compatible with each other and will interoperate correctly.
For example, components in a specific base release set are compatible with each other and will
interoperate, as also the components in the target release set.
The order of operations also needs to take into account the impact of backward compatibility or
incompatibility as described later in this section, especially for multistage system and multisite
migration upgrades, where each stage (or maintenance window) only upgrades some of the components
in the release set.
However, as you upgrade individual components of the integrated system, the overall system may
operate in a state of degraded service where one or more components have been upgraded to the next
release level and may not interoperate with components that are still at the previous release level.
Components that are upgraded first should interoperate with other components that are still at the
previous release level. For example, Unified Communications Manager is upgraded before the gateways.
Therefore, Unified Communications Manager, which is now at the next release level, must interoperate
with the gateways that have not been upgraded and are still at the previous release level. For additional
compatibility information, see the release set software version tables in Upgrade Release Versions.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Upgrade and Compatibility
Considerations
Because Unified Communications Manager is upgraded early in the upgrade sequence, it has to be
compatible with other components running Cisco Unified Communications software release versions.
Upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications Manager 6.0(1) to Release 6.1(1a)
Be aware of the following constraints regarding Cisco Unified Communications Manager when
upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.0(1) to Release 6.1(1):
• For Unified Communications Manager, you must perform all software installations and upgrades
using the Software Upgrade Menu Options. Only software approved by Cisco Systems can be
uploaded and processed by the system installer.
• Before you perform an upgrade, we recommend that you back up the Unified Communications
Manager and CDR Analysis and Reporting (CAR) database to an external network directory using
the Disaster Recovery Framework. This practice will prevent any loss of data if the upgrade fails.5-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Dependencies
• If Unified Communications Manager clusters are set up in a 1:1 redundancy model, downtime
during upgrade can be kept to a minimum. You can do this by load-balancing device registrations
across the first node (primary) and backup subsequent nodes (subscribers). This way if either the
subsequent node server fails or is taken down for maintenance, only half of the devices will have to
failover to the remaining subsequent nodes, but will ensure that all devices can remain in service.
• When upgrading Unified Communications Manager clusters, the first node should always be
upgraded first. Before rebooting the first node after its upgrade, you can upgrade all the subsequent
nodes simultaneously without rebooting them.
After all the nodes in the cluster are upgraded, make sure that you do the following in the listed
order:
1. Reboot and switch versions to Unified Communications Manager 6.1(1a) on the first node and
wait until the first node is initialized and fully operational.
2. Install the upgrade license and any other licenses that are required.
3. Reboot and switch versions to Unified Communications Manager 6.1(1a). Perform this
procedure on the TFTP and Music-On-Hold (MoH) servers first.
4. Wait until the TFTP servers fully build their configuration files.
5. Reboot and switch versions to Unified Communications Manager 6.1(1a) on the backup and call
processing subsequent nodes and wait until these servers are fully initialized.
6. Complete the upgrade by rebooting and switching versions to Unified Communications
Manager 6.1(1a) on the remaining active call processing subsequent nodes in the cluster.
Note For further details about recommended upgrade procedures, see Chapter 8 of the Cisco Unified
Communications SRND based on Cisco Unified Communications Manager 6.x:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/voicesw/ps556/products_implementation_design_gu
ide_book09186a008085eb0d.html
• When you upgrade the Unified Communications Manager servers, note that the Unified IP Phone
software is also automatically upgraded to the version bundled with Unified Communications
Manager.
Cisco Unified IP Phone
When you upgrade your Unified Communications Manager servers, note that the Unified IP Phone
firmware is also automatically upgraded to the version bundled with the Unified Communications
Manager.
For more detailed information about SIP Unified IP Phones and the differences between features on the
SCCP and SIP phones, see the documentation at:
• Cisco 7900 Series IP Phones Maintain and Operate Guides:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/phones/ps379/prod_maintenance_guides_list.html
• Cisco 7900 Series IP Phones End-User Guides:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/phones/ps379/products_user_guide_list.html
• “IP Telephony Endpoints” chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications SRND based on Cisco
Unified Communications Manager 6.x:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/voicesw/ps556/products_implementation_design_guide
_book09186a008085eb0d.html5-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Dependencies
Backward Compatibility Issues
In multistage system upgrade scenarios, you may have to consider additional issues such as backward
compatibility across components.
A version of one component is backward compatible with a previous version of another component when
service functionality and behavior are maintained between the two component versions. Backward
compatibility between two components or applications may limit the order of upgrade of the components
and cause service outage during upgrades.
If two components are upgraded during separate maintenance windows, as in the multistage system or
multisite migration upgrade scenarios, the whole system exists in a partially upgraded state in the
interval between the two maintenance windows.
The service capability during the period between maintenance windows depends on backward
compatibility between the two components as discussed in this section. If the two components are not
backward compatible, then service outages occur in the interval between the two maintenance windows.
Some backward compatibility situations described in Backward Compatibility Scenarios may occur
during the upgrade process. For more information, see the component compatibility matrices listed in
Chapter 6, “Related Documentation”.
Backward Compatibility Scenarios
Both New Versions Are Backward Compatible
Both new versions of the two components are backward compatible with the previous version of the
other component,
In this case, there is no restriction in the order of upgrades relating to backward compatibility. Either
component may be upgraded first and be able to interoperate with the other component as shown in
Figure 5-1.
You can perform the upgrade for these components across multiple maintenance windows. This type of
upgrade is described in the multistage system and multisite migration upgrade approaches in Chapter 4,
“Planning Your System Upgrade.”
Figure 5-1 Both New Release Versions Are Backward Compatible
A compatible
with B
Product A vN.1
MW 1
Upgrade
A vN.1 N.2
Product B vM.1
A compatible
with B
A compatible
with B
Product A vN.1
Product B vM.1
A compatible
with B
146562
A vN.2 backward
compatible with B vM.1
B vM.2 backward
compatible with A vN.1
MW 2
Upgrade
B vN.1 M.2
MW 2
Upgrade
A vN.1 N.2
MW 1
Upgrade
B vM.1 M.25-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
System Upgrade Dependencies
Only One New Version is Backward Compatible
Only one of the new versions is backward compatible with the previous version of the other component.
In this case, the component that is backward compatible should be upgraded first to avoid a service
outage during the upgrade as shown in Figure 5-2.
You should perform the upgrade for these components across two separate maintenance windows. This
type of upgrade is described in the Multistage System and Multisite Migration upgrade approaches in
Chapter 4, “Planning Your System Upgrade.”
Figure 5-2 One New Release Version Is Backward Compatible
Neither New Version is Backward Compatible
Neither of the new versions is backward compatible with the previous version of the other component.
A service outage exists from the time the first product is upgraded until the second component has
completed its upgrade as shown in Figure 5-3.
Because neither component is backward compatible with the other, both components have to be
upgraded in the same maintenance window to avoid service outage. This upgrade is described in the
Single-Stage upgrade approach in Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade.”
Figure 5-3 Neither New Release Version is Backward Compatible
A compatible
with B
Product A vN.1
MW 1
Upgrade
A vN.1 N.2
Product B vM.1
A vN.2 backward
compatible with B vM.1
A compatible
with B
A compatible
with B
Product A vN.1
Product B vM.1
B vM.2 not compatible with
A vN.1 - service outage
A compatible
with B
146564
MW 2
Upgrade
B vN.1 M.2
MW 2
Upgrade
A vN.1 N.2
MW 1
Upgrade
B vN.1 M.2
A compatible
with B
Product A vN.1
MW 1
Upgrade
A vN.1 N.2
Product B vM.1
A compatible
with B
A compatible
with B
Product A vN.1
Product B vM.1
B vM.2 not compatible with
A vN.1 - service outage
A compatible
with B
146563
B vM.2 not compatible with
B vN.1 - service outage
MW 2
Upgrade
B vN.1 M.2
MW 2
Upgrade
A vN.1 N.2
MW 1
Upgrade
B vM.1 M.25-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
Upgrade Release Versions
Upgrade Release Versions
The tables in this section list the component release versions of the base and target release sets and
provide additional compatibility and upgrade sequence information in relation to
Unified Communications Manager 6.1(1a).
The tables have the following elements:
• Column 1—Contact center components involved in the upgrade process.
• Column 2—Release versions of contact center components in the base release set.
• Column 3—Release versions of contact center components in the target release set.
• Column 4—Whether the contact center component in the base release set is compatible with the
version of Unified Communications Manager in the target release.
• Column 5—Upgrade order for the contact center component in relation to Unified Communications
Manager, where “Any” means that the component can be upgraded either before or after upgrading
Unified Communications Manager.
Release 6.0(1) and Release 6.1(1) Software Release Sets
Table 5-1 lists the software versions for the contact center components in the Cisco Unified
Communications System Release 6.0(1) and Release 6.1(1) release sets.
Table 5-1 Contact Center Components in IP Communications System Test Release 6.0(1) and Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) Release Sets
Component Release 6.0(1)Release
Set
Release 6.1(1) Release
Set
Compatible
with Unified
Communications Manager 6.1(1a)?
Upgrade Order
(in relation to
Unified Communications
Manager)
Cisco Unified Communications Manager 6.0(1) 6.1(1a)1
Yes2
—
Cisco Unified Presence 6.0(1) 6.0(2)1
Yes Any
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management
7.2(1) 7.2(2) Yes Before
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact Management Operating System
Win2003 SP2/
Win2003 R2 SP2
Win2003 SP2/
Win2003 R2 SP2
— —
Cisco Unified ICM Support Tools (Server
and Agent)
2.1 2.2(1) Yes Upgraded with
Unified ICM
Cisco Customer Response Solutions
(Unified IP IVR)
5.0(1) SR1 5.0(2) Yes Any
Cisco Customer Response Solutions
(Unified IP IVR) Operating System
2003.1.1 SR5 2003.1.2a SR5 — —
Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal 4.0(2) 4.0(2)3
Yes Any
Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal
Operating System
Win2003 SP2/
Win2003 R2 SP2
Win2003 SP2/
Win2003 R2 SP2
— —5-7
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
Upgrade Release Versions
Cisco Unity Connection and Unity TSP 2.0 & 8.1(3) 2.0 & 8.1(3) Yes Upgrade Unity
TSP in same
maintenance
window as
Unified
Communications Manager
Upgrade Unity
Connection
after Unified
Communications Manager
Cisco IP Communicator 2.1(1) 2.1(1) Yes Any
Cisco Unified IP Phones (Both SCCP and
SIP Phones are included)
Bundled with Unified
Communications
Manager
Bundled with Unified
Communications
Manager
— —
Cisco Unified Operations Manager 2.0.1 2.0.2 Yes Any
Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Firewall
Service Module (FWSM)
3.1(5) 3.2(2) — Any
Cisco Adaptive Security Appliance
(ASA) 5540 Services
8.0 8.0(3) — Any
Cisco Security Agent Management
Center for Cisco Security Agents
5.0.0.216 5.0.0.216 — —
Cisco Security Agent for Unified Communications Manager
Bundled with Unified
Communications
Manager
Bundled with Unified
Communications
Manager
— —
Cisco Security Agent for Customer
Response Solutions
5.0.0.216 /3.0.4 5.0.0.217 /3.0.6 — —
Cisco Security Agent for Unified Intelligent Contact Management
5.0.0.210 /3.0.1 5.0.0.210 /3.0.1 — —
Cisco Security Agent for Unified
Customer Voice Portal
5.2.0.203 /2.2.1 5.2.0.203 /2.2.1 — —
Cisco 3725, 3745 (Unified CVP VXML,
voice/data, H.323, SIP, and MGCP
gateways)
12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Cisco 3825, 3845 (Unified CVP VXML,
voice/data, H.323, SIP, and MGCP
gateways)
12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Table 5-1 Contact Center Components in IP Communications System Test Release 6.0(1) and Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) Release Sets (continued)
Component Release 6.0(1)Release
Set
Release 6.1(1) Release
Set
Compatible
with Unified
Communications Manager 6.1(1a)?
Upgrade Order
(in relation to
Unified Communications
Manager) 5-8
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 5 Preparing for Your System Upgrade
Upgrade Release Versions
Cisco AS5400HPX, AS5400XM (Unified
CVP VXML, voice, H.323, and PSTN
gateways)
12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Cisco AS5850 (PSTN and voice gateway) 12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Cisco 3745 (gatekeeper) 12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
RSVP Agent (on 37xx and 38xx platforms)
12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Cisco 7206 (core/WAN router) 12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Cisco 871 router 12.3(8)Y12 12.3(8)Y12 Yes Any
Cisco Catalyst 3750 (access switch) 12.2(25)SEC2 12.2(25)SEE2 Yes Any
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (core switch,
supervisor 2)
CatOS 8.5(8) CatOS 8.5(8) Yes Any
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (MSFC, supervisor 2)
12.2(18)SXF8 12.2(18)SXF8 Yes Any
Cisco Catalyst 6506, 6509 (Supervisor
720)
12.2(18)SXF8 12.2(18)SXF8 Yes Any
Cisco CSS 11501 Content Services
Switch
WebNs 7.50.3.3 WebNs 7.50.3.3 Yes After
Cisco Catalyst Communications Media
Module (CMM)
12.4(15)T 12.4(15)T3 Yes Any
Cisco Aironet Access Point 1240AG 12.3-8.JA2 12.3-8.JA2 Yes Any
McAfee Antivirus Enterprise 8.0.0 Patch
Version: 11
Enterprise 8.0.0 Patch
Version: 11
Yes Any
1. For important information on servers on which the component software is running, see System Release Notes for Contact Center: Cisco Uniifed
Communications System Release 6.1(1) at: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/uc611/relnotes/rnipc611.htm.
2. Only applies to multisite distributed and only for H.323 Intercluster Trunk (features supported by ICT).
3. For important information on engineering specials associated with Unified CVP Release 4.0(2), see System Release Notes for Contact Center: Cisco
Uniifed Communications System Release 6.1(1) at: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/uc611/relnotes/rnipc611.htm.
Table 5-1 Contact Center Components in IP Communications System Test Release 6.0(1) and Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1) Release Sets (continued)
Component Release 6.0(1)Release
Set
Release 6.1(1) Release
Set
Compatible
with Unified
Communications Manager 6.1(1a)?
Upgrade Order
(in relation to
Unified Communications
Manager) CHAPTER
6-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
6
Performing Your System Upgrade
This topic discusses in more detail the upgrade sequence for all the contact center components
configured in specific deployment models for Cisco Unified Communications System Release 6.1(1).
Upgrade procedures for individual components are not described in this document, because they are
available in individual component upgrade documents. See the Related Documentation section at the end
of this topic for the appropriate upgrade documents and their URLs.
This topic contains the following sections:
• Deployment Models
• Upgrading Components
• Related Documentation
Note Many of the contact center component names have changed as part of Cisco Unified Communications
System releases. Only the latest product names are used in this document, even when referencing
products from previous releases.
Deployment Models
Upgrade procedures in this document are specifically tailored for each of the deployment models in the
contact center test environment, because each site includes different components.
Detailed information about these contact center deployment models at the different sites is available at:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/docs/iam/unified/ipcc611/Review_Tested_Deployment_Models.html
Listed in this section are the various deployment models tested in the Cisco Unified Communications
contact center test environment:
• Single-Site Model
• Multisite Centralized Model
• Multisite Distributed Model
• Clustering over the WAN (CoW) Model
Compare these deployments to your specific deployment to best understand the upgrade process that is
applicable in your environment. The following section provides the general upgrade sequence for the
various contact center components in the different deployment models. 6-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Deployment Models
After you determine the general upgrade sequence, depending on the base release set in your network,
use one of the upgrade strategies discussed in Upgrading Components to upgrade your components.
More detailed upgrade procedures for contact center components and Cisco Unified Communications
Manager (formerly known as Cisco Unified CallManager) clusters are discussed in Upgrading Contact
Center Test Beds.
Single-Site Model
In the single-site model, upgrade the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components including core and access switches, routers, and security components
2. Contact center components:
– Cisco Unified ICM system (CallRouter, Logger, Peripheral Gateway)
– Real-time Administration Workstation (at least one)
– CTI OS and Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) servers
– Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
– CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
– Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
– VoIP Monitor
3. Cisco Unified Communications Manager (Cisco Unified IP Phones are upgraded at the same time)
4. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
5. CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
6. Cisco Unified Operations Manager
7. Voice and data gateways
Note In a Unified CVP implementation, upgrade the voice and data gateways in the same
maintenance window as Unified CVP.
8. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers (such as Cisco Security Agent, JTAPI software)
9. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers (such as antivirus, backup agent, management agent
(SNMP))
Note For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be
installed on a separate MCS server.
10. Cisco and third-party adjunct applications or endpoints on other servers6-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Deployment Models
Multisite Centralized Model
In the multisite centralized model, upgrade the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components including core and access switches, routers, and security components
2. Contact center components:
– Cisco Unified ICM system (CallRouter, Logger, Peripheral Gateway)
– Real-time Administration Workstation (at least one)
– Cisco Unified System Contact Center Gateway (Unified SCCG), and Cisco Unified Contact
Center Gateway Enterprise (Unified CCGE)
– CTI OS and Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) servers
– Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
– Unity Connection
– CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
– Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
– VoIP Monitor
3. Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers (Cisco Unified IP Phones are upgraded at the same
time)
4. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
5. CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
6. Cisco Unified Operations Manager
7. Voice and data gateways
Note In a Unified CVP implementation, upgrade the voice and data gateways in the same
maintenance window as Unified CVP.
8. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers (such as Cisco Security Agents, JTAPI software)
9. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers (such as antivirus, backup agent, management agent
(SNMP))
Note For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be
installed on a separate MCS server.
10. Cisco and third-party adjunct applications or endpoints on other servers
Multisite Distributed Model
In the multisite distributed model, upgrade the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components including core and access switches, routers, and security components
2. Contact center components:
– Cisco Unified ICM system (CallRouter, Logger, Peripheral Gateway) 6-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Deployment Models
– Real-time Administration Workstation (at least one)
– Cisco Unified System Contact Center Gateway (Unified SCCG), and Cisco Unified Contact
Center Gateway Enterprise (Unified CCGE)
– CTI OS and Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) servers
– Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
– Unity Connection
– CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
– Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
– VoIP Monitor
3. Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers (Cisco Unified IP Phones are upgraded at the same
time)
4. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
5. CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
6. Cisco Unified Operations Manager
7. Voice and data gateways
Note In a Unified CVP implementation, upgrade the voice and data gateways in the same
maintenance window as Unified CVP.
8. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers (such as Cisco Security Agent, JTAPI software)
9. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers (such as antivirus, backup agent, management agent
(SNMP))
Note For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be
installed on a separate MCS server.
10. Cisco and third-party adjunct applications or endpoints on other servers
Clustering over the WAN (CoW) Model
In the Clustering over the WAN (CoW) model, upgrade the components in the following order:
1. Infrastructure components including core and access switches, routers, and security components
2. Contact center components:
– Cisco Unified ICM system (CallRouter, Logger, Peripheral Gateway)
– Real-time Administration Workstation (at least one)
– Cisco Unified System Contact Center Gateway (Unified SCCG), and Cisco Unified Contact
Center Gateway Enterprise (Unified CCGE)
– CTI OS and Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) servers
– Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
– Unity Connection6-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Upgrading Components
– CTI OS Agent and Supervisor Desktop
– Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) and Cisco Supervisor Desktop (CSD)
– VoIP Monitor
3. Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers (Cisco Unified IP Phones are upgraded at the same
time)
4. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
5. CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
6. Cisco Unified Operations Manager
7. Voice and data gateways
Note In a Unified CVP implementation, upgrade the voice and data gateways in the same
maintenance window as Unified CVP.
8. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers (such as Cisco Security Agent, JTAPI software)
9. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers (such as antivirus, backup agent, management agent
(SNMP))
Note For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be
installed on a separate MCS server.
10. Cisco and third-party adjunct applications or endpoints on other servers
Upgrading Components
Once you have reviewed the general upgrade sequence for your specific deployment model, perform
your upgrades based on the following upgrade strategies:
• Single-Stage Upgrade—Recommended for small single-site and multisite installations.
• Multistage System Upgrade—Recommended for medium and large single-site and medium
multisite installations.
• Multisite Migration—To upgrade large, multisite contact center installations to the Cisco Unified
Communications release set using the multisite migration upgrade strategy, you can use either the
single-stage or multistage system upgrade procedures listed in this section.
See Chapter 4, “Planning Your System Upgrade” for detailed information about the above upgrade
strategies and Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade” for the software release versions of the
components involved in the upgrade. For more information about the number of seats in these various
types of sites, see Table 4-2 in Chapter 4, “Planning Your System Upgrade”.
The upgrade paths available for upgrading contact center components are defined in System Upgrade
Paths in Chapter 4, “Planning Your System Upgrade”.
See Table 6-3 in Related Documentation for a list of URLs to component-specific release notes and
installation and upgrade documents. When performing the upgrade of each component, see the
product-specific upgrade document for detailed information.6-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Upgrading Components
Single-Stage Upgrade
The single-stage upgrade process is recommended for small single-site and multisite installations and
can be performed in a single maintenance window. This enables you to upgrade all the components in a
brief period of time with no loss of functionality.
See Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade” for the software release versions of the
components involved in the upgrade. Based on your environment and the base release set deployed in
your network, upgrade the components in the order listed in Table 6-1.
Multistage System Upgrade
A multistage system upgrade is the recommended approach for medium and large single-site and
medium multisite installations. In this upgrade process, components are grouped together for upgrading
in several stages or maintenance windows. Within each maintenance window, there is a recommended
order for upgrading each component.
Table 6-1 Single-Stage Upgrade Order for Contact Center Components
Upgrade Order Components Being Upgraded
1 Core switch
2 Access switch
3 Real Time AW/HDS/Webview
4 Cisco Unified ICM Rogger/Progger
5 Peripheral Gateway, Unified SCCG, Unified CCGE
6 CTI OS Server
7 CAD Server
8 Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
9 Cisco Unity Connection
10 CTI OS Agent & Supervisor Desktop
11 CAD Agent & Supervisor Desktop
12 Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster (Cisco Unified IP Phones and are upgraded with the
cluster)
13 Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
14 CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR)
15 Cisco Unified Operations Manager
16 Voice and data gateways1
1. In a Unified CVP implementation, upgrade the voice and data gateways in the same maintenance window as Unified CVP.
17 Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers
18 Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers2
2. For Unified Communications Manager Release 6.1(1a), third-party on-board agents must be installed on a separate MCS server.
19 Cisco and third-party applications on other servers6-7
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Upgrading Components
The grouping of the components into the stages may vary depending on the size of the networks being
upgraded. For smaller networks, several separate maintenance windows may be collapsed into a single
maintenance window. Additional stages may be necessary for larger sites.
After each maintenance window, we recommend that you verify that the operation of all basic and
critical call types remains unaffected before you initiate the next upgrade stage listed in the table. We
also recommend that you maintain a list to track the components that have been upgraded and the ones
yet to be upgraded.
See Chapter 5, “Preparing for Your System Upgrade” for the software release versions of the
components involved in the upgrade. Based on your environment and the base release set deployed in
your network, upgrade the components in the stages and in the sequence within each stage as listed in
Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Multistage System Upgrade Order for Contact Center Components
Stage Upgrade Order for Contact Center Components within Stages
1 1. Core Switch
2. Access Switch
2 1. Real Time AW/HDS/Webview
2. Cisco Unified ICM Rogger
3 1. Peripheral Gateway, Unified SCCG, Unified CCGE
2. CTI OS Server
3. CAD Server
4. Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer
5. Cisco Unity Connection
4 1. CTI OS Agent/Supervisor Desktop
2. CAD Agent/Supervisor Desktop
5 1. Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster (Cisco Unified IP Phones are upgraded along with
cluster)
6 1. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal Voice Browser/Application Server/HTTP Media Server
7 1. CRS (Unified IP IVR)
8 1. Cisco Unified Operations Manager
9 1. IOS Gateways (MGCP)
2. IOS Gateways (H.323)
3. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal VXML Gateways
4. Cisco Gatekeepers
10 1. Cisco applications coresident on MCS servers
11 1. Third-party on-board agents on MCS servers
12 1. Cisco and third-party applications on other servers6-8
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Related Documentation
Upgrading Contact Center Test Beds
The contact center test sites are set up as three separate test beds:
• Test Bed 1—Cisco Unified Communications Manager Call Flows— Unified IP IVR test bed with
Unified Communications Manager Post-Routed call flows. Use normal upgrade procedures based
on the single-stage or multistage upgrade approaches discussed in Chapter 4, “Planning Your
System Upgrade”.
• Test Bed 2—Parent and Child Call Flows—The parent and child model has been deployed in this
test bed and calls are routed from parent to child systems and child to child systems.
Upgrade all the parent systems at the data centers before upgrading the child systems at the data
centers and remote sites. The child systems have to be compatible with the parent systems that are
running the new software versions.
For detailed information about the deployment options and limitations for the Unified
Communications Manager Post-Routed and Parent and Child call flows, see the Cisco Unified
Contact Center Gateway feature at:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/uc611/starmipc/ch2model.htm
• Test Bed 3—Cisco Unified CVP Post-Routed Call Flows—Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal
(Unified CVP) test bed with Unified CVP Post-Routed call flows. Use normal upgrade procedures
based on the single-stage or multistage upgrade approaches discussed in Chapter 4, “Planning Your
System Upgrade”.
Note To verify the interoperability between clusters running different release set versions, some of the
Unified Communications Manager clusters in Test Bed 3 have not been upgraded.
Related Documentation
The following sections list compatibility guides and installation documentation for Cisco Unified
Communications System components:
• Compatibility Guides
• Component Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
For information about support for legacy products and third-party product interoperability with Cisco
Unified Communications contact center products, see the Cisco Interoperability Portal at:
www.cisco.com/go/interoperability
Compatibility Guides
For compatibility and interoperability information about Unified Communications Manager, Unified
Contact Center Enterprise, CRS and other Cisco Unified Communications contact center products, see
the following sites:
• Cisco Unified Communications Compatibility Tool:
http://tools.cisco.com/ITDIT/vtgsca
• IPCC Enterprise Software Compatibility Guide:
http://www.cisco.com/application/pdf/en/us/guest/products/ps1844/c1609/ccmigration_09186a008
031a0a7.pdf6-9
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Related Documentation
• Cisco Response Solutions (CRS) Software and Hardware Compatibility Guide:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/sw_ap_to/crscomtx.pdf
• Cisco Computer Telephony Integration Option: CTI Compatibility Matrix:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/custcosw/ps14/prod_technical_reference_list.html
• Cisco Unified Communications System Release Summary Matrix for Contact Center:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/systems/unified/ccmtrix.htm
• IP Communications System Test Release Matrix:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/ip_tele/gblink/ipcmtrix.htm
Component Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
Table 6-3 provides a listing of contact center components and URLs for related component release notes
and installation and upgrade documents. These URLs link to webpages that list various release versions
of these documents. Review the appropriate documents based on the release versions of the components
in your base and target release sets.
Table 6-3 Component-Specific Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents
Components Release Notes Installation and Upgrade Documents
Cisco Unified Communications
Manager
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/voicesw/ps556/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/voicesw/ps556/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Unified Intelligent Contact
Management
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1001/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1001/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
Cisco Unified Contact Center
Enterprise
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1844/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1844/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
CRS (Cisco Unified IP IVR) http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1846/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1846/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
Cisco Customer Voice Portal http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1006/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1006/prod_installation_g
uides_list.html
Cisco Unified Outbound Dialer http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps1001/prod_release_notes
_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps524/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Telephony Integration Object
Server (CTI OS)
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps14/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps14/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco Agent Desktop (CAD) http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps427/prod_release_notes_l
ist.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/custcosw/ps427/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Unity Connection http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6509/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6509/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l6-10
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
Chapter 6 Performing Your System Upgrade
Related Documentation
Cisco IP Communicator http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/s
w/voicesw/ps5475/prod_release_notes_l
ist.html
—
Cisco Unified Operations Manager http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6535/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6535/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco Series 800 Routers http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps380/prod_release_notes_list
.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps380/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco Series 7200 Routers http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps341/prod_release_notes_list
.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps341/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco Catalyst 3600 Series
MultiService Platforms
— http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps274/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco AS5400 Series Universal
Gateways
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/univgate/ps505/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/univgate/ps505/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco AS5850 Series Universal
Gateways
— http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/univgate/ps509/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco 3700 Series Voice
Gateways/Gatekeepers
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps282/prod_release_notes_list
.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/routers/ps282/prod_installation_guid
es_list.html
Cisco 3800 Series Voice Gateways http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s5855/prod_release_notes_list.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s5855/prod_installation_guides_list.htm
l
Cisco Catalyst 3550 Series Access
Switches
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps646/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps646/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Switches http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps708/prod_release_notes_li
st.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps708/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco Unified IP Phone 7900 Series http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/phones/ps379/prod_release_notes_lis
t.html
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/h
w/switches/ps646/prod_installation_gui
des_list.html
Cisco IOS Software Release 12.4 T http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/p
s6441/prod_release_notes_list.html
—
Table 6-3 Component-Specific Release Notes and Installation and Upgrade Documents (continued)
Components Release Notes Installation and Upgrade DocumentsIN-1
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
INDEX
A
applications
agent desktop 5, 6, 8
coresident 2, 4, 2, 3, 4, 5
third-party 2, 4, 2, 3, 4, 5
third-party offboard 2
B
backward compatibility
components 3, 2, 11, 2, 4, 5
installation sequence 3
scenarios 4, 5
upgrade sequence 2
C
call flow
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Post-Routed 8
Cisco Unified CVP Post-Routed 8
parent and child 8
call types
basic and critical 7
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
call processing components 4
upgrade considerations 2
Cisco Unified Communications System
overview 1
compatibility
backward 3, 2, 11, 2, 4, 5
components 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 6, 10, 11, 1, 2, 8
guides and matrices 9, 10, 8
software 2
components
agent desktop applications 5, 6, 8
application clients 6, 1
application servers 3, 1
backward compatibility 3, 2, 11, 2, 4, 5
call processing 4, 3, 2, 4, 6, 8, 1
call routing and agent management 4, 6, 8
Cisco Unified Communications System 6.0(1) release
set 6
Cisco Unified Communications System 6.1(1) release
set 6
compatibility 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 6, 10, 11, 1, 2, 8
contact center 7, 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 1, 5
directory and network services 2, 4, 6, 7
distributed system 9
firewall and security 5
gateways and gatekeepers 5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 1
infrastructure 5, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 1
installation order 1, 6, 7
interoperability 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 6, 10, 2, 11, 2, 8
interworking 12
IP telephony 1
media resources 2, 4, 6, 8
messaging 2, 4, 6, 8
network management 8, 3, 4, 7, 8
parent and child 5
queuing and self-service 4, 6, 8
release set definition 3, 2
security 6, 7
shared 3, 9
SIP Proxy server 6
upgrade order 1, 6, 7Index
IN-2
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
wireless 5, 6, 7
contact center
components 7, 1, 3, 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 1, 5
components overview 4, 5
installation overview 4, 5
products 7, 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 1, 5
release sets 3, 6
test bed with Cisco Unified CVP 8
test bed with Cisco Unified IP IVR 8
test bed with parent and child systems 8
upgrade paths 7
CRS
Cisco Unified IP IVR 2, 3, 4, 5
D
deployment models
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise multisite
centralized model 3
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise multisite
distributed model 5, 3
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise single-site
model 2
Clustering over the WAN model 5, 4
component installation order 1
component upgrade order 1
installation process 1
parent and child 5
topologies 3
upgrade process 1
deployment types
greenfield 2, 3
installation 3
installed base (brownfield) 3
legacy 2, 3
H
hardware
equipment check 3
installation 2
requirements 3
supported 3
upgrade 2
I
installation
before you begin 1
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise multisite
centralized model 3
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise multisite
distributed model 5
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise single-site
model 2
Clustering over the WAN model 5
components 4, 5, 1, 6
components grouping 7
coresident applications 2, 4
deployment models 1
deployment types 3
for large multiple sites 6
for medium-to-large sites 6, 7
for small sites 6
general approach 3
general sequence 3
greenfield deployment 3, 8, 9
hardware 2
high-level tasks 4
legacy deployment 3, 8, 9
multisite phased 9, 6
multistage 6, 7
new network 3, 8
order for components 1, 6, 7
overview 4
performing for systems 1
planning for systems 1
postimplementation phases 9Index
IN-3
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
postinstallation phases 9
postinstallation tasks 4, 9
preimplementation phases 1
preinstallation phases 1
preinstallation tasks 4, 1
preparing for systems 1
process 4
single-stage 6
standalone components 2
strategy 8
system dependencies 6
system-level components 2
third-party applications 2, 4
third-party offboard applications 2
installation strategy
for large multiple sites 9, 6
for medium-to-large sites 8, 9, 6, 7
for small sites 8, 6
multisite migration 9
multistage on new hardware 9
new network 8
single-stage on new hardware 8
types of 8
installation window
multiple 9
single 8, 9
installed base
upgrade 3
interoperability
between releases at component level 14
between releases at site level 14
legacy products 2, 3, 4
legacy systems 2, 3, 4
system components 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 6, 10, 2, 8
interworking
components 12
release set 8
IP telephony
components 1
products 1
M
maintenance window
multiple 8, 10, 11, 6
single 8, 9, 10
migration
from installed base 3
from legacy base 3
P
parent and child
call flow 8
components 5
products
contact center 7, 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 1, 5
IP telephony 1
R
release set
6.0(1) components 6
6.1(1) components 4, 6
base release 3
Cisco Unified Communications System Release
6.0(1) 3
Cisco Unified Communications System Release
6.1(1) 3
contact center deployments 3
definition 3, 2
for installation 4
for upgrade 3
greenfield deployment 3
installed base deployment 3
interworking 8
legacy deployment 3
major to major upgrade 6Index
IN-4
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
major to minor upgrade 6
minor to minor upgrade 6
overview 3
summary matrix 3
system test to system release 6
target release 3
S
service
impact on 6, 11, 2, 5
outage 4, 5
software
client 6
compatibility 2
release sets 3, 4, 3
system and applications 6
software versions
6.0(1) components 6
6.1(1) components 4, 6
matrix 3, 4, 6
system
degraded service 6, 2
involved in upgrade 3
service criticality 3, 2
service disruptions 11
service outage 4, 5
upgrade dependencies 2
validation 4
verification 4
system releases
maintenance release 6
major release 6
minor release 6
summary matrix 3, 9, 10, 8
T
test bed
Cisco Unified CVP call flows 8
Cisco Unified IP IVR call flows 8
parent and child call flows 8
upgrade 8
U
Unified IP Phones
upgrade considerations 3
upgrade
backward compatibility 3
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
considerations 2
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise multisite
centralized model 3
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise multisite
distributed model 3
Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise single-site
model 2
Clustering over the WAN model 4
components 1, 5
components grouping 7
concurrent 9
coresident applications 2, 3, 4, 5
deployment models 1
flash-cut 8, 9
for large multiple sites 5
for medium-to-large sites 5, 6
for small sites 5
general approach 1
general sequence 1
high-level tasks 3
installed base 3
inter-sites 12
intra-site 11
maintenance releases 6
major releases 6Index
IN-5
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
minor releases 6
multisite 8, 2, 4, 5
multistage 8, 11, 2, 4, 5, 6
order for components 1, 6, 7
partial (hybrid network) 9, 12
partial (hybrid system) 8, 11, 4
performing for systems 1
planning for systems 1
preparing for systems 1
process 3, 1
recommended paths 6
roadmap 3
shrink-and-grow 8, 10
single-site 9, 10
single-stage 8, 5
standalone components 2
strategy 3, 8
summary of strategies 14
supported paths 6
system dependencies 2
system-level components 2
test beds 8
third-party applications 2, 3, 4, 5
third-party offboard applications 2
time period 14
to hybrid network 9, 12
to hybrid system 8, 11, 4
Unified IP Phones considerations 3
upgrade considerations
Cisco Unified Communications Manager 2
Unified IP Phones 3
upgrade paths
for components 7
upgrade strategy
for large multiple sites 9, 5
for medium-to-large sites 8, 5, 6
for small sites 8, 5
multisite migration 8
multistage on existing hardware 8, 11
single-stage on existing hardware 8, 9
single-stage on new hardware 8, 10
summary 14
types of 8Index
IN-6
System Installation and Upgrade Manual, Cisco Unified Communications 6.1(1)
OL-15524-01
iii
VISM Installation and Configuration, Release 1.5
78-10344-03, Rev. B0
About This Manual
Welcome to the installation and configuration manual for the Cisco Voice Interworking Service Module
Release 1.5.
This section discusses:
• Objectives
• Audience
• Organization
• Related Documentation
• Conventions
Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a CD-ROM package, which ships with
your product. The Documentation CD-ROM, a member of the Cisco Connection Family, is updated
monthly. Therefore, it might be more current than printed documentation. To order additional copies of
the Documentation CD-ROM, contact your local sales representative or call customer service. The
CD-ROM package is available as a single package or as an annual subscription. You can also access
Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at http://www.cisco.com, http://www-china.cisco.com,
or http://www-europe.cisco.com.
If you are reading Cisco product documentation on the World Wide Web, you can submit comments
electronically. Click Feedback in the toolbar, select Documentation, and click Enter the feedback
form. After you complete the form, click Submit to send it to Cisco. We appreciate your comments.
Objectives
This publication will describe the features, functions, construction, installation, operation and
Command Line Interface of the Cisco Voice Interworking Service Module (VISM) Release 1.5.
Audience
This publication is designed for the person installing VISM cards on the MGX 8850 shelf, who should
be familiar with electronic circuitry and wiring practices and have experience as an electronic or
electromechanical technician. It is also intended for the network administrator who will configure the
MGX 8850 shelf. The installers and network administrators should also be familiar with Cisco switches,
Frame Relay connections, and Cisco wide area networks. During the initial installation of an MGX 8850
shelf, it is also helpful to have a system administrator on-hand who is familiar with your network and
UNIX servers.iv
VISM Installation and Configuration, Release 1.5
78-10344-03, Rev. B0
Organization
Organization
This manual describes the features, functions, construction and operation of the VISM Release 1.5 in
the following sections.
Related Documentation
The following Cisco publications contain additional information related to the operation of the Cisco
WAN switching network:
• Cisco WAN Manager Operations providing procedures for using the Cisco WAN Manager.
• Release 9.3 of the Cisco WAN Switching documentation set including:
– Cisco IPX Reference providing a general description and technical details of the Cisco IPX
narrowband node.
– Cisco IGX 8400 Series Reference providing a general description and technical details of the
multi-band Cisco IGX 8400 series.
Introducing the
Cisco Voice
Interworking
Service Module
Introduction to VISM and this manual.
Installation Describes the installation of VISM front and back cards in an MGX 8850 shelf.
Installalion procedures for installing new software/firmware are included.
General
Description
Provides an overall description of the features, functions, and applications of
VISM 1.5.
Tandem/Switch
Application
(VoIP Mode)
Describes VISM using voice over IP in a Tandem/Switch application. Includes
configuration details.
Multi-Service
Access
Application
(VoIP Mode)
Describes VISM using voice over IP in a Multi-service access application.
Includes configuration details.
AAL2 Trunking
Application
Describes VISM in an AAL 2 Trunking application. Includes configuration
details.
Command Line
Interface
Provides details of all the VISM 1.5 CLI commands that are available to the user
Troubleshooting Describes VISM troubleshooting tools.
Cabling
Summary
Describes the cables required for connecting T1 and E1 lines to the VISM card.
Specifications Provides specifications of the VISM front and back cards.v
VISM Installation and Configuration, Release 1.5
78-10344-03, Rev. B0
Conventions
– Cisco MGX 8850 Reference providing a general description and technical details of the MGX
8850 node.
– Cisco WAN Switching Command Reference providing detailed information on the command
line interfaces used in operating a Cisco WAN switching network.
Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions to convey instructions and information.
Command descriptions use these conventions:
• Commands and keywords are in boldface.
• Arguments for which you supply values are in italics.
• Elements in square brackets ([ ]) are optional.
• Alternative but required keywords are grouped in braces ({ }) and are separated by vertical bars ( | ).
Examples use these conventions:
• Terminal sessions and information the system displays are in screen font.
• Information you enter is in boldface screen font.
• Non-printing characters, such as passwords, are in angle brackets (< >).
• Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets ([ ]).
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not
contained in this manual.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in
equipment damage or loss of data.
Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury.
Before you work on any equipment, you must be aware of the hazards involved with
electrical circuitry and familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. (To
see translated versions of this warning, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety
Information document that accompanied your product.)vi
VISM Installation and Configuration, Release 1.5
78-10344-03, Rev. B0
Conventions
Americas Headquarters:
Cisco Systems, Inc., 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for
Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
Cisco CPT, Cisco ONS M2, ONS M6, ONS 15454, ONS 15310-MA, ONS15310-CL, and ONS 15600
May 2011, 78-18960-03
This document uses illustrations to explain the workflow that we recommend for grounding the
Cisco CPT, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, ONS 15454 M6, ONS 15454 ANSI, ONS 15454 ETSI,
ONS 15310-MA ANSI, ONS 15310-MA ETSI, ONS 15310-CL ANSI, ONS 15600 ANSI, and
ONS 15600 ETSI chassis. It also explains best practices to be followed to prevent electrostatic discharge
(ESD) damage, which can occur when the equipment is improperly handled.
Note The instructions in this document also applies to the Cisco ONS DWDM platform.
The following sections are included in this document:
• Prerequisites, page 1
• Locating and Grounding the Chassis, page 6
• Installing the Line Cards, page 24
Prerequisites
Before locating and grounding any chassis, you must complete the following prerequisites:
• Preparing Your Location, page 2
• Preparing the Rack Room, page 3
• Preparing Yourself, page 42
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Prerequisites
Preparing Your Location
This section illustrates how the building that houses the chassis must be properly grounded to the earth
ground. (See Figure 1.)
Warning This product requires short-circuit (overcurrent) protection to be provided as part of the building
installation. Install only in accordance with national and local wiring regulations. Statement 1045.
Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring.
Statement 1022.3
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Prerequisites
Figure 1 Building with Rack Room Connected to Earth Ground
Preparing the Rack Room
This section explains how the rack enclosures must be properly connected to the building earth ground.
It also illustrates how to keep the chassis in a sealed antistatic bag until you are ready to install it. (See
Figure 2.)
Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
Statement 1003.
274057
Earth ground4
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Prerequisites
Figure 2 Rack Room Connected to Earth Ground
Preparing Yourself
This section illustrates how to prepare yourself before removing the chassis from the sealed antistatic
bag. Figure 3 illustrates how to cuff the ESD strap around the wrist and the ground cord that connects
the cuff to the ground. ESD wrist straps are the primary means of controlling static charge on personnel.
274058
Earth ground
Chassis protected
in antistatic bag5
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Prerequisites
Figure 3 Wearing the ESD Strap
Figure 4 illustrates how you must be properly grounded before handling the chassis.
274056
Earth ground6
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 4 Handling the Chassis
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
This section explains how to locate and ground the following Cisco ONS chassis:
• Locating and Grounding the CPT 50 Shelf, page 7
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 Chassis, page 9
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Chassis, page 12
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI Chassis, page 14
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI Chassis, page 16
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15310-MA ANSI and ONS 15310-MA ETSI Chassis,
page 18
273650
Earth ground7
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15310-CL ANSI Chassis, page 20
• Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15600 ANSI and ONS 15600 ETSI Bay Assembly,
page 22
Warning This equipment is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the host is connected to earth ground during
normal use. Statement 39.
Warning Use copper conductors only. Statement 1025.
Warning When installing or replacing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and
disconnected last. Statement 1046.
Note A #6 AWG cable or a 1 inch wide flat copper braid (with minimum total strands count of 1050 x 36 AWG
or 260 x 36 AWG) is mandatory to install the Cisco ONS 15454 M2, ONS 15454 M6,
ONS 15454 ANSI, ONS 15454 ETSI, ONS 15310-MA ANSI, ONS 15310-MA ETSI,
ONS 15310-CL ANSI, ONS 15600 ANSI, and ONS 15600 ETSI chassis.
Locating and Grounding the CPT 50 Shelf
Before locating and grounding the CPT 50 shelf, you must complete the prerequisites mentioned in
“Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the ground point and attach a ground cable to the CPT 50
shelf:
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the bay and the office ground, according to
local site practice. (See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Note The CPT 50 installations are suitable for Network Telecommunication facilities and locations where
NEC applies.
Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on local site practice. The CPT 50 shelf is designated
only for a Common Bonding Network (CBN), according to the GR-1089-CORE Issue 5 (sec 9.3)
definitions.
Note The DC power battery return (BR) terminal or positive terminal must be grounded at the source end
(power feed or DC mains power end). The DC power BR input terminal is not connected to the
equipment frame (chassis), so it is configured as DC-1 according to the GR-1089-CORE, Issue 5
(sec 9.8.3) definitions.
Step 2 Remove any paint and other nonconductive coatings from the surfaces between the shelf ground and bay
frame ground point. Clean the mating surfaces and apply appropriate antioxidant compound to the bare
conductors.8
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Step 3 Attach one end of the shelf ground cable (#8 AWG cable) to the ground point (rear or lateral) on the
chassis using the specified dual-hole lug connector. (See diagrams 1 and 2 in Figure 5.)
Step 4 Tighten the lug using the M4 pan-head screw to torque value of 11.5 in-lbs (1.3 N-m).
Note Ground points are present on the rear and lateral sides of the CPT 50 shelf (see diagram 1 in Figure 5).
You can connect the grounding cable to either the rear or the lateral side. Diagrams 2 and 3 in Figure 5
show the ground connection to the rear side of the CPT 50 shelf.
Step 5 Attach the other end of the shelf ground cable to the bay frame using a dual-hole lug connector according
to the equipment bay frame specifications. (See diagram 3 in Figure 5.)9
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 5 Grounding CPT-50 Shelf
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 Chassis
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis, you must complete the prerequisites
mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the ground point and attach a ground cable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis:
Earth
ground
Grounding
cable
281375
1 2
3
Chassis
Ground Points
(rear)
Grounding
lug
Screws
Chassis
Ground Points
(rear)
Chassis
Ground Points
(lateral)10
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the bay and the office ground, according to
local site practice. (See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on local site practice. The ONS 15454 M2
chassis is designated only for a Common Bonding Network (CBN), according to the
GR-1089-CORE Issue 4 (sec 9.3) definitions.
Note The DC power battery return (BR) terminal or positive terminal must be grounded at the source
end (power feed or DC mains power end). The DC power BR input terminal is not connected to
the equipment frame (chassis), so it is configured as DC-I according to the GR-1089-CORE,
Issue 4 (sec 9.8.3) definitions.
Step 2 Remove any paint and other nonconductive coatings from the surfaces between the chassis ground and
bay frame ground point. Clean the mating surfaces and apply appropriate antioxidant compound to the
bare conductors.
Step 3 Attach one end of the shelf ground cable (#6 AWG cable or 1 inch copper braid) to the ground point on
the chassis using the specified dual-hole lug connector. (See diagrams 1 and 2 in Figure 6.)
Step 4 Attach the other end of the shelf ground cable to the bay frame using a dual-hole lug connector according
to the equipment bay frame specifications. (See diagram 3 in Figure 6.)11
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 6 Grounding ONS 15454 M2 Chassis
Earth ground
Grounding
cable
278177
Grounding
lug Nuts
1 2
3
Chassis
ground point12
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Stop. You have completed grounding the chassis.
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Chassis
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis, you must complete the prerequisites
mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the ground point and attach a ground cable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis:
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the bay and the office ground, according to
local site practice. (See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on local site practice. The ONS 15454 M6
chassis is designated only for a Common Bonding Network (CBN), according to the
GR-1089-CORE Issue 4 (sec 9.3) definitions.
Note The DC power battery return (BR) terminal or positive terminal must be grounded at the source
end (power feed or DC mains power end). The DC power BR input terminal is not connected to
the equipment frame (chassis), so it is configured as DC-I according to the GR-1089-CORE,
Issue 4 (sec 9.8.3) definitions.
Step 2 Remove any paint and other nonconductive coatings from the surfaces between the chassis ground and
bay frame ground point. Clean the mating surfaces and apply appropriate antioxidant compound to the
bare conductors.
Step 3 Attach one end of the shelf ground cable to the ground point on the chassis using the specified dual-hole
lug connector. (See diagrams 1 and 2 in Figure 7.)
Step 4 Attach the other end of the shelf ground cable to the bay frame using a dual-hole lug connector according
to equipment bay frame specifications. (See diagram 3 in Figure 7.)13
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 7 Grounding ONS 15454 M6 Chassis
Earth ground
Grounding
cable
278178
Grounding
lug
Nuts
1 2
3
Chassis
ground point14
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Stop. You have completed grounding the chassis.
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI Chassis
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI chassis, you must complete the prerequisites
mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the ground point and attach a ground cable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI chassis:
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the bay and the office ground, according to
local site practice. (See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on local site practice. The ONS 15454 ANSI
chassis is designated only for a Common Bonding Network (CBN), according to the
GR-1089-CORE Issue 4 (sec 9.3) definitions.
Note The DC power battery return (BR) terminal or positive terminal must be grounded at the source
end (power feed or DC mains power end). The DC power BR input terminal is not connected to
the equipment frame (chassis), so it is configured as DC-I according to the GR-1089-CORE,
Issue 4 (sec 9.8.3) definitions.
Step 2 Remove any paint and other nonconductive coatings from the surfaces between the chassis ground and
bay frame ground point. Clean the mating surfaces and apply appropriate antioxidant compound to the
bare conductors.
Step 3 Attach one end of the shelf ground cable to the ground point on the chassis using the specified dual-hole
lug connector. (See diagrams 1 and 2 in Figure 8.)
Step 4 Attach the other end of the shelf ground cable to the bay frame using a dual-hole lug connector according
to the equipment bay frame specifications. (See Diagram 3 in Figure 8.)15
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 8 Grounding ONS 15454 ANSI Chassis
CISCO ONS 15454 Optical Network System
Earth ground
Grounding
braid
Chassis
Rear
274029
1” wide copper braid
or #6 AWG
ground cable
Lower
backplane
Chassis ground
point
Grounding
lug Nuts
1 2
316
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Stop. You have completed grounding the chassis.
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI Chassis
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI chassis, you must complete the prerequisites
mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the ground point and attach a ground cable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI chassis:
Warning This equipment must be grounded. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the
absence of a suitably installed ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection
authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 1024
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the bay and the office ground, according to
local site practice. (See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Step 2 Insert the stripped end of the grounding wire into the open end of the grounding lug.
Step 3 Use the crimping tool to secure the grounding wire in two different places in the grounding lug.
Step 4 Locate the grounding receptacle on the side panel of the chassis. (See diagram 1 in Figure 9.)
Step 5 Place the grounding lug against the grounding receptacle on the side panel of the chassis. (See diagram 2
in Figure 9.)
Step 6 Insert one of the screws through the locking washer and through the hole in the grounding lug. Insert the
screw into the threaded holes on the right side of the shelf. Ensure that the grounding lug does not
interfere with other system hardware or rack equipment.
Step 7 Repeat Step 6 with the second screw.
Step 8 Prepare the other end of the grounding wire and connect it to an appropriate grounding point in your site
to ensure adequate earth ground for the chassis. (See diagram 3 in Figure 9.)17
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 9 Grounding ONS 15454 ETSI Chassis
Earth ground
274183
Optical Network System CISCO ONS 15454
Optical Network System CISCO ONS 15454
1” wide copper braid
or #6 AWG
ground cable
Chassis
ground point
Screws
Grounding lug
Grounding
braid
1 2
318
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Stop. You have completed grounding the chassis.
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15310-MA ANSI and
ONS 15310-MA ETSI Chassis
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15310-MA ANSI and the ONS 15310-MA ETSI chassis,
you must complete the prerequisites mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the
ground point and attach a ground cable to the Cisco ONS15310-MA ANSI and ONS 15310-MA ETSI
chassis:
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the rack according to local site practice.
(See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Note The ONS 15310-MA is installed in a weather-proof cabinet for outdoors installation, also known
as an Outside Plant (OSP) installation. A 1 inch (minimum) wide copper braid (with minimum
total strands count of 1050 x 36 AWG or 260 x 36 AWG) is required for ONS 15310-MA OSP
installations.
Step 2 Remove any paint and other nonconductive coatings from the surfaces between the chassis ground and
the rack frame ground posts. Clean the mating surfaces and apply an appropriate antioxidant compound
to the bare conductors.
Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on local site practice. The
ONS 15310-MA ANSI chassis is designated only for a Common Bonding Network (CBN),
according to the GR-1089-CORE Issue 4 (sec 9.3) definitions.
Note The DC power battery return (BR) terminal or positive terminal must be grounded at the source
end (power feed or DC mains power end). The DC power BR input terminal is not connected to
the equipment frame (chassis), so it is configured as DC-I according to the GR-1089-CORE,
Issue 4 (sec 9.8.3) definitions.
Step 3 Locate the ground connection points, which are located on the left, right, and bottom of the
ONS 15310-MA chassis. (See diagram 1 in Figure 10.)
Step 4 Using a wire stripper, strip 0.875 inches (2.22 cm) from the end of the ground cable. Crimp the two-hole
lug to the ground cable.
Step 5 Line up the holes on the lug with the holes on the ground connection point. Use two 10-32 screws to
attach the lug to the ground connection point. (See diagram 2 in Figure 10.)
Step 6 Attach the other end of the chassis ground cable to the rack. (See diagram 3 in Figure 10.)19
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 10 Grounding ONS 15310-MA ANSI and ONS 15310-MA ETSI Chassis
Earth ground
274182
Ground points
on right side
of chassis
Ground points
on left side
of chassis
Ground points
on bottom side
of chassis
1” wide copper
braid or
#6 AWG
ground cable
Chassis ground point
on right side of chassis
Screws
Grounding
lug
Grounding
braid
1 2
320
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Stop. You have completed grounding the chassis.
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15310-CL ANSI Chassis
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15310-CL ANSI chassis, you must complete the
prerequisites mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate the ground points and attach a
ground cable to the Cisco ONS 15310-CL ANSI chassis:
Step 1 Verify that the office ground cable is connected to the top of the rack according to local site practice.
(See Figure 1 and Figure 2.)
Step 2 Remove any paint and other nonconductive coatings from the surfaces between the shelf ground and the
rack frame ground posts. Clean the mating surfaces and apply an appropriate antioxidant compound to
the bare conductors.
Note Additional ground cables may be added depending on local site practice. The
ONS 15310-CL ANSI chassis is designated only for a Common Bonding Network (CBN),
according to the GR-1089-CORE Issue 4 (sec 9.3) definitions.
Note The DC power battery return (BR) terminal or positive terminal must be grounded at the source
end (power feed or DC mains power end). The DC power BR input terminal is not connected to
the equipment frame (chassis), so it is configured as DC-I according to the GR-1089-CORE,
Issue 4 (sec 9.8.3) definitions.
Step 3 Using the 10-32 screws that came with the ship kit, attach one end of the chassis ground cable to the
ground connection point located on the center of the rear panel as you face the chassis. Using a wire
stripper, strip 0.875 inches (2.22 cm) from the end of the ground cable.
Step 4 Crimp the two-hole lug to the ground cable.
Step 5 Line up the holes on the lug with the holes on the ground connection point, located at the center of the
rear panel as you face the chassis. Use two 10-32 screws to attach the lug to the ground connection point.
(See diagrams 1 and 2 in Figure 11.)
Step 6 Attach the other end of the chassis ground cable to the rack. (See diagram 3 in Figure 11.)21
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 11 Grounding ONS 15310-CL ANSI Chassis
Earth ground
Grounding braid
274181
1” wide copper
braid or
#6 AWG
ground cable
Chassis
ground point
Screws
Grounding
lug
1 2
322
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Stop. You have completed grounding the chassis.
Locating and Grounding the Cisco ONS 15600 ANSI and ONS 15600 ETSI
Bay Assembly
Before locating and grounding the Cisco ONS 15600 ANSI and Cisco ONS 15600 ETSI chassis bay
assembly, you must complete the prerequisites mentioned in “Prerequisites” section on page 1. To locate
the ground point and attach a ground cable to the office ground from the Cisco ONS 15600 ANSI and
the Cisco ONS 15600 ETSI chassis bay assembly:
Note The Cisco ONS 15600 ANSI and ONS 15600 ETSI chassis ground points are already connected to the
grounding points on the bay assembly.
Warning Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed
ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are
uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 213
Note Remove any paint from the two-hole lug position on the bay front ground holes and apply the antioxidant
compound to this position.
Step 1 Locate the ground access points on the bay assembly of the chassis. (See diagram 1 in Figure 12.)
Step 2 Connect the office ground cable to the bay front two-hole lug position. (See diagram 2 in Figure 12.)23
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Locating and Grounding the Chassis
Figure 12 Grounding ONS 15600 Bay Assembly
Earth ground
Grounding
cable
3
Bay ground with
PDU cabling
Bay
grounding
point
2
PDU cabling
connected to the
rack from the bay
assembly
274308
1
Ground Central
Office point
PDU Ground Cable
must be connected
here (both sides)24
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Installing the Line Cards
Stop. You have completed grounding the bay assembly.
Installing the Line Cards
This section describes how to properly install the line cards. The following topics are included in this
section:
• Preparing the Work Surface for Installing Line Cards, page 24
• Transporting Line Cards, page 25
• Handling Line Cards, page 27
• Removing and Installing Line Cards, page 28
Preparing the Work Surface for Installing Line Cards
This section illustrates how you and the work surface that you are placing the line card on must be
properly grounded. As shown in Figure 13, ensure that you follow these steps:
• Ground yourself by wearing an ESD wrist band that is connected to the earth ground.
• Ground the table to the earth ground.
• Ground the chassis to the earth ground.
• Ground the rack to the earth ground.25
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Installing the Line Cards
Figure 13 Work Surface for Installing the Line Cards
Transporting Line Cards
This section illustrates how the line card must be kept in a sealed antistatic bag while being transported.
(Figure 14)
187886
Earth ground26
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Installing the Line Cards
Figure 14 Transporting Line Cards
273656
Earth ground27
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Installing the Line Cards
Handling Line Cards
This section illustrates how you must be properly grounded before removing the line card from the
antistatic bag. It also illustrates how you must handle the line card by the front panel and the metal carrier
only. (Figure 15)
Figure 15 Handling Line Cards
273657
Earth ground28
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
78-18960-03
Installing the Line Cards
Removing and Installing Line Cards
This section illustrates the precautions to be taken while removing and installing the line cards.
(Figure 16)
Figure 16 Removing and Installing Line Cards
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco's trademarks
can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word
partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1005R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and
figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
© 2009-2011 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
273658
Earth ground
Americas Headquarters:
© 2010 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Systems, Inc., 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
Release 8.5.4
April 2010
Release notes address closed (maintenance) issues, caveats, and new features for the Cisco ONS 15454
SDH. For detailed information regarding features, capabilities, hardware, and software introduced with
this release, refer to the Release 8.5.x version of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide; and the
Release 8.5.1 version of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide; Release 8.5.x version of the
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual; Release 8.5.x version of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
Troubleshooting Guide; and Release 8.5.1 version of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Guide.
For the most current version of the Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4, see the
following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_release_notes_list.html
Cisco also provides Bug Toolkit, a web resource for tracking defects. To access Bug Toolkit, see the
following URL:
http://tools.cisco.com/Support/BugToolKit/action.do?hdnAction=searchBugs
Contents
Changes to the Release Notes, page 2
Caveats, page 2
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4, page 6
New Features and Functionality, page 11
Related Documentation, page 12
Obtaining Optical Networking Information, page 13
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page 132
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Changes to the Release Notes
Changes to the Release Notes
This section documents supplemental information that has been added to the Release Notes for
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4 since the production of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH System
Software CD for Release 8.5.4.
Caveats
Review the notes listed below before deploying Cisco ONS 15454 SDH. Caveats with tracking numbers
are known system limitations that are scheduled to be addressed in a subsequent release. Caveats without
tracking numbers are provided to point out procedural or situational considerations when deploying the
product.
Note The use of 40WXC units is supported only in the networks running software Release 8.5.1 and later.
Alarms
This section documents caveats for Alarms in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsv30593—AIS-V alarm does not clear
The AIS-V alarm does not clear on VT1.5 cross connect circuits under the following conditions:
1. Create a VT1.5 path protected circuit.
2. Raise an SF-P alarm by injecting path errors.
3. AIS-V alarm is raised on the VT1.5 circuit.
4. Change the circuit state from IS to OOS-MT or OOS-DSBLD.
5. Change the circuit state back to IS.
6. Clear the SF-P alarm, the AIS-V alarm does not clear.
The workaround is to soft reset the cross connect card. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsv30867—The alarms do not clear after cross-connect side switch
When any VT level alarms are raised, a cross-connect side switch is performed to eliminate the alarm.
The alarms do not clear after cross-connect side switch. The workaround is to reset the cross-connect
card to clear the alarm. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsw98487—PROV-MISMATCH alarm is not raised when client port is in Unlocked state
The PROV-MISMATCH alarm is not raised and cleared when the client port provisioned with DVB-ASI
or ISC-1 in the TXP_MR_2.5G card when the card is in Unlocked state. This issue will be resolved in a
future release.3
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Caveats
CTC
This section documents caveats for CTC in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsv14375—Shared secret key corrupt after upgrade
Longer than 16 character shared secret key gets corrupted after an upgrade from 7.20 to 8.54. To avoid
this, use radius server key less than 16 character length before upgrade or:
On the node with EnableNodeAsFinalAuthenticator attribute enabled, do the following as workaround:
1. Launch CTC.
2. Delete the corrupted secret key record in CTC (node view->Provisioning->Security->RADIUS
Server).
3. Recreate it with an appropriate key.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsy14945—CTC cannot manage either nodes of the same version of higher maintenance version,
than its core version
CTC cannot manage either nodes of the same version of higher maintenance version, than its core
version. Specifically the nodes are not accessible by CTC. The workaround is to upgrade the CTC core
version or manually clean the CTC jar cache and then ensure no nodes of the specified version above are
encountered. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
Data I/O Cards
This section documents caveats for Data I/O Cards in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsx75218—VC12 VCAT circuit members may not come-up and report LOP alarm
Create a VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or any of the CCAT circuit and the delete the
CCAT circuit. Create VC12 VCAT circuit using the same VC4 members as previously deleted CCAT
circuits. Some VC12 VCAT circuit members may not come-up and report LOP alarm. The workaround
is to hard-reset CEMR-10 or MLMR-10 cards. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsy16814—Traffic drop is observed when port state change from OOS-DSBLD to IS
Traffic drop is observed when port state change from Locked,disabled to Unlocked. The workaround is
to perform Unlocked > Locked > Unlocked transition until problem is fixed. This issue will be resolved
in a future release.
DWDM
This section documents caveats for DWDM in Release 8.5.4.4
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Caveats
CSCsu81842—Circuit not created through add and drop node with by-pass patchcords
The OCHNC circuit is not created through channel add and drop node with bypass patchcords. When the
traffic matrix of the network requires BYPASS connection between AD-XC cards, the APC domain is
not properly discovered. The workaround is to remove the bypass patchcords in the node and create two
separated OCH-NC circuits. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsv01621—Unable to open the card configuration panel
The user cannot open the card configuration panel for any WXC card inserted or pre-provisioned in the
system. The workaround is to physically remove the deleted WXC cards from their slots. This issue will
be resolved in a future release.
CSCsx17868—The MXP-MR-10DME card continuously reboots after FPGA upgrade
The MXP-MR-10DME card continuously reboots after FPGA upgrade. Forcing an FPGA upgrade on an
MXP-MR-10DME results in a status where the card reboots continuously. The workaround is to reset
the card. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsz38549—VOA FAIL alarm is raised when channels are added
Channels added trough the 40-WSS raise VOA FAIL alarm on the port CHAN-RX of the 40-WXC in
multidegre node setup with VOA set to –12dBm. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsz94689—Incoming traffic received through any port on the affected card may flow to other
Service Provider VLANs
Incoming traffic received through any port on the affected card may flow to other Service Provider
VLANs (SVLAN) if the Customer VLAN (CVLAN) ID on the incoming packet belongs to any VLAN
range configured on the card. This issue may occur even if the packet is received via a
Network to Network Interface (NNI) port. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCta49163—Unsupported Y-cable allowed through TL1
TL1 allows Y-cable protection to be configured between the cards that are already in another Y-cable
group and on the third card that is not part of the original Y-cable group. The CTC does not allow this
operation, but TL1 lets it through. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtb16483—PPC created through TL1 is not discovered properly in the CTC
The provisionable patchcords (PPC) created using TL1 between nodes in secure mode and normal mode
are not discovered in CTC. The workaround is to use CTC to create PPC. This issue will be resolved in
a future release.
CSCtb33916 —After an upgrade, traffic is discarded on a newly created VLAN
The traffic does not flow in a newly created VLAN under the following conditions:
• Software upgraded from R8.5 to R9.0 or R9.0.15
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Caveats
• After a soft reset of the card.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
Optical I/O Cards
This section documents caveats for Optical I/O Cards in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsu80809—Data rate can be changed when there are active circuits and DCC connections
The data rate on an ONS 15454 or an ONS 15310 node that uses ONS-SE-Z1 pluggables can be changed
while there are active circuits and DCC connections. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
Path Protection
This section documents caveats for Path Protection in Release 8.5.4.
CSCta44268—In ADM10G, for path protected circuits on STSs greater than 3, traffic hit of around
2000 ms is observed
In ADM10G, for path protected circuits on STSs greater than 3, traffic hit of around 2000 ms is
observed, when the card reboots with traffic switched to protect due to defects on working. The
conditions are:
1. Create path protected circuit on STS > 3 on optical ports of ADM-10G card.
2. Inject defect on working such that traffic switches to protect.
3. Reboot the ADM-10G card. A traffic hit of around 2000 ms is observed during reboot of card.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
Performance Monitoring
This section documents caveats for Performance Monitoring in Release 8.5.4.
CSCta27911—MS-UAS is reported in ONS 15454-SDH node
The MS-UAS TCA is reported as type UAS-L instead of MS-UAS in the OSC-CSM card in
ONS 15454-SDH node. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
TL1
This section documents caveats for TL1 in Release 8.5.4.6
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4
CSCsv45464—The RTRV-OCHNC command with AID=ALL does not return any information about the
existing cross connections
The RTRV-OCHNC command with the access identifier (AID) =ALL does not return any information
about the existing cross connections. The workaround is to provide the RTRV-OCHNC command with
AID=LINEWL-x-all, where x is the slot number in which the 40-WXC card is provisioned. This issue
will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsv71398—The RTRV-MOD command displays LBC and OPT parameters with invalid values
The RTRV-MOD command displays LBC and OPT parameters with invalid values for pluggables that
do not support these values. The workaround is to use CTC. This issue will be resolved in a future
release.
CSCsw92329—TL1 do not initialize PM counts on all ports of MRC card
The INIT-REG- TL1 command does not initialize the PM counts when trying to initialize a
specific PM count on all ports on the MRC-12 card, except for the first port. This issue will be resolved
in a future release.
CSCsz81750—Traffic loss for 50 ms on MXPP-MR-2.5G and TXPP-MR-2.5G cards
Traffic loss for 50 ms on MXPP-MR-2.5G and TXPP-MR-2.5G cards under the following conditions:
1. Splitter protection with protect active.
2. Manual reset of the card causes traffic loss.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCta30336—Internal communication error reported for a preprovisioned card
Internal communication error is reported when the INIT-REG-VC11 TL1 command is issued on the
proprovisioned STM16 card. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4
This section documents caveats resolved in Release 8.5.4.
Alarms
CSCsy69110—ADD Port Alarm not Raised
Add Port alarm is not raised on ports 27 and 23 of 40-WSS card when the 40-WSS card is inserted in
Slot 3 of an ONS 15454 SDH shelf. This issue has been resolved.7
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4
CSCsz67629—On E1-42 protection switching, LOS alarms on ports 23 and 27 are cleared
When all the ports of E1-42 card are moved to IS state, the LOS alarm is reported against all ports as
expected. On E1-42 protection switching, the LOS alarms on ports 23 and 27 are cleared. This issue has
been resolved.
CSCsz84817—High Laser Bias and Rx Power alarms seen on ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM XFP
High Laser Bias and Rx Power alarms are seen on the ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM XFP. The alarms do not
clear even after replugging the XFP. Continous I2C errors are seen on the console. This issue has been
resolved.
CSCta72945—SWMTXMOD alarm on MRC cards
Frequent and continuous side switching of the XC-VT cards result in SWMTXMOD alarm on the MRC
cards. This issue has been resolved.
Common Control Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Common Control Cards in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsx37297—FTP port issue for TCP connect scan
The following issues occur when the FTP server of TCC card blocks the external FTP socket because of
execution of port scanners:
• Line cards does not boot
• Software download to the node fails
• Database sync between Active and Standby TCC cards fail
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsy91761—Constant TCC Reset
When a node with DS3XM-12 having multiple portless DS3s in the terminal loopback is upgraded, there
is constant TCC reset after activation and the upgrade fails. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsz08846—Generation of two contradictory logs
When the link integrity timer value on the CE-MR-10 card is modified, the audit logs generated are
contradictory. There re are two logs for one event—Pass/Compld and Fail/Deny. Even if the values are
valid, two logs are generated. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsz39798—Constant TCC Reboot
When the DS3XM12 or DS3XM6 port transitions from the automaticInService state to Unlocked state,
TCC reboots constantly. This issue has been resolved.8
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4
CSCsz81891—Issue in database partitions not reported
When there is any problem in the database partitions of the compact flash, the problem is not reported
unless a provisioning change is attempted. This issue has been resolved.
CTC
This section documents resolved caveats for CTC in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsm85843—CTC displays the STS circuit in ROLL_PENDING state when Bridge and Roll is
performed
The Circuit tab in CTC displays the STS circuit in the ROLL_PENDING state when a Bridge and Roll
is performed under the following conditions:
1. Starting a Bridge and Roll on an STS circuit that is on the only circuit bearing port on a MRC card
or a fixed rate card.
2. During a manual Bridge and Roll, performing the COMPLETE step but not the FINISH step.
3. Deleting the fixed rate card or the port or PPM on the MRC card.
The Roll object still exists on the node even though the parent object is deleted and no pool for the
rollFrom Path field exits in the Roll Object database. The Circuit tab in CTC will display the circuit in
the ROLL_PENDING state and the Roll tab will not have an entry to finish the roll. The workaround is
to complete all the steps of the ROLL process including the FINISH step. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq73116—PPC is not working on secure mode node
When a PPC terminating on a secure mode node is created, a new “unknown” node appears and the PPC
is not shown on the network map. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr01562— PPC links disassembled
When a node configured with a TXP card on an ONS 15454 DWDM node without any DDC, GCC, or
OSC terminations is moved from normal mode to secure mode, the PPC links created between the two
nodes are disassembled. The two ends of each PPC link are reported as two separate lines in the PPC
patchcord terminations list, with each second end point reported as unknown. This issue has been
resolved.
CSCsw96807—PPC cannot be deleted in secure mode node
PPCs cannot be deleted if one of the ends is a secure mode node. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsx81421—Trouble managing SoTL1 tunnels using CTC
There are multiple SoTL1 tunnels provisioned using CTC. Trying to open or close a particular tunnel
from CTC is not possible in certain scenarios. This issue has been resolved.9
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4
CSCsy74949—Incorrect NE default values downloaded
When using the re-init tool to upgrade a node from Release 6.2.2 to Release 8.5.4, incorrect NE default
values are downloaded. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsy82228—CTC network discovery is slow
CTC network discovery is very slow when it is disabled and NEs are added one at a time. This issue has
been resolved.
Data I/O Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Data I/O Cards in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsl65143—Traffic outage on G1K and G1000 cards
A SONET/SDH error, that is 50 ms more than the configured link integrity soak timer, causes traffic
outage of about 5 sec occurs on G1K and G1000 cards connected to the Cisco Catalyst 6000 switch with
auto negotiation enabled. This issue has been resolved.
CSCso55327—TCC2 card switch causes unexpected high traffic outage with all circuits
TCC2 card switch (soft reset) causes traffic outage for any circuit created on CE-MR-10 card. This issue
has been resolved.
CSCta44387—UNEQ-P does not trigger link integrity on CCAT circuits
When UNEQ-P condition is raised on CE-100T-8 card with CCAT circuits provisioned and link integrity
timer enabled, the far-end Ethernet port does not go down. This issue has been resolved.
CSCtc66943—Link does not come up when autonegotiation is enabled
The link fails to come up when the CE-1000-4 card and the HP ProCurve Switch are connected, and
autonegotiation is enabled on both ends of the circuit. This issue has been resolved.
DWDM
This section documents resolved caveats for DWDM in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsj97288—PROV-MISMATCH alarm raised on TXP_MR_10E Card
The PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised on the TXP_MR_10E card using the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP
module, when ZR (zero reach) is provisioned for 10GE. This issue has been resolved.10
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.5.4
CSCsq78337—Cannot provision ONS-SE-G2F-LX SFP for ISC3
Cannot provision ONS-SE-G2F-LX SFP (PID 10-2273-02) on a TXP-MR-2.5G card for ISC3. This
issue has been resolved.
Electrical I/O Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Electrical I/O Cards in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsl81293—Traffic loss on DS1 card
Traffic is lost on the VT circuit on DS1 card inside a portless circuit when changing backplane capacity
from STS12 to STS48 mode. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsu92843—BERT on DS3-XM12 card does not inject bit errors
BERT on DS3-XM12 card does not inject bit errors. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsz59607—Traffic drops on DS3-XM card when Signal Degrade alarm threshold is cleared
Traffic drops on DS3 port of DS3-XM card when Signal Degrade alarm threshold is cleared. This issue
has been resolved.
CSCta24511—LoF on DS3-XM6 card does not cause DS1 AIS
LoF raised on DS3-XM6 card does not cause AIS condition on DS1 card at destination. This issue has
been resolved.
Hardware
This section documents resolved caveats for Hardware in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsm55562—Payload PM not reported on active GigabitEthernet port when CARLOSS is raised
When Loss of Signal or Loss of Sync is raised on MXP-MR-10DME card GigabitEthernet port, the
payload PM is not updated. This issue has been resolved.
Optical I/O Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Optical I/O Cards in Release 8.5.4.
CSCsv54817—UNEQ-P alarm is raised on STS-96c circuits with OC-192 XFP
The UNEQ-P alarm is raised on STS-96c circuits when STS-96c circuit is provisioned with one end of
circuit on OC-192XFP card or using OC-192XFP as trunk card. This issue has been resolved.11
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
New Features and Functionality
CSCta42253—MRC card remains in OOF state
MRC card remains in OOF state when OC-48 SFP is used in Port 1. This issue has been resolved.
Path Protection
CSCsk46370—Error rate injection non functional
The error rate injection does not work in 1:N or 1:1 protection group of DS3-XM12 or DS1-E156 cards.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsw49064—GR3 protection is not triggered by SD or SF alarms on trunk ports
GR3 protection is not triggered by SD or SF alarms on trunk ports under the following conditions:
1. Configure a GR3 protection on a ring of muxponder cards.
2. Generate an SF or an SD on a trunk. The protection is not triggered.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsx17026—Traffic on protect path not restored
Traffic on protect path is not restored after the circuit state transitions from Unlocked to Locked,disabled
and Locked,disabled to Unlocked. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsy26595—Traffic does not recover after active and protect paths fail
Traffic does not recover after both the active and protect paths in a ring fail. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsz06764—SF-V condition does not clear
When the circuit state is changed from Unlocked > Locked,disabled > Unlocked with the SF-V condition
present on the VT destination working path, the SF-V condition does not clear on the protect path. This
issue has been resolved.
New Features and Functionality
This section documents new software features in Cisco ONS 15454 Software Release 8.5.4.
Link Integrity Soak Timer
All the mapper cards (G1000-4, CE-1000-4, CE-100-8, and CE-MR-10 cards supported on
Cisco ONS 15454 platform) support end-to-end Ethernet link integrity. If any part of the end-to-end path
fails, the mapper card soaks the defect for a fixed duration of 200 ms. In certain network configurations,
the restoration time after a protection switch can be more than 200 ms. Such disruptions necessitates that
the link integrity be initiated at an interval greater than 200 ms.12
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Related Documentation
The Link Integrity Soak Timer enhancement allows you to configure link integrity soak timer on per port
basis. To allow link integrity to be initiated at an interval greater than 200 ms, set the link integrity timer
in the range between 200 ms and 10000 ms, in multiples of 100 ms.
The Link Integrity Disable enhancement allows you to disable Link Integrity Soak Timer functionality
on a per port basis.
Note When the link integrity timer value on CE-1000-4 card with VCAT circuit is more than 1400 ms, the
transition from IS > OOS > IS causes a delay of 1100 ms.
TL1 Gateway and ENE Sessions
The Cisco ONS 15454 Software Release 8.5.4 increases the maximum number of ENE sessions over a
OSI DCC from 20 to 176. If you use a combination of IP ENE and OSI ENE sessions, it is important to
remember that the maximum number of ENEs supported per GNE is equal to the maximum number of
IP ENEs.
Related Documentation
This section lists release-specific and platform-specific documents.
Release-Specific Documents
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Release 8.5.3
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 8.5.4
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310-MA, Release 8.5.4
• Upgrading the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH to Release 8.5.x
Platform-Specific Documents
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide
Provides installation, turn up, test, and maintenance procedures
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual
Provides technical reference information for SONET/SDH cards, nodes, and networks
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide
Provides technical reference information for DWDM cards, nodes, and networks
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide
Provides a list of SDH alarms and troubleshooting procedures, general troubleshooting information,
transient conditions, and error messages
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Command Guide
Provides a comprehensive list of TL1 commands
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Reference Guide
Provides general information, procedures, and errors for TL1 13
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
• Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration
Guide
Provides software feature and operation information for Ethernet cards
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the
international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also
includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS)
feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds
are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the documents listed in the “Related Documentation” section.
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco's trademarks
can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word
partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1005R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and
figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
© 2010 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.14
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Release 8.5.4
OL-20571-01
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
Americas Headquarters:
© 2010 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Systems, Inc., 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454
Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
July 2010
Release notes address closed (maintenance) issues, caveats, and new features for the
Cisco ONS 15454 SONET platform. For detailed information regarding features, capabilities,
hardware, and software introduced with this release, refer to the Release 8.5.x version of the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide; and the Release 8.5.x version of the
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide; Release 8.5.x version of the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual;
Release 8.5.x version of the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide; and Release 8.5.x version of the
Cisco ONS 15454 SONET TL1 Command Guide. For the most current version of the Release Notes for
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1, see the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_release_notes_list.html
Cisco also provides Bug Toolkit, a web resource for tracking defects. To access Bug Toolkit, see the
following URL:
http://tools.cisco.com/Support/BugToolKit/action.do?hdnAction=searchBugs
About Release 8.6.1
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1 does not include any new features.
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1 is based on Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6. The Release Notes for
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1 contain closed (maintenance) issues and caveats found in
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6. For detailed information on bugs fixed refer to the respective sections in
this document.2
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Contents
Contents
Changes to the Release Notes, page 2
Caveats, page 2
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1, page 17
New Features and Functionality, page 31
Related Documentation, page 31
Obtaining Optical Networking Information, page 32
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page 32
Changes to the Release Notes
This section documents supplemental information that has been added to the Release Notes for
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1 since the production of the Cisco ONS 15454 System Software CD for
Release 8.6.1.
Caveats
Review the notes listed below before deploying the Cisco ONS 15454. Caveats with tracking numbers
are known system limitations that are scheduled to be addressed in a subsequent release. Caveats without
tracking numbers are provided to point out procedural or situational considerations when deploying the
product.
Alarms
This section documents caveats for Alarms in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsl18519 —One CARLOSS and TPTFAIL alarm reported with dual failure on ports of CE-MR-10
card
When dual failure occurs on the ports of the CE-MR-10 card equipped with electrical small form-factor
pluggables (SFPs), only one CARLOSS and TPTFAIL alarm is reported. No workaround is available for
this issue.This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm16960 —AUTO RESET alarm cleared before activation
When upgrading software on OC-12 4-port cards from Release 7.0.7 to Release 8.6.1, the AUTO RESET
alarm is cleared before completing activation. No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will
not be resolved.3
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
CSCsm19928 —AS-MT condition not persistent against subtended shelf TCC software reset
An AS-MT alarm on the transponder (TXP) card in a subtended shelf of a multishelf configuration is
cleared when a soft reset of the TCC is performed. The workaround is to change the port status to
IS-AINS and OOS-MT. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsm32308— Roll-pend(NA) and UNEQ-P(CR) alarms move to Conditions pane on soft reset of
active TCC
Roll-pend(NA) and UNEQ-P(CR) alarms move to the Conditions pane when a soft reset is performed on
an active TCC during the manual mode of a circuit roll. No workaround is available for this issue. This
issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtd11068—CE-100T-8 card link is down with no alarms
When selective auto-negotiation is enabled on the CE-100T-8 card, and if there is a mismatch in speed
and duplex at the physical interface, the link is down but no alarm is raised. This issue will be resolved
in a future release.
CSCta72945—SWMTXMOD Alarm on MRC Cards
Frequent and continuous side switching of the XC-VT cards result in SWMTXMOD alarm on the MRC
cards. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsy69110—ADD Port Alarm not Raised
Add Port alarm is not raised on ports 27 and 23 of 40-WSS card when the 40-WSS card is inserted in
slot 3 of an SDH shelf. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtd60987—RFI-V alarm does not clear on ONS 15454 NEs in the CTM
In Software Release 8.6.1, the RFI-V alarm does not clear on ONS 15454 NEs in the Cisco Transport
Manager (CTM). The workaround is to modify the severity of the RFI-V of the logical objects VT-MON
and VT-TERM in the alarm profile to the same value as a customized severity. After changing the MON
and TERM severity to the same value the RFI-V alarm is cleared in the CTM/CTC. This issue will not
be resolved.
CSCtf22211—Bridge and Roll valid signal is inconsistent
Bridge and Roll valid signal is inconsistent when there are VT circuits and cross-connects created
between the nodes being rolled. The workaround is to create the circuits using DCC. This issue will be
resolved in a future release.4
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
BLSR Functionality
This section documents caveats for bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR) in Release 8.6.1.
CSCdv53427— Protection vulnerabilities in two-ring, two-fiber MS-SP ring configuration
In a two-ring, two-fiber BLSR configuration (or in a two-ring BLSR configuration with one two-fiber
and one four-fiber ring) it is possible to provision a circuit that begins on one ring, crosses to a second
ring, and returns to the original ring. Such a circuit can have protection vulnerabilities if one of the
common nodes is isolated, or if a ring is segmented in such a way that two non-contiguous segments of
the circuit on the same ring are both broken.
Common Control Cards
This section documents caveats for Common Control Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsy91761—Constant TCC Reset
When a node with DS3XM-12 having multiple portless DS3s in the terminal loopback is upgraded, there
is constant TCC reset after activation and the upgrade fails. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsz39798—Constant TCC Reboot
When the DS3XM12 or DS3XM6 port transitions from the AINS state to IS state, TCC reboots
constantly. This issue will be resolved in a future release
CTC
This section documents caveats for CTC in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsy14945—CTC cannot manage either nodes of the same version of higher maintenance version,
than its core version
CTC cannot manage either nodes of the same version of higher maintenance version, than its core
version. Specifically the nodes are not accessible by CTC. The workaround is to upgrade the CTC core
version or manually clean the CTC jar cache and then ensure no nodes of the specified version above are
encountered. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsy82228—CTC Network discovery is slow
CTC Network discovery is very slow when it is disabled and NEs are added one at a time. This issue will
be resolved in a future release.5
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
CSCtb81645—CE-MR STS pool allocation is incorrect in CTC
Pool numbers are displayed incorrectly in the Cardview->Maintenance->STS/VT allocation tab when
STS, STS_Vcat, or VT_Vcat circuits are created in different pools of CE-MR card. This issue will be
resolved in a future release.
CSCtc46543—CTC circuit creation wizard window hangs during OCHNC circuit creation
The circuit creation window hangs when the creation process is canceled within the route pane. This
problem occurs in a big network with a very high latency due to lack of high speed DCN. This issue will
be resolved in a future release.
CTC Release 8.5.x unable to manually route STS1 from DS3 to DS3XM-12 card
CTC Release 8.5.x does not allow a manual routed circuit (STS1) from a DS3 to a DS3XM-12 card. The
circuit creation chooses the automatic routing option by default. The workaround is to load Release 9.x
CTC cache files and launch CTC with the latest CTC version. This will allow the STS1 circuit to be built
manually from DS3 to DS3XM-12 card. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtg96470—BITS-OUT clock is not in sync with the incoming clock
The BITS-OUT clock is not in sync with the incoming clock on OSCM for E1 facility when the framing
type is FAS+CAS+CRC or FAS+CRC. The workaround is to:
1. Change the framing type to UNFRAMED.
2. Set the value of AIS threshold to Do not use for sync (DUS).
3. Change the framing type back to FAS+CAS+CRC or FAS+CRC.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCta95590—Provisioning strip sends wrong BPDU configuration for NNI ports
When a UNI port is changed to NNI port, the BPDU configuration parameter is not updated. The
workaround is to:
1. Set the port to UNI, transparent, DROP, in IS
2. Set to TUNNEL and click APPLY
3. Set to OOS
4. Set to NNI
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtg92049—Incorrect pool allocation on CE100T-8 Card
The pool allocation is incorrect when a VC3-CCAT circuit is created on the CE100T-8 card. The
workaround is to create a VC3-VCAT circuit instead of VC3-CCAT circuit. This issue will be resolved
in a future release.6
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
Data I/O Cards
This section documents caveats for Data I/O Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsq02815—Negative values for gfpStatsRxCRCErrors and ifInPayloadCrcErrors parameters in
CTC for CE-MR-10 cards
The gfpStatsRxCRCErrors and ifInPayloadCrcErrors performance monitoring parameters in CTC for
CE-MR-10 cards can contain negative values. The workaround is to either refresh the Performance >
Statistics pane by clicking the Refresh button or by clearing the PM parameters by clicking the Clear
button. This issue may be resolved in a future release.
CSCsq24903 —First data frame sent on POS circuit is lost on CE-MR-10 card
On CE-MR-10 cards, the first data frame that is sent on a POS circuit is lost under the following
conditions:
For a new provisioned POS circuit
If the data frame is large
No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCte67178—Link does not recover between CE-1000 and Sycamore cards
Link does not recover between the CE-1000 card and Sycamore 1 Gbps Ethernet card when the fibre is
removed and restored again, with LI enabled. The workaround is to create a terminal loopback on the
OC-192 port on the ONS 15454 node with the AIS flags disabled. If the Link Integrity Disable flag is
selected, the circuit recovers correctly when the fiber is restored on the CE-1000 card.
CSCso94644—LCAS VCG Member Rx side in Add State condition persists after hard reset of
CE-MR-10 card or ML-MR-10 card
The LCAS VCG Member Rx side in Add State condition might persist after a hard reset of a CE-MR-10
card or an ML-MR-10 card carrying a HW-LCAS circuit with loopback on split fiber routing. The
workaround is to place all the affected circuit members in the OOS,OOG state. After all the members
have been placed in OOS,OOG state, place them back in IS state. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm78387—PDI-P alarm causes the Ethernet port to go down when members are deleted on
open-ended HW-LCAS VCAT circuit
A path payload defect indication (PDI-P) alarm is raised and the Ethernet port goes down when members
are deleted in a circuit under the following conditions:
• A VC-12-63v open-ended HW-LCAS circuit exists between two network elements (NEs).
• All members on the CE-MR-10 card are placed in the OOS,OOG state and the last 45 members are
deleted.
• The remaining 18 members on the CE-MR-10 card are placed in IS.
These conditions result in an unbalanced virtual concatenation group (VCG). Traffic is lost and a PDI-P
alarm is raised on the card where members were deleted.7
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
The workaround is to place members in the OOG state on both ends. When members are being placed
in IS, place them in IS state on both ends of the circuit. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsq20532—Traffic hit of 25 ms occurs in a low-order LCAS circuit
A traffic hit of about 25 ms may occur in a low-order LCAS circuit if members in the OOS,OOG state
are deleted in CE-MR-10, CE-MR-6, or ML-MR-10 cards. No workaround is available for this issue.
This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsy16814—Traffic drop is observed when port state is changed from OOS-DSBLD to IS
Traffic drop is observed when the port state is changed from OOS-DSBLD to IS. The workaround is to
perform IS->OOS-> IS transition until the problem is fixed. This issue will be resolved in a future
release.
CSCtc44604—First 32 DCC Area IDs are restored after the upgrade
Only the first 32 data communications channel (DCC) area IDs are restored after an upgrade from an
older software release to R9.0.1.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtg93566—IDLE does not clear on few HW-LCAS members
IDLE does not clear on few HW-LCAS members when the path delay (propagation delay) is more than
400 ms and the active cross-connect is reset. The workaround is to change all the HW-LCAS members
to OOS,OOG state before cross-connect reset and move HW-LCAS members back to IS state after
cross-connect reset. Recover the affected members by transitioning the member state form IS >
OOS,OOG > OOS,DSBLD and back to IS. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
DWDM
This section documents caveats for DWDM in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsx49926—Egress WRR scheduling does not work for frames > ~1500 on GE_XP card
Egress WRR scheduling does not work for frames more than approximately 1500 on GE_XP card. No
workaround is available for this issue. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsg22669—Traffic hit greater than 50 ms but less than 60 ms on MXP-2.5G-10E in Y cable
configuration with fiber cut
When a fiber is cut on MXP-2.5G-10E cards in Y-cable configurations, a traffic hit of greater than 50 ms
but less than 60 ms occurs. This issue will not be resolved.8
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
CSCsf04299 —WTR time does not trigger switch back of protection
When triggering the switch of optimized 1+1 protection and the failure is cleared, the WTR condition is
raised, but after the WTR time expires, the switch back of protection is not triggered. The workaround
is to manually force back the protection. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm82422—CARLOSS alarm not raised when power is turned off on MXP-MR-10DME cards
On MXP-MR-10DME cards, the CARLOSS alarm is not raised when the power is turned off on the
copper SFP due to squelching of that port. No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will not
be resolved.
CSCei19148—Client momentarily enabled and emits light before squelching due to the trunk
OOS,DSBLD condition
When a port is placed in IS while the conditions necessary to squelch the port are present (for example,
when the trunk port on a DWDM card is OOS,DSBLD and a client port is placed in IS), the client will
momentarily enable, emitting light, before squelching due to the trunk OOS,DSBLD condition. The
pulse is approximately 500 ms. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsb47323 —Unexpected RFI condition raised with OTUk-BDI for MXP-MR-10DME-C and
MXP-MR-10DME-L cards
For MXP-MR-10DME-C and MXP-MR-10DME-L cards, an unexpected RFI condition might be raised
along with an OTUk-BDI. When an LOS occurs downstream, the node receives OTUk-BDI. Because of
the placement of dual OTN and SONET wrappers, the node can also receive an RFI. This issue will not
be resolved.
CSCsb94736—MXP-MR-10DME card fails to detect the login message after fault condition
After a fault condition (trunk LOS or Y-cable switch) an MXP-MR-10DME card might fail to detect the
login message and traffic might not start for some minutes (after multiple login trials). This situation can
occur in an N-F configuration with the Cisco MDS switch and MXP-MR-10DME distance extension on,
where test equipment traffic is set to 2G Fiber Channel (FC) full-bandwidth occupancy and started. The
workaround is to stop traffic or keep bandwidth occupancy below 80% during the login phase. This issue
will not be resolved.
CSCsc36494—Manual Y-cable switches with squelching turned off in the MXP-MR-10G card
causes Fiber Channel link with Brocade switches to go down
Manual Y-cable switches with squelching turned off in the MXP-MR-10G card can cause a Fiber
Channel link with Brocade switches to go down. SIGLOSS and GFP-CSF alarms are seen in CTC. Cisco
recommends that squelching be on when interworking with Brocade switches. If for some reason
squelching must be off with Brocade switches, Cisco recommends using a FORCE command to perform
Y-cable switches. This issue may not be resolved.9
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
CSCsc60472—CTC is not able to discover TL1 OCHCC circuit provisioned over ITU-T line card
CTC is not able to discover a TL1 OCHCC circuit provisioned over an ITU-T line card (ITU-T
OC48/STM16 and ITU-T OC192/STM64). This issue can occur when, using the TL1 client interface,
you create the OCHNC layer that will be used by the OCHCC circuit, then create the OCHCC
connections that involve the ITU-T line cards. The result is an OCHNC and two OCHCC partial circuits,
instead of an OCHNC and a single OCHCC complete circuit. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsg10008—Y-cable protection switch time higher than 50 ms in GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards
Y-cable protection switch time is higher than 50 ms in GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards under the following
conditions:
• RX fibers extracted from client pluggable port module (PPM).
• The Trunk pluggable port module (PPM) status is OOS,DSBLD.
• Loss of signal (LoS), both LOS-P and SIGLOSS, when extracting the RX fiber on Trunk PPM port.
• User command (for example, FORCE) is issued.
No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCse97200 —Local and Express order-wire circuits do not work on ADM-10G card
On ADM-10G cards, attempts to preprovision local and express order-wire circuits on trunk ports are
not successful. E1/E2 order-wire is not supported. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCei87554—IfInErrors counter does not report performance parameters
When using a 1GE payload over the TXP-MR-2.5G card, the IfInErrors counter does not report
oversized, undersized, or CRC errored frames. The counter reports frame coding only. This issue will
not be resolved.
CSCee45443 —FICON bridge in the MXP-MR-2.5G card transitions to SERV MODE
The FICON bridge in the MXP-MR-2.5G card transitions to SERV MODE when the FICON bridge does
not receive the expected number of idle frames between the data packets. The workaround is to not use
the MXP-MR-2.5G card with the FICON bridge. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsz94689—Incoming traffic received through any port on the affected card may flow to other
Service Provider VLANs
Incoming traffic received through any port on the affected card may flow to other Service Provider
VLANs (svlan) if the Customer VLAN (cvlan) ID on the incoming packet belongs to any VLAN range
configured on the card. This issue may occur even if the packet is received via a Network to Network
Interface (NNI) port. This issue will be resolved in a future release.10
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
CSCtb33916 —After an upgrade, traffic is discarded on a newly created VLAN
The traffic does not flow in a newly created VLAN under the following conditions:
• Software upgraded from R8.5 to R9.0 or R9.0.1
• After a soft reset of the card.
This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCtc54159—Traffic drops if CVLAN coincides between the range and single entry on different
SVLAN
There is a drop in traffic when a VLAN range entry that is created on the UNI port coincides with an
existing QinQ entry on the other ports. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
Electrical I/O Cards
This section documents caveats for Electrical I/O Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsq13945— DS3-12 card does not boot up in release 8.0 and later
The DS3-12 card (part number 87-31-00001/800-06785-01) does not boot up in release 8.0 and later.
The workaround is to use a later version of the card. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsq98420—DS1 port state (under a DS3 port) moves to OOS,DSBLD state on deletion of first VT
circuit
All DS1 ports (under a DS3 port) move to OOS,DSBLD state after the first VT circuit is deleted. This
occurs under the following conditions:
1. NE equipment includes DS3XM12 card.
2. Create five VT1.5 circuits (starting from DS1 port 1 to DS1 port 5) with state set to IS and apply the
circuits to the selected drop, from DS3 port 1 to DS3 port2.
3. Check that the DS3 port 1 and port 2 state is IS, and check that the first five DS1 ports of DS3 port
1 and port 2 are in IS state.
4. Change the DS3 port 1 state to OOS,MT.
5. Delete the fifth circuit.
6. During this condition, check that all DS1 ports of DS3 port 1 move to OOS,DSBLD.
7. Only the DS1 port that was used in the fifth VT circuit should be moved to OOS,DSBLD after the
fifth circuit is deleted. Instead, all DS1 ports move to OOS,DSBLD.
No workaround is available for this issue. However, this issue is resolved in Release 9.0.11
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
Hardware
This section documents caveats for Hardware in Release 8.6.1
CSCei36415 —Retrieving Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) inventory for FC_MR-4 returns nothing
for CLEI code
When retrieving Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) inventory for the FC_MR-4, nothing is returned for
the CLEI code. In a future release, enhanced inventory information will be available for ONS GBICs,
including the CLEI code. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCeb36749 —In a Y-cable configuration, CARLOSS alarm is major and affects service even though
traffic is fine
In a Y-cable configuration, if you remove the client standby RX fiber, a nonservice-affecting LOS is
raised, as expected. However, if you then remove the trunk active RX fiber, a nonservice-affecting
LOS-P is raised, but the previously non-service affecting LOS on the client port is now escalated to a
service-affecting alarm, in spite of no traffic having been affected. This issue will not be resolved.
Maintenance and Administration
This section documents caveats for Maintenance and Administration in Release 8.6.1.
Caution VxWorks is intended for qualified Cisco personnel only. Use of VxWorks by customers is not
recommended, nor is it supported by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center. Inappropriate use of
VxWorks commands can have a negative and service-affecting impact on your network. Consult the
troubleshooting guide for your release and platform for appropriate troubleshooting procedures. To exit
without logging in, enter a Control-D (press the Control and D keys at the same time) at the Username
prompt. To exit after logging in, type “logout” at the VxWorks shell prompt.
Note Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) does not support adding or creating more than five circuits in
auto-ranged provisioning. This restriction is intentional.
Note In releases earlier than Cisco ONS Release 4.6, you could independently set proxy server gateway
settings; however, with Cisco ONS Release 4.6.x and later, this is no longer the case. To retain the
integrity of existing network configurations, settings made in a pre-4.6 release are not changed upon
upgrading to Cisco ONS Release 7.x. Current settings are displayed in Cisco Transport Controller
(whether they were inherited from an upgrade or they were set using the current GUI).12
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
CSCse38590— Station reports “remote WTR” on a space even though the neighboring station is not
advertising Wait to Restore (WTR) state
In the RPR topology, one station reports a “remote WTR” on a space, even though the neighboring
station is not advertising Wait to Restore (WTR) state. This issue is observed after many XC
pulls/switches, deleting and recreating circuits, and replacing cross-connects completely. This issue does
not appear to have any real impact to traffic, but can potentially complicate troubleshooting. The
workaround is to configure a forced-switch on both ends of the problem span, and then remove the
forced-switch from both ends.
CSCsd44081—Series of crashes and reboots occur when policy-map includes approximately 200
class-map entries and policers
A series of crashes and reboots may occur when a policy-map includes approximately 200 class-map
entries and policers. This error appears to occur when the card boots up, the field-programmable gate
array (FPGA) process is attempting to download the new FPGA, the policy-map has at least 200
class-map entries, and traffic has been sent to the host. These conditions may trigger a
provisioning-message timeout on the ML card that can lead to a crash. Because the system boots up in
the same state, a continuous series of crashes and reboots may occur. The workaround is to remove the
circuits and wait until the node boots up with the latest FPGA image before reconfiguring the circuits.
CSCse23518—RPR SPAN-MISMATCH alarm not reported correctly
The RPR SPAN-MISMATCH alarm is not reported correctly in some situations. After creating and
deleting an East-to-East RPR circuit through TL1 cross-connects and creating a West-to-West RPR
circuit through the TL1 cross-connects script, both within less than 1 second of the other, the
RPR-SPAN-MISMATCH alarm is seen only on one side of the circuit and not on the other side. This
problem does not occur when the operations are made manually. This alarm indicates mis-cabling or
cross-connects created between two East spans or two West spans. The workaround is to ensure more
than 1 second between the deletion of one circuit and creation of the another.
CSCse53133—RTRV-COND-STS does not display path alarms on BLSR protect path
RTRV-COND-STS does not display path alarms on a BLSR protect path. When the BLSR is switched
onto protection and the protect paths have conditions on them, the TL1 retrieval command does not show
those conditions on protection paths. No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will not be
resolved.
CSCsg10963—Connections remain in OOS-AU,FLT after roll is canceled
Connections remain in OOS-AU,FLT state after roll is canceled. This issue occurs under the following
conditions:
1. Create an OC48/OC192 two-fiber BLSR ring among three Cisco ONS 15454 nodes.
2. Create five STS-1 two-fiber BLSR circuits from Cisco ONS 15454 Node 1 to Cisco ONS 15454
Node 2. All connections enter IS-NR state.
3. Perform bulk roll to roll all connections from East port to West port. Roll is not complete. UNEQ-P
alarms are raised for rollTo paths. Connection states change to OOS-AU,FLT.
4. Cancel roll.13
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
UNEQ-P alarms clear and connection states remain in OOS-AU,FLT. No workaround is available for this
issue. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCse91968—AINS-to-IS transition on BLSR four-fiber Protect does not function properly
The AINS-to-IS transition on BLSR four-fiber Protect is not functioning properly. When a BLSR
four-fiber ring is used, the AINS-to-IS transition is not correct when protect is active (ring switched).
Sometimes the wrong protect is transitioning at the IO. If the TSC card is notified incorrectly, it becomes
out of sync with the IO, and becomes stuck in AINS, even when the protect switch is released. The
Cisco PCA is also being incorrectly notified of an AINS-to-IS transition. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm04659—CTC does not report TL1 circuits when the software is upgraded to Releases 8.5.1 and
8.6
Cisco Transport Controller does not report TL1 circuits when the software is upgraded to Releases 8.5.1
and 8.6. The workaround is to close and re-launch CTC. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm08019— MXP-MR-10DME card carries traffic even if trunk port is in OOS,DSBLD state
The MXP-MR-10DME card carries traffic even if the trunk port is in OOS,DSBLD state. No workaround
is available for this issue. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm43960— Intermediate switch to protect occurs when TIM alarm is generated on
MXPP-MR-2.5G card
An intermediate switch to protect occurs when a TIM alarm is generated on an MXPP-MR-2.5G card.
No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCsm61886 —Less accuracy of the Link Integrity timer on CE-MR-10 card
The Link Integrity timer is less accurate on CE-MR-10 cards than on G1000-4 or CE1000-4 Ethernet
cards. No workaround is available for this issue. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCsg42366—Traffic outage occurs when FPGA upgrade is done with manual switch on Y-cable
A traffic outage of 120 seconds occurs when an FPGA upgrade is done with a manual switch on the
Y-cable and the client port is in out of service.
To prevent traffic outages, follow the procedure for an FPGA upgrade:
1. Configure the following:
– Near-end (NE) node, 2 MXP-MR-10DME, Working and Protect, with the Working Active and
the Protect Stand by for each protection group supported on the client ports
– Far-end (FE) node, 2 MXP-MR-10DME, Working and Protect, with the Working Active and the
Protect Stand by for each protection group supported on the client ports
– NE Working card trunk port connected to FE Working card trunk port
– NE Protect card trunk port connected to FE Protect card trunk port14
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
2. Ensure traffic is running on the Working cards, for each protection group is supported by the
MXP-MR-10DME cards.
3. Issue a Lockout of Protect to ensure traffic does not switch to Protect. Perform this on both NE and
FE protection groups.
4. Disable client ports on the Protect cards and complete the manual FPGA upgrade. The upgrade
should be hitless because traffic is accommodated on the Working facilities.
5. After the card has completed the software reset, move back the client ports to IS-NR state. Ensure
no unexpected alarm or condition is present on the Protect cards.
6. Release Lockout of Protection on both ends, on every protection group. This operation does not
affect traffic. Traffic is still carried on Working facilities.
7. Issue a Force to Protect on both NE and FE protection groups so that traffic switches from Working
to Protect facilities. Do this on every protection group supported by these cards. The Force to Protect
switching affects traffic less than 50 ms.
8. Disable client ports on the Working cards and complete the manual FPGA upgrade. The upgrade
should be hitless because traffic is accommodated on the Protect facilities.
9. After the card has completed the software reset, move back the client ports to IS-NR state. Ensure
no unexpected alarm/condition is present on the Working cards.
10. Release Force to Protect on both ends, on every protection group. If the protection group is revertive,
this operation will revert traffic to the Working facilities. Less than 50-ms hits are expected. The
operation keeps traffic on the Protect facilities if the protection group is nonrevertive and hitless.
This issue will not be resolved.
CSCta11737—Soft reset of CE card places IS-AINS port to IS when soak timer is set to zero
The CE Ethernet card with ports set in an IS-AINS state will incorrectly go to IS state when the SOAK
timer is set to 00:00 and after the soft reset of the card. No workaround is available for this issue. This
issue will be resolved in a future release.
CSCta87573—40-MUX-C card does not report CHAN-RX power when COM-TX port is not in IS or MT
state
The 40-MUX-C optical card (with vendorID=1025) does not report the optical power value in the
Provisioning->Optical Channel pane when the COM-TX port and the associated variable optical
attenuator (VOA) are not ACTIVE. Due to this, the Raman Installation Wizard fails to tune the RAMAN
span when the MUX or DEMUX option is selected, and a 40-MUX-C is used. The workaround is to
move the COM-TX port of the 40MUX-C card to IS or MT state to display the CHAN-RX power. This
issue will be resolved in a future release.15
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
NCP
This section documents caveats for NCP in Release 8.6.1.
CSCdu82934—Failure of VT circuit creation
When you auto-route a VT circuit on an ONS 15454 node, a path is computed based on the availability
of STSs on the nodes involved. This selection process, when combined with a lack of VT matrix (or
STS-VT connections) on an auto-route selected node, can result in the failure of VT circuit creation and
displays the following message,
Error Message Unable to create connection object at node
To correct this situation, manually route VT circuits in cases when auto-routing fails. The error message
will indicate which node is at issue.
Optical I/O Cards
This section documents caveats for Optical I/O Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCei26718 —Different alarm behavior between one-way and two-way VT/VC circuit creation on
path protection
On the 15454-MRC-12 card, when a one-way VT/VC circuit on path protection over 1+1 protection is
created, the alarm behavior is not the same as in two-way circuit creation. In particular, for the one-way
circuit creation, UNEQ-V and PLM-V alarms are reported, and the circuit state remains OOS. This issue
will not be resolved.
CSCin29274—Same static route on two interfaces fails
When configuring the same static route over two or more interfaces, use the following command:
ip route a-prefix a-networkmask a.b.c.d
where a.b.c.d is the address of the outgoing gateway;
or, similarly, use the command:
ip route vrf vrf-name
Do not try to configure this type of static route using only the interface instead of the address of the
outgoing gateway. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCta42253—MRC card remains in OOF state
MRC card remains in OOF state when OC-48 SFP is used in port 1. This issue will be resolved in a future
release.16
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Caveats
Path Protection
This section documents caveats for Path Protection in Release 8.6.1.
CSCee53579— Traffic hits occur in unprotected to path protection topology upgrade in
unidirectional routing
Traffic hits can occur in an unprotected to path protection topology upgrade in unidirectional routing.
You can create an unprotected circuit, then upgrade the circuit to a path protection circuit using the
Unprotected to Path Protection wizard. Select unidirectional routing in the wizard, and the circuit will
be upgraded to a path protection circuit. However, during the conversion, traffic hits of the order of
300 ms should be expected. This issue will not be resolved.
SNMP
This section documents caveats for SNMP in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsy42909—SNMP trap do not display port/slot number correctly for OCHTERM-INC alarm
The 15454 SNMP traps do not display the port and slot numbers correctly for the OCHTERM-INC
alarm. The workaround is to check the port number in the TL1 AID part of the trap (example:
LINE-1-2-RX). to determine port that has an alarm. This issue will be resolved in a future release.
TL1
This section documents caveats for TL1 in Release 8.6.1.
Note To be compatible with TL1 and DNS, all nodes must have valid names. Node names should contain
alphanumeric characters or hyphens, but no special characters or spaces.
CSCsc41650 —Node reboots during DS3XM card pre-provisioning
Using a TL1 script to rapidly preprovision or delete various cards repeatedly in the same slot will reboot
the TCC approximately 1 out of 10 times. Configuring a delay of about 10 seconds between
preprovisioning/deletion cycles causes the node to not reboot. This issue will not be resolved.
CSCtf50729—TCC crashes when debug commands are executed
The TCC crashes when debug commands are executed on a 15454 node where SNMP is configured. This
issue will be resolved in a future release.17
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
This section documents caveats resolved in Release 8.6.1.
Alarms
This section documents resolved caveats for Alarms in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsu40460—External remote alarm relay is not set correctly
The External Alarm Relay (ERA) (A1/B1 VIS/AUD on the backplane) on a node created on the
Cisco ONS 15454 platform indicates incorrectly set remote alarms when remote nodes are raised or
alarms are cleared. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. The node is stable with no MN/MJ/CR alarms on the entire network on a Cisco ONS 15454 platform.
2. Another node on the network raises an MN/MJ/CR alarm, but it does not update the REM ALARM
VIS/AUD contact pins on the backplane.
3. The issue occurs when the remote nodes clear their alarms also. (This issue has been observed since
Release 7.0).
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsm32278 —Alarms at GFP level on MXP-MR-10DME cards do not trigger FLT state on port
Alarms at generic framing procedure (GFP) level on MXP-MR-10DME cards do not trigger an FLT state
on the Virtual Facility (VFAC) port. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsk20948—VT alarms with invalid aid is raised on XM12 ports
When VT1.5 circuit is created on the ported ports of the DS3XM12 card, the VT alarms are reported
with wrong AID’s against the DS3XM12 card. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq68460—LCAS-RX-FAIL and LCAS-RX-DNU alarms are not reported for AIS-V and LOP-V for
MLMR and CEMR cards
LCAS-RX-FAIL and LCAS-RX-DNU alarms are not reported for AIS-V and LOP-V alarms but seen for
other SONET alarms (such as UNEQ) under the following condition:
• Inject AIS or LOP alarm in a HW-LCAS circuit.
This issue has been resolved.18
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CTC
This section documents resolved caveats for CTC in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsr89201—Unable to launch CTC with emsAccessState=secure after upgrade
After a release upgrade, CTC does not launch on certain ‘custom packages.’ This issue occurs only on
the custom package and while upgrading with the EMS access state set to secure.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr47355—Unable to cut new hybrid node into an existing hybrid MSTP ring
When cutting a new node into an existing hybrid ring, the user is unable to run the Update Circuits With
New Node Wizard from CTC, and receives the following error message:
EID-2034
Network Circuits Could Not Be Added: cerent.cms.ncp.missingLinks: No Reverse Link!
This issue occurs under the following condition:
• The node being cut into the ring must be a hybrid (MSTP/MSPP) shelf with OSC-CSMs created and
In-Service. The problem appears only after OSC connectivity has been established between the new
node and the adjacent nodes.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq73116—PPC does not work on secure mode node
PPC does not work on a secure mode node under the following condition:
• Create a PPC that terminates on a secure mode node. At this point, a new “unknown” node appears
and the PPC is not shown on the network map.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq88986—Filler card prevents enabling MSTP multishelf
MSTP multishelf cannot be enabled under the following condition:
• At least one filler card is plugged in the shelf.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsv01621—It is not possible to enter in the WXC card panel
The user cannot open the card configuration panel for any WXC inserted or pre-provisioned in the
system. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Configure a multidegree node with WXC.
2. Some WXC cards are inserted in the system but are then “deleted.”
This issue has been resolved.19
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsl76583—Select Affected Circuits does not work for PLM-P
In the CTC, the “Select Affected Circuits” option does not show the affected circuits for PLM-P alarm.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCtf77988—NMS support to display input voltage and ambience temperature
The CTC and CTM displays both the battery input voltage and ambient temperature. These values are
also reported on the LCD panel.
Cross Connect Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Cross Connect Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsy86915—Extra STS is utilized in the first VT cross connect created on an STS
On the first VT cross connect created on an STS, an extra STS is utilized under the following conditions:
1. The first VT cross connect created on the STS is a unidirectional circuit in IS,IS-AINS state, with
1+1 port as the cross connect source.
2. The second VT cross connect on the STS is a unidirectional or bidirectional circuit in the
OOS-DSBLD state.
3. Any circuit created afterwards is a unidirectional or bidirectional circuit in the IS state.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCtd46366—Cross-connect loopback on monitor circuit affects the traffic of the original circuit
The cross-connect loopback on monitor circuit brings down the traffic of the original circuit under the
following conditions:
1. Create STS circuit between two MSPP nodes (for example, nodeA and nodeB). The traffic is fine.
2. Build a Monitor circuit at NodeB and terminate that on third MSPP node (for example, NodeC)
3. Do “XC loopback” on monitor circuit, from node-B. Cardview->Maintenance > Loopback > STS
and check the “XC Loopback” check box.
4. This is causing the traffic outage on the original circuit at NodeA.
This issue has been resolved.
Data I/O Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Data I/O Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsm09512—Packet drop and VCG-DEG condition observed after hard reset of CE-MR-10 card
The VT1.5-64v or VT1.5-63v circuit moves to VCG degraded state following the hard reset of a
CE-MR-10 card. The number of members that are not available for use is approximately 6 to 10. This
issue has been resolved.20
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCso66424—LCAS VCG Member Rx side in Add State condition persists after hard reset of
CE-MR-10 card
The LCAS VCG Member Rx side in Add State condition might persist after a hard reset of a CE-MR-10
card carrying a VT1.5 HW-LCAS circuit with a member count of greater than 40. This issue has been
resolved.
CSCsq16464—Traffic on nodes duplicates on ML-series cards
On ML-series cards, if a priority-multicast is configured and a wrap occurs on the shared packet ring
(SPR), traffic on some nodes will be duplicated, which can result in sequencing issues in the multicast
stream. Multicast video may experience deterioration in clarity. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsu02307—Unable to add members with SD-P alarm present on one member
The ADD condition persists when adding more members to the LCAS circuit signal degrade-path (SD-P)
is present on a member. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Create an STS1-2v VCAT, HW-LCAS between a Cisco ONS 15310-MA and Cisco ONS 15454
node.
2. Put the test set in through mode (Agilent VCAT test set).
3. Inject SD-P or SF-P toward the Cisco ONS 15310-MA node. As expected, members go into out of
group (OOG).
4. Add some more members (for example, 5) on the span that does not have the test set. As expected,
members should be added; however, members are not added to the VCAT group, causing the ADD
condition to persist.
5. Add more members when SD-P is present on one of the members and SD-P is injected through the
Agilent test set.
Note This issue is seen only with the Agilent GFP test set.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsw64346—UNEQ raised on CEMR-10 HW LCAS circuit after XC switch
AIS-P conditions change to UNEQ-P on a trunk card that corresponds to members of a HW-LCAS circuit
after the XC is switched under the following conditions:
1. Create the circuit with POS ports in IS state. Later, the POS port on one end is placed in
OOS,DSBLD state.
2. Perform the XC side-switch is performed.
This issue has been resolved.21
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsu02236—Members of the VT-1.5 LCAS circuits are in idle state
On an ML-MR-10 card, injecting a signal degrade (SD) or signal fail-V (SF-V) on one member and
switching the cross-connect (XC) main causes a few members of the VT-1.5 LCAS circuits to become
stuck in the Idle state. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Configure two ML-MR-10 cards, that is, ML-MR-10 card A and ML-MR-10 card B.
2. Create a VT1.5-64V circuit between ML-MR-10 card A and ML-MR-10 card B.
3. Inject an SD/SF-P on one member and observe that traffic is reduced on the affected member.
4. Switch the XC main and observe the Stuck Idle state (with sequence number 63) on a few members.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr67830—High traffic hit seen with larger HW-LCAS circuits with fiber pull
A high traffic hit is seen on fiber pull for a HW-LCAS, split-fiber circuit on CE-MR-10, CE-MR-6, and
ML-MR-10 cards under the following condition:
• For larger-member HW-LCAS, split-fiber circuits on CE-MR-10, CE-MR-6, and ML-MR-10 cards,
a high traffic hit is seen when pulling a fiber on one span.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr06085—Error message on CPU switching packets greater than 1500 bytes in length
An error message on CPU switching packets greater than 1500 bytes in length occurs under the following
conditions:
• When an IP multicast packet of size > 1500 bytes is received on a BVI interface, an error message
is displayed on the console/vty and packets are dropped.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsm99133 —Packet loss on CE-MR-10 cards running more than 8.5 Gbps traffic during software
upgrade
Upgrading software on a Cisco ONS 15454 from Release 8.5.0 or 8.5.1 to a later version causes packet
loss on CE-MR-10 cards carrying more than 8.5 Gbps of traffic. This issue has been resolved.
CSCso55327—TCC switch on CE-MR-10 and ML-MR-10 cards causes a traffic hit of up to 180 ms
A reset of a TCC switch on CE-MR-10 and ML-MR-10 cards causes a traffic hit of up to 180 ms on all
circuits with software earlier release 9.0. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq20532—Traffic hit of 25 ms occurs in a low-order LCAS circuit
A traffic hit of about 25 ms may occur in a low-order LCAS circuit if members in the OOS,OOG state
are deleted in CE-MR-10, CE-MR-6, or ML-MR-10 cards. No workaround is available for this issue.
This issue will not be resolved.22
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsq24264—Traffic hit on CE100T-8 cards during an upgrade from release 8.5.0 to release 8.5.2 or
8.6
An upgrade on Cisco ONS 15454 from Release 8.5.0 to release 8.5.2 or 8.6 followed by a power cycle
of the node causes a traffic hit on CE-100T-8 cards. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq52786—Link Integrity does not work for HW-LCAS circuits
The far-end port does not go down when an AIS-P, AIS-V, or LOP alarm is injected into the HW-LCAS
circuit on CE-MR-10 and CE-MR-6 cards. A TPTFAIL alarm is raised on the injected port and the port
goes down. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq55568—High traffic hit while upgrading from pre 9.00 load on CE-MR-10, CE-MR-6 cards
A high traffic hit occurs while upgrading from pre 9.00 load on CE-MR-10 and CE-MR-6 cards. This
issue has been resolved.
CSCsq77755—UNEQ alarmed HW-LCAS member will go into In-Group when CTX or XC card is reset
Resetting the CTX/XC card while a HW-LCAS member has the UNEQ alarm raised causes the
HW-LCAS member to go into In-Group state. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Create a HW-LCAS circuit on a CE-MR-10/CE-MR-6/ML-MR-10 card.
2. Inject UNEQ on a HW-LCS member. Because of this defect, the member will be taken out-of-group.
3. Reset the CTX/XC card. HW-LCAS members with the UNEQ alarm raised will go into In-Group.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr41260—RPR convergence time is more than expected (50 ms) in ML-100X
RPR convergence time is more than expected (50 ms) in ML-100X cards and is noticed under the
following condition:
• RX fiber cut occurs on trunk of RPR-IEEE 802.17 ring.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr78331—Cannot create a STS-1-2v or a STS1 circuit on the CE-100 card
Cannot create a STS-1-2v or STS1 circuit when the following circuits are already provisioned: STS3c,
STS-1-2v, STS-1-1v, VT-1-7v. This issue has been resolved.
CSCtc66943—Link does not come up when autonegotiation is enabled
The link fails to come up when the CE-1000-4 card and the HP ProCurve Switch are connected, and
autonegotiation is enabled on both ends of the circuit. This issue has been resolved.23
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCtf10958—Path PMs are displayed for CE-MR/ML-MR Cards
The HTML PM file contains STS (or hop for SDH) rows related to CE-MR and ML-MR cards when a
STS/VC circuit is present on the cards. This causes unwanted warning messages in the CTM PM logs.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCse74833—GFP-CSF is not detected by CE-MR-10 and ML-MR-10 cards
GFP-CSF condition is not detected by CE-MR-10 and ML-MR-10 cards on a circuit with GFP
encapsulation. This issue has been resolved.
DWDM
This section documents resolved caveats for DWDM in Release 8.6.1
CSCso73947—E port is down after MXP-MR-10DME card power up
The E port is down for 2 minutes after an MXP-MR-10DME card is powered up under the following
conditions:
• The card is connected to Fiber Channel (FC) switches on both ends.
• The switches are connected to 4G-FC ports.
The system does not report an alarm. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsu06528—GE_XP and 10GE_XP Trail Trace receive incorrect message
An incorrect “received string” message is displayed on the CTC card TTI panel continually when TTI is
enabled even though the line card receives the correct string and correct alarm behavior. This issue
occurs under the following conditions:
1. Set up a node with two GE_XP cards.
2. Connect card A on port 21 to card B on the same port, and card A on port 22 to card B on port 22 card.
3. Enable TTI on both trunks. The strings are received correctly.
4. Disable TTI on port 22. Port 21 reports an incorrect received string.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsx55119—Ingress COS remarking not working for NNI ports on GE_XP card
Ingress COS remarking does not work for NNI ports on GE_XP cards. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsw49064—GR3 protection is not triggered by SD or SF alarms on trunk ports
GR3 protection is not triggered by SD/SF alarms on trunk ports under the following conditions:
1. Configure a GR3 protection on a ring of muxponder cards.
2. Generate an SF or an SD on a trunk. The protection is not triggered.
This issue has been resolved.24
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsu49109— Y-cable does not switch for client syncloss on TXP-MR-10E card
On TXP_MR_10E cards, the SYNCLOSS alarm on the client port does not cause the Y- cable switch
under the following conditions:
1. Install a Y-cable with G709 on a 10GE/10GFC card.
2. Inject a SYNCLOSS alarm in the client receiving fiber on the far-end working card. The near-end
protection does not perform a switch to protection.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr60270—Upgrade issues in GE_XP/10GE_XP cards
The following issues are noticed:
• Electrical SFP
If a copper SFP has a link flap (cable disconnect or autoneg restart) the link will come up but traffic
will not flow.
• VLAN range issue
After an upgrade, if the user tries to add or configure a new VLAN range, it does not work. Also,
previously configured VLAN ranges will not work
• Selective configuration
When there is a sequence of add and delete selective operations followed by a reset, new selective
operations might not work after reset.
• Metering on port1
If a VLAN range is configured, after an upgrade, metering on port 1 will not work anymore. Traffic
will flow, but metering is not applied.
These issues occur when the software is upgraded from Release 8.0 to 8.5.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsr22181—IPG change for Copper SFP
Upgrading the software from a software release with CRC errors issue for traffic on a copper PPM does
not automatically fix the issue. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
– In a release that includes a copper-card pair, most of the packets are dropped due to CRC errors
(even in normal working condition)
– Upgrade the software to a new release to fix this issue for new copper PPMs.
Copper PPMs with CRC issues that were already installed before the software upgrade will again drop
packets.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq99089—Traffic does not flow on the fast automatic protection switching (FAPS) circuit
Traffic does not flow on the fast automatic protection switching (FAPS) circuit when the master node is
powered up after being powered down. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Enable GR3/FAPS.25
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
2. Remove the fiber from the working trunk (trunk_1). The card switches to the protected trunk
(trunk_2) and traffic is up and running.
3. Power down the master node.
4. Power up the master node.
5. The master node is up and running, but traffic does not flow.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq99680—Unwanted PM updates and alarms occur
While an LOS (or TRAIL-SIGNAL-FAIL) alarm is present, the following unwanted PM updates and
alarms occur:
• FEC-PM continues increment.
• UNC-WORD alarm is raised.
This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Enable a 10GE-XP trunk port, configured with FEC on and G709 on.
2. The trunk port reports an LOS alarm due to a valid reason.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq78030—Continuous squelch asserts or clears are observed on MXP-MR-2.5G card
Continuous squelch asserts or clears are observed on an MXP-MR-2.5G card. This issue occurs under
the following condition:
• SYNCLOSS alarm is present on the peer card.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq78337—Unable to provision ONS-SE-G2F-LX= (10-2273-02) on a TXP-MR-2.5G card for ISC3
ONS-SE-G2F-LX= (10-2273-02) on a TXP-MR-2.5G card for ISC3 cannot be provisioned while using
the Release 8.5.x software version.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq33614 —Hard reset of MXP-MR-10DME and MXP-2.5G-10E cards raises IMPROPRVML alarm
A hard reset on MXP-MR-10DME and MXP-2.5G-10E cards sometimes causes the improper removal
alarm to be raised on some ports. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq46283— Packet loss on MXP-MR-10DME cards provisioned with 4G or 4G FICON
Continuous packet loss is seen for 10 to 15 minutes on MXP-MR-10DME cards provisioned with 4G or
4G FICON and the port is put from IS state to OOS,MT state, and then back to IS state. This issue has
been resolved.26
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsl70268 —Severity is not cleared when the raised alarm is cleared
When an alarm raised on a port is cleared, the severity is not cleared. This issue has been resolved.
CSCso92518—TIM alarm is not cleared on TXP-MR-10E and MXP-MR-10DME cards
On TXP-MR-10E and MXP-MR-10DME cards, configuring a SONET section trace on the trunk port
when G.709 is ON causes a stuck TIM alarm. This problem does not occur on a G.709 OFF trunk port.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsq16317—GE-XP card in L1 mode reports FEC Uncorrected Word (UNC-WORD) condition
The GE-XP card in L1 mode reports the FEC Uncorrected Word (UNC-WORD) condition when G.709
is enabled and FEC is disabled on both ends of the GE-XP trunk port. This issue has been resolved.
Electrical I/O Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Electrical I/O Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsq48070 —Standby TCC crashes during database restore
The standby TCC crashes during a database restore in the following scenarios.
Scenario 1:
1. Backup the database on a node.
2. Add DS3XM12 or DS3XM6 cards on the node.
3. Restore the database that was backed up.
Scenario 2:
1. Create a 1:1 or 1:N protection group of Ds3XM12 cards.
2. Backup the database.
3. Delete the protection group.
4. Restore the database.
Upon doing this operation, the standby TCC that should become active may reboot. This issue has been
resolved.
CSCsq58173—TCC reboots when configuring DS3XM12 or mixed 1:1 or 1:N PG
TCC Reboot when configuring DS3XM12 or mixed 1:1 or 1:N PG. This issue occurs under the following
conditions:
1. Configure the DS3XM12 or mixed 1:1 or 1:N PG.
2. The ACT TCC reboots in about 2 minutes.
This issue has been resolved.27
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsu20391—FE-AIS and RAI alarms are incorrectly reported
The far-end AIS (FE-AIS) and remote alarm indication (RAI) alarms are incorrectly reported and persist
on the DS3 ports even though the FE-AIS is not present. This issue occurs under the following
conditions:
1. Set up an STS-1 circuit between a DS3 port on a DS312E card and an OC-48 port.
2. Connect a test set to the DS3 port.
3. Install a fiber jumper hairpin (loopback) on the OC-48 port.
4. Set up the DS3 port for C-bit.
5. Insert FE-AIS with a test set. For example, on Agilient 718, set the alarm type to DS3 FEAC,
message DS3 AIS RECEIVED.
6. FE-AIS and RAI alarms are reported on the NE against the DS3 port.
7. Disconnect the cable on the DS3 RX port to cause an LOS on the DS3 port.
8. Stop inserting FE-AIS with the test set. Wait for 15 seconds.
9. Reconnect the cable on the DS3 RX port to clear the LOS alarm.
10. Observe that the FE-AIS and RAI alarms incorrectly return after the LOS clears.
Note This issue occurs when the FE-AIS is present, a higher priority alarm is raised (for example, LOS), and
then the FE-AIS is fixed before the LOS is cleared. After the LOS clears, the Cisco ONS 15454
incorrectly raises the FE-AIS and RAI again. This issue is seen on Cisco ONS 15454 SONET 7.0.5 or
SDH 7.0.7 and DS3 cards.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsu39177—After deletion of VT circuit and creation of STS-1 circuit, there is traffic loss
After deleting a VT circuit and creating an STS-1 circuit, traffic loss occurs. A stuck AIS-V alarm causes
the traffic loss.
This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Create 28 VT circuits on any 2 ports of an XM12.
2. Inject some line level errors (LOS) on all the VTs.
3. Delete the VT circuits and create STS circuits.
4. The stuck VT AIS is seen.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsu47448—For DS1 FEAC, loopcode in DS3 framing FAC is inserted on odd DS1 ports
In an XM12 portless operation in CTC, injecting far-end alarm and control (FEAC) codes on the odd
port is reported on the even side of the portless circuit. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Create an XM12 portless port between any two OC-N cards.
2. Execute a DS1 loopcode (DS3 FEAC) on the even side of the portless port. Loopcodes are reported
on the odd side.
This issue has been resolved.28
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCtb74439—DS3XM cards insert VT-AIS downstream
DS3XM card inserts an VT-AIS downstream when DS1 defects are detected on the VT circuits with
IS,AINS state. This issue has been resolved.
Maintenance and Administration
This section documents resolved caveats for Maintenance and Administration in Release 8.6.1.
Caution VxWorks is intended for qualified Cisco personnel only. Use of VxWorks by customers is not
recommended, nor is it supported by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center. Inappropriate use of
VxWorks commands can have a negative and service-affecting impact on your network. Consult the
troubleshooting guide for your release and platform for appropriate troubleshooting procedures. To exit
without logging in, enter a Control-D (press the Control and D keys at the same time) at the Username
prompt. To exit after logging in, type “logout” at the VxWorks shell prompt.
Note Cisco Transport Planner (CTP) does not support adding or creating more than five circuits in auto-ranged
provisioning. This restriction is intentional.
Note In releases earlier than Cisco ONS Release 4.6, you could independently set proxy server gateway
settings; however, with Cisco ONS Release 4.6.x and later, this is no longer the case. To retain the
integrity of existing network configurations, settings made in a pre-4.6 release are not changed upon
upgrading to Cisco ONS Release 7.x. Current settings are displayed in Cisco Transport Controller
(whether they were inherited from an upgrade or they were set using the current GUI).
CSCsg16500—ROLL-PEND condition seen for VT circuits on CTC conditions pane
The ROLL-PEND condition is seen for VT circuits on the CTC conditions pane.
1. Create a two-node OC-12 unprotected setup among two Cisco ONS 15454 nodes.
2. Create one VT circuit from Cisco ONS 15454 Node 1, OC-3 card to Cisco ONS 15454 Node 2, OC-12 card.
3. Give autobulkroll to circuit on the OC-12 span from STS-1 to STS-4.
4. Force the valid signal using ED-BULKROLL command to “true.” Bulkroll completes and no rolls
are present on any of the nodes.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsl76684—Delay in AIC-I card becoming active
When activating or reverting an AIC-I card, there is a delay in becoming active. This issue has been
resolved.29
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
CSCsm14521—Inconsistency between LOCKOUT command status and switching status on Y-cable
protected MXP-MR-10DME card
Inconsistency occurs between LOCKOUT command status and switching status on Y-cable protected
MXP-MR-10DME cards. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsm25619 —Traffic is not restored after card reset
Traffic is not restored when the near-end and far-end nodes of a Y-cable protected MXP-MR-10DME
card are unplugged and replugged. This issue has been resolved.
CSCtd42075—Upgrade of DS3XM-6 card to DS3XM-12 card leaves first 6 ports of DS1’s Unframed
When DS3XM-6 card is upgraded to a DS3XM-12 card, the first 6 ports of the DS1’s show framing type
as unframed resulting in traffic loss. This issue has been resolved.
NCP
This section documents resolved caveats for NCP in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsu10564—DCN-EXT: OTS PPC problem with OSPF enabled on LAN
The provisionable patchcord (PPC) link does not show up in the CTC network view and it is not possible
to route circuits. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Connect two nodes with optical transport section (OTS) PPC. At least one of the two nodes does not
have any other service channel, that is, optical service channel (OSC), data communication channel
(DCC), or generic communications channel (GCC). Both nodes have OSPF enabled on a LAN with
area ID 0.0.0.0.
2. Although the PPC link is correctly configured on both nodes it is not added to the OSPF link table,
which prevents the link from showing in CTC.
This has been resolved.30
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Resolved Caveats for Release 8.6.1
Optical I/O Cards
This section documents resolved caveats for Optical I/O Cards in Release 8.6.1.
CSCsr76682—Bit errors observed on OC192XFP after both XC cards reboots
Bit errors are observed on the OC192XFP card after both the XC-10G cross-connect cards hard reboots.
Bit errors occur under the following conditions:
1. Traffic passes through the OC192 XFP card.
2. Both the XC (cross-connect) cards are hard reset at the same time (due to power cycling of the node),
or you lock out one XC card and do a hard reset of the active XC card.
3. The XC card comes up and becomes active and the traffic is up again.
4. Dribbling bit errors are seen on some of the paths passing through the OC192 XFP card.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsv54817—STS-96c circuits do not work with OC192XFP cards
STS-96c circuits raise path unequipped alarms if the circuit uses an OC192XFP card as a source,
destination, or trunk. This issue occurs under the following conditions:
1. Provision an STS-96c circuit with one end of the circuit on an OC192XFP card or using an
OC192XFP as the trunk card.
2. The path unequipped alarm is raised on the STS-96c circuit.
This issue has been resolved.
CSCsl87931— ALS condition permanently lost when manual restart is performed
When manual restart is performed on the OPT-BST-E card, an ALS alarm is cleared and a LASER-APR
alarm is raised. The OPT-BST-E card shuts down because the line cannot be restored, and the
LASER-APR alarm is cleared; however, the ALS alarm is not raised. This issue has been resolved.
CSCsu50003—Traffic loss when concatenated unidirectional circuit is provisioned through 1 + 1
protected clients
Traffic loss occurs when a concatenated unidirectional circuit is provisioned through 1 + 1 protected
clients under the following conditions:
1. Set up the Cisco ONS 15454 NE with two ADM-10G cards as peer group (double card).
2. Create 1+1 protection group between client ports of ADM peer group.
3. Create a unidirectional concatenated circuit (STS-3c onward) with the source as the working port of
the 1 + 1 group and the destination (drop) as the client or trunk on the card where the protect port of
1 + 1 is configured. Traffic goes down if the working port (1 + 1 protection group) state is ACTIVE.
4. Create a unidirectional concatenated circuit with the source as the working port of the 1 + 1 group
and destination (drop) on the card where the working port of 1 + 1 is configured. Traffic goes down
if the protect port (1 + 1 protection group) state is ACTIVE.
This issue has been resolved.31
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
New Features and Functionality
New Features and Functionality
No new software features are included in Release 8.6.1.
Related Documentation
This section lists release-specific and platform-specific documents.
Release-Specific Documents
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 8.5.2
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Release 8.5.2
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 8.5.3
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Release 8.5.3
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310-MA, Release 8.5.3
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Release 8.6
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310-MA, Release 8.6
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310-CL, Release 8.6
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Release 8.6.1
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310-MA, Release 8.6.1
• Release Notes for the Cisco ONS 15310-CL, Release 8.6.1
Platform-Specific Documents
Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1 is based on Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.
• Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
Provides installation, turn up, test, and maintenance procedures
• Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual
Provides technical reference information for SONET/SDH cards, nodes, and networks
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide
Provides technical reference information for DWDM cards, nodes, and networks
• Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide
Provides a list of SONET alarms and troubleshooting procedures, general troubleshooting
information, transient conditions, and error messages
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
Provides a comprehensive list of TL1 commands
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
Provides general information, procedures, and errors for TL1
• Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide
Provides software feature and operation information for Ethernet cards
• Cisco ONS 15454 Software Upgrade Guide, Release 8.5.x32
Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 Release 8.6.1
OL-22856-01
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the
international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also
includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What's New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What's New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a
free service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco's trademarks
can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word
partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1005R)
© 2010 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Americas Headquarters:
Cisco Systems, Inc., 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA
Cisco Custom Product CD Read Me
Contents
• Notice of End-User License Agreement, page 1
• System Requirements, page 1
• Launching the CD User Interface, page 1
• Accessing Document PDF Files Without Using the CD User Interface, page 2
• Contact Information, page 2
Notice of End-User License Agreement
Please read the license terms regarding the use of this product found on the CD. By using the product,
you agree to be bound by these license terms. If you do not agree with these terms, promptly return the
unused product, related equipment, and hardware (with proof of payment) to the place of purchase for a
full refund.
System Requirements
• Windows XP/2000
• Adobe Reader
If you do not have Adobe Reader on your system, you may install it from the \docs\third party\Adobe
folder on the CD.
Launching the CD User Interface
Depending on your configuration, the CD should load when you insert it into the CD drive. If it does not
load, follow the instructions below.
• For Windows XP/2000 Users:2
Cisco Custom Product CD Read Me
Accessing Document PDF Files Without Using the CD User Interface
– Double-click the file named launch.html located in the root directory of the CD.
• For Unix/Linux Users:
– If you have a windowing system, such as Common Desktop Environment, open the CD-ROM
from the File Manager and double-click the file named launch.html located in the root directory
of the CD.
– If you do not have a windowing system, mount the CD-ROM drive using standard mounting
instructions for your system. After the CD-ROM is mounted, double-click the file named
launch.html located in the root directory of the CD.
Accessing Document PDF Files Without Using the CD User
Interface
You may access the document PDF files without using the CD user interface. The document PDFs are
located under the docs folder on the CD.
Contact Information
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
www.cisco.com
CCDE, CCENT, Cisco Eos, Cisco Lumin, Cisco Nexus, Cisco StadiumVision, Cisco TelePresence, the Cisco logo, DCE, and Welcome to the Human
Network are trademarks; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn and Cisco Store are service marks; and Access Registrar, Aironet,
AsyncOS, Bringing the Meeting To You, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, CCVP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork
Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Collaboration Without Limitation,
EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Event Center, Fast Step, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, iQ
Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, iQuick Study, IronPort, the IronPort logo, LightStream, Linksys, MediaTone, MeetingPlace,
MeetingPlace Chime Sound, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, PCNow, PIX, PowerPanels, ProConnect, ScriptShare,
SenderBase, SMARTnet, Spectrum Expert, StackWise, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, WebEx, and the WebEx logo
are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply
a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0807R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and
figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
© 2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Americas Headquarters:
Cisco Systems, Inc., 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET
MSPP Systems
The Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP SDH tunneling provides a SDH traffic transport solution with
scalable SONET, data or DWDM multiservice capabilities.
The Cisco ONS 15454 leadership in the optical transport market is partly due to its unprecedented
aggregation capacity where any type of traffic can be efficiently multiplexed together and transported
within the metro network or handed off to DWDM networks for inter-city transport.
Similar to SONET TDM and data services, SDH traffic too is aggregated and transported across an ONS
15454 network. STM-1 to STM-64 payloads are transported over SONET from any port on a
Cisco ONS 15454 OC-N card provisioned to support SDH signals.
Note This application note is applicable to software releases 6.x and later.
Optical Modules
All Cisco ONS 15454 optical modules support both SONET and SDH signals. Once a port is provisioned
using Provisioning > Port in CTC to support an SDH signal, the cards process the received signal as
follows:
• Terminates the incoming SDH signal (RSOH, MSOH and AU pointer(s))
• Pointer processes to locate the J1 byte of the HO-POH (1st byte of VC-4-Nc)
• Maps VC-4-Nc into a STS-Mc where M = 3 x N
• Inserts STS-Mc into an OC-M facility where the SPE pointer is created and the S1S0 bits of the H1
byte are set to 00 (received as 10 from the SDH line)
At the far end of an SDH tunnel, the reverse process takes place, transitioning the signal from SONET
to SDH as follows:
• Drops STS-Mc from OC-M facility (SPE pointer processed and J1 byte of the HO-POH located)
• Maps STS-Mc into a VC-4-Nc where M = 3 x N
• Creates an AU pointer with the value 10 for the SS bits as required for SDH2
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
• Generates an STM-N signal with MSOH and RSOH
The SDH to SONET mapping depends on the SDH payload type being transported, which the user
defines during the creation of the SONET circuits used to transport the SDH traffic. For example, an
STM-4 port can be mapped in a number of alternative ways, depending on the content of the signal
including:
• One STS-12c circuit to transport a 600M concatenated data payload.
• Four (4) STS-3c circuits created to transport a sub-structured signal from a STM-4 port to overwrite
the pointers of all the incoming AU4s and enable the visibility and access to the sub-structure, when
the signal is converted back to SDH at the end optical interface.
The multi-circuit creation capacity of the CTC allows the user to provision several circuits with the same
characteristics at one go. CTC automatically duplicates the creation process, applying sequential circuit
names and picking available resources to terminate the circuits on the same end interfaces.
Each ONS 15454 optical card can be provisioned to support SDH or SONET traffic on a port-to-port
basis. When configured for SDH signal, the ONS 15454 node may be provisioned for line timing from
the incoming SDH signal. Additionally, the SDH configured optical modules (except the OC3/STM1
card) can support the ONS 15454 DCC tunneling feature. This is further explained in the “Managing
Third-Party Network Equipment” section on page 6.
SDH configured ports can be provisioned as part of a 1+1 linear protection group to interconnect with
an SDH device. However, interoperability tests with third party SDH equipment must be conducted to
completely validate the solution. SNCP and MS-SPRing are not supported on the ONS 15454 SONET
platform. Once encapsulated in the SONET payload, the SDH traffic can be transported through any
SONET network topology to the other end of the tunnel.
Table 1 SDH to SONET Circuit Type Mapping
Module
Provisioned SDH
interface SONET circuit type mapping Equivalent SDH circuits
OC-3/STM-1
1310 IR
STM-1 optical STS-3c VC-4
OC-12/STM-4
1310 IR, 1310 LR,
1550 LR
STM-4 optical 4 x STS-3c or STS-12c
depending on payload type
4 x VC-4 or VC-4-4c depending on
payload type
OC-48/STM-16
1310 IR, 1550 LR
High speed slot
STM-16 optical 16 x STS-3c or 4 x STS-12c or
STS-48c or any STS-12c /
STS-3c mix depending on
payload type
16 x VC-4 or 4 x VC-4-4c or VC-4-16c or
any VC-4-4c / VC-4 mix depending on
payload type
OC-48/STM-16
1310 IR, 1550 LR
Any slot
STM-16 optical 16 x STS-3c or 4 x STS-12c or
STS-48c or any STS-12c /
STS-3c mix depending on
payload type
16 x VC-4 or 4 x VC-4-4c or VC-4-16c or
any VC-4-4c / VC-4 mix depending on
payload type
OC-192/STM-64
1550 LR High speed
slot
STM-64 optical 64 x STS-3c or 16 x STS-12c
or 4 x STS-48c or STS-192c or
any STS-48c / STS-12c /
STS-3c mix depending on
payload type
64 x VC-4 or 16 x VC-4-4c or 4 x
VC-4-16c or VC-4-64c or any VC-4-16c /
VC-4-4c / VC-4 mix depending on
payload type3
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
When provisioned to support SDH signal, the ONS 15454 optical modules continue to report alarms and
performance measurements (PMs) in the same manner as if they were provisioned for standard SONET
transport. This allows an ONS 15454 node supporting SDH transport to report alarms in a consistent
manner with the rest of the SONET nodes in the network.
SDH Over SONET Applications
The SDH transport feature of the ONS 15454 addresses a variety of applications, with two applications
depicted in Figure 1:
• A simple SDH point-to-point transport tunnel, where both terminations have the same bit-rate, is the
basic tunneling feature of the ONS 15454.
• SDH signal aggregation allows the user to consolidate lower speed signals to higher speed signals,
that is STM-1s and STM-4s signals are consolidated into STM-16 or STM-64 signals.
Figure 1 SDH Over Sonet Applications
ONS 15454
SONET/DWDM
sub-network
ONS
15454
ONS
15454
SDH
STM-1/4/16/64
Handoffs
SDH
STM-1/4/16/64
Handoffs
A Point-to-Point tunnel
B Aggregation and tunneling
ONS 15454
SONET/DWDM
sub-network
ONS
15454
SDH
STM-4
Handoffs
SDH
STM-16/64
Handoffs
ONS
15454
ONS
15454
ONS
15454
SDH
STM-1
Handoffs
SDH
STM-16
Handoffs
2770274
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
Submarine Link Extension
In most carrier applications, transoceanic submarine cables transport SDH traffic. For North American
carriers, where SONET infrastructure is the norm for domestic business, the ability to transport these
AU4 mapped SDH signals with the same SONET network provides significant economic and
competitive advantages. This SDH transport capability enables the service provider to interconnect
submarine landing sites to their international traffic dispatching site, which may be located hundreds of
miles away from the coast, using a common North American network (see Figure 2). The ONS 15454
allows North American service providers to deliver value-added services and backhaul SDH submarine
traffic, leveraging a common next generation SONET infrastructure based on the ONS 15454.
Figure 2 Submarine Network Link Extension Application
SDH Aggregation Within SDH Markets
Service providers positioned in SDH markets to deliver STM-1 and higher speed services can benefit
from the Cisco ONS 15454. An ONS 15454 based network can be used to deliver high-speed leased line
services to customers leveraging its SDH aggregation and tunneling capability. As illustrated in
Figure 3, an ONS 15454 network enables service providers to differentiate themselves by offering
high-speed native Ethernet connectivity, along with more traditional private line STM-based services.
STM-N leased lines can be offered within the metro network as well as between Metro Area Networks
(MANs), leveraging the aggregation capability of SDH payloads for long haul transport.
277028
ONS 15454
SONET/DWDM
sub-network
ONS
15454
ONS
15454
SDH
Handoffs
to sub-marine
DWDM
STM16/64
SDH
Handoffs
to SDH
DXC
SONET/Data
services SONET/Data
services
SONET/Data
services International traffic
dispatching site
Sub-marine landing site5
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
Figure 3 SDH Aggregation Applications
Engineering Rules for Deploying SDH over SONET
The engineering rules to be followed when deploying SDH over SONET transport capability of the
Cisco ONS 15454 are:
1. When OC-12/STM-4 (IR, 1310 LR and 1550 LR) or OC-48/STM-16 high-speed (IR and LR) port
is provisioned to support SDH, alarms at the path level are not supported due to improper B3 byte
calculation. The signal degrade alarm at the path level (SD-P) must be disabled on the port to
suppress unreliable alarm notifications. Also, the PM data at the path level is not reliable and the
associated threshold values must be set to 0 to avoid threshold crossing alerts (TCA) notification on
that port.
This limitation does not exist with the OC-3/STM-1, OC-48/STM-16 AS (any slot), and
OC-192/STM-64 cards.
2. The ONS 15454 can be deployed for SDH hairpinning appications where both ends of an SDH
tunnel terminate on the same network element for all cases as stated in Table 2:
National or Pan-continental
SDH/DWDM network
ONS 15454
SONET/DWDM
STM-N
Handoffs
STM-N
Handoffs
STM16/64 handoffs
for LH inter-metro
connections
277029
STM-N
Handoffs
STM-N
Handoffs
STM-N
Handoffs
Metro area
Table 2 SDH Hairpinning Compatibility
OC-3_4 OC3_8 OC-12 OC12-4
OC-48
(High Speed
Slot)
OC-48 (Any
Speed slot) OC-192 MRC-12 MRC-4 OC192-XFP
OC-3_4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OC3_8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OC-12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes6
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
Figure 4 Typical SDH Hairpin Circuit on 15454 ANSI Node
3. AU3 SDH tunneling is not supported on ONS 15454. The tunneling capacity presented in this
application note relates to AU4 SDH multiplexing structure.
Managing Third-Party Network Equipment
You can use the DCC tunneling feature of Cisco ONS 15454 to provide the ability to transparently
interconnect third party management channels of the connected SDH networks.
The DCC tunnels from third party SDH devices pass through ONS 15454 nodes without the need for
understanding the DCC message content. This is possible because the SONET protocol provides four
data communication channels (DCCs) for network element operations, administration, maintenance, and
provisioning (OAM&P). One data channel is in the SONET section overhead layer (D1-D3 bytes) and
three data channels are in the SONET line overhead layer (D4-D12 bytes). The ONS 15454 system
allows you to leverage the line overhead to transport the Section DCC (SDCC) overhead of the
third-party.
OC12-4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OC-48
(High speed
slot)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OC-48 (Any
Speed slot)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OC-192 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MRC-12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MRC-4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OC192-XFP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 2 SDH Hairpinning Compatibility
OC-3_4 OC3_8 OC-12 OC12-4
OC-48
(High Speed
Slot)
OC-48 (Any
Speed slot) OC-192 MRC-12 MRC-4 OC192-XFP
277030
OC-n Port
Type=SDH
OC-n Port
Type=SDH
X*STS-Nc circuit as in
Table 17
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
The ONS 15454 system supports DCC tunnels on all optical cards (except the OC-3/STM-1 card). Each
optical card can support the primary SDCC and up to three DCC tunnels through Tunnel #1, Tunnel #2,
and Tunnel #3. The DCC tunnels that can be created are listed in Table 3:
Various types of connections can be configured that includes SDCC to tunnels, SDCC to SDCC, tunnel
to tunnel, and tunnel to SDCC. The following guidelines apply when DCC tunnels are created:
• The ONS 15454 can support a maximum of 32 DCC tunnel connections per shelf
• The ONS 15454 can have up to 10 SDCC terminations per shelf
• An SDCC that is terminated cannot be used as a DCC tunnel end-point
• An SDCC that is used as a DCC tunnel end-point cannot be terminated
• All DCC tunnel connections are bidirectional
The ONS 15454 also supports the upgrade of unprotected DCC tunnels to protected linear 1+1 tunnels.
Configuring Cisco ONS 15454 to Carry Ether traffic Through SONET and SDH Network
CTC on a SONET node does not allow an SDH node to be added to it (or vice versa). So, an end-to-end
circuit provisioning is not possible. The SONET and SDH nodes must be configured separately.
Note Any Ethernet card that supports STS-3c or multiples of STS-3c circuit type can be provisioned as
explained in this section. Data traffic similar to Ethernet traffic can also be provisioned if the front port
(Eth, Gigi, and FC) of the IO cards (CE-1000,CE-MR,and FC-MR) process the frames.
The following steps provide a configuration overview to connect a SONET node to an SDH node.
Step 1 Optical Port Configuration.
To connect a SONET node to an SDH node, ensure:
• Both ends of the fiber connections are of the same matching rate. For example, if a SONET node
has OC-48 port, then the peer SDH port must be STM-16.
• Port in the SONET node must be configured as TYPE = SDH (go to CTC > Card > Line tab. Select
SONET node and select Type as SDH).
Step 2 Circuit Configuration on SONET Node.
In the SONET node, configure an STS-Mc circuit between the traffic terminating port (such as a port in
CE-MR) and OC-N port (converted into TYPE = SDH in Step 1).
Refer Table 1, for the equivalent circuits.
Table 3 DCC Tunnels
DCC
SONET
Layer SONET Bytes
OC-3
All ports
OC-12, OC-48,
OC-192
OC-192-XFP,
MRC
SDCC Section D1 - D3 Yes Yes Yes
Tunnel #1 Line D4 - D6 No Yes Yes
Tunnel #2 Line D7 - D9 No Yes Yes
Tunnel #3 Line D10 - D12 No Yes Yes8
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
Note For V-CAT and LCAS circuits, each member circuit size needs to be STS-3c-nv, where n is 1 to 7. For
details on the CE-MR-10 card and member circuits, refer to Chapter 5, Ethernet Cards of the Cisco ONS
15454 Reference Manual.
Step 3 Circuit configuration on SDH node (other end).
Configure an equivalent SDH circuit between STM-N port and input-output traffic terminating port. If
the SDH node is not a traffic terminating node, but an intermediate node, create an equivalent SDH
circuit between the two optical ports.
The following example describes how to configure the Ether traffic flow from a SONET node to an SDH
node. An STS-3c circuit is used in the example.
Example:
Configure circuits as shown in Figure 5 using the steps in the “Configuring Cisco ONS 15454 to Carry
Ether traffic Through SONET and SDH Network” section on page 7. This carries traffic from a
CE-MR-10 card in SONET node (Node A) to the CE-MR-10 card in the SDH node (Node B).
Figure 5 Configuration Example to Connect SONET Node to SDH Node
Summary
The SDH tunneling feature leverages a single SONET network to support traditional TDM services, as
well as next generation data and SDH private line services. This single network capability decreases the
time-to-market demands for SDH services, thereby eliminating the need for an overlay network. The
ONS 15454 further extends its multiservice capabilities by supporting SDH transport over all optical
interface speeds, from STM1 to STM64. In addition, the DCC tunneling capability further enables a
differentiated service offering, by providing an end-to-end management visibility option when
transporting the SDH service for their customers.
The ONS 15454 metro optical transport platform provides the tools necessary to enable a service
provider to deliver cost-effective solutions to their markets.
277031
Node A
ONS 15454 Sonet Node
Node B
ONS 15454 SDH Node
OC-N Card
Port
Type: SDH
OC-48 Rate
CE-MR
STM-N
Card
Port
STM16
CE-MR9
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS)
feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds
are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.
CCDE, CCENT, CCSI, Cisco Eos, Cisco HealthPresence, Cisco IronPort, the Cisco logo, Cisco Nurse Connect, Cisco Pulse, Cisco SensorBase,
Cisco StackPower, Cisco StadiumVision, Cisco TelePresence, Cisco Unified Computing System, Cisco WebEx, DCE, Flip Channels, Flip for Good,
Flip Mino, Flipshare (Design), Flip Ultra, Flip Video, Flip Video (Design), Instant Broadband, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks;
Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, Cisco Capital, Cisco Capital (Design), Cisco:Financed (Stylized), Cisco Store, Flip Gift Card,
and One Million Acts of Green are service marks; and Access Registrar, Aironet, AllTouch, AsyncOS, Bringing the Meeting To You, Catalyst, CCDA,
CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, CCVP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Lumin, Cisco Nexus,
Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Collaboration Without Limitation, Continuum, EtherFast,
EtherSwitch, Event Center, Explorer, Follow Me Browsing, GainMaker, iLYNX, IOS, iPhone, IronPort, the IronPort logo, Laser Link, LightStream,
Linksys, MeetingPlace, MeetingPlace Chime Sound, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, PCNow, PIX, PowerKEY, PowerPanels, PowerTV,
PowerTV (Design), PowerVu, Prisma, ProConnect, ROSA, SenderBase, SMARTnet, Spectrum Expert, StackWise, WebEx, and the WebEx logo are
registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply
a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0910R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and
figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
© 2009 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.10
SDH Tunneling Over Cisco ONS 15454 SONET MSPP Systems
OL-21041-01
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Regulatory Compliance and Safety
Information for Cisco ONS Products
February 2013
Text Part Number: 78-21123-01
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required
to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not
installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital
devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television
communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its
peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits
controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this
URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
© 2008–2013 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
iii
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
C O N T E N T S
About this Manual xi
Revision History xi
Document Objectives xii
Audience xiii
Document Organization xiii
Related Documentation xiii
Document Conventions xiii
Obtaining Optical Networking Information xiv
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information xv
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM xv
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request xv
CHAPT E R 1 Regulatory Compliance 1-1
Homologation 1-1
Standards 1-1
ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 1-2
ONS 15454 1-3
ONS 15454 SDH 1-5
ONS 15216 1-6
ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA 1-6
ONS 15310-MA OSP Statements 1-8
ONS 15327 1-11
ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH 1-12
Japanese Approvals for the ONS 15454 1-13
Japanese Approvals for the ONS 15327 1-14
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15454 1-14
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15327 1-16
Korean Approvals for the ONS 15454 1-18
Korean Approvals for the ONS 15327 1-19
Korean Labels for the ONS 15454 1-19
Korean Labels for the ONS 15327 1-19
Contents
iv
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
CHAPT E R 2 Safety 2-1
Installation 2-1
Laser Safety 2-1
Empty Slots 2-1
Translated Warnings 2-2
Statement 7—DC Power Disconnection Warning 2-2
Statement 12—Power Supply Disconnection Warning 2-3
Statement 18—Invisible Laser Radiation Warning 2-4
Statement 37—Restricted Area Warning 2-5
Statement 39—Grounded Equipment Warning 2-6
Statement 70—Invisible Laser Radiation Warning 2-8
Statement 91—Disconnect Device Warning 2-9
Statement 94—Wrist Strap Warning 2-9
Statement 125—Radiation from Open Port Aperture 2-10
Statement 129—Four Person Equipment Moving Requirement 2-11
Statement 140—Chassis Power Connection 2-12
Statement 148—Installation Warning 2-14
Statement 152—DC Power Supply Wiring Warning 2-15
Statement 156—Blank Faceplate Installation Requirement Warning 2-16
Statement 166—Backplane Voltage Warning 2-17
Statement 181—Wrist Strap and Midplane Contact Warning 2-19
Statement 191—VCCI Class A Warning for Japan 2-21
Statement 201—Card Handling Warning 2-22
Statement 202—Installation and Replacement Warning 2-23
Statement 205—Rack Installation Warning 2-23
Statement 206—Exposed Circuitry Warning 2-24
Statement 207—Power Supply Circuitry Warning 2-27
Statement 213—Unit Grounding Protection Warning 2-29
Statement 246—AC Power Disconnection Warning 2-30
Statement 250—Rack Stabilization Warning 2-31
Statement 261—Faceplate and System Assembly Warning 2-32
Statement 274—Equipment Hazard Warning 2-33
Statement 281—Class 1M Laser Warning 2-34
Statement 290—Outside Line Connection Warning 2-35
Statement 291—Class I and Class 1M Laser Warning 2-36
Statement 293—Laser Activation Warning 2-36
Statement 300—Laser Radiation Warning 2-37
Statement 345—Suitable for Mounting 2-38
Statement 371—Power Cable and AC Adapter 2-39
Contents
v
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Statement 385—Airspace Below the Shelf Assembly 2-39
Statement 389—Power Module Installed to Chassis 2-41
Statement 390—Power Cord Installed to Power Module 2-42
Statement 397—Failure to Securely Tighten Captive Screws 2-43
Statement 1002—DC Power Supply 2-45
Statement 1003—DC Power Disconnection 2-47
Statement 1004—Installation Instructions 2-49
Statement 1006—Chassis Warning for Rack-Mounting and Servicing 2-52
Statement 1008—Class 1 Laser Product 2-57
Statement 1017—Restricted Area 2-59
Statement 1018—Supply Circuit 2-62
Statement 1019—Main Disconnecting Device 2-63
Statement 1022—Disconnect Device 2-66
Statement 1024—Ground Conductor 2-68
Statement 1025—Use Copper Conductors Only 2-72
Statement 1028—More Than One Power Supply 2-73
Statement 1029—Blank Faceplates and Cover Panels 2-76
Statement 1030—Equipment Installation 2-81
Statement 1033—SELV-IEC 60950 DC Power Supply 2-84
Statement 1034—Backplane Voltage 2-85
Statement 1040—Product Disposal 2-87
Statement 1044—Port Connections 2-89
Statement 1045—Short-circuit Protection 2-93
Statement 1046—Installing or Replacing the Unit 2-96
Statement 1047—Overheating Prevention 2-98
Statement 1048—Rack Stabilization 2-99
Statement 1050—Power Module 2-101
Statement 1051—Laser Radiation 2-102
Statement 1053—Class 1M Laser Radition 2-106
Statement 1054—Laser Viewing 2-107
Statement 1055—Class I and Class 1M Laser 2-108
Statement 1056—Unterminated Fiber Cable 2-109
Statement 1057—Hazardous Radiation Exposure 2-111
Statement 1071—Warning Definition 2-113
Statement 1072—Shock Hazard from Interconnections 2-118
Statement 1074—Comply with Local and National Electrical Codes 2-121
Statement 1075—Hazardous Voltage or Energy Present on DC Power Terminals 2-124
Statement 1076—Clearance Around the Ventilation Openings 2-125
Statement 1084—Intra-Building Ports Suitable for Connecting 2-127
Statement 1085—Intra-Building Ports for Setup and Maintenance 2-128
Contents
vi
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Statement 1088—Avoid Servicing Outdoor Connections During an Electrical Storm 2-129
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS 2-131
NEBS Compliance Statements 2-131
Statement 7003—Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS Standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility and
Safety 2-131
Statement 7005—Intra-building Lightning Surge and AC Power Fault—Issue 4 2-131
Statement 7018—Intra-building Lightning Surge and AC Power Fault—Issue 5 2-132
Statement 7012—Equipment Interfacing with AC Power Ports 2-132
NEBS Requirements 2-133
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements 2-140
Statement 8010—Railway Applications, Electromagnetic Compatibility, a Shielded Cable 2-140
Statement 8011—Railway Applications, Electromagnetic Compatibility, DC Power Cables 2-144
CHAPT E R 3 Open Source Software Information 3-1
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.2 3-1
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.3 3-1
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.4 3-1
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.4.0.2 3-1
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.6.x 3-2
F I G U R E S
vii
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Figure 1-1 Japan Label (ONS 15454) 1-14
Figure 1-2 Electrical Card 15454-DS1-14 1-14
Figure 1-3 Electrical Card 15454-DS3E-12 1-15
Figure 1-4 Electrical Card 15454-DS3N-12 1-15
Figure 1-5 Optical Card 15454-OC3-4IR1310 1-15
Figure 1-6 Optical Card 15454-OC12IR1310 1-15
Figure 1-7 Optical Card 15454-OC12-4IR 1-15
Figure 1-8 Optical Card 15454-OC48IR1310 1-16
Figure 1-9 Optical Card 15454-OC48IR1310AS 1-16
Figure 1-10 Ethernet Card ONS 15454 1-16
Figure 1-11 Optical Card OC3 IR 4 1310 1-16
Figure 1-12 Optical Card OC12 IR 1310 1-17
Figure 1-13 Optical Card OC12 LR 1550 1-17
Figure 1-14 Optical Card OC48 IR 1310 1-17
Figure 1-15 Optical Card OC48 LR 1550 1-17
Figure 1-16 Gigabit Ethernet Card G1000-2 1-18
Figure 1-17 Mechanical Interface Card (MIC) (DS-1, DS-3) MIC-28-3-A/B 1-18
Figure 1-18 Japanese Label (ONS 15327) 1-18
Figure 1-19 Korea Label (ONS 15454) 1-19
Figure 1-20 Korean Label (ONS 15327) 1-19
Figures
viii
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
T A B L E S
ix
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Table 1-1 Platform Approvals 1-1
Table 1-2 ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 Standards 1-2
Table 1-3 ONS 15454 Standards 1-4
Table 1-4 ONS 15454 SDH Standards 1-5
Table 1-5 ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA Standards 1-7
Table 1-6 ONS 15327 Standards 1-11
Table 1-7 ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH Standards 1-12
Table 1-8 ONS 15454 Card Approvals 1-13
Table 1-9 ONS 15327 Card Approvals 1-14
Table 1-10 Certification of Information and Communication Equipment (ONS 15454) 1-18
Table 1-11 Certification of Information and Communication Equipment (ONS 15327) 1-19
Tables
x
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
xi
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
About this Manual
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
• Revision History
• Document Objectives
• Audience
• Document Organization
• Related Documentation
• Document Conventions
• Obtaining Optical Networking Information
• Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
Revision History
Date Notes
February 2007 • Revision History Table added for the first time.
• Added regulatory and compliance information for Software Release 8.0 and
for the ONS 15600 SDH product.
October 2008 Updated the NEBS Compliance Statements section in the chapter “Safety”.
xii
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
About this Manual
Document Objectives
This document provides safety and complaince rules for the Cisco ONS 15000 platforms. Use this
document in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the Related Documentation section.
April 2009 • Updated the following sections in the chapter “Regulatory Compliance”:
– ONS 15454
– ONS 15327
– ONS 15310
– ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH
• Updated the following sections in in the chapter “Safety”:
– NEBS Compliance Statements
– NEBS Requirements
• Added Warning Statements 385, 1084, and 1085 in the chapter “Safety”.
April 2010 Updated the Warning Statements 206, 1004, and 1074 in the chapter “Safety”.
February 2011 Updated the chapter “Open Source Software Information”.
May 2011 • Updated the section “ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA” in the chapter
“Regulatory Compliance”.
• Added Warning Statements 7005 and 7018 in the chapter “Safety”.
July 2011 • Added the sections “Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS
15454, Release 9.2.0” and “Open Source Software Information for Cisco
ONS 15454, Release 9.3” in the chapter “Open Source Software
Information”.
• Added the section “EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements” in the
chapter “Safety”.
• Added Warning Statements 8010 and 8011 in the chapter “Safety”.
December 2011 Added the K.20, K.21, and K.40 compliance standards to the sections, “ONS
15454 M2, ONS 15454 M6, CPT 200, and CPT 600”, “ONS 15454”, and “ONS
15454 SDH” in the chapter “Regulatory Compliance”.
July 2012 • Added the section “ONS 15216” in the chapter “Regulatory Compliance”.
• Added Warning Statements 397 and 1088 in the chapter “Safety”.
• Added the section “Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.6.x” in the chapter “Open Source Software Information”.
August 2012 Added the section “Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.4.0.2” in the chapter “Open Source Software Information”.
February 2013 Removed information related to CPT.
Date Notes
xiii
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
About this Manual
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician.
Document Organization
This Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products is organized into the
following chapters:
• Chapter 1, “Regulatory Compliance” provides industry standards for the ONS 15000 products.
• Chapter 2, “Safety” provides translations of Cisco ONS 15454 M2, Cisco ONS 15454 M6,
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Cisco ONS 15327, Cisco ONS 15600,
Cisco ONS 15600 SDH, Cisco ONS 15310-CL, and Cisco ONS 15310-MA, warnings.
• Chapter 3, “Open Source Software Information” provides open source licence information for the
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Cisco
ONS 15327, Cisco ONS 15600, Cisco ONS 15600 SDH, Cisco ONS 15310-CL, and
Cisco ONS 15310-MA.
Related Documentation
Use this document in conjunction with the following publications:
• Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide
• Cisco ONS 15310-CL and Cisco ONS 15310-MA Procedure Guide
• Cisco ONS 15327 Procedure Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS 15600 Procedure Guide
• Cisco ONS 15600 SDH Procedure Guide
Document Conventions
This publication uses the conventions shown in Table 1.
xiv
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
About this Manual
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
document.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Optical Networking Information section.
Table 1 Document Conventions
Convention Application
boldface Commands and keywords in body text.
italic Command input that is supplied by the user.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
{ x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by
vertical bars. The user must select one.
Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter.
< > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
xv
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
About this Manual
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the
international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15xxx system. It also
includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15xxx system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.
xvi
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
About this Manual
CH A P T E R
1-1
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
1
Regulatory Compliance
This chapter lists customer, industry, and government requirements met by the Cisco ONS 15454 M2,
Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Cisco ONS 15216, Cisco ONS
15327, Cisco ONS 15600, Cisco ONS 15600 SDH, Cisco ONS 15310-CL, and Cisco ONS 15310-MA.
Homologation
This section lists the different optical platforms and the countries for which they are currently approved
(Table 1-1).
Standards
This section provides standards information for the following platforms:
• ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6, page 1-2
• ONS 15454, page 1-3
• ONS 15454 SDH, page 1-5
Table 1-1 Platform Approvals
Platform Countries
ONS 15454 M2, ONS 15454 M6 Canada, USA, EU, Mexico, Japan (in progress), Republic of
Korea (in progress), Hong Kong (in progress), Taiwan (in
progress)
ONS 15454 Canada, USA, EU, Mexico, Japan (in progress), Republic of
Korea (in progress), Hong Kong (in progress), Taiwan (in
progress)
ONS 15454 SDH Canada, USA, EU, Mexico, Republic of Korea (in progress),
Japan
ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH Belarus, Kazakhstan, Republic of Korea, Mexico, Taiwan,
USA, Canada, EU
ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA Canada, USA, EU, Japan, Hong Kong (no approval required),
Taiwan (no approval required)
ONS 15327 Canada, USA, Japan, Mexico
1-2
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
• ONS 15216, page 1-6
• ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA, page 1-6
• ONS 15310-MA OSP Statements, page 1-8
• ONS 15327, page 1-11
• ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH, page 1-12
ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6
The ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 meets NEBS Level 3 (SR3580) for use by service providers in
a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) network environment. The ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 meets
the following standards:
• ETS 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
• ETS 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
• ETS 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
The standards in Table 1-2 apply to the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6.
Table 1-2 ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 Standards
Discipline Specification
EMC NEBS Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6 (2011)
47 CFR Part 15: 2010 (Class A)
CISPR22 Ed.6: 2008
EN55022 Ed.5: 2006 [Incl. A1 2007] (Class A)
EN300386: V1.4.1: 2008
ICES-003 Issue 4: 2004 (Class A)
KN 22: 2009 (Class A)
VCCI: V-3/2010.04 (Class A)
CISPR24 Ed.2: 2010
EN55024 Ed.2: 2010
IEC 61000-6-1:2005
EN61000-6-1: 2007
IEC61000-6-2:2005
EN61000-6-2: 2005
EN61000-3-2: 2006
EN61000-3-3: 2008
Product Safety NEBS GR-1089-CORE
IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed. (CB Report / Certificate with all
country deviations)
UL and cUL / CSA 60950-1 2nd Ed.
1-3
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
ONS 15454
The ONS 15454 meets NEBS Level 3 (SR3580) for use by service providers in a Local Exchange Carrier
(LEC) network environment. The ONS 15454 meets the following standards:
• ETS 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
• ETS 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
• ETS 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
The standards in Table 1-3 apply to the ONS 15454.
Laser Safety IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed.
21CFR1040
IEC 60825-1, 2007
IEC 60825-2, 2010
Telecommunications T1: Canada (CS-03), Hong Kong (HKTA 2028), Japan (JATE Green
Book), Taiwan (ID 0002), US (TIA-968), Malaysia (TIA-968)
Environmental Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
ETS 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
ETS 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
ETS 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
ITU-T K.20
ITU-T K.21
ITU-T K.40
Structural Dynamics
(Mechanical)
Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
AT&T Network Equipment Development Standards (NEDS)
Power & Grounding SBC Local Exchange Carriers, Network Equipment Power, Grounding,
Environmental, and Physical Design Requirements, TP76200MP
Table 1-2 ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 Standards (continued)
Discipline Specification
1-4
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
Table 1-3 ONS 15454 Standards
Discipline Specification
EMC
(Class A)
NEBS Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6 (2011)
47 CFR Part 15: 2010 (Class A)
CISPR22 Ed.6: 2008
EN55022 Ed.5: 2006 [Incl. A1 2007] (Class A)
EN300386: V1.4.1: 2008
ICES-003 Issue 4: 2004 (Class A)
KN 22: 2009 (Class A)
VCCI: V-3/2010.04 (Class A)
CISPR24 Ed.2: 2010
EN55024 Ed.2: 2010
IEC 61000-6-1:2005
EN61000-6-1: 2007
IEC61000-6-2:2005
EN61000-6-2: 2005
EN61000-3-2: 2006
EN61000-3-3: 2008
Product Safety NEBS GR-1089-CORE
IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed. (CB Report / Certificate with all
country deviations)
UL and cUL / CSA 60950-1 2nd Ed.
Laser Safety IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed.
21CFR1040
IEC 60825-1, 2007
IEC 60825-2, 2010
Telecommunications T1: Canada (CS-03), Hong Kong (HKTA 2028), Japan (JATE Green
Book), Taiwan (ID 0002), US (TIA-968), Malaysia (TIA-968)
Environmental NEBS Telcordia GR-63-CORE
ETS 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
ETS 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
ETS 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
ITU-T K.20
ITU-T K.21
ITU-T K.40
1-5
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
ONS 15454 SDH
Table 1-4 lists the regulatory compliance and safety approval requirements met by the ONS 15454 SDH.
Structural Dynamics
(Mechanical)
Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
AT&T Network Equipment Development Standards (NEDS)
Power & Grounding SBC Local Exchange Carriers, Network Equipment Power, Grounding,
Environmental, and Physical Design Requirements, TP76200MP
Table 1-3 ONS 15454 Standards (continued)
Discipline Specification
Table 1-4 ONS 15454 SDH Standards
Discipline Specification
EMC
(Class A)
NEBS Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6 (2011)
47 CFR Part 15: 2010 (Class A)
CISPR22 Ed.6: 2008
EN55022 Ed.5: 2006 [Incl. A1 2007] (Class A)
EN300386: V1.4.1: 2008
ICES-003 Issue 4: 2004 (Class A)
KN 22: 2009 (Class A)
VCCI: V-3/2010.04 (Class A)
CISPR24 Ed.2: 2010
EN55024 Ed.2: 2010
IEC 61000-6-1:2005
EN61000-6-1: 2007
IEC61000-6-2:2005
EN61000-6-2: 2005
EN61000-3-2: 2006
EN61000-3-3: 2008
Product Safety IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed. (CB Report/Certificate with all country
deviations)
UL / CSA 60950-1 1st Ed.
Laser Safety IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed.
UL / CSA 60950-1
21CFR1040
EN or IEC 60825-1, 2007
EN or IEC 60825-2, 2010
1-6
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
ONS 15216
The ONS 15216 series products meet the following regulatory compliance and safety approval
requirements:
• EMC (Class A)—NEBS Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6.
• Product Safety—UL60950-1 IEC 60950-1 2nd Ed.
• Environmental—Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS, Issue 3.
ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA
The ONS 15310-MA is Telcordia GR-3108-CORE (Class 2) compliant when enclosed in a
Telcordia GR-487-CORE compliant cabinet. The ONS 15310-MA is Class A emissions compliant as
described in FCC part 15 and Telcordia GR-1089-CORE (sec.3.1.3).
The ONS 15310-MA requires an operating environment that maintains a temperature between
-40 degrees Celcius and 65 degrees Celcius.
The ONS 15310-MA network equipment ports are classified as Type 2 and Type 4 ports as described in
Telcordia GR-1089-CORE when installed indoors. For example, central office.
Telecommunications T1: Canada (CS-03), Hong Kong (HKTA 2028), Japan (JATE Green Book),
Taiwan (ID 0002), US (TIA-968), Malaysia (TIA-968)
T3: Japan (JATE Green Book), Malaysia (ITU-T G.703: 2001)
E1: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 12, TBR 13)
E3: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 24)
STM-1E: EU (ITU-T G.703)
GigE (optical): Japan (JATE Green Book)
OC-3, 12, 48, 192: Telcordia GR-253
STM-1, 4, 16: Brazil (225-100-509), EU (ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825,
ITU-T G.957), Japan (JATE Green Book)
STM-64: Brazil (ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825), Japan (JATE
Technical Requirement)
Environmental ETS 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
ETS 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
ETS 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
ITU-T K.20
ITU-T K.21
ITU-T K.40
Power & Grounding SBC Local Exchange Carriers, Network Equipment Power, Grounding,
Environmental, and Physical Design Requirements, TP76200MP
Table 1-4 ONS 15454 SDH Standards (continued)
Discipline Specification
1-7
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
DS1 ports are classified as Type 5 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 when the
ONS 15310-MA is installed in the OSP (outside plant). The ONS 15310-MA EIAs and the OSP cabinet
are equipped with primary and secondary protections. In addition, isolation transformers are also
provided.
Table 1-5 lists the regulatory compliance and safety approval requirements met by the ONS 15310-CL
and ONS 15310-MA.
Table 1-5 ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA Standards
Discipline Specification
EMC
(Class A)
EN-300-386 v. 1.3.3 (2005)
NEBS GR-1089-CORE
CISPR 22, CISPR24
IC ICES-003 Issue 3, 1997
FCC 47CFR15
EN55022, EN55024
EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 (AC products)
EN61000-6-1
VCCI: V-3/2000.04 (Japan)
Product Safety NEBS GR-1089-CORE (Level 3, Type 2, Type 4, and Type 5 for OSP
installations)
IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed. (CB Report / Certificate with all country
deviations)
UL and cUL / CSA 60950-1 2nd Ed.
Laser Safety
IEC 60950-1/EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed.
21CFR1040
EN or IEC 60825-1, 2007
EN or IEC 60825-2, 2010
Telecommunications T1: Canada (CS-03), Hong Kong (HKTA 2028), Japan (JATE Green Book),
Taiwan (ID 0002), US (TIA-968), Malaysia (TIA-968)
T3: Japan (JATE Green Book), Malaysia (ITU-T G.703: 2001)
E1: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 12, TBR 13)
E3: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 24)
STM-1E: EU (ITU-T G.703)
GigE (optical): Japan (JATE Green Book)
OC-3, 12, 48, 192: Telcordia GR-253
STM-1, 4, 16: Brazil (225-100-509), EU (ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825,
ITU-T G.957), Japan (JATE Green Book)
STM-64: Brazil (ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825), Japan (JATE
Technical Requirement)
1-8
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
ONS 15310-MA OSP Statements
This section provides standards information for the ONS 15310-MA OSP installation.
1. The 15310-MA can be installed in OSP with a sealed/weatherproof and GR-487-CORE, Issue 4
compliant OSP cabinet.
2. 2. The 15310-MA is tested and qualified to OSP requirements and WW EMC with the following
OSP cabinet and accessories:
– 15310-(E)-MA-SA(=)
– 15310-MA-FTA(=)
– 15310-EIA-HD-A(=)
– 15310-EIA-HD-B(=)
– 15310E-EIA-HDA(=)
– 15310E-EIA-HDB(=)
– 15310(E)-28WBE-3BBE(=)
– 15310(E)-84WBE-3BBE(=)
– 15310-CE-MR-6(=)
– 15310-CTX-2500-K9(=)
– 15310E-CTX-K9(=)
3. Purcell FLX25GT GR-487 compliant outdoor enclosure includes:
– Purcell 25RU FLX25GT Equipment Bay
– 25RU Blank Equipment Bay Door
– Battery Bracket Kit
– GT 14” Battery Pedestal
Environmental Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
GR-3108 Issue 1 (OSP installation, Class 2)
GR- 487 Issue 2 (OSP installation)
ETS 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
ETS 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
ETS 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
Structural Dynamics
(Mechanical)
Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
GR-3108 Issue 1 (OSP installation, Class 2)
GR- 487 Issue 2 (OSP installation)
AT&T Network Equipment Development Standards (NEDS)
Power & Grounding SBC Local Exchange Carriers, Network Equipment Power, Grounding,
Environmental, and Physical Design Requirements, TP76200MP
Table 1-5 ONS 15310-CL and ONS 15310-MA Standards
Discipline Specification
1-9
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
– 25RU GT 16” PMTM – w/Battery Pedestal
– 8 Position AC Load Center w/ TVSS (Transient Voltage Suppression Module for AC power) PN
#AC2050M-07 (NEBS and WW)
– AC load center (Europe and WW) – PN MCD-01-950-01 w/ Surge Srrestors DEHNguard T275,
DEHNgap TC255
– 25RU GT Solar Shield- with 14” Battery pedestal
– Heat Exchanger 80W/C (1539 watts-GR-487) (Rear door)
– GT Anchor Plate – 1EB + 16” PMTM Left
– DS1 100-Pair Protector Blocks e/w 710 connectors PN #6659 1 105-00/06A
– ADC CPAUS240A1 DS1 Protectors
– ADC DS1 Cross-connect block – Per-Term Assy. NT 28-ckt PN #6634 1 971-07
– ADC DS3 Protector Module Mounting Panels – P3C-175002
– ADC DS3 Protector Modules – P3M-PB2001
– ADC 23” 84 position DSX-1 panel – DI-G2CU1
– 4ft. F/M 32 Pair (Champ) Amp Extension cables
– Hubbell Gen Plug and Cover (60A)
– Valere Power Plant e/w: 3-20Amp Rectifiers, AC Cords, Controller, Temp. Probe and Alarm
Cable – Shelf CD8D-ANN-VC
– Cylix DS1 Secondary Protection Module #050-612-00 (NEBS)
– ADC DI-M3GU1 Front cross connect 84 ckt, Cisco WW & 64 AMP DSX-1
– PCI Alarm Panel for 15310 and cable
– 8-hour Battery Backup NorthStar NSB 170FT
– DS1 Cables from 15310 to DS1 Secondary Protector Module – HRC-2835-005
– DS1 Cables from DS1 Secondary Protector Module to Primary Protector Module – HRC
2835-006
– OSP DS1 50-pins/25-pair cables with 3M “710” connectors – HRC-2840-030: shielded cables
with shield ground-terminated both ends
– Steward ferrites PN 28B2000-100 applied to OSP DS1 cables (2 turns) on the cabinet
unshielded section
– Flat copper braids 1 inch wide (Tested braids are Consolidated (Electronic Wire and Cable) Flat
Tinned Copper Braid part# 1398, see www.conwire.com) for grounding the OSP cabinet,
bonding of different cabinet sections, and grounding the ONS 15310-MA chassis.
– 50ft. DS3 BNC-BNC cables
– 3ft. DS3 BNC-BNC (15310 to DS3 Secondary Protection Module)
– 3ft. DS3 BNC-BNC (DS3 Secondary Protection Module to DS3 non-prot. x-conn. Block)
4. NEBS compliance covers FCC and other WW EMC requirements (based on CISPR22 and IEC
61000-4-2 to12 standards).
5. To install the 15310-MA in the OSP with a different cabinet in complaince with NEBS, the cabinet
must be GR-487 compliant. In this case, the complete system must be tested to NEBS requirements.
The following minimum set of accessories must be installed:
– DS1 primary and secondary surge protection modules.
1-10
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
6. To install the 15310-MA in the OSP with a different cabinet in safety compliance with UL 60950-1,
the following accessories must be installed:
– secondary surge protection module (including insulation transformer rated 1500 Vac rms)
Cylix PN PCI 050-628-02 and DS1 Prymary protection modules.
– secondary surge protection module (including insulation transformer rated 1500 Vac rms)
Cylix PN PCI 050-631-01 and DS3 primary protection modules.
7. To install the 15310-MA in the OSP with a different cabinet, which does not require NEBS
compliance, and if FCC and or other WW EMC requirements must be covered, the following
primary surge protection modules must be installed:
– DS1
– DS3
Caution To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24 AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certified
Telecommunication Line Cord.
8. The 15310E-MA OSP is tested and qualified to the weather-protected locations environmental
requirements of the EN300-019-1-3 and EN300-019-2-3 (Class 3.3).
9. The following additional conditions and configurations are required to comply with IEC/UL
60950-1:
– This product is a modular optical shelf product intended for use in Restricted Access Locations.
This product must include an optical shelf, secondary isolation and protectors for DS1/E1 ports,
and secondary isolation and protectors for DS3/E3 ports.
– The product is intended for use on the following power systems: DC mains supply
– The equipment disconnect device and short circuit overcurrent protection devices used in the
cabinet must be UL Listed and IEC Certified.
– The following ports can be connected only to SELV Circuits/ports: LAN, Craft, UDC, BITS,
Alarm Out, and Alarm Min.
– To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24 AWG) UL Listed or CSA
Certified Telecommunication Line Cord for DS1/E1 and DS3/E3 ports.
– A suitable outdoor enclosure shall be provided with the end product. The enclosure shall be
suitable as a fire, mechanical, and electrical enclosure.
– Consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with
the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer. If installed in a closed
or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be
higher.
– Model 15130-MA OSP is intended for installation in an enclosure. The inside of which is only
accessible by a service person.
– This product and components provide protective earth terminals to be connected to the end
product enclosure. The end product shall conduct Earthing test.
– This product was evaluated for DC Mains input. Transient overvoltage shall be considered at
the end product if unit is powered by other means.
1-11
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
ONS 15327
This section lists the regulatory compliance and safety approval requirements met by the ONS 15327.
Table 1-6 ONS 15327 Standards
Discipline Specification
EMC
(Class A)
EN-300-386 v. 1.3.3 (2005)
NEBS GR-1089-CORE
CISPR 22, CISPR24
IC ICES-003 Issue 3, 1997
FCC 47CFR15
EN55022, EN55024
EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 (AC products)
EN61000-6-1
VCCI: V-3/2000.04 (Japan)
Product Safety NEBS GR-1089-CORE
IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed. (CB Report / Certificate with all country
deviations)
UL and cUL / CSA 60950-1 2nd Ed.
Laser Safety IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed.
21CFR1040
EN or IEC 60825-1, 2007
EN or IEC 60825-2, 2010
Telecommunications T1: Canada (CS-03), Hong Kong (HKTA 2028), Japan (JATE Green Book),
Taiwan (ID 0002), US (TIA-968), Malaysia (TIA-968)
T3: Japan (JATE Green Book), Malaysia (ITU-T G.703: 2001)
E1: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 12, TBR 13)
E3: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 24)
STM-1E: EU (ITU-T G.703)
GigE (optical): Japan (JATE Green Book)
OC-3, 12, 48, 192: Telcordia GR-253
STM-1, 4, 16: Brazil (225-100-509), EU (ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825,
ITU-T G.957), Japan (JATE Green Book)
STM-64: Brazil (ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825), Japan (JATE
Technical Requirement)
1-12
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Standards
ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH
Table 1-7 lists the regulatory compliance and safety approval requirements met by the ONS 15600 and
ONS 15600 SDH.
Environmental NEBS Telcordia GR-63-CORE issue 4
EN 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
EN 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
EN 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
EN 300 019-1-3, EN 300 019-2-3 (Class 3.3)
EN 300 019-2-4 (Class T 4.2 H and 4M5)
Structural Dynamics
(Mechanical)
Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
AT&T Network Equipment Development Standards (NEDS)
Power & Grounding SBC Local Exchange Carriers, Network Equipment Power, Grounding,
Environmental, and Physical Design Requirements, TP76200MP
Table 1-6 ONS 15327 Standards (continued)
Discipline Specification
Table 1-7 ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH Standards
Discipline Specification
EMC
(Class A)
EN-300-386 v. 1.3.3 (2005)
NEBS GR-1089-CORE
CISPR 22, CISPR24
IC ICES-003 Issue 3, 1997
FCC 47CFR15
EN55022, EN55024
EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 (AC products)
EN61000-6-1
VCCI: V-3/2000.04 (Japan)
Product Safety NEBS GR-1089-CORE
IEC 60950-1 /EN 60950-1, 2nd Ed. (CB Report / Certificate with all country
deviations)
UL / CSA 60950-1 1st Ed.
Laser Safety IEC 60950-1 /EN60950-1, 2nd Ed.
UL / CSA 60950-1
21CFR1040
EN or IEC 60825-1, 2007
EN or IEC 60825-2, 2010
1-13
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Japanese Approvals for the ONS 15454
Japanese Approvals for the ONS 15454
Table 1-8 lists the ONS 15454 card approvals for Japan.
Telecommunications T1: Canada (CS-03), Hong Kong (HKTA 2028), Japan (JATE Green Book),
Taiwan (ID 0002), US (TIA-968), Malaysia (TIA-968)
T3: Japan (JATE Green Book), Malaysia (ITU-T G.703: 2001)
E1: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 12, TBR 13)
E3: Australia (S016), EU (TBR 24)
STM-1E: EU (ITU-T G.703)
GigE (optical): Japan (JATE Green Book)
OC-3, 12, 48, 192: Telcordia GR-253
STM-1, 4, 16: Brazil (225-100-509), EU (ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825,
ITU-T G.957), Japan (JATE Green Book)
STM-64: Brazil (ITU-T G.691, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.825), Japan (JATE
Technical Requirement)
Environmental Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS, Issue 3
EN 300 019-2-1 (Storage, Class 1.1)
EN 300 019-2-2 (Transportation, Class 2.3)
EN 300 019-2-3 (Operational, Class 3.1E)
EN 300 019-1-3 and EN 300 019- 2-3 (Class 3.3)
EN 300 019-1-4 and EN 300 019- 2-4 (Class T 4.2H , M5)
Structural Dynamics
(Mechanical)
Telcordia GR-63-CORE NEBS
AT&T Network Equipment Development Standards (NEDS)
Power & Grounding SBC Local Exchange Carriers, Network Equipment Power, Grounding,
Environmental, and Physical Design Requirements, TP76200MP
Table 1-7 ONS 15600 and ONS 15600 SDH Standards (continued)
Discipline Specification
Table 1-8 ONS 15454 Card Approvals
Card Certificate Number
15454-DS1-14 L02-0014
15454-DS3E-12 L02-0013
DS3N-12 L00-0285
15454-OC3-4IR 1310 L00-0265
15454-OC12IR 1310 L00-0266
15454-OC12-4 IR D02-0423JP
15454-OC48IR 1310 L00-0267
1-14
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Japanese Approvals for the ONS 15327
Japanese Approvals for the ONS 15327
Table 1-9 lists the ONS 15327 card approvals for Japan.
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15454
The following ONS 15454 labels are authorized for use in Japan.
Figure 1-1 Japan Label (ONS 15454)
Figure 1-2 Electrical Card 15454-DS1-14
15454-OC48IR 1310AS L02-0012
15454-G1000-4 D02-0642JP
Table 1-8 ONS 15454 Card Approvals (continued)
Card Certificate Number
Table 1-9 ONS 15327 Card Approvals
Card Certificate Number
MIC-28-3-A/B L01-0055
OC12 IR 1310 L01-0052
OC48 IR 1310 L01-0053
67607
71090
1-15
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15454
Figure 1-3 Electrical Card 15454-DS3E-12
Figure 1-4 Electrical Card 15454-DS3N-12
Figure 1-5 Optical Card 15454-OC3-4IR1310
Figure 1-6 Optical Card 15454-OC12IR1310
Figure 1-7 Optical Card 15454-OC12-4IR
71111 71091
71092 71093
1-16
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15327
Figure 1-8 Optical Card 15454-OC48IR1310
Figure 1-9 Optical Card 15454-OC48IR1310AS
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15327
The following ONS 15327 labels are authorized for use in Japan.
Figure 1-10 Ethernet Card ONS 15454
Figure 1-11 Optical Card OC3 IR 4 1310
71094
71095
1-17
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Japanese Labels for the ONS 15327
Figure 1-12 Optical Card OC12 IR 1310
Figure 1-13 Optical Card OC12 LR 1550
Figure 1-14 Optical Card OC48 IR 1310
Figure 1-15 Optical Card OC48 LR 1550
55356
1-18
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Korean Approvals for the ONS 15454
Figure 1-16 Gigabit Ethernet Card G1000-2
Figure 1-17 Mechanical Interface Card (MIC) (DS-1, DS-3) MIC-28-3-A/B
Figure 1-18 Japanese Label (ONS 15327)
Korean Approvals for the ONS 15454
Table 1-10 provides the ONS 15454 approval for Korea.
47-11054-01 Rev A0
Cisco ONS 15327
T-C99-01-0266
Cisco Systems, Inc.
Cisco Systems, Inc /
55355
Table 1-10 Certification of Information and Communication Equipment (ONS 15454)
Model Certificate Number
ONS 15454 T-C21-00-1434
1-19
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Korean Approvals for the ONS 15327
Korean Approvals for the ONS 15327
Table 1-11 provides the ONS 15327 approvals for Korea.
Korean Labels for the ONS 15454
Figure 1-19 shows the ONS 15454 system label for Korea.
Figure 1-19 Korea Label (ONS 15454)
Korean Labels for the ONS 15327
Figure 1-20 shows the ONS 15327 system label for Korea.
Figure 1-20 Korean Label (ONS 15327)
Table 1-11 Certification of Information and Communication Equipment (ONS 15327)
Model Certificate Number
ONS 15327 T-C99-01-0266
Cards
OC12-IR-1310
OC48-IR-1310
XTC-14
MIC-28-3
E10/100-4
67607
47-11054-01 Rev A0
Cisco ONS 15327
T-C99-01-0266
Cisco Systems, Inc.
Cisco Systems, Inc /
55355
1-20
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 1 Regulatory Compliance
Korean Labels for the ONS 15327
CH A P T E R
2-1
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
2
Safety
Installation
Install the Cisco ONS 15454 M2, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH,
Cisco ONS 15327, Cisco ONS 15600, Cisco ONS 15600 SDH, Cisco ONS 15310-CL, and
Cisco ONS 15310-MA in compliance with your local and national electrical codes:
• United States: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70; United States National Electrical
Code
• Canada: Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, CSA C22.1
• Other countries: If local and national electrical codes are not available, refer to IEC 364, Part 1
through Part 7.
Laser Safety
Read and follow all safety warnings in the installation procedures. Translated warnings are provided in
this chapter. The following safety standards apply to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2, Cisco ONS 15454 M6,
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Cisco ONS 15327, Cisco ONS 15600,
Cisco ONS 15600 SDH, Cisco ONS 15310-CL, and Cisco ONS 15310-MA:
• Class 1M LASER PRODUCT (IEC 60825-1 2001-01)
• Class I LASER PRODUCT (complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations
pursuant to laser notice No. 50)
Empty Slots
Ensure that all slots are covered with card faceplates or empty-slot filler cards. These will prevent
exposure to hazardous voltages and currents on the backplane, maintain consistent cooling and air flow
through the chassis, help contain electromagnetic interference (EMI), and protect the backplane and
cards from dust and other particles.
2-2
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Translated Warnings
The following warnings are included in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2, Cisco ONS 15454 M6,
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Cisco ONS 15327, Cisco ONS 15600,
Cisco ONS 15600 SDH, Cisco ONS 15310-CL, and Cisco ONS 15310-MA installation procedures.
Statement 7—DC Power Disconnection Warning
Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC
circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services
the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the
circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het
gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld,
kiest u op het schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de
stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met
plakband in de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden suorittamista.
Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa
sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi
niin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier que le circuit en courant
continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser le disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de
service du circuit en courant continu, placer le disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un
ruban adhésif, bloquer la poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die Gleichstromschaltung keinen
Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der
Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher
auf AUS, und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung
fest.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il circuito CC non sia
alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l’alimentazione sia scollegata (OFF), individuare l’interruttore
automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC, mettere l’interruttore in posizione OFF
e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet likestrømkretsen. Sørg
for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener
likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
2-3
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 12—Power Supply Disconnection Warning
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou a fonte de
alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi
DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de corrente contínua e coloque-o na
posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita
isoladora.
¡Advertencia! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación del circuito de
corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda la alimentación esté
cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente
continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posición de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la
palanca del interruptor automático en posición de Apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att strömförsörjningen till
likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det
överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets
omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
Warning Before working on a chassis or working near power supplies, unplug the power cord on AC units;
disconnect the power at the circuit breaker on DC units. Statement 12
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen
de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen; voor gelijkstroom toestellen dient u de
stroom uit te schakelen bij de stroomverbreker.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ja katkaise tasavirtalaitteiden virta suojakytkimellä, ennen
kuin teet mitään asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.
Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation électrique, débrancher le
cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif ; couper l'alimentation des unités en courant
continu au niveau du disjoncteur.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten, ziehen Sie bei
Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw. schalten Sie bei Gleichstromeinheiten den Strom am
Unterbrecher ab.
Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle
unità CA; scollegare l'alimentazione all’interruttore automatico sulle unità CC.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av strømforsyningsenheter, skal
strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter og strømmen kobles fra ved strømbryteren på
likestrømsenheter.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de fornecimento de
energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente alternada; desligue a corrente
no disjuntor nas unidades de corrente contínua.
2-4
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 18—Invisible Laser Radiation Warning
¡Advertencia! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de alimentación,
desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente alterna (CA); cortar la
alimentación desde el interruptor automático en los equipos de corriente continua (CC).
Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du för växelströmsenheter
dra ur nätsladden och för likströmsenheter bryta strömmen vid överspänningsskyddet.
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture ports of the single-mode FDDI card when
no cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures. Following is an example
of the warning label that appears on the product. Statement 18
Waarschuwing Wanneer geen kabel aangesloten is, kan er onzichtbare laserstraling geëmitteerd worden uit de
apertuurpoorten van de enkelvoudige-modus FDDI-kaart ("Fiber Distributed Data Interface" =
"Interface van door glasvezels gedistribueerde gegevens"). Vermijd blootstelling en staar niet in de
open aperturen.
Varoitus Yksitoimintoisen FDDI-kortin avoimista porteista saattaa vapautua näkymättömiä lasersäteitä
kaapelin ollessa irrotettuna. Vältä säteilyä ja avoimiin aukkoihin katsomista.
AVOID EXPOSURE–Invisible Laser radiation
is emitted from transmit ports.
1300NM
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
WARNING 141827
2-5
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 37—Restricted Area Warning
Attention Des rayons laser invisibles peuvent s'échapper des ouvertures prévues pour la carte d'interface des
données distribuées par fibres optiques monomode (Fiber Distributed Data Interface ou FDDI) quand
un câble n'est pas connecté. Eviter toute exposition et ne pas approcher les yeux des ouvertures.
Warnung Wenn kein Kabel angeschlossen ist, wird möglicherweise unsichtbare Laserstrahlung von den
Steckanschlüssen der Monomode-FDDI-Karte (Glasfaserdatenübertragungs-Schnittstelle; Fiber
Distributed Data Interface) ausgestrahlt. Schützen Sie sich vor Strahlung, und blicken Sie nicht
direkt in offene Steckanschlüsse.
Avvertenza Radiazioni laser invisibili potrebbero essere emesse dalle porte di apertura della scheda FDDI
(Fiber Distributed Data Interface - Interfaccia di dati distribuiti a fibre) a modo singolo quando il
cavo non è stato collegato. Evitare l’esposizione a tali radiazioni e non fissare alcuna porta aperta.
Advarsel Usynlig laserstråling kan emitteres fra åpningsutgangene på FDDI-kort med kabel av
monomodusfiber når de ikke er tilkoblet en ledning. Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i
åpne åpninger.
Aviso Radiação laser invisível poderá ser emitida através das portas de abertura da placa FDDI (Interface
de Dados Distribuídos por Fibra Óptica) de modo simples, mesmo quando não houver nenhum cabo
ligado. Evite exposição e não espreite por estas aberturas.
¡Advertencia! La tarjeta FDDI modo sencillo puede emitir radiaciones láser invisibles por los orificios de los
puertos cuando no se haya conectado ningún cable. Evitar la exposición y no mirar fijamente los
orificios abiertos.
Varning! Osynlig laserstrålning kan avges från portöppningarna för FDDI-kortet för enkelmodsfiber när ingen
kabel är ansluten (FDDI: Fiber Distributed Data Interface = gränssnitt för dataöverföring med
fiberoptik). Utsätt dig inte för denna strålning och titta inte in i öppningarna.
Warning This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted access area is where
access can only be gained by service personnel through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or
other means of security, and is controlled by the authority responsible for the location. Statement 37
Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte toegang. Een plaats met beperkte
toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door
middel van een speciaal instrument, een slot en sleutel, of een ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welke
beheerd wordt door de overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie.
2-6
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 39—Grounded Equipment Warning
Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on rajoitettua. Paikka, johon pääsy
on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vain huoltohenkilöstö pääsee jonkin erikoistyökalun,
lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin muun turvalaitteen avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien
toimivaltaisten henkilöiden valvoma.
Attention Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d’accès réservé. Ces dernières sont des zones auxquelles
seul le personnel de service peut accéder en utilisant un outil spécial, un mécanisme de
verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre moyen de sécurité. L’accès aux zones de sécurité est sous le
contrôle de l’autorité responsable de l’emplacement.
Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit
beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem nur Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs,
Schloß und Schlüssel oder anderer Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der von dem für die
Anlage zuständigen Gremium kontrolliert wird.
Avvertenza Questa unità deve essere installata in un'area ad accesso limitato. Un'area ad accesso limitato è
un'area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza tramite un'attrezzo speciale, lucchetto, o altri
dispositivi di sicurezza, ed è controllata dall'autorità responsabile della zona.
Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrenset adgang. Et område med begrenset
adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker et spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en
annen sikkerhetsanordning, og det kontrolleres av den autoriteten som er ansvarlig for området.
Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma área de acesso restrito
é uma área à qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de serviço autorizado, que possua uma ferramenta,
chave e fechadura especial, ou qualquer outra forma de segurança. Esta área é controlada pela
autoridade responsável pelo local.
¡Advertencia! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de acceso restringido. Área de acceso
restringido significa un área a la que solamente tiene acceso el personal de servicio mediante la
utilización de una herramienta especial, cerradura con llave, o algún otro medio de seguridad, y que
está bajo el control de la autoridad responsable del local.
Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde. Ett område med begränsat
tillträde får endast tillträdas av servicepersonal med ett speciellt verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller
annan säkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras av den auktoritet som ansvarar för området.
Warning This equipment is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the host is connected to earth ground during
normal use. Statement 39
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer tijdens normaal gebruik met
aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite on yhdistetty maahan
normaalikäytön aikana.
2-7
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S’assurer que l’appareil hôte est relié à la terre lors de
l’utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät während des normalen
Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.
Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi che il dispositivo host sia
collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo.
Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se encontra ligado à terra
durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Advertencia! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo principal esté conectado a tierra
durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid normal användning.
2-8
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 70—Invisible Laser Radiation Warning
Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no cable is
connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 70
Waarschuwing Omdat er onzichtbare laserstraling uit de opening van de poort geëmitteerd kan worden wanneer er
geen kabel aangesloten is, dient men om blootstelling aan laserstraling te vermijden niet in de open
openingen te kijken.
Varoitus Kun porttiin ei ole kytketty kaapelia, portin aukosta voi vuotaa näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä. Älä katso
avoimiin aukkoihin, jotta et altistu säteilylle.
Attention Etant donné qu’un rayonnement laser invisible peut être émis par l’ouverture du port quand aucun
câble n’est connecté, ne pas regarder dans les ouvertures béantes afin d’éviter tout risque
d’exposition au rayonnement laser.
Warnung Aus der Öffnung des Ports kann unsichtbare Laserstrahlung austreten, wenn kein Kabel
angeschlossen ist. Kontakt mit Laserstrahlung vermeiden und nicht in offene Öffnungen blicken.
Avvertenza Poiché quando nessun cavo è collegato alla porta, da quest’ultima potrebbe essere emessa
radiazione laser invisibile, evitare l’esposizione a tale radiazione e non fissare con gli occhi porte
a cui non siano collegati cavi.
Advarsel Usynlige laserstråler kan sendes ut fra åpningen på utgangen når ingen kabel er tilkoblet. Unngå
utsettelse for laserstråling og se ikke inn i åpninger som ikke er tildekket.
Aviso Evite uma exposição à radiação laser e não olhe através de aberturas expostas, porque poderá
ocorrer emissão de radiação laser invisível a partir da abertura da porta, quando não estiver
qualquer cabo conectado.
¡Advertencia! Cuando no esté conectado ningún cable, pueden emitirse radiaciones láser invisibles por el orificio
del puerto. Evitar la exposición a radiaciones láser y no mirar fijamente los orificios abiertos.
Varning! Osynliga laserstrålar kan sändas ut från öppningen i porten när ingen kabel är ansluten. Undvik
exponering för laserstrålning och titta inte in i ej täckta öppningar.
2-9
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 91—Disconnect Device Warning
Statement 94—Wrist Strap Warning
Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring.
Statement 91
Waarschuwing Er moet een gemakkelijk toegankelijke, tweepolige stroomverbreker opgenomen zijn in de vaste
bedrading.
Varoitus Kiinteään johdotukseen on liitettävä kaksinapainen kytkinlaite, johon on helppo päästä käsiksi.
Attention Un disjoncteur bipolaire facile d’accès doit être intégré dans le câblage fixe.
Warnung Die feste Verdrahtung muß eine leicht zugängliche, zweipolige Trennvorrichtung enthalten.
Avvertenza Nei cablaggi fissi va incorporato un sezionatore a due poli facilmente accessibile.
Advarsel En lett tilgjengelig, topolet frakoblingsenhet må være innebygd i det faste ledningsnettet.
Aviso Deverá incorporar-se um dispositivo de desconexão de dois pólos de acesso fácil, na instalação
eléctrica fixa.
¡Advertencia! El cableado fijo debe incorporar un dispositivo de desconexión de dos polos y de acceso fácil.
Varning! En lättillgänglig tvåpolig frånkopplingsenhet måste ingå i den fasta kopplingen.
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Waarschuwing Draag tijdens deze procedure aardingspolsbanden om te vermijden dat de kaart beschadigd wordt
door elektrostatische ontlading. Raak het achterbord niet rechtstreeks aan met uw hand of met een
metalen werktuig, omdat u anders een elektrische schok zou kunnen oplopen.
Varoitus Käytä tämän toimenpiteen aikana maadoitettuja rannesuojia estääksesi kortin vaurioitumisen
sähköstaattisen purkauksen vuoksi. Älä kosketa taustalevyä suoraan kädelläsi tai metallisella
työkalulla sähköiskuvaaran takia.
Attention Lors de cette procédure, toujours porter des bracelets antistatiques pour éviter que des décharges
électriques n’endommagent la carte. Pour éviter l’électrocution, ne pas toucher le fond de panier
directement avec la main ni avec un outil métallique.
2-10
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 125—Radiation from Open Port Aperture
Warnung Zur Vermeidung einer Beschädigung der Karte durch elektrostatische Entladung während dieses
Verfahrens ein Erdungsband am Handgelenk tragen. Bei Berührung der Rückwand mit der Hand oder
einem metallenen Werkzeug besteht Elektroschockgefahr.
Avvertenza Durante questa procedura, indossare bracciali antistatici per evitare danni alla scheda causati da
un’eventuale scarica elettrostatica. Non toccare direttamente il pannello delle connessioni, né con
le mani né con un qualsiasi utensile metallico, perché esiste il pericolo di folgorazione.
Advarsel Bruk jordingsarmbånd under prosedyren for å unngå ESD-skader på kortet. Unngå direkte berøring
av bakplanet med hånden eller metallverktøy, slik at di ikke får elektrisk støt.
Aviso Durante este procedimento e para evitar danos ESD causados à placa, use fitas de ligação à terra
para os pulsos. Para evitar o risco de choque eléctrico, não toque directamente na parte posterior
com a mão ou com qualquer ferramenta metálica.
¡Advertencia! Usartiras conectadas a tierra en las muñecas durante este procedimiento para evitar daños en la
tarjeta causados por descargas electrostáticas. No tocar el plano posterior con las manos ni con
ninguna herramienta metálica, ya que podría producir un choque eléctrico.
Varning! Använd jordade armbandsremmar under denna procedur för att förhindra elektrostatisk skada på
kortet. Rör inte vid baksidan med handen eller metallverktyg då detta kan orsaka elektrisk stöt.
Warning Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable is
connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 125
Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel
aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te
worden.
2-11
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 129—Four Person Equipment Moving Requirement
Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä
säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin aukkoihin.
Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'åil nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du port lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre
optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces
ouvertures.
Warnung Warnung: Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren, wenn kein Glasfaserkabel
angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die
Öffnungen!
Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono essere emesse attraverso
l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.
Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne, fordi usynlig stråling kan
emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel.
Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício da via de acesso, quando
esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá
olhar fixamente para orifícios que se encontrarem a descoberto.
¡Advertencia! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible cuando no existe un cable de
fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.
Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och du bör därför undvika
att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade öppningar.
Warning In order to safeguard both equipment and personnel during the installation process, we recommend
that four people participate in moving the unit. Using adequate manpower is the best guarantee that
you will avoid harming people or equipment. Statement 129
Waarschuwing Ter bescherming van zowel de uitrusting als het personeel raden wij aan om tijdens het
installatieproces vier mensen te gebruiken voor het verplaatsen van de eenheid. Voldoende
mankracht is de beste garantie tegen lichamelijk letsel of schade aan de uitrusting.
Varoitus Jotta sekä laitetta että henkilökuntaa suojattaisiin asennuksen aikana, suosittelemme, että laitetta
siirtää ainakin neljä henkilöä. Riittävän monen henkilön käyttö on paras keino välttää ihmis- ja
laitevauriot.
Attention Afin d'éviter tout risque d'accident sur les équipements et sur lespersonnes lors de l'installation, il
est vivement recommandé de prévoir quatre personnes pour déplacer l'unité.
2-12
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 140—Chassis Power Connection
Warnung Um sicherzustellen, daß während des Installationsprozesses weder Personen noch
Ausrüstungsgegenstände beschädigt werden, sind für den Transport der Einheit vier Leuten
empfohlen. Ausreichend Personal ist die beste Gewähr, daß Personen- oder Materialschäden
vermieden werden.
Avvertenza Per proteggere gli apparati e il personale durante l'installazione, è raccomandabile spostare l'unità
con l'aiuto di quattro persone. In questo modo eviterete di danneggiare gli apparati e nuocere alla
vostra salute.
Advarsel Vi anbefaler at fire personer flytter på enheten for å sikre både utstyr og personell under
installeringen. Bruk av tilstrekkelig arbeidskraft er den beste sikkerheten mot å unngå personskade
eller skade på utstyr.
Aviso A fim de proteger tanto o equipamento como o pessoal durante o processo de instalação,
recomendamos que o transporte da unidade seja efectuado por quatro pessoas. A assistência
efectiva do pessoal constitui a melhor garantia para evitar danos de ordem física ou material.
¡Advertencia! Recomendamos que cuatro personas participen a l mover la unidad, para así proteger al personal y
el equipo. Usar el equipo adecuado de personas es la mejor garantía para evitar dañar al personal
y el equipo.
Varning! Som säkerhet för både utrustning och personal under installationen rekommenderar vi att fyra
personer tillsammans flyttar enheten. Användning av tillräckligt stor arbetskraft är den bästa
garantin att skada på människor och utrustning undviks.
Warning Before connecting or disconnecting ground or power wires to the chassis, ensure that power is
removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel
board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch
handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 140
Waarschuwing Voordat u aarddraden of elektriciteitsdraden op het frame aansluit of van het frame neemt, dient u
te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroomcircuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te verzekeren
dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het
gelijkstroomcircuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de
schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen maadoitus- tai virtajohtojen kytkemistä
asennuspohjaan tai ennen niiden irrottamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin,
paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin
KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de connecter ou de déconnecter les câbles d'alimentation (pôles et terre) du châssis, vérifiez
que le circuit de courant continu est hors tension : localisez le disjoncteur sur le panneau de
commande du circuit de courant continu, poussez-le sur la position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un
ruban adhésif, bloquez sa poignée sur cette position.
2-13
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung Gleichstrom-Unterbrechung Bevor Sie Erdungs- oder Stromkabel an das Chassis anschließen oder
von ihm abtrennen, ist sicherzustellen, daß der Gleichstrom-Stromkreis unterbrochen ist. Um
sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom AUS ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für
die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf OFF, und kleben Sie den
Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
Avvertenza Prima di collegare o distaccare i cavi elettrici o di messa a terra dallo chassis, assicuratevi che il
circuito DC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata (OFF),
individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC, mettere
l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før til- eller frakobling av jord- og strømledninger til kabinettet, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet
likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere strømbryteren på
brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og teipe bryterhåndtaket på
strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
Aviso Antes de conectar ou desconectar a ligação à terra ou a alimentação do chassis, certifique-se de
que desligou a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar
que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de corrente
contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição a manivela do
interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.
¡Advertencia! Antes de conectar o desconectar el circuito de tierra o de alimentación del chasis, asegúrese que
la alimentación del circuito CC esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda la alimentación esté
cortada (OFF), localice el interruptor automático en el panel que alimenta el circuito de corriente
continua, cambie el interruptor automático a la posición de apagado (OFF) y sujete con cinta la
palanca del interruptor automático en posición de apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du kopplar jord- eller elledningar till eller från chassit måste du kontrollera att
strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning är BRUTEN
genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen och tejpa fast
överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
2-14
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 148—Installation Warning
Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this
equipment. Statement 148
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur mag alleen worden geïnstalleerd, vervangen of hersteld door bevoegd geschoold
personeel.
Varoitus Tämän laitteen saa asentaa, vaihtaa tai huoltaa ainoastaan koulutettu ja laitteen tunteva
henkilökunta.
Attention Il est vivement recommandé de confier l'installation, le remplacement et la maintenance de ces
équipements à des personnels qualifiés et expérimentés.
Warnung Das Installieren, Ersetzen oder Bedienen dieser Ausrüstung sollte nur geschultem, qualifiziertem
Personal gestattet werden.
Avvertenza Questo apparato può essere installato, sostituito o mantenuto unicamente da un personale
competente.
Advarsel Bare opplært og kvalifisert personell skal foreta installasjoner, utskiftninger eller service på dette
utstyret.
Aviso Apenas pessoal treinado e qualificado deve ser autorizado a instalar, substituir ou fazer a revisão
deste equipamento.
¡Advertencia! Solamente el personal calificado debe instalar, reemplazar o utilizar este equipo.
Varning! Endast utbildad och kvalificerad personal bör få tillåtelse att installera, byta ut eller reparera denna
utrustning.
2-15
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 152—DC Power Supply Wiring Warning
Warning This warning applies only to units equipped with DC input power supplies. Wire the DC power
supply using the appropriate lugs at the wiring end. The proper wiring sequence is ground to ground,
positive to positive (line to L), and negative to negative (neutral to N). Note that the ground wire
should always be connected first and disconnected last. Statement 152
Waarschuwing Deze waarschuwing is uitsluitend van toepassing op eenheden met gelijkstroomvoeding. Voor
aansluiting van de gelijkstroomvoeding moeten op de bedradingsuiteinden de juiste
kabelschoentjes gebruikt worden. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde is aarde naar aarde, positief naar
positief (lijn naar L) en negatief naar negatief (neutraal naar N). Let op: de aardedraad moet altijd
het eerst aangesloten en het laatst losgemaakt worden.
Varoitus Tämä varoitus koskee ainoastaan laitteita, jotka käyttävät tasavirtalähteitä. Kytke tasavirtalähde
asianmukaisia johtojen päissä olevia napakenkiä käyttäen. Johdot on kiinnitettävä maadoitus
maadoitukseen, positiivinen positiiviseen (linja L:ään) ja negatiivinen negatiiviseen (neutraali
N:ään). Huomaa, että maadoitusjohto on kytkettävä aina ensin ja irrotettava viimeisenä.
Attention (Cet avertissement concerne uniquement les équipements disposant de bloc d'alimentation CC.)
Connectez le bloc d'alimentation CC à l'aide des attaches à l'extrémité des câbles, selon la
séquence suivante : terre sur terre, positif sur positif (ligne sur L), négatif sur négatif (neutre sur N).
Le câble de mise à la terre doit toujours être connecté en premier et déconnecté en dernier.
Warnung Diese Warnung gilt nur für Geräte, die mit Gleichstrom-Eingangsstromzufuhren ausgestattet sind.
Schließen Sie die Gleichstrom-Stromzufuhr unter Verwendung der dafür vorgesehenen Kabelmuffen
an. Die korrekte Reihenfolge beim Verkabeln ist: Erdung an Erdung, positiv an positiv (Leitung an L)
und negativ an negativ (neutral an N). Achten Sie darauf, daß das Erdungskabel stets als erstes
angeschlossen und als letztes unterbrochen wird.
Avvertenza Questa avvertenza concerna unicamente le unità attrezzate di un alimentatore elettrico di input DC.
Cablate l'alimentatore elettrico DC utilizzando le capocorde. L'ordine di cablaggio deve essere
terra-terra, positivo-positivo (linea a L), e negativo-negativo (Neutro a N). Il cavo terra dovrebbe
sempre essere connesso per prima e staccato per ultimo.
Advarsel Denne advarselen gjelder bare for enheter som er utstyrt med likestrømsforsyninger. Koble
ledningen på likestrømsforsyningen med passende kabelsko på enden av ledningen. Riktig
ledningssekvens er jord til jord, positiv til positiv (linje til L) og negativ til negativ (nøytral til N).
Legg merke til at jordledningen alltid skal kobles først og frakobles sist.
Aviso Este aviso refere-se apenas a unidades equipadas com uma fonte de alimentação de Corrente
Contínua. Ligue a fonte de alimentação de Corrente Contínua usando as presilhas que se encontram
na extremidade da cablagem. A sequência correcta da cablagem é de ligação terra a terra, positivo
com positivo (alinhe com o L), e negativo com negativo (neutral com o N). De notar que o cabo de
ligação à terra deverá ser sempre conectado em primeiro lugar e desconectado por último.
2-16
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 156—Blank Faceplate Installation Requirement Warning
¡Advertencia! Este aviso se refiere solamente a las unidades de corriente continua. Cablee la corriente continua
usando las orejetas adecuadas al final del cable. La secuencia de cableaje es la siguiente: de tierra
a tierra, positivo a positivo (línea a L), y negativo a negativo (neutro a N). El cable de tierra debería
ser lo primero en conectar y lo último en desconectar.
Varning! Denna varning gäller endast enheter som är försedda med likströmförsörjningsenheter. Anslut
likströmsförsörjningsenhetens ledningar med användning av lämpliga fästen vid ledningsändarna.
Korrekt ledningsdragningsordning är jord till jord, positiv till positiv (linje till L) och negativ till
negativ (neutral till N). Observera att jordledningen alltid måste anslutas först och kopplas ifrån sist.
Warning Blank faceplates (filler panels) serve three important functions: they prevent exposure to hazardous
voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain electromagnetic interference (EMI) that might
disrupt other equipment; and they direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate
the system unless all cards and faceplates are in place. Statement 156
Waarschuwing Lege vlakplaten (vulpanelen) vervullen drie belangrijke functies: ze voorkomen blootstelling aan
gevaarlijke voltages en elektrische stroom binnenin het chassis; ze beperken elektromagnetische
storing hetgeen andere apparaten kan storen en ze leiden een stroom van koellucht door het
chassis. Bedien het systeem niet tenzij alle kaarten en vlakplaten zich op hun plaats bevinden.
Varoitus Tyhjillä kansilaatoilla (peitelevyillä) on kolme tehtävää: ne suojaavat vaarallisilta asennuspohjan
sisäisiltä jännitteiltä ja virroilta; suojaavat sähkömagneettiselta häiriöltä (EMI), joka voi haitata
muiden laitteiden toimintaa; ja ohjaavat jäähdytysilmavirran asennuspohjan läpi. Laitetta ei saa
käyttää, jos kaikki kortit ja peitelevyt eivät ole paikoillaan.
Attention Les caches blancs remplissent trois fonctions importantes : ils évitent tout risque de choc électrique
à l'intérieur du châssis, ils font barrage aux interférences électromagnétiques susceptibles
d'altérer le fonctionnement des autres équipements et ils dirigent le flux d'air de refroidissement
dans le châssis. Il est vivement recommandé de vérifier que tous les caches et plaques de protection
sont en place avant d'utiliser le système.
Warnung Unbeschriftete Aufspannplatten (Füllpaneelen) erfüllen drei wichtige Funktionen : sie schützen vor
gefährlichen Spannungen und Elektrizität im Innern der Chassis; sie halten elektromagnetische
Interferenzen (EMI) zurück, die andere Geräte stören könnten; und sie lenken die Kühlluft durch das
Chassis. Nehmen Sie das System nur in Betrieb, wenn alle Karten und Aufspannplatten an
vorgesehener Stelle odnungsgemäß installiert sind.
Avvertenza Le piastre di protezione (panelli di riempimento) hanno tre funzioni molto importanti:Impediscono di
esporvi ai voltaggi e le tensioni elettriche pericolose del chassis; trattengono le interferenze
elettromagnetiche (EMI) che possono scombussolare altri apparati; e avviano il flusso d'aria di
raffreddamento attraverso il chassis. Non operate il sistema se le schede e i pannelli non sono in
posizione.
2-17
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 166—Backplane Voltage Warning
Advarsel Blanke ytterplater (deksler) har tre viktige funksjoner: De forhindrer utsettelse for farlig spenning
og strøm inni kabinettet; de inneholder elektromagnetisk forstyrrelse (EMI) som kan avbryte annet
utstyr, og de dirigerer luftavkjølingsstrømmen gjennom kabinettet. Betjen ikke systemet med mindre
alle kort og ytterplater sitter på plass.
Aviso As placas em bruto (painéis de enchimento) desempenham três funções importantes: evitam a
exposição a voltagens e correntes perigosas no interior do chassi; protegem de interferências
electromagnéticas (IEM) passíveis de afectar outro equipamento; e orientam o fluxo do ar de
refrigeração através do chassi. Não pôr o sistema a funcionar sem que todos os cartões e placas
estejam no devido lugar.
¡Advertencia! Los platos en blanco (paneles de relleno) ofrecen tres funciones importantes: previenen la
exposición a voltajes peligrosos y corrientes dentro del chasis; contienen interferencias
electromagnéticas (EMI) que pueden interrumpir otros equipos; y dirigen el flujo de aire refrigerante
a través del chasis. No opere el sistema a menos que todas las tarjetas y platos estén en su lugar.
Varning! Tomma planskivor (fyllnadspaneler) fyller tre viktiga funktioner: de förhindrar utsättning för farliga
spänningar och elströmmar inuti chassit; de förhindrar elektromagnetisk störning (EMI) som skulle
kunna rubba annan utrustning; samt de riktar flödet av kylluft genom chassit. Använd inte systemet
om inte alla kort och planskivor finns på plats.
Warning Voltage is present on the backplane when the system is operating. To reduce risk of an electric
shock, keep hands and fingers out of the power supply bays and backplane areas. Statement 166
Waarschuwing Er is spanning aanwezig op de achterplaat wanneer het systeem bediend wordt. Om mogelijke
elektrische schokken te vermijden, dient u uw handen en vingers uit de buurt van de
stroomtoevoercompartimenten en het gebied rondom de achterplaat te houden.
Varoitus Taustalevyssä on jännitettä laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Sähköiskun välttämiseksi on sormet ja
kädet pidettävä poissa virtalähdetelineistä ja taustalevyn alueelta.
Attention Lorsque le système est en fonctionnement, des tensions électriques circulent sur le fond de panier.
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, ne touchez pas aux baies des blocs d'alimentation ni au
fond de panier.
Warnung Wenn das System in Betrieb ist, herrscht Spannung auf der Rückwandplatine. Um das Risiko eines
elektrischen Schlags zu verringern, dürfen Hände und Finger nicht in die Anschlußstellen der
Stromversorgung und in den Bereich der Rückwandplatine gesteckt werden.
Avvertenza Quando il sistema è in funzione, il pannello posteriore è sotto tensione. Onde evitare il rischio di
scosse elettriche, tenere le mani e le dita lontano dalle parti sotto tensione e dall’area del pannello
posteriore.
Advarsel Spenning er til stede på bakpanelet når systemet kjøres. Hold hender og fingre borte fra
strømforsyningsåpningene og bakpanelområdet.
2-18
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Existem tensões na placa traseira quando o sistema está a operar. Para reduzir o risco de choque
eléctrico, mantenha as mãos e os dedos fora das baías das fontes de energia e das áreas da placa
traseira.
¡Advertencia! Cuando el sistema está en funcionamiento el voltaje está presente en el plano trasero. Para reducir
el riesgo de choque eléctrico mantenga las manos y los dedos fuera de los puertos de alimentación
eléctrica y de las áreas del plano trasero.
Varning! Spänning föreligger på bakplattan när systemet körs. Minska risken för elektriska stötar genom att
hålla händer och fingrar borta från områdena kring strömförsörjningsenhetens fack och bakplattan.
Aviso Com o sistema em funcionamento, há uma corrente no painel traseiro. Para reduzir o risco de choque
elétrico, não se aproxime dos compartimentos de fonte de alimentação e das áreas do painel
traseiro.
Advarsel Der er spænding på bagpladen når systemet er i brug. For at reducere risikoen for elektrisk stød, må
strømforsyningspladser og bagpladeområder ikke berøres.
2-19
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 181—Wrist Strap and Midplane Contact Warning
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the midplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 181
Waarschuwing Draag tijdens deze procedure aardingspolsbanden om te vermijden dat de kaart beschadigd wordt
door elektrostatische ontlading. Raak het middenbord niet rechtstreeks aan met uw hand of met een
metalen werktuig, omdat u anders een elektrische schok zou kunnen oplopen.
Varoitus Käytä tämän toimenpiteen aikana maadoitettuja rannesuojia estääksesi sähköstaattisen
purkauksen aiheuttaman kortin vaurioitumisen. Älä kosketa piirikorttia suoraan kädelläsi tai
metallisella työkalulla sähköiskuvaaran vuoksi.
Attention Lors de cette procédure, il vivement recommandé de porter des bracelets antistatiques pour éviter
que des décharges électriques n’endommagent la carte. En outre, pour éviter tout risque de choc
électrique, ne touchez jamais le fond de panier central directement avec la main ou avec un outil
métallique.
Warnung Vermeidung einer Beschädigung der Karte durch elektrostatische Entladung während dieses
Verfahrens ein Erdungsband am Handgelenk tragen. Bei Berührung der Midplane-Karte mit der Hand
oder einem metallenen Werkzeug besteht Elektroschockgefahr.
Avvertenza Durante questa procedura, indossare bracciali antistatici per evitare danni alla scheda causati da
un’eventuale scarica elettrostatica. Non toccare direttamente il midplane delle connessioni, né con
le mani né con un qualsiasi utensile metallico, perché esiste il pericolo di folgorazione.
2-20
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Advarsel Bruk jordingsarmbånd under prosedyren for å unngå ESD-skader på kortet. Unngå direkte berøring
av mellomplanet med hånden eller metallverktøy, slik at du ikke får elektrisk støt.
Aviso Durante este procedimento, e para evitar danos por descarga electrostática causados à placa, usar
fitas de ligação à terra para os pulsos. Para evitar o risco de choque eléctrico, não tocar
directamente na parte central com a mão ou com qualquer ferramenta metálica.
¡Advertencia! Durante este procedimiento usar tiras conectadas a tierra en las muñecas para evitar daños en la
tarjeta causados por descargas electrostáticas. No tocar el plano mediano con las manos ni con
ninguna herramienta metálica, ya que podría producir un choque eléctrico.
Varning! Använd jordade armbandsremmar under denna procedur för att förhindra elektrostatisk skada på
kortet. Rör ej vid kortets mittdel med handen eller metallverktyg då detta kan orsaka elektrisk stöt.
Aviso Durante esse procedimento, use pulseiras antiestáticas aterradas para evitar danos de descarga
eletrostática (ESD) à placa. Não toque no painel auxiliar diretamente com a mão ou com qualquer
ferramenta metálica ou você correrá o risco de receber um choque elétrico.
Advarsel Under denne procedure skal du bære håndledsbånd med jordforbindelse for at undgå at udsætte
kortet for statisk elektricitet. Undgå at berøre midterpladen direkte med hånden eller med et stykke
metalværktøj, da der er risiko for stød.
2-21
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 191—VCCI Class A Warning for Japan
Warning This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council. If this equipment is used in a
domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take
corrective actions.
VCCI-A
2-22
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 201—Card Handling Warning
Warning High-performance devices on this card can get hot during operation. To remove the card, hold it by
the faceplate and bottom edge. Allow the card to cool before touching any other part of it or before
placing it in an antistatic bag. Statement 201
Waarschuwing Geavanceerde onderdelen op deze kaart kunnen tijdens het gebruik heet worden. Als u de kaart wilt
verwijderen, moet u deze vastpakken bij de voorkant en onderrand. Laat de kaart afkoelen voordat
u andere delen van de kaart aanraakt of voordat u de kaart in een antistatische verpakking plaatst.
Varoitus Tämän kortin suorituskykyiset mekanismit voivat kuumeta käytössä. Kortin voi poistaa tarttumalla
siihen tasopinnasta ja alareunasta. Anna kortin jäähtyä, ennen kuin kosket sen muihin osiin tai
ennen kuin laitat sen antistaattiseen pussiin.
Attention Les périphériques hautes performances de cette carte emmagasinent de la chaleur en cours de
fonctionnement. Pour retirer la carte, tenez-la par le cache et par la partie inférieure. Attendez
qu’elle refroidisse avant de toucher les autres parties ou avant de la mettre dans un sac antistatique.
Warnung Hochleistungsgeräte auf dieser Karte können während des Betriebs sehr heiß werden. Um die Karte
zu entfernen, halten Sie sie an der Frontplatte und der Unterkante. Lassen Sie die Karte abkühlen,
bevor Sie sie an einer anderen Stelle berühren oder in einen Antistatikbehälter stecken.
Avvertenza Le apparecchiature ad alte prestazioni montati su questa scheda possono surriscaldarsi durante il
funzionamento. Per rimuovere la scheda, tenerla tra la piastra anteriore e il bordo inferiore.
Attendere che la scheda si raffreddi prima di toccare le altre componenti o di porla in un sacchetto
antistatico.
Advarsel Enkelte høykapasitets komponenter på dette kortet kan bli varme under bruk. Hvis du skal ta ut
kortet, må du holde i kortet ved frontplaten og den nederste kanten. La kortet bli avkjølt før du tar på
andre deler av kortet eller putter det i en antistatisk pose.
Aviso Os dispositivos de alta performance nesta placa podem aquecer durante o funcionamento. Para
retirar a placa, segure-a pela borda do prato e da base. Deixe a placa arrefecer antes de tocar em
qualquer outra zona da mesma ou antes de a colocar num saco antiestático.
¡Advertencia! Los dispositivos de alto rendimiento contenidos en la tarjeta pueden alcanzar elevadas
temperaturas durante su funcionamiento. Para extraer la tarjeta, sujétela por el extremo inferior y
la cubierta. Permita que se enfríe la tarjeta antes de tocar ninguna pieza de la misma y de colocarla
en una bolsa antiestática.
Varning! Detta korts högprestandaenheter kan bli mycket varma under drift. Ta ut kortet genom att hålla det
på frontpanelen och nedre kanten. Låt kortet svalna innan du vidrör någon annan del av det eller
innan du placerar det i en antistatisk påse.
2-23
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 202—Installation and Replacement Warning
Statement 205—Rack Installation Warning
Warning When installing or replacing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and
disconnected last. Statement 202
Waarschuwing Bij installatie of vervanging van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste worden
gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa tai korvattaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja
maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l’installation ou du remplacement de l’appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être
connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation oder beim Austauschen der Einheit immer zuerst
hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione o sostituzione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento a massa
e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres eller byttes, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles sist.
Aviso Ao instalar ou substituir a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada, e a
última a ser desligada.
¡Advertencia! Al instalar o sustituir el equipo, conecte siempre la toma de tierra al principio y desconéctela al
final.
Varning! Vid installation eller utbyte av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och kopplas bort
sist.
Warning This router must be installed in a rack that is secured to the building structure. Statement 205
Waarschuwing De router moet worden geïnstalleerd in een rek dat is bevestigd aan een buitenmuur of dragende
binnenmuur.
Varoitus Tämä reititin on asennettava rakenteeseen kiinnitettävään kehikkoon.
Attention Pour plus de sécurité, ce routeur doit être installé dans une armoire solidement fixée.
Warnung Dieser Router muß in einem Gestell installiert sein, das an der Gebäudestruktur gesichert ist.
2-24
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 206—Exposed Circuitry Warning
Avvertenza Questo instradatore deve essere installato in un rack fissato alla struttura dell’edificio.
Advarsel Denne ruteren må installeres i et rack som er festet til bygningen.
Aviso Este router deve ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura de construção.
¡Advertencia! Instale el router en una estantería que se encuentre bien afianzada a la estructura de un edificio.
Varning! Nätverksroutern måste installeras i ett instrumentrack som är fast förankrat i byggnaden.
Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot when installing or removing a module. Exposed circuitry is an energy
hazard. Statement 206
Waarschuwing Steek uw hand niet in een lege ruimte als u een module installeert of verwijdert. Blootliggende
elektrische schakelingen kunnen gevaar opleveren.
Varoitus Älä kosketa tyhjää paikkaa moduulia asennettaessa tai poistettaessa. Paljastunut virtapiiri voi
aiheuttaa sähköiskun.
Attention Ne pas mettre la main dans un emplacement libre lors de l'installation ou du retrait d'un module. Les
circuits exposés présentent un danger électrique.
Warnung Beim Ein- bzw. Ausbau von Modulen nicht in freie Schächte hineingreifen. Gefahr durch nicht
isolierte Leitungen!
Avvertenza Evitare di toccare gli slot vuoti durante l'installazione o la rimozione di un modulo. I circuiti esposti
potrebbero causare una scossa elettrica.
Advarsel Ikke ta inni det tomme sporet når du installerer eller fjerner en modul. En ubeskyttet strømkrets er
en energifare.
Aviso Não toque no interior de uma ranhura vazia quando instalar ou remover um módulo. Os circuitos
expostos constituem um risco energético.
¡Advertencia! No toque una ranura vacía al instalar o quitar un módulo. Los circuitos expuestos representan un
peligro eléctrico.
Varning! Stoppa inte in fingrarna i ett tomt fack när du installerar eller tar bort en modul. Exponerade kretsar
innebär risk för elstötar.
2-25
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Não toque em nenhum slot vazio ao instalar ou remover um modulo. O sistema de circuito elétrico
constitui risco de choque elétrico.
Advarsel Berør ikke den tomme spalte, når du installerer eller fjerner et modul. Ubeskyttede kredsløb udgør
en strømfare.
2-26
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-27
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 207—Power Supply Circuitry Warning
Warning The power supply circuitry for the equipment can constitute an energy hazard. Before you install or
replace the equipment, remove all jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). Metal objects
can come into contact with exposed power supply wiring or circuitry inside the DSLAM equipment.
This could cause the metal objects to heat up and cause serious burns or weld the metal object to
the equipment. Statement 207
Waarschuwing De elektrische schakelingen voor de apparatuur kunnen gevaar opleveren. Voordat u de apparatuur
installeert of verwijdert, moet u alle sieraden (ringen, kettingen en horloges) afdoen. Metalen
voorwerpen kunnen in contact komen met blootliggende elektrische bedrading of schakelingen in
de DSLAM-apparatuur. Hierdoor kunnen de metalen voorwerpen warm worden en ernstige
brandwonden veroorzaken of kan het metalen voorwerp versmelten met de apparatuur.
Varoitus Laitteiston virtapiiri saattaa aiheuttaa sähköiskun vaaran. Ennen kuin asennat tai korvaat
laitteiston, riisu korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja rannekellot). Metalliesineet voivat joutua
kosketuksiin suojaamattomien virtajohtojen tai -piirien kanssa DSLAM-laitteiston sisällä.
Metalliesineet saattavat kuumeta ja aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet
kiinni laitteistoon.
Attention Le circuit d'alimentation de l'équipement présente un danger d'électrocution. Avant d'installer ou
de remplacer l'équipement, enlevez tous vos bijoux (bagues, colliers et montres). Les objets en
métal peuvent entrer en contact avec les câbles ou les circuits d’alimentation exposés de
l'équipement DSLAM. Cela peut provoquer le réchauffement des objets en métal et être à l'origine
de brûlures graves ou bien souder l'objet en métal à l'équipement.
2-28
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung Die Stromzuführungen für das Gerät können eine Gefahr darstellen. Legen Sie vor dem Installieren
oder Entfernen des Geräts jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) ab.
Metallobjekte können in Kontakt mit freiliegenden Stromzuführungen oder Schaltkreisen innerhalb
des DSLAM-Geräts kommen. Dies kann zur Erhitzung dieser Objekte führen und schwere
Verbrennungen oder das Verschmelzen des Metallobjekts mit dem Gerät verursachen.
Avvertenza I circuiti di alimentazione di questa apparecchiatura possono comportare un rischio elettrico. Prima
di installare o sostituire l’apparecchiatura, rimuovere tutta gli oggetti metallici indossati (inclusi
anelli, collane e orologi). Gli oggetti metallici potrebbero venire a contatto con i fili di alimentazione
o i circuiti privi di protezione all’interno dell’apparecchiatura DSLAM (Advanced Digital Subscriber
Line Access Multiplexers). Ciò potrebbe causare il surriscaldamento degli oggetti metallici e
causare la bruciatura o la fusione degli oggetti metallici stessi o dell’apparecchiatura.
Advarsel Strømforsyningskretsen for utstyret kan gi elektrisk støt. Før du installerer eller skifter ut utstyret,
bør du ta av deg alle smykker (ringer, halsbånd og klokke). Metallobjekter kan komme i kontakt med
åpne ledninger eller kretser i DSLAM-utstyret. Dette kan føre til at metallobjektene varmes opp og
forårsaker alvorlige brannskader eller at metallobjektene smeltes sammen med utstyret.
Aviso Os circuitos de fornecimento de energia para o equipamento podem constituir perigo. Antes de
instalar ou substituir o equipamento, tire todas as jóias (incluindo anéis, colares, e relógios). Os
objectos metálicos podem entrar em contacto com os cabos ou circuitos de fornecimento de energia
expostos dentro do equipamento DSLAM.O contacto assim estabelecido pode originar o
aquecimento dos objectos metálicos e causar queimaduras graves ou soldar o objecto metálico ao
equipamento.
¡Advertencia! El sistema de circuitos de alimentación del equipo puede ser peligroso. Antes de instalar o sustituir
el equipo, quítese todas las joyas (incluyendo anillos, collares y relojes), ya que los objetos
metálicos podrían ponerse en contacto con cables de alimentación expuestos o con el sistema de
circuitos existente dentro del DSLAM. Si esto fuera así, podría ocurrir que los objetos de metal se
calentaran y le causaran serias quemaduras o incluso que el objeto metálico se soldara al equipo.
Varning! Nätanslutningens strömkretsanordning för utrustningen kan utgöra energifara. Avlägsna därför alla
smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur) innan du installerar eller byter ut utrustning.
Metallobjekt kan komma i kontakt med oskyddade nätanslutningskablar eller
strömkretsanordningar inuti DSLAM-utrustningen. Detta kan medföra att metallobjekten hettar upp
vilket i sin tur kan medföra allvarliga brännskador eller att metallobjektet svetsas fast på
utrustningen.
2-29
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 213—Unit Grounding Protection Warning
Warning Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed
ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are
uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 213
Waarschuwing De aardingsleiding mag nooit buiten werking gesteld worden en de apparatuur mag nooit bediend
worden zonder dat er een op de juiste wijze geïnstalleerde aardingsleiding aanwezig is. Neem
contact op met de bevoegde instantie voor elektrische inspecties of met een elektricien als u niet
zeker weet of voor passende aarding gezorgd is.
Varoitus Älä koskaan ohita maajohdinta tai käytä laitteita ilman oikein asennettua maajohdinta. Ota yhteyttä
asianmukaiseen sähkötarkastusviranomaiseen tai sähköasentajaan, jos olet epävarma
maadoituksen sopivuudesta.
Attention Ne jamais rendre inopérant le conducteur de masse ni utiliser l’équipement sans un conducteur de
masse adéquatement installé. En cas de doute sur la mise à la masse appropriée disponible,
s’adresser à l’organisme responsable de la sécurité électrique ou à un électricien.
Warnung Umgehen Sie auf keinen Fall den Erdungsleiter und nehmen Sie die Geräte nicht in Betrieb, wenn
der Erdungsleiter nicht sachgemäß installiert ist. Wenden Sie sich an die entsprechende Behörde,
die für die Inspektion elektrischer Anlagen zuständig ist, oder an einen Elektriker, wenn Sie nicht
sicher sind, ob der Anschluß ordnungsgemäß geerdet ist.
Avvertenza Non escludere mai il conduttore di protezione né usare l’apparecchiatura in assenza di un
conduttore di protezione installato in modo corretto. Se non si sa con certezza che è disponibile un
collegamento di messa a terra adeguato, esaminare le Norme CEI pertinenti o rivolgersi a un
elettricista qualificato.
Advarsel Jordingslederen må aldri hindres, og utstyret må aldri brukes uten at en forsvarlig jordingsleder er
installert. Kontakt elektrisitetstilsynet eller en elektriker dersom du er usikker på om riktig jording
er tilgjengelig.
Aviso Nunca anule o condutor à terra nem opere o equipamento sem ter um condutor à terra
adequadamente instalado. Em caso de dúvida em relação ao sistema de ligação à terra, contacte os
serviços locais de inspecção eléctrica ou um electricista qualificado.
¡Advertencia! No desactive nunca el conductor de tierra ni opere el equipo sin un conductor de tierra instalado
correctamente. Póngase en contacto con las autoridades de inspección eléctrica pertinentes o con
un electricista, si no está seguro de contar con una toma de tierra adecuada.
Varning! Koppla aldrig från jordledningen och använd aldrig utrustningen utan en på lämpligt sätt installerad
jordledning. Om det föreligger osäkerhet huruvida lämplig jordning finns skall elektrisk
besiktningsauktoritet eller elektriker kontaktas.
2-30
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 246—AC Power Disconnection Warning
Warning Before working on a chassis or working near power supplies, unplug the power cord on AC units.
Statement 246
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen
de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ennen kuin teet mitään asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet
virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.
Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation électrique, débrancher le
cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten, ziehen Sie bei
Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab.
Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle
unità CA.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av strømforsyningsenheter, skal
strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de fornecimento de
energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente alternada.
¡Advertencia! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de alimentación,
desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente alterna (CA).
Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du dra ur nätsladden på
växelströmsenheter.
2-31
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 250—Rack Stabilization Warning
Warning Stability hazard. The rack stabilizing mechanism must be in place, or the rack must be bolted to the
floor before you slide the unit out for servicing. Failure to stabilize the rack can cause the rack to
tip over. Statement 250
Waarschuwing Kantelgevaar. Als u een eenheid uitschuift ten behoeve van service-werkzaamheden, moet het rek
met de speciaal daarvoor bedoelde voorzieningen zijn gestabiliseerd of met bouten in de vloer zijn
vastgezet. Het rek kan kantelen als het niet afdoende is gestabiliseerd.
Varoitus Stabiiliusvaara. Telineen stabilointimekanismin on oltava paikallaan tai telineen on oltava ruuvattu
lattiaan, ennen kuin liu'utat yksikön ulos huoltoa varten. Ellei telinettä stabiloida, se voi kaatua.
Attention Stabilisation de l'armoire : le mécanisme de stabilisation doit être installé correctement ou
l'armoire doit être solidement fixée au sol avant d'être utilisée. Sans cette précaution, elle risque
de basculer.
Warnung Umstürzgefahr. Bevor Sie die Einheit zur Wartung hinausziehen, sollten Sie die
Stabilisierungsvorrichtung des Gestells aktivieren oder das Gestell am Boden festschrauben. Wenn
das Gestell nicht entsprechend gesichert ist, kann es umkippen.
Avvertenza Pericolo di stabilità. Prima di estrarre l’unità per la manutenzione, accertarsi che il meccanismo di
stabilizzazione del rack sia in funzione oppure che il rack sia affrancato al pavimento. La mancata
stabilità del rack può causarne il rovesciamento.
Advarsel Stabilitetsfare. Stabiliseringsmekanismen for stativet må være på plass, eller stativet må være
skrudd fast i gulvet, før du drar ut enheten for å utføre service. Hvis du ikke stabiliserer stativet, kan
det hende at stativet velter.
Aviso Risco de estabilidade. O mecanismo de estabilização da prateleira tem de estar colocado no devido
lugar ou, então, a prateleira tem de estar aparafusada ao chão antes de fazer deslizar a unidade para
fora, para reparação. A falha na estabilização da prateleira pode fazê-la virar.
¡Advertencia! Equilibrio inestable. El mecanismo de equilibrio del bastidor debe estar colocado en su lugar
correcto; de lo contrario, atornille el bastidor al suelo antes de deslizar la unidad para su
manipulación. Si no equilibra el bastidor, éste podrá volcarse.
Varning! Stabilitetsfara. Rackets stabiliseringsmekanism måste sitta på plats, eller också måste racket
skruvas fast i golvet innan du drar ut en enhet för underhåll. Om racket inte stabiliseras, kan det
välta.
2-32
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 261—Faceplate and System Assembly Warning
Warning Blank faceplates (filler panels) serve three important functions: they prevent exposure to hazardous
voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain electromagnetic interference (EMI) that might
disrupt other equipment; and they direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate
the system unless all cards, power modules, and faceplates are in place. Statement 261
Waarschuwing Lege vlakplaten (vulpanelen) vervullen drie belangrijke functies: ze voorkomen blootstelling aan
gevaarlijke voltages en elektrische stroom binnenin het chassis; ze beperken elektromagnetische
storing hetgeen andere apparaten kan storen en ze leiden een stroom van koellucht door het
chassis. Bedien het systeem niet tenzij alle kaarten, voedingsmodules en vlakplaten zich op hun
plaats bevinden.
Varoitus Tyhjillä kansilaatoilla (peitelevyillä) on kolme tehtävää: ne suojaavat vaarallisilta asennuspohjan
sisäisiltä jännitteiltä ja virroilta; suojaavat sähkömagneettiselta häiriöltä (EMI), joka voi haitata
muiden laitteiden toimintaa, ja ohjaavat jäähdytysilmavirran asennuspohjan läpi. Laitetta ei saa
käyttää, jos kaikki kortit, tehomoduulit ja peitelevyt eivät ole paikoillaan.
Attention Les caches blancs remplissent trois fonctions importantes : ils évitent tout risque de choc électrique
à l'intérieur du châssis, ils font barrage aux interférences électromagnétiques susceptibles
d'altérer le fonctionnement des autres équipements et ils dirigent le flux d'air de refroidissement
dans le châssis. Il est vivement recommandé de vérifier que tous les caches, modules d’alimentation
et plaques de protection sont en place avant d'utiliser le système.
Warnung Unbeschriftete Aufspannplatten (Füllpaneelen) erfüllen drei wichtige Funktionen : sie schützen vor
gefährlichen Spannungen und Elektrizität im Innern der Chassis; sie halten elektromagnetische
Interferenzen (EMI) zurück, die andere Geräte stören könnten; und sie lenken die Kühlluft durch das
Chassis. Nehmen Sie das System nur in Betrieb, wenn alle Karten, Stromversorgungsmodule und
Aufspannplatten an vorgesehener Stelle odnungsgemäß installiert sind.
Avvertenza Le piastre di protezione (pannelli di riempimento) hanno tre funzioni molto importanti: proteggono
da tensioni e correnti pericolose all’interno dello chassis; limitano le interferenze
elettromagnetiche (EMI) che possono interferire con altre apparecchiature e dirigono il flusso
d'aria di raffreddamento attraverso lo chassis. Non usate il sistema se le schede, i moduli di
potenza, e i pannelli non sono in posizione.
Advarsel Blanke ytterplater (deksler) har tre viktige funksjoner: De forhindrer eksponering for farlig spenning
og strøm inni kabinettet; de inneholder elektromagnetisk interferens (EMI) som kan avbryte annet
utstyr og de dirigerer luftavkjølingsstrømmen gjennom kabinettet. Betjen ikke systemet med mindre
alle kort, drivmoduler og ytterplater sitter på plass.
Aviso As placas em bruto (painéis de enchimento) desempenham três funções importantes: evitam a
exposição a voltagens e correntes perigosas no interior do chassis; protegem contra interferências
electromagnéticas (IEM) passíveis de afectar outro equipamento; e orientam o fluxo do ar de
refrigeração através do chassis. Não ponha o sistema a funcionar sem que todos os cartões,
modules de potência, e placas estejam no devido lugar.
2-33
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 274—Equipment Hazard Warning
¡Advertencia! Las placas frontales (paneles de relleno) ofrecen tres funciones importantes: previenen la
exposición a voltajes peligrosos y corrientes dentro del chasis; contienen interferencias
electromagnéticas (EMI) que pueden interrumpir otros equipos, y dirigen el flujo de aire refrigerante
a través del chasis. No opere el sistema a menos que todas las tarjetas, módulos de potencia y
placas estén en su lugar.
Varning! Tomma planskivor (fyllnadspaneler) fyller tre viktiga funktioner: de förhindrar utsättning för farliga
spänningar och elströmmar inuti chassit; de förhindrar elektromagnetisk störning (EMI) som skulle
kunna rubba annan utrustning; samt de riktar flödet av kylluft genom chassit. Använd inte systemet
om inte alla kort, kraftmoduler och planskivor finns på plats.
Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in
this publication, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document for the
appropriate Cisco chassis. Statement 274
Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard
maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen. Voor vertalingen van de waarschuwingen die in deze
publicatie verschijnen, dient u het document betreffende regulatieve naleving en
veiligheidsinformatie voor het juiste Cisco-chassis te raadplegen.
Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen
kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja
tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista. Tässä julkaisussa esiintyvien varoitusten
käännökset löydät kyseessä olevaa Cisco-asennuspohjaa koskevasta säännösten noudattamista ja
turvallisuustietoja koskevasta asiakirjasta.
Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer
des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient
des dangers posés par les circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment
utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions d'avertissements
figurant dans cette publication, consultez le document sur la conformité aux normes et la sécurité
pour le châssis Cisco approprié.
Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu einer
Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, sollten Sie
sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren bewusst und mit den
Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen vertraut sein. Übersetzungen der in dieser
Veröffentlichung enthaltenen Warnhinweise finden Sie im Dokument Regulatory Compliance and
Safety Information (Informationen zu behördlichen Vorschriften und Sicherheit) für den
entsprechenden Cisco-Einbaurahmen.
2-34
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 281—Class 1M Laser Warning
Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai
circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti. Per la
traduzione delle avvertenze riportate in questa pubblicazione, fare riferimento alla guida di
installazione e della risoluzione dei problemi inviata insieme al prodotto Cisco in dotazione.
Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan føre til personskade. Før du
utfører arbeid på noe utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser
innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker. Hvis du vil se
oversettelser av de advarslene som finnes i denne håndboken, se samsvarsforskriftene og
sikkerhetsinformasjonen som gjelder for den aktuelle Cisco-rammen.
Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que lhe poderá causar danos
físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos
relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir
possíveis acidentes. Para ver as traduções dos avisos que constam deste manual, consulte o
documento acerca dos Regulamentos e Informação de Segurança apropriado fornecido com o
produto Cisco.
¡Advertencia! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Para ver una traducción de las advertencias
que aparecen en esta publicación, consulte el documento Regulatory Compliance and Safety
Information (Información sobre homologaciones regulatorias y de seguridad) para el chasis
correspondiente de Cisco.
Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga skador. Se förklaringar av de varningar som
förekommer i denna publikation i dokumentet som rör uppfyllelse av regler och
säkerhetsinformation för lämplig Cisco-chassi.
Warning Class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
Voorzichtig Klasse-1M laserstraling indien toegangspaneel open is. Niet rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten.
Varo Säteilee luokan 1M lasersätelyä avattuna. Älä katso säteeseen optisilla laitteilla.
Prudence Radiation laser de classe 1M en cas d’ouverture. Ne pas observer directement avec des instruments
optiques.
Vorsicht Laserstrahlung der Klasse 1 M, wenn geöffnet. Nicht mit optischen Instrumenten direkt hineinsehen.
2-35
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 290—Outside Line Connection Warning
Attenzione Radiazioni laser Classe 1M quando aperto. Non osservare in maniera diretta con strumenti ottici.
OBS! Laserstråling i klasse 1M i åpen stilling. Skal ikke ses direkte med optiske instrumenter.
Cuidado Radiação laser classe 1M quando aberto. Não olhar diretamente com instrumentos ópticos.
Precaución Los productos láser Clase 1M emiten radiación una vez abiertos. No los mire directamente con
instrumentos ópticos.
Försiktig! Klass 1M laser utstrålning när öppen. Betrakta ej direkt med optiska instrument.
Warning Metallic interfaces for connection to outside plant lines (such as T1/E1/T3/E3 etc.) must be
connected through a registered or approved device such as CSU/DSU or NT1. Statement 290
Waarschuwing Metaalhoudende interfaces bestemd voor aansluiting op fabrieksleidingen buiten (zoals T1/E1/T3/E3
etc.) dienen aangesloten te worden m.b.v. een geregistreerd of goedgekeurd apparaat zoals
CSU/DSU of NT1.
Varoitus Laitoksen ulkopuolisten linjojen (T1/E1/T3/E3 jne.) kytkentään tarkoitetut metalliset rajapinnat on
kytkettävä rekisteröidyn tai hyväksytyn laitteen, kuten CSU/DSU tai NT1, kautta.
Attention Les interfaces métalliques destinées à une connexion à des lignes extérieures au site (par exemple :
T1/E1/T3/E3, etc.) doivent être raccordées sur un appareil homologué ou approuvé tel que CSU/DSU
ou NT1.
Warnung Metallische Schnittstellen für die Verbindung mit Leitungen außerhalb der Anlagen (wie z.B.
T1/E1/T3/E3 usw.) müssen durch ein registriertes oder zugelassenes Gerät wie CSU/DSU oder NT1
angeschlossen werden.
Avvertenza Le interfacce metalliche per la connessione a linee di impianti esterni (come T1/E1/T3/E3 ecc.)
devono essere connesse mediante un dispositivo registrato o approvato, come per esempio
CSU/DSU (Channel Service Unit/Data Service Unit) o NT1 (Network Terminator).
Advarsel Metallgrensesnitt for kopling til eksterne anleggslinjer (for eksempel T1/E1/T3/E3 osv.) skal koples
gjennom en registrert eller godkjent enhet, for eksempel CSU/DSU eller NT1.
Aviso As interfaces metálicas para conexão com as linhas externas (como T1/E1/T3/E3 etc) devem ser
conectadas através de um dispositivo aprovado ou certificado como CSU/DSU ou NT1.
2-36
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 291—Class I and Class 1M Laser Warning
Statement 293—Laser Activation Warning
¡Advertencia! Las interfaces metálicas destinadas a las conexiones de líneas exteriores (por ejemplo,
T1/E1/T3/E3, etc.) deben conectarse mediante un dispositivo registrado o aprobado como, por
ejemplo, CSU/DSU o NT1.
Varning! Metallkontakter för anslutning till utomhusledningar (t.ex. T1/E1/T3/E3 m.fl.) måste anslutas via en
registrerad eller godkänd enhet, t.ex. CSU/DSU eller NT1.
Warning Class I (21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11) and Class 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01) laser products. Statement 291
Waarschuwing Laserproducten van Klasse I (21 CFR 1040.10 en 1040.11) en Klasse 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
Varoitus Luokan I (21 CFR 1040.10 ja 1040.11) ja luokan 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01) lasertuotteita.
Attention Produits laser catégorie I (21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11) et catégorie 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
Warnung Laserprodukte der Klasse I (21 CFR 1040.10 und 1040.11) und Klasse 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
Avvertenza Prodotti laser di Classe I (21 CFR 1040.10 e 1040.11) e Classe 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
Advarsel Klasse I (21 CFR 1040.10 og 1040.11) og klasse 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01) laserprodukter.
Aviso Produtos laser Classe I (21 CFR 1040.10 e 1040.11) e Classe 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
¡Advertencia! Productos láser de Clase I (21 CFR 1040.10 y 1040.11) y Clase 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
Varning! Laserprodukter av Klass I (21 CFR 1040.10 och 1040.11) och Klass 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01).
Warning The laser is on when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position (labeled 1). The port
does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off
(labeled 0). Statement 293
Waarschuwing De laser is aan zodra de kaart is opgestart en de veiligheidssleutel in de AAN-positie is (gelabeld
1). De poort hoeft niet in dienst te zijn om de laser aan te zetten. De laser is uit wanneer de
veiligheidssleutel uit is (gelabeld 0).
2-37
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 300—Laser Radiation Warning
Varoitus Laser on päällä, kun kortti käynnistetään ja turva-avain on päällä (1) -asennossa. Laser voi olla
päällä, vaikka portti ei olekaan käytössä. Laser on pois päältä, kun turva-avain on pois (0)
-asennossa.
Attention Le laser est allumé dès le démarrage de la carte et lorsque la clé de sûreté est en position allumée
(ou 1). Il n’est pas nécessaire que le port soit en service pour que le laser soit allumé. Le laser est
éteint lorsque la clé de sûreté est en position éteinte (ou 0).
Warnung Der Laser ist eingeschaltet, wenn die Karte geladen wurde und der Sicherheitsschlüssel
eingeschaltet ist (mit 1 bezeichnete Stellung). Der Port muss nicht in Betrieb sein, wenn der Laser
eingeschaltet ist. Der Laser ist ausgeschaltet, wenn sich der Sicherheitsschlüssel in der
Aus-Stellung (mit 0 bezeichnet) befindet.
Avvertenza Il laser è attivato quando la scheda è inserita e la chiave di sicurezza è in posizione ON (indicata
con I). Per l’attivazione del laser non è necessario che la porta sia in funzione. Il laser è disattivato
quando la chiave di sicurezza è su OFF (indicata con 0).
Advarsel Laseren er aktivert når kortet er på plass og sikkerhetstasten er i på-stilling (merket 1). Porten
trenger ikke å være aktiv selv om laseren er på. Laseren er av når sikkerhetstasten er i av-stilling
(merket 0).
Aviso O laser está ativado quando a placa é reiniciada e a chave de segurança está na posição on (ou 1).
A porta não precisa estar em atividade para o acionamento do laser. O laser está desativado quando
a chave de segurança está na posição off (ou 0).
¡Advertencia! El láser está encendido cuando la tarjeta ha arrancado y la llave de seguridad se encuentra en la
posición ON (etiquetada 1). No es necesario que el puerto esté en funcionamiento para que el láser
pueda funcionar. El láser está apagado cuando la llave de seguridad se encuentra en la posición OFF
(etiquetada 0).
Varning! Lasern är på när kortet är igångsatt och säkerhetsnyckeln är i läget På (markerat med 1). Porten
behöver inte vara igång för att lasern ska vara på. Lasern är av när säkerhetsnyckeln är i läget Av
(markerat med 0).
Warning Laser radiation presents an invisible hazard, so personnel should avoid exposure to the laser beam.
Personnel must be qualified in laser safety procedures and must use proper eye protection before
working on this equipment. Statement 300
Waarschuwing Laserstraling levert een onzichtbaar gevaar op, zodat personeel blootstelling aan de laserstraal
dient te vermijden. Het personeel dient gekwalificeerd te zijn in veiligheidsprocedures m.b.t. lasers
en dient de juiste oogbescherming te dragen voordat er aan deze apparatuur wordt gewerkt.
Varoitus Lasersäteily muodostaa näkymättömän vaaran, joten henkilökunnan tulisi välttää altistumista
lasersäteelle. Henkilökunnan on tunnettava laserin turvalliset käyttötoimet ja käytettävä
asianmukaisia silmiensuojaimia ennen tämän laitteiston parissa työskentelyä.
2-38
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 345—Suitable for Mounting
Attention Les rayonnements laser constituent un risque grave invisible ; il est donc essentiel que le personnel
évite toute exposition au rayon laser. Tout membre personnel doit avoir reçu une formation qualifiée
en matière de procédures de sécurité laser et doit revêtir un équipement de protection optique
adéquat avant d'exploiter l'équipement.
Warnung Da Laserstrahlung eine unsichtbare Gefahr darstellt, sollte das Personal nicht mit dem Laserstrahl
in Berührung kommen. Das Personal muss mit den Laser-Sicherheitsvorkehrungen vertraut sein und
zulässige Schutzbrillen tragen, bevor die Arbeit an diesen Geräten aufgenommen wird.
Avvertenza Evitare l'esposizione ai raggi laser, in quanto rappresentano un rischio invisibile. Prima di
intervenire su questa apparecchiatura, occorre essere a conoscenza delle procedure di sicurezza
relative ai laser e indossare protezioni adeguate per gli occhi.
Advarsel Laserstråling representerer en usynlig fare. Personellet må derfor unngå eksponering til
laserstrålen. Personellet må være vel kjent med lasersikkerhetsprosedyrer og må bruke passende
øyenvern før de begynner å jobbe med dette utstyret.
Aviso A radiação de laser representa um risco invisível, portanto deve-se evitar exposição pessoal ao
feixe do laser. O pessoal deve estar qualificado em procedimentos de segurança de laser e deve
usar proteção adequada para os olhos antes de trabalhar neste equipamento.
¡Advertencia! La radiación láser constituye un peligro invisible; por consiguiente, el personal debe evitar
exponerse al haz láser. Los miembros del personal deben estar debidamente capacitados respecto
de los procedimientos de seguridad cuando se trabaja con equipos láser y deben utilizar
dispositivos adecuados de protección ocular antes de trabajar en este equipo.
Varning! Laserstrålning är en osynlig fara, så personal bör undvika att exponeras för laserstrålen. Personalen
måste vara kvalificerad inom säkerhetsåtgärder för laser och måste använda korrekt ögonskydd
innan arbete på denna utrustning påbörjas.
Warning Suitable for mounting on and over a concrete or other non-combustible surface only. Statement 345
Waarschuwing Kan alleen worden bevestigd op of boven een betonnen of andere niet-ontvlambare ondergrond.
Varoitus Sopii kiinnitettäväksi vain betonipintaan tai muuhun palamattomaan pintaan tai niiden yläpuolelle.
Attention Adapté uniquement pour un montage au mur ou sur une surface en béton ou autre surface
incombustible.
Warnung Nur geeignet zum Anbringen an oder auf Beton- oder anderen feuerfesten Oberflächen.
Avvertenza Da applicare o montare esclusivamente su cemento o altre superfici non combustibili.
Advarsel Bare for montering på eller over betongoverflater eller andre ikke-brennbare overflater.
2-39
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 371—Power Cable and AC Adapter
Statement 385—Airspace Below the Shelf Assembly
Aviso Adequado apenas para montagem em ou sobre concreto ou outra superfície não combustível.
¡Advertencia! Adecuado sólo para su instalación en o sobre cemento u otra superficie no inflamable.
Varning! Passar endast för montering på eller ovanför cementyta eller annan ej antändlig yta.
Warning The ONS 15454 must have 1 inch (25.4 mm) of airspace below the installed shelf assembly to allow
air flow to the fan intake. The air ramp (the angled piece of sheet metal on top of the shelf assembly)
provides this spacing and should not be modified in any way.
Waarschuwing De ONS 15454 moet 25,4 mm (1 inch) ruimte hebben onder de gemonteerde plank zodat er voldoende
luchtstroom is voor de ventilator. De luchtrichel (het gebogen stukje plaatmetaal bovenop de
gemonteerde plank) biedt deze ruimte en moet daarom op geen enkele wijze worden aangepast.
Varoitus Hyllykokoonpanossa on ONS 15454 -alustan alle järjestettävä tuulettimen tuloilman ottoa varten 25,4
mm ilmarako. Ilmaramppi (hyllykokoonpanon päällä oleva kulmalevy) varmistaa tarvittavan tilan
eikä siihen saa tehdä muutoksia.
Attention L'espace d'air sous la plate-forme doit être d'un minimum de 25,4 mm (1 pouce) pour le produit ONS
15454 pour rendre possible la circulation d'air du ventilateur. La rampe d'air (la pièce d'angle de la
tôle métallique en haut de la plate-forme) fournit cet espace et ne doit en aucun cas être modifiée.
2-40
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung Für den ONS 15454 muss mindestens 1 Zoll (25,4 mm) freier Platz unterhalb der Regalinstallation zur
Verfügung stehen, damit Luft zum Ventilator gelangt. Die Luftrampe (ein gewinkeltes Stück
Blechverkleidung oberhalb der Regalinstallation) sorgt für diesen freien Platz und darf keinesfalls
verändert werden.
Avvertenza Per consentire il passaggio dell'aria nel dotto di aspirazione della ventola della piattaforma ONS
15454, sotto la mensola rack deve essere presente un'intercapedine d'aria di 25,4 mm (1 pollice).
Advarsel ONS 15454 må ha 25,4 mm (1 tomme) luftåpning under den installerte hyllen så det kan strømme luft
til vifteinntaket. Luftrampen (det vinklede metallarket øverst på hyllen) gir denne åpningen og må
ikke endres på noen måte.
Aviso O equipamento ONS 15454 deve ter 25,4 mm (1 polegada) de espaço livre por baixo da montagem da
prateleira instalada de modo a permitir a circulação do ar até à entrada de ar da ventoinha. A rampa
de ar (a peça em folha de metal com formato angular no topo da montagem da prateleira)
proporciona o espaçamento necessário e não deverá ser modificada em qualquer circunstância.
¡Advertencia! El ONS 15454 debe tener 25,4 mm (1 pulgada) de espacio de aire debajo de los estantes para permitir
el flujo de aire hacia la entrada del ventilador. La rampa de aire (pieza angular de la hoja metálica
de la parte superior de los estantes) proporciona el espacio necesario y no debe modificarse de
ninguna manera.
Varning! ONS 15454 måste ha en luftspalt på minst 25,4 mm (1 tum) nedanför den monterade hyllan för att
säkerställa fritt luftflöde till fläktinsuget. Luftrampen (den vinklade plåten på ovansidan av hyllan)
skapar detta luftutrymme och ska inte modifieras på något sätt.
2-41
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 389—Power Module Installed to Chassis
Warning To ensure safety of personnel and equipment, do not connect any power cables into the power
module until the module is completely installed into the chassis. Statement 389
Waarschuwing Sluit ten bate van de veiligheid van personeel en apparatuur geen stroomkabels aan op de
stroommodule voordat de module volledig op het chassis is geïnstalleerd.
Varoitus Taataksesi henkilöstön ja laitteiden turvallisuuden, älä kytke virtakaapeleita virtamoduuliin, ennen
kuin moduuli on asennettu täydellisesti koteloon.
Attention Pour garantir la sécurité du personnel et des équipements, ne connectez aucun câble d'alimentation
dans le module d'alimentation jusqu'à ce que le module soit complètement installé dans le châssis.
Warnung Um die Sicherheit von Personal und Ausrüstung zu gewährleisten, dürfen keine Stromkabel an das
Leistungsmodul angeschlossen werden, bevor das Modul vollständig in das Chassis eingebaut ist.
Avvertenza Per garantire la sicurezza del personale e delle attrezzature, non collegare i cavi di alimentazione
al modulo di alimentazione fino a quando questo non è completamente installato nello chassis.
Advarsel Av sikkerhetshensyn må ingen strømledninger kobles til strømmodulen før modulen er satt på plass
i chassiset.
Aviso Para garantir a segurança do pessoal e do equipamento, não ligue nenhum cabo de alimentação no
módulo de alimentação até o mesmo estar totalmente instalado na estrutura.
¡Advertencia! Para asegurar la seguridad del personal y los equipos, no conecte cables de alimentación al módulo
de alimentación hasta el que módulo esté completamente instalado en el chasis.
Varning! För att undvika risk för person- eller materialskada, får inte strömkablar anslutas till modulen förrän
modulen är fullständigt installerad i chassiet.
2-42
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 390—Power Cord Installed to Power Module
Warning To reduce the risk of electric shock, switch on the power only after the power cord is completely
installed into the power module. Statement 390
Waarschuwing Schakel om het risico op elektrische schokken te verminderen de stroom pas in als de stroomkabel
volledig is aangesloten op de stroommodule.
Varoitus Vähentääksesi sähköiskun vaaraa, älä kytke virtaa päälle, ennen kuin virtajohto on asennettu
täydellisesti virtamoduuliin.
Attention Afin de réduire les risques de choc électrique, ne mettez l'appareil sous tension qu'une fois le
cordon d'alimentation complètement installé dans le module d'alimentation.
Warnung Um das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlags zu reduzieren, darf der Strom erst eingeschaltet werden,
wenn das Netzkabel vollständig im Leistungsmodul installiert wurde.
Avvertenza Per ridurre il rischio di scriche elettriche, effettuare l'accensione solo dopo che il cavo di
alimentazione è completamente installato nel modulo di alimentazione.
Advarsel For å redusere faren for elektrisk støt, må strømmen først slås på etter at strømledningen er satt på
plass i strømmodulen.
Aviso Para reduzir o risco de choque eléctrico, ligue a alimentação só após o cabo de alimentação estar
totalmente instalado no módulo de alimentação.
¡Advertencia! Para reducir el riesgo de choque eléctrico, encienda la alimentación solo después de que el cable
de alimentación esté completamente instalado en el módulo de alimentación.
2-43
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 397—Failure to Securely Tighten Captive Screws
Varning! För att minska risken för elstötar, slå på strömbrytaren endast efter att strömkabeln har installerats
i modulen.
Warning Failure to securely tighten the captive screws can result in an electrical arc if the connector is
accidentally removed. Statement 397
Waarschuwing Het niet stevig vastdraaien van de onverliesbare schroeven kan leiden tot een vlamboog wanneer
de connector ongewild wordt verwijderd.
Varoitus Jos kiristysruuveja ei kiristetä kunnolla, liittimen vahingossa irrottaminen saattaa aiheuttaa
valokaaren.
2-44
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Attention Si les vis imperdables ne sont pas serrées correctement, un arc électrique risque de se produire en
cas de retrait accidentel du connecteur.
Warnung Sorgen Sie dafür, dass die unverlierbaren Schrauben fest angezogen sind. Wird der Stecker
versehentlich entfernt, kann sich dabei ein Lichtbogen bilden.
Avvertenza Il mancato fissaggio corretto delle viti impedibili potrebbe comportare un arco elettrico se il
connettore dovesse essere rimosso.
Advarsel Dersom du ikke strammer de sikrede skruene skikkelig, kan det føre til en elektrisk lysbue hvis
kontakten fjernes ved et uhell.
Aviso A incapacidade de apertar de forma segura os parafusos retrácteis pode resultar num arco
eléctrico, caso o conector seja removido acidentalmente.
¡Advertencia! Si no ajusta bien los tornillos de sujeción y se extrae el conector por error, se puede producir un
arco eléctrico.
Varning! Om du inte drar åt fästskruvarna ordentligt kan det resultera i en elektrisk ljusbåge om
anslutningsdonet av misstag tas bort.
2-45
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1002—DC Power Supply
Warning When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations, such as closed-loop or
spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations should be the appropriate size for the wires and
should clamp both the insulation and conductor. Statement 1002
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken die voorzien is van
goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de
aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben
en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen.
Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää, esimerkiksi suljettua
silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten
liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen
että johdinosan.
Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales homologuées telles que
celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales
doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur
le conducteur.
Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen
geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig, mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu
verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten die angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die
Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen.
Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a occhiello o a forcella con
linguette rivolte verso l’alto. I connettori devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono
serrare sia l’isolante che il conduttore.
Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente ledningsavslutninger, som for
eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha
riktig størrelse i forhold til ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.
Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido, use terminações de
cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito fechado e planas com terminais de
orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os
respectivos cabos, e deverão prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.
¡Advertencia! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables homologados, tales como las de
tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos
terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado para los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar
tanto el aislante como el conductor.
Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas, t.ex. kabelsko av
sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa kontakter måste vara avpassad till
ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen och ledaren fastklämda.
2-46
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-47
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1003—DC Power Disconnection
Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the
DC circuit. Statement 1003
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het
gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden suorittamista.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier que le circuit en courant
continu n'est plus sous tension.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die Gleichstromschaltung
keinen Strom erhält.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il circuito CC non
sia alimentato.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet likestrømkretsen.
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou a fonte de
alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua.
¡Advertencia! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación del circuito de
corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att strömförsörjningen till
likströmskretsen är bruten.
Aviso Antes de executar qualquer um dos procedimentos a seguir, verifique se a energia foi removida do
circuito DC.
2-48
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Advarsel Før du udfører nogen af følgende procedurer, skal du sikre dig, at der ikke er strøm til
jævnstrømskredsløbet.
2-49
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1004—Installation Instructions
Warning Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to the power source. Statement 1004
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-instructies voordat u het systeem op de voedingsbron aansluit.
Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.
Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les directives d'installation.
Warnung Vor dem Anschließen des Systems an die Stromquelle die Installationsanweisungen lesen.
Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema all'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à fonte de energia.
2-50
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
¡Advertencia! Lea las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red de alimentación.
Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till strömförsörjningsenheten.
2-51
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-52
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1006—Chassis Warning for Rack-Mounting and Servicing
Warning To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack, you must take special
precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following guidelines are provided to
ensure your safety:
• This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack.
• When mounting this unit in a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest
component at the bottom of the rack.
• If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in
the rack. Statement 1006
Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek monteert of het daar een
servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel
stabiel blijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:
• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige in het rek is.
• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek van onderen naar boven te laden
met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek.
• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het
toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft.
Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä, on noudatettava erityisiä
varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi, jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata
seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:
• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla
esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siinä.
Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de montage ou de réparation de cette
unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du
système. Les directives ci-dessous sont destinées à assurer la protection du personnelþ:
• Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans le bas.
• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier de bas en haut en plaçant
l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
• Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de réparer
l'unité en casier.
2-53
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell
müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die
folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden.
• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden,
wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist.
• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren, bevor Sie
die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.
Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa unità in un supporto,
occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti
direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza personale:
• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell’unica unità da montare nel supporto.
• Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare il supporto dal basso all’alto,
con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo del supporto.
• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima di montare o di procedere alla
manutenzione dell’unità nel supporto.
Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på denne enheten når den befinner
seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt. Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne
om sikkerheten:
• Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i kabinettet.
• Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet lastes fra bunnen og opp med
den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.
• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres før montering eller utføring
av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.
Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa estante, deverá
tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui um suporte estável. As
seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com segurança:
• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a única unidade a ser montada.
• Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens mais pesados na parte inferior
da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.
• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar ou reparar a unidade.
¡Advertencia! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor, o posteriormente durante
su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para
garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las siguientes instrucciones:
• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad en el mismo.
• Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado, comenzar la instalación desde la
parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo más pesado en la parte inferior.
• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de montar o proceder al
mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.
2-54
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför underhållsarbete på denna enhet på en
ställning måste du vidta särskilda försiktighetsåtgärder för att försäkra dig om att systemet står
stadigt. Följande riktlinjer ges för att trygga din säkerhet:
• Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst ned på ställningen.
• Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas nedifrån och upp, med de tyngsta
enheterna längst ned på ställningen.
• Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan enheten installeras eller
underhålls på ställningen.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-55
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Para evitar lesões corporais ao montar ou dar manutenção a esta unidade em um rack, é necessário
tomar todas as precauções para garantir a estabilidade do sistema. As seguintes orientações são
fornecidas para garantir a sua segurança:
• Se esta for a única unidade, ela deverá ser montada na parte inferior do rack.
• Ao montar esta unidade em um rack parcialmente preenchido, carregue-o de baixo para cima com o
componente mais pesado em sua parte inferior.
• Se o rack contiver dispositivos estabilizadores, instale-os antes de montar ou dar manutenção à unidade
existente.
Advarsel For at forhindre legemesbeskadigelse ved montering eller service af denne enhed i et rack, skal du
sikre at systemet står stabilt. Følgende retningslinjer er også for din sikkerheds skyld:
• Enheden skal monteres i bunden af dit rack, hvis det er den eneste enhed i racket.
• Ved montering af denne enhed i et delvist fyldt rack, skal enhederne installeres fra bunden og opad med den
tungeste enhed nederst.
• Hvis racket leveres med stabiliseringsenheder, skal disse installeres for enheden monteres eller serviceres i
racket.
2-56
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-57
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1008—Class 1 Laser Product
Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008
Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe 1.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.
Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.
Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Advertencia! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.
2-58
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Produto a laser de classe 1.
Advarsel Klasse 1 laserprodukt.
2-59
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1017—Restricted Area
Warning This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted access area can be
accessed only through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of security.
Statement 1017
Waarschuwing Deze eenheid is bestemd voor installatie in plaatsen met beperkte toegang. Toegang tot een
dergelijke plaats kan alleen verkregen worden door middel van een speciaal instrument, een slot
en sleutel of een ander veiligheidsmiddel.
Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on rajoitettua. Tällaiseen paikkaan
pääsee vain erikoistyökalua, lukkoon sopivaa avainta tai jotakin muuta turvalaitetta käyttämällä.
Attention Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. L'accès à une zone d'accès réservé n'est
possible qu'en utilisant un outil spécial, un mécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre
moyen de sécurité.
Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt vorgesehen. Der Zutritt zu
derartigen Bereichen ist nur mit einem Spezialwerkzeug, Schloss und Schlüssel oder einer
sonstigen Sicherheitsvorkehrung möglich.
Avvertenza Questa unità è prevista per essere installata in un'area ad accesso limitato, vale a dire un'area
accessibile solo mediante l'uso di un attrezzo speciale, come lucchetto e chiave, o altri dispositivi
di sicurezza.
Advarsel Denne enheten er beregnet på installasjon i områder med begrenset tilgang. Et begrenset
tilgangsområde kan bare nås ved hjelp av et spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller andre
sikkerhetsanordninger.
Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma área de acesso restrito
é uma área à qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de serviço autorizado, que possua uma ferramenta,
chave e fechadura especial, ou qualquer outra forma de segurança.
¡Advertencia! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalación en áreas de acceso restringido. Sólo puede obtenerse
acceso a una de estas áreas mediante la utilización de una herramienta especial, cerradura con
llave u otro medio de seguridad.
Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde. Ett område med begränsat
tillträde kan endast tillträdas med hjälp av specialverktyg, lås och nyckel eller annan
säkerhetsanordning.
2-60
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Esta unidade deve ser instalada em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma área de acesso restrito só pode
ser acessada com o uso de uma ferramenta especial, cadeado e chave ou outros meios de
segurança.
Advarsel Denne enhed er beregnet til installation i områder med begrænset adgang. Der kan kun opnås
adgang til et begrænset område ved at bruge et særligt stykke værktøj, lås og nøgle, eller en anden
form for sikkerhed.
2-61
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-62
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1018—Supply Circuit
Warning Take care when connecting units to the supply circuit so that wiring is not overloaded.
Statement 1018
Waarschuwing Wees voorzichtig bij het aansluiten van de eenheden op het voedingscircuit zodat het vermogen van
de bedrading niet wordt overschreden.
Varoitus Laiteyksiköt on yhdistettävä huolellisesti syöttöpiiriin niin, että johdot eivät ole ylikuormitettuja.
2-63
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1019—Main Disconnecting Device
Avertissement Lorsque vous connectez les unités au circuit d'alimentation, assurez-vous que les connexions ne
soient pas surchargées.
Warnung Beim Anschließen der Geräte an das Stromnetz ist darauf zu achten, dass die Leitungen nicht
überlastet werden.
Avvertenza Quando si collegano le unità al circuito di alimentazione, fare attenzione a non sovraccaricare i
cablaggi.
Advarsel Vær forsiktig når du kobler enheter til strømforsyningskretsen slik at ledningsopplegget ikke
overbelastes.
Aviso Tenha cuidados ao ligar unidades ao circuito de fornecimento de energia para não sobrecarregar a
instalação.
¡Advertencia! Tenga cuidado al conectar los equipos al circuito de alimentación para no sobrecargar el cableado.
Varning Var försiktig vid anslutning av enheter till strömförsörjningskretsen så att ledningarna inte
överbelastas.
Warning The plug-socket combination must be accessible at all times, because it serves as the main
disconnecting device. Statement 1019
Waarschuwing De combinatie van de stekker en het elektrisch contactpunt moet te allen tijde toegankelijk zijn
omdat deze het hoofdmechanisme vormt voor verbreking van de aansluiting.
Varoitus Pistoke/liitinkohta toimii pääkatkaisumekanismina. Pääsy siihen on pidettävä aina esteettömänä.
2-64
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Attention La combinaison de prise de courant doit être accessible à tout moment parce qu'elle fait office de
système principal de déconnexion.
Warnung Der Netzkabelanschluß am Gerät muß jederzeit zugänglich sein, weil er als primäre
Ausschaltvorrichtung dient.
Avvertenza Il gruppo spina-presa deve essere sempre accessibile, poiché viene utilizzato come dispositivo di
scollegamento principale.
Advarsel Kombinasjonen støpsel/uttak må alltid være tilgjengelig ettersom den fungerer som
hovedfrakoplingsenhet.
Aviso A combinação ficha-tomada deverá ser sempre acessível, porque funciona como interruptor
principal.
¡Advertencia! El conjunto de clavija y toma ha de encontrarse siempre accesible ya que hace las veces de
dispositivo de desconexión principal.
Varning! Man måste alltid kunna komma åt stickproppen i uttaget, eftersom denna koppling utgör den
huvudsakliga frånkopplingsanordningen.
2-65
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-66
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1022—Disconnect Device
2-67
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring.
Statement 1022
Waarschuwing Er moet een gemakkelijk toegankelijke, tweepolige stroomverbreker opgenomen zijn in de
vaste bedrading.
Varoitus Kiinteään johdotukseen on liitettävä kaksinapainen kytkinlaite, johon on helppo päästä käsiksi.
Attention Un disjoncteur bipolaire facile d’accès doit être intégré dans le câblage fixe.
Warnung Die feste Verdrahtung muß eine leicht zugängliche, zweipolige Trennvorrichtung enthalten.
Avvertenza Nei cablaggi fissi va incorporato un sezionatore a due poli facilmente accessibile.
Advarsel En lett tilgjengelig, topolet frakoblingsenhet må være innebygd i det faste ledningsnettet.
Aviso Deverá incorporar-se um dispositivo de desconexão de dois pólos de acesso fácil, na instalação
eléctrica fixa.
Advertencia El cableado fijo debe incorporar un dispositivo de desconexión de dos polos y de acceso fácil.
Varning! En lättillgänglig tvåpolig frånkopplingsenhet måste ingå i den fasta kopplingen.
Aviso Um dispositivo de desconexão de dois pólos de fácil acesso deve ser incorporado à fiação fixa.
Advarsel En to-polet afmonteringsenhed med nem adgang skal integreres i det faste ledningsnet.
2-68
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1024—Ground Conductor
Warning This equipment must be grounded. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in
the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection
authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available. Statement 1024
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur dient geaard te zijn. De aardingsleiding mag nooit buiten werking worden gesteld
en de apparatuur mag nooit bediend worden zonder dat er een op de juiste wijze geïnstalleerde
aardingsleiding aanwezig is. Neem contact op met de bevoegde instantie voor elektrische
inspecties of met een elektricien als u er niet zeker van bent dat er voor passende aarding
gezorgd is.
Varoitus Laitteiden on oltava maadoitettuja. Älä koskaan ohita maajohdinta tai käytä laitteita ilman oikein
asennettua maajohdinta. Ota yhteys sähkötarkastusviranomaiseen tai sähköasentajaan, jos olet
epävarma maadoituksen sopivuudesta.
Attention Cet équipement doit être mis à la masse. Ne jamais rendre inopérant le conducteur de masse ni
utiliser l'équipement sans un conducteur de masse adéquatement installé. En cas de doute sur la
mise à la masse appropriée disponible, s'adresser à l'organisme responsable de la sécurité
électrique ou à un électricien.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muss geerdet sein. Auf keinen Fall den Erdungsleiter unwirksam machen oder das
Gerät ohne einen sachgerecht installierten Erdungsleiter verwenden. Wenn Sie sich nicht sicher
sind, ob eine sachgerechte Erdung vorhanden ist, wenden Sie sich an die zuständige
Inspektionsbehörde oder einen Elektriker.
Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere dotata di messa a terra. Non escludere mai il conduttore di
protezione né usare l'apparecchiatura in assenza di un conduttore di protezione installato in modo
corretto. Se non si è certi della disponibilità di un adeguato collegamento di messa a terra,
richiedere un controllo elettrico presso le autorità competenti o rivolgersi a un elettricista.
2-69
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Advarsel Dette utstyret må jordes. Omgå aldri jordingslederen og bruk aldri utstyret uten riktig montert
jordingsleder. Ta kontakt med fagfolk innen elektrisk inspeksjon eller med en elektriker hvis du er
usikker på om det finnes velegnet jordning.
Aviso Este equipamento deve ser aterrado. Nunca anule o fio terra nem opere o equipamento sem um
aterramento adequadamente instalado. Em caso de dúvida com relação ao sistema de aterramento
disponível, entre em contato com os serviços locais de inspeção elétrica ou um eletricista
qualificado.
¡Advertencia! Este equipo debe estar conectado a tierra. No inhabilite el conductor de tierra ni haga funcionar el
equipo si no hay un conductor de tierra instalado correctamente. Póngase en contacto con la
autoridad correspondiente de inspección eléctrica o con un electricista si no está seguro de que
haya una conexión a tierra adecuada.
Varning! Denna utrustning måste jordas. Koppla aldrig från jordledningen och använd aldrig utrustningen
utan en på lämpligt sätt installerad jordledning. Om det föreligger osäkerhet huruvida lämplig
jordning finns skall elektrisk besiktningsauktoritet eller elektriker kontaktas.
2-70
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-71
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-72
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1025—Use Copper Conductors Only
Warning Use copper conductors only. Statement 1025
Waarschuwing Gebruik alleen koperen geleiders.
Varoitus Käytä vain kuparijohtimia.
Attention Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre.
Warnung Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Kupferleiter.
Avvertenza Usate unicamente dei conduttori di rame.
Advarsel Bruk bare kobberledninger.
Aviso Utilize apenas fios condutores de cobre.
¡Advertencia! Emplee sólo conductores de cobre.
Varning! Använd endast ledare av koppar.
2-73
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1028—More Than One Power Supply
Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed to
de-energize the unit. Statement 1028
Waarschuwing Deze eenheid kan meer dan één stroomtoevoeraansluiting bevatten. Alle aansluitingen dienen
ontkoppeld te worden om de eenheid te ontkrachten.
Varoitus Tässä laitteessa voi olla useampia kuin yksi virtakytkentä. Kaikki liitännät on irrotettava, jotta
jännite poistetaan laitteesta.
Attention Cette unité peut avoir plus d'une connexion d'alimentation. Pour supprimer toute tension et tout
courant électrique de l'unité, toutes les connexions d'alimentation doivent être débranchées.
Warnung Dieses Gerät kann mehr als eine Stromzufuhr haben. Um sicherzustellen, dass der Einheit kein Strom
zugeführt wird, müssen alle Verbindungen entfernt werden.
Avvertenza Questa unità può avere più di una connessione all'alimentazione elettrica. Tutte le connessioni
devono essere staccate per togliere la corrente dall'unità.
Advarsel Denne enheten kan ha mer enn én strømtilførselskobling. Alle koblinger må fjernes fra enheten for
å utkoble all strøm.
Aviso Esta unidade poderá ter mais de uma conexão de fonte de energia. Todas as conexões devem ser
removidas para desligar a unidade.
¡Advertencia! Puede que esta unidad tenga más de una conexión para fuentes de alimentación. Para cortar por
completo el suministro de energía, deben desconectarse todas las conexiones.
Varning! Denna enhet har eventuellt mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning. Alla anslutningar måste tas bort
för att göra enheten strömlös.
2-74
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Esta unidade pode ter mais de uma conexão de fonte de alimentação. Todas as conexões devem ser
removidas para interromper a alimentação da unidade.
Advarsel Denne enhed har muligvis mere end en strømforsyningstilslutning. Alle tilslutninger skal fjernes for
at aflade strømmen fra enheden.
2-75
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-76
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1029—Blank Faceplates and Cover Panels
Warning Blank faceplates and cover panels serve three important functions: they prevent exposure to
hazardous voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain electromagnetic interference
(EMI) that might disrupt other equipment; and they direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis.
Do not operate the system unless all cards, faceplates, front covers, and rear covers are in place.
Statement 1029
Waarschuwing Lege vlakplaten en afdekpanelen vervullen drie belangrijke functies: ze voorkomen blootstelling
aan gevaarlijke voltages en stroom binnenin het frame, ze bevatten elektromagnetische storing
(EMI) hetgeen andere apparaten kan verstoren en ze leiden de stroom van koellucht door het frame.
Het systeem niet bedienen tenzij alle kaarten, vlakplaten en afdekkingen aan de voor- en achterkant
zich op hun plaats bevinden.
Varoitus Tyhjillä tasolaikoilla ja suojapaneeleilla on kolme tärkeää käyttötarkoitusta: Ne suojaavat
asennuspohjan sisäisille vaarallisille jännitteille ja sähkövirralle altistumiselta; ne pitävät
sisällään elektromagneettisen häiriön (EMI), joka voi häiritä muita laitteita; ja ne suuntaavat
tuuletusilman asennuspohjan läpi. Järjestelmää ei saa käyttää, elleivät kaikki tasolaikat, etukannet
ja takakannet ole kunnolla paikoillaan.
Attention Ne jamais faire fonctionner le système sans que l’intégralité des cartes, des plaques métalliques et
des panneaux avant et arrière ne soient fixés à leur emplacement. Ceux-ci remplissent trois
fonctions essentielles : ils évitent tout risque de contact avec des tensions et des courants
dangereux à l’intérieur du châssis, ils évitent toute diffusion d’interférences électromagnétiques
qui pourraient perturber le fonctionnement des autres équipements, et ils canalisent le flux d’air de
refroidissement dans le châssis.
Warnung Blanke Faceplates und Abdeckungen haben drei wichtigen Funktionen: (1) Sie schützen vor
gefährlichen Spannungen und Strom innerhalb des Chassis; (2) sie halten elektromagnetische
Interferenzen (EMI) zurück, die andere Geräte stören könnten; (3) sie lenken den kühlenden
Luftstrom durch das Chassis. Das System darf nur betrieben werden, wenn alle Karten, Faceplates,
Voder- und Rückabdeckungen an Ort und Stelle sind.
Avvertenza Le piattaforme bianche e i panelli di protezione hanno tre funzioni importanti: Evitano l'esposizione
a voltaggi e correnti elettriche pericolose nello chassis, trattengono le interferenze
elettromagnetiche (EMI) che potrebbero scombussolare altri apparati e dirigono il flusso di aria per
il raffreddamento attraverso lo chassis. Non mettete in funzione il sistema se le schede, le
piattaforme, i panelli frontali e posteriori non sono in posizione.
Advarsel Blanke ytterplater og deksler sørger for tre viktige funksjoner: de forhindrer utsettelse for farlig
spenning og strøm inni kabinettet; de inneholder elektromagnetisk forstyrrelse (EMI) som kan
avbryte annet utstyr, og de dirigerer luftavkjølingsstrømmen gjennom kabinettet. Betjen ikke
systemet med mindre alle kort, ytterplater, frontdeksler og bakdeksler sitter på plass.
Aviso As faces furadas e os painéis de protecção desempenham três importantes funções: previnem
contra uma exposição perigosa a voltagens e correntes existentes no interior do chassis; previnem
contra interferência electromagnética (EMI) que poderá danificar outro equipamento; e canalizam
o fluxo do ar de refrigeração através do chassis. Não deverá operar o sistema sem que todas as
placas, faces, protecções anteriores e posteriores estejam nos seus lugares.
2-77
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
¡Advertencia! Las placas frontales y los paneles de relleno cumplen tres funciones importantes: evitan la
exposición a niveles peligrosos de voltaje y corriente dentro del chasis; reducen la interferencia
electromagnética (EMI) que podría perturbar la operación de otros equipos y dirigen el flujo de aire
de enfriamiento a través del chasis. No haga funcionar el sistema a menos que todas las tarjetas,
placas frontales, cubiertas frontales y cubiertas traseras estén en su lugar.
Varning! Tomma framplattor och skyddspaneler har tre viktiga funktioner: de förhindrar att personer utsätts
för farlig spänning och ström som finns inuti chassit; de innehåller elektromagnetisk interferens
(EMI) som kan störa annan utrustning; och de styr riktningen på kylluftsflödet genom chassit. Använd
inte systemet om inte alla kort, framplattor, fram- och bakskydd är på plats.
Aviso Plaquetas vazias e painéis de proteção têm três funções importantes: impedem a exposição a
tensões e correntes elétricas perigosas dentro do chassi; apresentam interferência
eletromagnética (EMI) que pode danificar outros equipamentos: direcionam o fluxo do ar
refrigerado pelo chassi. Não opere o sistema a menos que todas as placas, plaquetas, tampas
frontais e tampas traseiras estejam em seu devido lugar.
Advarsel Blanke frontplader og sidepaneler tjener tre vigtige formål: de forhinder udsættelse for farlig
spænding og strøm inde i chassiset, de isolerer elektromagnetisk interferens (EMI), der kan forstyre
andet udstyr, og de leder en strøm af kølig luft gennem chassiset. Betjen ikke systemet medmindre
alle kort, frontplader, sidepaneler og bagpaneler er på plads.
2-78
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-79
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-80
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-81
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1030—Equipment Installation
Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service
this equipment. Statement 1030
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur mag alleen worden geïnstalleerd, vervangen of hersteld door bevoegd
geschoold personeel.
Varoitus Tämän laitteen saa asentaa, vaihtaa tai huoltaa ainoastaan koulutettu ja laitteen
tunteva henkilökunta.
Attention Il est vivement recommandé de confier l'installation, le remplacement et la maintenance de ces
équipements à des personnels qualifiés et expérimentés.
Warnung Das Installieren, Ersetzen oder Bedienen dieser Ausrüstung sollte nur geschultem, qualifiziertem
Personal gestattet werden.
Avvertenza Questo apparato può essere installato, sostituito o mantenuto unicamente da un personale
competente.
Advarsel Bare opplært og kvalifisert personell skal foreta installasjoner, utskiftninger eller service på
dette utstyret.
Aviso Apenas pessoal treinado e qualificado deve ser autorizado a instalar, substituir ou fazer a revisão
deste equipamento.
¡Advertencia! Solamente el personal calificado debe instalar, reemplazar o utilizar este equipo.
Varning! Endast utbildad och kvalificerad personal bör få tillåtelse att installera, byta ut eller reparera
denna utrustning.
2-82
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Somente uma equipe treinada e qualificada tem permissão para instalar, substituir ou dar
manutenção a este equipamento.
Advarsel Kun uddannede personer må installere, udskifte komponenter i eller servicere dette udstyr.
2-83
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-84
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1033—SELV-IEC 60950 DC Power Supply
Warning Connect the unit only to DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
requirements in IEC 60950 based safety standards. Statement 1033
Waarschuwing Sluit de eenheid alleen maar aan op een gelijkstroombron die voldoet aan de veiligheidsvereisten
voor extra-laag voltage (SELV) in de op IEC 60950 gebaseerde veiligheidsnormen.
Varoitus Liitä laite ainoastaan tasavirtalähteesen, joka on yhdenmukainen IEC 60950:n suojattujen erittäisen
alhaisen jännitteen (SELV) turvavaatimusten kanssa.
Attention Connectez l'unité uniquement à une alimentation CC compatible avec les recommandations SELV
(safety extra-low voltage) des normes de sécurité IEC 60950.
Warnung Schließen Sie die Einheit nur an eine Gleichstrom-Stromquelle an, die mit den Safety Extra-Low
Voltage (SELV)-Anforderungen in den auf IEC 60950 basierenden Sicherheitsstandards
übereinstimmen.
Avvertenza Collegare l’unità esclusivamente a una presa di corrente continua rispondente ai requisiti SELV
(safety extra-low voltage) in base alle norme di sicurezza IEC 60950.
Advarsel Koble bare enheten til en likestrømsforsyning som er i henhold til kravene for lavspenning (SELV)
i IEC 60950-baserte sikkerhetsstandarder.
Aviso Conecte a unidade apenas à fonte da energia de CC que se encontra em conformidade com os
requisitos dos circuitos de segurança de baixa tensão (SELV) constantes dos padrões de segurança
baseados no IEC 60950.
¡Advertencia! Conecte la unidad sólo en una fuente de energía DC que cumpla con los requisitos de voltaje extra
bajo (SELV - safety extra-low voltage) en los estándares de seguridad IEC 60950.
Varning! Anslut enheten endast till en likströmsförsörjningsenhet som uppfyller kraven för SELV
(skyddskretsar för mycket låg spänning) i IEC 60950-baserade säkerhetsstandarder.
2-85
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1034—Backplane Voltage
Warning Hazardous voltage or energy is present on the backplane when the system is operating. Use caution
when servicing. Statement 1034
Waarschuwing Er is gevaarlijke spanning of energie aanwezig op de achterplaat wanneer het systeem bediend
wordt. Wees voorzichtig bij het onderhoud.
Varoitus Kun laite on toiminnassa, taustalevyyn muodostuu vaarallista jännitettä. Ole varovainen
huoltaessasi laitetta.
Attention Lorsque le système est en fonctionnement, des tensions électriques circulent sur le fond de panier.
Prendre des précautions lors de la maintenance.
Warnung Wenn das System in Betrieb ist, treten auf der Rückwandplatine gefährliche Spannungen oder
Energien auf. Vorsicht bei der Wartung.
Avvertenza Quando il sistema è in funzione, il pannello posteriore è sotto tensione pericolosa. Prestare
attenzione quando si lavora sul sistema.
Advarsel Farlig spenning er til stede på bakpanelet når systemet kjøres. Utvis forsiktighet under service.
Aviso Há presença de voltagem perigosa ou de energia na placa traseira quando o sistema está em
operação. Tenha cuidado ao fazer a manutenção.
¡Advertencia! Cuando el sistema está en funcionamiento, el voltaje del plano trasero es peligroso. Tenga cuidado
cuando lo revise.
Varning! Farlig spänning föreligger på bakplattan när systemet körs. Var försiktig vid service.
Aviso O sistema em funcionamento emite tensão ou energia elétrica perigosa no painel traseiro. Seja
cauteloso ao fazer a manutenção.
2-86
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Advarsel Der er farlig spænding og energi på bagpladen når systemet er i brug. Vær forsigtig under
servicering.
2-87
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1040—Product Disposal
Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations.
Statement 1040
Waarschuwing Het uiteindelijke wegruimen van dit product dient te geschieden in overeenstemming met alle
nationale wetten en reglementen.
Varoitus Tämä tuote on hävitettävä kansallisten lakien ja määräysten mukaisesti.
Attention La mise au rebut ou le recyclage de ce produit sont généralement soumis à des lois et/ou directives
de respect de l'environnement. Renseignez-vous auprès de l'organisme compétent.
Warnung Die Entsorgung dieses Produkts sollte gemäß allen Bestimmungen und Gesetzen des Landes
erfolgen.
Avvertenza Lo smaltimento di questo prodotto deve essere eseguito secondo le leggi e regolazioni locali.
Advarsel Endelig kassering av dette produktet skal være i henhold til alle relevante nasjonale lover og
bestemmelser.
Aviso Deitar fora este produto em conformidade com todas as leis e regulamentos nacionais.
¡Advertencia! Al deshacerse por completo de este producto debe seguir todas las leyes y reglamentos nacionales.
Varning! Vid deponering hanteras produkten enligt gällande lagar och bestämmelser.
Aviso O descarte definitivo deste produto deve estar de acordo com todas as leis e regulamentações
nacionais.
Advarsel Endelig bortskaffelse af dette produkt skal ske i henhold til gældende love og regler.
2-88
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-89
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1044—Port Connections
Warning For connections outside the building where the equipment is installed, the following ports must be
connected through an approved network termination unit with integral circuit protection.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n. Statement 1044
Waarschuwing Voor aansluitingen buiten het gebouw waar de apparatuur wordt geïnstalleerd, dienen de volgende
poorten aangesloten te worden via een goedgekeurde netwerkafsluiteenheid met integrale
circuitbescherming.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
2-90
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varoitus Asennuksen sisältävän rakennuksen ulkopuolisia liitäntöjä varten seuraavat portit on kytkettävä
hyväksytyn verkon päätelaitteen kautta ja virtapiirin on oltava kiinteästi suojattu.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
Attention Pour les connexions extérieures au bâtiment équipé, les ports suivants doivent être connectés à un
point approuvé de terminaison de réseau, avec protection complète du circuit.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
Warnung Für Verbindungen außerhalb des Gebäudes, in dem das Gerät installiert ist, müssen die folgenden Anschlüsse
über eine zulässige Netzabschlusseinheit mit integralem Leitungsschutz verbunden werden.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
Avvertenza Per le connessioni esterne all'edificio in cui è installato l'apparecchio, le seguenti porte devono
essere connesse a un'unità di terminazione di rete approvata, con protezione completa del circuito.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
Advarsel For tilkoblinger utenfor bygningen der utstyret er montert, må følgende åpninger tilkobles gjennom
en godkjent nettverksterminal med integrert kretsbeskyttelse.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
Aviso Para ligações fora do edifício onde o equipamento está instalado, é necessário ligar as seguintes
portas através de uma unidade de terminal de rede aprovada com protecção de circuito integral.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
¡Advertencia! Para realizar conexiones en el exterior del edificio en el que esté instalado el equipo, deberá
conectar los puertos especificados a continuación a una unidad terminal de red aprobada que
cuente con protección de circuitos integrales.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
Varning! För alla anslutningar utanför byggnaden där utrustningen har installerats gäller att följande portar
måste anslutas genom en godkänd nätverksavslutningsenhet med integrerat kretsskydd.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
2-91
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
2-92
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
E1, E3, DS-1, DS-3, Ethernet, and STM-n.
2-93
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1045—Short-circuit Protection
Warning This product requires short-circuit (overcurrent) protection, to be provided as part of the building
installation. Install only in accordance with national and local wiring regulations. Statement 1045
Waarschuwing Voor dit product moet kortsluitbeveiliging (overstroombeveiliging) deel uitmaken van de installatie
in het gebouw. De installatie moet voldoen aan de nationale en lokale bedradingvoorschriften.
Varoitus Tämä tuote vaatii suojauksen oikosulkuja (ylivirtaa) vastaan osana asennusta rakennukseen.
Asenna ainoastaan kansallisten ja paikallisten johdotussäännösten mukaisesti.
Attention La protection de ce produit contre les courts-circuits (surtensions) doit être assurée par la
configuration électrique du bâtiment. Vérifiez que l'installation a lieu uniquement en conformité
avec les normes de câblage en vigueur au niveau national et local.
Warnung Für dieses Produkt ist eine Kurzschlußsicherung (Überstromsicherung) erforderlich, die als Teil der
Gebäudeinstallation zur Verfügung gestellt wird. Die Installation sollte nur in Übereinstimmung mit
den nationalen und regionalen Vorschriften zur Verkabelung erfolgen.
Avvertenza Questo prodotto richiede una protezione contro i cortocircuiti, da fornirsi come parte integrante
delle dotazioni presenti nell’edificio. Effettuare l’installazione rispettando le Norme CEI pertinenti.
Advarsel Dette produktet krever beskyttelse mot kortslutninger (overspenninger) som en del av
installasjonen. Bare installer utstyret i henhold til nasjonale og lokale krav til ledningsnett.
Aviso Este produto requer proteção contra curto-circuitos (sobreintensidade de corrente), que deve estar
instalada nos edifícios. Instale apenas de acordo com as normas de instalação elétrica nacionais
e locais.
Advertencia Este producto necesita estar conectado a la protección frente a cortacircuitos (sobretensiones) que
exista en el edificio. Instálelo únicamente en conformidad con las regulaciones sobre cableado,
tanto locales como nacionales, a las que se tenga que atener.
Varning! Denna produkt kräver att kortslutningsskydd (överström) tillhandahålles som en del av
byggnadsinstallationen. Installera bara i enlighet med nationella och lokala
kabeldragningsbestämmelser.
2-94
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Este produto requer uma proteção contra curto-circuito (sobrecorrente) que deve fazer parte da
instalação do edifício. Faça a instalação somente de acordo com as regulamentações de
cabeamento nacionais e locais.
Advarsel Dette produkt kræver beskyttelse mod kortslutning (overstrøm). Dette skal være en del
elinstallationen i bygningen. Installation skal ske i overensstemmelse med nationale og lokale
ledningsregler.
2-95
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-96
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1046—Installing or Replacing the Unit
Warning When installing or replacing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and
disconnected last. Statement 1046
Waarschuwing Bij installatie of vervanging van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste worden
gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa tai korvattaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja
maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l’installation ou du remplacement de l’appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être
connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation oder beim Austauschen der Einheit immer zuerst
hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione o sostituzione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento a massa
e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres eller byttes, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles sist.
Aviso Ao instalar ou substituir a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada, e a
última a ser desligada.
¡Advertencia! Al instalar o sustituir el equipo, conecte siempre la toma de tierra al principio y desconéctela
al final.
Varning! Vid installation eller utbyte av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och kopplas
bort sist.
2-97
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso Ao instalar ou substituir a unidade, a conexão terra sempre deve ser executada primeiro e
desconectada em seguida.
Advarsel Ved installation og genmontering af enheden, skal jordforbindelsen altid installeres først og
afinstalleres sidst.
2-98
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1047—Overheating Prevention
Warning To prevent the system from overheating, do not operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum
recommended ambient temperature of:
113 °F (45°C). Statement 1047
Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat het systeem oververhit raakt, dient u het niet te gebruiken in een ruimte waar
de maximaal aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van
113 °F (45°C) wordt overschreden.
Varoitus Jotta järjestelmä ei kuumentuisi liikaa, sitä ei saa käyttää liian kuumassa ympäristössä.
Suosituksen mukainen käyttölämpötila on enintään
113 °F (45°C).
Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe du système, il est recommandé de maintenir une température ambiante
inférieure à
113 °F (45°C).
Warnung Um das System vor Überhitzung zu schützen, vermeiden Sie dessen Verwendung in einem Bereich,
in dem die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene Maximum von
113 °F (45°C). überschreitet.
Avvertenza Per evitare che il sistema si surriscaldi, non utilizzatelo dove la temperatura ambiente sia superiore
alla temperatura massima raccomandata di
113 °F (45°C).
Advarsel For å hindre at systemet blir overopphetet, må det ikke brukes på et sted der temperaturen overstiger
den maksimalt anbefalte temperaturen på
113 °F (45°C).
Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do sistema, não o opere em áreas que excedam a temperatura
ambiente máxima recomendada de
113 °F (45°C).
¡Advertencia! Para impedir que el sistema se recaliente, no lo utilice en zonas en las que la temperatura ambiente
llegue a los
113 °F (45°C).
Varning! Förhindra att systemet överhettas genom att inte använda det på en plats där den rekommenderade
omgivningstemperaturen överstiger
113 °F (45°C)..
113 °F (45°C).
2-99
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1048—Rack Stabilization
113 °F (45°C).
113 °F (45°C).
113 °F (45°C).
113 °F (45°C).
113 °F (45°C).
113 °F (45°C).
113 °F (45°C).
Warning Stability hazard. The rack stabilizing mechanism must be in place, or the rack must be bolted to the
floor before you slide the unit out for servicing. Failure to stabilize the rack can cause the rack to
tip over. Statement 1048
Waarschuwing Kantelgevaar. Als u een eenheid uitschuift ten behoeve van service-werkzaamheden, moet het rek
met de speciaal daarvoor bedoelde voorzieningen zijn gestabiliseerd of met bouten in de vloer zijn
vastgezet. Het rek kan kantelen als het niet afdoende is gestabiliseerd.
Varoitus Stabiiliusvaara. Telineen stabilointimekanismin on oltava paikallaan tai telineen on oltava ruuvattu
lattiaan, ennen kuin liu'utat yksikön ulos huoltoa varten. Ellei telinettä stabiloida, se voi kaatua.
2-100
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Attention Stabilisation de l'armoire : le mécanisme de stabilisation doit être installé correctement ou
l'armoire doit être solidement fixée au sol avant d'être utilisée. Sans cette précaution, elle risque
de basculer.
Warnung Umstürzgefahr. Bevor Sie die Einheit zur Wartung hinausziehen, sollten Sie die
Stabilisierungsvorrichtung des Gestells aktivieren oder das Gestell am Boden festschrauben. Wenn
das Gestell nicht entsprechend gesichert ist, kann es umkippen.
Avvertenza Pericolo di stabilità. Prima di estrarre l’unità per la manutenzione, accertarsi che il meccanismo di
stabilizzazione del rack sia in funzione oppure che il rack sia affrancato al pavimento. La mancata
stabilità del rack può causarne il rovesciamento.
Advarsel Stabilitetsfare. Stabiliseringsmekanismen for stativet må være på plass, eller stativet må være
skrudd fast i gulvet, før du drar ut enheten for å utføre service. Hvis du ikke stabiliserer stativet, kan
det hende at stativet velter.
Aviso Risco de estabilidade. O mecanismo de estabilização da prateleira tem de estar colocado no devido
lugar ou, então, a prateleira tem de estar aparafusada ao chão antes de fazer deslizar a unidade para
fora, para reparação. A falha na estabilização da prateleira pode fazê-la virar.
¡Advertencia! Equilibrio inestable. El mecanismo de equilibrio del bastidor debe estar colocado en su lugar
correcto; de lo contrario, atornille el bastidor al suelo antes de deslizar la unidad para su
manipulación. Si no equilibra el bastidor, éste podrá volcarse.
Varning! Stabilitetsfara. Rackets stabiliseringsmekanism måste sitta på plats, eller också måste racket
skruvas fast i golvet innan du drar ut en enhet för underhåll. Om racket inte stabiliseras, kan
det välta.
2-101
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1050—Power Module
Warning Never install an AC power module and a DC power module in the same chassis. Statement 1050
Waarschuwing Een voedingsmodule met wisselstroom mag nooit samen met een gelijkstroomvoedingsmodule in
het chassis geïnstalleerd worden.
Varoitus Älä koskaan asenna vaihtosähkötehomoduulia ja tasasähkötehomoduulia samaan asennuspohjaan.
Attention N’installez jamais un module d’alimentation AC et un module d’alimentation DC dans le même
châssis.
Warnung Ein Wechelstromsmodul und ein Gleichstrommodul dürfen niemals in demselben Chassis installiert
werden.
Avvertenza Non installare un modulo di alimentazione in corrente alternata e un modulo di alimentazione in
corrente continua nello stesso chassis.
Advarsel En vekselstrømmodul og en likestrømmodul må aldri installeres i samme chassis.
Aviso Nunca instale um modulo de corrente CA (corrente alternada) e um modulo CC (corrente contínua)
no mesmo chassis.
¡Advertencia! Nunca instale un módulo de potencia de corriente alterna (CA) en un módulo de potencia de
corriente continua (CC) en el mismo chasis.
2-102
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1051—Laser Radiation
Varning! Installera aldrig en växelströms- och en likströmskraftenhet i samma chassi.
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from disconnected fibers or connectors. Do not stare into
beams or view directly with optical instruments. Statement 1051
Waarschuwing Losgekoppelde of losgeraakte glasvezels of aansluitingen kunnen onzichtbare laserstraling
produceren. Kijk niet rechtstreeks in de straling en gebruik geen optische instrumenten rond deze
glasvezels of aansluitingen.
Varoitus Irrotetuista kuiduista tai liittimistä voi tulla näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä. Älä tuijota säteitä tai katso
niitä suoraan optisilla välineillä.
Attention Les fibres ou connecteurs débranchés risquent d'émettre des rayonnements laser invisibles à l'oeil.
Ne regardez jamais directement les faisceaux laser à l'oeil nu, ni d'ailleurs avec des instruments
optiques.
2-103
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung Unterbrochene Fasern oder Steckerverbindungenkönnen unsichtbare Laserstrahlung abgeben.
Blicken Sie weder mit bloßem Auge noch mit optischen Instrumenten direkt in Laserstrahlen.
Avvertenza Le fibre ottiche ed i relativi connettori possono emettere radiazioni laser. I fasci di luce non devono
mai essere osservati direttamente o attraverso strumenti ottici.
Advarsel Det kan forekomme usynlig laserstråling fra fiber eller kontakter som er frakoblet. Stirr ikke direkte
inn i strålene eller se på dem direkte gjennom et optisk instrument.
Aviso Radiação laser invisível pode ser emitida de conectores ou fibras desconectadas. Não olhe
diretamente para os feixes ou com instrumentos ópticos.
¡Advertencia! Es posible que las fibras desconectadas emitan radiación láser invisible. No fije la vista en los
rayos ni examine éstos con instrumentos ópticos.
Varning! Osynlig laserstrålning kan avges från frånkopplade fibrer eller kontaktdon. Rikta inte blicken in i
strålar och titta aldrig direkt på dem med hjälp av optiska instrument.
Aviso Radiação laser invisível pode ser emitida a partir de fibras ou conectores desconectados. Não fixe
o olhar nos feixes e nem olhe diretamente com instrumentos ópticos.
Advarsel Usynlig laserstråling kan forekomme fra brugte fibre eller stik. Stir ikke ind i stråler eller direkte
med optiske instrumenter.
2-104
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-105
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-106
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1053—Class 1M Laser Radition
Warning Class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments. Statement 1053
Waarschuwing Klasse-1M laserstraling indien toegangspaneel open is. Niet rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten.
Varoitus Säteilee luokan 1M lasersätelyä avattuna. Älä katso säteeseen optisilla laitteilla.
Attention Radiation laser de classe 1M en cas d’ouverture. Ne pas observer directement avec des instruments
optiques.
Warnung Laserstrahlung der Klasse 1 M, wenn geöffnet. Nicht mit optischen Instrumenten direkt hineinsehen.
Avvertenza Radiazioni laser Classe 1 quando aperto. Non osservare in maniera diretta con strumenti ottici.
Advarsel Laserstråling i klasse 1M i åpen stilling. Skal ikke ses direkte med optiske instrumenter.
Aviso Radiação laser classe 1M quando aberto. Não olhar diretamente com instrumentos ópticos.
¡Advertencia! Los productos láser Clase 1M emiten radiación una vez abiertos. No los mire directamente con
instrumentos ópticos.
Varning! Klass 1M laser utstrålning när öppen. Betrakta ej direkt med optiska instrument.
2-107
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1054—Laser Viewing
Warning For diverging beams, viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments within a distance of
100 mm may harm your eyes. For collimated beams, viewing the laser output with certain optical
instruments designed for use at a distance may harm your eyes. Statement 1054
Waarschuwing Voor divergerende stralen kan het bekijken van de laseruitvoer met bepaalde optische instrumenten
binnen een afstand van 100 mm gevaar voor de ogen opleveren. Voor collimerende stralen kan het
bekijken van de laseruitvoer met bepaalde optische instrumenten die bestemd zijn voor gebruik op
afstand gevaar voor de ogen opleveren.
Varoitus Divergoivien lasersäteiden katselu tietyillä optisilla laitteilla 100 millimetrin etäisyydeltä saattaa
vahingoittaa silmiä. Kollimoivien lasersäteiden katselu tietyillä etäkäyttöisillä optisilla laitteilla
saattaa vahingoittaa silmiä.
Attention Pour les faisceaux divergents, observer la sortie laser avec certains instruments optiques à une
distance de moins de 100 mm peut être nocif pour les yeux. Pour les faisceaux collimatés, observer
la sortie laser avec certains instruments optiques conçus pour être utilisés à distance peut être
nocif pour les yeux.
Warnung Bei auseinandergehenden Strahlen kann das Betrachten des Laserausgangs mit optischen
Instrumenten innerhalb einer Distanz von 100 mm die Augen gefährden. Bei gerichteten Strahlen
stellt das Betrachten des Laserausgangs mit bestimmten optischen Instrumenten, die für den
Gebrauch in einer bestimmten Entfernung vorgesehen sind, eine Gefährdung der Augen dar.
Avvertenza Per fasci divergenti, l'osservazione dell'emissione laser con certi strumenti ottici entro una
distanza di 100 mm può danneggiare gli occhi. Per fasci collimati, l'osservazione dell'emissione
laser con certi strumenti ottici realizzati per l'utilizzo a distanza può danneggiare gli occhi.
Advarsel Når det er spredningsstråler til stede kan det medføre fare for øynene å observere lasereffekten med
visse optiske instrumenter innenfor en avstand på 100 mm. Når det er parallellstråler til stede, kan
det medføre fare for øynene å observere lasereffekten med visse optiske instrumenter som er
fremstilt til bruk med en viss avstand.
Aviso Em feixes divergentes, olhar a emissão de laser com determinados instrumentos ópticos a uma
distância de até 100mm pode causar danos à visão. Em feixes colimados, olhar a emissão de laser
com instrumentos ópticos apropriados para serem utilizados para visualização à distância pode
causar danos à visão.
2-108
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1055—Class I and Class 1M Laser
¡Advertencia! En los haces divergentes, la visualización de la salida del láser con determinados instrumentos
ópticos a una distancia de 100 mm puede dañar la vista. En los haces colimados, la visualización de
la salida del láser con determinados instrumentos ópticos diseñados para el uso a distancia puede
dañar la vista.
Varning! Vid divergerande utstrålning, kan dina ögon skadas om du betraktar lasern med vissa optiska
instrument inom en distans på 100 mm. Vid parallell utstrålning kan dina ögon skadas om du
betraktar laserstrålen med vissa optiska instrument.
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Waarschuwing Laserproducten van Klasse I (CDRH) en Klasse 1M (IEC).
Varoitus Luokan I (CDRH) ja luokan 1M (IEC) lasertuotteita.
Attention Produits laser catégorie I (CDRH) et catégorie 1M (IEC).
Warnung Laserprodukte der Klasse I (CDRH) und Klasse 1M (IEC).
Avvertenza Prodotti laser di Classe I (CDRH) e Classe 1M (IEC).
Advarsel Klasse I (CDRH) og klasse 1M (IEC) laserprodukter.
Aviso Produtos laser Classe I (CDRH) e Classe 1M (IEC).
2-109
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1056—Unterminated Fiber Cable
¡Advertencia! Productos láser de Clase I (CDRH) y Clase 1M (IEC).
Varning! Laserprodukter av Klass I (CDRH) och Klass 1M (IEC).
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical
instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may
pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Waarschuwing Er kunnen onzichtbare laserstralen worden uitgezonden vanuit het uiteinde van de onafgebroken
vezelkabel of connector. Niet in de straal kijken of deze rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten. Als u de laseruitvoer met bepaalde optische instrumenten bekijkt (zoals bijv. een
oogloep, vergrootgras of microscoop) binnen een afstand van 100 mm kan dit gevaar voor uw ogen
opleveren.
Varoitus Päättämättömän kuitukaapelin tai -liittimen päästä voi tulla näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä. Älä tuijota
sädettä tai katso sitä suoraan optisilla välineillä. Lasersäteen katsominen tietyillä optisilla
välineillä (esim. suurennuslasilla tai mikroskoopilla) 10 cm:n päästä tai sitä lähempää voi olla
vaarallista silmille.
Attention Des émissions de radiations laser invisibles peuvent se produire à l’extrémité d’un câble en fibre ou
d’un raccord sans terminaison. Ne pas fixer du regard le rayon ou l’observer directement avec des
instruments optiques. L’observation du laser à l’aide certains instruments optiques (loupes et
microscopes) à une distance inférieure à 100 mm peut poser des risques pour les yeux.
Warnung Eine unsichtbare Laserstrahlung kann vom Ende des nicht angeschlossenen Glasfaserkabels oder
Steckers ausgestrahlt werden. Nicht in den Laserstrahl schauen oder diesen mit einem optischen
Instrument direkt ansehen. Ein Betrachten des Laserstrahls mit bestimmten optischen Instrumenten,
wie z.B. Augenlupen, Vergrößerungsgläsern und Mikroskopen innerhalb eines Abstands von 100 mm
kann für das Auge gefährlich sein.
2-110
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Avvertenza L’estremità del connettore o del cavo ottico senza terminazione può emettere radiazioni laser
invisibili. Non fissare il raggio od osservarlo in modo diretto con strumenti ottici. L’osservazione del
fascio laser con determinati strumenti ottici (come lupette, lenti di ingrandimento o microscopi)
entro una distanza di 100 mm può provocare danni agli occhi.
Advarsel Usynlig laserstråling kan emittere fra enden av den ikke-terminerte fiberkabelen eller koblingen.
Ikke se inn i strålen og se heller ikke direkte på strålen med optiske instrumenter. Observering av
laserutgang med visse optiske instrumenter (for eksempel øyelupe, forstørrelsesglass eller
mikroskoper) innenfor en avstand på 100 mm kan være farlig for øynene.
Aviso Radiação laser invisível pode ser emitida pela ponta de um conector ou cabo de fibra não terminado.
Não olhe fixa ou diretamente para o feixe ou com instrumentos ópticos. Visualizar a emissão do
laser com certos instrumentos ópticos (por exemplo, lupas, lentes de aumento ou microscópios) a
uma distância de 100 mm pode causar riscos à visão.
¡Advertencia! El extremo de un cable o conector de fibra sin terminación puede emitir radiación láser invisible.
No se acerque al radio de acción ni lo mire directamente con instrumentos ópticos. La exposición
del ojo a una salida de láser con determinados instrumentos ópticos (por ejemplo, lupas y
microscopios) a una distancia de 100 mm puede comportar lesiones oculares.
Varning! Osynlig laserstrålning kan komma från änden på en oavslutad fiberkabel eller -anslutning. Titta inte
rakt in i strålen eller direkt på den med optiska instrument. Att titta på laserstrålen med vissa
optiska instrument (t.ex. lupper, förstoringsglas och mikroskop) från ett avstånd på 100 mm kan
skada ögonen.
2-111
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1057—Hazardous Radiation Exposure
Warning Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified may result in
hazardous radiation exposure. Statement 1057
Waarschuwing Het gebruik van regelaars of bijstellingen of het uitvoeren van procedures anders dan opgegeven
kan leiden tot blootstelling aan gevaarlijke straling.
Varoitus Säätimien tai säätöjen käyttö ja toimenpiteiden suorittaminen ohjeista poikkeavalla tavalla voi
altistaa vaaralliselle säteilylle.
Attention L’utilisation de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures autres que ceux spécifiés peut entraîner
une exposition dangereuse à des radiations.
Warnung Die Verwendung von nicht spezifizierten Steuerelementen, Einstellungen oder Verfahrensweisen
kann eine gefährliche Strahlenexposition zur Folge haben.
Avvertenza L’adozione di controlli, regolazioni o procedure diverse da quelle specificate può comportare il
pericolo di esposizione a radiazioni.
Advarsel Bruk av kontroller eller justeringer eller utførelse av prosedyrer som ikke er spesifiserte, kan
resultere i farlig strålingseksponering.
Aviso O uso de controles, ajustes ou desempenho de procedimentos diferentes dos especificados pode
resultar em exposição prejudicial de radiação.
¡Advertencia! La aplicación de controles, ajustes y procedimientos distintos a los especificados puede comportar
una exposición peligrosa a la radiación.
Varning! Om andra kontroller eller justeringar än de angivna används, eller om andra processer än de
angivna genomförs, kan skadlig strålning avges.
2-112
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso O uso de controles, ajustes ou procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados pode resultar em
exposição perigosa à radiação.
Advarsel Brug af kontrolfunktioner, justeringer, eller udførelse af procedurer andre end de, der er angivet, kan
resultere i udsættelse for farlig bestråling.
2-113
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1071—Warning Definition
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de
waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt
raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin
käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu
onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen
mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien
lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant
entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez
conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des
avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,
référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
2-114
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen
kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und
den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du
begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med
elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten
av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne
enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de
lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos
perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de
prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para
localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el
número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña
a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
2-115
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av
varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna
anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR
2-116
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões
corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os
circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o
número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de
segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for
legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de
involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til
undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de
oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER
2-117
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-118
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1072—Shock Hazard from Interconnections
Warning Voltages that present a shock hazard may exist on Power over Ethernet (PoE) circuits if
interconnections are made using uninsulated exposed metal contacts, conductors, or terminals.
Avoid using such interconnection methods, unless the exposed metal parts are located within a
restricted access location and users and service people who are authorized within the restricted
access location are made aware of the hazard. A restricted access area can be accessed only
through the use of a special tool, lock and key or other means of security. Statement 1072
Waarschuwing Voltages kunnen elektrische schokken veroorzaken in PoE (Power over Ethernet)-circuits als er
verbindingen worden gemaakt met blootliggende metalen contactpunten, geleiders of
aansluitingspunten die niet zijn geïsoleerd. Gebruik dit type verbinding niet tenzij de blootliggende
metalen onderdelen zich bevinden op een locatie met beperkte toegang en de gebruikers en
onderhoudstechnici die toegang tot deze locatie hebben, op het gevaar worden gewezen. De locatie
met beperkte toegang kan alleen worden geopend met speciaal gereedschap, slot en sleutel of een
andere beveiligingsmethode.
2-119
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varoitus Sisäisissä Ethernet (PoE) -virtapiireissä voi olla sähköiskun vaaran aiheuttavia jännitteitä, jos
kytkentöihin käytetään eristämättömiä paljaita metalliliittimiä tai -johtimia. Vältä tällaisia
kytkentöjä, elleivät paljaat metalliosat ole rajatussa paikassa. Ilmoita valtuutetuille käyttäjille ja
huoltohenkilöille vaarasta. Rajattuun alueeseen pääsee käsiksi ainoastaan erityistyökalua, lukkoa
ja avainta tai muuta turvallista menetelmää käyttämällä.
Attention Les tensions existant sur les alimentations utilisant la technologie PoE (Power over Ethernet)
peuvent constituer un risque d'électrocution si les interconnexions sont effectuées en utilisant des
terminaux, conducteurs ou contacts métalliques exposés non isolés. Évitez d'utiliser de telles
méthodes d'interconnexion à moins que les pièces métalliques exposées ne se trouvent dans un
emplacement d'accès restreint et que les utilisateurs et les responsables du service autorisés dans
cet emplacement d'accès restreint ne soient conscients du danger. Une zone d'accès restreint peut
être accédée uniquement à l'aide d'une clé, d'un outil et d'un verrou spécial, ou d'autres moyens de
sécurité.
Warnung Bei Power-over-Ethernet-(PoE-)Schaltkreisen besteht u.U. Stromschlaggefahr, wenn Verbindungen
unter Verwendung nicht isolierter, freiliegender Metallkontakte, Leiter oder Anschlussklemmen
hergestellt werden. Vermeiden Sie das Herstellen solcher Verbindungen, es sei denn, die
freiliegenden Metallteile befinden sich an Orten mit beschränktem Zugang, und Personen, die
Zugang dazu haben, sind ausdrücklich über diese Gefahr informiert worden. Ein Ort mit
beschränktem Zugang ist nur mit Hilfe eines speziellen Werkzeugs, Schloss und Schlüssels oder
anderen Sicherheitseinrichtungen zugänglich.
Avvertenza Nei circuiti con alimentazione via Ethernet (PoE) possono verificarsi pericoli di scosse elettriche se
si creano connessioni con contatti metallici, conduttori o terminali scoperti. Evitare di utilizzare i
metodi di connessione sopraelencati a meno che le parti metalliche esposte non si trovino in una
zona riservata e gli utenti e il personale di assistenza, che sono autorizzati ad accedere nella
suddetta zona, siano stati messi al corrente del pericolo. È possibile accedere alla zona riservata
solamente utilizzando gli appositi elementi di sicurezza.
Advarsel I strømkretser med PoE (Power over Ethernet) kan det være spenninger som kan utgjøre støtfare hvis
det blir foretatt sammenkoblinger med uisolerte, eksponerte kontakter, ledere eller terminaler av
metall. Unngå å bruke slike sammenkoblingsmetoder med mindre de eksponerte metalldelene er i
et område med begrenset tilgang, og brukere og servicepersonell som har tilgang til det begrensede
området, blir gjort oppmerksom på faren. Et område med begrenset tilgang kan bare åpnes ved hjelp
av spesialverktøy, nøkkel eller andre sikkerhetstiltak.
Aviso Pode haver voltagens que representam perigo de choque em circuitos PoE (Power over Ethernet) se
as interconexões forem feitas utilizando-se terminais, condutores ou contatos de metal exposto e
sem isolamento. Evite utilizar tais métodos de interconexão a não ser que as partes de metal
expostas estejam em um local de acesso restrito e os usuários e o pessoal de serviço com acesso
autorizado a este local restrito estejam cientes do perigo. Uma área de acesso restrito só pode ser
acessada com o uso de uma ferramenta, fechadura e chave especial ou de outros meios de
segurança.
¡Advertencia! Puede haber voltajes con riesgo de shock en circuitos de alimentación sobre el cableado Ethernet
(PoE), si para las interconexiones se utilizan contactos, conductores o terminales metálicos
descubiertos. Evite tales métodos de interconexión, a menos que las partes metálicas descubiertas
se encuentren en un lugar de acceso restringido y tanto los usuarios como el personal de servicios
en dicho lugar sean conscientes de la existencia de tal riesgo. Sólo se puede tener acceso a una
zona de acceso restringido mediante el uso de una herramienta especial, un candado y una llave u
otros medios de seguridad.
2-120
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varning! Det kan finnas spänningar på PoE-kretsarna (Power over Ethernet) som utgör risk för stötar om
sammankopplingarna görs med ej isolerade, exponerade kontakter, ledare och/eller terminaler av
metall. Undvik att använda sådana sammankopplingsmetoder, såvida inte de exponerade
metalldelarna finns i en plats med begränsad åtkomst. Användare och servicepersonal som tillåts
inom platsen med begränsad åtkomst måste vara medvetna om risken. Ett begränsat område kan
bara nås med ett speciellt verktyg eller lås, en speciell nyckel eller någon annan säkerhetsmetod.
2-121
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1074—Comply with Local and National Electrical Codes
Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074
Waarschuwing Bij installatie van de apparatuur moet worden voldaan aan de lokale en nationale
elektriciteitsvoorschriften.
2-122
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varoitus Laitteisto tulee asentaa paikallisten ja kansallisten sähkömääräysten mukaisesti.
Attention L'équipement doit être installé conformément aux normes électriques nationales et locales.
Warnung Die Installation der Geräte muss den Sicherheitsstandards entsprechen.
Avvertenza L'installazione dell'impianto deve essere conforme ai codici elettrici locali e nazionali.
Advarsel Installasjon av utstyret må samsvare med lokale og nasjonale elektrisitetsforskrifter.
Aviso A instalação do equipamento tem de estar em conformidade com os códigos eléctricos locais e
nacionais.
¡Advertencia! La instalación del equipo debe cumplir con las normativas de electricidad locales y nacionales.
Varning! Installation av utrustningen måste ske i enlighet med gällande elinstallationsföreskrifter.
2-123
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
2-124
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1075—Hazardous Voltage or Energy Present on DC Power Terminals
Warning Hazardous voltage or energy may be present on DC power terminals. Always replace cover when
terminals are not in service. Be sure uninsulated conductors are not accessible when cover is in
place. Statement 1075
Waarschuwing Op DC-aansluitingspunten kunnen zich gevaarlijke voltages of energieën voordoen. Plaats altijd de
afsluiting wanneer de aansluitingspunten niet worden gebruikt Zorg ervoor dat blootliggende
contactpunten niet toegankelijk zijn wanneer de afsluiting is geplaatst.
Varoitus Tasavirtaliittimissä saattaa olla huomattava jännite tai teho. Sulje suojus aina, kun liittimet eivät ole
käytössä. Suojuksen ollessa suljettuna varmista, että kohde on suojattu eristämättömiltä johtimilta.
Attention Le voltage ou l'énergie électrique des terminaux à courant continu peuvent être dangereux. Veillez
à toujours replacer le couvercle lors les terminaux ne sont pas en service. Assurez-vous que les
conducteurs non isolés ne sont pas accessibles lorsque le couvercle est en place.
Warnung In mit Gleichstrom betriebenen Terminals kann es zu gefählicher Spannung kommen. Die Terminals
müssen abgedeckt werden, wenn sie nicht in Betrieb sind. Stellen Sie bei Benutzung der Abdeckung
sicher, dass alle nicht isolierten, stromführenden Kabel abgedeckt sind.
Avvertenza I terminali di alimentazione DC potrebbero contenere voltaggio o energia pericolosi. Accertarsi di
sostituire il coperchio ogni qualvolta i terminali non sono operativi. Accertarsi che i conduttori
scoperti non siano accessibili quando il coperchio è inserito.
Advarsel Det kan forekomme farlig spenning eller energi i likestrømsterminaler. Sett alltid dekselet på plass
når terminalene ikke er i bruk. Kontroller at uisolerte ledere ikke er tilgjengelige når dekselet er på
plass.
Aviso Os terminais de corrente contínua podem fornecer tensão ou energia perigosa. Volte a colocar a
tampa, sempre que os terminais não estiverem a ser utilizados. Certifique-se de que os condutores
sem isolamento não estão acessíveis, quando a tampa estiver colocada.
¡Advertencia! Puede haber energía o voltaje peligrosos en los terminales eléctricos de CC. Reemplace siempre la
cubierta cuando no estén utilizándose los terminales. Asegúrese de que no haya acceso a
conductores descubiertos cuando la cubierta esté colocada.
Varning! Farlig spänning eller skadlig energi kan finnas i likströmsterminalerna. Sätt alltid tillbaka höljet när
terminalerna inte används. Försäkra att inga oisolerade ledare kan nås när höljet sitter på plats.
2-125
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1076—Clearance Around the Ventilation Openings
Warning To prevent airflow restriction, allow clearance around the ventilation openings to be at least:
1 inch (25.4 mm) Statement 1076
Waarschuwing Om voldoende luchtstroming te garanderen, dient u te zorgen voor een vrije ruimte rond de
ventilatieopeningen van ten minste:
1 inch (25.4 mm)
2-126
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Varoitus Jotta ilma pääsisi virtaamaan vapaasti, välyksen ilmanvaihtoaukkojen ympärillä tulee olla
vähintään
1 inch (25.4 mm)
Attention Pour faciliter la circulation d'air, aménagez un dégagement autour des bouches d'aération d'au
moins :
1 inch (25.4 mm)
Warnung Lassen Sie für Lüftungsöffnungen den folgenden Mindestabstand frei, um eine freie Luftzufuhr zu
gewährleisten:
1 inch (25.4 mm)
Avvertenza Per evitare ostruzioni all'efflusso dell'aria, lasciare intorno alle aperture per ventilazione uno
spazio di almeno:
1 inch (25.4 mm)
Advarsel For å unngå hindringer i luftgjennomstrømningen må det være fri plass rundt ventilasjonsåpningene
på minst
1 inch (25.4 mm)
Aviso Para evitar a limitação do fluxo de ar, deixe um espaço em torno dos orifícios de ventilação de, pelo
menos:
1 inch (25.4 mm)
¡Advertencia! Para evitar restricciones del flujo de aire, el espacio alrededor de las aberturas de ventilación debe
ser al menos de:
1 inch (25.4 mm)
Varning! Undvik att begränsa luftflödet genom ha ett fritt utrymme kring ventilationsöppningarna på minst:
1 inch (25.4 mm)
1 inch (25.4 mm)
1 inch (25.4 mm)
1 inch (25.4 mm)
1 inch (25.4 mm)
2-127
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1084—Intra-Building Ports Suitable for Connecting
Warning The following ports are intra-building ports and are suitable only for connecting to shielded cabling
grounded at both ends.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Waarschuwing De volgende poorten zijn intra-building-poorten en zijn alleen geschikt voor aansluiting op
geïsoleerde kabels die aan beide kanten geaard zijn.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Varoitus Seuraavat liitännät ovat rakennuksen sisäisiä liitäntöjä, jotka soveltuvat ainoastaan molemmista
päistä maadoitettujen, suojattujen kaapelien liittämiseen.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Attention Les ports suivants sont des ports internes au bâtiment et conviennent uniquement à une connexion
à un câblage blindé mis à la terre aux deux extrémités.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Warnung Die folgenden Ports sind Intra-Building-Ports und ausschließlich für den Anschluss an
abgeschirmte Kabel geeignet, die an beiden Enden geerdet sind.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Avvertenza Le seguenti porte sono adatte esclusivamente per collegamenti interni con cablaggi schermati
dotati di messa a terra su entrambe le estremità.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Advarsel Følgende porter er intrabygningsporter og passer bare for tilkobling til skjermet kabling som er
jordet i begge ender.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Aviso As portas seguintes são portas no mesmo edifício adequadas apenas para ligações a cablagem
blindada com ligação de terra em ambas as extremidades.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
¡Advertencia! Los siguientes puertos son intra-edificios y sólo se pueden utilizar con cableado blindado de
conexión a tierra en ambos extremos.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Varning! Följande portar är interiörportar och lämpar sig endast för anslutning till skärmade kablar som
jordats i båda ändar.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
2-128
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1085—Intra-Building Ports for Setup and Maintenance
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Warning The following ports are intra-building ports used only for setup and maintenance purposes by
trained personnel and are not connected during normal operation.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Waarschuwing De volgende poorten zijn intra-building-poorten die alleen tijdens installatie en onderhoud worden
gebruikt door opgeleid personeel. Deze zijn tijdens normale werking niet aangesloten.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Varoitus Seuraavat liitännät ovat rakennuksen sisäisiä liitäntöjä, jotka soveltuvat ainoastaan molemmista
päistä maadoitettujen, suojattujen kaapelien liittämiseen.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Attention Les ports suivants sont des ports internes au bâtiment utilisés uniquement pour des besoins de
configuration et de maintenance par un personnel formé et ne sont pas connectés durant un
fonctionnement normal.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Warnung Die folgenden Ports sind Intra-Building-Ports, die nur für Einrichtungs- und Wartungszwecke durch
geschulte Mitarbeiter verwendet werden und während des normalen Betriebs nicht angeschlossen
sind.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Avvertenza Le porte seguenti sono adatte per collegamenti interni e vengono utilizzate esclusivamente ai fini
dell'installazione e della manutenzione da parte di personale specializzato e non sono collegate
durante il normale funzionamento.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Advarsel Følgende porter er intrabygningsporter som bare brukes til oppsett- og vedlikeholdsformål av
faglærte personer, og er ikke tilkoblet under vanlig bruk.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
2-129
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Statement 1088—Avoid Servicing Outdoor Connections During an Electrical
Storm
Aviso As portas seguintes são portas no mesmo edifício utilizadas apenas para efeitos de configuração e
manutenção por pessoal treinado e não estão ligadas durante as condições normais de operação.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
¡Advertencia! Los siguientes puertos son intra-edificios y se utilizan únicamente con fines de instalación y
mantenimiento por el personal formado. Estos puertos no están conectados durante su
funcionamiento normal.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Varning! Följande portar är interiörportar som endast används för installation och underhåll av utbildad
personal. Portarna är inte anslutna vid normal drift.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Order Wire, Ethernet, LAN, CRAFT, E1/DS3, Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports.
Warning
Avoid using or servicing any equipment that has outdoor connections during an electrical storm.
There may be a risk of electric shock from lightning. Statement 1088
Waarschuwing Vermijd het gebruik van en onderhoud aan apparatuur met buitenaansluitingen tijdens een
onweersbui.
Er bestaat een gering risico op elektrische schokken door blikseminslag.
Varoitus Vältä kaikkien ulkoliitäntöjä sisältävien laitteiden käyttöä ja huoltoa ukonilman aikana.
Saatat saada sähköiskun salamoinnin johdosta.
Attention Les équipements pourvus de connexions extérieures ne doivent pas être utilisés ni entretenus
pendant un orage.
La foudre est susceptible de provoquer des décharges électriques.
2-130
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Translated Warnings
Warnung Vermeiden Sie bei Gewitter die Nutzung oder Bedienung von Geräten mit Außenanschlüssen.
Da bei einem Blitzeinschlag die Gefahr von Stromschlägen besteht.
Avvertenza Evitare l’utilizzo o la manutenzione di qualsiasi apparecchiatura con collegamenti per esterni
durante un temporale.
In quanto vi è la possibilità di folgorazione da fulmine.
Advarsel Under tordenvær må det unngås å bruke eller reparere utstyr som har utendørs forbindelser.
Det finnes en risiko for elektrisk støt fra lyn.
Aviso Evite utilizar ou realizar manutenção em qualquer equipamento que tenha ligações exteriores
durante uma tempestade eléctrica.
Pode haver um risco remoto de choque eléctrico devido aos relâmpagos.
¡Advertencia! Evite el uso o mantenimiento de cualquier material con conexiones al aire libre durante una
tormenta eléctrica.
Ya que el riesgo de descarga eléctrica es mayor debido a los rayos.
Varning! Använd eller reparera inte någon utrustning som har anslutningar utomhus under åskväder.
Det finns en liten risk för elektriska stötar vid blixtnedslag.
2-131
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
This section includes the cautions and regulatory compliance statements for the Network
Equipment-Building System (NEBS) certification from the Telcordia Electromagnetic Compatibility
and Electrical Safety - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment (A Module of
LSSGR, FR-64; TSGR, FR-440; and NEBSFR, FR-2063) Telcordia Technologies Generic
Requirements, GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4, June 2006. This section also contains NEBS requirements.
NEBS Compliance Statements
Statement 7003—Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS Standard for Electromagnetic
Compatibility and Safety
Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the serial high-speed WAN interface ports only to intra-building or unexposed wiring or
cable. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends. The
intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly must not be metallically connected to
interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE) and require
isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection
in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Statement 7005—Intra-building Lightning Surge and AC Power Fault—Issue 4
Warning The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to intra-building
or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly
MUST NOT metallically connect to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces
are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
2-132
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
Statement 7018—Intra-building Lightning Surge and AC Power Fault—Issue 5
Warning The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to intra-building
or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly
MUST NOT metallically connect to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces
are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 5) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Statement 7012—Equipment Interfacing with AC Power Ports
This equipment shall be connected to AC mains provided with a surge protective device (SPD) at the
service equipment complying with NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC).
Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal surface.
Caution
To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
for Ethernet RJ-45 ports, use only shielded Ethernet cables that are grounded on both ends. In a NEBS
installation, all Ethernet ports are limited to intra-building wiring.
Caution
The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly is only suitable for connection to
intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling. The intra-building ports of the equipment or
subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its
wiring.
These interfaces are designed for use only as intra-building interfaces (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as
described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4), and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The
addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces
metallically to OSP wiring.
The ONS 15xxx is designed for common bonding network (CBN) installations.
An electrical conducting path shall exist between the product chassis and the metal surface of the
enclosure or rack in which it is mounted or to a grounding conductor.
Electrical continuity shall be provided by using thread-forming type mounting screws that remove
any paint or nonconductive coatings and establish a metal-to-metal contact. Any paint or other
nonconductive coatings shall be removed on the surfaces between the mounting hardware and the
enclosure or rack.
The surfaces shall be cleaned and an antioxidant applied before installation.
The DC power Battery Return (BR) or positive terminal, must be grounded at the source end (power
feed or mains power end).
The DC power BR input terminal of ONS 15xxx is not connected to the equipment frame (chassis) and
is configured as DC-I in compliance with GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 (sec.9.8.3).
2-133
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
NEBS Requirements
Note Paper copies will be provided to the customers on request. Cisco "guarantees" documentation
being proof of water saturation.
DC-powered products have a nominal operating DC voltage of -48 VDC. Minimal steady state DC
operating voltage is - 40.5 VDC. Reference American National Standards Institute (ANSI) T1.315,
Table 1.
The ONS 15xxx is suitable for installation in network telecommunication facilities where NEC
(National Electric Code) applies.
Note DS1 ports are classified as Type 5 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 when the ONS
15310-MA is installed in the OSP. The ONS 15310-MA EIAs and the OSP cabinet are equipped
with primary and secondary protections. In addition, isolation transformers are also provided.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
R2-5 ESD Mitigation The ESD warning labels are installed on the
chassis.
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband
when working with a powered ONS
15xxx. Plug the wristband cable into the
ESD jack located to the left of the
chassis (expansion slot).
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding
wrist straps to avoid electrostatic
discharge (ESD) damage to the card.
Do not directly touch the backplane
with your hand or any metal tool, or you
could shock yourself.
R2-6 ESD Mitigation No additional site preparation beyond the normal
operating conditions is required to be specified.
R2-7 ESD Mitigation Refer the Cisco ONS 15xxx documentation for
best practices to follow to prevent Electrostatic
discharge (ESD) damage, which can occur when
equipments are improperly handled.
2-134
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
R3-1 Accessories for EMC
compliance
Ground cable, #6 AWG
stranded (minimum).
In a NEBS installation, shielded cables grounded
at both ends must be used.
Note A 1-inch (minimum) wide copper braid is
required for OSP installations.
Warning Blank faceplates and cover panels serve three important functions: they prevent
exposure to hazardous voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain
electromagnetic interference (EMI) that might disrupt other equipment; and they direct
the flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate the system unless all cards,
faceplates, front covers, and rear covers are in place.
Warning The Ethernet ports of ONS 15xxx are intra-building ports and are suitable only for
connecting to cat-5 shielded (STP) cabling grounded at both ends.
Warning The Alarm, Timing (BITS), Craft, LAN and UDC ports of ONS 15xxx are intra-building ports.
The BITS and LAN ports are suitable only for connecting to shielded cabling grounded at
both ends
Note The cable shield must be wire-wrapped to the GND pin of the wire wrap adapter.
Warning The DS1 and DS3 ports on the ONS 15xxx are intra-building ports and are suitable only
for connecting to shielded cabling grounded at both ends.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
2-135
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
R4-13 Intra-building ports DS1 ports are classified as Type 5 ports as
described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 when the
ONS 15310-MA is installed in the OSP. The ONS
15310-MA EIAs and the OSP cabinet are equipped
with primary and secondary protections. In
addition, isolation transformers are also provided.
Warning The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or subassembly is suitable
for connection to intra-building or
unexposed wiring or cabling only. The
intra-building port(s) of the equipment
or subassembly MUST NOT be
metallically connected to interfaces
which connect to the OSP or its wiring.
These interfaces are designed for use
as intra-building interfaces only (Type
2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require
isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection
in order to connect these interfaces
metallically to OSP wiring.
R4-16 Intra-building ports Shielded cable grounded at both ends specified for
copper telecom ports.
R4-20 Use of current-limiting
protectors
The Cisco ONS 15xxx ports are classified as Type
2 or Type 4 as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4.
CR4-21 Use of current-limiting
protectors
The Cisco ONS 15xxx ports are classified as Type
2 or Type 4 as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
2-136
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
R4-36 Intra-building ports DS1 ports are classified as Type 5 ports as
described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 when the
ONS 15310-MA is installed in the OSP. The ONS
15310-MA EIAs and the OSP cabinet are equipped
with primary and secondary protections. In
addition, isolation transformers are also provided.
Warning The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or subassembly is suitable
for connection to intra-building or
unexposed wiring or cabling only. The
intra-building port(s) of the equipment
or subassembly MUST NOT be
metallically connected to interfaces
which connect to the OSP or its wiring.
These interfaces are designed for use
as intra-building interfaces only (Type
2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require
isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection
in order to connect these interfaces
metallically to OSP wiring.
CO4-37 Primary voltage and current
limiters
The Cisco ONS 15xxx ports are classified as Type
2 or Type 4 as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4.
R4-39 Agreed Primary Protection The Cisco ONS 15xxx ports are classified as Type
2 or Type 4 as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4.
R4-40 Agreed Primary Protection The Cisco ONS 15xxx ports are classified as Type
2 or Type 4 as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4.
R4-42 Equipment with Integrated
Primary Protection (EIPP)
Applicable only for ONS 15310-MA OSP
installations.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
2-137
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
Warning This equipment contains integrated primary protection. This equipment is not suitable for
installation in central office and network locations that contain other primary protection
for OSP cable, such as EEEs (for example, CEVs and huts). The equipment may be located
in EECs where appropriate installation practices are used. For example, install
appropriate cabling to the equipment. A separate primary protector is not required.
Warning For the purpose of determining placement and location of fuse links or fuse cable, the
equipment shall be treated as a fuse-less protector, regardless of any capability to
provide fusing.
R4-49 EIPP protector characteristics
The ONS 15310-MA OSP
(Purcell FLX25GT) cabinet
includes:
• ADC ComProtect DS1
protection module
(ComProtect®
Solid-State). The specified
value of primary
voltage-limiting
protection is 400 V.
• ADC ComProtect DS3
protection module (ADC
P3M). The specified value
of primary
voltage-limiting
protection is 550 V.
Applicable only for ONS 15310-MA OSP
installations.
Warning This equipment contains integrated primary protection. This equipment is not suitable for
installation in central office and network locations that contain other primary protection
for OSP cable, such as EEEs (for example, CEVs, and huts). The equipment may be located
in EECs where appropriate installation practices are used. For example, install
appropriate cabling to the equipment. A separate primary protector is not required.
Warning For the purpose of determining placement and location of fuse links or fuse cable, the
equipment shall be treated as a fuse-less protector, regardless of any capability to
provide fusing.
R4-78 Broadband equipment According to National Electric Code Article 830,
the Cisco ONS 15xxx is not a broadband
equipment.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
2-138
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
R4-83 Broadband equipment According to National Electric Code Article 830,
the Cisco ONS 15xxx is not a broadband
equipment.
R4-85 Intra-building coaxial port
(DS3 ports)
Applicable to indoor installations only. For the
ONS 15310 OSP installations, DS3 ports are
classified as GR-1089-Issue 4 (Type 5) and are
connected to the Outside Plant. Primary and
secondary protections and isolation transformers
are provided in the 15310-MA EIA and inside the
OSP cabinet.
Warning The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or subassembly is suitable
for connection to intrabuilding or
unexposed wiring or cabling only. The
intra-building port(s) of the equipment
or subassembly MUST NOT be
metallically connected to interfaces
which connect to the OSP or its wiring.
These interfaces are designed for use
as intra-building interfaces only (Type
2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require
isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection
in order to connect these interfaces
metallically to OSP wiring.
R4-88 Antenna lightning protectors The Cisco ONS 15xxx does not contain an
antennae.
R4-89 External SPD The Cisco ONS 15xxx does not have external
SPDs.
R7-16 Covers with labels warning of
Class B circuits
The Cisco ONS 15xxx has class A2 voltages only.
R9-3 Suitable for CBN, IBN, or both The Cisco ONS 15xxx is designed for Common
Bonding Network (CBN) installations only.
R9-6 Suitable location The ONS 15xxx is suitable for installation in
network telecommunication facilities where NEC
applies.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
2-139
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
R9-10 Paint removal and anti-oxidant
use
A safety earth ground path consistent with NEBS
requirements is provided via proper shelf to frame
mounting methods.
R9-16 Battery return treatment The DC power Battery Return (BR) or positive
terminal, must be grounded at the source end
(power feed or mains power end).
The DC power BR input terminal of ONS 15xxx is
not connected to the equipment frame (chassis)
and is configured as DC-I in compliance with
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 (sec.9.8.3).
O10-2 Minimum steady state and
nominal DC operating voltage
The minimum steady-state voltage is -40.5V DC
The nominal DC operating voltage is -48V DC.
GR63
Requirements Description Statement Location
R4-17 Replacement procedure for
fans
Included in Cisco ONS 15xxx Procedure Guide,
Release 8.5 - Chapter 15, Maintain the Node:
section NTP-A288 Replace the Fan-Tray
Assembly.
R4-18 Estimated time of fan tray
replacement
Included in Cisco ONS 15xxx Procedure Guide,
Release 8.5 - Chapter 15, Maintain the Node:
section NTP-A288 Replace the Fan-Tray
Assembly.
GR487
Requirements Description Statement Location
R3-158 Equipment System
Information
Suppliers of cabinets with preinstalled
telecommunication equipments will provide
decals on the inside doors of the cabinets. These
decals contain information of the equipment
system, internal cabling, powering schematics,
and others. Additional data can also be recorded
here.
GR 1089
Requirements Description Related statements
2-140
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
Statement 8010—Railway Applications, Electromagnetic Compatibility, a
Shielded Cable
Warning To comply with EN50121-4:2006 - Railway applications, Electromagnetic compatibility, a shielded
cable must be used to connect to the EMS port. This cable must be less than 30 meters in length and
not placed in the 3 meter boundary, as defined in EN50121-4:2006, Table 2, note 1. Statement 8010
Waarschuwing Om te voldoen aan EN50121-4:2006 - Railway applications, Electromagnetic compatibility moet een
geïsoleerde kabel worden gebruikt voor aansluiting op de EMS-poort. Deze kabel moet minder dan
30 meter lang zijn en mag niet binnen de grens van 3 meter worden geplaatst, zoals gedefinieerd in
EN50121-4:2006, tabel 2, opmerking 1.
Varoitus Standardin EN50121-4:2006 - Rautatiesovellukset - Sähkömagneettinen yhteensopivuus
noudattamiseksi EMS-porttiin yhdistämisessä on käytettävä maadoitettua kaapelia. Kaapelin on
oltava alle 30 metriä pitkä eikä se saa olla alle 3 metrin etäisyydellä, kuten standardin
EN50121-4:2006 taulukossa 2 ja huomautuksessa 1 on määritetty.
Attention Pour se conformer à la norme EN50121-4:2006 - Applications ferroviaires - Compatibilité
électromagnétique, il convient d'utiliser un câble blindé pour se connecter au port EMS. Ce câble
doit être d'une longueur inférieure à 30 mètres et ne doit pas être placé dans un rayon de 3 mètres,
tel que défini dans la norme EN50121-4:2006, Tableau 2, remarque 1.
Warnung Zur Erfüllung der Norm EN50121-4:2006 - Elektromagnetische Kompatibilität,
Eisenbahnanwendungen, muss zur Verbindung mit dem EMS-Port ein abgeschirmtes Kabel
verwendet werden. Dieses Kabel darf höchstens 30 m lang sein und sich nicht innerhalb der
3-m-Grenze befinden, wie in EN50121-4:2006, Tabelle 2, Anmerkung 1, festgelegt.
Avvertenza In conformità alla EN50121-4:2006 - Applicazioni ferroviarie, compatibilità elettromagnetica,
connessione porta EMS tramite cavo schermato. Lunghezza cavo meno di 30 metri, da posizionare
all'esterno della demarcazione di 3 metri secondo EN50121-4:2006, Tabella 2, nota 1.
Advarsel For å overholde bestemmelsene i EN50121-4:2006 - Bruk på jernbane, Elektromagnetisk
kompatibilitet - må en skjermet kabel brukes for å koble til EMS-porten. Denne kabelen må være
under 30 meter lang og ligge utenfor 3-metersgrensen, slik det er angitt i EN50121-4:2006, Tabell 2,
note 1.
Aviso Para estar em conformidade com a norma EN50121-4:2006 - Aplicações ferroviárias -
Compatibilidade electromagnética, deve ser utilizado um cabo blindado para ligar à porta EMS. Este
cabo deve ter menos de 30 metros de comprimento e não estar colocado no limite de 3 metros, como
está definido na norma EN50121-4:2006, Tabela 2, nota 1.
¡Advertencia! Para cumplir con EN50121-4:2006: en las aplicaciones de ferrocarriles, para la compatibilidad
electromagnética, debe utilizarse un cable blindado para conectarse al puerto EMS. Este cable
debe medir menos de 30 metros y no debe colocarse en el límite de 3 metros, como se define en
EN50121-4:2006, Tabla 2, nota 1.
2-141
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
Varning! För att följa EN50121-4:2006 - Järnvägsanläggningar, Elektromagnetisk kompatibilitet så måste en
skärmad kabel användas för att ansluta till EMS-porten. Kabeln måste vara kortare än 30 meter och
får inte placeras inom 3-metersgränsen som definieras i EN50121-4:2006, tabell 2, punkt 1.
Advarsel For at sikre overholdelse af EN50121-4:2006 - Railway applications med elektromagnetisk
kompatibilitet skal der anvendes et afskærmet kabel til at oprette forbindelse til EMS-porten. Dette
kabel skal være maks. 30 meter langt og må ikke placeres inden for 3-meter-grænsen som defineret
i EN50121-4:2006, tabel 2, note 1.
2-142
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
2-143
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
2-144
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
Statement 8011—Railway Applications, Electromagnetic Compatibility,
DC Power Cables
Warning To comply with EN50121-4:2006 - Railway applications, Electromagnetic compatibility, DC power
cables must be less than 30 meter long. Statement 8011
Waarschuwing Om te voldoen aan EN50121-4:2006 - Railway applications, Electromagnetic compatibility moeten
gelijkstroomkabels minder dan 30 meter lang zijn.
Varoitus Standardin EN50121-4:2006 - Rautatiesovellukset - Sähkömagneettinen yhteensopivuus
noudattamiseksi tasavirtakaapeleiden on oltava alle 30 metriä pitkät.
Attention Pour se conformer à la norme EN50121-4:2006 - Applications ferroviaires - Compatibilité
électromagnétique, les câbles d'alimentation CC doivent être d'une longueur inférieure à 30 mètres.
Warnung Zur Erfüllung der Norm EN50121-4:2006 - Elektromagnetische Kompatibilität,
Eisenbahnanwendungen, dürfen DC-Kabel höchstens 30 m lang sein.
Avvertenza In conformità alla EN50121-4:2006 - Applicazioni ferroviarie, compatibilità elettromagnetica,
cablaggi di potenza in C.C. di lunghezza inferiore a 30 metri.
Advarsel For å overholde bestemmelsene i EN50121-4:2006 - Bruk på jernbane, Elektromagnetisk
kompatibilitet - må strømkablene være kortere enn 30 meter.
Aviso Para estar em conformidade com a norma EN50121-4:2006 - Aplicações ferroviárias -
Compatibilidade electromagnética, os cabos de alimentação DC devem ter menos de 30 metros de
comprimento.
¡Advertencia! Para cumplir con EN50121-4:2006: en las aplicaciones de ferrocarriles, para la compatibilidad
electromagnética, los cables de alimentación CC deben medir menos de 30 metros.
Varning! För att följa EN50121-4:2006 - Järnvägsanläggningar, Elektromagnetisk kompatibilitet så måste
strömkabeln vara kortare än 30 meter.
2-145
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
Advarsel For at sikre overholdelse af EN50121-4:2006 - Railway applications med elektromagnetisk
kompatibilitet skal strømkabler være under 30 meter lange.
2-146
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 2 Safety
EMC and Telecom Compliance Statements
CH A P T E R
3-1
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
3
Open Source Software Information
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.2
See Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.2 document for information on
open source license information for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.2.
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.3
See Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.3 document for information on
open source license information for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.3.
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.4
See Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.4 document for information on
open source license information for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.4.
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.4.0.2
See Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.4.0.2 document for information
on open source license information for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.4.0.2.
3-2
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
78-21123-01
Chapter 3 Open Source Software Information
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.6.x
Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454,
Release 9.6.x
See Open Source Software Information for Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.6.x document for information
on open source license information for the Cisco ONS 15454, Release 9.6.x.
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Product and Software Release 9.4
July 2012
Text Part Number: 78-20254-02
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT
ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR
THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE
INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU
ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A
COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate
radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television
reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in
part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class
A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct
any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco
equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by
using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television
or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as
part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE
PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of
Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners.
The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and
figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
Copyright © 2004–2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
iii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
CONTENTS
Preface xliii
Revision History xliv
Document Objectives xlv
Audience xlv
Document Organization xlv
Related Documentation xlviii
Document Conventions xlviii
Obtaining Optical Networking Information liv
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information liv
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM liv
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines lv
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4 lvii
CHAPTER 1
Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 1-1
CHAPTER 2
Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI 2-1
CHAPTER 3
Install the Control Cards 3-1
3.1 Card Overview 3-2
3.1.1 Common Control Cards 3-2
3.1.2 Card Compatibility 3-2
3.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only) 3-3
3.2 Safety Labels 3-3
3.3 TCC2 Card 3-3
3.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-4
3.3.2 TCC2 Card Functions 3-5
3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card 3-6
3.4 TCC2P Card 3-6
3.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-7
3.4.2 TCC2P Card Functions 3-8
3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card 3-9
3.5 TCC3 Card 3-9
3.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-10
Contents
iv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
3.5.2 TCC3 Card Functions 3-11
3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card 3-12
3.6 TNC and TNCE Card 3-12
3.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-13
3.6.2 TNC and TNCE Card Functions 3-15
3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards 3-16
3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards 3-16
3.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-17
3.7.2 TSC and TSCE Card Functions 3-18
3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards 3-19
3.8 Digital Image Signing 3-20
3.8.1 DIS Identification 3-20
3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS 3-20
3.9 AIC-I Card 3-20
3.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-21
3.9.2 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 3-22
3.9.3 External Alarms and Controls 3-23
3.9.4 Orderwire 3-23
3.9.5 Power Monitoring 3-25
3.9.6 User Data Channel 3-25
3.9.7 Data Communications Channel 3-25
3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card 3-26
3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card 3-26
3.10.1 Faceplate Diagram 3-27
3.10.2 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators 3-28
3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card 3-28
3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections 3-29
3.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC 3-29
3.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-29
3.11.3 MIC-C/T/P FMEC 3-32
3.11.4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-32
3.12 Procedures for Control Cards 3-33
3.12.1 Before You Begin 3-33
NTP- G15 Install the Common Control Cards 3-34
DLP- G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 3-35
DLP- G34 Install the AIC-I Card 3-38
DLP- G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 3-39
NTP- G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card 3-41
DLP- G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card 3-42
Contents
v
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards 3-45
DLP- G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards 3-45
CHAPTER 4
Setup Optical Service Channel Cards 4-1
4.1 Card Overview 4-1
4.1.1 Card Summary 4-2
4.1.2 Card Compatibility 4-2
4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels 4-3
4.3 OSCM Card 4-3
4.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-4
4.3.2 OSCM Card Functions 4-5
4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring 4-5
4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card 4-5
4.4 OSC-CSM Card 4-6
4.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-8
4.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Functions 4-10
4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring 4-10
4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card 4-11
CHAPTER 5
Provision Optical Amplifier Cards 5-1
5.1 Card Overview 5-2
5.1.1 Applications 5-2
5.1.2 Card Summary 5-3
5.1.3 Card Compatibility 5-5
5.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds 5-7
5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 5-7
5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card 5-7
5.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram 5-8
5.3.2 OPT-PRE Card Functions 5-10
5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring 5-11
5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card 5-11
5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card 5-11
5.4.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports and Block diagram 5-12
5.4.2 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Card Functions 5-14
5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring 5-14
5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards 5-15
5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card 5-15
5.5.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram 5-16
Contents
vi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
5.5.2 OPT-BST-L Card Functions 5-18
5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring 5-19
5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card 5-19
5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card 5-20
5.6.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-21
5.6.2 OPT-AMP-L Card Functions 5-24
5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring 5-24
5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card 5-24
5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5-25
5.7.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-26
5.7.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Functions 5-28
5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring 5-29
5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5-29
5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card 5-30
5.8.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-31
5.8.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Functions 5-34
5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card 5-34
5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5-34
5.9.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-35
5.9.2 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functions 5-38
5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring 5-38
5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5-39
5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 5-39
5.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-40
5.10.2 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Power Monitoring 5-43
5.10.3 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Functions 5-44
5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 5-44
5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5-45
5.11.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-46
5.11.2 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Power Monitoring 5-49
5.11.3 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Functions 5-49
5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5-49
CHAPTER 6
Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 6-1
6.1 Card Overview 6-1
6.1.1 Card Summary 6-2
6.1.2 Card Compatibility 6-2
6.1.3 Interface Classes 6-3
6.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan 6-6
Contents
vii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
6.2 Safety Labels 6-9
6.3 32MUX-O Card 6-9
6.3.1 32MUX-O Card Functions 6-9
6.3.2 32MUX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-9
6.3.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32MUX-O Cards 6-11
6.3.3 Channel Plan 6-12
6.3.4 Power Monitoring 6-13
6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card 6-13
6.4 32DMX-O Card 6-14
6.4.1 32DMX-O Card Functions 6-14
6.4.2 32DMX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-15
6.4.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32DMX-O Cards 6-17
6.4.3 Power Monitoring 6-17
6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card 6-18
6.5 4MD-xx.x Card 6-19
6.5.1 4MD-xx.x Card Functions 6-19
6.5.2 4MD-xx.x Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-19
6.5.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 4MD-xx.x Cards 6-22
6.5.3 Wavelength Pairs 6-22
6.5.4 Power Monitoring 6-22
6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card 6-23
CHAPTER 7
Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units 7-1
7.1 Card Overview 7-1
7.1.1 Card Summary 7-2
7.2 Safety Labels 7-2
7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7-2
7.3.1 Key Features 7-3
7.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram 7-3
7.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports 7-4
7.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram 7-5
7.3.5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Functions 7-5
7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance 7-5
7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7-6
CHAPTER 8
Provision Protection Switching Module 8-1
8.1 PSM Card Overview 8-1
8.1.1 Key Features 8-2
8.1.2 PSM Block Diagram 8-2
Contents
viii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
8.1.3 PSM Faceplate Ports 8-3
8.1.4 PSM Card-Level Indicators 8-4
8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching 8-4
8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card 8-5
CHAPTER 9
Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards 9-1
9.1 Card Overview 9-1
9.1.1 Card Summary 9-2
9.1.2 Card Compatibility 9-3
9.1.3 Interface Classes 9-4
9.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan 9-7
9.2 Safety Labels 9-9
9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card 9-9
9.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-9
9.3.2 Power Monitoring 9-11
9.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Functions 9-12
9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card 9-12
9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card 9-12
9.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-13
9.4.2 Wavelength Pairs 9-14
9.4.3 Power Monitoring 9-15
9.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Functions 9-15
9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card 9-16
9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card 9-16
9.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-16
9.5.2 Wavelength Sets 9-18
9.5.3 Power Monitoring 9-19
9.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Card Functions 9-19
9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card 9-19
9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card 9-20
9.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-20
9.6.2 Power Monitoring 9-22
9.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Card Functions 9-23
9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card 9-23
9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card 9-23
9.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-24
9.7.2 Power Monitoring 9-25
9.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Card Functions 9-26
9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card 9-26
Contents
ix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
CHAPTER 10
Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 10-1
10.1 Card Overview 10-2
10.1.1 Card Summary 10-2
10.1.2 Card Compatibility 10-4
10.1.3 Interface Classes 10-6
10.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans 10-12
10.2 Safety Labels 10-15
10.3 32WSS Card 10-16
10.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-16
10.3.2 32WSS ROADM Functionality 10-20
10.3.3 32WSS Power Monitoring 10-20
10.3.4 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan 10-21
10.3.5 32WSS Card Functions 10-22
10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card 10-22
10.4 32WSS-L Card 10-22
10.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-23
10.4.2 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality 10-27
10.4.3 32WSS-L Power Monitoring 10-27
10.4.4 32WSS-L Channel Plan 10-27
10.4.5 32WSS-L Card Functions 10-29
10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card 10-29
10.5 32DMX Card 10-29
10.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-29
10.5.2 32DMX ROADM Functionality 10-31
10.5.3 32DMX Power Monitoring 10-32
10.5.4 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan 10-32
10.5.5 32DMX Card Functions 10-33
10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card 10-33
10.6 32DMX-L Card 10-34
10.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-34
10.6.2 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality 10-36
10.6.3 32DMX-L Power Monitoring 10-37
10.6.4 32DMX-L Channel Plan 10-37
10.6.5 32DMX-L Card Functions 10-38
10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card 10-38
10.7 40-DMX-C Card 10-39
10.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-39
10.7.2 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality 10-41
10.7.3 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring 10-42
Contents
x
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
10.7.4 40-DMX-C Channel Plan 10-42
10.7.5 40-DMX-C Card Functions 10-43
10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card 10-43
10.8 40-DMX-CE Card 10-44
10.8.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-44
10.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality 10-46
10.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring 10-47
10.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan 10-47
10.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Functions 10-48
10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card 10-48
10.9 40-MUX-C Card 10-49
10.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-49
10.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring 10-51
10.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan 10-52
10.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Functions 10-53
10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card 10-53
10.10 40-WSS-C Card 10-54
10.10.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-54
10.10.2 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality 10-57
10.10.3 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring 10-57
10.10.4 40-WSS-C Channel Plan 10-58
10.10.5 40-WSS-C Card Functions 10-59
10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card 10-60
10.11 40-WSS-CE Card 10-60
10.11.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-60
10.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality 10-64
10.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring 10-64
10.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan 10-65
10.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Functions 10-66
10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card 10-67
10.12 40-WXC-C Card 10-67
10.12.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-68
10.12.2 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring 10-70
10.12.3 40-WXC-C Channel Plan 10-71
10.12.4 40-WXC-C Card Functions 10-73
10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card 10-73
10.13 80-WXC-C Card 10-73
10.13.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-74
10.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring 10-76
Contents
xi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
10.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan 10-77
10.13.4 80-WXC-C Card Functions 10-79
10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card 10-80
10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10-80
10.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features 10-80
10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card 10-81
10.14.2.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-81
10.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring 10-84
10.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan 10-84
10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card 10-85
10.14.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-86
10.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring 10-88
10.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan 10-88
10.14.4 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Functions 10-90
10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card 10-90
10.15 MMU Card 10-90
10.15.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-90
10.15.2 MMU Power Monitoring 10-93
10.15.3 MMU Card Functions 10-93
10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card 10-93
CHAPTER 11
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 11-1
11.1 Card Overview 11-3
11.1.1 Card Summary 11-3
11.1.2 Card Compatibility 11-6
11.2 Safety Labels 11-10
11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card 11-10
11.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-12
11.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Functions 11-13
11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card 11-14
11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card 11-14
11.4.1 Key Features 11-14
11.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-15
11.4.3 TXP_MR_10E Functions 11-15
11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card 11-16
11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 11-16
11.5.1 Key Features 11-16
11.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-17
11.5.3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Functions 11-18
Contents
xii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 11-18
11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-18
11.6.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-20
11.6.2 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Functions 11-22
11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-23
11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11-23
11.7.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-24
11.7.2 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Functions 11-24
11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11-25
11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11-25
11.8.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-26
11.8.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Functions 11-28
11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11-28
11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card 11-28
11.9.1 Key Features 11-29
11.9.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-30
11.9.3 MXP_2.5G_10E Functions 11-31
11.9.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-32
11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card 11-32
11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11-32
11.10.1 Key Features 11-33
11.10.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-34
11.10.3 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Functions 11-35
11.10.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-36
11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11-38
11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-39
11.11.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-41
11.11.2 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Functions 11-43
11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-44
11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11-44
11.12.1 Key Features 11-46
11.12.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-48
11.12.3 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Functions 11-49
11.12.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-49
11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11-51
11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11-52
11.13.1 Key Features 11-53
11.13.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-56
11.13.3 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Functions 11-56
Contents
xiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.13.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-57
11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11-58
11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11-58
11.14.1 Key Features 11-60
11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list 11-62
11.14.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-62
11.14.4 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Functions 11-65
11.14.4.1 Client Interface 11-65
11.14.4.2 DWDM Trunk Interface 11-66
11.14.4.3 Configuration Management 11-66
11.14.4.4 Security 11-67
11.14.4.5 Card Protection 11-67
11.14.5 IGMP Snooping 11-67
11.14.5.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions 11-68
11.14.5.2 Fast-Leave Processing 11-68
11.14.5.3 Static Router Port Configuration 11-69
11.14.5.4 Report Suppression 11-69
11.14.5.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters 11-69
11.14.5.6 Related Procedure for Enabling IGMP Snooping 11-69
11.14.6 Multicast VLAN Registration 11-70
11.14.6.1 Related Procedure for Enabling MVR 11-70
11.14.7 MAC Address Learning 11-70
11.14.7.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Learning 11-71
11.14.8 MAC Address Retrieval 11-71
11.14.8.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Retrieving 11-71
11.14.9 Link Integrity 11-71
11.14.9.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Link Integrity 11-72
11.14.10 Ingress CoS 11-72
11.14.10.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Ingress CoS 11-72
11.14.11 CVLAN Rate Limiting 11-72
11.14.11.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CVLAN Rate 11-73
11.14.12 DSCP to CoS Mapping 11-73
11.14.12.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CoS Based on DSCP 11-73
11.14.13 Link Aggregation Control Protocol 11-73
11.14.13.1 Advantages of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.2 Functions of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.3 Modes of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.4 Parameters of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes 11-75
11.14.13.6 LACP Limitations and Restrictions 11-75
Contents
xiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.14.13.7 Related Procedure for LACP 11-75
11.14.14 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management 11-75
11.14.14.1 Maintenance Domain 11-76
11.14.14.2 Maintenance Association 11-76
11.14.14.3 Maintenance End Points 11-76
11.14.14.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points 11-76
11.14.14.5 CFM Messages 11-77
11.14.14.6 CFM Limitations and Restrictions 11-77
11.14.14.7 Related Procedure for Ethernet CFM 11-77
11.14.15 Ethernet OAM 11-77
11.14.15.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM 11-78
11.14.15.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM 11-78
11.14.15.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM 11-78
11.14.15.4 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions 11-79
11.14.15.5 Related Procedure for Ethernet OAM 11-79
11.14.16 Resilient Ethernet Protocol 11-79
11.14.16.1 REP Segments 11-79
11.14.16.2 Characteristics of REP Segments 11-80
11.14.16.3 REP Port States 11-80
11.14.16.4 Link Adjacency 11-80
11.14.16.5 Fast Reconvergence 11-80
11.14.16.6 VLAN Load Balancing 11-81
11.14.16.7 REP Configuration Sequence 11-81
11.14.16.8 REP Supported Interfaces 11-81
11.14.16.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions 11-81
11.14.16.10 Related Procedure for Managing the REP Settings 11-82
11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11-82
11.15 ADM-10G Card 11-83
11.15.1 Key Features 11-83
11.15.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC 11-84
11.15.2.1 POS Overview 11-84
11.15.2.2 POS Framing Modes 11-85
11.15.2.3 GFP Interoperability 11-85
11.15.2.4 LEX Interoperability 11-85
11.15.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-85
11.15.4 Port Configuration Rules 11-86
11.15.5 Client Interfaces 11-87
11.15.6 Interlink Interfaces 11-88
11.15.7 DWDM Trunk Interface 11-88
11.15.8 Configuration Management 11-88
Contents
xv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.15.9 Security 11-90
11.15.10 Protection 11-90
11.15.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes 11-90
11.15.10.2 Port Protection Schemes 11-90
11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning 11-90
11.15.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics 11-91
Available Circuit Sizes 11-92
11.15.12.1 Related Procedure for VCAT Circuit 11-93
11.15.13 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 11-93
11.15.13.1 Related Procedure for IPPM 11-93
11.15.14 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring 11-93
11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions 11-94
11.15.16 ADM-10G Functions 11-96
11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card 11-96
11.16 OTU2_XP Card 11-97
11.16.1 Key Features 11-97
11.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-99
11.16.3 OTU2_XP Card Interface 11-101
11.16.3.1 Client Interface 11-101
11.16.3.2 Trunk Interface 11-101
11.16.4 Configuration Management 11-102
11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules 11-103
11.16.6 Security 11-104
11.16.7 ODU Transparency 11-104
11.16.8 OTU2_XP Functions 11-105
11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card 11-105
11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 11-105
11.17.1 Key Features 11-106
11.17.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-106
11.17.3 TXP_MR_10EX_C Functions 11-107
11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 11-108
11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 11-108
11.18.1 Key Features 11-108
11.18.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-109
11.18.3 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Functions 11-110
11.18.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-111
11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card 11-112
11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11-112
11.19.1 Key Features 11-114
Contents
xvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.19.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-115
11.19.3 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Functions 11-116
11.19.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-117
11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11-118
11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11-119
11.20.1 Key Features 11-121
11.20.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-123
11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes 11-126
TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder) 11-126
TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder) 11-128
MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder) 11-129
MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder) 11-130
MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder) 11-131
MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder) 11-133
MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder) 11-134
MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder) 11-135
REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator) 11-135
MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder) 11-137
11.20.4 Scenarios of Different Operational mode Configurations on an AR_MXP or AR_XP Card 11-137
Scenario 1 11-137
Scenario 2 11-138
Scenario 3 11-139
Scenario 4 11-139
Scenario 5 11-140
Scenario 6 11-141
11.20.5 AR_MXP and AR_XP Functions and Features 11-141
11.20.6 Related Procedures for AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11-141
11.21 MLSE UT 11-142
11.21.1 Error Decorrelator 11-142
11.22 SFP and XFP Modules 11-142
11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards 11-142
11.23.1 Before You Begin 11-142
NTP- G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 11-144
DLP- G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 11-146
DLP- G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 11-147
DLP- G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 11-149
DLP- G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 11-150
DLP- G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 11-151
Contents
xvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 11-152
DLP- G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 11-153
DLP- G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 11-155
DLP- G280 Delete a PPM 11-161
NTP- G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-162
NTP- G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 11-166
NTP- G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-168
NTP- G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-169
NTP- G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-171
DLP- G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-172
DLP- G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-173
DLP- G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-176
DLP- G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-177
DLP- G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 11-178
DLP- G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 11-181
DLP- G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-182
DLP- G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-184
DLP- G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-188
NTP- G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-191
DLP- G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 11-192
DLP- G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 11-193
DLP- G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-193
DLP- G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-195
DLP- G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-200
DLP- G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-201
DLP- G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy 11-202
DLP- G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads 11-205
DLP- G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-209
DLP- G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-210
DLP- G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-212
NTP- G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-217
DLP- G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate 11-218
DLP- G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-218
DLP- G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-219
Contents
xviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings 11-221
DLP- G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-225
DLP- G692 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTU Settings 11-226
DLP- G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy 11-228
DLP- G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-230
DLP- G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-231
DLP- G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-232
NTP- G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-237
DLP- G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 11-238
DLP- G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 11-239
DLP- G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 11-240
DLP- G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 11-245
DLP- G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 11-247
DLP- G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 11-251
DLP- G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-254
DLP- G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-255
DLP- G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 11-256
NTP- G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-261
DLP- G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 11-262
DLP- G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 11-264
DLP- G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-266
DLP- G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 11-268
DLP- G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-269
DLP- G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 11-271
DLP- G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-273
DLP- G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-275
DLP- G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 11-277
NTP- G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-282
DLP- G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 11-283
DLP- G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 11-285
DLP- G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 11-287
DLP- G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-289
DLP- G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-291
DLP- G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-292
DLP- G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 11-294
DLP- G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-296
DLP- G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-297
Contents
xix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-300
DLP- G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 11-301
DLP- G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 11-303
DLP- G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-305
DLP- G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 11-306
DLP- G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-308
DLP- G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-309
DLP- G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads 11-311
DLP- G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-314
DLP- G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-315
DLP- G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 11-319
NTP- G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-322
DLP- G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 11-323
DLP- G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 11-324
DLP- G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 11-326
DLP- G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-328
DLP- G691 Change the 40G Muxponder OTU Settings 11-329
DLP- G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-331
DLP- G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads 11-333
DLP- G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-337
DLP- G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-338
DLP- G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 11-342
NTP- G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 11-345
DLP- G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 11-346
DLP- G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 11-347
DLP- G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 11-351
Before You Begin 11-352
DLP- G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 11-352
DLP- G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 11-353
DLP- G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-354
DLP- G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-355
DLP- G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-355
NTP- G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 11-356
DLP- G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 11-357
DLP- G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 11-358
Contents
xx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-359
Before You Begin 11-359
DLP- G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-360
DLP- G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-361
DLP- G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-362
DLP- G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-362
DLP- G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-363
DLP- G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 11-364
DLP- G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 11-365
DLP- G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 11-365
DLP- G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 11-366
DLP- G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 11-367
DLP- G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 11-367
NTP- G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 11-368
DLP- G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 11-369
Before You Begin 11-369
DLP- G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 11-370
DLP- G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 11-371
DLP- G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 11-373
NTP- G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 11-373
DLP- G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 11-374
DLP- G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 11-375
Before You Begin 11-375
DLP- G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 11-377
DLP- G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 11-378
DLP- G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 11-379
NTP- G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds 11-379
DLP- G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 11-381
DLP- G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 11-389
DLP- G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 11-391
DLP- G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings 11-393
DLP- G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card 11-395
DLP- G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports 11-396
DLP- G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings 11-397
Contents
xxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings 11-398
DLP- G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 11-399
DLP- G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-401
DLP- G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-401
DLP- G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-402
NTP- G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-403
DLP- G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-404
NTP- G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-405
NTP- G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-406
DLP- G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-407
NTP- G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-408
NTP- G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-409
DLP- G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 11-409
DLP- G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 11-410
NTP- G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-411
DLP- G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-412
NTP- G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-413
DLP- G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 11-413
DLP- G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-414
DLP- G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-416
DLP- G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 11-417
DLP- G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 11-420
NTP- G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 11-423
DLP- G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 11-424
DLP- G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 11-425
NTP- G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-426
DLP- G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 11-427
DLP- G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 11-428
DLP- G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 11-432
DLP- G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 11-433
DLP- G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-435
Contents
xxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads 11-437
DLP- G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 11-440
DLP- G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 11-446
DLP- G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration 11-447
NTP- G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 11-448
NTP- G192 Force FPGA Update 11-450
NTP- G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 11-451
NTP- G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 11-452
NTP- G315 Enable or Disable the Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown Feature 11-452
NTP- G316 Enable REP and FAPS on the same port 11-453
NTP- G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards 11-454
NTP- G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-454
DLP- G695 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings 11-456
DLP- G696 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings 11-458
DLP- G697 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings 11-459
DLP- G698 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Section Trace Settings 11-462
DLP- G699 Enable Auto Sensing for AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards 11-464
DLP- G700 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Thresholds 11-464
DLP- G701 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line RMON Thresholds 11-467
DLP- G702 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card with Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-471
DLP- G703 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-472
DLP- G704 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card OTN Settings 11-476
CHAPTER 12
Node Reference 12-1
12.1 DWDM Node Configurations 12-2
12.1.1 Terminal Node 12-2
12.1.2 OADM Node 12-9
12.1.3 ROADM Node 12-11
12.1.4 Hub Node 12-31
12.1.5 Anti-ASE Node 12-35
12.1.6 Line Amplifier Node 12-36
12.1.7 OSC Regeneration Node 12-40
12.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-41
12.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node 12-43
12.2.2 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node with Booster Amplification 12-43
12.2.3 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node Without Post - Amplification 12-45
12.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card 12-46
Contents
xxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
12.3.1 Channel Protection 12-47
12.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection 12-48
12.3.3 Line Protection 12-49
12.3.4 Standalone 12-49
12.4 Multishelf Node 12-50
12.4.1 Multishelf Node Layout 12-51
12.4.2 DCC/GCC/OSC Terminations 12-51
12.5 Connecting Passive Modules to a ONS 15454 M2 or ONS 15454 M6 Node 12-52
12.6 Optical Sides 12-52
12.6.1 Optical Side Stages 12-52
12.6.1.1 Fiber Stage 12-53
12.6.1.2 A/D Stage 12-55
12.6.2 Side Line Ports 12-56
12.6.3 Optical Side Configurations 12-56
12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks 12-61
12.7.1 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-WXC-C Cards 12-61
12.7.1.1 40-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 12-66
12.7.1.2 40-Channel Colorless n-Degree ROADM Node 12-66
12.7.1.3 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 12-67
12.7.2 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 80-WXC-C Cards 12-69
12.7.2.1 80-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 12-71
12.7.2.2 80-Channel Colorless n-degree ROADM Node 12-72
12.7.2.3 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 12-73
12.7.3 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-75
12.7.4 XC Termination Mesh Node 12-77
12.7.5 Mesh Patch Panels and Shelf Layouts 12-78
12.7.6 Using a Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section 12-81
12.8 DWDM Node Cabling 12-82
12.8.1 OSC Link Termination Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-82
12.8.2 Hub Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-85
12.8.3 Terminal Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-87
12.8.4 Line Amplifier Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-87
12.8.5 OSC Regeneration Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-89
12.8.6 Amplified or Passive OADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-91
12.8.7 ROADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-96
12.9 Automatic Node Setup 12-98
12.9.1 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node With Post-Amplifiers 12-102
12.9.2 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node Without Post-Amplifiers 12-103
12.9.3 Raman Setup and Tuning 12-103
Contents
xxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
12.9.4 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Start Up and Fiber Link Turn Up 12-106
12.10 DWDM Network Functional View 12-108
12.10.1 GMPLS Control Plane 12-108
12.10.1.1 Card Support 12-110
12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds 12-110
12.10.1.3 Validation Modes 12-110
12.10.2 DWDM Network Functional View (NFV) 12-110
12.10.2.1 Graphical View Pane 12-111
12.10.2.2 Overview Pane 12-113
12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane 12-113
12.10.3 DWDM Network Functional View (GMPLS) 12-114
12.10.3.1 GMPLS View Toolbar Options 12-114
12.10.3.2 GMPLS Path Constraints 12-114
12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port Configuration 12-115
12.10.3.4 Wavelength Rerouting 12-117
12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien Wavelength Provisioning 12-118
12.10.4 Related Procedures 12-119
NTP- G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using Network Functional View 12-119
DLP- G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 12-120
NTP- G319 Connect a Passive Module to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Node 12-122
12.11 Not-DWDM Networks (Enhancements) 12-123
CHAPTER 13
Network Reference 13-1
13.1 Network Applications 13-2
13.2 Network Topologies 13-2
13.2.1 Ring Networks 13-2
13.2.1.1 Hubbed Traffic Topology 13-2
13.2.1.2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology 13-3
13.2.1.3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology 13-4
13.2.1.4 Meshed Traffic Topology 13-5
13.2.2 Linear Networks 13-6
13.2.3 Mesh Networks 13-7
13.3 Interconnected Rings 13-9
13.3.1 Interconnected Ring Scenarios 13-11
13.3.1.1 Scenario A: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring without Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 13-11
13.3.1.2 Scenario B: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring with Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 13-13
13.3.1.3 Scenario C: Interconnect Traffic Between Tributary Rings Using the Main Ring 13-14
Contents
xxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
13.4 Spur Configuration 13-16
13.4.1 Spur Configuration Scenarios 13-16
13.4.1.1 Scenario A: Spur Configuration without 15454 Chassis in Remote Terminal T 13-16
13.4.1.2 Scenario B: Spur Configuration with Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 13-17
13.4.1.3 Scenario C: Spur Configuration with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 13-18
13.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-18
13.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card 13-19
13.7 Optical Performance 13-19
13.8 Automatic Power Control 13-20
13.8.1 APC at the Amplifier Card Level 13-20
13.8.2 APC at the Shelf Controller Layer 13-21
13.8.3 APC in a Raman Node with Post-Amplifiers 13-23
13.8.4 APC in a Raman Node without Post-Amplifiers 13-24
13.8.5 Managing APC 13-24
13.9 Power Side Monitoring 13-26
13.10 Span Loss Verification 13-28
13.10.1 Span Loss Measurements on Raman Links 13-29
13.11 Network Optical Safety 13-30
13.11.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown 13-30
13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction 13-31
13.11.3 Network Optical Safety on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-32
13.11.3.1 RAMAN-TX Settings on Raman Pump 13-32
13.11.3.2 COM-TX Safety Setting on EDFA 13-32
13.11.4 Fiber Cut Scenarios 13-33
13.11.4.1 Scenario 1: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards 13-33
13.11.4.2 Scenario 2: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards 13-35
13.11.4.3 Scenario 3: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards 13-37
13.11.4.4 Scenario 4: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C (OPT-LINE Mode), 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards 13-38
13.11.4.5 Scenario 5: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using DCN Extension 13-40
13.11.4.6 Scenario 6: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-42
13.11.4.7 Scenario 7: Fiber Cut in Optical Line Amplifier Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-44
13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-49
13.11.5 Network Optical Safety on RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 13-49
13.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers 13-50
13.12.1 Gain Tilt Control at the Card Level 13-51
13.12.2 System Level Gain Tilt Control 13-52
Contents
xxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
13.12.2.1 System Gain Tilt Compensation Without ROADM Nodes 13-53
13.12.2.2 System Gain Tilt Compensation With ROADM Nodes 13-54
13.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations 13-55
13.13.1 OC-192/STM-64 Data Rate (9.95328 Gbps) 13-55
13.13.2 10GE Data Rate (10.3125 Gbps) 13-55
13.13.3 10G FC Data Rate (10.51875 Gbps) 13-55
13.13.4 ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Rates 13-56
13.13.4.1 OC-192 Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (10.70923 Gbps) 13-57
13.13.4.2 10GE Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps) 13-57
13.13.4.3 10G FC Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) 13-57
13.14 Even Band Management 13-57
13.15 Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown 13-61
CHAPTER 14
Turn Up a Node 14-1
Before You Begin 14-1
NTP- G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files 14-3
NTP- G22 Verify Common Card Installation 14-4
NTP- G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 14-6
NTP- G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 14-8
NTP- G23 Create Users and Assign Security 14-10
DLP- G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 14-11
DLP- G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 14-12
NTP- G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 14-13
NTP- G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 14-15
NTP- G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 14-16
DLP- G56 Provision IP Settings 14-17
DLP- G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 14-21
DLP- G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 14-22
DLP- G264 Enable Node Security Mode 14-24
DLP- G58 Create a Static Route 14-26
DLP- G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 14-27
DLP- G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 14-30
NTP- G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 14-31
NTP- G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 14-31
NTP- G28 Create FTP Host 14-32
DLP- G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 14-33
Contents
xxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 14-34
NTP- G132 Provision OSI 14-35
DLP- G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 14-36
DLP- G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 14-37
DLP- G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 14-39
DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 14-40
DLP- G288 Provision OSI Routers 14-41
DLP- G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 14-42
DLP- G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 14-42
DLP- G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 14-43
NTP- G29 Set Up SNMP 14-45
NTP- G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File 14-47
DLP- G351 Delete a Card in CTC 14-51
DLP- G353 Preprovision a Slot 14-53
NTP- G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 14-57
DLP- G693 Configure the Amplifier 14-57
DLP- G694 Configure the PSM 14-58
NTP- G328 Add, Modify, or Delete ANS Parameters 14-59
DLP- G541 Add an ANS Parameter 14-60
DLP- G681 Modify an ANS Parameter 14-61
DLP- G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 14-63
NTP- G30 Install the DWDM Cards 14-64
DLP- G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report 14-67
NTP- G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 14-68
NTP- G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards 14-69
DLP- G63 Install an SFP or XFP 14-72
DLP- G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 14-73
DLP- G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 14-74
NTP- G123 Install the Filler Cards 14-75
NTP- G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 14-76
DLP- G543 Add Passive Units Manually 14-76
DLP- G544 Delete a Passive Unit 14-77
NTP- G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 14-78
DLP- G349 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report 14-80
NTP- G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 14-82
DLP- G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 14-85
Contents
xxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 14-89
DLP- G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray 14-90
DLP- G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-93
DLP- G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-95
DLP- G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-97
DLP- G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 14-99
NTP- G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 14-101
DLP- G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-102
DLP- G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray 14-104
NTP- G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 14-105
NTP- G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 14-108
DLP- G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 14-109
DLP- G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 14-110
NTP- G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 14-113
NTP- G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 14-114
DLP- G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 14-115
DLP- G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 14-116
DLP- G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 14-118
DLP- G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 14-120
DLP- G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 14-122
DLP- G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 14-123
NTP- G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 14-123
DLP- G491 Create an Optical Side 14-124
DLP- G492 Edit an Optical Side 14-125
DLP- G480 Delete an Optical Side 14-125
NTP- G38 Provision OSC Terminations 14-126
NTP- G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 14-127
NTP- G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 14-129
DLP- G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 14-130
NTP- G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 14-131
NTP- G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 14-133
NTP- G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 14-134
Contents
xxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 14-135
NTP- G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 14-136
NTP- G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 14-136
NTP- G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3 14-137
DLP- G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 14-138
DLP- G497 Create MIB Views 14-139
DLP- G498 Create Group Access 14-139
DLP- G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 14-140
DLP- G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 14-141
DLP- G501 Create Notification Filters 14-142
DLP- G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 14-142
DLP- G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 14-143
DLP- G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 14-144
DLP- G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 14-145
CHAPTER 15
Turn Up a Network 15-1
Before You Begin 15-1
NTP- G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 15-2
NTP- G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 15-3
NTP- G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 15-4
DLP- G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 15-5
DLP- G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation 15-19
DLP- G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 15-25
DLP- G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 15-25
DLP- 490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 15-26
NTP- G53 Set Up Timing 15-27
DLP- G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 15-27
DLP- G96 Set Up Internal Timing 15-30
DLP- G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 15-31
NTP- G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 15-33
NTP- G56 Verify the OSNR 15-37
NTP- G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 15-38
NTP- G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 15-40
DLP- G372 Enable LMP 15-41
DLP- G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 15-42
DLP- G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 15-45
DLP- G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 15-46
Contents
xxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-47
NTP- G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-48
NTP- G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-49
DLP- G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters 15-50
DLP- G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration 15-51
DLP- G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router 15-52
DLP- G482 Configure a Static Route 15-55
DLP- G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 15-56
DLP- G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 15-58
DLP- G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router 15-59
DLP- G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 15-61
DLP- G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 15-62
DLP- G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 15-63
DLP- G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 15-64
DLP- G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 15-65
NTP- G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-66
DLP- G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes 15-67
NTP- G57 Create a Logical Network Map 15-69
NTP- G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 15-69
NTP- G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 15-70
DLP- G540 View SRLG Reports 15-71
CHAPTER 16
Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords 16-1
16.1 Optical Channel Circuits 16-1
16.1.1 OCHNC Circuits 16-2
16.1.2 OCHCC Circuits 16-3
16.1.3 OCH Trail Circuits 16-3
16.1.4 Administrative and Service States 16-5
16.1.5 Creating and Deleting OCHCCs 16-7
16.1.6 OCHCCs and Service and Communications Channels 16-7
16.1.7 Related Procedures 16-7
16.2 Virtual Patchcords 16-7
16.2.1 PPC Provisioning Rules 16-12
16.3 End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 16-13
Contents
xxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
16.3.1 End-to-End SVLAN Provisioning Rules 16-14
16.3.2 Before You Begin 16-14
NTP- G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 16-15
DLP- G104 Assign a Name to a Port 16-16
DLP- G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 16-17
DLP- G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 16-17
DLP- G705 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Client Connections 16-24
DLP- G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 16-26
DLP- G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 16-27
DLP- G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 16-28
DLP- G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 16-28
DLP- G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 16-30
DLP- G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits 16-31
DLP- G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit 16-32
NTP- G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 16-33
DLP- G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 16-34
DLP- G708 Create a GMPLS Optical Channel Trail 16-36
DLP- G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 16-37
DLP- G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 16-38
DLP- G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 16-39
NTP- G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 16-40
DLP- G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 16-41
DLP- G709 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Network Connections 16-43
DLP- G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 16-44
DLP- G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 16-46
DLP- G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 16-47
DLP- G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 16-48
DLP- G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS Circuits 16-48
NTP- G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 16-49
DLP- G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 16-50
DLP- G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 16-53
DLP- G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 16-56
DLP- G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 16-57
DLP- G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 16-58
NTP- G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 16-59
DLP- G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 16-61
NTP- G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 16-63
NTP- G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 16-65
DLP- G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 16-65
Contents
xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 16-66
DLP- G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 16-69
DLP- G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 16-71
NTP- G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 16-72
NTP- G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 16-78
DLP- G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 16-79
DLP- G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 16-80
NTP- G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 16-81
DLP- G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 16-81
DLP- G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 16-84
DLP- G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 16-85
DLP- G108 Change the Service State for a Port 16-85
DLP- G109 Provision Orderwire 16-86
DLP- G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 16-88
DLP- G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 16-89
NTP- G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 16-89
NTP- G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 16-90
DLP- G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 16-92
NTP- G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 16-93
DLP- G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 16-94
NTP- G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 16-94
NTP- G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 16-98
NTP- G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 16-100
DLP- G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 16-101
DLP- G553 Create a Server Trail 16-102
DLP- G554 Repair Server Trails 16-103
DLP- G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 16-105
DLP- G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 16-105
DLP- G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 16-106
CHAPTER 17
Monitor Performance 17-1
CHAPTER 18
Manage the Node 18-1
CHAPTER 19
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management 19-1
CHAPTER 20
Change DWDM Card Settings 20-1
Before You Begin 20-1
Contents
xxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-2
DLP- G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 20-3
DLP- G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 20-5
DLP- G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 20-7
DLP- G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 20-8
DLP- G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 20-12
NTP- G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-13
DLP- G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-14
DLP- G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-15
DLP- G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-19
DLP- G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-21
DLP- G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 20-25
NTP- G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-27
DLP- G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-28
DLP- G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-30
DLP- G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-34
DLP- G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-36
DLP- G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers 20-41
DLP- G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers 20-42
DLP- G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 20-44
NTP- G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-47
DLP- G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 20-47
DLP- G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 20-48
DLP- G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 20-49
DLP- G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 20-52
NTP- G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 20-54
DLP- G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-55
Contents
xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-57
DLP- G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-59
DLP- G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-62
NTP- G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-65
DLP- G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-66
DLP- G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Thresholds 20-69
DLP- G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters 20-73
DLP- G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Thresholds 20-74
NTP- G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-76
DLP- G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 20-77
DLP- G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 20-78
NTP- G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-79
DLP- G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 20-80
DLP- G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-81
DLP- G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 20-84
DLP- G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 20-87
DLP- G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 20-89
DLP- G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 20-91
DLP- G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 20-93
NTP- G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-94
DLP- G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-95
DLP- G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-97
DLP- G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-101
DLP- G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-103
DLP- G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-108
DLP- G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 20-110
NTP- G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-114
DLP- G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 20-114
DLP- G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 20-116
NTP- G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 20-117
DLP- G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 20-118
DLP- G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 20-119
Contents
xxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 20-119
NTP- G102 Change Card Service State 20-120
NTP- G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards 20-121
DLP- G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards 20-121
DLP- G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE cards 20-123
CHAPTER 21
Perform Node Acceptance Tests 21-1
Before You Begin 21-1
NTP- G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 21-3
DLP- G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 21-5
DLP- G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 21-6
DLP- G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 21-7
DLP- G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 21-7
NTP- G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-8
NTP- G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 21-10
DLP- G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 21-14
NTP- G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-15
NTP- G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 21-20
DLP- G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 21-24
DLP- G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 21-25
DLP- G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 21-25
DLP- G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 21-26
NTP- G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 21-27
DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards 21-29
DLP- G311 Verify the Side A or Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards 21-34
NTP- G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 21-39
DLP- G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 21-44
DLP- G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 21-52
DLP- G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 21-57
NTP- G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-62
NTP- G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 21-67
NTP- G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 21-71
NTP- G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 21-74
NTP- G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-78
NTP- G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-82
Contents
xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-86
NTP- G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-90
NTP- G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 21-94
DLP- G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 21-96
DLP- G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 21-97
DLP- G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 21-97
DLP- G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 21-98
DLP- G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 21-98
DLP- G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 21-99
DLP- G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 21-100
DLP- G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 21-101
DLP- G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 21-102
DLP- G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 21-103
DLP- G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 21-104
NTP- G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-106
DLP- G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-108
DLP- G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 21-109
DLP- G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-110
NTP- G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-112
NTP- G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 21-114
DLP- G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 21-124
DLP- G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 21-125
NTP- G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 21-126
DLP- 434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 21-131
DLP- 435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 21-132
DLP- 436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 21-133
NTP- G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 21-134
NTP- G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 21-139
NTP- G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-147
NTP- G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-151
CHAPTER 22
Management Network Connectivity 22-1
22.1 IP Networking Overview 22-2
22.2 IP Addressing Scenarios 22-2
Contents
xxxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
22.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 22-3
22.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to a Router 22-3
22.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway 22-4
22.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer 22-7
22.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs 22-8
22.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF 22-10
22.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server 22-12
22.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet 22-17
22.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled 22-19
22.2.9.1 Secure Mode Behavior 22-19
22.2.9.2 Secure Node Locked and Unlocked Behavior 22-22
22.3 DCN Case Studies 22-23
22.3.1 SOCKS Proxy Settings 22-23
22.3.2 OSPF 22-23
22.3.3 Management of Non-LAN Connected Multishelf Node 22-24
22.3.4 DCN Case Study 1: Ring Topology with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections 22-24
22.3.4.1 DCN Case Study 1 IP Configuration 22-25
22.3.4.2 DCN Case Study 1 Limitations 22-27
22.3.5 DCN Case Study 2: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends 22-28
22.3.5.1 DCN Case Study 2 IP Configurations 22-28
22.3.5.2 DCN Case Study 2 Limitations 22-30
22.3.6 DCN Case Study 3: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends Using OSPF Routing 22-30
22.3.6.1 DCN Case Study 3 IP Configurations 22-31
22.3.6.2 DCN Case Study 3 Limitations 22-34
22.3.7 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies With Two DCN Connections 22-34
22.3.7.1 DCN Case Study 4 IP Configurations 22-35
22.3.7.2 DCN Case Study 4 Limitations 22-37
22.4 DCN Extension 22-37
22.4.1 Network Using OSC 22-38
22.4.2 Network Using External DCN 22-38
22.4.3 Network Using GCC/DCC 22-39
22.5 Routing Table 22-39
22.6 External Firewalls 22-41
22.7 Open GNE 22-42
22.8 TCP/IP and OSI Networking 22-45
22.9 Link Management Protocol 22-49
22.9.1 Overview 22-49
22.9.1.1 MPLS 22-50
Contents
xxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
22.9.1.2 GMPLS 22-50
22.9.2 Configuring LMP 22-51
22.9.2.1 Control Channel Management 22-51
22.9.2.2 TE Link Management 22-52
22.9.2.3 Link Connectivity Verification 22-52
22.9.2.4 Fault Management 22-52
22.9.3 LMP WDM 22-53
22.9.4 LMP Network Implementation 22-53
22.10 IPv6 Network Compatibility 22-54
22.11 IPv6 Native Support 22-54
22.11.1 IPv6 Enabled Mode 22-56
22.11.2 IPv6 Disabled Mode 22-56
22.11.3 IPv6 in Non-secure Mode 22-56
22.11.4 IPv6 in Secure Mode 22-56
22.11.5 IPv6 Limitations 22-56
22.12 Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers 22-57
22.12.1 Card Compatibility 22-58
22.12.2 Node Management 22-59
22.12.2.1 Physical Connections 22-60
22.12.2.2 CTC Display 22-60
22.12.3 Circuit Management 22-61
22.12.3.1 LMP Provisioning 22-61
22.12.3.2 Virtual Link Provisioning 22-62
22.12.3.3 OCH Trail Circuit Provisioning 22-62
22.12.4 Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Management from CTC 22-63
22.13 Photonic Path Trace 22-64
22.14 Shared Risk Link Group 22-65
22.15 Proactive Protection Regen 22-65
CHAPTER 23
Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes 23-1
CHAPTER 24
Maintain the Node 24-1
Before You Begin 24-1
NTP- G103 Back Up the Database 24-2
NTP- G104 Restore the Database 24-3
NTP- G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 24-4
DLP- G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows) 24-6
Contents
xxxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 24-8
NTP- G133 View and Manage OSI Information 24-10
DLP- G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 24-10
DLP- G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 24-11
DLP- G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 24-12
NTP- G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 24-13
DLP- G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE Card 24-13
DLP- G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 24-14
NTP- G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 24-15
NTP- G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 24-16
NTP- G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 24-17
NTP- G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 24-18
DLP- G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 24-18
DLP- G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 24-19
NTP- G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 24-20
NTP- G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 24-23
NTP- G136 Import Network Element Defaults 24-24
NTP- G137 Export Network Element Defaults 24-25
NTP- G166 View the Facilities 24-26
NTP- G119 Power Down the Node 24-27
Contents
xl
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
CHAPTER 25
Security Reference 25-1
CHAPTER 26
Timing Reference 26-1
CHAPTER 27
SNMP 27-1
APPENDIX A
CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts A-1
APPENDIX B
Hardware Specifications B-1
APPENDIX C
Administrative and Service States C-1
APPENDIX D
Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI D-1
APPENDIX E
Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference E-1
APPENDIX F
Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration F-1
APPENDIX G
Card Features G-1
G.1 Safety Labels G-1
G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards G-1
G.1.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label G-2
G.1.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label G-2
G.1.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label G-2
G.1.1.4 FDA Statement Labels G-3
G.1.1.5 Shock Hazard Label G-3
G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards G-4
G.1.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement G-4
G.1.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label G-4
G.1.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label G-5
G.1.2.4 FDA Statement Labels G-5
G.1.2.5 Shock Hazard Label G-5
G.1.2.6 Burn Hazard Label G-6
G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown G-6
G.3 Card-Level Indicators G-7
G.4 Port-Level Indicators G-9
G.5 Client Interface G-14
G.6 DWDM Interface G-15
Contents
xli
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface G-15
G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature G-16
G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes G-16
G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping G-17
G.11 Timing Synchronization G-17
G.12 Multiplexing Function G-18
G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing G-19
G.14 Client Interface Monitoring G-19
G.15 Jitter G-19
G.16 Lamp Test G-19
G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation G-19
G.18 Performance Monitoring G-20
G.19 Distance Extension G-20
G.20 Slot Compatibility G-20
G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches G-20
G.22 Client and Trunk Ports G-20
G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards G-20
G.23.1 TCC2 Card G-21
G.23.2 TCC2P/TCC3 Card G-21
G.23.3 TNC and TNCE Cards G-21
G.23.4 TSC and TSCE Cards G-22
G.24 Interface Ports G-22
G.25 External Alarms and Controls G-23
G.26 Digital Image Signing (DIS) G-24
G.27 Database Storage G-24
G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation G-24
G.29 Optical Service Channel G-25
G.30 MultiShelf Management G-25
G.31 Protection Schemes G-25
G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE G-26
G.33 Automatic Power Control G-26
G.34 Alarms and Thresholds G-26
G.35 Card Protection G-27
G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection G-27
G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection G-27
G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection G-30
Contents
xlii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
G.35.2 1+1 Protection G-30
G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection G-31
G.36 Far-End Laser Control G-32
G.37 Jitter Considerations G-32
G.38 Termination Modes G-33
APPENDIX H
Network Element Defaults H-1
INDEX
xliii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN”, refer generally to Cisco's
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
• Revision History
• Document Objectives
• Audience
• Document Organization
• Related Documentation
• Document Conventions
• Obtaining Optical Networking Information
• Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines
xliv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Revision History
Date Notes
December 2011 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” in
the chapter “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords”.
• Updated the section “Termination Modes” in the chapter “Card Features”.
• Added a caution to the section, “Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP Cards” in the chapter, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”.
January 2012 • Added a note to step 3 in NTP-G144 in the chapter, “Turn Up a Node”.
• Updated the card description for the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP
cards in the chapter, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”.
• Updated the section “GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards” with pluggable limitations in the chapter Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the section “Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
February 2012 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Removed the autonegotiation support statement for ADM-10G card from
the “Key Features” section and updated the Mode parameter in the table
“ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings” in the chapter “Provision Transponder
and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the procedure “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” in the
chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
March 2012 • Updated the bandwidth parameter in the procedure, “DLP-G383 Provision
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service
Settings”.
• Updated the section, “Multishelf Node” in the chapter, “ Node Reference”.
• Added a note in the procedure “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually” in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
April 2012 • Updated the table “DWDM NFV Toolbar Options” in the chapter,
“Node Reference”.
• Updated the "Faceplate and Block Diagram" section of "GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards" in the chapter,“Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate
Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a new procedure "DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for
Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC" and updated "DLP-G384 Provision
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings" in the
chapter, "Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
xlv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Document Objectives
The Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide includes content previously found in two separate
guides—Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.
The new Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.3 and later releases will now include
background and reference material, installation, turn up, provisioning, and maintenance procedures for
the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS M2, and Cisco ONS M6 dense wavelength division (DWDM)
systems. Use this document in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the Related
Documentation section.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician
Document Organization
May 2012 • Updated the section “RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards” in the
chapter “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”.
• Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card” in the
chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the section “Optical Channel Circuits” in the chapter “Create
Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated the “Set Up SNMP” procedure in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
June 2012 Updated the section “OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
July 2012 • Document Part Number revisioned to 78-19694-02 and a full length
book-PDF was generated.
• Updated the table “Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
August 2012 Updated the table “Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control
Cards” in the chapter “Install the Control Cards”.
Date Notes
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters
Title Summary
"Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for
Release 9.4"
Provides a link to quickly access publications of Cisco ONS Release 9.4.
Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454,
ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf”
Explains how to install the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI, Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
xlvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Chapter 2, “Connecting the PC and Logging
into the GUI”
Explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the
Cisco ONS 15454 and how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
software.
Chapter 3, “Install the Control Cards” Explains how to install the control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
Chapter 4, “Setup Optical Service Channel
Cards”
Includes descriptions of OSCM and OSC-CSM cards. Also provides
references to related procedures.
Chapter 5, “Provision Optical Amplifier
Cards”
Includes descriptions of the optical amplifier cards. Also provides references
to related procedures.
Chapter 6, “Provision Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Cards”
Includes descriptions of the 32-MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards.
Also provides references to related procedures.
Chapter 7, “Setup Tunable Dispersion
Compensating Units”
Explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco
ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks.
Also provides references to related procedures.
Chapter 8, “Provision Protection Switching
Module”
Includes descriptions of the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM networks. Also provides references to related
procedures.
Chapter 9, “Provision Optical Add/Drop
Cards”
Includes descriptions of the AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x,
AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards. Also provides references to related
procedures.
Chapter 10, “Provision Reconfigurable
Optical Add/Drop Cards”
Includes descriptions of the ROADM cards. Also provides references to
related procedures.
Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”
Includes descriptions of transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder
(GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. Also
provides references to related procedures.
Chapter 12, “Node Reference” Explains the DWDM node types available for the ONS 15454. The DWDM
node type is determined by the type of amplifier and filter cards that are
installed in an ONS 15454. Also explains the DWDM automatic power
control (APC), reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM)
power equalization, span loss verification, and automatic node setup (ANS)
functions.
Chapter 13, “Network Reference” Explains the DWDM network applications and topologies. Also provides
network-level optical performance references.
Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node” Explains how to provision a single Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node and turn
it up for service.
Chapter 21, “Perform Node Acceptance
Tests”
Provides test procedures to verify that installed cards are operating correctly
in a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node.
Chapter 15, “Turn Up a Network” Explains how to turn up and test a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM network.
Chapter 16, “Create Optical Channel Circuits
and Provisionable Patchcords”
Explains how to create Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM optical channel client
connections (OCHCCs), optical channel network connections (OCHNCs),
and optical trail circuits.
Chapter 17, “Monitor Performance” Explains how to enable and view performance monitoring (PM) statistics for
the Cisco ONS 15454.
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summary
xlvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Chapter 18, “Manage the Node” Explains how to modify node provisioning for the Cisco ONS 15454 and
perform common management tasks such as monitoring the DWDM
automatic power control (APC) and span loss values.
Chapter 19, “Alarm and TCA Monitoring and
Management”
Contains the procedures for viewing and managing the alarms and conditions
on a Cisco ONS 15454.
Chapter 20, “Change DWDM Card Settings” Explains how to change line, performance monitoring (PM), and threshold
settings on Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards.
Chapter 22, “Management Network
Connectivity”
Provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN)
connectivity. Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network
communication is based on IP, including communication between Cisco
Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and
communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes. The chapter shows
common Cisco ONS 15454 IP network configurations and includes detailed
data communications network (DCN) case studies.
Chapter 23, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove
Cards and Nodes”
Provides procedures for adding and removing DWDM cards and nodes
Chapter 24, “Maintain the Node” Provides procedures for maintaining the Cisco ONS 15454, including
database backup and restoration, removing and replacing cards, viewing the
ONS 15454 audit trail, and hardware maintenance procedures.
Chapter 25, “Security Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and security.
Chapter 26, “Timing Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and node timing.
Chapter 27, “SNMP” Explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by
the Cisco ONS 15454.
Appendix A, “CTC Operation, Information,
and Shortcuts”
Describes the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) views, menus options, tool
options, shortcuts, and table display options.
Appendix B, “Hardware Specifications” Contains hardware specifications for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI shelf
assemblies and cards.
Appendix C, “Administrative and Service
States”
Describes the administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
cards, optical payload ports, out-of-band optical service channel (OSC) ports,
optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), and
transponder/muxponder cards and ports.
Appendix D, “Configuring GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI”
Describes how to provision GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards using Pseudo Command Line Interface (PCLI).
Appendix E, “Pseudo Command Line
Interface Reference”
Describes Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Appendix F, “Fiber and Connector Losses in
Raman Link Configuration”
Describes guidelines to be followed when configuring a Raman link.
Appendix G, “Card Features” Describes the card features.
Appendix H, “Network Element Defaults” Describes the defaults for the network element settings for Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summary
xlviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Related Documentation
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide in conjunction with the following referenced
Release 9.4 publications:
• Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 DWDM, Release 9.4
• Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 for Beginners
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 for Beginners
• Cisco Transport Planner – DWDM Operations Guide
• Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
• Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html.
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Convention Application
boldface Commands and keywords in body text.
italic Command input that is supplied by the user.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
{ x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by
vertical bars. The user must select one.
Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
xlix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
document.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter.
< > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de
waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt
raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin
käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu
onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen
mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien
lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
Convention Application
l
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant
entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez
conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des
avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,
référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen
kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und
den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du
begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med
elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten
av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne
enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de
lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos
perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de
prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para
localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
li
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el
número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña
a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av
varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna
anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR
lii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões
corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os
circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o
número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de
segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for
legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de
involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til
undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de
oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER
liii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
liv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for
Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document that accompanied the product. This publication
describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system.
It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
lv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation.
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.
lvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
lvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4
To quickly access publications of Cisco ONS Release 9.4, see the
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4
lviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-18908-01
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4
CH A P T E R
1-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
1
Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
For information on installing the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 shelf, refer:
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
CH A P T E R
2-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
2
Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Connect the PC and Log into the GUI document
for information on how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454 and
how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software, the ONS 15454 Operation, Administration,
Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) user interface.
2-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 2 Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI
CH A P T E R
3-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
3
Install the Control Cards
Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN”, refer generally to Cisco's
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter describes the common-control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms and provides installation and card turn up
procedures.
For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Chapter topics include:
• 3.1 Card Overview, page 3-2
• 3.3 TCC2 Card, page 3-3
• “3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card” section on page 3-6
• 3.4 TCC2P Card, page 3-6
• “3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card” section on page 3-9
• 3.5 TCC3 Card, page 3-9
• 3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card, page 3-12
• 3.6 TNC and TNCE Card, page 3-12
• 3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards, page 3-16
• 3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards, page 3-16
• 3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards, page 3-19
3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Card Overview
• 3.8 Digital Image Signing, page 3-20
• 3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS, page 3-20
• 3.9 AIC-I Card, page 3-20
• 3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card, page 3-26
• 3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card, page 3-26
• 3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card, page 3-28
• 3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections, page 3-29
• 3.12 Procedures for Control Cards, page 3-33
3.1 Card Overview
The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter.
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
3.1.1 Common Control Cards
The following common control cards are needed to support the functions of the DWDM, transponder,
and muxponder cards on ONS 15454 shelf:
• TCC2 or TCC2P or TCC3
• AIC-I (optional)
• MS-ISC-100T (multishelf configurations only)
The TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards are used to support the functions of DWDM, transponder, and
muxponder cards on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelves.
3.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 3-1 lists the platform and software release compatibility for the control cards.
Table 3-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards
TCC2 TCC2P AIC-I MS-ISC-100T TCC31 TNC TSC TNCE TSCE
R4.5 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R4.6 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R4.7 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R5.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R6.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R7.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R7.2 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R8.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
3-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Safety Labels
3.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only)
The following Front Mount Electrical Connections (FMECs) are needed to support the functions of the
DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards:
• MIC-A/P
• MIC-C/T/P
3.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
3.3 TCC2 Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For TCC2 card specifications, see the “TCC2 Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
R8.5 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R9.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R9.1 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R9.2
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
No No
R9.2.1
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
No No
R9.3
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454
-M2
and
15454
-M6
R9.4
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454
-M2
and
15454
-M6
1. The TCC3 card is backward compatible with software Release 9.1 and earlier releases. In the Release 9.1 and earlier releases, the TCC3 card boots up as
the TCC2P card in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM systems.
Table 3-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards (continued)
TCC2 TCC2P AIC-I MS-ISC-100T TCC31 TNC TSC TNCE TSCE
3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2 Card
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control (TCC2) card performs system initialization,
provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET
section overhead (SOH) data communications channel/generic communications channel (DCC/GCC)
termination, optical service channel (OSC) DWDM data communications network (DCN) termination,
and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2 also ensures that the system maintains
Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
Note The LAN interface of the TCC2 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable
length of 328 ft. (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius).
Install TCC2 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2 fails, traffic switches to the
protect TCC2.
3.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-1 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2 card.
3-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2 Card
Figure 3-1 TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.3.2 TCC2 Card Functions
The functions of the TCC2 card are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
FAIL
A
PWR
B
ACT/STBY
ACO
CRIT
MIN
REM
SYNC
RS-232
TCP/IP
MAJ
ACO
TCC2
LAMP
BACKPLANE
Ethernet
Repeater
Mate TCC2
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
FPGA
TCCA ASIC
SCL Processor
Serial
Debug
Modem
Interface
RS-232 Craft
Interface
Backplane
RS-232 Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
Faceplate
RS-232 Port
Note: Only 1 RS-232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
SCL Links to
All Cards
HDLC
Message
Bus
Mate TCC2
HDLC Link
Modem
Interface
400MHz (Not Used)
Processor
Communications
Processor
SCC3
MCC1
FCC1
MCC2
SCC4 FCC2
SCC1 SCC2
DCC
Processor
System
Timing
BITS Input/
Output
Ref Clocks
-48V PWR (all I/O Slots)
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
137639
3-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2P Card
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC2 card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.4 TCC2P Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For TCC2P card specifications, see the”TCC2P Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card is an enhanced version of the
TCC2 card. The primary enhancements are Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock BITS
timing.
The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance,
diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault
detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3
(Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
3-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2P Card
The TCC2P card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC2P card acts as a shelf controller and node
controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P card supports up to 12 subtended shelves through the
MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC2P card allows the ONS 15454
node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it.
The TCC2P card is compliant to the following standards:
• The LAN interface of the TCC2P card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a
cable length of 328 ft. (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees
Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft. (10 m) maximum at temperatures
from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
• The TCC2P card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) complaint. The RoHS
regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants
in a new electronic and electric equipment.
Install TCC2P cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2P card fails, traffic switches to
the protect TCC2P card. All TCC2P card protection switches conform to protection switching standards
when the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than
50 ms.
3.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-2 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P card.
3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2P Card
Figure 3-2 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.4.2 TCC2P Card Functions
The functions of the TCC2P card are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
FAIL
A
PWR
B
ACT/STBY
ACO
CRIT
MIN
REM
SYNC
RS-232
TCP/IP
MAJ
ACO
TCC2P
LAMP
BACKPLANE
Ethernet Switch
Mate TCC2
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
FPGA
TCCA ASIC
SCL Processor
Serial
Debug
Modem
Interface
EIA/TIA 232
Craft Interface
Backplane
EIA/TIA 232 Por
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
Faceplate
EIA/TIA 232 Port
Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
SCL Links to
All Cards
HDLC
Message
Bus
Mate TCC2
HDLC Link
Modem
Interface
400MHz (Not Used)
Processor
Communications
Processor
SCC3
MCC1
FCC1
MCC2
SCC4 FCC2
SMC1 SCC2
DCC
Processor
System
Timing BITS Input/
Output
Ref Clocks
-48V PWR (all I/O Slots)
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
Ethernet
Phy
SCC1
3-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC3 Card
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 l
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12
3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC2P card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.5 TCC3 Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC3 Card
Note For TCC3 card specifications, see the “TCC3 Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The Timing Communications Control Three (TCC3) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2P card. The
primary enhancements include the increase in memory size and compact flash space. The TCC3 card
boots up as TCC2P card in older releases and as TCC3 card from Release 9.2 onwards.
The TCC3 card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics,
IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the
ONS 15454. The TCC3 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE)
timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
The TCC3 card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC3 card acts as a shelf controller and node
controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 card supports up to 30 subtended shelves through the
MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC3 card allows the ONS 15454
node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it. We recommend the use of TCC3 card as a
node controller when the number of subtended shelves exceeds four.
The TCC3 card is compliant with the following standards:
• The LAN interface of the TCC3 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a
cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures ranging from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65
degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at
temperatures from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
• The TCC3 card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant. The RoHS
regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants
in a new electronic and electric equipment.
3.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-3 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC3 card.
3-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC3 Card
Figure 3-3 TCC3 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.5.2 TCC3 Card Functions
The functions of the TCC3 card are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
FAIL
A
PWR
B
ACT/STBY
ACO
CRIT
MIN
REM
SYNC
RS-232
TCP/IP
MAJ
ACO
TCC3
LAMP
BACKPLANE
Ethernet Switch
Mate TCC
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC)
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
FPGA
TCCA FPGA
SCL Processor
Serial
Debug
Modem
Interface
EIA/TIA 232
Craft Interface
Backplane
EIA/TIA 232 Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC)
Faceplate
EIA/TIA 232 Port
Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
SCL Links to
All Cards
HDLC
Message
Bus
Mate TCC
HDLC Link
Modem
Interface
(Not Used)
400MHz
Processor
Communications
Processor
SCC3
MCC1
FCC1
MCC2
SCC4 FCC2
SMC1 SCC2
DCC
Processor
System
Timing BITS Input/
Output
Ref Clocks
-48V PWR (all I/O Slots)
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
Ethernet
Phy
SCC1
248663
3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13
3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC3 card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.6 TNC and TNCE Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
The TNC and TNCE cards combine the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, OSCM, ISC, and
AIC-I cards. The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
Note For TNC and TNCE card specifications, see the “TNC and TNCE Card Specifications (Cisco ONS
15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6)” section in the Hardware Specifications document.
3-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
The TNC and TNCE cards are provisioned as master and slave in the 15454-M6 shelf, and as a
stand-alone card in the 15454-M2 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards serve as the processor card for the
node.
On the 15454-M6 shelf, install redundant TNC and TNCE cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TNC or
TNCE card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TNC or TNCE card. The card supports line
cards from slots 2 to 7.
On the 15454-M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC and TNCE cards in slot 1. The TNC and TNCE
cards support line cards in slots 2 and 3.
The TNC and TNCE cards monitor both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TNC and
TNCE cards raise an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.
The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply.
You can insert and remove the TNC and TNCE cards even when the system is online, without impacting
the system traffic.
You can upgrade the TSC or TSCE card to a TNC or TNCE card. During the upgrade, the TNC and
TNCE cards do not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you
can still provision the SFP ports on the TNC and TNCE cards during the upgrade. The TNC/TNCE and
TSC/TSCE cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf.
The TNC and TNCE cards support all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card
adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm.
Note The LAN interface of the TNC and TNCE cards meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting
a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees
Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from
-40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
3.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The faceplate design of the TNC and TNCE cards allow sufficient space to insert or remove cables while
accessing the Ethernet and SFP ports.
The TNC and TNCE cards can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and in slot 1
of the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards have an identifier on the faceplate that matches
with an identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier
in the shelf.
The TNC and TNCE cards support field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface.
The TNC cards have two FPGA: TCCA, SYNTIDE and FRAMPOS
The TNCE cards have one FPGA: VEGA and FRAMPOS
Figure 3-4 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNC card.
3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
Figure 3-4 TNC Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-5 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNCE card.
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
TNC
FAIL
ACT/STBY
ACO
SFP2
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
SFP1
LINK
EIA/TIA-232
ACT
LINK
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
ACT
TX
RX
TX
RX
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
1GB DDR2
Mini-DIMM
CPU
MPC8568E
GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy
SFP1
SFP2
BusMux
CPLD
Ethernet
Switch
Local
Ethernet
Switch
External
Glue
Logic
CPLD
SYNTIDE
FPGA
Boot
Flash
USB
Controller
FRAMPOS
FPGA
TCCA
FPGA
T1/E1
Framers
LOG
NVRAM
FE
Phy
4GB
Compact
Flash
277855
3-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
Figure 3-5 TNCE Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.6.2 TNC and TNCE Card Functions
The functions of the TNC and TNCE cards are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.29 Optical Service Channel, page G-25
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.30 MultiShelf Management, page G-25
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.25 External Alarms and Controls, page G-23
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13
• Port level indicators—Table G-14 on page G-14
• TNC and TNCE SFP indicators—Table G-15 on page G-14
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
TNCE
FAIL
ACT/STBY
ACO
SFP2
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
SFP1
LINK
EIA/TIA-232
ACT
LINK
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
ACT
TX
RX
TX
RX
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
1GB DDR2
Mini-DIMM
CPU
MPC8568E
GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy
SFP1
SFP2
BusMux
CPLD
Ethernet
Switch
Local
Ethernet
Switch
External
Glue
Logic
CPLD
Boot
Flash
USB
Controller
FRAMPOS
FPGA
FPGA FPGA
T1/E1
Framers
LOG
NVRAM
FE
Phy
CPU
8378
1588 FE
PHY
4GB
Compact
Flash
236696
3-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
• G.31 Protection Schemes, page G-25
• G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, page G-26
3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TNC and TNCE cards:
• NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host
Detection
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6
• NTP-G279 Monitor TNC and TNCE Card Performance
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
The TSC and TSCE cards combine the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, ISC, and AIC-I cards.
The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
3-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
Note For TSC and TSCE cards specification, see the “TSC and TSCE Card Specifications (ONS 15454 M2
and ONS 15454 M6)” section in the Hardware Specifications document.
The TSC and TSCE cards are provisioned as master and slave in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, and as a
stand-alone card in the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards serve as the processor card for
the node.
On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install redundant TSC and TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TSC
or TSCE card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TSC or TSCE card. The TSC and TSCE
cards support line cards from slots 2 to 7.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TSC and TSCE cards in slot 1. The TSC and TSCE
cards support line cards in slots 2 and 3.
The TSC and TSCE cards monitor both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TSC and
TSCE cards raise an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.
The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply.
You can insert and remove the TSC and TSCE cards even when the system is online, without impacting
the system traffic.
The TSC and TSCE cards do not support optical service channel (OSC) and SFP ports.
You can upgrade the TSC or TSCE card to a TNC or TNCE card. During the upgrade, the TNC and
TNCE cards do not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you
can still provision SFP ports on the TNC and TNCE cards during the upgrade. The TNC, TNCE, TSC,
and TSCE cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf.
The TSC and TSCE cards support all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card
adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm.
Note The LAN interface of the TSC and TSCE cards meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting
a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees
Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from
-40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
3.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The faceplate design of the TSC and TSCE cards allow sufficient space to insert or remove cables while
accessing the Ethernet ports.
The TSC and TSCE cards can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the 15454-M6 shelf and in slot 1 of the
15454-M2 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards have an identifier on the faceplate that matches with an
identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier in the
shelf.
The TSC and TSCE cards support field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface.
The TSC cards have two FPGA: TCCA and SYNTIDE
The TSCE cards have one FPGA: VEGA
Figure 3-6 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TSC card.
3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
Figure 3-6 TSC Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-7 illustrates the faceplate for the TSCE card.
Figure 3-7 TSCE Faceplate
3.7.2 TSC and TSCE Card Functions
The functions of the TSC and TSCE cards are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.30 MultiShelf Management, page G-25
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.25 External Alarms and Controls, page G-23
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
TSC
FAIL
ACT/STBY
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
ACO
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
EIA/TIA-232
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
256MB DDR2
Mini-DIMM
CPU
MPC8568E
GE Phy GE Phy
BusMux
CPLD
Ethernet
Switch
Local
Ethernet
Switch
External
Glue
Logic
CPLD
SYNTIDE
FPGA
Boot
Flash
USB
Controller
TCCA
FPGA
T1/E1
Framers
LOG
NVRAM
256MB
Compact
Flash
277856
TSCE
FAIL
ACT/STBY
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
ACO
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
EIA/TIA-232
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
246795
3-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13
• Port level indicators—Table G-14 on page G-14
• G.31 Protection Schemes, page G-25
• G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, page G-26
3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TSC and TSCE cards:
• NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host
Detection
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
• NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards, page 20-121
• NTP-G278 Upgrade the TSC or TSCE Card to the TNC or TNCE Card
3-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Digital Image Signing
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.8 Digital Image Signing
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
The DIS feature complies with the new U.S. Government Federal Information Processing Standard
(FIPS) 140-3 to provide security for all software provided on the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and ONS 15454
M2 platforms. This standard requires software to be digitally signed and verified for authenticity and
integrity prior to load and execution.
DIS feature automatically provides increased protection. DIS focuses on software security and provides
increased protection from attacks and threats to Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 products.
DIS verifies software integrity and provides assurance that the software has not been tampered with or
modified. Digitally signed Cisco software provides counterfeit protection.
New controller cards, such as TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, provide services that authenticate the origin of
the software running on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The signage and
verification process is transparent until verification fails.
3.8.1 DIS Identification
Digitally signed software can be identified by the last three characters appended to the working version
and protected version field in CTC. The DIS conventions can be viewed under the working version
displayed in the Maintenance > Software tab in CTC. For example, 9.2.0 (09.20-X10C-29.09-SDA)
and 9.2.0 (09.20-010C-18.18-SPA).
The significance of the three characters appended to the software version is explained in Table:
3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS
To verify DIS, see NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6.
3.9 AIC-I Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Table 3-2 DIS Conventions in the Software Version
Character Meaning
S (first character) Indicates that the package is signed.
P or D (second character) Production (P) or Development (D) image. Production image—Software
approved for general release. Development image—development software
provided under special conditions for limited use.
A (third character) This third character indicates the version of the key used for signature
generation. The version changes when a key is revoked and a new key is
used. The values of the version key varies from A to Z.
3-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
Note For hardware specifications, see the “AIC-I Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications
document.
The optional Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined
(environmental) alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire. It provides
12 customer-defined input and 4 customer-defined input/output contacts. The physical connections are
via the backplane wire-wrap pin terminals. If you use the additional alarm expansion panel (AEP), the
AIC-I card can support up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs, which are connected on the AEP connectors. The
AEP is compatible with ANSI shelves only. A power monitoring function monitors the supply voltage
(–48 VDC).
3.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-8 shows the AIC-I faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
Figure 3-8 AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.9.2 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
Table G-2 lists the card-level LEDs on the card.
AIC-I
Fail
Express orderwire
Local orderwire
EEPROM
LED x2 AIC-I FPGA
SCL links
4 x
IN/OUT
Power
Monitoring
12/16 x IN
Ringer
Act
Ring
Ring
Input
Output
78828
FAIL
ACT
ACC
INPUT/OUTPUT
EOW
LOW
RING
AIC-1
(DTMF)
(DTMF)
UDC-A
UDC-B
DCC-A
DCC-B
ACC
PWR
A B
RING
DCC-B
DCC-A
UDC-B
UDC-A
3-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
3.9.3 External Alarms and Controls
The AIC-I card provides input/output alarm contact closures. You can define up to 12 external alarm
inputs and 4 external alarm inputs/outputs (user configurable). The physical connections are made using
the backplane wire-wrap pins or FMEC connections. For information about increasing the number of
input/output contacts, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm Expansion Panel” section in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
LEDs on the front panel of the AIC-I indicate the status of the alarm lines, one LED representing all of
the inputs and one LED representing all of the outputs. External alarms (input contacts) are typically
used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other
environmental conditions. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or
audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters,
and fans.
You can program each of the twelve input alarm contacts separately. You can program each of the sixteen
input alarm contacts separately. Choices include:
• Alarm on Closure or Alarm on Open
• Alarm severity of any level (Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, Not Reported)
• Service Affecting or Non-Service Affecting alarm-service level
• 63-character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log
You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of
the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact
or you provision the alarm input.
The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a
local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire:
• Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical
alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a
Minor alarm or above is the trigger.
• Remote NE alarm severity: Same as the local NE alarm severity but applies to remote alarms only.
• Virtual wire entities: You can provision any environmental alarm input to raise a signal on any
virtual wire on external outputs 1 through 4 when the alarm input is an event. You can provision a
signal on any virtual wire as a trigger for an external control output.
You can also program the output alarm contacts (external controls) separately. In addition to
provisionable triggers, you can manually force each external output contact to open or close. Manual
operation takes precedence over any provisioned triggers that might be present.
Note For ANSI shelves, the number of inputs and outputs can be increased using the AEP. The AEP is
connected to the shelf backplane and requires an external wire-wrap panel.
3.9.4 Orderwire
Orderwire allows a crafts person to plug a phone set into an ONS 15454 and communicate with crafts
people working at other ONS 15454s or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code
modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead.
3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead
channel) orderwire channels on a SONET/SDH ring or particular optics facility. Express orderwire also
allows communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device.
You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for
DCC/GCC channels. In CTC, you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn-up
so that all NEs on the ring can reach one another. Orderwire terminations (that is, the optics facilities
that receive and process the orderwire channels) are provisionable. Both express and local orderwire can
be configured as on or off on a particular SONET/SDH facility. The ONS 15454 supports up to four
orderwire channel terminations per shelf. This allows linear, single ring, dual ring, and small
hub-and-spoke configurations. Orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as bidirectional line
switched ring (BLSR), multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing), path protection, or
subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring.
Caution Do not configure orderwire loops. Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel.
The ONS 15454 implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature. The line acts
as a party line. Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other participants
on the connected orderwire subnetwork. The local orderwire party line is separate from the express
orderwire party line. Up to four OC-N/STM-N facilities for each local and express orderwire are
provisionable as orderwire paths.
The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity,
which causes one AIC-I card or all ONS 15454 AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The
ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes
when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on
the DTMF pad. Individual dialing is initiated by pressing * and the individual four-digit number on the
DTMF pad.
Table 3-3 shows the pins on the orderwire connector that correspond to the tip and ring orderwire
assignments.
When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork, make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist. Loops
cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel.
Figure 3-9 shows the standard RJ-11 connectors used for orderwire ports.
Table 3-3 Orderwire Pin Assignments
RJ-11 Pin Number Description
1 Four-wire receive ring
2 Four-wire transmit tip
3 Two-wire ring
4 Two-wire tip
5 Four-wire transmit ring
6 Four-wire receive tip
3-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
Figure 3-9 RJ-11 Connector
3.9.5 Power Monitoring
The AIC-I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of –48 VDC for
presence, under voltage, and over voltage.
3.9.6 User Data Channel
The user data channel (UDC) features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps (F1 byte) between two nodes
in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two user data channels, UDC-A and UDC-B,
through separate RJ-11 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each UDC can be routed to an
individual optical interface in the ONS 15454.
The UDC ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles. Table 3-4 lists the UDC pin assignments.
3.9.7 Data Communications Channel
The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an
ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two data communications channels, DCC-A and
DCC-B, through separate RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each DCC can be routed to
an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454.
The DCC ports are synchronous serial interfaces. The DCC ports are standard RJ-45 receptacles.
Table 3-5 lists the DCC pin assignments.
61077
Pin 1 Pin 6
RJ-11
Table 3-4 UDC Pin Assignments
RJ-11 Pin Number Description
1 For future use
2 TXN
3 RXN
4 RXP
5 TXP
6 For future use
3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
MS-ISC-100T Card
3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AIC-I card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits, page 16-81
• NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International
Card
• NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings, page 20-117
3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For hardware specifications, see the “MS-ISC-100T Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The Multishelf Internal Switch Card (MS-ISC-100T) is an Ethernet switch used to implement the
multishelf LAN. It connects the node controller shelf to the network and to subtending shelves. The
MS-ISC-100T must always be equipped on the node controller shelf; it cannot be provisioned on a
subtending controller shelf.
The recommended configuration is to implement LAN redundancy using two MS-ISC-100T cards: one
switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 7, and the other
switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 11. The Ethernet
configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card is part of the software package and is automatically loaded. The
MS-ISC-100T card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 on the node controller shelf; the recommended
slots are Slot 6 and Slot 12.
Table 3-6 lists the MS-ISC-100T port assignments.
Table 3-5 DCC Pin Assignments
RJ-45 Pin Number Description
1 TCLKP
2 TCLKN
3 TXP
4 TXN
5 RCLKP
6 RCLKN
7 RXP
8 RXN
3-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
MS-ISC-100T Card
Caution Shielded twisted-pair cabling should be used for inter-building applications.
3.10.1 Faceplate Diagram
Figure 3-10 shows the card faceplate.
Table 3-6 MS-ISC-100T Card Port Assignments
Port Description
DCN 1and DCN 2 Connection to the network
SSC1 to SSC7 Connection to subtending shelves
NC Connection to TCC2/TCC2P using a cross-over cable
PRT Connection to the PRT port of the redundant MS-ISC-100T
3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
MS-ISC-100T Card
Figure 3-10 MS-ISC-100T Faceplate
3.10.2 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators
Table G-3 lists the card-level LEDs on the card.
3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
FAIL
ACT
MS ISC
100T
CONSOLE
145274
DC2 SSC1 SSC2 SSC3 SSC4 SSC5 SSC6 SSC7 NC PRT DCN1
3-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections
This section describes the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs, which provide power, external alarm, and
timing connections for the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf.
3.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC
Note For hardware specifications, see the “MIC-A/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The MIC-A/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY B input, one of the two possible redundant
power supply inputs. It also provides connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P
card), sixteen alarm inputs, and four configurable alarm inputs/outputs. Its position is in Slot 23 in the
center of the subrack Electrical Facility Connection Assembly (EFCA) area.
The MIC-A/P FMEC has the following features:
• Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs
• Connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card)
• Connection for four configurable alarm inputs/outputs
• Connection for sixteen alarm inputs
• Storage of manufacturing and inventory data
For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the
ONS 15454 ETSI shelf.
3.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-11 shows the MIC-A/P faceplate.
Figure 3-11 MIC-A/P Faceplate
Figure 3-12 shows a block diagram of the MIC-A/P.
MIC-A/P
ALARM
IN/OUT
CLEI CODE BARCODE
POWER RATING
GND
BATTERY B
CAUTION
TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE
SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE
271305
3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
Figure 3-12 MIC-A/P Block Diagram
Table 3-7 shows the alarm interface pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 connector.
Inventory Data
(EEPROM)
61332
Backplane
3W3
Connector
Alarms
DB62
Connector
Power
16 Alarm inputs
4 Alarm in/outputs
Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector
Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description
1 ALMCUTOFF N Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair
2 ALMCUTOFF P Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair
3 ALMINP0 N Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires
4 ALMINP0 P Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires
5 ALMINP1 N Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires
6 ALMINP1 P Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires
7 ALMINP2 N Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires
8 ALMINP2 P Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires
9 ALMINP3 N Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires
10 ALMINP3 P Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires
11 EXALM0 N External customer alarm 1
12 EXALM0 P External customer alarm 1
13 GND Ground
14 EXALM1 N External customer alarm 2
15 EXALM1 P External customer alarm 2
16 EXALM2 N External customer alarm 3
17 EXALM2 P External customer alarm 3
18 EXALM3 N External customer alarm 4
19 EXALM3 P External customer alarm 4
20 EXALM4 N External customer alarm 5
21 EXALM4 P External customer alarm 5
22 EXALM5 N External customer alarm 6
23 EXALM5 P External customer alarm 6
24 EXALM6 N External customer alarm 7
25 EXALM6 P External customer alarm 7
3-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
26 GND Ground
27 EXALM7 N External customer alarm 8
28 EXALM7 P External customer alarm 8
29 EXALM8 N External customer alarm 9
30 EXALM8 P External customer alarm 9
31 EXALM9 N External customer alarm 10
32 EXALM9 P External customer alarm 10
33 EXALM10 N External customer alarm 11
34 EXALM10 P External customer alarm 11
35 EXALM11 N External customer alarm 12
36 EXALM11 P External customer alarm 12
37 ALMOUP0 N Normally open output pair 1
38 ALMOUP0 P Normally open output pair 1
39 GND Ground
40 ALMOUP1 N Normally open output pair 2
41 ALMOUP1 P Normally open output pair 2
42 ALMOUP2 N Normally open output pair 3
43 ALMOUP2 P Normally open output pair 3
44 ALMOUP3 N Normally open output pair 4
45 ALMOUP3 P Normally open output pair 4
46 AUDALM0 N Normally open Minor audible alarm
47 AUDALM0 P Normally open Minor audible alarm
48 AUDALM1 N Normally open Major audible alarm
49 AUDALM1 P Normally open Major audible alarm
50 AUDALM2 N Normally open Critical audible alarm
51 AUDALM2 P Normally open Critical audible alarm
52 GND Ground
53 AUDALM3 N Normally open Remote audible alarm
54 AUDALM3 P Normally open Remote audible alarm
55 VISALM0 N Normally open Minor visual alarm
56 VISALM0 P Normally open Minor visual alarm
57 VISALM1 N Normally open Major visual alarm
58 VISALM1 P Normally open Major visual alarm
59 VISALM2 N Normally open Critical visual alarm
60 VISALM2 P Normally open Critical visual alarm
Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued)
Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description
3-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
3.11.3 MIC-C/T/P FMEC Note For hardware specifications, see the “MIC-C/T/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY A input, one of the two possible
redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for system management serial port, system
management LAN port, modem port (for future use), and system timing inputs and outputs. Install the
MIC-C/T/P in Slot 24.
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has the following features:
• Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs
• Connection for two serial ports for local craft/modem (for future use)
• Connection for one LAN port
• Connection for two system timing inputs
• Connection for two system timing outputs
• Storage of manufacturing and inventory data
For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the shelf.
3.11.4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the MIC-C/T/P FMEC faceplate.
Figure 3-13 MIC-C/T/P Faceplate
Figure 3-14 shows a block diagram of the MIC-C/T/P.
61 VISALM3 N Normally open Remote visual alarm
62 VISALM3 P Normally open Remote visual alarm
Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued)
Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description
MIC-C/T/P
CLEI CODE BARCODE
POWER RATING
GND
BATTERY A
TIMING A
IN TIMING B OUT
CAUTION
TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE
SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE
271306
LAN
AUX
TERM
ACT
LINK
3-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Figure 3-14 MIC-C/T/P Block Diagram
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has one pair of LEDs located on the RJ45 LAN connector. The green LED is on
when a link is present, and the amber LED is on when data is being transferred.
3.12 Procedures for Control Cards
The procedures described below explain how to install the control cards needed for the
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
3.12.1 Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34—Complete this procedure to install the
control cards needed for the ONS 15454 platform.
• NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41—Complete this
procedure to install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Inventory Data
(EEPROM)
61334
Backplane
3W3
connector
Power
RJ-45
connectors
System management serial ports
RJ-45
connectors
System management LAN
4 coaxial
connectors Timing 2 x in / 2 x out
3-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding
Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” task on page 3-35.
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards”.
Step 2 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” task on page 3-38, if necessary.
Step 3 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” task on page 3-39, if
necessary.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the control cards needed for the
ONS 15454 platform.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards on ONS 15454 shelf (required)
AIC-I card (optional)
MS-ISC-100T (optional; for multishelf node configurations)
Prerequisite Procedures Following procedures in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• “NTP-G7 Install the Power and Ground”
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
3-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card Caution Do not remove a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card during the software transfer process, which is indicated by
alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 during the software
transfer process will corrupt the system memory.
Note Allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot (Slot 7 or 11).
Note In Step 4, you will be instructed to watch the LED activity (sequence) on the front of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. This activity begins immediately after you close the latches in Step 3.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the back
panel of the shelf. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any farther.
If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, go to Step a to verify the LED activity on the TCC2 card. For the TCC2P go to Step b. For
the TCC3 card go to Step c.
a. For the TCC2 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED and the yellow ACT/STBY LED turn on for about
15 seconds. (For TCC3 card it takes around 20 to 25 seconds)
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 40 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. All LEDs turn on for about 3 seconds before
turning off for about 3 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green.
Purpose This task installs redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The first card you
install in the ONS 15454 must be a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, and it must
initialize before you install any cross-connect or traffic cards. Cross-connect
cards are only required in hybrid nodes.
Tools/Equipment Two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
• While the PWR LEDs are red for two to three minutes, the ACT/STBY turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the ACT/STBY remains
on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2 card installed, and amber if this
is the second TCC2 card installed.)
Note It might take up to four minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2 card automatic upload.
b. For the TCC2P card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds and then becomes solid.
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2P card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC2P card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2P card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
3-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2P card automatic
upload.
c. For the TCC3 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 25 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 60 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds and then becomes solid (the LED is turned on
for about 20 seconds).
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC3 card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC3 card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC3 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC3 card automatic upload.
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
installed, or yellow for standby if this is the second powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3. The IP address,
temperature of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM,
January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card and install a replacement card.
3-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document to replace the software. To replace the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
are already installed, proceed to Step 9.
Tip If you install a standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that has a different software version than the
active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, the newly installed standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
automatically copies the software version from the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. You do not
need to do anything in this situation. However, the loading TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card does not
boot up in the normal manner. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow most of
the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds,
the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes while the
new software loads onto the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. After loading the new software,
the upgraded TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card’s LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the
amber ACT/STBY LED turns on.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card
Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails in Slot 9 until the card plugs into
the receptacle at the back of the slot.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Purpose This task installs the AIC-I card. The AIC-I card provides connections for
external alarms and controls (environmental alarms).
Tools/Equipment AIC-I card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the following:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for up to 10 seconds.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs become red, the two INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs become amber, and the
ACT LED turns green for approximately 5 seconds.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs turn green, the INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs turn off, and the green ACT
LED remains on.
Note It might take up to 3 minutes for the PWR A and PWR B LEDs to update.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, no LEDs turn on.
Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically, the card is not installed
properly. Remove the card and repeat Steps 1 to 4.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Purpose This task installs redundant MS-ISC-100T cards. The MS-ISC-100T card
is required for a multishelf node configuration. It provides LAN redundancy
on the node controller shelf. An alternative to using the MS-ISC-100T
card is the Cisco Catalyst 2950, although Cisco recommends using the
MS-ISC-100T. For more information on the Catalyst 2950 installation,
refer to the Catalyst 2950 product documentation.
Tools/Equipment MS-ISC-100T card (2)
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note The MS-ISC-100T is not supported in a subtended shelf.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails into the appropriate slot in the node
controller shelf until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot. The card can be installed
in any slot from Slot 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Cisco recommends that you install the MS-ISC-100T cards in
Slot 6 and Slot 12.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the LED activity:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for 15 to 20 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for approximately 3 minutes.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for approximately 6 minutes.
• The green ACT or ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED can persist until all card ports connect
to their far end counterparts and a signal is present.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the redundant MS-ISC-100T card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
3-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454
M6 shelf assemblies. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card” task on page 3-42.
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards”.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 3-45.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 3-45.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install and configure the TNC, TNCE,
TSC, or TSCE card. TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards are the control
cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf (required)
Stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card on ONS 15454 M2 shelf (required)
Prerequisite Procedures Following procedures in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• “NTP-G271 Install the Power and Ground to the ONS 15454 M2
Shelf”
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
3-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
Caution Do not remove the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards during the software installation process, which is
indicated by alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
cards during the software installation process will corrupt the system memory.
Note Allow each TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card to boot completely before installing the redundant
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Note On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in slot 1. For more
information, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide.
Note You cannot insert the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in other slots due to mechanical constraints. To
identify the card slot, match the symbol placed on the lower side of the card front panel with the symbol
in the shelf.
Caution To achieve redundancy, two TNC and TNCE cards or two TSC and TSCE cards must be installed in the
ONS 15454 M6 shelf. Do not install one TNC or TNCE card and a redundant TSC or TSCE card in the
same shelf.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card horizontally along the guide rails until the card plugs
into the receptacle at the back of the slot (slot 1 or 8 in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and slot 1 in the ONS
15454 M2 shelf).
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly, and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task installs redundant
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and a
stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.
Install and initialize the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card before installing any
other line cards into the shelf assemblies. On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf,
install the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in slot 1.
Tools/Equipment Two TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards for the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and one
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card for the ONS 15454 M2 shelf
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
If you insert a card into a slot assigned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, verify the LED activity on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
• The red FAIL LED, PWR LED turn on briefly.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the amber ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs blink once and
turn off for about 10 seconds.
• ACT/STBY LED blinks for about 1 second.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs turn off for about
10 seconds.
• The ACT/STBY, ACO, and PWR LEDs turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the amber ACT/STBY
remains on. The ACT/STBY LED turns green if this is the first TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
installed, and amber if this is the second TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installed.
Note It might take up to four minutes for the power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on. After completing the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installation, log in
to CTC and click the Alarms tab to display the alarms raised on the card. For procedure to clear
the alarm, see the Cisco ONS DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Note During the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card initialization, the SFTWDOWN alarm appears twice.
The alarm clears after the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card boots completely.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
automatic upload.
Figure 3-15 illustrates the installation of TNC and TNCE cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
3-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Figure 3-15 Installing TNC and TNCE Cards on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
installed or amber if this is the second powered-up TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE. The IP address, temperature
of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and install a replacement card. Refer to the release-specific software
upgrade document to replace the software.
Step 8 (ONS 15454 M6 shelf only) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Tip If you install a standby TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card that has a different software version than
the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card, the standby TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card copies the
software version from the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. When the standby card is first
inserted, the LEDs follow the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns
on for about 5 seconds, the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up
to 30 minutes. After loading the new software, the upgraded TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards
LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the amber ACT/STBY LED turns on.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
279119
1 2
TNC card
Guide rail
3-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC and TNCE cards
where you want to provision PPM and port settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose 1 or 2 from the PPM drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Displays the PPM associated with the chosen PPM in the above step.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area becomes white when the PPM is inserted and the Actual Equipment Type column lists
the name of PPM.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the Port drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, FE, or ONE-GE from the Port Type drop-down list.
Note OC-3 can be configured only on PPM port 1. FE and ONE-GE can be configured on both the ports.
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to provision another PPM and port on the TNC and TNCE cards.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task provisions a PPM and
port on TNC and TNCE cards. PPMs are created to support the OSC
function.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task configures UDC and
VoIP traffic for the TNC and TNCE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
3-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note Each TNC and TNCE cards support UDC/VoIP configuration. You can configure UDC or VoIP on the
two SFP ports present on the TNC and TNCE cards. The TNC and TNCE cards support the UDC/VoIP
configuration only when OSC is provisioned on the SFP ports.
Note If two nodes are connected through the fiber and if the TNC and TNCE cards in one node has UDC
configuration, the TNC and TNCE cards in the other node must also have UDC configuration. The same
rule applies to VoIP configuration.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC and TNCE cards
where you want to configure UDC and VoIP.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > UDC / VOIP tabs.
Step 3 From the Service Type drop-drop list, choose UDC or VOIP.
Note You can configure UDC or VoIP on only one SFP port at a time per TNC or TNCE card. If you want to
configure UDC or VoIP on the second SFP port, choose NONE from the Service Type drop-down list for
the first port and then choose UDC or VoIP for the second port.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards,
page 3-45
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
CH A P T E R
4-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
4
Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
This chapter describes the optical service channel (OSC) cards for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note Unless noted otherwise, the cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco
ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 4.1 Card Overview, page 4-1
• 4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels, page 4-3
• 4.3 OSCM Card, page 4-3
• 4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card, page 4-5
• 4.4 OSC-CSM Card, page 4-6
• 4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card, page 4-11
4.1 Card Overview
This section provides card summary and compatibility information.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
An optical service channel (OSC) is a bidirectional channel connecting two adjacent nodes in a DWDM
ring. For every DWDM node (except terminal nodes), two different OSC terminations are present, one
for the west side and another for the east side. The channel transports OSC overhead that is used to
manage ONS 15454 DWDM networks. An OSC signal uses the 1510-nm wavelength and does not affect
4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
Card Overview
client traffic. The primary purpose of this channel is to carry clock synchronization and orderwire
channel communications for the DWDM network. It also provides transparent links between each node
in the network. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal.
There are two versions of the OSC modules: the OSCM, and the OSC-CSM, which contains the OSC
wavelength combiner and separator component in addition to the OSC module.
The Mesh/Multiring Upgrade (MMU) card is used to optically bypass a given wavelength from one
section of the network or ring to another one without requiring 3R regeneration.
Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards include the functions of the OSCM
card. OSC can be created on the OC3 port (SFP-0) of the TNC and TNCE cards.
The TNC and TNCE cards support two optical service channels (OSC): primary OSC and secondary
OSC.
The primary optical service channel (SFP-0) supports the following interfaces:
• OC-3/STM-1
• Fast Ethernet (FE)
• Gigabit Ethernet (GE).
The secondary optical service channel (SFP-1) supports the following interfaces:
• Fast Ethernet (FE)
• Gigabit Ethernet (GE).
4.1.1 Card Summary
Table 4-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each card.
4.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 4-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the OSC and OSCM cards.
Table 4-1 OSCM, and OSC-CSM Card Summary
Card Port Description For Additional Information
OSCM The OSCM has one set of optical ports and one
Ethernet port located on the faceplate. It
operates in Slots 8 and 10.
See the “4.3 OSCM Card”
section on page 4-3.
OSC-CSM The OSC-CSM has three sets of optical ports
and one Ethernet port located on the faceplate.
It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “4.4 OSC-CSM Card”
section on page 4-6.
Table 4-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Service Channel Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
OSCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OSC-CSM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
Class 1 Laser Safety Labels
4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
4.3 OSCM Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For OSCM card specifications, see the OSCM Card Specifications document.
Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards include the functions of the OSCM
card.
The OSCM card is used in amplified nodes that include the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L
booster amplifier. The OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards include the required OSC
wavelength combiner and separator component. The OSCM cannot be used in nodes where you use
OC-N/STM-N cards, electrical cards, or cross-connect cards. The OSCM uses Slots 8 and 10, which are
also cross-connect card slots.
The OSCM supports the following features:
• OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC
• Supervisory data channel (SDC) forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing
• Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring
• 100BaseT far-end (FE) User Channel (UC)
• Monitoring functions such as orderwire support and optical safety
The OC-3/STM-1 section data communications channel (SDCC or RS-DCC) overhead bytes are used
for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, then it is regenerated
and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the active and
standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing through the system communication link (SCL) bus on
the backplane. Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for forwarding to the AIC-I card.
The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a
packet-over-SONET/SDH (POS) processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them
available at the RJ-45 connector.
The OSCM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming OC-3/STM-1
signal and then sending it to the DWDM cards. The DWDM cards then forward the clock information to
the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSCM Card
4.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the OSCM card faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 4-1 OSCM Card Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on
page 4-3.
Figure 4-2 shows the block diagram of the variable optical attenuator (VOA) within the OSCM.
The OSCM has one OC-3/STM-1 optical port located on the faceplate. One long-reach OSC transmits
and receives the OSC to and from another DWDM node. Both DCN data and FE payload are carried on
this link.
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
96464
ASIC
OC3-ULR
Optical
transceiver
OSC
Line OC-3
FPGA
OC-12
POS
OC-3
MII
145944
Processor
VOA
Physical
Interface
DC/DC
19.44 MHz
Line Ref clock
Power supply
Input filters
MT CLKt BAT A&B
0 Slot
1-6
MT CLKt
0 Slot
12-17
6
M P
SCL Bus
to TCCs
FE FE User
Channel
6
TOH &
Cell Bus
4-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSCM Card
Figure 4-2 OSCM VOA Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
4.3.2 OSCM Card Functions
The functions of the OSCM card are:
• 4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-5 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiode P1 monitors the power for the OSCM card. The returned power level value is
calibrated to the OSC TX port (Table 4-3).
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OSCM card:
• NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power, page 14-129
• NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-74
• NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-86
P1
P1
OSC TX
Physical photodiode
OSC Variable optical attenuator
Control
Module
OSC RX
Control
Interface
124968
Table 4-3 OSCM VOA Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 Output OSC OSC TX
4-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
• NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-90
• NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards,
page 21-94
• DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards, page 21-104
• DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards
• NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-2
4.4 OSC-CSM Card
Note For OSC-CSM card specifications, see the OSC-CSM Card Specifications document.
The OSC-CSM card is used in unamplified nodes. This means that the booster amplifier with the OSC
wavelength combiner and separator is not required for OSC-CSM operation. The OSC-CSM can be
installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. To operate in hybrid mode, the OSC-CSM cards must be
accompanied by cross-connect cards. The cross-connect cards enable functionality on the OC-N/STM-N
cards and electrical cards.
The OSC-CSM supports the following features:
• Optical combiner and separator module for multiplexing and demultiplexing the optical service
channel to or from the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) signal
• OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC
• SDC forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing
• Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring
• 100BaseT FE UC
• Monitoring functions such as orderwire support
• Optical safety: Signal loss detection and alarming, fast transmitted power shut down by means of an
optical 1x1 switch
• Optical safety remote interlock (OSRI), a feature capable of shutting down the optical output power
• Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details on
ALS provisioning for the card, see the DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS
Maintenance Settings, page 20-12. For information on using the card to implement ALS in a
network, see the “13.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 13-30.
The WDM signal coming from the line is passed through the OSC combiner and separator, where the
OSC signal is extracted from the WDM signal. The WDM signal is sent along with the remaining
channels to the COM port (label on the front panel) for routing to the OADM or amplifier units, while
the OSC signal is sent to an optical transceiver.
The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. The OC-3/STM-1 SDCC or RS-DCC overhead bytes are
used for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, and then it is
regenerated and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the
active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing via the SCL bus on the backplane.
Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for
forwarding to the AIC-I card.
4-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a
POS processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them available at the RJ-45 front
panel connector.
The OSC-CSM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming
OC-3/STM-1 signal and then sending it to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The clock
distribution is different from the OSCM card because the OSC-CSM does not use Slot 8 or 10
(cross-connect card slots).
Note S1 and S2 (Figure 4-5 on page 4-10) are optical splitters with a splitter ratio of 2:98. The result is that
the power at the MON TX port is about 17 dB lower than the relevant power at the COM RX port, and
the power at the MON RX port is about 20 dB lower than the power at the COM TX port. The difference
is due to the presence of a tap coupler for the P1 photodiode.
4-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
4.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 4-3 shows the OSC-CSM faceplate.
Figure 4-3 OSC-CSM Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on
page 4-3.
The OSC-CSM has a OC3 port and three other sets of ports located on the faceplate.
Figure 4-4 shows a block diagram of the OSC-CSM card.
96465
OSC
CSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
LINE
TX
ASIC
OC3-ULR
Optical
transceiver
OSC
combiner
separator
OSC
Line
COM
OC-3
FPGA
OC-12
POS
OC-3
MII
TOH &
Cell Bus
145943
Processor
Physical
Interface
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
MPMP BAT A&B
SCL Bus
to TCCs
RxClkRef
FE User
Channel
4-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
Figure 4-4 OSC-CSM Block Diagram
ASIC
OC3-ULR
Optical
transceiver
OSC
combiner
separator
OSC
Line
COM
OC-3
FPGA
OC-12
POS
OC-3
MII
TOH &
Cell Bus
96477
Processor
Physical
Interface
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
MPMP BAT A&B
SCL Bus
to TCCs
RxClkRef
FE User
Data
Channel
4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
Figure 4-5 shows the OSC-CSM optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 4-5 OSC-CSM Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
4.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Functions
The functions of the OSC-CSM card are:
• 4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring
• G.34 Alarms and Thresholds, page G-26
• Card level indicators—Table G-5 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P5 monitor the power for the OSC-CSM card. Their function is as
follows:
P P
P
P
P
V
V
124897
MON RX
MON TX
COM TX
OSC RX
LINE TX COM RX
LINE RX
DROP
section
ADD
section
OSC TX
Control
Interface
Filter
Filter
S1
P1
P2
P5
P4
PV1
PV2
P3
HW Switch
Control
Opt. Switch S2
Virtual photodiode
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
P
V
Optical splitter
Control
4-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
• P1: The returned power value is calibrated to the LINE RX port, including the insertion loss of the
previous filter (the reading of this power dynamic range has been brought backward towards the
LINE RX output).
• P2: The returned value is calibrated to the LINE RX port.
• P3: The returned value is calibrated to the COM RX port.
• P5: The returned value is calibrated to the OSC TX port, including the insertion loss of the
subsequent filter.
The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 4-4.
The OSC power on the LINE TX is the same as the power reported from P5.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OSC-CSM card:
• NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-78
• NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-82
• NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-86
• NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-90
• NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 21-106
• NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 21-112
• DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards
• NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-2
Table 4-4 OSC-CSM Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameters
P1 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
OSC Power
P2 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
P3 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported
P5 Output OSC OSC TX OSC Power Supported
4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
CH A P T E R
5-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
5
Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
This chapter describes the optical amplifier cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) networks and related procedures.
For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to
the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Chapter topics include the nine types of ONS 15454 DWDM amplifiers:
• 5.1 Card Overview, page 5-2
• 5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels, page 5-7
• 5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card, page 5-7
• 5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card, page 5-11
• 5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card, page 5-11
• 5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards, page 5-15
• 5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card, page 5-15
• 5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card, page 5-19
• 5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card, page 5-20
• 5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card, page 5-24
• 5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 5-25
• 5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 5-29
• 5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card, page 5-30
• 5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card, page 5-34
5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
• 5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 5-34
• 5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 5-39
• 5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards, page 5-39
• 5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards, page 5-44
• 5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 5-45
• 5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 5-49
5.1 Card Overview
This section provides summary and compatibility information for the optical amplifier cards.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide for a list of slots and symbols.
Optical amplifier card architecture includes an optical plug-in module with a controller that manages
optical power, laser current, and temperature control loops. An amplifier also manages communication
with the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and operation, administration, maintenance,
and provisioning (OAM&P) functions such as provisioning, controls, and alarms.
5.1.1 Applications
The following amplifiers can be configured as booster or preamplifiers:
• OPT-AMP-C
• OPT-AMP-17C
• OPT-AMP-L
• OPT-BST-E
• OPT-BST
• OPT-EDFA-17
• OPT-EDFA-24
The amplifier functions as a booster amplifier by default. The amplifier role is automatically configured
when the CTP NE update configuration file is loaded in CTC. The amplifier role can also be manually
modified.
Note The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifiers are supported as preamplifiers in sites that are equipped with
the OPT-RAMP-C card. In any other configuration, the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards must be
configured as a booster amplifier.
For more information about the supported configurations and network topologies, see Chapter 12, “Node
Reference” and Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
5-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
5.1.2 Card Summary
Table 5-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each optical amplifier card.
Table 5-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454
Card Port Description For Additional Information
OPT-PRE The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports (three sets)
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier
Card” section on page 5-7.
OPT-BST The OPT-BST amplifier has four sets of optical ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “5.4 OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on
page 5-11.
OPT-BST-E The OPT-BST-E amplifier has four sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.4 OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on
page 5-11.
OPT-BST-L The OPT-BST-L L-band amplifier has four sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
See the “5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier
Card” section on page 5-15.
OPT-AMP-L The OPT-AMP-L L-band preamplifier has five sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate. It is a two-slot card that
operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card”
section on page 5-20.
OPT-AMP-17-C The OPT-AMP-17-C C-band low-gain preamplifier/booster
amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the
faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card”
section on page 5-25.
OPT-AMP-C The OPT-AMP-C C-band high-gain, high-power
preamplifier/booster amplifier has five sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates as a preamplifier when
equipped and provisioned in Slots 2 to 6 and 11 to 16 or as a
booster amplifier when equipped and provisioned in Slot 1
and 17.
See the “5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card”
section on page 5-30.
OPT-RAMP-C The OPT-RAMP-C C-band amplifier has five sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16.
See the “5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on
page 5-34.
OPT-RAMP-CE The OPT-RAMP-CE C-band amplifier has five sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16.
See the “5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on
page 5-34.
RAMAN-CTP The RAMAN-CTP amplifier is a single-slot card and has six
optical ports located on the faceplate. The RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP units must be installed in adjacent slots (Slots
2 and 3, 4 and 5, or 6 and 7) in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis
and Slots 2 and 3 in the ONS 15454 M2 chassis.
See the “5.10 RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP Cards” section on
page 5-39.
RAMAN-COP The RAMAN-COP amplifier has one optical port located on
the faceplate. It is a single-slot card and works in conjunction
with the RAMAN-CTP amplifier.
See the “5.10 RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP Cards” section on
page 5-39.
5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
OPT-EDFA-17 The OPT-EDFA-17 amplifier has four sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and
OPT-EDFA-24 Cards” section on
page 5-45
OPT-EDFA-24 The OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier has four sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and
OPT-EDFA-24 Cards” section on
page 5-45
Table 5-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
5-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
5.1.3 Card Compatibility
Table 5-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each optical amplifier
card.
Table 5-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards up to Release 5.0
Card Type R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0
OPT-PRE 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-BST 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-BST-E No No 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-BST-L No No No No
OPT-AMP-L No No No No
OPT-AMP-17-C No No No No
OPT-AMP-C No No No No
OPT-RAMP-C No No No No
OPT-RAMP-CE No No No No
RAMAN-CTP No No No No
RAMAN-COP No No No No
OPT-EDFA-17 No No No No
OPT-EDFA-24 No No No No
5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
Table 5-3 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards Release 6.0 and Later
Card Type R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R 9.2 R 9.2.1 R 9.3 R 9.4
OPT-PRE 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-BST 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-BST-E 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-BST-L No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-AMP-L No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-AMP-17-C No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-AMP-C No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-RAMP-C No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
OPT-RAMP-CENo No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
RAMAN-CTP No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2,
15454-M6
15454-M2,
15454-M6
RAMAN-COP No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2,
15454-M6
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-EDFA-17 No No No No No No No No No ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-EDFA-24 No No No No No No No No No ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
5-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Class 1M Laser Safety Labels
5.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds
Table 5-4 lists the alarms and related thresholds for the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L,
OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C cards.
5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
Note For OPT-PRE card specifications, see the OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-PRE card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-PRE is a C-band, DWDM, two-stage erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with midamplifier
loss (MAL) that can be connected to a dispersion compensating unit (DCU). The OPT-PRE is equipped
with a built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) that controls the gain tilt and can also be used to pad
the DCU to a reference value. You can install the OPT-PRE in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card is
designed to support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-PRE features include:
• Fixed gain mode with programmable tilt
• True variable gain
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
Table 5-4 Alarms and Thresholds
Port Alarms Thresholds
LINE RX LOS None
LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low
LOS-O LOS-O Fail Low
LINE TX OPWR-FAIL OPWR Fail Low
OSC TX None None
OSC RX None None
COM TX None None
COM RX LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low
5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
• MAL for fiber-based DCU
• Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• Four signal photodiodes to monitor the input and output optical power of the two amplifier stages
through CTC
• An optical output port for external monitoring
Note The optical splitter has a ratio of 1:99, resulting in about 20 dB-lower power at the MON port than at the
COM TX port.
5.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram
The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON is the output monitor port
• COM RX (receive) is the input signal port
• COM TX (transmit) is the output signal port
• DC RX is the MAL input signal port
• DC TX is the MAL output signal port
5-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
Figure 5-1 shows the OPT-PRE amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-1 OPT-PRE Faceplate
Figure 5-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-PRE card’s features.
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
96466
5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
Figure 5-2 OPT-PRE Block Diagram
Figure 5-3 shows the a block diagram of how the OPT-PRE optical module functions.
Figure 5-3 OPT-PRE Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.3.2 OPT-PRE Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-PRE card are:
• 5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
Optical
module
COM RX
DC RX
96478
Processor
DC TX
COM TX
MON
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98298
DCU
COM RX COM TX
DC TX DC RX
MON
P1 P2 P3 P4
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
5-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-PRE card. Table 5-5 shows the
returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-PRE card:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
Note For OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E hardware specifications, see the OPT-BST Amplifier Card Specifications
and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards”
section on page G-4.
Table 5-5 OPT-PRE Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 Input Com COM RX
P2 Output DC DC TX
P3 Input DC DC RX
P4 Output COM (Total Output) COM TX
Output COM (Signal Output)
5-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
The OPT-BST is designed to ultimately support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The
OPT-BST-E amplifier card is a gain-enhanced version of the OPT-BST card. It is designed to support up
to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. Both the cards are C-band, DWDM EDFA with optical
service channel (OSC) add-and-drop capability. When an OPT-BST or an OPT-BST-E is installed in the
an ONS 15454, an OSCM card is also needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include:
• Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt)
• Gain range of 5 to 20 dB in constant gain mode and output power mode for an OPT-BST card
• Gain range of 8 to 23 dBm with the tilt managed at 0 dBm in constant gain mode and output power
mode for an OPT-BST-E card
• Enhanced gain range of 23 to 26 dBm with unmanaged tilt with OPT-BST-E card
• True variable gain
• Built-in VOA to control gain tilt
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• ASE compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI), a CTC software feature capable of shutting down optical
output power or reducing the power to a safe level (automatic power reduction)
• Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For
information about using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical
Safety” section on page 13-30.
Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is
about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power.
5.4.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports and Block diagram
The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
5-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
Figure 5-4 shows the OPT-BST amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-4 OPT-BST Faceplate
The OPT-BST-E card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-BST card.
Figure 5-5 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E card’s features.
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
96467
5-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
Figure 5-5 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Block Diagram
Figure 5-6 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E optical module functions.
Figure 5-6 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.4.2 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards are:
• 5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards.
Table 5-6 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
96479
Processor
Line TX
COM TX
Com RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98300
MON TX OSC RX
MON RX OSC TX
OSC
COM RX P1 P2
P3 P4
COM TX
LINE TX
APR
signal
LINE RX
in RX
P Physical photodiode
5-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the
power reported from P3 and P4.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Table 5-6 Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input Com COM RX Channel
Power
Supported
P2 Output Line (Total
Output)
LINE TX Channel
Power
Supported
Output Line (Signal
Output)
P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel
Power
Supported
P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
Note For OPT-BST-L card specifications, see the OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-BST-L safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-BST-L is an L-band, DWDM EDFA with OSC add-and-drop capability. The card is well suited
for use in networks that employ dispersion shifted (DS) fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The
OPT-BST-L is designed to ultimately support 64 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing, but in
Software R9.0 and earlier it is limited to 32 channels at 100-GHz spacing.When an ONS 15454 has an
OPT-BST-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST-L in
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include:
• Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt)
• Standard gain range of 8 to 20 dB in the programmable gain tilt mode
• True variable gain
• 20 to 27 dB gain range in the uncontrolled gain tilt mode
• Built-in VOA to control gain tilt
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• ASE compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• OSRI
• ALS
Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is
about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power.
5.5.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram
The OPT-BST-L amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
5-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
Figure 5-7 shows the OPT-BST-L card faceplate.
Figure 5-7 OPT-BST-L Faceplate
Figure 5-8 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST-L card’s features.
OPT
BST-L
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
180929
5-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
Figure 5-8 OPT-BST-L Block Diagram
Figure 5-9 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST-L optical module functions.
Figure 5-9 OPT-BST-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.5.2 OPT-BST-L Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-BST-L card are:
• 5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
180930
Processor
Line TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
134976
MON TX OSC RX
MON RX OSC TX
OSC
COM RX P1 P2
P4 P5
COM TX
LINE TX
APR
signal
LINE RX
in RX
P Physical photodiode
P3
5-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor the power for the OPT-BST-L card. Table 5-7
shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to
the power values reported from P4 and P5.
The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P3.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-BST-L card:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
Table 5-7 OPT-BST-L Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported
P2 Output Line (Total
Output)
LINE TX Channel Power Supported
Output Line (Signal
Output)
P3 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported
P4 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
P5 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For OPT-AMP-L card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-L Preamplifier Card Specifications section in
the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-AMP-L card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-AMP-L is an L-band, DWDM optical amplifier card consisting of a two-stage EDFA with
midstage access loss (MSL) for an external DCU and OSC add-and-drop capability. Using CTC, the card
is provisionable as a preamplifier (OPT-PRE) or booster amplifier (OPT-BST), and is well suited for use
in networks that employ DS or SMF-28 fiber. The amplifier can operate up to 64 optical transmission
channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the 1570 nm to 1605 nm wavelength range.
When an OPT-AMP-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the
two-slot OPT-AMP-L in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
The card has the following features:
• Maximum power output of 20 dBm
• True variable gain amplifier with settable range from 12 to 24 dBm in the standard gain range and
24 dBm to 35 dbM with uncontrolled gain tilt
• Built-in VOA to control gain tilt
• Up to 12 dBm MSL for an external DCU
• Fast transient suppression; able to adjust power levels in hundreds of microseconds to avoid bit
errors in failure or capacity growth situations
• Nondistorting low frequency transfer function
• Midstage access loss for dispersion compensation unit
• Constant pump current mode (test mode)
• Constant output power mode (used during optical node setup)
• Constant gain mode
• Internal ASE compensation in constant gain mode and in constant output power mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down
control (less than one second), and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode. For
information on using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical
Safety” section on page 13-30.
Note Before disconnecting any OPT AMP-L fiber for troubleshooting, first make sure the OPT AMP-L card
is unplugged.
5-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
5.6.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-AMP-L amplifier card has ten optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
• DC TX is the output signal to the DCU.
• DC RX is the input signal from the DCU.
5-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
Figure 5-10 shows the OPT-AMP-L card faceplate.
Figure 5-10 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate
Figure 5-11 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-L card’s features.
OPT-AMP-L
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
RX
DC
TX
180931
5-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
Figure 5-11 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagram
Figure 5-12 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-AMP-L optical module functions.
Figure 5-12 OPT-AMP-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
Optical
module
Monitor Line RX
Line RX
DC RX
Processor
Line TX
DC TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
180932
MON TX
OSC RX
OSC TX
COM RX
COM TX
MON RX
LINE TX
LINE RX
P1
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
P2 P3
P6
P4
DC TX
DC RX
External Mid-Stage
Loss
OSC
Add
OSC
Drop
P7
P5
Transmit Section
Receive Section
145256
5-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
5.6.2 OPT-AMP-L Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-AMP-L card are:
• 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P7 monitor the power for the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards.
Table 5-8 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to
the power values reported from P5 and P6.
The power values on the LINE TX port is calculated by adding the IL to the power value reported from
P7.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-L card:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
Table 5-8 Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported
P2 Output DC (total power) DC TX Channel Power Supported
Output DC (signal power)
P3 Input DC (input power) DC RX Channel Power Supported
P4 Output Line (total power) LINE TX Channel Power Supported
Output Line (signal power)
P5 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
P6 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
P7 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported
5-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card
Note For OPT-AMP-17-C card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-17-C Amplifier Card Specifications section
in the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-AMP-17-C safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-AMP-17-C is a 17-dB gain, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier with OSC
add-and-drop capability. It supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the
1529 nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-17-C installed, an
OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-17-C in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
The card’s features include:
• Fixed gain mode (no programmable tilt)
• Standard gain range of 14 to 20 dB at startup when configured as a preamplifier
• Standard gain range of 20 to 23 dB in the transient mode when configured as a preamplifier
• Gain range of 14 to 23 dB (with no transient gain range) when configured as a booster amplifier
• True variable gain
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• ASE compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• OSRI
• ALS
5-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
5.7.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card has eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
5-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
Figure 5-13 shows the OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-13 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate
Figure 5-14 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-17C card’s features.
OPT
-AMP
17-C
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
159520
5-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
Figure 5-14 OPT-AMP17-C Block Diagram
Figure 5-15 shows how the OPT-AMP-17-C optical module functions.
Figure 5-15 OPT-AMP-17-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.7.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-AMP-17-C card are:
• G.33 Automatic Power Control, page G-26
• 5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
180928
Processor
Line TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
MON TX OSC RX
MON RX OSC TX
OSC
COM RX
P1
P2
P4
P5
COM TX
LINE TX
APR
signal
LINE RX
in RX
P Physical photodiode
P3
OSC
add
OSC
drop
159519
5-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor power for the OPT-AMP-17-C card. Table 5-9
shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the
power reported from P3 and P4.
The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P5.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-17-C card:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
Table 5-9 OPT-AMP-17-C Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported
P2 Output Line (Total
Output)
LINE TX Channel Power Supported
Output Line (Signal
Output)
P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
P5 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported
5-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card
Note For OPT-AMP-C card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-AMP-C card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-AMP-C card is a 20-dB output power, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier. It
contains mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU). To control gain tilt, a VOA
is used. The VOA can also be used to attenuate the signal to the DCU to a reference value. The amplifier
module also includes the OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters.
The OPT-AMP-C card supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1529
nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-C card installed, an OSCM
card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Slots 2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a
preamplifier, and slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a booster
amplifier.
The card’s features include:
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Mid-stage access for DCU
• Constant pump current mode (test mode)
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• Constant gain mode
• ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes
• Programmable tilt
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Gain range with gain tilt control of 12 to 24 dB
• Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 24 to 35 dB
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• OSRI
• ALS
5-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
5.8.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-AMP-C amplifier card has 10 optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• DC RX is the input DCU port.
• DC TX is the output DCU port.
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
5-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
Figure 5-16 shows the OPT-AMP-C amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-16 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate
Figure 5-17 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-C card features.
OPT
-AMP
-C
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
DC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
274510
5-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
Figure 5-17 OPT-AMP-C Block Diagram
Figure 5-18 shows how the OPT-AMP-C optical module functions.
Figure 5-18 OPT-AMP-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
240356
Processor
COM TX
COM RX
Line TX OSC TX
Monitor Line TX
DCU TX
DCU RX
OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
MON TX
OSC RX
OSC TX
COM RX
COM TX
MON RX
LINE TX
LINE RX
P1
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
P2 P3
P6
P4
DC TX
DC RX
External Mid-Stage
Loss
OSC
Add
OSC
Drop
P7
P5
Transmit Section
Receive Section
145256
5-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
5.8.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-AMP-C card are:
• 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-C card:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE specifications, see the OPT-RAMP-C Amplifier Card
Specifications and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware
Specifications document.
Note For OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards”
section on page G-4.
The OPT-RAMP-C card is a double-slot card that improves unregenerated sections in long spans using
the span fiber to amplify the optical signal. Different wavelengths in C-band receive different gain
values. To achieve Raman amplification, two Raman signals (that do not carry any payload or overhead)
5-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
are required to be transmitted on the optical fiber because the gain generated by one signal is not flat.
The energy of these Raman signals transfer to the higher region of the spectrum thereby amplifying the
signals transmitted at higher wavelengths. The Raman effect reduces span loss but does not compensate
it completely.
When the Raman optical powers are set correctly, a gain profile with limited ripple is achieved. The
wavelengths of the Raman signals are not in the C-band of the spectrum (used by MSTP for payload
signals). The two Raman wavelengths are fixed and always the same. Due to a limited Raman gain, an
EDFA amplifier is embedded into the card to generate a higher total gain. An embedded EDFA gain
block provides a first amplification stage, while the mid stage access (MSA) is used for DCU loss
compensation.
The OPT-RAMP-CE card is a 20 dBm output power, gain-enhanced version of the OPT-RAMP-C card
and is optimized for short spans. The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can support up to 80
optical transmission channels at 50-GHz channel spacing over the C-band of the optical spectrum
(wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm). To provide a counter-propagating Raman pump into the
transmission fiber, the Raman amplifier provides up to 500 mW at the LINE-RX connector. The
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16, and supports all
network configurations. However, the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card must be equipped on both
endpoints of a span.
The Raman total power and Raman ratio can be configured using CTC. The Raman configuration can be
viewed on the Maintenance > Installation tab.
The features of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card include:
• Raman pump with embedded EDFA gain block
• Raman section: 500 mW total pump power for two pump wavelengths
• EDFA section:
– OPT-RAMP-C: 16 dB gain and 17 dB output power
– OPT-RAMP-CE: 11 dB gain and 20 dB output power
• Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) for Raman plus EDFA ripple compensation
• MSA for DC units
• VOA for DC input power control
• Full monitoring of pump, OSC, and signal power
• Fast gain control for transient suppression
• Low-FIT (hardware-managed) optical laser safety
• Hardware output signals for LOS monitoring at input photodiodes
• Optical service channel add and drop filters
• Raman pump back-reflection detector
5.9.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards have ten optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port.
5-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
• DC RX is the input DCU port.
• DC TX is the output DCU port.
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
Figure 5-19 shows the OPT-RAMP-C card faceplate.
Figure 5-19 OPT-RAMP-C Faceplate
The OPT-RAMP-CE card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-RAMP-C card.
Figure 5-20 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card features.
270710
LINE OSC DC COM MOM
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
DF
OPT-RAMP-C
5-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Figure 5-20 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Block Diagram
Figure 5-21 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card functions.
Figure 5-21 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functional Block Diagram
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
240356
Processor
COM TX
COM RX
Line TX OSC TX
Monitor Line TX
DCU TX
DCU RX
OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
270709
OSC-TX
W to E
section
E to W
section
Line-TX
Line-RX
COM-RX
COM-TX
OSC
Drop
OSC
Add
Pump 1
Pump 2
PD
8
PD
9
PD
11
PD
10
PD
12
PD
7
PD
5
PD
6
PD
1
PD
2
PD
3
PD
4
Pump
Drop
Pump
Add
PD Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
5-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Two Raman pump lasers are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the LINE-RX port, thereby
counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. An EDFA gain block provides further amplification of the
DWDM signal, which allows regulated output power entry in the mid stage access and acts upon the
VOA attenuation. While the optical filters are present for the OSC add and drop functions, the OSC
signal counter-propagates with the DWDM signal. Two monitor ports, MON-RX and MON-TX, are
provided at the EDFA input and output stages and are used to evaluate the total gain ripple. A total of 12
photodiodes (PDs) are provided, allowing full monitoring of RP power, DWDM power, and OSC power
in each section of the device. In particular, PD12 allows the detection of the remnant Raman pump power
at the end of the counter-pumped span, while PD11 detects the amount of Raman pump power back
scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber.
The EDFA section calculates the signal power, considering the expected ASE power contribution to the
total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as feedback signals for the
EDFA pump power control loop. The ASE power is derived according to the working EDFA gain. PD2,
PD3, and PD4 provide the total power measured by the photodiode and the signal power is derived by
calculating the total power value. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical
attenuation of the two monitor ports are stored into the card’s not-volatile memory.
5.9.2 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card are:
• 5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring, page 5-38
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD12 monitor the power for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
cards (see Table 5-10).
Table 5-10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
PD1 EDFA DWDM Input Power LINE-RX
PD2 EDFA Output Power (pre-VOA
attenuation)
DC-TX (port with 0 dB VOA attenuation)
PD3 DCU Input Power DC-TX
PD4 DCU Output Power DC-RX
PD5 DWDM Input Power COM-RX
PD6 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX
PD7 OSC DROP Output Power OSC-TX
PD8 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
PD9 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
PD10 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
5-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For hardware specifications, see the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product
Cards” section on page G-4.
PD11 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX
PD12 Remnant Pump Power LINE-TX
Table 5-10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
5-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
The 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards are supported on
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Release 9.4.01 and later releases only. These cards do
not operate on systems running earlier versions.
After installing Release 9.4.01 software, reinstall the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards.
The single-slot RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards support counter and co-propagating Raman
amplification on very long unregenerated spans.
The cards manage up to 96 ITU-T 50-GHz spaced channels over the C-band of the optical spectrum
(wavelengths from 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm). The counter-propagating RAMAN-CTP card is the
master unit. The co-propagating RAMAN-COP card is the slave unit and can be used only when the
counter-propagating unit is present. The RAMAN-CTP card and the RAMAN-COP card must be
installed in adjacent slots (Slots 2 and 3, 4 and 5, or 6 and 7) in the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis and
Slots 2 and 3 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis. However, these adjacent slots must not be used to
install two RAMAN-CTP or two RAMAN-COP cards.
The RAMAN-CTP card is provided with three E-2000 PS PC connectors for the LINE-TX, LINE-RX,
and RAMAN-COP-RX ports and three LC-UPC-II connectors for the COM-TX, COM-RX, and
MON-TX ports. The RAMAN-COP card is provided with one E-2000 PS PC connector. The E2000 PS
PC patchcord is used to connect the RAMAN-COP card to the RAMAN-COP-RX port on the
RAMAN-CTP card.
Note The RAMAN-CTP card is shipped with two E-2000 PS PC to F-3000s SM PC patchcords and the
RAMAN-COP card is shipped with one E-2000 PS PC to E-2000 PS PC patchcord. The F-3000s SM PC
connector is mechanically and optically compatible with the LC PC connectors and the LC PC mating
adapters. The standard connectors and the F-3000s SM PC connectors can be used for optical power of
250 mW and higher, if the connectors are absolutely clean.
The features of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards include:
• Raman section: 1000 mW total pump power for four pumps and two wavelengths
• Embedded distributed feedback (DFB) laser at 1568.77 nm to be used for optical safety and link
continuity (in RAMAN-CTP card only)
• Photodiodes to enable monitoring of Raman pump power
• Photodiodes to enable monitoring of the DFB laser and signal power (in RAMAN-CTP card only)
• Hardware managed automatic laser shutdown (ALS) for optical laser safety
• Hardware output signals for loss of signal (LOS) monitoring at input photodiodes
• Raman pump back reflection detector to check for excessive back reflection
5.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The RAMAN-CTP card has six optical ports located on the faceplate:
– MON TX is the output monitor port
– COM RX is the input signal port (receive section)
– COM TX is the output signal port
– RAMAN-COP RX is the Raman co-propagating input port
– LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section)
5-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
– LINE TX is the output signal port
Figure 5-22 shows the RAMAN-CTP card faceplate.
Figure 5-22 RAMAN-CTP Faceplate
The RAMAN-COP card has only one optical port located on the faceplate. RAMAN-TX is the Raman
co-propagating output port.
Figure 5-23 shows the RAMAN-COP card faceplate.
Figure 5-23 RAMAN-COP Faceplate
Figure 5-24 shows a block diagram of how the RAMAN-CTP card functions.
246593
HAZARD
LEVEL
1M
SKIN EXPOSURE
NEAR APERTURE
MAY CAUSE BURNS
RX
MON COM RAMAN COP RX LINE TX LINE RX
TX TX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
FAIL ACT SF
RAMAN-CTP
246594
HAZARD
LEVEL
1M RAMAN TX
SKIN EXPOSURE
NEAR APERTURE
MAY CAUSE BURNS
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
FAIL ACT SF
RAMAN-COP
5-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Figure 5-24 RAMAN-CTP Functional Block Diagram
Four Raman pump lasers (two for each wavelength) are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the
LINE-RX port, thereby counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. The two pump lasers at the same
nominal central wavelength, power, and polarization are made orthogonally polarized by the polarization
beam combiner (that rotates one of the laser beams) and then coupled, resulting in a depolarized beam.
A DFB laser at 1568.77 nm is used for optical safety. Optical filters for DFB add and drop are present.
The DFB signal generated by the DFB laser is transmitted in-fiber, co-propagating with the DWDM
signal. A MON-TX port monitors the DWDM signal at the COM-TX port. A total of ten photodiodes are
provided, allowing monitoring of Raman pump (RP) power, DWDM signal power, and DFB signal
power in each section of the card. In particular, P8 measures the co-propagating Raman pump power
in-fiber (when the RAMAN-COP unit is present), while P6 detects the amount of Raman pump power
back scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber. P1 measures the DFB signal power
transmitted in-fiber while P9 and P10 measure the DFB signal and ASE power respectively, which is
received from the other line site. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical
attenuation of the monitor port is stored in non-volatile memory of the card.
Figure 5-25 shows a block diagram of how the RAMAN-COP card functions.
246596
MON-TX
LINE-RX COM-TX
P8
P7
P1
P5 P6
P3 P4
P2
P1+ P2
P1 P2
PBC PBC
PUMP
COUNTER
ADD
LINE-TX COM-RX
RAMAN-COP-RX
DFB
P9 P10
VOA_DFB
DFB and ASE
DROP
PUMP
CO
ADD
DFB
ADD
PUMP1 PUMP2 PUMP3 PUMP4
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
5-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Figure 5-25 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Functional Block Diagram
Four Raman pump lasers (two for each wavelength) are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the
LINE-TX port of the counter-propagating unit, thereby co-propagating with the DWDM signal. The two
pump lasers at the same nominal central wavelength, power, and polarization are made orthogonally
polarized by the polarization beam combiner (that rotates one of the laser beams) and then coupled,
resulting in a depolarized beam. A total of four photodiodes are provided, allowing the monitoring of RP
power. In particular, P6 detects the amount of Raman pump power back scattered by the LINE-RX
connector and transmission fiber.
5.10.2 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 monitor the power for the RAMAN-CTP card (see Table 5-11).
246595
RAMAN-TX
P1+
P5
P6
P3 P4
P2
P1 P2
VOA1
PBC
PUMP1 PUMP2 PUMP3 PUMP4
VOA2
PBC
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
Table 5-11 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 DFB in-fiber Output Power LINE-TX
P2 DWDM RX Input Power LINE-RX
P3 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
P4 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
P5 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
5-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Physical photodiodes P3 through P6 monitor the power for the RAMAN-COP card (see Table 5-12).
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port
Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.4.
5.10.3 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Functions
The functions of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Caution During a software upgrade, do not unplug the RAMAN-CTP or RAMAN-COP card fibers or connectors.
The ends of unterminated fibers or connectors emit invisible laser radiation.
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
P6 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX
P7 DWDM TX Input Power COM-RX
P8 Total Co-Pump in-fiber Output
Power
LINE-TX
P9 DFB Input Power LINE-RX
P10 ASE Input Power LINE-RX
Table 5-11 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
Table 5-12 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P3 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX
P4 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX
P5 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX
P6 Back-Reflected Pump Power RAMAN-TX
5-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord, page 16-72
• DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Note For OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card specifications, see the OPT-EDFA-17 Amplifier Card
Specifications and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware
Specifications document.
Note For OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards”
section on page G-4.
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifiers/preamplifiers with
20-dBm output powers. These cards do not contain mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation
Unit (DCU). The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards provide a noise-figure optimized version of
the EDFA amplifiers to cope with new modulation formats like PM-DQPSK, which do not need
dispersion compensation. To control gain tilt, a VOA is used. The amplifier module also includes the
OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters.
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards share the same hardware platform and firmware
architecture but differ in their operative optical gain range, which is 17 dB and 24 dB respectively.
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are true variable gain amplifiers, offering an optimal
equalization of the transmitted optical channels over a wide gain range. They support 96 channels at
50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm wavelength range). When an
ONS 15454 has an OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card installed, an OSCM card is needed to process
the OSC. You can install the OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Slots
2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
cards as a preamplifier. Slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-EDFA-17 and
OPT-EDFA-24 cards as a booster amplifier. You can install the OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card in
Slots 2 and 3 in an ONS 15454 M2 chassis, and Slots 2 to 7 in an ONS 15454 M6 chassis.
The main functionalities of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are:
5-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
• Amplification of the input signal at COM-RX port towards LINE-TX port through a true-variable
gain EDFA block
• Multiplexing the OSC to the LINE-TX port
• Demultiplexing the OSC from LINE-RX port
• Monitoring of the LINE input or output signal with 1% TAP splitters
The features of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are:
• Embedded Gain Flattening Filter
• Constant pump current mode (test mode)
• Constant output power mode
• Constant gain mode
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes
• Fast transient suppression
• Programmable tilt
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Gain range with gain tilt control of 5 to 17 dB (for OPT-EDFA-17 card) and 12 to 24 dB (for
OPT-EDFA-24 card)
• Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 17 to 20 dB (for OPT-EDFA-17 card) and 24 to 27
dB (for OPT-EDFA-24 card)
• Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI)
• Automatic Alarm Shutdown (ALS)
5.11.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards have eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the input monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
5-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Figure 5-26 shows the OPT-EDFA-17 card faceplate.
Figure 5-26 OPT-EDFA-17 Card Faceplate
The OPT-EDFA-24 card faceplate is similar to that of the OPT-EDFA-17 card.
Figure 5-27 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card features.
FAIL
ACT
SF
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
RX RX RX RX
MON COM OSC LINE
TX TX TX TX
OPT-EDFA
XX
246681
5-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Figure 5-27 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Block Diagram
Figure 5-28 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 optical modules
function.
Figure 5-28 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Optical Modules Function
246683
SCL Bus
TCCi M
Line RX
Optical module
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi P
BAT A&B
Monitor Line RX
Line TX
Monitor Line TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
OSC RX
Processor DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
246682
OSC-TX
MON-RX
P5
P6
P Physical photodiode
LINE-RX COM-TX
PASSIVE
Section
ACTIVE
Section
OSC
1% TAP DROP
OSC-RX
MON-TX
P4
P3 P2 P1
LINE-TX COM-RX
OSC
1% TAP ADD
True Variable Gain
EDFA
5-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
5.11.2 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD6 monitor the power for the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
cards (see Table 5-13).
5.11.3 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
The list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
cards are:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
Table 5-13 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 EDFA Input Power COM-RX
P2 EDFA Output Power LINE-TX
P3 EDFA Output Power LINE-TX
P4 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX
P5 OSC DROP Output Power LINE-RX
P6 COM-TX Output Power LINE-RX
5-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
CH A P T E R
6-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
6
Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
This chapter describes legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks and related procedures.
For card safety and compliance information, see the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for
Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 6.1 Card Overview, page 6-1
• 6.2 Safety Labels, page 6-9
• 6.3 32MUX-O Card, page 6-9
• 6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card, page 6-13
• 6.4 32DMX-O Card, page 6-14
• 6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card, page 6-18
• 6.5 4MD-xx.x Card, page 6-19
• 6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card, page 6-23
Note For a description of the 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C,
40-WSS-CE, and 40-WXC-C cards, see the “Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards”
chapter.
6.1 Card Overview
The card overview section contains card summary, compatibility, interface class, and channel allocation
plan information for legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
6-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
6.1.1 Card Summary
Table 6-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards.
6.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 6-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the legacy cards.
Table 6-1 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
32MUX-O The 32MUX-O has five sets of ports located on the
faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “6.3 32MUX-O Card”
section on page 6-9.
32DMX-O The 32DMX-O has five sets of ports located on the
faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
“6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on
page 6-14
4MD-xx.x The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on
the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
See the “6.5 4MD-xx.x Card”
section on page 6-19.
Table 6-2 Software Compatibility for Legacy Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Release
Cards
32MUX-O 32DMX-O 4MD-xx.x
R4.5 Yes Yes Yes
R4.6 Yes Yes Yes
R4.7 Yes Yes Yes
R5.0 Yes Yes Yes
R6.0 Yes Yes Yes
R7.0 Yes Yes Yes
R7.2 Yes Yes Yes
R8.0 Yes Yes Yes
R8.5 Yes Yes Yes
R9.0 Yes Yes Yes
R9.1 Yes Yes Yes
R9.2 Yes Yes Yes
R9.2.1 Yes Yes Yes
R9.3 Yes Yes Yes
R9.4 Yes Yes Yes
6-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
6.1.3 Interface Classes
The 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards have different input and output optical channel signals
depending on the interface card where the input signal originates. The input interface cards have been
grouped in classes listed in Table 6-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performance and output
power of each interface class.
Table 6-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to
multiplexer and demultiplexer cards.
Table 6-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes
Input Power Class Card
A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC)
enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C,
and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
and 40ME-MXP-C)
B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC, 10-Gbps
muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C), 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled
C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L)
without FEC
D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, with FEC enabled
E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps
multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, with FEC
disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled
F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected,
in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode
G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card
H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz)
I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L, 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards with
E-FEC enabled
6-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-5 lists the optical performance parameters that provide signal input for the 40-Gbps multiplexer
and demultiplexer cards.
Table 6-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class B Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Optimum
Maximum BER2
2. BER = bit error rate
10–15 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM
cards.
40-Gbps multirate
transponder/40-Gbps
EC transponder
(40E-TXP-C and
40ME-TXP-C)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
OC-192 LR ITU — — —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm
Table 6-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
6-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-6 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input
to multiplexer and demultiplexer cards.
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10G)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — —
OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
—
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10E)
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000
ps/nm
+/–800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 6-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters (continued)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Table 6-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No No No No
Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB
Power sensitivity –31
dBm
–25
dBm
–30
dBm
–23
dBm
–24 dBm –27
dBm
–33
dBm
–28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm
6-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
6.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan
ONS 15454 DWDM multiplexer and demultiplexer cards are designed for use with specific channels in
the C band and L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example,
1 to 32 or 1 to 40) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel
assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system.
Table 6-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels.
Note In some cases, a card uses only one of the bands (C band or L band) and some or all of the channels listed
in a band. Also, some cards use channels on the 100-GHz ITU grid while others use channels on the
50-GHz ITU grid. See the specific card description or the “Hardware Specifications” document for more
details.
Transmitted Power Range1
TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to
1.0 dBm
–2.0 to 0 dBm
TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to
–2.5 dBm
MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm —
MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm —
2/4 port GbE
Transponder (GBIC
WDM 100GHz)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300
ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300 ps/nm
–1000 to +3600
ps/nm
–1000 to
+3200
ps/nm
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 6-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
Table 6-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
6-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-8 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the L-band channels.
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 6-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
6-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
6-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Safety Labels
6.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
6.3 32MUX-O Card
Note For 32MUX-O card specifications, see the “32MUX-O Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 32-Channel Multiplexer (32MUX-O) card multiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in
the channel plan. The 32MUX-O card takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
6.3.1 32MUX-O Card Functions
The 32MUX-O functions include:
• Arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) device that enables full multiplexing functions for the channels.
• Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation prior to
multiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for
safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available.
• Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation.
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
An additional optical monitoring port with 1:99 splitting ratio is available.
6.3.2 32MUX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 shows the 32MUX-O faceplate.
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 6-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
6-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
Figure 6-1 32MUX-O Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
Figure 6-2 shows a block diagram of the 32MUX-O card.
54.1 - 60.6 46.1 - 52.5 38.1 - 44.5 30.3 - 36.6
32MUX-0
COM
TX
RX
MON
FAIL
ACT
SF
96468
6-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
Figure 6-2 32MUX-O Block Diagram
The 32MUX-O card has four receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on (MPO) cables on its front
panel for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 32MUX-O
card also has two LC-PC-II optical connectors, one for the main output and the other for the monitor port.
Figure 6-3 shows the 32MUX-O optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 6-3 32MUX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
6.3.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32MUX-O Cards
The 32MUX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM TX is the line output. COM
MON is the optical monitoring port. The xx.x to yy.y RX ports represent the four groups of eight
channels ranging from wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y, according to the channel plan.
Optical
module
30.3 to 36.6
8 CHS RX
38.1 to 44.5
8 CHS RX
46.1 to 52.5
8 CHS RX
54.1 to 60.6
8 CHS RX
134413
Processor
MON
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98301
1
32
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
MON
COM TX
Inputs
P32
P31
P30
P29
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
6-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
6.3.3 Channel Plan
The 32MUX-O is typically used in hub nodes and provides the multiplexing of 32 channels, spaced at
100 GHz, into one fiber before their amplification and transmission along the line. The channel plan is
shown in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan
Channel Number1 Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
1 30.3 195.9 1530.33
2 31.2 195.8 1531.12
3 31.9 195.7 1531.90
4 32.6 195.6 1532.68
5 34.2 195.4 1534.25
6 35.0 195.3 1535.04
7 35.8 195.2 1535.82
8 36.6 195.1 1536.61
9 38.1 194.9 1538.19
10 38.9 194.8 1538.98
11 39.7 194.7 1539.77
12 40.5 194.6 1540.56
13 42.1 194.4 1542.14
14 42.9 194.3 1542.94
15 43.7 194.2 1543.73
16 44.5 194.1 1544.53
17 46.1 193.9 1546.12
18 46.9 193.8 1546.92
19 47.7 193.7 1547.72
20 48.5 193.6 1548.51
21 50.1 193.4 1550.12
22 50.9 193.3 1550.92
23 51.7 193.2 1551.72
24 52.5 193.1 1552.52
25 54.1 192.9 1554.13
26 54.9 192.8 1554.94
27 55.7 192.7 1555.75
28 56.5 192.6 1556.55
29 58.1 192.4 1558.17
30 58.9 192.3 1558.98
6-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
6.3.4 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P32 monitor the power for the 32MUX-O card. The returned power
level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-10.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32MUX-O card:
• “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64
• “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47
• “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78
• “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on
page 14-82
• “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85
• “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90
• “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72
• “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113
• “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114
• “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections”
• “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test” task on page 21-3
• “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71
• “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance”
31 59.7 192.2 1559.79
32 60.6 192.1 1560.61
1. The Channel Number column is only for reference purposes. The channel ID is consistent with
the ONS 15454 and is used in card identification.
Table 6-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan
Channel Number1 Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
Table 6-10 32MUX-O Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 ADD COM TX
6-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
• “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards”
• “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54
• “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55
• “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57
• “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59
• “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62
• “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13
• “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14
• “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card”
• “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27
6.4 32DMX-O Card
Note For 32DMX-O card specifications, see the “32DMX-O Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX-O) card demultiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified
in the channel plan. The 32DMX-O takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
6.4.1 32DMX-O Card Functions
The 32DMX-O functions include:
• AWG that enables channel demultiplexing functions.
• Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation after
demultiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation
for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available.
• The 32DXM-O has four physical receive connectors that accept MPO cables on its front panel for
the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables.
6-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
Note In contrast, the single-slot 32DMX card does not have VOAs on each drop port for optical power
regulation. The 32DMX optical demultiplexer module is used in conjunction with the 32WSS
card in ONS 15454 Multiservice Transport Platform (MSTP) nodes.
• Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation.
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
6.4.2 32DMX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 6-4 shows the 32DMX-O card faceplate.
6-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
Figure 6-4 32DMX-O Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
Figure 6-5 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-O card.
32DMX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 52.5 38.1 - 44.5 30.3 - 36.6
TX
54.1 - 60.6
RX
COM
MON
145935
6-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
Figure 6-5 32DMX-O Block Diagram
Figure 6-6 shows the 32DMX-O optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 6-6 32DMX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
6.4.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32DMX-O Cards
The 32DMX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. MON is the output monitor port. COM
RX is the line input. The xx.x to yy.y TX ports represent the four groups of eight channels ranging from
wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y according to the channel plan.
6.4.3 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-O card. The returned power
level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-11.
Optical
module
30.3 to 36.6
8 CHS TX
38.1 to 44.5
8 CHS TX
46.1 to 52.5
8 CHS TX
54.1 to 60.6
8 CHS TX
96480
Processor
MON
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98302
1
32
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX DROP TX
P32
P31
P30
P29
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
P33
6-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX-O card:
• “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64
• “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47
• “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78
• “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on
page 14-82
• “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85
• “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90
• “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72
• “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113
• “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114
• “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections”
• “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71
• “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test” task on page 21-3
• “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance”
• “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards”
• “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54
• “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55
• “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57
Table 6-11 32DMX-O Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 DROP DROP TX
P33 INPUT COM COM RX
6-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
• “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59
• “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62
• “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13
• “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14
• “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card”
• “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27
6.5 4MD-xx.x Card
Note For 4MD-xx.x card specifications, see the section “4MD-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The 4-Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (4MD-xx.x) card multiplexes and demultiplexes four
100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 4MD-xx.x card is designed to be used with
band OADMs (both AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x).
The card is bidirectional. The demultiplexer and multiplexer functions are implemented in two different
sections of the same card. In this way, the same card can manage signals flowing in opposite directions.
There are eight versions of this card that correspond with the eight sub-bands specified in Table 6-12 on
page 6-22. The 4MD-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
6.5.1 4MD-xx.x Card Functions
The 4MD-xx.x has the following functions implemented inside a plug-in optical module:
• Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel multiplex/demultiplex function.
• Software-controlled VOAs at every port of the multiplex section regulate the optical power of each
multiplexed channel.
• Software-monitored photodiodes at the input and output multiplexer and demultiplexer ports for
power control and safety purposes.
• Software-monitored virtual photodiodes at the common DWDM output and input ports. A virtual
photodiode is a firmware calculation of the optical power at that port. This calculation is based on
the single channel photodiode reading and insertion losses of the appropriated paths.
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
6.5.2 4MD-xx.x Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 6-7 shows the 4MD-xx.x faceplate.
6-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
Figure 6-7 4MD-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
Figure 6-8 shows a block diagram of the 4MD-xx.x card.
4MD
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
COM
TX
96470
6-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
Figure 6-8 4MD-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 6-9 shows the 4MD-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 6-9 4MD-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
The optical module shown in Figure 6-9 is optically passive and consists of a cascade of interferential
filters that perform the channel multiplexing and demultiplexing functions.
VOAs are present in every input path of the multiplex section in order to regulate the optical power of
each multiplexed channel. Some optical input and output ports are monitored by means of photodiodes
implemented both for power control and for safety purposes. An internal control manages VOA settings
and functionality as well as photodiode detection and alarm thresholds. The power at the main output
Optical
Module
Channel
Inputs
96482
Processor
COM TX
COM RX
Channel
Outputs
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
DC/DC
converter
Power supply
input filters
BAT A&B
98303
Virtual photodiode
COM TX COM RX
Demux
RX channels TX channels
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
Control
Control
interface
V1
V
Mux
P1 P2 P3 P3
P5 P6 P7 P8
P
V2
6-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
and input ports is monitored through the use of virtual photodiodes. A virtual photodiode is implemented
in the firmware of the plug-in module. This firmware calculates the power on a port, summing the
measured values from all single channel ports (and applying the proper path insertion loss) and then
providing the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card with the obtained value.
6.5.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 4MD-xx.x Cards
The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM RX is the line input. COM TX
is the line output. The 15xx.x TX ports represent demultiplexed channel outputs 1 to 4. The 15xx.x RX
ports represent multiplexed channel inputs 1 to 4.
6.5.3 Wavelength Pairs
Table 6-12 shows the band IDs and the add/drop channel IDs for the 4MD-xx.x card.
6.5.4 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P8 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
4MD-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-13.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Table 6-12 4MD-xx.x Channel Sets
Band ID Add/Drop Channel IDs
Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2, 31.9, 32.6
Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0, 35.8, 36.6
Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9, 39.7, 40.5
Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9, 43.7, 44.5
Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9, 47.7, 48.5
Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9, 51.7, 52.5
Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9, 55.7, 56.5
Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9, 59.7, 60.6
Table 6-13 4MD-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P4 ADD COM TX
P5–P8 DROP DROP TX
V1 OUT COM COM TX
V2 IN COM COM RX
6-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 4MD-xx.x card:
• “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64
• “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47
• “NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards”
task on page 21-94
• “DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 21-99
• “DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 21-100
• “DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on
page 21-104
• “NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards” task on page 21-106
• “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on
page 21-110
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-40
• “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41
• “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78
• “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on
page 14-82
• “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85
• “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90
• “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72
• “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113
• “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114
• “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test” task on page 21-3
• “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71
• “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections”
• “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance”
• “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards”
• “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54
6-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
• “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55
• “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57
• “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59
• “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62
• “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13
• “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14
• “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card”
• “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27
CH A P T E R
7-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
7
Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
This chapter explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco ONS 15454
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance
information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS
Platforms document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
The T-DCU unit compensates for chromatic dispersion (CD) of the transmission fiber. The T-DCU
provides two line cards with varied set of tunable wavelengths to compensate for CD.
This chapter includes:
• 7.1 Card Overview, page 7-1
• 7.2 Safety Labels, page 7-2
• 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 7-2
• 7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance, page 7-5
• 7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 7-6
7.1 Card Overview
The T-DCU card provides a selectable set of discrete negative chromatic dispersion values to compensate
for chromatic dispersion of the transmission line. The card operates over the entire C-band (in the range
of 1529.0 nm to 1562.5 nm) and monitors the optical power at the input and the output ports. The two
types of T-DCU line cards are:
• TDC-CC (Coarse T-DCU)
• TDC-FC (Fine T-DCU)
Note Each T-DCU card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf
assembly. Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the “Card Slot
Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
7-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
Safety Labels
7.1.1 Card Summary
Table 7-1 lists and summarizes the information about the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards.
7.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
The TDC-CC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -1650 ps/nm with a granularity of
110 ps/nm in the C-band spectrum.
The TDC-FC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -675 ps/nm with a granularity of 45 ps/nm
in the C-band spectrum.
You can configure the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards for the CD value listed in Table 7-2.
Table 7-1 T-DCU Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
TDC-CC The TDC-CC has one set of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1
to 6 and slots 12 to 17.
See the 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC
Cards section.
TDC-FC The TDC-FC has one set of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1
to 6 and slots 12 to 17.
Table 7-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value
Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm]
0 0 1 02
1 -110 -45
2 -220 -90
3 -330 -135
4 -440 -180
5 -550 -225
6 -660 -270
7 -770 -315
8 -880 -360
9 -990 -405
10 -1100 -450
11 -1210 -495
12 -1320 -540
7-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
7.3.1 Key Features
The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards provide the following features:
• Single slot card with three LEDs on the front panel.
• Two LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel.
• Operates in slots from slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
• Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) of the optical spectrum.
• Allows upto 16 provisionable CD values for chromatic dispersion compensation.
• Connects to OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE amplifiers and
40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 cards.
• Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling for selectable thresholds.
• Allows monitoring and provisioning using CTC, SNMP, or TL1.
7.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows the TDC-CC and TDC-FC faceplate diagram. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards can be
installed or pulled out of operation from any user interface slot, without impacting other service cards
operating within that shelf.
13 -1430 -585
14 -1540 -630
15 -1650 -675
1. The default value of the TDC-CC CD value for Coarse Unit is 0.
2. The default value of the TDC-FC value for Fine Unit is 0.
Table 7-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value
Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm]
7-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
Figure 7-1 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplates
Note The coarse T-DCU is identified with the card label as TDC-CC and the fine T-DCU with TDC-FC in the
faceplate of the T-DCU card.
7.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports
The T-DCU unit contains the DC-RX (input) and DC-TX (output) ports. The optical signal enters the
DC-RX port, compensates the chromatic dispersion and then exits from the DC-TX port.
TDC-CC
FAIL
ACT
SF
DC
RX
TX
TDC-FC
FAIL
ACT
SF
DC
RX
TX
Any of the 12
general purpose slots
276444
7-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
Monitoring Optical Performance
7.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram
The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards embed an optical module with four spools (D1, D2, D3, and D4) of
dispersion compensating fiber that connects through the 2x2 bypass switches (Figure 7-2). Each bypass
switch allows the corresponding dispersion compensation fiber spools to connect to the optical path from
the DC-RX (input port) to the DC-TX (output port). The switch configuration selects the requested CD
value and combines the four spools based on the 16 chromatic dispersion compensation values fetched.
The photo diodes PD1 and PD2 are used to monitor the input and output ports respectively.
Figure 7-2 Block Diagram of TDC-CC and TDC-FC
7.3.5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Functions
The functions of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards are:
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance
The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards monitor the optical input power and optical output power of the fiber.
It monitors the insertion loss from the input (DC-RX) to the output (DC-TX) port, with the help of the
two photodiodes PD1 and PD2. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards report the minimum, average, and
maximum power statistics of each of the monitored ports or channels in the specific card. To view the
optical power statistics of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards, refer to the Monitor Performance document.
The performance data is recorded at 15 minutes and 24 hours intervals.
Note You can view the performance monitoring (PM) data of the card using CTC, SNMP, and TL1 interfaces.
Note The PM data is stored on a wrap-around basis at 32 x 15 min. and 2 x 24 hour intervals.
276445
2x2
Switch
D1
2x2
Switch
D2
2x2
Switch
D3
2x2
Switch
D4
S1
S2
S3
S4
DC-RX
DC-TX
PD1 PD2
7-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
Monitoring Optical Performance
7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TDC-CC and
TDC-FC cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• DLP-G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards
• NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-76
• NTP-G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
• NTP-G119 Power Down the Node, page 24-27
CH A P T E R
8-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
8
Provision Protection Switching Module
This chapter describes the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer
to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 8.1 PSM Card Overview
• 8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card, page 8-5
8.1 PSM Card Overview
The PSM card performs splitter protection functions. In the transmit (TX) section of the PSM card (see
Figure 8-1), the signal received on the common receive port is duplicated by a hardware splitter to both
the working and protect transmit ports. In the receive (RX) section of the PSM card (Figure 8-1), a
switch is provided to select one of the two input signals (on working and protect receive ports) to be
transmitted through the common transmit port.
The PSM card supports multiple protection configurations:
• Channel protection—The PSM COM ports are connected to the TXP/MXP trunk ports.
• Line (or path) protection—The PSM working (W) and protect (P) ports are connected directly to the
external line.
• Multiplex section protection—The PSM is equipped between the MUX/DMX stage and the
amplification stage.
• Standalone—The PSM can be equipped in any slot and supports all node configurations.
The PSM card is a single-slot card that can be installed in any node from Slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The
PSM card includes six LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel. In channel protection
configuration, the PSM card can be installed in a different shelf from its peer TXP/MXP card.
8-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Note It is strongly recommended that you use the default layouts designed by Cisco Transport Planner,
which place the PSM card and its peer TXP/MXP card as close as possible to simplify cable
management.
For more information on the node configurations supported for the PSM card, see the 12.3 Supported
Node Configurations for PSM Card, page 12-46.
For more information on the network topologies supported for the PSM card, see the 13.6 Network
Topologies for the PSM Card, page 13-19.
8.1.1 Key Features
The PSM card provides the following features:
• Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) and L-band (wavelengths from
1570.5 nm to 1604 nm) of the optical spectrum.
• Implements bidirectional non-revertive protection scheme. For more details on bidirectional
switching, see the “8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching” section on page 8-4.
• Supports automatic creation of splitter protection group when the PSM card is provisioned.
• Supports switching priorities based on ITU-T G.873.1.
• Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds.
• Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. ALS
is applicable only in line protection configuration. For information about using the card to
implement ALS in a network, see the 13.11 Network Optical Safety, page 13-30.
8.1.2 PSM Block Diagram
Figure 8-1 shows a simplified block diagram of the PSM card.
8-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Figure 8-1 PSM Block Diagram
8.1.3 PSM Faceplate Ports
The PSM card has six optical ports located on the faceplate:
• COM-RX (receive) is the input signal port.
• COM-TX (transmit) is the output signal port.
• W-RX is the working input signal port (receive section).
• W-TX is the working output signal port (transmit section).
• P-RX is the protect input signal port (receive section).
• P-TX is the protect output signal port (transmit section).
All ports are equipped with photodiodes to monitor optical power and other related thresholds. The
COM-RX port is equipped with a virtual photodiode (firmware calculations of port optical power) to
monitor optical power. The W-RX, P-RX, W-TX, and P-TX ports have optical power regulation, which
are provided by variable optical attenuators (VOA). All VOAs equipped within the PSM card work in
control attenuation mode.
Figure 8-2 shows the PSM card faceplate.
270910
TX Section
RX Section
COM-RX
W-TX
P-TX
W-RX
P-RX
COM-TX
PD5
VOA3
1x2
Switch
50/50
Splitter
PD2
PD4
PD3
VOA1 PD1
VOA2
Virtual
PD
8-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Figure 8-2 PSM Card Faceplate
8.1.4 PSM Card-Level Indicators
Table G-1 describes the card-level indicators on the card.
8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching
A VOA is equipped after the hardware splitter within the PSM card. The VOA implements bidirectional
switching when there is a single fiber cut in a protection configuration involving two peer PSM cards.
Figure 8-3 shows a sample configuration that explains the bidirectional switching capability of the PSM
card.
270911
PSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
COM P
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
W 1345567
Any of the 12
general purpose slots
8-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Figure 8-3 PSM Bidirectional Switching
In this example, there is a fiber cut in the working path from Station A to Station B as shown in
Figure 8-3. As a result of the fiber cut, an LOS alarm is raised on the W-RX port of Station B and it
immediately switches traffic on to its P-RX port. Station B simultaneously also stops transmission (for
approximately 25 milliseconds) on its W-TX port, which raises an LOS alarm on the W-RX port of
Station A. This causes Station A to also switch traffic to its P-RX port. In this way, PSM implements
bidirectional switching without any data exchange between the two stations.
Since the two stations do not communicate using signaling protocols (overhead bytes), a Manual or
Force protection switch on the PSM card is implemented by creating a traffic hit. For example, consider
that you perform a Manual or Force protection switch on Station A. The TX VOA on the active path is
set to automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) state for 25 milliseconds. This causes Station B to switch traffic
to the other path because it cannot differentiate between a maintenance operation and a real fail. After
25 milliseconds, the VOA in Station A is automatically reset. However, Station B will not revert back by
itself because of nonrevertive switching protection scheme used in the PSM card.
To effectively implement switching, the Lockout and Force commands must be performed on both the
stations. If these commands are not performed on both the stations, the far-end and near-end PSMs can
be misaligned. In case of misalignment, when a path recovers, traffic might not recover automatically.
You might have to perform a Force protection switch to recover traffic.
Note The order in which you repair the paths is important in the event of a double failure (both the working
and protect paths are down due to a fiber cut) on the PSM card in line protection configuration when the
active path is the working path. If you repair the working path first, traffic is automatically restored.
However, if you repair the protect path first, traffic is not automatically restored. You must perform a
Force protection switch to restore traffic on the protect path.
8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the PSM card:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-47
• NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 14-114
270915
TX Section
RX Section
COM-RX
W-TX
P-TX
W-RX
P-RX
W-RX
P-RX
W-TX
P-TX
COM-TX
PD5
RX Section
TX Section
COM-TX
COM-RX
PD3
PD4
PD2
PD1
A B
PD3
PD4
PD2
PD1
PD5
8-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
• DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-44
• DLP-G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card
• DLP-G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group
• DLP-G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group
CH A P T E R
9-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
9
Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
This chapter describes optical add/drop cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory
Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 9.1 Card Overview, page 9-1
• 9.2 Safety Labels, page 9-9
• 9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card, page 9-9
• 9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card
• 9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card, page 9-12
• 9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card
• 9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card, page 9-16
• 9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card
• 9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card, page 9-20
• 9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card
• 9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card, page 9-23
• 9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card
9.1 Card Overview
The card overview section contains card overview, software compatibility, interface class, and channel
allocation information for optical add/drop cards.
9-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Optical add/drop cards are divided into two groups: band optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) cards
and channel OADM cards. Band OADM cards add and drop one or four bands of adjacent channels. The
cards in this chapter, including the 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) and the 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x)
are utilized only in the C band. Channel OADM cards add and drop one, two, or four adjacent channels;
they include the 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x), the 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x), and the
1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.x).
Note For information about L band add and drop capability, see Chapter 10, “Provision Reconfigurable
Optical Add/Drop Cards.”
9.1.1 Card Summary
Table 9-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the optical add/drop cards.
Table 9-1 Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
AD-1C-xx.x The AD-1C-xx.x card has three sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-9.
AD-2C-xx.x The AD-2C-xx.x card has four sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-12.
AD-4C-xx.x The AD-4C-xx.x card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-16.
AD-1B-xx.x The AD-1B-xx.x card has three sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-20.
AD-4B-xx.x The AD-4B-xx.x card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-23.
9-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
9.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 9-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each optical add/drop card.
Table 9-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card
Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
AD-1C
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AD-2C
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AD-4C
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AD-1B
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
AD-4B
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
9-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
9.1.3 Interface Classes
The AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards have different input
and output optical channel signals depending on the interface card where the input signal originates
from. The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 9-3. The subsequent tables
list the optical performances and output power of each interface class.
Table 9-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the
optical add/drop cards.
Table 9-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes
Input Power Class Card
A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC)
enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C,
and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
and 40ME-MXP-C)
B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC and the
10-Gbps muxponder card (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled
C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L)
without FEC
D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, with FEC enabled
E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps
multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected,
with FEC disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled
F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode
G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card
H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz)
I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L, 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards with
E-FEC enabled
9-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 9-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the
optical add/drop cards.
Table 9-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class B Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Optimum
Maximum BER2
2. BER = bit error rate
10–15 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM
cards.
40-Gbps multirate
transponder/40-Gbps
FEC transponder
(40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
OC-192 LR ITU — — —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm
Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
9-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards have the interface performance
parameters listed in Table 9-6.
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10G)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — —
OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
—
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10E)
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000
ps/nm
+/–800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Table 9-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if
appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No No No No
Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB
Power sensitivity –31
dBm
–25
dBm
–30
dBm
–23
dBm
–24 dBm –27
dBm
–33
dBm
–28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm
9-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
9.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan
ONS 15454 DWDM channel OADM and band OADM cards are designed for use with specific channels
in the C band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32) or
delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible
with the ONS 15454 system.
Table 9-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels.
Note In some cases, a card uses only some or all of the channels listed in a band. Also, some cards use channels
on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid while others use channels on the 50-GHz ITU-T grid. See specific card
descriptions in Appendix B, “Hardware Specifications,” for more details.
Transmitted Power Range1
TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to
1.0 dBm
–2.0 to 0 dBm — —
TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to
–2.5 dBm
MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm —
MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm —
2/4 port GbE
Transponder (GBIC
WDM 100GHz)
— — — — +2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300
ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300 ps/nm
–1000 to +3600
ps/nm
–1000 to
+3200
ps/nm
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 9-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if
appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
Table 9-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
9-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 9-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
9-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Safety Labels
9.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card
Note For AD-1C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-1C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.fx) card passively adds or drops one of the 32 channels utilized
within the 100-GHz-spacing of the DWDM card system. Thirty-two versions of this card—each
designed only for use with one wavelength—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. Each
wavelength version of the card has a different part number. The AD-1C-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1
to 6 and 12 to 17.
The AD-1C-xx.x has the following internal features:
• Two cascaded passive optical interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
• One software-controlled variable optical attenuator (VOA) regulates the optical power of the
inserted channel.
• Software-controlled VOA regulates the insertion loss of the express optical path.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds, are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculations of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and
input ports are monitored within the software.
9.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-1 shows the AD-1C-xx.x faceplate.
9-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-1 AD-1C-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-2 shows a block diagram of the AD-1C-xx.x card.
AD-1C
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96473
9-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-2 AD-1C-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-3 shows the AD-1C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-3 AD-1C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.3.2 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-1C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-8.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124074
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Add Rx Drop Tx
98304
Control
Control
interface
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
TX
Channel 15xx.xx
Physical photodiode RX
Variable optical attenuator
V1
P
COM
TX
P1
P3
P5 P4
V2 P2
V
Table 9-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 ADD DROP RX
P2 DROP DROP TX
9-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-1C-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card
Note For AD-2C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-2C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in theHardware
Specifications document.
The 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops two adjacent 100-GHz channels
within the same band. Sixteen versions of this card—each designed for use with one pair of
wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in
two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. Each version of the
card has a different part number.
The AD-2C-xx.x has the following features:
• Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
P3 IN EXP EXP RX
P4 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
Table 9-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
9-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
• Two software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power
of inserted channels.
• Software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express channels.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and
input ports are monitored within the software.
9.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-4 shows the AD-2C-xx.x faceplate.
Figure 9-4 AD-2C-xx.x Faceplate
AD-2C
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96474
9-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-5 shows a block diagram of the AD-2C-xx.x card.
Figure 9-5 AD-2C-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-6 shows the AD-2C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-6 AD-2C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.4.2 Wavelength Pairs
The AD-2C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the wavelength pairs listed in Table 9-9. In this table, channel
IDs are given rather than wavelengths. To compare channel IDs with the actual wavelengths they
represent, see wavelengths in Table 9-7 on page 9-7.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
98305
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
input filters
BAT A&B
Add RX Drop TX Add RX Drop TX
CH 1 CH 2
98306
Control
Control
interface
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
TX
Second
channel
TX RX RX
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
V
V1
V2
COM
TX
First
channel
P1
P
P3 P4
P2
P5
P7 P6
9-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
9.4.3 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-2C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-10.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
Table 9-9 AD-2C-xx.x Channel Pairs
Band ID Add/Drop Channel ID
Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2
31.9, 32.6
Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0
35.8, 36.6
Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9
39.7, 40.5
Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9
43.7, 44.5
Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9
47.7, 48.5
Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9
51.7, 52.5
Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9
55.7, 56.5
Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9
59.7, 60.6
Table 9-10 AD-2C-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P2 ADD COM TX
P3–P4 DROP DROP TX
P5 IN EXP EXP RX
P6 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
9-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-2C-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card
Note For AD-4C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-4C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops all four 100-GHz-spaced channels
within the same band. Eight versions of this card—each designed for use with one band of
wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in
two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. There are eight versions
of this card with eight part numbers.
The AD-4C-xx.x has the following features:
• Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
• Four software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power
of inserted channels.
• Two software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express and drop path, respectively.
• Internal control of the VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds.
• Software-monitored virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common
DWDM output and input ports.
9.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-7 shows the AD-4C-xx.x faceplate.
9-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-7 AD-4C-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-8 shows a block diagram of the AD-4C-xx.x card.
AD-4C
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96475
9-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-8 AD-4C-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-9 shows the AD-4C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-9 AD-4C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.5.2 Wavelength Sets
The AD-4C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the sets of four 100-GHz-spaced wavelengths shown
Table 9-11 on page 9-19.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124075
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 1
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 2
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 3
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 4
98299
Control
Control
interface
4Ch OADM module
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
COM
TX EXP RX
EXP TX
TX Channels RX Channels
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
V
V1
V2
P1
P9
P11 P10
P12
P2 P3 P4
P5 P6 P7 P8
P
9-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
9.5.3 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-4C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-12.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-4C-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
Table 9-11 AD-4C-xx.x Channel Sets
Band ID Add/Drop Wavelengths
Band 30.3 (A) 1530.3, 1531.2, 1531.9, 1532.6
Band 34.2 (B) 1534.2, 1535.0, 1535.8, 1536.6
Band 38.1 (C) 1538.1, 1538.9, 1539.7, 1540.5
Band 42.1 (D) 1542.1, 1542.9, 1543.7, 1544.5
Band 46.1 (E) 1546.1, 1546.9, 1547.7, 1548.5
Band 50.1 (F) 1550.1, 1550.9, 1551.7, 1552.5
Band 54.1 (G) 1554.1, 1554.9, 1555.7, 1556.5
Band 58.1 (H) 1558.1, 1558.9, 1559.7, 1560.6
Table 9-12 AD-4C-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P4 ADD COM TX
P5–P8 DROP DROP TX
P9 IN EXP EXP RX
P10 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
9-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1B-xx.x Card
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For AD-1B-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-1B-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops a single band of four adjacent
100-GHz-spaced channels. Eight versions of this card with eight different part numbers—each version
designed for use with one band of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card
bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both
directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or
west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other.
The AD-1B xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to17 and has the following features:
• Passive cascaded interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
• Two software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the express and drop OADM
paths (drop section).
• Output power of the dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of the VOA drop.
• The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output are
monitored within the software.
9.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-10 shows the AD-1B-xx.x faceplate.
9-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1B-xx.x Card
Figure 9-10 AD-1B-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-11 shows a block diagram of the AD-1B-xx.x card.
AD-1B
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96471
9-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1B-xx.x Card
Figure 9-11 AD-1B-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-12 shows the AD-1B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-12 AD-1B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.6.2 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-1B-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-13.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124073
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Band xx.x
Rx
Band xx.x
Tx
98307
Control
Control
interface
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
TX
Band xx.x
Physical photodiode RX
Physical photodiode
V
V2
V1
COM
TX P1 P3
P5 P4
P2
P
Table 9-13 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 ADD BAND RX
P2 DROP BAND TX
9-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-1B-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops four bands of four adjacent
100-GHz-spaced channels. Two versions of this card with different part numbers—each version
designed for use with one set of bands—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card
bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both
directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or
west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other.
The AD1B-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and has the following features:
• Five software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the OADM paths.
• Output power of each dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of each VOA drop.
P3 IN EXP EXP RX
P4 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
Table 9-13 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
9-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
• The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output port
are monitored within the software.
9.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-13 shows the AD-4B-xx.x faceplate.
Figure 9-13 AD-4B-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-14 shows a block diagram of the AD-4B-xx.x card.
AD-4B
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96472
9-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
Figure 9-14 AD-4B-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-15 shows the AD-4B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-15 AD-4B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.7.2 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P11 and virtual photodiode V1 monitor the power for the AD-4B-xx.x
card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-14.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124075
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 1
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 2
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 3
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 4
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
TX
B30.3 or B46.1
RX
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
V
V1
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
COM
TX
TX
B34.2 or B50.1
RX TX
B38.1 or B54.1
RX TX RX
B42.1 or B58.1
98308
P1
P
P2 P3 P4 P9
P11 P12 P10
P5 P6 P7 P8
9-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-4B-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
Table 9-14 AD-4B-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P4 ADD COM TX
P5–P8 DROP DROP TX
P9 IN EXP EXP RX
P10 OUT EXP EXP TX
P11 IN COM COM RX
V1 OUT COM COM TX
CH A P T E R
10-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
10
Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 cards deployed in reconfigurable optical add/drop
(ROADM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance
and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 10.1 Card Overview, page 10-2
• 10.2 Safety Labels, page 10-15
• 10.3 32WSS Card, page 10-16
• 10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card, page 10-22
• 10.4 32WSS-L Card, page 10-22
• 10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card, page 10-29
• 10.5 32DMX Card, page 10-29
• 10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card, page 10-33
• 10.6 32DMX-L Card, page 10-34
• 10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card, page 10-38
• 10.7 40-DMX-C Card, page 10-39
• 10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card, page 10-43
• 10.8 40-DMX-CE Card, page 10-44
• 10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card, page 10-48
• 10.9 40-MUX-C Card, page 10-49
• 10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card, page 10-53
• 10.10 40-WSS-C Card, page 10-54
10-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
• 10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card, page 10-60
• 10.11 40-WSS-CE Card, page 10-60
• 10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card, page 10-67
• 10.12 40-WXC-C Card, page 10-67
• 10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card, page 10-73
• 10.13 80-WXC-C Card, page 10-73
• 10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card, page 10-80
• 10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards, page 10-80
• 10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card, page 10-90
• 10.15 MMU Card, page 10-90
• 10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card, page 10-93
Note This chapter contains information about cards that perform mesh topology functions. Multiplexer and
demultiplexer cards that do not perform these functions are described in Chapter 6, “Provision
Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards.”
10.1 Card Overview
The ROADM cards include six add drop cards utilized in the C-band (32WSS, 32DMX, 32DMX-C,
40-MUX-C, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, and MMU), two add drop cards utilized for the L-band (32WSS-L,
and 32DMX-L), and two single module ROADM (SMR) cards utilized in the C-band (40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C).
This section provides card summary, compatibility, channel allocation, and safety information.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots that have the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the
“Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
10.1.1 Card Summary
Table 10-1 lists and summarizes information about each ROADM card.
Table 10-1 ROADM Card Summary
Card Port Description For Additional Information
32WSS The 32WSS card has seven sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.3 32WSS Card”
section on page 10-16
32WSS-L The 32WSS-L card has seven sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.4 32WSS-L Card”
section on page 10-22
10-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
32DMX The 32DMX has five sets of ports located on
the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
See the “10.5 32DMX Card”
section on page 10-29
32DMX-L The 32DMX-L has five sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.6 32DMX-L Card”
section on page 10-34
40-DMX-C The 40-DMX-C has six sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.7 40-DMX-C Card”
section on page 10-39
40-DMX-CE The 40-DMX-CE has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “10.8 40-DMX-CE
Card” section on page 10-44
40-MUX-C The 40-MUX-C has six sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.9 40-MUX-C Card”
section on page 10-49.
40-WSS-C The 40-WSS-C card has eight sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.10 40-WSS-C
Card” section on page 10-54
40-WSS-CE The 40-WSS-CE card has eight sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.11 40-WSS-CE
Card” section on page 10-60
40-WXC-C The 40-WXC-C card has five sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.12 40-WXC-C
Card” section on page 10-67
80-WXC-C The 80-WXC-C card has 14 ports located on
the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16.
See the “10.13 80-WXC-C
Card” section on page 10-73.
40-SMR1-C The 40-SMR1-C card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.14 Single Module
ROADM (SMR-C) Cards”
section on page 10-80
40-SMR2-C The 40-SMR2-C card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.14 Single Module
ROADM (SMR-C) Cards”
section on page 10-80
MMU The MMU card has six sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.15 MMU Card”
section on page 10-90
Table 10-1 ROADM Card Summary (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
10-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
10.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 10-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for the ROADM cards.
Table 10-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
32WSS No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
32WSS-L No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
40-WSS-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-WSS-CE No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
32DMX No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
32DMX-L No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
40-DMX-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-DMX-C
E
No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-MUX-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-WXC-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
10-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
80-WXC-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-SMR1-CNo No No No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-SMR2-CNo No No No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MMU No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
Table 10-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
10-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
10.1.3 Interface Classes
The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 10-3. The subsequent tables list
the optical performance and output power of each interface class.
Table 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes
Input Power Class Card
A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L), 10-Gbps muxponder cards
(MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with
forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C,
and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C)
B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) and muxponder card
(MXP_2.5G_10G) without FEC
C OC-192 LR ITU cards without FEC, 10-Gbps multirate transponder
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) cards with
FEC disabled
D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, with FEC enabled
E OC-48 100-GHz dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) muxponder
card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card
(TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected; FEC disabled; and retime, reshape,
and regenerate (3R) mode enabled
F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected,
in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode
G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card
H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz)
I 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and
TXP_MR_10E_L) and 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) with enhanced FEC (E-FEC)
enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and
40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C)
K OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, 100GHz 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder
(GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G),
OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled
L 40Gbps Duobinary CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card
M 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF
N 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10E_C) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_MR_10DME_C) with E-FEC enabled
O 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC
enabled
10-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 10-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards.
P 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC
enabled
T 40Gbps DPSK CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card
V OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, full tunable 10Gbps Ethernet
Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop
(ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled, full tunable
W 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE),
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC
enabled, full tunable
X 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE),
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC
enabled, full tunable
Y 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with FEC enabled and
maximum likelihood sequence estimator (MLSE) correction
Z 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with E-FEC enabled and MLSE
correction
Table 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes (continued)
Input Power Class Card
Table 10-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R
FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
40-Gbps multirate
transponder/40-Gbps
FEC transponder
(40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
10-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 10-5, Table 10-6, and Table 10-7 lists the optical performance parameters for 10-Gbps cards.
OC-192 LR ITU — —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input
power values for the OADM cards.
Table 10-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class A Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Table 10-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limit
ed
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limite
d
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum
bit rate
10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneratio
n
3R 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) No
Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Average
Maximum
BER2
10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 10–12
OSNR1
sensitivity
23 dB 8.5 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB
6 dB
23 dB3 16 dB3
23 dB4 17 dB4
23 dB5 17 dB5
Power
sensitivity
–24
dBm
–18
dBm
–21
dBm
–20
dBm
–22
dBm
–22
dBm
–26 dBm –18
dBm
–24
dBm3
–17
dBm3
–23
dBm4
–18
dBm4
–23
dBm5
–17
dBm5
Power
overload
–8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm –7 dBm
10-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Transmitted Power Range6
10-Gbps
multirate
transponder/
10-Gbps
FEC
transponder
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm
(for
TXP_MR_10G)
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm
(for
TXP_MR_10E)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm —
OC-192 LR
ITU
— — +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
— –1.0 to +3.0 dBm
10-Gbps
Ethernet
Xponder,
Sonet/SDH
Add/Drop,
OTU2
Xponder
— — — — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensatio
n tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm –400 to +800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. This value is for Xen Pak XFP used with Catalyst card.
4. This value is for XFP used with Catalyst, Xponder, and ADM-10G cards.
5. This value is for X2 XFP used with Catalyst card.
6. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer
(OADM) cards.
Table 10-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V)
Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC) No
Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Average
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–12
OSNR1 sensitivity 19 dB 5 dB 11 dB 11 dB 23 dB 8 dB 23 dB 16 dB
Power sensitivity –27
dBm
–20
dBm
–18 dBm –18
dBm
–27 dBm –18
dBm
–24 dBm –18
dBm
Table 10-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K) (continued)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limit
ed
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limite
d
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
10-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Power overload –8 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbp
s FEC transponder
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm — — —
OC-192 LR ITU — — — 0 to +3.0 dBm
10-Gbps Ethernet
Xponder,
Sonet/SDH
Add/Drop, OTU2
Xponder
— –1.0 to +3.0 dBm –1.0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1600 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM)
cards.
Table 10-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z)
Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 8.5 dB 8.5 dB 19 dB 5 dB 23 dB 8 dB 19 dB 5.5 dB
Power sensitivity –18
dBm
–18
dBm
–27 dBm –20
dBm
–24 dBm –20
dBm
–27 dBm –20
dBm
Power overload –7 dBm –7 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps FEC
transponder
— — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm
OC-192 LR ITU — — — —
Table 10-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V) (continued)
Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
10-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 10-8 and Table 10-9 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards.
10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder,
Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2
Xponder
0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm — —
Dispersion compensation
tolerance
–500 to +1100
ps/nm
–500 to +1300 ps/nm –800 to +1600 ps/nm –2200 to +3700 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards.
Table 10-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z) (continued)
Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Table 10-8 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class D, E, and F)
Parameter Class D Class E Class F
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 2R
FEC Yes No No
Threshold Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 5 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 15 dB
Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –24 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm
Transmitted Power Range1
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G
–1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm
MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G
— +2.0 to +4.0 dBm —
OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — —
2/4 port GbE Transponder
(GBIC WDM 100GHz)
— — —
2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T
SPF
— — —
Dispersion compensation
tolerance
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to +3300 ps/nm
10-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
10.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans
ONS 15454 DWDM ROADM cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band and
L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32 or 1 to 40)
or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be
compatible with the ONS 15454 system.
. The following cards operate in the C-band:
• 32WSS
• 32DMX
• 32DMX-C
• 40-MUX-C
• 40-WXC-C
Table 10-9 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class G, H, and M)
Parameter Class G Class H Class M
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R
FEC No No No
Threshold Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–12 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 14 dB 9 dB
Power sensitivity –27 dBm –23 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –28 dBm –22 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –7 dBm –9 dBm
Transmitted Power Range1
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
TXP_MR_2.5G — — —
TXPP_MR_2.5G —
MXP_MR_2.5G –2.0 to 0 dBm
MXPP_MR_2.5G —
OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — —
2/4 port GbE
Transponder (GBIC
WDM 100GHz)
–1200 to +3300 ps/nm 0 to +3 dBm —
2.5 Gbps DWDM
ITU-T SPF
— 0 to +4 dBm
Dispersion
compensation tolerance
–1000 to +3600 ps/nm –800 to +2400 ps/nm
10-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
• 80-WXC-C
• 40-SMR1-C
• 40-SMR2-C
• MMU
Table 10-10 lists the C-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a
comprehensive C-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities.
.
Table 10-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
10-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
The following add drop cards utilize the L-band DWDM channels:
• 32WSS-L
• 32DMX-L
Table 10-11 lists the L-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a
comprehensive L-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities.
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
1. Channels on the C-band are 4-skip-1, starting at 1530.33 nm.
Table 10-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
Table 10-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
10-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Safety Labels
10.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
1. Channels on the L-band are contiguous, starting at 1577.86 nm. The channels listed in this table begin with 1570.83 nm for
backward compatibility with other ONS products.
Table 10-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
10-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
10.3 32WSS Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32WSS card specifications, see the “32WSS Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch (32WSS) card performs channel add/drop
processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS card can be installed in the following pairs
of slots:
• Slots 1 and 2
• Slots 3 and 4
• Slots 5 and 6
• Slots 12 and 13
• Slots 14 and 15
• Slots 16 and 17
10.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32WSS has six types of ports:
• ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (listed in Table 10-13 on
page 10-21). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether
that channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a variable optical
attenuator (VOA). The 32WSS has four physical receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on
(MPO) cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. Each MPO cable breaks out into eight
separate cables.
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS card in the same
network element (NE).
• EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS card within the NE.
• COM TX port: The COM TX (line input) port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster
amplifier card (for example, OPT-BST) for transmission outside of the NE.
• COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the
OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal containing drop channels to
the 32DMX card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-1 shows the 32WSS card front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports.
10-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
Figure 10-1 32WSS Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-2 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS card and Figure 10-3 shows
how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports.
115291
FAIL
ACT
SF
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
DROP
TX TX
RX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
RX
TX
ADD RX
32WSS
32 Add Ports
Add 1-8
Add 9-16
Add 17-24
Add 25-32
DROP TX
EXP RX
EXP TX
COM RX
COM TX
10-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
Figure 10-2 32WSS Block Diagram
Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX port are processed in two ways: Add
channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in
Figure 10-3, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS card.
EXP RX port
(In from other 32WSS
within the network element)
EXP TX port
(To the other 32WSS
within the network element)
DROP TX port
dropped channels
(To COM RX port
of 32DMX)
COM RX port
(In from preamplifier,
OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-BST or
OSC-CSM)
115293
32 add ports
Add 1 Add 2 Add 32
Optical
splitter
Add channel
or pass-through
Wavelength
selective switch
10-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
Figure 10-3 32WSS Optical Block Diagram
The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows:
• EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing
The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS card within the
NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or
channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs
add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical
channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the
external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the
optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked.
After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal,
which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no
amplification is needed).
• COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing
The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS card’s optical
splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX
port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX where the drop
channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and flow
out of the 32WSS card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other 32WSS
module within the NE.
• COM TX Port Monitoring
1
2
32
Add 32
32
1 pass-through
EXP RX port
(In from 32WSS)
EXP TX port
(To 32WSS)
DROP TX port
(To 32DMX)
2 pass-through
32 pass-through
Optical
splitter
Dropped
channels
2
Photodiode
VOA
COM RX port
(In from OPT-PRE
preamplifier or
OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-BST
or OSC-CSM)
Add 2
2
Add 1
1
115292
Optical
DMUX
(AWG)
Optical
MUX
(AWG)
Optical switch
(Add channel or
pass-through)
P1 P33
P2 P34
P32 P64
P65
P66
P67
P69 P68
10-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
The COM TX value can be measured by either a physical or a virtual photodiode of the
15454-32WSS card. If the vendor ID of the 15454-32WSS card is between 1024 (0x400) and
2047 (0x800) the COM TX value is measured by physical photodiode. If the vendor ID of the
15454-32WSS card is greater than 2048 (0x800), the COM TX value is measured by the virtual
photodiode. For COM TX values measured by virtual photodiode, check the values at the RX port
in the downstream of the COM TX port (COM-RX port on OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card).
10.3.2 32WSS ROADM Functionality
The 32WSS card works in combination with the 32DMX card to implement ROADM functionality. As
a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). ROADM functionality using the
32WSS card requires two 32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (totalling six slots
needed in the ONS 15454 chassis).
For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a
typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or
west side of the shelf.
10.3.3 32WSS Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS card. Table 10-12 shows how
the returned power level values are calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
Table 10-12 32WSS Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX
P33–P641
1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state
of the optical switch
PASS THROUGH COM TX
ADD (Power) COM TX
P65 OUT EXP EXP TX
P66 IN EXP EXP RX
P67 OUT COM COM TX
P68 IN COM COM RX
P69 DROP DROP TX
10-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
10.3.4 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan
The 32WSS Card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 10-13.
Table 10-13 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.1 195.1 1536.61
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.87
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.46
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
10-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
10.3.5 32WSS Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32WSS card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.4 32WSS-L Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32WSS-L card specifications, see the “32WSS-L Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch L-Band (32WSS-L) card performs channel
add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS-L card is particularly well suited
for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber.The 32WSS-L card can be
installed in the following pairs of slots:
• Slots 1 and 2
• Slots 3 and 4
• Slots 5 and 6
• Slots 12 and 13
• Slots 14 and 15
• Slots16 and 17
10-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
10.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32WSS-L card faceplate has six types of ports:
• ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (which are listed in Table 10-15
on page 10-28). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects
whether the channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA.
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS-L card in the same
NE.
• EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS-L card within the NE.
• COM TX port: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
• COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the
OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal with drop channels to the
32DMX-L card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-4 shows the 32WSS-L module front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports.
10-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Figure 10-4 32WSS-L Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-5 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS-L card and Figure 10-6 on
page 10-26 shows how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports.
134973
FAIL
ACT
SF
98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6
DROP
TX TX
RX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
RX
TX
ADD RX
32WSS-L
32 Add Ports
Add 1-8
Add 9-16
Add 17-24
Add 25-32
DROP TX
EXP RX
EXP TX
COM RX
COM TX
10-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Figure 10-5 32WSS-L Block Diagram
Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX ports are processed in two ways: add
channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in
Figure 10-6, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS-L card.
EXP RX port
(In from other 32WSS-L
within the network element)
EXP TX port
(To the other 32WSS-L
within the network element)
DROP TX port
dropped channels
(To COM RX port
of 32DMX)
COM RX port
(In from OPT-AMP-L preamplifier
or OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-AMP-L booster
or OSC-CSM)
134971
32 add ports
Add 1 Add 2 Add 32
Optical
splitter
Add channel
or pass-through
Wavelength
selective switch
10-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Figure 10-6 32WSS-L Optical Block Diagram
The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows:
• EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing
The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS-L card within
the NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or
channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs
add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical
channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the
external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the
optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked.
After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal,
which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-AMP-L or
OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no
amplification is needed).
• COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing
The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS-L card’s optical
splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX
port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX-L where the
drop channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and
flow out of the 32WSS-L card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other
32WS-L module within the NE.
1
2
32
Add 32
32
1 pass-through
EXP RX port
(In from 32WSS-L)
EXP TX port
(To 32WSS-L)
DROP TX port
(To 32DMX-L)
2 pass-through
32 pass-through
Optical
splitter
Dropped
channels
2
Photodiode
VOA
Add 2
2
Add 1
1
134972
Optical
DMUX
(AWG)
Optical
MUX
(AWG)
Optical switch
(Add channel or
pass-through)
P1 P33
P2 P34
P32 P64
P65
P66
P67
P69 P68
COM RX port
(In from OPT-AMP-L
preamplifier
or OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-AMP-L
booster
or OSC-CSM)
10-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
10.4.2 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality
The 32WSS-L works in combination with the 32DMX-L to implement L-band (1570 to 1620 nm)
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical
channels using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32WSS-L
card requires two 32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (totalling six slots
needed in the ONS 15454 chassis).
For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a
typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east or
west side of the shelf.
10.4.3 32WSS-L Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS-L card. Table 10-14 shows the
returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.4.4 32WSS-L Channel Plan
The 32WSS-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 10-15.
Table 10-14 32WSS-L Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX
P33–P641
1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state
of the optical switch
PASS THROUGH COM TX
ADD (Power) COM TX
P65 OUT EXP EXP TX
P66 IN EXP EXP RX
P67 OUT COM COM TX
P68 IN COM COM RX
P69 DROP DROP TX
10-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Table 10-15 32WSS-L Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86
78.6 189.9 1578.69
79.5 189.8 1579.52
80.3 189.7 1580.35
B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18
82.0 189.5 1582.02
82.8 189.4 1582.85
83.6 189.3 1583.69
B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53
85.3 189.1 1585.36
86.2 189 1586.20
87.0 188.9 1587.04
B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88
88.7 188.7 1588.73
89.5 188.6 1589.57
90.4 188.5 1590.41
B91.2 91.2 188.4 591.26
92.1 188.3 1592.10
92.9 188.2 1592.95
93.7 188.1 1593.79
B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64
95.4 187.9 1595.49
96.3 187.8 1596.34
97.1 187.7 1597.19
B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04
98.8 187.5 1598.89
99.7 187.4 1599.75
00.6 187.3 1600.60
B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46
02.3 187.1 1602.31
03.1 187 1603.17
04.0 186.9 1604.03
10-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
10.4.5 32WSS-L Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32WSS-L card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.5 32DMX Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32DMX card specifications, see the “32DMX Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX) card is an optical demultiplexer. The card receives
an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32) ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced
channels. The 32DMX card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and in Slots 12 to 17.
10.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32DMX card has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This
port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power
monitoring.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX provides 32 drop ports (listed in Table 10-17
on page 10-32) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports
are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. The incoming optical signal to the
demultiplexer comes into the COM RX port. This input port is connected using a single LC duplex
optical connector.Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot
10-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX do not have a VOA per channel for optical
power regulation. For a description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section
on page 6-14.
Figure 10-7 shows the 32DMX card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports.
Figure 10-7 32DMX Faceplate and Ports
A block diagram of the 32DMX card is shown in Figure 10-8.
145936
32DMX
FAIL
ACT
SF
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
COM
RX
TX MON
32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports
Logical View
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
32WSS on COM RX)
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-32
10-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
Figure 10-8 32DMX Block Diagram
Figure 10-9 shows the 32DMX optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-9 32DMX Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.5.2 32DMX ROADM Functionality
The 32DMX card works in combination with the 32WSS card to implement ROADM functionality. As
a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX card requires two
32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (for six slots total in the ONS 15454
chassis).
Optical
module
30.3 to 36.6
8 CHS TX
38.1 to 44.5
8 CHS TX
46.1 to 52.5
8 CHS TX
54.1 to 60.6
8 CHS TX
96480
Processor
MON
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
1
32
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX
20 dB max
attenuation
DROP TX
P4
P3
P2
P1
P32
P31
P30
P29
P33 P34
P
124967
10-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
For information about the ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this
chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or
west side of the shelf.
10.5.3 32DMX Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX card. The returned power level
values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-16.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.5.4 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan
The 32DMX card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 10-17.
Table 10-16 32DMX Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 DROP DROP TX
P33 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-17 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.1 195.1 1536.61
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.87
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.46
10-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
10.5.5 32DMX Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
Table 10-17 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
10-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.6 32DMX-L Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32DMX-L card specifications, see the “32DMX-L Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer L-Band card (32DMX-L) is an L-band optical demultiplexer.
The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32)
100-GHz-spaced channels. The 32DMX-L card is particularly well suited for use in networks that
employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The 32DMX-L card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and
in Slots 12 to 17.
10.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32DMX-L card has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This
port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power
monitoring.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX-L card provides 32 drop ports (listed in
Table 10-21 on page 10-42) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node.
These ports are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. Each drop port has a
photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop
ports on the 32DMX-L do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation. For a
description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 6-14.
Figure 10-10 shows the 32DMX-L card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports.
10-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
Figure 10-10 32DMX-L Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-11 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-L card.
145940
32DMX
FAIL
ACT
SF
98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6
COM
RX
TX
32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports
Logical View
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
32WSS-L on COM RX)
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-32
MON
10-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
Figure 10-11 32DMX-L Block Diagram
Figure 10-12 shows the 32DMX-L optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-12 32DMX-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.6.2 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality
The 32DMX-L card works in combination with the 32WSS-L card to implement ROADM functionality.
AS a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX-L card requires two
32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
Optical
module
77.8 to 83.6
8 CHS TX
84.5 to 90.4
8 CHS TX
91.2 to 97.1
8 CHS TX
98.0 to 04.0
8 CHS TX
134969
Processor
MON
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
1
32
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX
20 dB max
attenuation
DROP TX
P4
P3
P2
P1
P32
P31
P30
P29
P33 P34
P
124967
10-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter.
For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east
or west side of the shelf.
10.6.3 32DMX-L Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-L card. The returned power
level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-18.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.6.4 32DMX-L Channel Plan
The 32DMX-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 10-19.
Table 10-18 32DMX-L Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 DROP DROP TX
P33 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-19 32DMX-L Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86
78.6 189.9 1578.69
79.5 189.8 1579.52
80.3 189.7 1580.35
B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18
82.0 189.5 1582.02
82.8 189.4 1582.85
83.6 189.3 1583.69
B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53
85.3 189.1 1585.36
86.2 189 1586.20
87.0 188.9 1587.04
10-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
10.6.5 32DMX-L Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX-L card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88
88.7 188.7 1588.73
89.5 188.6 1589.57
90.4 188.5 1590.41
B91.2 91.2 188.4 1591.26
92.1 188.3 1592.10
92.9 188.2 1592.95
93.7 188.1 1593.79
B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64
95.4 187.9 1595.49
96.3 187.8 1596.34
97.1 187.7 1597.19
B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04
98.8 187.5 1598.89
99.7 187.4 1599.75
00.6 187.3 1600.60
B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46
02.3 187.1 1602.31
03.1 187 1603.17
04.0 186.9 1604.03
Table 10-19 32DMX-L Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
10-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.7 40-DMX-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-DMX-C card specifications, see the “40-DMX-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band (40-DMX-C) card demultiplexes 40 100-GHz-spaced
channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-21 on page 10-42), and sends them to dedicated output
ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA that is common to all channels. The
40-DMX-C card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
10.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-DMX-C has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed.
This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel
optical power monitoring.
Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example,
electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-C card provides 40 drop ports that are
typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five
physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out
into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the
main input.
Figure 10-13 shows the 40-DMX-C card faceplate.
10-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
Figure 10-13 40-DMX-C Faceplate
Figure 10-14 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-C card.
159554
40-DMX-C
55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8
COM TX
RX
FAIL
ACT
SF
40 Drop Ports
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
Drop 33-40
40 Drop Port Outputs
Logical View
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-40
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
40-WSS-C on COM RX)
10-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
Figure 10-14 40-DMX-C Block Diagram
Figure 10-15 shows the 40-DMX-C optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-15 40-DMX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.7.2 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality
The 40-DMX-C card works in combination with the 40-WSS-C card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-C card requires two
single-slot 40-DMX-C cards and two 40-WSS-C double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
Optical
module
151971
Processor
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
36.6 to 42.1
8 CHS RX
30.3 to 35.8
8 CHS RX
42.9 to 48.5
8 CHS RX
49.3 to 54.9
8 CHS RX
55.7 to 61.4
8 CHS RX
1
40
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX DROP TX
P40
P39
P38
P37
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
P41
151972
10-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a
typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
10.7.3 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-C card. P41
monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 10-20 shows
the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.7.4 40-DMX-C Channel Plan
Table 10-21 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are
demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-C card.
Table 10-20 40-DMX-C Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P40 DROP DROP TX
P41 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-21 40-DMX-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
10-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
10.7.5 40-DMX-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-DMX-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-21 40-DMX-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.8 40-DMX-CE Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-DMX-CE card specifications, see the “40-DMX-CE Card Specifications” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band, even channels (40-DMX-CE) card demultiplexes 40
100-GHz-spaced even-numbered channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-23 on page 10-47),
and sends them to dedicated output ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA
that is common to all channels. The 40-DMX-CE card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be
installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
10.8.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-DMX-CE card has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed.
This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel
optical power monitoring.
Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example,
electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-CE card provides 40 drop ports that are
typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five
physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out
into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the
main input.
Figure 10-16 shows the 40-DMX-CE card faceplate.
10-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
Figure 10-16 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate
Figure 10-17 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-CE card.
240642
40-DMX-C
56.2 - 61.8 49.7 - 55.3 43.3 - 48.9 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2
COM TX
RX
FAIL
ACT
SF
40 Drop Ports
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
Drop 33-40
40 Drop Port Outputs
Logical View
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-40
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
40-WSS-CE on COM RX)
10-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
Figure 10-17 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram
Figure 10-18 shows the 40-DMX-CE card optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-18 40-DMX-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality
The 40-DMX-CE card works in combination with the 40-WSS-CE card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-CE card requires
two single-slot 40-DMX-CE cards and two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
Optical
module
240641
Processor
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
37.0 to 42.5
8 CHS RX
30.7 to 36.2
8 CHS RX
43.3 to 48.9
8 CHS RX
49.7 to 55.3
8 CHS RX
56.1 to 61.8
8 CHS RX
1
40
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX DROP TX
P40
P39
P38
P37
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
P41
151972
10-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
For the ROADM functionality of other cards, see the description of that card in this chapter. For a
diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
10.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-CE card. P41
monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 10-22 shows
the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan
Table 10-23 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are
demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-CE card.
Table 10-22 40-DMX-CE Card Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P40 DROP DROP TX
P41 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-23 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72
31.5 195.75 1531.51
32.3 195.65 1532.29
33.1 195.55 1533.07
33.9 195.45 1533.86
B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64
35.4 195.25 1535.43
36.2 195.15 1536.22
37.0 195.05 1537.00
37.8 194.95 1537.79
B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58
39.4 194.75 1539.37
40.1 194.65 1540.16
40.9 194.55 1540.95
41.8 194.45 1541.75
10-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
10.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-DMX-CE card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54
43.3 194.25 1543.33
44.1 194.15 1544.13
44.9 194.05 1544.92
45.7 193.95 1545.72
B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52
47.3 193.75 1547.32
48.1 193.65 1548.11
48.9 193.55 1548.91
49.7 193.45 1549.72
B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52
51.3 193.25 1551.32
52.1 193.15 1552.12
52.9 193.05 1552.93
53.7 192.95 1553.73
B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54
55.3 192.75 1555.34
56.1 192.65 1556.15
56.9 192.55 1556.96
57.8 192.45 1557.77
B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58
59.4 192.25 1559.39
60.2 192.15 1560.20
61.0 192.05 1561.01
61.8 191.95 1561.83
Table 10-23 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.9 40-MUX-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-MUX-C card specifications, see the “40-MUX-C Card Specification” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 40-Channel Multiplexer C-band (40-MUX-C) card multiplexes forty ITU-T
100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan in Table 10-21 on page 10-42. The 40-MUX-C
card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 40-MUX-C card is typically used in hub nodes.
10.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-MUX-C card has two types of ports:
• COM TX port: COM TX is the line output port for the aggregate optical signal being multiplexed.
This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel
optical power monitoring.
Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example,
electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available.
• DROP RX ports (1 to 40): The 40-MUX-C card provides 40 input optical channels. These ports are
connected using five physical receive connectors on the card’s front panel that accept MPO cables
for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-DMX-C card
also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main output. For the wavelength range, see
Table 10-21 on page 10-42.
Figure 10-19 shows the 40-MUX-C card faceplate.
10-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
Figure 10-19 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate
Figure 10-20 shows a block diagram of the 40-MUX-C card.
40-MUX-C
55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8
COM RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
159555
Client ports 1-8
Client ports 9-16
Client ports 17-24
Client ports 25-32
Client ports 33-40
Logical View
COM TX
Client-1
Client-2
Client-40
40 Client Channel Inputs
40 Client Ports
COM TX
Sends combined signal
to OPT- BST
10-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
Figure 10-20 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram
Figure 10-21 shows the 40-MUX-C optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-21 40-MUX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power of the individual input ports to the 40-MUX-C
card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed output power, calibrated to the COM-TX port. Table 10-24
shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
Optical
module
36.6 to 42.1
8 CHS RX
30.3 to 35.8
8 CHS RX
42.9 to 48.5
8 CHS RX
49.3 to 54.9
8 CHS RX
55.7 to 61.4
8 CHS RX
Processor
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
151974
1
40
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
Inputs COM TX
P40
P39
P38
P37
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
151975
10-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan
Table 10-25 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are multiplexed
by the 40-MUX-C card.
Table 10-24 40-MUX-C Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P40 ADD ADD RX
P41 OUTPUT COM COM-TX
Table 10-25 40-MUX-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
10-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
10.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-MUX-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-25 40-MUX-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.10 40-WSS-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-WSS-C card specifications, see the “40-WSS-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch C-Band (40-WSS-C) card switches 40 ITU-T
100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-21 on page 10-42) and sends them to
dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-C card is bidirectional and optically passive. The card can be
installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17
The 40-WSS-C features include:
• Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port
(EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction.
• Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes.
• Signal splitting in a 70%-to-30% ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-C for dropping signals, then to the other
40-WSS-C card.
• Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a variable optical attenuator (VOA). In
the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes.
A manual VOA setting is also available.
Within the 40-WSS-C card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one of
the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the
pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second
AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port.
10.10.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-WSS-C has eight types of ports:
• ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated
with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port
has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept
MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The
40-WSS-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input.
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
10-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-C card in the same
NE.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-C card within the NE.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to
the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-22 shows the 40-WSS-C card faceplate.
Figure 10-22 40-WSS-C Faceplate
Figure 10-23 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-C card.
159394
40-WSS-C
55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8
ADD RX
COM
RX
TX
EXP
RX
TX
DROP
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
10-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
Figure 10-23 40-WSS-C Block Diagram
10-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
Figure 10-24 shows the 40-WSS-C optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-24 40-WSS-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.10.2 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality
The 40-WSS-C card works in combination with the 40-DMX-C card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-C card requires two
40-WSS-C double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-C single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter.
For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
10.10.3 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring
The 40-WSS-C has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card. Table 10-26 lists
the physical diode descriptions.
Optical
module
159392
uP8260
COM RX
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
2xSCL Buses
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
EXP RX
ADD RX
LC connector
MPO connector
EXP TX
DROP TX
10-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Additionally, the 40-WSS-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical
photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is
identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-27 lists the virtual diodes.
10.10.4 40-WSS-C Channel Plan
Table 10-28 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by
the 40-WSS-C card.
Table 10-26 40-WSS-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration
Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
P1 DROP DROP TX
P2 EXP EXP RX
PDi31
1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40.
RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX
power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1
PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX
power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs
PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power)
Table 10-27 40-WSS-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power)
VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power)
Table 10-28 40-WSS-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
10-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
10.10.5 40-WSS-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-28 40-WSS-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WSS-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.11 40-WSS-CE Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-WSS-CE card specifications, see the “40-WSS-CE Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch Even-Channel C-Band (40-WSS-CE) card
switches 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-31 on page 10-65)
and sends them to dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-CE card is bidirectional and optically passive.
The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
The 40-WSS-CE features include:
• Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port
(EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction.
• Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes.
• Signal splitting in a 70-to-30 percent ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-CE card for dropping signals, then
to the other 40-WSS-CE card.
• Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA. In the case of electrical power
failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is
also available.
Within the 40-WSS-CE card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one
of the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the
pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second
AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port.
10.11.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-WSS-CE card has eight types of ports:
10-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
• ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated
with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port
has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept
MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The
40-WSS-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input.
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-CE card in the
same NE.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-CE card within the NE.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to
the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-25 shows the 40-WSS-CE card faceplate.
10-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
Figure 10-25 40-WSS-CE Faceplate
Figure 10-26 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-CE card.
240643
40-WSS-C
56.2 - 61.8 49.7 - 55.3 43.3 - 48.9 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2
ADD RX
COM
RX
TX
EXP
RX
TX
DROP
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
10-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
Figure 10-26 40-WSS-CE Block Diagram
10-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
Figure 10-27 shows the 40-WSS-CE optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-27 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality
The 40-WSS-CE card works in combination with the 40-DMX-CE card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-CE card requires
two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-CE single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
For information about ROADM functionality for another cards, see the description of that card in this
chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
10.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring
The 40-WSS-CE card has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card.
Table 10-29 lists the physical diode descriptions.
Optical
module
159392
uP8260
COM RX
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
2xSCL Buses
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
EXP RX
ADD RX
LC connector
MPO connector
EXP TX
DROP TX
10-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Additionally, the 40-WSS-CE card has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each
physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode
is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-30 lists the virtual diodes.
10.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan
Table 10-31 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by
the 40-WSS-CE card.
Table 10-29 40-WSS-CE Physical Photodiode Port Calibration
Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
P1 DROP DROP TX
P2 EXP EXP RX
PDi31
1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40.
RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX
power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1
PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX
power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs
PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power)
Table 10-30 40-WSS-CE Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power)
VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power)
Table 10-31 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72
31.5 195.75 1531.51
32.3 195.65 1532.29
33.1 195.55 1533.07
33.9 195.45 1533.86
B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64
35.4 195.25 1535.43
36.2 195.15 1536.22
37.0 195.05 1537.00
37.8 194.95 1537.79
10-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
10.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58
39.4 194.75 1539.37
40.1 194.65 1540.16
40.9 194.55 1540.95
41.8 194.45 1541.75
B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54
43.3 194.25 1543.33
44.1 194.15 1544.13
44.9 194.05 1544.92
45.7 193.95 1545.72
B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52
47.3 193.75 1547.32
48.1 193.65 1548.11
48.9 193.55 1548.91
49.7 193.45 1549.72
B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52
51.3 193.25 1551.32
52.1 193.15 1552.12
52.9 193.05 1552.93
53.7 192.95 1553.73
B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54
55.3 192.75 1555.34
56.1 192.65 1556.15
56.9 192.55 1556.96
57.8 192.45 1557.77
B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58
59.4 192.25 1559.39
60.2 192.15 1560.20
61.0 192.05 1561.01
61.8 191.95 1561.83
Table 10-31 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WSS-CE card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.12 40-WXC-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-WXC-C card specifications, see the “40-WXC-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (40-WXC-C) card selectively sends any
wavelength combination coming from nine input ports to a common output port. The device can manage
up to 41 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel grid in Table 10-10 on
page 10-13. Each channel can be selected from any input. The card is optically passive and provides
bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
.The 40-WXC-C card provides the following features:
• Demultiplexing, selection, and multiplexing of DWDM aggregate signal from input ports to
common output port.
• Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA.
• VOAs are deployed in every channel path in order to regulate the channel’s optical power. In the case
of an electrical power failure, VOAs are set to their maximum attenuation value, or to a fixed and
configurable one. The VOA can also be set manually.
• Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes.
The 40-WXC-C card acts as a selector element with the following characteristics:
• It is able to select a wavelength from one input port and pass the wavelength through to the common
out port. Simultaneously, the card can block the same wavelength coming from the other eight input
ports.
• It is able to stop wavelengths from all nine inputs.
• It is able to monitor optical power and control path attenuation using per channel VOA
independently of the wavelength input-to-out port connection.
10-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
10.12.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 40-WXC-C card has six types of ports:
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WXC-C card within the NE.
• MON TX: The optical service channel (OSC) monitor.
• ADD/DROP RX: The 40-WXC-C card provides 40 input optical channels. For the wavelength
range, see Table 10-34 on page 10-72.
• ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels
to the 40-WXC-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-28 shows the 40-WXC-C card faceplate.
10-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
Figure 10-28 40-WXC-C Faceplate
Figure 10-29 shows the 40-WXC-C optical module functional block diagram.
159396
40-WXC
EXP
COM
RX
TX
EXP
TX
ADD DROP
RX
TX
MON
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
EXP RX Ports (from 1 to 8): fibres
come FROM Mesh PP
Monitor Port: monitors the traffic
transmitted on COM TX Port
DROP TX: fibre connected to 40-DMX for
local chs drop
ADD RX: fibre connected to 40-
MUX or xx-WSS for local chs Add
EXP TX: internal
connection TO Mesh PP
COM RX: line RX interface
FROM Pre-Amplifier
COM TX: line TX interface
TO Booster Amplifier
10-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
Figure 10-29 40-WXC-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.12.2 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring
The 40-WXC-C has 83 physical diodes (P1 through P40) that monitor power at the outputs of the card.
Table 10-32 describes the physical diodes.
WXC optical module
COM
TX
ADD RX
Virtual
PDi3
P5
Table 10-32 40-WXC-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
P1 DROP DROP TX
P2 EXP EXP RX
PDi31
1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40.
RX Add i RX ports (that is,
channel input Add i RX
power), up to 40 ports and
therefore 40 PDs1
PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per
channel output COM TX
power) up to 40 channels and
therefore 40 PDs
PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total
output COM TX power)
10-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Additionally, the 40-WXC-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical
photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is
identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-33 lists the virtual diodes.
The usage of WXC and mesh PP power readings to troubleshoot a LOS-P in WXC COM TX port in Side
A is described in the following example. The example is explained assuming a single wavelength
1558.17 in the setup that comes from Side H to Side A. If there is more than one wavelength, then there
is a risk of dropping traffic when pulling common fibers. The example is explained below:
When the wavelength from side H is 1558.17, you can check the power reading at WXC EXP TX port
of the WXC card and verify the consistency with side H pre output power and WXC COMRX-EXPTX
port loss. You can also check with a power meter connected to the 8th fiber (since it is from side H) of
an MPO-FC (or LC) cable connected to the TAP-TX port of the MESH-PP. This value should be
consistent with the previous reading, less than the insertion loss of the installed PP-MESH. If it is
consistent, the issue is with the MPO between side A WXC and PP-MESH. If it is not consistent, the
issue is with the PP-MESH or the LC-LC from side H. With only the PP-MESH already tested during
installation, the only issue can be with the patch cord b.
You can check if the 1558.17 wavelength from side H is unequalized (that is, if the channel is not aligned
with the linear fit of the power values of the other channels) by keeping the DMX COM-RX port of side
H in maintenance, and checking both the signal and ASE levels of CHAN-TX ports of the DMX card. If
the channel is equalized (that is, if the channel is aligned with the linear fit of the power values of the
other channels), then the issue is in the WXC side A that cannot properly regulate the VOA for such
channel. If the channel is unequalized, then the issue is on a remote node.
Note With an OSA or a spare 40 DMX, you can see the light coming from all the sides from TAP-TX of the
PP-MESH.
10.12.3 40-WXC-C Channel Plan
Table 10-34 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross
connected by the 40-WXC-C card.
Table 10-33 40-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input
COM RX power)
VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output
EXP TX power)
10-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
Table 10-34 40-WXC-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Ch. 01 29.5 196 1529.55
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
10-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
10.12.4 40-WXC-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WXC-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-79
10.13 80-WXC-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
1. This channel is unused by the 40-WXC-C
Table 10-34 40-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
Note For 80-WXC-C card specifications, see the “80-WXC-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 80-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (80-WXC-C) card manages up to 80
ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-10 on page 10-13) and sends
them to dedicated output ports. Each channel can be selected from any input port to any output port. The
card is optically passive, and provides bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16 the ONS 15454 chassis and Slots 2 to 6 in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis.
The 80-WXC-C card provides the following functionalities:
• When used in the multiplexer or bidirectional mode, the 80-WXC-C card allows selection of a single
wavelength or any combination of wavelengths from any of the nine input ports to the common
output port.
• When used in the bidirectional mode, the output wavelength from the COM-RX port is split to
manage the express and drop wavelengths.
• When used in the demultiplexer mode, the 80-WXC-C card, allows selection of a single wavelength
or a combination of wavelengths from the common input port to any of the nine output ports.
• Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port.
• Per-channel (closed loop) power regulation on the output port based on OCM block feedback.
• Per-channel (open loop) attenuation regulation on the output port which is not based on the OCM
feedback.
The OCM unit provides per-channel optical power monitoring on the following ports:
• COM port in output direction
• COM port in input direction
• DROP-TX port in output direction
• Eight Express/Add/Drop (EAD) ports and one Add/Drop (AD) port in both input and output
directions
10.13.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 80-WXC-C card has 14 types of ports:
• MON: The MON port monitors power on the COM T/R port.
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• DROP TX: In the bidirectional mode, the DROP TX port sends the optical signal to the
demultiplexer.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the
other side of the NE.
• COM T/R: The COM port is bidirectional. It functions as a COM TX port in the multiplexer mode
and as a COM RX port in the demultiplexer mode.
• AD T/R: The AD port functions as ADD RX port in bidirectional and multiplexer modes and as a
DROP port in the demultiplexer mode.
10-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
• EAD T/R i (where i = 1 to 8): The EAD ports function as EXP ports in the bidirectional mode, as
ADD ports in the multiplexer mode, and as DROP ports in the demultiplexer mode.
Figure 10-30 shows the 80-WXC-C card faceplate and the optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-30 80-WXC-C Faceplate and the Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
5
6
7
ADD / DROP
8
3
4
EXP DROP
TX
RX
COM
TX
1
2
R/T
COM
T/R
MON
FAIL
ACT
SF
80-WXC-C
EXP / ADD / DROP
R/T R/T R/T R/T
249126
VPD4
VPD3
VOA DROP_TX
OCM 12
PD2
EAD 1...8
OCM 1...9
AD
DROP TX
EXP TX
COM RX
MON
COM
LC connectors
Variable optical attenuator
OUT
OCM 10
OCM 11
1
10
PD1
9
40/60
12x1
Optical
Switch OCM
WXC
10-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
The different units of the 80-WXC-C card are:
• 40/60 splitter with VOA on drop path—The preamplifier output signal from the preamplifier is split
in a 40%-to-60% ratio; 40% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port) and 60% is sent on the
pass-through path (EXP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power
range of the receiver photodiode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to
be dropped in the 80-WXC-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either
by a 40-WSS-C or a 40-WXC-C card.
• 50 Ghz 10 port WXC—The WXC block is optically passive and has bidirectional capability. The
WXC block can selectively send any wavelength combination coming from the eight input EAD
ports and one AD port to a common (COM) output port, when used as a multiplexer, whereas it can
selectively send any wavelength combination coming from its common (COM) input port to any of
the eight output EAD ports and one AD port, when used as a demultiplexer. The WXC block can
manage (on each port) up to 80 channels according to the channel grid reported in Table 10-37. Each
channel can be selected from any input and routed to any output.
• 50 Ghz Optical Channel Monitor (OCM)—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the
COM T/R, DROP-TX, AD, and EADi (i=1 to 8) ports. The power value for each wavelength is
refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity.
10.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring
The 80-WXC-C has two physical photodiodes and an OCM unit that monitors power at the different
ports of the card. Table 10-35 describes the physical photodiodes.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port
Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Table 10-35 80-WXC-C Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
PD1 COM Total Power COM
PD2 EXP-TX Total Power EXP-TX
OCM1 EAD 1 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-1
OCM2 EAD 2 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-2
OCM3 EAD 3 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-3
OCM4 EAD 4 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-4
OCM5 EAD 5 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-5
OCM6 EAD 6 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-6
OCM7 EAD 7 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-7
OCM8 EAD 8 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-8
OCM9 AD Per-Channel and Total Power AD
OCM10 Output Per-Channel and Total Power COM
OCM11 Input Per-Channel and Total Power COM
OCM12 Drop Per-Channel and Total Power DROP-TX
10-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
Additionally, the 80-WXC-C has two virtual photodiodes. Table 10-36 lists the virtual photodiodes.
10.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan
Table 10-37 shows the 80 ITU-T 50-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross
connected by the 80-WXC-C card.
Table 10-36 80-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD3 DROP-TX Total Power DROP-TX
VPD4 COM-RX Total Power COM-RX
Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Ch. 01 - 196 1529.55
30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
30.7 195.85 1530.72
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.5 195.75 1531.51
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.3 195.65 1532.29
32.7 195.6 1532.68
33.1 195.55 1533.07
33.5 195.5 1533.47
33.9 195.45 1533.86
34.3 34.3 195.4 1534.25
34.6 195.35 1534.64
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.4 195.25 1535.43
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.2 195.15 1536.22
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.0 195.05 1537
37.4 195 1537.40
37.8 194.95 1537.79
10-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
38.2 38.2 194.9 1538.19
38.6 194.85 1538.58
39.0 194.8 1538.98
39.4 194.75 1539.37
39.8 194.7 1539.77
40.2 194.65 1540.16
40.6 194.6 1540.56
41.0 194.55 1540.95
41.3 194.5 1541.35
41.7 194.45 1541.75
42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.5 194.35 1542.94
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.3 194.25 1543.33
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.1 194.15 1544.13
44.5 194.1 1544.53
44.9 194.05 1544.92
45.3 194 1545.32
45.7 193.95 1545.72
46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.5 193.85 1546.52
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.3 193.75 1547.32
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.1 193.65 1548.11
48.5 193.6 1548.51
48.9 193.55 1548.91
49.3 193.5 1549.32
49.7 193.45 1549.72
Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
10.13.4 80-WXC-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.5 193.35 1550.52
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.3 193.25 1551.32
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.1 193.15 1552.12
52.5 193.1 1552.52
52.9 193.05 1552.93
53.3 193 1553.33
53.7 192.95 1553.73
54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.5 192.85 1554.54
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.3 192.75 1555.34
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.2 192.65 1556.15
56.6 192.6 1556.55
57.0 192.55 1556.96
57.4 192.5 1557.36
57.8 192.45 1557.77
58.2 58.2 192.4 1558.17
58.6 192.35 1558.58
59.0 192.3 1558.98
59.4 192.25 1559.39
59.8 192.2 1559.79
60.2 192.15 1560.20
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.0 192.05 1561.01
61.4 192 1561.42
61.8 191.95 1561.83
1. This channel is unused by the 80-WXC-C
Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 80-WXC-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-79
10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
Note For the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card specifications, see the “40-SMR1-C Card Specifications” or
“40-SMR2-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C safety label information, see the “10.2 Safety Labels” section on
page 10-15.
The single-slot 40-channel single module ROADM (SMR-C) cards integrate the following functional
blocks onto a single line card:
• Optical preamplifier
• Optical booster amplifier
• Optical service channel (OSC) filter
• 2x1 wavelength cross-connect (WXC) or a 4x1 WXC
• Optical channel monitor (OCM)
The SMR-C cards are available in two versions:
• 10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card
• 10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card
The SMR-C cards can manage up to 40 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel
grid in Table 10-10. The cards can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
10.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features
The optical amplifier units in the SMR-C cards provide the following features:
• Embedded gain flattening filter
10-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
• Mid-stage access for dispersion compensation unit (only applicable for preamplifier erbium-doped
fiber amplifier [EDFA])
• Fixed output power mode
• Fixed gain mode
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain and fixed output power mode
• Fast transient suppression
• Programmable tilt (only applicable for preamplifier EDFA)
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down
control, and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode.
• EDFA section calculates the signal power, by taking into account the expected ASE power
contribution to the total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as
feedback signals for the EDFA pump power control loop.
The 1x2 WXC unit (40-SMR1-C card) provides the following features:
• Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXP-RX or
ADD-RX ports
• Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port
• Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit
• Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port
The 1x4 WXC unit (40-SMR2-C card) provides the following features:
• Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXPi-RX
(where i = 1, 2, 3) or ADD-RX ports
• Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port
• Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit
• Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port
The OCM unit provides per channel optical power monitoring at EXP-RX, ADD-RX, DROP-TX, and
LINE-TX ports.
10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card
The 40-SMR1-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x2 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier unit (single EDFA).
10.14.2.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 40-SMR1-C card has the following types of ports:
• MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port.
• MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port.
• DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU)
and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input.
• DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU.
10-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
• OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port.
• ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the
NE and sends it to the 1x2 WXC unit.
• ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section
of the NE.
• LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port.
• LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port.
• EXP RX: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of the NE and sends it to
the 1x2 WXC unit.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to
the other side of the NE.
Figure 10-31 shows the 40-SMR1-C card faceplate.
Figure 10-31 40-SMR1-C Faceplate
Figure 10-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR1-C card.
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
OSC DC EXP MON
RX
TX
ADD & DROP
RX
TX
LINE
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
40-SMR
1-C
COMPLIES WITH
21 CFR 1040.10 AND
1040.11 EXCEPT
FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT TO LASER
NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
276440
10-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
Figure 10-32 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram
The different units of the 40-SMR1-C card are:
• OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path
and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX
and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel.
• Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion
of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also
equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that
provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses
(5 dB to 35 dB).
• 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio,
70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX
port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo
diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the
40-SMR1-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either by a 40-WSS-C,
40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card.
• 1x2 WXC—The 1x2 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received
from either its ADD-RX or EXP-RX port. In addition to the switching function, the 1x2 WXC
allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and also monitor
the optical power.
• OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXP-RX, ADD-RX,
and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer
depending on the port and card activity.
OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX
OSC-RX ADD-RX
OCM
Block
OCM4
OCM3 OCM2
OCM1
VOA3
VOA2
LINE TX
LINE RX
MON-TX
EXP-RX
EXP-TX
MON-RX
EDFA 1
(variable Gain
VOA1 30%
70%
OSC
DROP PD2
PD3 PD4
TAP PD5 TAP
TAP PD8
OSC
TAP ADD TAP
TAP
276446
TAP
PD6
WXC
Block
PD1
LC connector
10-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring
The 40-SMR1-C card has seven physical diodes (PD1 through PD6 and PD8) and an OCM unit that
monitors power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 10-38).
10.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan
Table 10-39 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the
40-SMR1-C card.
Table 10-38 40-SMR1-C Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
PD1 LINE LINE-RX
PD2 LINE LINE-RX
PD3 DC DC-TX
PD4 DC DC-RX
PD5 EXP EXP-TX
PD6 OSC OSC-RX
PD8 LINE LINE-TX
OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX
OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX
OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX
OCM4 EXP OCH EXP-RX
Table 10-39 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
10-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card
The 40-SMR2-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x4 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier and booster
amplifier units (double EDFA).
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-39 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.14.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 40-SMR2-C card has the following types of ports:
• MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port.
• MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port.
• DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU)
and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input.
• DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU.
• OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port.
• ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the
NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit.
• ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section
of the NE.
• LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port.
• LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to
the other side of the NE.
• EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3): The EXPi-RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of
the NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit.
Figure 10-31 shows the 40-SMR2-C card faceplate.
Figure 10-33 40-SMR2-C Faceplate
Figure 10-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR2-C card.
276441
EXP
OSC DC
RX
TX
ADD & DROP
RX
TX
LINE
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
MON
FAIL
ACT
SF
40-SMR
2-C
COMPLIES WITH
21 CFR 1040.10 AND
1040.11 EXCEPT
FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT TO LASER
NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
10-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
Figure 10-34 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram
The different units of the 40-SMR2-C card are:
• OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path
and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX
and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel.
• Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion
of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also
equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that
provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses
(5 dB to 35 dB).
• 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio,
70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX
port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo
diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the
40-SMR2-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port by a 40-WSS-C,
40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card.
• 1x4 WXC—The 1x4 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received
from either its ADD-RX or EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) port. In addition to the switching function,
the 1x4 WXC allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and
also monitor the optical power.
OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX
OSC-RX ADD-RX
LINE TX
LINE RX
MON-TX
EXP1-RX
EXP2-RX
EXP3-RX
MON-RX
EDFA 1
(Variable Gain)
EDFA 2
(Fixed Gain)
30%
70%
OSC
DROP PD2
PD3 PD4
TAP PD5 TAP
TAP PD8 PD7
OSC
TAP ADD
TAP
276447
TAP
PD6
4x1
WXC
Block
PD1
TAP
TAP
LC connector
MPO connector
EXP-TX
6 ports
OCM Block
10-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
• Single-stage fixed gain EDFA booster amplifier—The booster amplifier amplifies the output signal
from the 1x4 WXC unit before transmitting it into the fiber. Since it is a fixed gain (17 dB) amplifier,
it does not allow gain tilt control.
• OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXPi-RX (where i =
1, 2, 3), ADD-RX, and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a
variable timer depending on the port and card activity.
10.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring
The 40-SMR2-C card has eight physical diodes (PD1 through PD8) and an OCM unit that monitors
power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 10-40).
10.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan
Table 10-41 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the
40-SMR2-C card.
Table 10-40 40-SMR2-C Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
PD1 LINE LINE-RX
PD2 LINE LINE-RX
PD3 DC DC-TX
PD4 DC DC-RX
PD5 EXP EXP-TX
PD6 OSC OSC-RX
PD7 Not reported on CTC Internal port
PD8 LINE LINE-TX
OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX
OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX
OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX
OCM4 EXP-1 OCH EXP1-RX
OCM5 EXP-2 OCH EXP2-RX
OCM6 EXP-3 OCH EXP3-RX
Table 10-41 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
10-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-41 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
10.14.4 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-SMR-1C and
40-SMR-2C cards:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test, page 21-147
• NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-151
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-94
10.15 MMU Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The single-slot Mesh Multi-Ring Upgrade Module (MMU) card supports multiring and mesh upgrades
for ROADM nodes in both the C-band and the L-band. Mesh/multiring upgrade is the capability to
optically bypass a given wavelength from one section of the network or ring to another one without
requiring 3R regeneration. In each node, you need to install one east MMU and one west MMU. The
card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17.
Note For MMU card specifications, see the “MMU Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
10.15.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The MMU has six types of ports:
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available on
the NE.
10-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
• EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on the NE.
• EXP-A RX port: The EXP-A RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available
on other NEs or rings.
• EXP-A TX port: The EXP-A TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on
other NEs or rings.
• COM TX port: The COM TX port sends the optical signal to the fiber stage section.
• COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from the fiber stage section.
Figure 10-35 shows the MMU card faceplate.
10-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
Figure 10-35 MMU Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-36 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the MMU card.
145190
ACT
FAIL
MMU
SF
RX
TX
EXP A
RX
TX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
10-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
Figure 10-36 MMU Block Diagram
10.15.2 MMU Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P3 monitor the power for the MMU card. The returned power level
values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-42. VP1 to VP3 are virtual photodiodes that have
been created by adding (by software computation) the relevant path insertion losses of the optical
splitters (stored in the module) to the real photodiode (P1 to P3) measurement.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.15.3 MMU Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MMU card:
145191
COM TX
VPD2 75/25 PD1
EXP RX
PD2
EXP A RX
COM RX
VPD3 95/5 VPD1 95/5
EXP TX
Legend
LC PC II Connector
Optical splitter/coupler
Real photodiode
Virtual photodiode
PD3
EXP A TX
Table 10-42 MMU Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 1 (EXP-RX) EXP RX
P2 5 (EXP A-RX) EXP A RX
P3 6 (EXP A-TX) EXP A TX
VP1 2 (EXP-TX) EXP TX
VP2 4 (COM-TX) COM TX
VP3 3 (COM-RX) COM RX
10-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-114
CH A P T E R
11-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards, as well as their associated
plug-in modules (Small Form-factor Pluggables [SFPs or XFPs]). For card safety and compliance
information, see the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS
Platforms.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Chapter topics include:
• 11.1 Card Overview, page 11-3
• 11.2 Safety Labels, page 11-10
• 11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card, page 11-10
• 11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card, page 11-14
• 11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card, page 11-14
• 11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card, page 11-16
• 11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 11-16
• 11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 11-18
• 11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-18
11-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• 11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-23
• 11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards, page 11-23
• 11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards, page 11-25
• 11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 11-25
• 11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 11-28
• 11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card, page 11-28
• 11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card, page 11-32
• 11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 11-32
• 11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 11-38
• 11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-39
• 11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-44
• 11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards, page 11-44
• 11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards,
page 11-51
• 11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards, page 11-52
• 11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards, page 11-58
• 11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-58
• 11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-82
• 11.15 ADM-10G Card, page 11-83
• 11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card, page 11-96
• 11.16 OTU2_XP Card, page 11-97
• 11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card, page 11-105
• 11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 11-105
• 11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 11-108
• 11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, page 11-108
• 11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card, page 11-112
• 11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 11-112
• 11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 11-118
• 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards, page 11-119
• 11.21 MLSE UT, page 11-142
• 11.22 SFP and XFP Modules, page 11-142
Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1 interfaces.
1. 5G DDR InfiniBand is referred to as IB_5G.
11-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
11.1 Card Overview
The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter and provides compatibility
information.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
The purpose of a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP,
AR_MXP, or AR_XP card is to convert the “gray” optical client interface signals into trunk signals that
operate in the “colored” dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) wavelength range.
Client-facing gray optical signals generally operate at shorter wavelengths, whereas DWDM colored
optical signals are in the longer wavelength range (for example, 1490 nm = violet; 1510 nm = blue; 1530
nm = green; 1550 nm = yellow; 1570 nm = orange; 1590 nm = red; 1610 nm = brown). Some of the newer
client-facing SFPs, however, operate in the colored region. Transponding or muxponding is the process
of converting the signals between the client and trunk wavelengths.
An MXP generally handles several client signals. It aggregates, or multiplexes, lower rate client signals
together and sends them out over a higher rate trunk port. Likewise, it demultiplexes optical signals
coming in on a trunk and sends them out to individual client ports. A TXP converts a single client signal
to a single trunk signal and converts a single incoming trunk signal to a single client signal. GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as TXPs, as MXPs, or as Layer 2
switches.
All of the TXP and MXP cards perform optical to electrical to optical (OEO) conversion. As a result,
they are not optically transparent cards. The reason for this is that the cards must operate on the signals
passing through them, so it is necessary to do an OEO conversion.
On the other hand, the termination mode for all of the TXPs and MXPs, which is done at the electrical
level, can be configured to be transparent. In this case, neither the Line nor the Section overhead is
terminated. The cards can also be configured so that either Line or Section overhead can be terminated,
or both can be terminated.
Note The MXP_2.5G_10G card, by design, when configured in the transparent termination mode, actually
does terminate some of the bytes. See Table G-17 on page G-33 for details.
11.1.1 Card Summary
Table 11-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card.
Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
TXP_MR_10G The TXP_MR_10G card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card” section on
page 11-10.
TXP_MR_10E The TXP_MR_10E card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card” section on
page 11-14.
11-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
TXP_MR_10E_C and
TXP_MR_10E_L
The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L
cards have two sets of ports located on the
faceplate.
See the “11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and
TXP_MR_10E_L Cards” section on page 11-16.
TXP_MR_2.5G The TXP_MR_2.5G card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-18.
TXPP_MR_2.5G The TXPP_MR_2.5G card has three sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-18.
40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C
The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards have
two ports located on the face plate.
See the “11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
Cards” section on page 11-23.
MXP_2.5G_10G The MXP_2.5G_10G card has nine sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card” section on
page 11-25.
MXP_2.5G_10E The MXP_2.5G_10E card has nine sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card” section on
page 11-28.
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L
cards have nine sets of ports located on the
faceplate.
See the “11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards” section on page 11-32.
MXP_MR_2.5G The MXP_MR_2.5G card has nine sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-39.
MXPP_MR_2.5G The MXPP_MR_2.5G card has ten sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-39.
MXP_MR_10DME_C
and
MXP_MR_10DME_L
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have eight sets of
ports located on the faceplate.
See the “11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards” section on
page 11-44.
40G-MXP-C
40E-MXP-C
and
40ME-MXP-C
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and
40ME-MXP-C cards have five ports located on
the faceplate.
See the “11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C Cards” section on page 11-52.
AR_MXP and
AR_XP
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have ten ports
located on the faceplate.
See the 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards,
page 11-119.
GE_XP and GE_XPE The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty
Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk ports.
See the “11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-58.
10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE
The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10
Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk ports.
See the “11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-58.
ADM-10G The ADM-10G card has 19 sets of ports located
on the faceplate.
See the “11.15 ADM-10G Card” section on
page 11-83.
OTU2_XP The OTU2_XP card has four ports located on the
faceplate.
See the “11.16 OTU2_XP Card” section on
page 11-97.
TXP_MR_10EX_C The TXP_MR_10EX_C card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card” section
on page 11-105.
Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
11-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has nine sets of
ports located on the faceplate.
See the “11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card” section
on page 11-108.
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has eight sets
of ports located on the faceplate.
See the “11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card”
section on page 11-112.
Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
11-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
11.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 11-2 lists the platform and Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card.
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
TXP_MR_10G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_10E No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_10E_C No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_10E_L No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_2.5G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
TXPP_MR_2.5G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
11-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
MXP_2.5G_10E No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10E_C No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10E_L No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_2.5G No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXPP_MR_2.5G No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_10DME_C No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_10DME_L No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
GE_XP No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
10GE_XP No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
10GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
ADM-10G No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
OTU2_XP No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
TXP_MR_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_10DMEX_
C
No No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40E-TXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40ME-TXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40G-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Safety Labels
11.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The TXP_MR_10G processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides
one 10-Gbps port per card that can be provisioned for an STM-64/OC-192 short reach (1310-nm) signal, compliant with ITU-T
G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, or a 10GBASE-LR signal compliant with IEEE 802.3.
40E-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40ME-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AR_MXP No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AR_XP No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10G Card
The TXP_MR_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz
range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage
of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range.
Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The
digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and
restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal
degrading with distance are corrected.
The trunk port operates at 9.95328 Gbps (or 10.70923 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC)
and at 10.3125 Gbps (or 11.095 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified
distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated
fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion.
Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_10G
card does not display circuits under card view.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10G card in a
loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10G card. Using direct
fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10G card.
You can install TXP_MR_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision this card in a linear
configuration. TXP_MR_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a bidirectional line switched ring
(BLSR)/Multiplex Section - Shared Protection Ring (MS-SPRing), a path protection/single node control
point (SNCP), or a regenerator. They can only be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing and 1+1 spans
when the card is configured for transparent termination mode.
The TXP_MR_10G port features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk port and a 1310-nm laser for the for the
client port and contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate.
The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port
to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
The TXP_MR_10G card has the following available wavelengths and versions:
• ITU grid blue band:
– 1538.19 to 1538.98 nm, 10T-L1-38.1
– 1539.77 to 1540.56 nm, 10T-L1-39.7
– 1530.33 to 1531.12 nm, 10T-L1-30.3
– 1531.90 to 1532.68 nm, 10T-L1-31.9
– 1534.25 to 1535.04 nm, 10T-L1-34.2
– 1535.82 to 1536.61 nm, 10T-L1-35.8
– 1542.14 to 1542.94 nm, 10T-L1-42.1
– 1543.73 to 1544.53 nm, 10T-L1-43.73
• ITU grid red band:
– 1554.13 to 1554.94 nm, 10T-L1-54.1
11-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10G Card
– 1555.75 to 1556.55 nm, 10T-L1-55.7
– 1546.12 to 1546.92 nm, 10T-L1-46.1
– 1547.72 to 1548.51 nm, 10T-L1-47.7
– 1550.12 to 1550.92 nm, 10T-L1-50.1
– 1551.72 to 1552.52 nm, 10T-L1-51.7
– 1558.17 to 1558.98 nm, 10T-L1-58.1
– 1559.79 to 1560.61 nm, 10T-L1-59.7
11.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows the TXP_MR_10G faceplate and block diagram.
11-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10G Card
Figure 11-1 TXP_MR_10G Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
11.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10G card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-7 on page G-10
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
145948
Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
SR-1 optics modules
or 10GBASE-LR
Backplane
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
10G MR
TXP
1530.33 -
1531.12
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX
RX
CLIENT
1530.33
1531.12
DWDM
TX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
11-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E Card
11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10G card:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The card is fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G card. It processes one 10-Gbps signal
(client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side) that is tunable over four wavelength
channels (spaced at 100 GHz on the ITU grid) in the C band and tunable over eight wavelength channels
(spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) in the L band. There are eight versions of the C-band card, with each
version covering four wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 wavelengths. There are five versions of the
L-band card, with each version covering eight wavelengths, for a total coverage of 40 wavelengths.
You can install TXP_MR_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the cards in a linear
configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the
middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode.
The TXP_MR_10E card features a 1550-nm tunable laser (C band) or a 1580-nm tunable laser (L band)
for the trunk port and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm
laser XFP module for the client port.
Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E card must be installed in Slots 6, 7, 12
or 13)
On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the
trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled.
11.4.1 Key Features
The key features of the TXP_MR_10E card are:
• A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately)
– OC-192 (SR1)
– 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
– 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
• OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping
• The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client
port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E Card
11.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-2 shows the TXP_MR_10E faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 11-2 TXP_MR_10E Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E card in a
loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10E card. Using direct
fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10E card.
11.4.3 TXP_MR_10E Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10E card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
131186
Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10 Gb/s
TP
1538.19
1538.98
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
or 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
Backplane
TX RX
RX
TX
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
4 tunable channels (C-band) or
8 tunable channels (L-band) on
the 100-GHz ITU grid
11-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17
11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10E card:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
TXP_MR_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are multirate transponders for the ONS 15454
platform. The cards are fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards.
They processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side).
The TXP_MR_10E_C is tunable over the entire set of C-band wavelength channels (82 channels spaced
at 50 GHz on the ITU grid). The TXP_MR_10E_L is tunable over the entire set of L-band wavelength
channels (80 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) and is particularly well suited for use in
networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber.
The advantage of these cards over previous versions (TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E) is that there is
only one version of each card (one C-band version and one L-band version) instead of several versions
needed to cover each band.
You can install TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision
the cards in a linear configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The cards
can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are configured for
transparent termination mode.
The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards feature a universal transponder 2 (UT2) 1550-nm
tunable laser (C band) or a UT2 1580-nm tunable laser (L band) for the trunk port and a separately
orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client
port.
Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E_C or TXP_MR_10E-L card is required
to be installed in a high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13)
On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards contain two transmit and receive
connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled.
11.5.1 Key Features
The key features of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are:
• A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately):
11-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
– OC-192 (SR1)
– 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
– 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
• A UT2 module tunable through the entire C band (TXP_MR_10E_C card) or L band
(TXP_MR_10E_L card). The channels are spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid.
• OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping.
• The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client
port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-3 shows the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L faceplates and block diagram.
Figure 11-3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
134975
Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
or 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
Backplane
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
82 tunable channels (C-band) or
80 tunable channels (L-band) on
the 50-GHz ITU grid
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10E MR
TXP L
TX RX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10E MR
TXP C
TX RX
RX
TX
11-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E_C or
TXP_MR_10E_L card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards.
Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the cards.
11.5.3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17
11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration for both TXP_MR_10E_C
and TXP_MR_10E_L:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing,
page 21-24
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The TXP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into one 8-Mbps to
2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per
card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
The TXPP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into two 8-Mbps to
2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signals (trunk side). It provides two long-reach STM-16/OC-48 ports per
card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are tunable over four wavelengths in the 1550-nm,
ITU 100-GHz range. They are available in eight versions, each of which covers four wavelengths, for a
total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range.
11-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you
transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it, and restore it to its original form.
FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are
corrected.
The trunk/line port operates at up to 2.488 Gbps (or up to 2.66 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital
Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified distances up to 360 km (223.7 miles) with different types of fiber such
as C-SMF or higher if dispersion compensation is used.
Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_2.5G
or TXPP_MR_2.5G card does not display circuits under card view.
The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards support 2R (retime, regenerate) and 3R (retime,
reshape, and regenerate) modes of operation where the client signal is mapped into a ITU-T G.709 frame.
The mapping function is simply done by placing a digital wrapper around the client signal. Only
OC-48/STM-16 client signals are fully ITU-T G.709 compliant, and the output bit rate depends on the
input client signal. Table 11-45 shows the possible combinations of client interfaces, input bit rates, 2R
and 3R modes, and ITU-T G.709 monitoring.
Note ITU-T G.709 and FEC support is disabled for all the 2R payload types in the TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Table 11-3 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off
DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R —
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber
connectivity (FICON)
2.125 Gbps 3R1
1. No monitoring
On or Off
High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R —
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off
OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R —
SDI/D1/DVB-ASI video 270 Mbps 2R —
ISC-1 Compat 1.06 Gbps 2R Off
ISC-3 1.06 or
2.125 Gbps
2R —
ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R —
11-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The output bit rate is calculated for the trunk bit rate by using the 255/238 ratio as specified in
ITU-T G.709 for OTU1. Table 11-4 lists the calculated trunk bit rates for the client interfaces with
ITU-T G.709 enabled.
For 2R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to pass data
through transparently from client side interfaces to a trunk side interface, which resides on an ITU grid.
The data might vary at any bit rate from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps, including ESCON, DVB-ASI,
ISC-1, and video signals. In this pass-through mode, no performance monitoring (PM) or digital
wrapping of the incoming signal is provided, except for the usual PM outputs from the SFPs. Similarly,
this card has the ability to pass data through transparently from the trunk side interfaces to the client side
interfaces with bit rates varying from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps. Again, no PM or digital wrapping of
received signals is available in this pass-through mode.
For 3R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards apply a digital wrapper to the
incoming client interface signals (OC-N/STM-N, 1G-FC, 2G-FC, GE). PM is available on all of these
signals except for 2G-FC, and varies depending upon the type of signal. For client inputs other than
OC-48/STM-16, a digital wrapper might be applied but the resulting signal is not ITU-T G.709
compliant. The card applies a digital wrapper that is scaled to the frequency of the input signal.
The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to take digitally wrapped signals in
from the trunk interface, remove the digital wrapper, and send the unwrapped data through to the client
interface. PM of the ITU-T G.709 OH and SONET/SDH OH is implemented.
11.6.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-4 shows the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates.
Table 11-4 Trunk Bit Rates With ITU-T G.709 Enabled
Client Interface ITU-T G.709 Disabled ITU-T G.709 Enabled
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 2.66 Gbps
2G-FC 2.125 Gbps 2.27 Gbps
GE 1.25 Gbps 1.34 Gbps
1G-FC 1.06 Gbps 1.14 Gbps
OC-12/STM-3 622 Mbps 666.43 Mbps
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 166.07 Mbps
11-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Figure 11-4 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Figure 11-5 shows a block diagram of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
CLIENT
2.5G MR
TXP-P
1530.33 -
1532.68
2.5G MR
TXP
1530.33 -
1532.68
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
RX TX
DWDM A
TX
RX
DWDM B
TX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
CLIENT
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
TX RX TX
RX
DWDM
145946
11-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Figure 11-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to
the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
You can install TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can
provision this card in a linear configuration. TXP_MR_10G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards cannot be
provisioned as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the
middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination
mode.
The TXP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm laser for the
client port. It contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card
uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination.
The TXPP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm
laser (depending on the SFP) for the client port and contains three transmit and receive connector pairs
(labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination.
11.6.2 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10 (for TXP_MR_2.5G)
• Port level indicators—Table G-8 on page G-11 (for TXPP_MR_2.5G)
SFP Client Switch
Switch Driver
Tunable
Laser
Switch Cross
Switch
Limiting
Amp
Limiting
Amp
Main
APD+TA
Protect
APD+TA
Mux
Demux Mux
Demux
Mux
Demux
CPU
Main
ASIC
Protect
FPGA ASIC
SCL
FPGA
SCL BUS
2R Tx path
Trunk
Out
2R Rx path
CELL BUS
CPU
I/F
CELL
BUS DCC
CPU to
GCC
96636
11-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration for both TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G:
• NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds, page 11-171
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 (TXP_MR_2.5G only)
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards process a single 40-Gbps signal (client side) into a single
40-Gbps, 50-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one 40-Gbps port per card that can be
provisioned for an OC-768/STM-256 very short reach (1550-nm) signal compliant with ITU-T G.707,
ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, 40G Ethernet LAN signal compliant with IEEE 802.3ba,
or OTU3 signal compliant with ITU-T G.709.
The trunk port of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards are tunable between 1529.55 nm through
1561.83 nm, ITU 50-GHz range.
ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The
digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and
restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal
degrading with distance are corrected.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the
40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the
these cards.
You can install and provision the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards in a linear configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
When a protection switch occurs on the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards, the recovery from PSM
protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes.
Note The maximum ambient operating temperature for 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards is 500 Celsius.
11-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
11.7.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-6 shows the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 11-6 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
11.7.2 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Functions
The functions of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 (supported on a client interface)
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
278758
40G-TXP-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TRUNK
CLIENT
CLIENT
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
40 G
FEC/EF EC
OC7 G8/
OTUS
VSR
Trunk module
TDC
EDFA
Tx
Rx Trunk
Rx
Tx
SFI 5.1
interface
SFI 5.1
interface
Threshold
control
Client
TRUNK
TX
MX
RX
TX
MX
RX
11-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10G Card
11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of 40E-TXP-C and
40ME-TXP-C:
• NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-217
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The MXP_2.5G_10G card multiplexes/demultiplexes four 2.5-Gbps signals (client side) into one
10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one extended long-range STM-64/OC-192
port per card on the trunk side (compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia
GR-253-CORE) and four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side.
The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types
of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion.
Client ports on the MXP_2.5G_10G card are also interoperable with SONET OC-1 (STS-1) fiber optic
signals defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE. An OC-1 signal is the equivalent of one DS-3 channel
transmitted across optical fiber. OC-1 is primarily used for trunk interfaces to phone switches in the
United States. There is no SDH equivalent for SONET OC-1.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz
range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage
of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range.
Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you
transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form.
FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are
corrected.
The port can also operate at 10.70923 Gbps in ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC mode.
Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, an
MXP_2.5G_10G card does not display circuits under card view.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_2.5G_10G card in a
loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_2.5G_10G card. Using
direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
You can install MXP_2.5G_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
11-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10G Card
Caution Do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 3 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1or 2.
Likewise, do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 17 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in
Slots 15 or 16. If you do, the cards will interact and cause DS-3 bit errors.
You can provision this card in a linear configuration. MXP_2.5G_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a
BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the middle of
BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10G port features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the
client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The
card uses a dual LC connector on the trunk side and SFP connectors on the client side for optical cable
termination.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision
a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.8.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-7 shows the MXP_2.5G_10G faceplate.
11-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10G Card
Figure 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10G Faceplate
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-1.
Figure 11-8 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
CLIENT
DWDM
1
2
4x 2.5G
10G MXP
1530.33 -
1531.12
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX
RX
TX
RX
3
TX
RX
4
TX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
TX
RX
1530.33
1531.12
145945
11-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
Figure 11-8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Block Diagram
11.8.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10G card are:
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators— Table G-7 on page G-10
11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10G:
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card
The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G 10E MXP.” The MXP_2.5G_10E card is a DWDM
muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports full transparent termination the client side. The
card multiplexes four 2.5 Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM
optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E provides wavelength transmission service for the
four incoming 2.5 Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E muxponder passes all SONET/SDH
overhead bytes transparently.
uP bus
uP
Flash RAM
ASIC
Optical
STM-64 / OC-192 Transceiver
9.953,
10.3125,
10.709, or
11.095 Gbps
SCI
83659
Backplane
Optical
STM-64 / OC-192 Transceiver
9.95328 or
10.70923 Gbps
Framer/FEC/DWDM
Processor
DWDM (Trunk)
Client
11-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up generic communications channels (GCCs) for data communications, enable FEC, or
facilitate performance monitoring.
The MXP_2.5G_10E works with optical transport network (OTN) devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The
card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping
a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function”
section on page G-18.
The MXP_2.5G_10E card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support full
transparent termination. You can install MXP_2.5G_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can
provision this card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a
regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is
configured for transparent termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10E features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the client
ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses
a dual LC connector on the trunk side and uses SFP modules on the client side for optical cable
termination. The SFP pluggable modules are short reach (SR) or intermediate reach (IR) and support an
LC fiber connector.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision
a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.9.1 Key Features
The MXP_2.5G_10E card has the following high level features:
• Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals
are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard Reed-Solomon (RS, specified in
ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant
extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the
correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower
OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new block code (BCH)
algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E card has modular interfaces. Two
types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1
interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an
IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE
and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1
(ITU-T G.957).
• High level provisioning support: The MXP_2.5G_10E card is initially provisioned using
Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using
CTC software.
• Link monitoring and management: The MXP_2.5G_10E card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead)
bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data
stream and its overhead bytes transparently.
11-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E normally synchronizes from the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or
upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available, the
MXP_2.5G_10E automatically synchronizes to one of the input client interface clocks.
• Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if
there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages multiplex section alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) insertion.
11.9.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-9 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E faceplate.
Figure 11-9 MXP_2.5G_10E Faceplate
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-1.
145937
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MxP
530.33-
1550.12
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
Client LEDs
DWDM LED
11-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
Figure 11-10 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
Figure 11-10 MXP_2.5G_10E Block Diagram
11.9.3 MXP_2.5G_10E Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10E card are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.15 Jitter, page G-19
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
uP bus
Serial bus
Processor
Onboard
Flash
memory
RAM
Optical
transceiver
115357
FEC/
Wrapper
Processor
(G.709 FEC)
E-FEC
DWDM
(trunk)
10GE
(10GBASE-LR)
SR-1
(short reach/intra-office)
or
IR-1
(intermediate range)
SFP client
optics modules
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver Backplane
11-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
11.9.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wave-locked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. Table 11-5 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths. The laser is tunable
over eight wavelengths at 50-GHz spacing or four at 100-GHz spacing.
11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10E Card:
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are DWDM muxponders for the ONS 15454
platform that support transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the
cards is “4x2.5G 10E MXP C” for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card and “4x2.5G 10E MXP L” for the
MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The cards multiplex four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into
Table 11-5 MXP_2.5G_10E Trunk Wavelengths
Band
Wavelength
(nm) Band
Wavelength
(nm)
30.3 1530.33 46.1 1546.12
30.3 1531.12 46.1 1546.92
30.3 1531.90 46.1 1547.72
30.3 1532.68 46.1 1548.51
34.2 1534.25 50.1 1550.12
34.2 1535.04 50.1 1550.92
34.2 1535.82 50.1 1551.72
34.2 1536.61 50.1 1552.52
38.1 1538.19 54.1 1554.13
38.1 1538.98 54.1 1554.94
38.1 1539.77 54.1 1555.75
38.1 1540.56 54.1 1556.55
42.1 1542.14 58.1 1558.17
42.1 1542.94 58.1 1558.98
42.1 1543.73 58.1 1559.79
42.1 1544.53 58.1 1560.61
11-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards provide wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5 Gbps client
interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead
bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards work with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709.
The cards support ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously
mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing
Function” section on page G-18.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G
card, which does not support transparent termination mode.
You can install MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can
provision a card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a
regenerator. The cards can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are
configured for transparent termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is
tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The
MXP_2.5G_10E_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable
across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm
lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card
faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side
for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber
connector.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision
a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.10.1 Key Features
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have the following high level features:
• Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals
are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows
recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards
have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include
an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and
intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is
defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
11-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
• High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor
and manage incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its
overhead bytes transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards
normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as maintenance
or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically synchronize
to one of the input client interface clocks.
• Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output
if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_2.5G_10E_C) or full L band
(MXP_2.5G_10E_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide
tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
11.10.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-11 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L faceplates and block diagram.
11-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
Figure 11-11 MXP_2.5G_10E _C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-1.
11.10.3 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MXP C
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MXP L
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RAM Processor
145941 Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Backplane
FEC/
Wrapper
E-FEC
Processor
(G.709 FEC)
Serial bus
uP bus
Onboard
Flash
memory
Client LEDs
DWDM LED
SR-1
(short reach/intra-office)
or IR-1
(intermediate range)
SFP client
optics modules
DWDM
(trunk)
10GE
(10GBASE-LR)
11-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.15 Jitter, page G-19
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
11.10.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. Both the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards implement the UT2 module.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card uses an
L-band version.
Table 11-6 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card. The
laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
11-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
Table 11-7 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The
laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Table 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards:
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The MXP_MR_2.5G card aggregates a mix and match of client Storage Area Network (SAN) service
client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM
signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per card and is compliant with
Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
Note In Software Release 7.0 and later, two additional operating modes have been made available to the user:
pure ESCON (all 8 ports running ESCON), and mixed mode (Port 1 running FC/GE/FICON, and Ports
5 through 8 running ESCON). When the card is part of a system running Software Release 6.0 or below,
only one operating mode, (FC/GE) is available for use.
The 2.5-Gbps Multirate Muxponder–Protected–100 GHz–Tunable 15xx.xx-15yy.yy (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
card aggregates various client SAN service client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into
one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides two long-reach
STM-16/OC-48 ports per card and is compliant with ITU-T G.957 and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
Because the cards are tunable to one of four adjacent grid channels on a 100-GHz spacing, each card is
available in eight versions, with 15xx.xx representing the first wavelength and 15yy.yy representing the
last wavelength of the four available on the card. In total, 32 DWDM wavelengths are covered in
accordance with the ITU-T 100-GHz grid standard, G.692, and Telcordia GR-2918-CORE, Issue 2. The
card versions along with their corresponding wavelengths are shown in Table 11-8.
The muxponders are intended to be used in applications with long DWDM metro or regional
unregenerated spans. Long transmission distances are achieved through the use of flat gain optical
amplifiers.
The client interface supports the following payload types:
• 2G FC
Table 11-8 Card Versions
Card Version Frequency Channels at 100 GHz (0.8 nm) Spacing
1530.33–1532.68 1530.33 nm 1531.12 nm 1531.90 nm 1532.68 nm
1534.25–1536.61 1534.25 nm 1535.04 nm 1535.82 nm 1536.61 nm
1538.19–1540.56 1538.19 nm 1538.98 nm 1539.77 nm 1540.56 nm
1542.14–1544.53 1542.14 nm 1542.94 nm 1543.73 nm 1544.53 nm
1546.12–1548.51 1546.12 nm 1546.92 nm 1547.72 nm 1548.51 nm
1550.12–1552.52 1550.12 nm 1550.92 nm 1551.72 nm 1552.52 nm
1554.13–1556.55 1554.13 nm 1554.94 nm 1555.75 nm 1556.55 nm
1558.17–1560.61 1558.17 nm 1558.98 nm 1559.79 nm 1560.61 nm
11-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
• 1G FC
• 2G FICON
• 1G FICON
• GE
• ESCON
Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to
a maximum limit of 2.5 Gbps.
Table 11-9 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current
version of the ITU-T Transparent Generic Framing Procedure (GFP-T) G.7041 supports transparent
mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and FICON.
In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed serializer/deserializer
(SERDES) is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2
of the SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the
second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel.
Table 11-10 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client ports. The table is
intended to show the full client payload configurations for the card.
Table 11-9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate ITU-T GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes
2G FICON 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FICON 1.06 Gbps Yes
GE 1.25 Gbps Yes
ESCON 0.2 Gbps Yes
Table 11-10 Client Data Rates and Ports
Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate
2G FC 1 2.125 Gbps
1G FC 1, 2 2.125 Gbps
2G FICON 1 2.125 Gbps
1G FICON 1, 2 2.125 Gbps
GE 1, 2 2.5 Gbps
1G FC
ESCON
(mixed mode)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
1.06 Gbps
0.8 Gbps
1.86 Gbps total
11-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
11.11.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-12 shows the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates.
1G FICON
ESCON
(mixed mode)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
1.06 Gbps
0.8 Gbps
1.86 Gbps total
GE
ESCON
(mixed mode)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
1.25 Gbps
0.8 Gbps
Total 2.05 Gbps
ESCON 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1.6 Gbps
Table 11-10 Client Data Rates and Ports (continued)
Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate
11-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Figure 11-12 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Figure 11-13 shows a block diagram of the MXP_MR_2.5G card. The card has eight SFP client
interfaces. Ports 1 and 2 can be used for GE, FC, FICON, or ESCON. Ports 3 through 8 are used for
ESCON client interfaces. There are two SERDES blocks dedicated to the high-speed interfaces (GE, FC,
FICON, and ESCON) and two SERDES blocks for the ESCON interfaces. A FPGA is provided to
support different configurations for different modes of operation. This FPGA has a Universal Test and
Operations Physical Interface for ATM (UTOPIA) interface. A transceiver add/drop multiplexer
MXP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G
124077
MXP
MR
2.5G
15xx.xx
15xx.xx
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
MXPP
MR
2.5G
15xx.xx
15xx.xx
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TXRX TX RX TX
DWDMB DWDMA
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TXRX TX RX TX
DWDM
RX TX
11-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
(TADM) chip supports framing. Finally, the output signal is serialized and connected to the trunk front
end with a direct modulation laser. The trunk receive signal is converted into an electrical signal with an
avalanche photodiode (APD), is deserialized, and is then sent to the TADM framer and FPGA.
The MXPP_MR_2.5G is the same, except a 50/50 splitter divides the power at the trunk interface. In the
receive direction, there are two APDs, two SERDES blocks, and two TADM framers. This is necessary
to monitor both the working and protect paths. A switch selects one of the two paths to connect to the
client interface.
Figure 11-13 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback configuration on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks
with the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable
damage to the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
11.11.2 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Functions
The functions of the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards are:
• G.18 Performance Monitoring, page G-20
• G.19 Distance Extension, page G-20
• G.20 Slot Compatibility, page G-20
• G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches, page G-20
• G.22 Client and Trunk Ports, page G-20
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
SFP 1
SFP 6
SFP 5
SFP 4
SFP 3
SFP 2
SFP 8
SERDES
FPGA
(for
FC,
GE,
FICON,
ESCON,
PCS,
B2B,
GFP-T)
SERDES
SFP 7
High-speed
SERDES
QDR
SRAM
TADM
framer
Laser
APD
Serializer
Deserializer
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
Trunk
interface
134986
GE, FC,
FICON,
ESCON
GE, FC,
FICON,
ESCON
11-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-10 on page G-12
11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards:
• NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-282
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 (MXP_MR_2.5G only)
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards MXP_MR_10DME_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards aggregate a mix of client SAN service client
inputs (GE, FICON, and Fibre Channel) into one 10.0 Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk
side. It provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.957.
The cards support aggregation of the following signal types:
• 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet
• 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)
• 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
Note On the card faceplates, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are displayed as
10DME_C and 10DME_L, respectively.
Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it safely.
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead
bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The cards support
ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18.
11-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to
a maximum limit of 10 Gbps.
You can install MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are not compatible with the
MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode.
The MXP_MR_10DME_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is
tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The
MXP_MR_10DME_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable
across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm
lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card
faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side
for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber
connector.
Table 11-11 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The
current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols,
including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON.
In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to
an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed
SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second
STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel.
There are two FPGAs on each MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L, and a group of four
ports is mapped to each FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5
through 8. Table 11-12 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for
Ports 1 through 4, and Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port.
Table 11-11 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Client Interface Data Rates and
Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes
2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
1.06 Gbps Yes
Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes
Table 11-12 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8
Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC
1 5 X X X X
2 6 X X — —
11-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE
and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE.
A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port
indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to
stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication The MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards support FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit
extension of up to 1600 km (994.1 miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to
400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled.
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards feature a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line
port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The cards contains eight
12.5 degree downward tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses
two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector
with a 45 degree downward angle.
The throughput of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards is affected by the
following parameters:
• Distance extension—If distance extension is enabled on the card, it provides more throughput but
more latency. If distance extension is disabled on the card, the buffer to buffer credits on the storage
switch affects the throughput; higher the buffer to buffer credits higher is the throughput.
Note For each link to operate at the maximum throughput, it requires a minimum number of buffer
credits to be available on the devices which the link connects to. The number of buffer
credits required is a function of the distance between the storage switch extension ports and
the link bandwidth, that is, 1G, 2G, or 4G. These buffer credits are provided by either the
storage switch (if distance extension is disabled) or by both the storage switch and the card
(if distance extension is enabled).
• Forward Error Correction (FEC)—If Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) is enabled on the trunk port of the
card, the throughout is significantly reduced in comparison to standard FEC being set on the trunk
port.
Note If distance extension is enabled on the card, the FEC status does not usually affect the
throughput of the card.
• Payload size—The throughput of the card decreases with decrease in payload size.
The resultant throughput of the card is usually the combined effect of the above parameters.
11.12.1 Key Features
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have the following high-level features:
3 7 X X X —
4 8 X X — —
Table 11-12 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 (continued)
Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC
11-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows
recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
cards have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These
include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and
intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is
defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
• Y-cable protection: Supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the
same port number and signal rate. See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27 for
more detailed information.
• High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• ALS: A safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS provisioning
for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, see the “NTP-G162 Change the
ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448.
• Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH bytes to monitor and manage
incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its OH bytes
transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
cards normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as
maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically
synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks.
Note MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards cannot be used for line timing.
• Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output
if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_MR_10DME_C) or full L band
(MXP_MR_10DME_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide
tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
• You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to
create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
• From Software Release 9.0, the fast switch feature of MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards along with the buffer-to-buffer credit recovery feature of MDS
switches, prevents reinitialization of ISL links during Y-cable switchovers.
11-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
11.12.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-14 shows the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L faceplates and block diagram.
Figure 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Faceplates and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes
irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
10DME-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
145767
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
DWDM 4
RX TX
10DME-L
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
DWDM 4
RX TX
SPF 1/1
4G FC
SerDes
1 x QDR
2M x 36bit Burst4
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA Framer G.709/FEC
OTN MXP UT2
Data path
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 2/1
SPF 3/1
CPU
Core
FPGA
Power supply
DCC/GCC
CPUC bus
SPF 4/1
SPF 6/1
4G FC
SerDes
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 7/1
SPF 8/1
SPF 9/1
Client
ports
Group 1
Group 2
11-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
11.12.3 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Functions
The functions of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.12.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. Both the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards implement the UT2
module. The MXP_MR_10DME_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the
MXP_MR_10DME_L card uses an L-band version.
Table 11-13 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_C card.
The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-13 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
11-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
Table 11-14 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
The laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-13 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Table 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
11-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards:
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
• NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-300
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards aggregate a variety of client service inputs
(GigabitEthernet, fibre channel, OTU2, OTU2e, and OC-192) into a single 40-Gbps OTU3/OTU3e
signal on the trunk side. You can either have 40E-MXP-C, or 40ME-MXP-C card based on your
requirement, though the CTC name 40E-MXP-C is common for both. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
and 40ME-MXP-C cards support aggregation of the following signals:
• With overclock enabled on the trunk port:
– 10-Gigabit Fibre Channel
– OTU2e
• With overclock disabled on the trunk port:
– 8-Gigabit Fibre Channel
– 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (GFP framing)
– 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (WIS framing)
– OC-192/STM-64
– OTU2
Caution Handle the card with care. Dropping or misuse of the card could result in permanent damage.
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes
transparently, section, or line termination.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate performance monitoring. The
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards work with the OTN devices defined in
ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODTU23 multiplexing, an industry standard method for
asynchronously mapping client payloads into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing
Function” section on page G-18.
You can install and provision the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards in a linear
configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
The client ports of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards interoperates with all the
existing TXP/MXP (OTU2 trunk) cards.
The client port of 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards does not interoperate with
OTU2_XP card when the signal rate is OTU1e (11.049 Gbps) and the “No Fixed Stuff” option is enabled
on the trunk port of OTU2_XP card.
11-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
For OTU2 and OTU2e client protocols, Enhanced FEC (EFEC) is not supported on Port 1 of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. Table 11-15 lists the FEC configuration supported
on OTU2/OTU2e protocol for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
When setting up the card for the first time, or when the card comes up after clearing the LOS-P condition
due to fiber cut, the trunk port of the 40G-MXP-C card takes about 6 minutes to lock a signal. The trunk
port of the 40G-MXP-C card raises an OTUK-LOF alarm when the card is comes up. The alarm clears
when the trunk port locks the signal.
When a protection switch occurs on the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards, the recovery from
PSM protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes.
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards is tunable over C-band on the trunk port. The
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards support pluggable XFPs on the client ports on the
card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side, and XFP modules on the client side
for optical cable termination. The XFP pluggable modules are SR, LR, MM, DWDM, or CWDM and
support an LC fiber connector. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards contains four
XFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each XFP uses two LC connectors, which
are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual LC connector facing downward at
45 degrees.
Table 11-16 shows the input data rate for each client interface.
11.13.1 Key Features
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards provides the following key features:
• The 40G-MXP-C card uses the RZ-DQPSK 40G modulation format.
Table 11-15 Client Interface Data Rates for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C
and 40ME-MXP-C Client
Port
FEC Configuration Supported on
OTU2/OTU2e Client Protocol
Port 1 Only Standard FEC
Port 2 Standard and Enhanced FEC
Port 3 Standard and Enhanced FEC
Port 4 Standard and Enhanced FEC
Table 11-16 Client Interface Input Data Rates for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Client Interface Input Data Rate
8-Gigabit Fibre Channel 8.48 Gbps
10-Gigabit Fibre Channel 10.519 Gbps
10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy 10.312 Gbps
10-GigabitEthernet WAN-Phy 9.953 Gbps
OC-192/STM-64 9.953 Gbps
OTU2 10.709 Gbps
OTU2e 11.096 Gbps
11-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
• The 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards uses the CP-DQPSK modulation format.
• Onboard E-FEC processor—The E-FEC functionality improves the correction capability of the
transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard
RS (239,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented (according to G.975.1 I.7)
in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards support both the standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC standard,
which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission
range on these interfaces.
• Y-cable protection—Supports Y-cable protection only between the same card type on ports with the
same port number and signal rate. For more information on Y-cable protection, seethe
“G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection” section on page G-27.
Note Y-cable cannot be created on a 10 GE port when WIS framing is enabled on the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
• Unidirectional regeneration—The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards supports
unidirectional regeneration configuration. Each 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card
in the configuration regenerates the signal received from another 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C card in one direction.
Note When you configure the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards in the
Unidirectional Regen mode, ensure that the payload is not configured on the pluggable port
modules of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card.
11-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Figure 11-15 shows a typical unidirectional regeneration configuration.
Figure 11-15 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards in Unidirectional Regeneration
Configuration
• High level provisioning support—The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco Transport Planner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)—A safety mechanism, Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS), is
used in the event of a fiber cut. The Auto Restart ALS option is supported only for OC-192/STM-64
and OTU2 payloads. The Manual Restart ALS option is supported for all payloads. For more
information on provisioning ALS for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards, see
the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead—The cards are provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization—The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
cards synchronize to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards. Because of a
maintenance or upgrade activity, if the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are not
available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks.
• Squelching policy—The cards are set to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the
DWDM receiver, or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages
MS-AIS insertion.
• The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards are tunable across the full C-band
wavelength.
278759
Client
DWDM
System
DWDM
System
40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C
40G-MXP-C
40G-MXP-C
Client
DWDM
Trunk
DWDM
Trunk
DWDM
Trunk
DWDM
Trunk
11-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
11.13.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-16 shows the faceplate and block diagram of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards.
Figure 11-16 Faceplate and Block Diagram of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes
irreparable damage to the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
11.13.3 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Functions
The functions of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards are:
278757
XFP
XFP
XFP
XFP
MSA
100
40 G
FEC/EF EC Trunk module
TDC
EDFA
XFP Child card
Tx
Rx Trunk
4x XFI
SFI 5.1
interface
Threshold
control
40G-MXP-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
XFP1
XFP2
XFP3
XFP4
TRUNK
RX 2 TX RX 1 TX
RX 4 TX RX 3 TX
TRUNK
TX
MX
RX
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
11-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.13.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards use trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which
allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. These cards implement the UT2
module; they use a C-band version of the UT2.
Table 11-17 lists the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the
ITU grid.
Table 11-17 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
11-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards:
• NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-322
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are Gigabit Ethernet Xponders for the ONS 15454
ANSI and ETSI platforms.
Note GE_XPE card is the enhanced version of the GE_XP card and 10GE_XPE card is the enhanced version
of the 10GE_XP card.
The cards aggregate Ethernet packets received on the client ports for transport on C-band trunk ports that
operate on a 100-GHz grid. The trunk ports operate with ITU-T G.709 framing and either FEC or E-FEC.
The GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards are designed for bulk point-to-point transport over 10GE LAN PHY
wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-17 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
wavelengths. The GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards are designed for bulk GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE
point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, multipoint-to-multipoint transport over 10GE LAN PHY
wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY
wavelengths.
You can install and provision the GE_XP, and GE_XPE cards in a linear configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The GE_XP
and GE_XPE are double-slot cards with twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet
trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE are single-slot cards with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client
ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client ports support SX, LX, and ZX SFPs and SR
and 10GBASE-LR XFPs. (LR2 XFPs are not supported.) The trunk ports support a DWDM XFP.
11-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
The RAD pluggables (ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW= and ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW=) do not support:
• No loopbacks (Terminal or Facility)
• RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) alarm
• AIS and LOS alarm
Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf, or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must
be installed in a shelf where a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed.
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned to perform different Gigabit
Ethernet transport roles. All the cards can work as Layer 2 switches. However, the 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE cards can also perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponders (10GE TXP mode), and the
GE_XP and GE_XPE can perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponders (10GE
MXP or 20GE MXP mode). Table 11-18 shows the card modes supported by each card.
Note Changing the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode requires the ports to be in a
OOS-DSBL (ANSI) or Locked, disabled (ETSI) service state. In addition, no circuits can be provisioned
on the cards when the mode is being changed.
11.14.1 Key Features
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have the following high-level features:
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) that allows you to bundle several physical ports together
to form a single logical channel.
• Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) protocol that facilitates proactive connectivity
monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation.
Table 11-18 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Card Mode Cards Description
Layer 2
Ethernet
switch
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Provides capability to switch between any two ports irrespective of
client or trunk port. Supported Ethernet protocols and services include
1+1 protection, QoS (Quality of Service), CoS (Class of Service),
QinQ, MAC learning, MAC address retrieval, service provider
VLANs (SVLANs), IGMP snooping and Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR), link integrity, and other Ethernet switch
services.
10GE TXP 10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
Provides a point-to-point application in which each 10 Gigabit
Ethernet client port is mapped to a 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk port.
10GE MXP
20GE MXP
GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provides the ability to multiplex the twenty Gigabit Ethernet client
ports on the card to one or both of its 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports.
The card can be provisioned as a single MXP with twenty Gigabit
Ethernet client ports mapped to one trunk port (Port 21) or as two
MXPs with ten Gigabit Ethernet client ports mapped to a trunk port
(Ports 1 to 10 mapped to Port 21, and Ports 11-20 mapped to Port 22).
11-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol that facilitates link
monitoring, remote failure indication, and remote loopback.
• Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) that controls network loops, handles link failures, and improves
convergence time.
• Configurable service VLANs (SVLANs) and customer VLANs (CVLANs).
• Ingress rate limiting that can be applied on both SVLANs and CVLANs. You can create SVLAN
and CVLAN profiles and can associate a SVLAN profile to both UNI and NNI ports; however, you
can associate a CVLAN profile only to UNI ports.
• CVLAN rate limiting that is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode.
• Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) to class of service (CoS) mapping that you can configure
for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN based on the incoming DSCP bits. This
feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
• Ports, in Layer 2 switch mode, can be provisioned as network-to-network interfaces (NNIs) or
user-network interfaces (UNIs) to facilitate service provider to customer traffic management.
• Broadcast drop-and-continue capability for VOD and broadcast video applications.
• Gigabit Ethernet MXP, TXP, and Layer 2 switch capability over the ONS 15454 DWDM platform.
• Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf
assembly, ONS 15454 ETSI high-density shelf assembly, ONS 15454 M2, and the ONS 15454 M6
shelf assemblies. Compatible with TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards.
• Far-End Laser Control (FELC) that is supported on copper SFPs from Release 8.52 and later
releases. For more information on FELC, see the “G.36 Far-End Laser Control” section on
page G-32.
• Layer 2 switch mode that provides VLAN translation, QinQ, ingress CoS, egress QoS, Fast Ethernet
protection switching, and other Layer 2 Ethernet services.
• Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards. Also interoperable with
Cisco Catalyst 6500 and Cisco 7600 series Gigabit Ethernet, 10 GE interfaces and CRS-1 10GE
interfaces.
• The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports
and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client Gigabit Ethernet signals are mapped into an
ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing when configured in one of the
MXP modes (10GE MXP or 20GE MXP).
• ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring
and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous and asynchronous mapping. E-FEC with
ITU-T G.709 ODU and 2.7 Gbps with greater than 8 dB coding gain.
• IEEE 802.3 frame format that is supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame
size is 64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable.
• MAC learning capability in Layer 2 switch mode.
• MAC address retrieval in cards provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode.
• When a port is in UNI mode, tagging can be configured as transparent or selective. In transparent
mode, only SVLANs in the VLAN database of the node can be configured. In selective mode, a
CVLAN- to-SVLAN relationship can be defined.
• Layer 2 VLAN port mapping that allows the cards to be configured as multiple Gigabit Ethernet
TXPs and MXPs.
• Y-cable protection is configurable in TXP and MXP modes.
11-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• Two protection schemes are available in Layer 2 mode. They are:
– 1+1 protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for client ports.
– Fast Automatic Protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for trunk
ports.
• End-to-end Ethernet link integrity.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules (SFPs and XFPs)—Client ports support tri-rate SX, LX,
and ZX SFPs, and 10-Gbps SR1 XFPs.
• Pluggable trunk interface optic modules; trunk ports support the DWDM XFP.
• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping that restricts the flooding of multicast
traffic by forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present.
• Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for applications using wide-scale deployment of multicast
traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network.
• Ingress CoS that assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of
incoming frames.
• Egress QoS that defines the QoS capabilities for the egress port.
• MAC address learning that facilitates switch processing.
• Storm Control that limits the number of packets passing through a port. You can define the
maximum number of packets allowed per second for the following types of traffic: Broadcast,
Multicast, and Unicast. The threshold for each type of traffic is independent and the maximum
number of packets allowed per second for each type of traffic is 16777215.
11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list
Table 11-19 lists the protocol compatibility for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
11.14.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-17 shows the GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The GE_XPE faceplate and block diagram
looks the same.
Table 11-19 Protocol Compatibility List for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Protocol L1 1+1 FAPS IGMP REP LACP CFM EFM
L1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No
1+1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No
FAPS Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
IGMP Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
REP No No No Yes No Yes No
LACP No No No No No No No
CFM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
EFM No No No No No No No
11-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Figure 11-17 GE_XP and GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP and GE_XPE
trunk ports are displayed as follows:
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate
• 21-1 and 22-1 on CTC
• 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table
Figure 11-18 shows the 10GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The 10 GE_XPE faceplate and block
diagram looks the same.
FAIL
ACT
SF
GE-XP
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
5
RX TX
6
RX TX
7
RX TX
8
RX TX
9
RX TX
10
RX TX
11
RX TX
12
RX TX
13
RX TX
14
RX TX
15
RX TX
16
RX TX
17
RX TX
18
RX TX
19
RX TX
20
RX TX
RX TX
2 TRUNK 1
CONSOLE
T2 T1
RX TX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
CLIENT: +3dBm
TRUNK: +1dBm
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
159052
12GE
Client
ports
CONN
8GE
Client
ports
XAUI
to
SF14
XAUI
to
SF14
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking
BCM
5650x SCL FPGA
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JULY 26, 2001
Client
Ports 9-14
Client GE
Ports 1-8
GE
Client
Ports 15-20
Trunk GE
Ports 1-2
10GE
BCM 5650x with
Ethernet ASIC
11-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Figure 11-18 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram
The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card trunk ports are displayed as follows:
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate
• 3-1 and 4-1 on CTC
• 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes
irreparable damage to the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
CLIENT: +3dBm
TRUNK: +1dBm
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
10GE
XP
RX 2 TX TRUNK RX 1 TX RX 2 TX CLIENT RX 1 TX
COMPLIES WITH
21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11
EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE
No.50, DATED
JULY 26, 2001
FAIL
ACT
SF
CONSOLE
159053
159053 XFP XAUI
SERDES
XFP XAUI
SERDES
XAUI
to
SF14
XAUI
to
SF14
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking
BCM 5650x
with
Ethernet ASIC
SCL FPGA
Client
Ports 1-2
10GE
Trunk
Ports 1-2
10GE
11-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.4 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Functions
The functions of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.14.4.1 Client Interface
The client interface is implemented with separately orderable SFP or XFP modules. The client interfaces
support the following tri-rate SFPs and XFPs using dual LC connectors and multimode fiber:
• SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC - 850 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-SX)
• SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-LX)
• SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-ZX)
• SFP - 10/100/1000Base-T - Copper (PID ONS-SE-ZE-EL) Intra office up to 100;
Cable: RJ45 STP CAT5, CAT5E, and CAT6
• SFP - 1000Base BX D/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXD)
• SFP - 1000Base BX U/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXU)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-LX10)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-FX)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS1/E1 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP1) (GE_XPE only)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS3/E3 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP3) (GE_XPE only)
• SFP - E1/DS1 over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW) (GE_XPE only)
• SFP - E3/DS3 PDH over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW) (GE_XPE only)
Note The recommended topology for using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs is shown in
Figure 11-19.
Figure 11-19 Recommended Topology for Using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS -SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs
The client interfaces support the following dual-rate XFP using dual LC connectors and single-mode
fiber:
249504
Network A with
Internal Timing
Network B with
LoopbackTiming
Node A
Ethernet
Network
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW
on Port n of GE_XPE Card
in Node A with Loopback Timing
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW
on Port n of GE_XPE Card
in Node B with AdaptiveTiming
Node B
11-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• XFP - OC-192/STM-64/10GE/10-FC/OTU2 - 1310 SR - SM LC (PID: ONS-XC-10G-S1)
• XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-L2)
• XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-C)
Note If ONS-XC-10G-C XFP is used on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards on
client port 1, the maximum temperature at which the system qualifies is +45 degree Celsius.
The client interfaces support the following multimode XFP using dual LC connectors and multi-mode
fiber:
• XFP - OC-192/10GFC/10GE - 850 nm MM LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM)
11.14.4.2 DWDM Trunk Interface
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports
operating at 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10.3125 Gbps) or 10 Gigabit Ethernet into OTU2 (nonstandard
11.0957 Gbps). The ports are compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE
standards. The ports are capable of carrying C-band and L-band wavelengths through insertion of
DWDM XFPs. Forty channels are available in the 1550-nm C band 100-GHz ITU grid, and forty
channels are available in the L band.
11.14.4.3 Configuration Management
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following configuration
management parameters:
• Port name—User-assigned text string.
• Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status.
• MTU—Provisionable maximum transfer unit (MTU) to set the maximum number of bytes per
frames accepted on the port.
• Mode—Provisional port mode, either Autonegotiation or the port speed.
• Flow Control—Flow control according to IEEE 802.1x pause frame specification can be enabled or
disabled for TX and RX ports.
• Bandwidth—Provisionable maximum bandwidth allowed for the port.
• Ingress CoS—Assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of
incoming frames.
• Egress QoS—Defines the QoS capabilities at the egress port.
• NIM—Defines the port network interface management type based on Metro Ethernet Forum
specifications. Ports can be defined as UNI or NNI.
• MAC Learning—MAC address learning to facilitate switch processing.
• VLAN tagging provided according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Note When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are provisioned in a MXP or TXP mode,
only the following parameters are available: Port Name, State, MTU, Mode, Flow control, and
Bandwidth.
11-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.4.4 Security
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card ports can be provisioned to block traffic from a
user-defined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic is normally switched. You can manually
specify the set of blocked MAC addresses for each port. Each port of the card can receive traffic from a
limited predefined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic will be dropped. This capability is a
subset of the Cisco IOS “Port Security” feature.
11.14.4.5 Card Protection
The following card protection schemes are available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
• Y-Cable Protection—See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27.
• 1+1 Protection—See the “G.35.2 1+1 Protection” section on page G-30.
• Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection—See the “G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection” section on
page G-31.
11.14.4.5.1 Related Procedures for Card Protection
The following are the related procedures for creating card protection on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE cards:
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-168
• DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings,
page 11-393
11.14.5 IGMP Snooping
As networks increase in size, multicast routing becomes critically important as a means to determine
which segments require multicast traffic and which do not. IP multicasting allows IP traffic to be
propagated from one source to a number of destinations, or from many sources to many destinations.
Rather than sending one packet to each destination, one packet is sent to the multicast group identified
by a single IP destination group address. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can learn
up to a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. This includes groups on all the VLANs.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping restricts the flooding of multicast traffic by
forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present.
When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card receives an IGMP leave group message from
a host, it removes the host port from the multicast forwarding table after generating group specific
queries to ensure that no other hosts interested in traffic for the particular group are present on that port.
Even in the absence of any “leave” message, the cards have a timeout mechanism to update the group
table with the latest information. After a card relays IGMP queries from the multicast router, it deletes
entries periodically if it does not receive any IGMP membership reports from the multicast clients.
In a multicast router, general queries are sent on a VLAN when Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
is enabled on the VLAN. The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card forwards queries to all
ports belonging to the VLAN. All hosts interested in this multicast traffic send Join requests and are
11-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
added to the forwarding table entry. The Join requests are forwarded only to router ports. By default,
these router ports are learned dynamically. However, they can also be statically configured at the port
level in which case the static configuration overrides dynamic learning.
For information about interaction of IGMP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
11.14.5.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions
The following guidelines and restrictions apply to IGMP snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards:
• IGMP snooping V2 is supported as specified in RFC 4541.
• IGMP snooping V3 is not supported and the packets are flooded in the SVLAN.
• Layer 2 multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping are dynamic.
• GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support IGMP snooping on 128 stacked VLANs and GE_XPE and
10GE_XPE cards support up to 256 stacked VLANs that are enabled.
• IGMP snooping can be configured per SVLAN or CVLAN. By default, IGMP snooping is disabled
on all SVLANs and CVLANs.
• IGMP snooping on CVLAN is enabled only when:
– MVR is enabled.
– UNI ports are in selective add and selective translate modes. For each UNI port, a CVLAN must
be specified for which IGMP snooping is to be enabled.
• IGMP snooping can be enabled only on one CVLAN per port. If you enable IGMP snooping on
CVLAN, you cannot enable IGMP snooping on the associated SVLAN and vice versa. The number
of VLANs that can be enabled for IGMP snooping cannot exceed 128.
• When IGMP snooping is enabled on double-tagged packets, CVLAN has to be the same on all ports
attached to the same SVLAN.
• When IGMP snooping is working with the Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS) in a ring-based
setup, it is advisable to configure all NNI ports as static router ports. This minimizes the multicast
traffic hit when a FAPS switchover occurs.
The following conditions are raised from IGMP snooping at the card:
• MCAST-MAC-TABLE-FULL—This condition is raised when the multicast table is full and a new
join request is received. This table is cleared when at least one entry gets cleared from the multicast
table after the alarm is raised.
• MCAST-MAC-ALIASING—This condition is raised when there are multiple L3 addresses that map
to the same L2 address in a VLAN. This is a transient condition.
For more information on severity level of these conditions and procedure to clear these alarms, refer to
the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide.
11.14.5.2 Fast-Leave Processing
Note Fast-Leave processing is also known as Immediate-Leave.
11-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
IGMP snooping Fast-Leave processing allows the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE to
remove an interface that sends a leave message from the forwarding table without first sending group
specific queries to the interface. When you enable IGMP Fast-Leave processing, the card immediately
removes a port from the IP multicast group when it detects an IGMP, version 2 (IGMPv2) leave message
on that port.
11.14.5.3 Static Router Port Configuration
Multicast-capable ports are added to the forwarding table for every IP multicast entry. The card learns
of such ports through the PIM method.
11.14.5.4 Report Suppression
Report suppression is used to avoid a storm of responses to an IGMP query. When this feature is enabled,
a single IGMP report is sent to each multicast group in response to a single query. Whenever an IGMP
snooping report is received, report suppression happens if the report suppression timer is running. The
Report suppression timer is started when the first report is received for a general query. Then this time
is set to the response time specified in general query.
11.14.5.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters
An entry in a counter contains multicasting statistical information for the IGMP snooping capable
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. It provides statistical information about IGMP
messages that have been transmitted and received. IGMP statistics and counters can be viewed via CTC
from the Performance > Ether Ports > Statistics tab.
This information can be stored in the following counters:
• cisTxGeneralQueries—Number of general queries transmitted through an interface.
• cisTxGroupSpecificQueries—Total group specific queries transmitted through an interface.
• cisTxReports—Total membership reports transmitted through an interface.
• cisTxLeaves—Total Leave messages transmitted through an interface.
• cisRxGeneralQueries—Total general queries received at an interface.
• cisRxGroupSpecificQueries—Total Group Specific Queries received at an interface.
• cisRxReports—Total Membership Reports received at an interface.
• cisRxLeaves—Total Leave messages received at an interface.
• cisRxValidPackets—Total valid IGMP packets received at an interface.
• cisRxInvalidPackets—Total number of packets that are not valid IGMP messages received at an
interface.
11.14.5.6 Related Procedure for Enabling IGMP Snooping
To enable IGMP snooping on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on
page 11-411.
11-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.6 Multicast VLAN Registration
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications using wide-scale deployment of
multicast traffic across an Ethernet-ring-based service provider network (for example, the broadcast of
multiple television channels over a service-provider network). MVR allows a subscriber on a port to
subscribe and unsubscribe to a multicast stream on the network-wide multicast VLAN. It allows the
single multicast VLAN to be shared in the network while subscribers remain in separate VLANs. MVR
provides the ability to continuously send multicast streams in the multicast VLAN, but to isolate the
streams from the subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.
MVR assumes that subscriber ports subscribe and unsubscribe (“Join” and “Leave”) these multicast
streams by sending out IGMP Join and Leave messages. These messages can originate from an IGMP
version-2-compatible host with an Ethernet connection. MVR operates on the underlying mechanism of
IGMP snooping. MVR works only when IGMP snooping is enabled.
The card identifies the MVR IP multicast streams and their associated MAC addresses in the card
forwarding table, intercepts the IGMP messages, and modifies the forwarding table to include or remove
the subscriber as a receiver of the multicast stream, even though the receivers is in a different VLAN
than the source. This forwarding behavior selectively allows traffic to cross between different VLANs.
Note When MVR is configured, the port facing the router must be configured as NNI in order to allow the
router to generate or send multicast stream to the host with the SVLAN. If router port is configured as
UNI, the MVR will not work properly.
11.14.6.1 Related Procedure for Enabling MVR
To enable MVR on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G206 Enable
MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card” section on page 11-413.
11.14.7 MAC Address Learning
The GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses. MAC address learning can be enabled
or disabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards. The cards learn the MAC address of packets
they receive on each port and add the MAC address and its associated port number to the MAC address
learning table. As stations are added or removed from the network, the GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards
update the MAC address learning table, adding new dynamic addresses and aging out those that are
currently not in use.
MAC address learning can be enabled or disabled per SVLAN. When the configuration is changed from
enable to disable, all the related MAC addresses are cleared. The following conditions apply:
• If MAC address learning is enabled on per port basis, the MAC address learning is not enabled on
all VLANs, but only on VLANs that have MAC address learning enabled.
• If per port MAC address learning is disabled then the MAC address learning is disabled on all
VLANs, even if it is enabled on some of the VLAN supported by the port.
• If the per port MAC address learning is configured on GE-XP and 10 GE-XP cards, before upgrading
to GE-XPE or 10 GE-XPE cards, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN. Failing to do so
disables MAC address learning.
11-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.7.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Learning
To enable MAC address learning on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-401.
11.14.8 MAC Address Retrieval
MAC addresses learned can be retrieved or cleared on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. The MAC addresses can be retrieved using the CTC or TL1
interface.
GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses and GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support
16K MAC addresses. To avoid delay in processing requests, the learned MAC addresses are retrieved
using an SVLAN range. The valid SVLAN range is from 1 to 4093.
The MAC addresses of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can also be retrieved.
The card MAC addresses are static and are used for troubleshooting activities. One MAC address is
assigned to each client, trunk, and CPU ports of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
These internal MAC addresses can be used to determine if the packets received on the far-end node are
generated by GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
For MAC address retrieval, the following conditions apply:
• The cards must be provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
• MAC address learning must be enabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE or 10 GE_XPE cards.
• MAC address learning must be enabled per port on GE_XP or 10 GE_XP cards.
11.14.8.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Retrieving
To retrieve and clear MAC addresses on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-403.
11.14.9 Link Integrity
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card support end-to-end Ethernet link integrity. This
capability is integral to providing an Ethernet private line service and correct operation of Layer 2 and
Layer 3 protocols on the attached Ethernet devices.
The link integrity feature propagates a trunk fault on all the affected SVLAN circuits in order to squelch
the far end client interface. Ethernet-Advanced IP Services (E-AIS) packets are generated on a
per-port/SVLAN basis. An E-AIS format is compliant with ITU Y.1731.
Note E-AIS packets are marked with a CoS value of 7 (also called .1p bits). Ensure that the network is not
overloaded and there is sufficient bandwidth for this queue in order to avoid packet drops.
When link integrity is enabled on a per-port SVLAN basis, E-AIS packets are generated when the
following alarms are raised;
• LOS-P
11-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• OTUKLOF/LOM
• SIGLOSS
• SYNCHLOSS
• OOS
• PPM not present
When link integrity is enabled, GE_XP and 10 GE_XP card supports up to128 SVLANs and GE_XPE,
10 GE_XPE can support up to 256 SVLANs.
11.14.9.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Link Integrity
To enable link integrity on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G205
Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-406.
11.14.10 Ingress CoS
Ingress CoS functionality enables differentiated services across the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. A
wide range of networking requirements can be provisioned by specifying the class of service applicable
to each transmitted traffic.
When a CVLAN is configured as ingress CoS, the per-port settings are not considered. A maximum of
128 CVLAN and CoS relationships can be configured.
11.14.10.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Ingress CoS
To enable Ingress CoS on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the:
• “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings”
section on page 11-381
• “DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC” section on page 11-347
11.14.11 CVLAN Rate Limiting
CVLAN rate limiting is supported on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. CVLAN rate
limiting is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode. The following limitations and restrictions
apply to CVLAN rate limiting:
• CVLAN rate limiting is not supported for the following service types:
– Selective translate mode
– Transparent mode
– Selective double add mode
– Selective translate add mode
– Untagged packets
– CVLAN range
– Services associated with the channel group
• CVLAN rate limiting and SVLAN rate limiting cannot be applied to the same service instance.
11-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) is not supported for CVLAN rate limiting.
• A VLAN profile with Link Integrity option enabled cannot be used to perform CVLAN rate limiting.
• On GE_XP and 10 GE_XP cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 128 services.
However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 192 minus
the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of
64 CVLAN rate limiting service instances).
• On GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 256 services.
However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 384 minus
the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of
128 CVLAN rate limiting service instances).
11.14.11.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CVLAN Rate
To provision CVLAN rate on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card”
section on page 11-408.
11.14.12 DSCP to CoS Mapping
DSCP to CoS mapping can be configured for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN
based on the incoming DSCP bits. This feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
PCLI is not supported for DSCP to CoS mapping.
DSCP to CoS mapping is supported for the following service types:
– Selective add mode
– Selective translate mode
– Transparent mode
– Selective double add mode
– Selective translate add mode
– Untagged packets
– CVLAN range
– Services associated with the channel group
11.14.12.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CoS Based on DSCP
To provision CoS based on DSCP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings” section on
page 11-399.
11.14.13 Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of the IEEE802.3ad standard that allows you to
bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a network device
such as a switch to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer device.
11-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
LACP allows you to form a single Layer 2 link automatically from two or more Ethernet links. This
protocol ensures that both ends of the Ethernet link are functional and agree to be members of the
aggregation group before the link is added to the group. LACP must be enabled at both ends of the link
to be operational.
For more information on LACP, refer to the IEEE802.3ad standard. For information about interaction of
LACP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
11.14.13.1 Advantages of LACP
LACP provides the following advantages:
• High-speed network that transfers more data than any single port or device.
• High reliability and redundancy. If a port fails, traffic continues on the remaining ports.
• Hashing algorithm that allows to apply load balancing policies on the bundled ports.
11.14.13.2 Functions of LACP
LACP performs the following functions in the system:
• Maintains configuration information to control aggregation.
• Exchanges configuration information with other peer devices.
• Attaches or detaches ports from the link aggregation group based on the exchanged configuration
information.
• Enables data flow when both sides of the aggregation group are synchronized.
11.14.13.3 Modes of LACP
LACP can be configured in the following modes:
• On — Default. In this mode, the ports do not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
• Active — In this mode, the ports send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
• Passive — In this mode, the ports do not send LACP packets until the partner sends LACP packets.
After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports send LACP packets.
11.14.13.4 Parameters of LACP
LACP uses the following parameters to control aggregation:
• System Identifier—A unique identification assigned to each system. It is the concatenation of the
system priority and a globally administered individual MAC address.
• Port Identification—A unique identifier for each physical port in the system. It is the concatenation
of the port priority and the port number.
• Port Capability Identification—An integer, called a key, that identifies the capability of one port to
aggregate with another port. There are two types of keys:
– Administrative key—The network administrator configures this key.
– Operational key—The LACP assigns this key to a port, based on its aggregation capability.
• Aggregation Identifier—A unique integer that is assigned to each aggregator and is used for
identification within the system.
11-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.13.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes
LACP supports the following unicast hashing schemes:
• Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Note Unicast hashing schemes apply to unicast traffic streams only when the destination MAC address is
already learned by the card. Hence, MAC learning must be enabled to support load balancing as per the
configured hashing scheme. If the destination MAC address is not learned, the hashing scheme is Ucast
Src Dst IP TCP UDP.
11.14.13.6 LACP Limitations and Restrictions
The LACP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and
restrictions:
• Hot standby link state is not supported on the channel group.
• Marker protocol generator is not supported.
• ALS cannot be configured on the channel group.
• Loopback configuration cannot be applied on the channel group.
11.14.13.7 Related Procedure for LACP
To provision Channel Group using LACP, see the “NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings” section on page 11-345.
11.14.14 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is part of the IEEE 802.1ag standard. The Ethernet
CFM is an end-to-end per service instance that supports the Ethernet layer Operations, Administration,
and Management (OAM) protocol. It includes proactive connectivity monitoring, link trace on a per
service basis, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks
(MANs) and WANs.
CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM is enabled on all the ports by default.
For more information on CFM, refer to the IEEE 802.1ag standard. For information about interaction of
CFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. The
following sections contain conceptual information about Ethernet CFM.
11-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.14.1 Maintenance Domain
A maintenance domain is an administrative domain that manages and administers a network. You can
assign a unique maintenance level (from 0 to 7) to define the hierarchical relationship between domains.
The larger the domain, the higher the maintenance level for that domain. For example, a service provider
domain would be larger than an operator domain and might have a maintenance level of 6, while the
operator domain maintenance level would be 3 or 4.
Maintenance domains cannot intersect or overlap because that would require more than one entity to
manage it, which is not allowed. Domains can touch or nest if the outer domain has a higher maintenance
level than the nested domain. Maintenance levels of nesting domains must be communicated among the
administrating organizations. For example, one approach would be to have the service provider assign
maintenance levels to operators.
The CFM protocol supports up to eight maintenance domains on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
11.14.14.2 Maintenance Association
A maintenance association identifies a service within the maintenance domain. You can have any number
of maintenance associations within each maintenance domain. The CFM protocol supports up to 1500
maintenance associations on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Note Each maintenance association is mapped to a maintenance domain. This mapping is done to configure a
Maintenance End Point (MEP). The CFM protocol supports up to 1000 mappings on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
11.14.14.3 Maintenance End Points
Maintenance End Points (MEPs) reside at the edge of the maintenance domain and are active elements
of the Ethernet CFM. MEPs transmit Continuity Check messages at periodic intervals and receive similar
messages from other MEPs within a domain. MEPs also transmit Loopback and Traceroute messages at
the request of the administrator. MEPs confine CFM messages within the boundary of a maintenance
domain through the maintenance level. There are two types of MEPs:
• Up (Inwards, towards the bridge)
• Down (Outwards, towards the wire).
You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up
to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
The MEP continuity check database (CCDB) stores information that is received from other MEPs in the
maintenance domain. The card can store up to 4000 MEP CCDB entries.
11.14.14.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points
Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) are internal to the maintenance domain and are passive
elements of the Ethernet CFM. They store information received from MEPs and respond to Linktrace
and Loopback CFM messages. MIPs forward CFM frames received from MEPs and other MIPs, drop all
CFM frames at a lower level, and forward all CFM frames at a higher level.
You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up
to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
11-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
The MIP CCDB maintains the information received for all MEPs in the maintenance domain. The card
can store up to 4000 MIP CCDB entries.
11.14.14.5 CFM Messages
The Ethernet CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards supports the following
messages:
• Continuity Check—These messages are exchanged periodically among MEPs. They allow MEPs to
discover other MEPs within a domain and allow MIPs to discover MEPs. These messages are
confined to a domain.
• Loopback—These messages are unicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an
administrator, to verify connectivity to a specific maintenance point. A reply to a loopback message
indicates whether a destination is reachable.
• Traceroute—These messages are multicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an
administrator, to track the path to a destination MEP.
11.14.14.6 CFM Limitations and Restrictions
The CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and
restrictions:
• CFM is not supported on channel groups.
• CFM is not enabled on protected ports running REP, FAPS, and 1+1.
• Y.1731 enhancements including AIS, LCK, and performance monitoring messages along with CFM
are not supported.
• IEEE CFM MIB is not supported.
• L1 and CFM are mutually exclusive on a SVLAN because LI and CFM use the same MAC address.
• MAC security and CFM are mutually exclusive on the card due to hardware resource constraints.
11.14.14.7 Related Procedure for Ethernet CFM
For information about the supported Ethernet CFM features on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
CFM Settings” section on page 11-356.
11.14.15 Ethernet OAM
The Ethernet OAM protocol is part of the IEEE 802.3ah standard and is used for installing, monitoring,
and troubleshooting Ethernet MANs and Ethernet WANs. This protocol relies on an optional sublayer in
the data link layer of the OSI model. The Ethernet OAM protocol was developed for Ethernet in the First
Mile (EFM) applications. The terms Ethernet OAM and EFM are interchangeably used and both mean
the same.
Normal link operation does not require Ethernet OAM. You can implement Ethernet OAM on any
full-duplex point-to-point or emulated point-to-point Ethernet link for a network or part of a network
(specified interfaces). OAM frames, called OAM Protocol Data Units (OAM PDUs), use the slow
protocol destination MAC address 0180.c200.0002. OAM PDUs are intercepted by the MAC sublayer
and cannot propagate beyond a single hop within an Ethernet network.
11-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Ethernet OAM is disabled on all interfaces by default. When Ethernet OAM is enabled on an interface,
link monitoring is automatically turned on.
For more information on Ethernet OAM protocol, refer to IEEE 802.3ah standard. For information about
interaction of Ethernet OAM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section
on page 11-62.
11.14.15.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM
Ethernet OAM consists of two major components, the OAM Client and the OAM Sublayer.
11.14.15.1.1 OAM Client
The OAM client establishes and manages the Ethernet OAM on a link. The OAM client also enables and
configures the OAM sublayer. During the OAM discovery phase, the OAM client monitors the OAM
PDUs received from the remote peer and enables OAM functionality. After the discovery phase, the
OAM client manages the rules of response to OAM PDUs and the OAM remote loopback mode.
11.14.15.1.2 OAM Sublayer
The OAM sublayer presents two standard IEEE 802.3 MAC service interfaces:
• One interface facing toward the superior sub-layers, which include the MAC client (or link
aggregation).
• Other interface facing toward the subordinate MAC control sublayer.
The OAM sublayer provides a dedicated interface for passing OAM control information and OAM PDUs
to and from the client.
11.14.15.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM
Ethernet OAM provides the following benefits:
• Competitive advantage for service providers
• Standardized mechanism to monitor the health of a link and perform diagnostics
11.14.15.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM
The Ethernet OAM protocol has the following OAM features:
• Discovery—Identifies devices in the network and their OAM capabilities. The Discovery feature
uses periodic OAM PDUs to advertise the OAM mode, configuration, and capabilities. An optional
phase allows the local station to accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity.
• Link Monitoring—Detects and indicates link faults under a variety of conditions. It uses the event
notification OAM PDU to notify the remote OAM device when it detects problems on the link.
• Remote Failure Indication—Allows an OAM entity to convey the failure conditions to its peer
through specific flags in the OAM PDU.
• Remote Loopback—Ensures link quality with a remote peer during installation or troubleshooting.
11-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.15.4 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions
The Ethernet OAM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following
limitations and restrictions:
• CFM, REP, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, IGMP on SVLAN and L2 1+1 protection are not supported
with EFM.
• IEEE EFM MIB is not supported.
• EFM cannot be enabled or disabled at the card level.
• Unidirectional functionality is not supported.
• Errored Symbol Period, Rx CRC errors, Tx CRC errors are not supported.
• OAM PDUs are limited to 1 frame per second.
• Dying Gasp and critical events are not supported.
Note Dying Gasp RFI is not generated on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. However, if
the peer device sends a dying gasp RFI, the card detects it and raises an alarm.
11.14.15.5 Related Procedure for Ethernet OAM
For information about the supported Ethernet OAM features on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
EFM Settings” section on page 11-368.
11.14.16 Resilient Ethernet Protocol
The Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) is a protocol used to control network loops, handle link failures,
and improve convergence time.
REP performs the following tasks:
• Controls a group of ports connected in a segment.
• Ensures that the segment does not create any bridging loops.
• Responds to link failures within the segment.
• Supports VLAN load balancing.
For information about interaction of REP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility
list” section on page 11-62.
11.14.16.1 REP Segments
A REP segment is a chain of ports connected to each other and configured with a segment ID. Each
segment consists of regular segment ports and two edge ports. A GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card can have up to 2 ports that belong to the same segment, and each segment port can have
only one external neighbor port.
A segment protects only against a single link failure. Any more failures within the segment result in loss
of connectivity.
11-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.16.2 Characteristics of REP Segments
REP segments have the following characteristics:
• If all the ports in the segment are operational, one port blocks traffic for each VLAN. If VLAN load
balancing is configured, two ports in the segment control the blocked state of VLANs.
• If any port in the segment is not operational, all the other operational ports forward traffic on all
VLANs to ensure connectivity.
• In case of a link failure, the alternate ports are immediately unblocked. When the failed link comes
up, a logically blocked port per VLAN is selected with minimal disruption to the network.
11.14.16.3 REP Port States
Ports in REP segments take one of three roles or states: Failed, Open, or Alternate.
• A port configured as a regular segment port starts as a failed port.
• When the neighbor adjacencies are determined, the port transitions to the alternate port state,
blocking all the VLANs on the interface. Blocked port negotiations occur and when the segment
settles, one blocked port remains in the alternate role and all the other ports become open ports.
• When a failure occurs in a link, all the ports move to the failed state. When the alternate port receives
the failure notification, it changes to the open state, forwarding all VLANs.
11.14.16.4 Link Adjacency
Each segment port creates an adjacency with its immediate neighbor. Link failures are detected and acted
upon locally. If a port detects a problem with its neighbor, the port declares itself non-operational and
REP converges to a new topology.
REP Link Status Layer (LSL) detects its neighbor port and establishes connectivity within the segment.
All VLANs are blocked on an interface until the neighbor port is identified. After the neighbor port is
identified, REP determines the neighbor port that must be the alternate port and the ports that must
forward traffic.
Each port in a segment has a unique port ID. When a segment port starts, the LSL layer sends packets
that include the segment ID and the port ID.
A segment port does not become operational if the following conditions are satisfied:
• No neighbor port has the same segment ID or more than one neighbor port has the same segment ID.
• The neighbor port does not acknowledge the local port as a peer.
11.14.16.5 Fast Reconvergence
REP runs on a physical link and not on per VLAN. Only one hello message is required for all VLANs
that reduces the load on the protocol.
REP Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) is a transmission mechanism that floods packets in hardware on an
admin VLAN. HFL avoids the delay that is caused by relaying messages in software. HFL is used for
fast reconvergence in the order of 50 to 200 milliseconds.
11-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.16.6 VLAN Load Balancing
You must configure two edge ports in the segment for VLAN load balancing. One edge port in the REP
segment acts as the primary edge port; the other edge port as the secondary edge port. The primary edge
port always participates in VLAN load balancing in the segment. VLAN load balancing is achieved by
blocking certain VLANs at a configured alternate port and all the other VLANs at the primary edge port.
11.14.16.7 REP Configuration Sequence
You must perform the following tasks in sequence to configure REP:
• Configure the REP administrative VLAN or use the default VLAN 1. The range of REP admin
VLAN is 1 to 4093. VLAN 4094 is not allowed.
• Add ports to the segment in interface configuration mode.
• Enable REP on ports and assign a segment ID to it. REP is disabled on all ports by default. The range
of segment ID is 1 to 1024.
• Configure two edge ports in the segment; one port as the primary edge port and the other as the
secondary edge port.
• If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different
switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority. The
Primary option is enabled only on edge ports.
• Configure the primary edge port to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs) and VLAN
load balancing to another port or to other segments. STCNs and VLAN load balancing
configurations are enabled only for edge ports.
Note A port can belong to only one segment. Only two ports can belong to the same segment. Both the ports
must be either regular ports or edge ports. However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can
be an edge port and another port can be a regular port.
11.14.16.8 REP Supported Interfaces
REP supports the following interfaces:
• REP is supported on client (UNI) and trunk (NNI) ports.
• Enabling REP on client ports allows protection at the access or aggregation layer when the cards are
connected to the L2 network.
• Enabling REP on trunk ports allows protection at the edge layer when the cards are connected in a
ring.
11.14.16.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions
The REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and
restrictions:
• Fast re-convergence and VLAN load balancing are not supported on UNI ports in transparent mode.
• Native VLAN is not supported.
• CFM, EFM, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, and L2 1+1 protection are not supported on ports that are
configured as part of REP segment and vice versa.
11-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• NNI ports cannot be configured as the primary edge port or blocking port at the access or
aggregation layer.
• Only three REP segments can be configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
• Consider the following configuration:
More than one REP closed segment is configured on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards and the same HFL admin VLAN is enabled on the switches.
If two different segments are configured on more than one common switch, the following
consequences happen.
– Layer 1 loop
– Flooding of HFL packets across segments if one REP segment fails
– Segment goes down due to LSL time out even if the segment does not have faults
Hence, it is recommended not to configure two different segments on more than one common switch.
• Consider the following configuration:
– VLAN Load Balancing is configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards by
specifying the VLB preempt delay.
– Primary and secondary edge ports are configured on the same switch.
– HFL or LSL is activated.
This configuration leads to high convergence time during manual premption, VLB activation, and
deactivation (400 to 700 milliseconds).
11.14.16.10 Related Procedure for Managing the REP Settings
To manage the REP settings on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings” section on
page 11-373.
11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards:
• NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line
Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 11-379
• NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards, page 11-405
• NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card, page 11-409
• NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-423
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15 ADM-10G Card
The ADM-10G card operates on ONS 15454 SONET, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15454 M2,
ONS 15454 M6, and DWDM networks to carry optical signals and Gigabit Ethernet signals over DWDM
wavelengths for transport. The card aggregates lower bit-rate client SONET or SDH signals
(OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit Ethernet) onto a C-band tunable DWDM
trunk operating at a higher OC-192/STM-64 rate. In a DWDM network, the ADM-10G card transports
traffic over DWDM by mapping Gigabit Ethernet and SONET or SDH circuits onto the same wavelength
with multiple protection options.
You can install and provision the ADM-10G card in a linear configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in standard and high-density ONS 15454 ANSI shelves (15454-SA-ANSI
or 15454-SA-HD), the ETSI ONS 15454 standard shelf assembly, or the ONS 15454 ETSI
high-density shelf assembly
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a
shelf where the ADM-10G card is installed.
The card is compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.783 for SDH signals. It supports concatenated
and non-concatenated AU-4 mapped STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 signals as specified in ITU-T G.707.
The card also complies with Section 5.6 of Telcordia GR-253-CORE and supports synchronous
transport signal (STS) mapped OC-3, OC-12, and OC-48 signals as specified in the standard.
The client SFP and trunk XFP are compliant with interface requirements in Telcordia GR-253-CORE,
ITU-T G.957 and/or ITU-T G.959.1, and IEEE 802.3.
11.15.1 Key Features
The ADM-10G card has the following high-level features:
• Operates with the TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE.
• Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10EX_C, and OTU2_XP cards.
• Has built-in OC-192/STM-64 add/drop multiplexing function including client, trunk, and STS
cross-connect.
• Supports both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration.
• Supports path protection/SNCP on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card
configuration. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between a client port and a trunk
port. Path protection/SNCP is supported only between two client ports or two trunk ports.
• Supports 1+1 protection on client ports for double-card configuration only.
• Supports SONET, SDH, and Gigabit Ethernet protocols on client SFPs.
• Supports XFP DWDM trunk interface single wavelengths.
• Returns zero bit errors when a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card switches from
active to standby or when manual or forced protection switches occur.
• Has 16 SFP-based client interfaces (gray, colored, coarse wavelength division multiplexing
(CWDM), and DWDM optics available).
11-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
• Supports STM1, STM4, STM16, and Gigabit Ethernet client signals (8 Gigabit Ethernet maximum).
• Has one XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for double-card
configuration.
• Has two XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for single-card
configuration.
• Has two SR XFP interlink interfaces supporting redundancy connection with protection board and
pass-through traffic for double-card configuration.
• Supports frame-mapped generic framing procedure (GFP-F) and LEX mapping for Ethernet over
SONET or SDH.
• Can be installed or pulled from operation, in any slot, without impacting other service cards in the
shelf.
• Supports client to client hairpinning, that is, creation of circuits between two client ports for both
single-card and double-card configuration. See the “11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning” section on
page 11-90 for more detailed information.
11.15.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC
The ADM-10G card supports Cisco EoS LEX (LEX) and generic framing procedure framing (GFP-F)
encapsulation on 8 POS ports corresponding to 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and
double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration.
You can provision framing on the ADM-10G card as either the default GFP-F or LEX framing. With
GFP-F framing, you can configure a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) or none (no CRC) (the
default). LEX framing supports 16-bit or 32-bit CRC configuration. The framing type cannot be changed
when there is a circuit on the port.
On the CTC, navigate to card view and click the Provisioning > Line> Ethernet Tab. To see the various
parameters that can be configured on the ethernet ports, see the “CTC Display of ethernet Port
Provisioning Status” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card
Software Feature and Configuration Guide. Parameters such as, admin state, service state, framing type,
CRC, MTU and soak time for a port can be configured.
It is possible to create an end-to-end circuit between equipment supporting different kinds of
encapsulation (for example, LEX on one side and GFP-F on other side). But, under such circumstances,
traffic does not pass through, and an alarm is raised if there is a mismatch.
11.15.2.1 POS Overview
Ethernet data packets need to be framed and encapsulated into a SONET/SDH frame for transport across
the SONET/SDH network. This framing and encapsulation process is known as packet over
SONET/SDH (POS).
The Ethernet frame comes into the ADM-10G card on a standard Gigabit Ethernet port and is processed
through the card’s framing mechanism and encapsulated into a POS frame. When the POS frame exits,
the ADM-10G card is in a POS circuit, and this circuit is treated as any other SONET circuit (STS) or
SDH circuit (VC) in the ONS node. It is cross-connected and rides the SONET/SDH signal out the port
of an optical card and across the SONET/SDH network.
The destination of the POS circuit is a card or a device that supports the POS interface. Data packets in
the destination card frames are removed and processed into ethernet frames. The Ethernet frames are
then sent to a standard Ethernet port of the card and transmitted onto an Ethernet network.
11-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.2.2 POS Framing Modes
A POS framing mode is the type of framing mechanism employed by the ADM-10G card to frame and
encapsulate data packets into a POS signal. These data packets were originally encapsulated in Ethernet
frames that entered the standard Gigabit Ethernet interface of the ADM-10G card.
11.15.2.2.1 GFP-F Framing
The GFP-F framing represent standard mapped Ethernet over GFP-F according to ITU-T G.7041. GFP-F
defines a standard-based mapping of different types of services onto SONET/SDH. GFP-F maps one
variable length data packet onto one GFP packet. GFP-F comprises of common functions and payload
specific functions. Common functions are those shared by all payloads. Payload-specific functions are
different depending on the payload type. GFP-F is detailed in the ITU recommendation G.7041.
11.15.2.2.2 LEX Framing
LEX encapsulation is a HDLC frame based Cisco Proprietary protocol, where the field is set to values
specified in Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 1841. HDLC is one of the most popular Layer
2 protocols. The HDLC frame uses the zero insertion/deletion process (commonly known as bit stuffing)
to ensure that the bit pattern of the delimiter flag does not occur in the fields between flags. The HDLC
frame is synchronous and therefore relies on the physical layer to provide a method of clocking and
synchronizing the transmission and reception of frames. The HDLC framing mechanism is detailed in
the IETF’s RFC 1662, “PPP in HDLC-like Framing.”
11.15.2.3 GFP Interoperability
The ADM-10G card defaults to GFP-F encapsulation that is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. This mode
allows the card to operate with ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454
data cards (for example, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards). GFP encapsulation also allows the
ADM-10G card to interoperate with other vendors Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that adhere to the
ITU-T G.7041 standard.
11.15.2.4 LEX Interoperability
The LEX encapsulation is compliant with RFC 1841. This mode allows the card to operate with
ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454 data cards (for example,
G1000-4/G1K-4 cards, CE-1000-4, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards).
11.15.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-20 shows the ADM-10G card faceplate.
11-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Figure 11-20 ADM-10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
11.15.4 Port Configuration Rules
ADM-10G card client and trunk port capacities are shown in Figure 11-21.
FAIL
ACT
SF
ADM-10G
ILK1
TRK2/ILK2
TRK1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RX TX RX TX RX TX
16 15 14 13
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JULY 26, 2001
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor
10xGE MAC
10G GFP-over
SONET/SDH
framer
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor 2
G.709-FEC
framer 1
G.709-FEC
framer 2
XFP
DWDM
TRUNK
ILK
XFP
ILK
XFP
VCAT
RLDR
switch
SCL CPU-Core
FPGA
alarm
cpld
alarm
cpld
Main board
Daughter card
4 x OC48/STM16
4 x OC3/OC12 or
4 x STM1/STM4
12 x OC3/OC12
or 12 x STM1/STM4
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor 3
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor 4
13 SFP
14
15
16
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SFP
SFP
SFP
switch
STS-1
cross-connect
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
250482
19
17 18
11-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Figure 11-21 ADM-10G Card Port Capacities
Port 17 acts as trunk2 or ILK1 interface based on single-card or double-card configuration.
11.15.5 Client Interfaces
The ADM-10G card uses LC optical port connectors and, as shown in Figure 11-21, supports up to
16 SFPs that can be utilized for OC-N/STM-N traffic. Eight of the SFPs can be used for Gigabit Ethernet.
The interfaces can support any mix of OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit
Ethernet of any reach, such as SX, LX, ZX, SR, IR, or LR. The interfaces support a capacity of:
• 4 x OC-48/STM-16
• 16 x OC-12/STM-4
• 16 x OC-3/STM-1
• 8 x GE
The supported client SFPs and XFPs are:
• Gray SFPs
– 1000Base-SX SFP 850 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-SX=)
– 1000Base-LX SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-LX=)
– OC48/STM16 IR1, OC12/STM4 SR1, OC3/STM1 SR1, GE-LX multirate SFP 1310 nm
(ONS-SE-Z1=)
– OC3/STM1 IR1, OC12/STM4 IR1 multirate SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-622-I1=)
– OC48/STM16 SR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-S1=)
– OC48/STM16 IR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-I1=)
– OC48/STM16, 1550 LR2, SM LC (ONS-SE-2G-L2=)
GE G r a y SFP 1
13
14
15
16
ILK1/
TRK2(17)
ILK2/
TRK2(18)
TRK1
(19)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GE G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE OC48/OC12/OC3
OC48/OC12/OC3
OC48/OC12/OC3
OC48/OC12/OC3
STM16/STM4/STM1
STM16/STM4/STM1
STM16/STM4/STM1
STM16/STM4/STM1
G r a y SFP G r a y SFP
G r a y XFP
*Gray/
DWDM XFP
D WDM XFP O TU2/OC192/STM64
*OTU2/OC192/STM64
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE G ra y SFP
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1 G r a y SFP
OC192/STM64
243481
*DWDM XFP and OTU2 is supported only when
Port 18 is configured as a trunk interface.
11-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
• Colored DWDM SFPs
– 1000Base-ZX SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-GE-ZX=)
– OC3/STM1 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-155-L2=)
– OC48/STM16 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-2G-L2=)
– OC48/STM16 SFP (ONS-SC-2G-xx.x)
Note xx.x = 28.7 to 60.6. ONS-SC-2G-28.7, ONS-SC-2G-33.4, ONS-SC-2G-41.3,
ONS-SC-2G-49.3, and ONS-SC-2G-57.3 are supported from Release 8.5 and later.
• CWDM SFPs
– OC48/STM16/GE CWDM SFP (ONS-SC-Z3-xxxx)
• XFPs
– OC-192/STM-64/10GE XFP 1550 nm (ONS-XC-10G-I2)
11.15.6 Interlink Interfaces
Two 2R interlink interfaces, called ILK1 (Port 17) and ILK2 (Port 18), are provided for creation of
ADM-10G peer groups in double-card configurations. In a single-card configuration, Port 17
(OC-192/STM-64) and Port 18 (OC-192/STM-64 or OTU2 payload) must be configured as trunk
interfaces. In a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group), Ports 17 and 18 must be configured
as ILK1 and ILK2 interfaces, respectively. Physically cabling these ports between two ADM-10G cards,
located on the same shelf, allows you to configure them as an ADM-10G peer group.The ILK ports carry
10 Gb of traffic each.
The interlink interfaces support STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) XFP and 10GE BASE SR
(ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM=) XFPs.
11.15.7 DWDM Trunk Interface The ADM-10G card supports OC-192/STM-64 signal transport and ITU-T G.709 digital wrapping
according to the ITU-T G.709 standard.The ADM-10G card supports three trunk XFPs:
• Two DWDM trunks, and one trunk interface in a single-card configuration.
• One DWDM trunk XFP in a double-card configuration.
The supported DWDM trunk XFPs are:
• 10G DWDM (ONS-XC-10G-xx.x=) (colored XFP)
• STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) (gray XFP)
11.15.8 Configuration Management
When using OC-48/STM-16 traffic, some contiguous port configurations, listed in Table 11-20, are
unavailable due to hardware limitations. This limitation does not impact the Gigabit Ethernet payload.
11-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Note The ADM-10G card cannot be used in the same shelf with SONET or SDH cross-connect cards.
Note The total traffic rate for each trunk cannot exceed OC-192/STM-64 on each ADM-10G card, or for each
ADM-10G peer group.
Note Gigabit Ethernet is supported on Ports 1 through 8. Ports 9 through Port 12 support only OC-3/STM-1
or OC-12/STM-4.
Additionally, the following guidelines apply to the ADM-10G card:
• Trunk Port 17 supports OC-192/STM-64.
• Trunk Ports 18 and 19 support OC-192/STM-64 and OTU2.
• The interlink port supports OC-192/STM-64.
• Up to six ADM-10G cards can be installed in one shelf.
• Up to 24 ADM-10G cards can be installed per network element (NE) regardless of whether the card
is installed in one shelf or in multiple shelves.
• The card can be used in all 15454-SA-ANSI and 15454-SA-HD shelves as well as ETSI ONS 15454
standard and high-density shelves.
• A lamp test function can be activated from CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional.
• The card can operate as a working protected or working non-protected card.
• In a redundant configuration, an active card hardware or software failure triggers a switch to the
standby card. This switch is detected within 10 ms and is completed within 50 ms.
• ADM-10G cards support jumbo frames with MTU sizes of 64 to 9,216 bytes; the maximum is 9,216.
• After receiving a link or path failure, the ADM-10G card can shut down only the downstream
Gigabit Ethernet port.
Note In ADM-10G cards, the Gigabit Ethernet port does not support flow control.
Table 11-20 OC-48/STM-16 Configuration Limitations
OC-48/STM-16 Port Number Ports Restricted from Optical Traffic
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 13 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 1 through Port 3
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 14 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 4 through Port 6
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 15 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 7 through Port 9
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 16 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 10 through Port 12
11-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.9 Security
The ADM-10G card that an SFP or XFP is plugged into implements the Cisco Standard Security Code
Check Algorithm that keys on the vendor ID and serial number.
If a pluggable port module (PPM) is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check
because it is not a Cisco PPM, a minor NON-CISCO-PPM alarm is raised.
If a PPM with an unqualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card—that is, the PPM passes the
security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the ADM-10G card— a minor
UNQUAL-PPM alarm is raised.
11.15.10 Protection
The ADM-10G card supports 1+1 and SONET path protection and SDH SNCP protection architectures
in compliance with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, Telcordia GR-1400-CORE, and ITU-T G.841
specifications.
11.15.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes
The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP circuits at the STS/VC4 (high order) level and can
be configured to switch based on signal degrade calculations. The card supports path protection/SNCP
on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card configuration.
Note The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk port 17. The card
does not support path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk ports 18 or 19. The card does not
support path protection/SNCP between port 17 and trunk ports 18 and 19.
The card allows open-ended path protection/SNCP configurations incorporating other vendor
equipment. In an open-ended path protection/SNCP, you can specify one source point and two possible
endpoints (or two possible source points and one endpoint) and the legs can include other vendor
equipment. The source and endpoints are part of the network discovered by CTC.
11.15.10.2 Port Protection Schemes
The ADM-10G card supports unidirectional and bidirectional 1+1 APS protection schemes on client
ports for double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group) only. 1+1 APS protection scheme is not
supported in single-card configuration. For 1+1 optical client port protection, you can configure the
system to use any pair of like facility interfaces that are on different cards of the ADM-10G peer group.
11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning
The ADM-10G card supports STS circuit provisioning both in single-card and double-card (ADM-10G
peer group) configuration. The card allows you to create STS circuits between:
• Client and trunk ports
• Two trunk ports
• Two client ports (client-to-client hairpinning)
11-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Note Circuits between two trunk ports are called pass-through circuits.
For an ADM-10G card in single-card configuration, if you are creating STS circuits between two client
ports, the following limitation must be considered:
• Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported.
For an ADM-10G card that is part of an ADM-10G peer group, if you are creating STS circuits between
two client ports or between client and trunk ports, the following limitations must be considered:
• Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported.
• Optical channel (OC) to OC, OC to Gigabit Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet to OC connections
between two peer group cards are supported. Peer group connections use interlink port bandwidth,
hence, depending on the availability/fragmentation of the interlink port bandwidth, it may not be
possible to create an STS circuit from the Gigabit Ethernet/OC client port to the peer card trunk port.
This is because, contiguous STSs (that is, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and so on) must be available
on the interlink port for circuit creation.
Note There are no limitations to create an STS circuit between two trunk ports.
11.15.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics
The ADM-10G card supports high-order (HO) contiguous concatenation (CCAT) and HO virtual
concatenation (VCAT) circuits on 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and double-card
(ADM-10G peer group) configuration.
To enable end-to-end connectivity in a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, you
can use Open-Ended VCAT circuit creation.
The ADM-10G card supports flexible non-LCAS VCAT groups (VCGs). With flexible VCGs, the
ADM-10G can perform the following operations:
• Add or remove members from groups
• Put members into or out of service, which also adds/removes them from the group
• Add or remove cross-connect circuits from VCGs
Any operation on the VCG member is service effecting (for instance, adding or removing members from
the VCG). Adding or removing cross-connect circuits is not service-affecting, if the associated members
are not in the group
The ADM-10G card allows independent routing and protection preferences for each member of a VCAT
circuit. You can also control the amount of VCAT circuit capacity that is fully protected, unprotected, or
uses Protection Channel Access (PCA) (when PCA is available). Alarms are supported on a per-member
as well as per virtual concatenation group (VCG) basis.
The ADM-10G card supports both automatic and manual routing for VCAT circuit, that is, all members
are manually or automatically routed. Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric, which means that the
same number of members travel in each direction. With automatic routing, you can specify the
constraints for individual members; with manual routing, you can select different spans for different
members. Two types of automatic and manual routing are available for VCAT members: common fiber
routing and split routing.
11-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
The ADM-10G card supports VCAT common fiber routing and VCAT split fiber (diverse) routing. With
VCAT split fiber routing, each member can be routed independently through the SONET or SDH or
DWDM network instead of having to follow the same path as required by CCAT and VCAT common
fiber routing. This allows a more efficient use of network bandwidth, but the different path lengths and
different delays encountered may cause slightly different arrival times for the individual members of the
VCG. The VCAT differential delay is this relative arrival time measurement between members of a
VCG. The maximum tolerable VCAT split fiber routing differential delay for the ADM-10G card is
approximately 55 milliseconds. A loss of alignment alarm is generated if the maximum differential delay
supported is exceeded.
The differential delay compensation function is automatically enabled when you choose split fiber
routing during the CTC circuit configuration process. CCAT and VCAT common fiber routing do not
enable or need differential delay support.
Caution Protection switches with switching time of less than 60 milliseconds are not guaranteed with the
differential delay compensation function enabled. The compensation time is added to the switching time.
Note For TL1, EXPBUFFERS parameter must be set to ON in the ENT-VCG command to enable support for
split fiber routing.
Available Circuit Sizes
Table 11-21 and Table 11-22 show the circuit sizes available for the ADM-10G card.
Table 11-21 Supported SONET Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454
CCAT VCAT High Order
STS-1 STS-1-1nV (n= 1 to 21)
STS-3c STS-3c-mv (m= 1 to 7)
STS-6c
STS-9c
STS-12c
STS-24c
Table 11-22 Supported SDH Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 SDH
CCAT VCAT High Order
VC-4 VC-4-mv (m= 1 to 7)
VC-4-2c
VC-4-3c
VC-4-4c
VC-4-8c
11-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.12.1 Related Procedure for VCAT Circuit
The following is the list of procedures related to creating VCAT circuits:
• NTP-G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit, page 16-94
• NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit, page 16-98
11.15.13 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring
Intermediate path performance monitoring (IPPM) allows a node to monitor the constituent channel of
an incoming transmission signal. You can enable IPPM for STS/VC-4s payload on OCn and Trunk ports
of ADM-10G card. The IPPM is complaint with GR253/G.826.
Software Release 9.2 and higher enables the ADM-10G card to monitor the near-end and far-end PM
data on individual STS/VC-4 payloads by enabling IPPM. After provisioning IPPM on the card, service
providers can monitor large amounts of STS/VC-4 traffic through intermediate nodes, thus making
troubleshooting and maintenance activities more efficient. IPPM occurs only on STS/VC-4 paths that
have IPPM enabled, and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters on the selected IPPM paths.
For a CCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM only on the first STS/VC-4 of the concatenation group. For a
VCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM independently on each member STS/VC-4 of the concatenation
group.
11.15.13.1 Related Procedure for IPPM
To enable IPPM on the ADM-10G card, see the “NTP-G247 Enable or disable Path Performance
Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes” section on page 16-100.
11.15.14 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring
Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations. Pointer justification counts indicate
timing errors on SONET networks. When a network is out of synchronization, jitter and wander occur
on the transported signal. Excessive wander can cause terminating equipment to slip.
Slips cause different effects in service. Voice service has intermittent audible clicks. Compressed voice
technology has short transmission errors or dropped calls. Fax machines lose scanned lines or experience
dropped calls. Digital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames. Encryption service
loses the encryption key, causing data to be transmitted again.
Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VC4 payloads. The STS payload pointer
is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead. Clocking differences are measured by the offset
in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the STS synchronous payload envelope (SPE) called the J1
byte. Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss.
There are positive (PPJC) and negative (NPJC) pointer justification count parameters. PPJC is a count
of path-detected (PPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) positive pointer justifications.
NPJC is a count of path-detected (NPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) negative pointer
justifications depending on the specific PM name. PJCDIFF is the absolute value of the difference
between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated
pointer justification counts. PJCS-PDET-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more
PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or
more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN.
11-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes. A
difference between the counts means that the node transmitting the original pointer justification has
timing variations with the node detecting and transmitting this count. Positive pointer adjustments occur
when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in relation to the rate of the STS-1.
You must enable PPJC and NPJC performance monitoring parameters for ADM-10Gcard. In CTC, the
count fields for PPJC and NPJC PMs appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the card view
Provisioning tab.
11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions
This section describes the STS and VC-4 path performance monitoring parameters that ADM-10G card
support.
Table 11-23 lists the STS near-end path performance monitoring parameters.
Table 11-23 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors
detected at the STS path layer (that is, using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP
errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P
second register.
ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds when
at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS Path (AIS-P) defect (or
a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or a Loss of Pointer Path
(LOP-P) defect can also cause an ES-P.
SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the
seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An
AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P
defect can also cause an SES-P.
UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the seconds
when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes unavailable when
ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps, and continues to be
unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as
SES-Ps.
FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of
near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P
failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a Section Trace Identifier
Mismatch Path (TIM-P) failure is declared. A failure event also begins if the
STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports Three-Bit (Enhanced) Remote
Failure Indication Path Connectivity (ERFI-P-CONN) for that path. The
failure event ends when these failures are cleared.
PPJC-PDET-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-PDET-P) is a
count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an
incoming SONET signal.
PPJC-PGEN-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) is
a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path
to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.
11-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Table 11-24 gives the VC-4 near-end path performance monitoring parameters definition that ADM-10G
card support.
NPJC-PDET-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-PDET-P) is
a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path in
an incoming SONET signal.
NPJC-PGEN-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (NPJC-PGEN-P)
is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path
to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.
PJCDIFF-P Pointer Justification Count Difference, STS Path (PJCDIFF-P) is the
absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer
justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification
counts. That is, PJCDiff-P is equal to (PPJC-PGEN-P - NPJC-PGEN-P) -
(PPJC-PDET-P - NPJC-PDET-P).
PJCS-PDET-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Detect (NPJCS-PDET-P) is a
count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or
NPJC-PDET.
PJCS-PGEN-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Generate (PJCS-PGEN-P) is
a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or
NPJC-PGEN.
Table 11-23 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
Table 11-24 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
HP-EB High-Order Path Errored Block (HP-EB) indicates that one or more bits are
in error within a block.
HP-BBE High-Order Path Background Block Error (HP-BBE) is an errored block not
occurring as part of an SES.
HP-ES High-Order Path Errored Second (HP-ES) is a one-second period with one
or more errored blocks or at least one defect.
HP-SES High-Order Path Severely Errored Seconds (HP-SES) is a one-second period
containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a
subset of ES.
HP-UAS High-Order Path Unavailable Seconds (HP-UAS) is a count of the seconds
when the VC path was unavailable. A high-order path becomes unavailable
when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as HP-SESs, and it
continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not
qualify as HP-SESs.
HP-BBER High-Order Path Background Block Error Ratio (HP-BBER) is the ratio of
BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval.
The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
HP-ESR High-Order Path Errored Second Ratio (HP-ESR) is the ratio of errored
seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement
interval.
11-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.16 ADM-10G Functions
The functions of the ADM-10G card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12
11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the ADM-10G card:
• NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM
Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-237
• NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card, page 16-49
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
HP-SESR High-Order Path Severely Errored Second Ratio (HP-SESR) is the ratio of
SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval.
HP-PPJC-PDET High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected
(HP-PPJC-Pdet) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on
a particular path on an incoming SDH signal.
HP-NPJC-PDET High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected
(HP-NPJC-Pdet) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on
a particular path on an incoming SDH signal.
HP-PPJC-PGEN High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated
(HP-PPJC-Pgen) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for
a particular path.
HP-NPJC-PGEN High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated
(HP-NPJC-Pgen) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated
for a particular path.
HP-PJCDIFF High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Difference (HP-PJCDiff) is the
absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer
justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification
counts. That is, HP-PJCDiff is equal to (HP-PPJC-PGen - HP-NPJC-PGen)
- (HP-PPJC-PDet - HP-NPJC-PDet).
HP-PJCS-PDET High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PDet) is a
count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PDet or
HP-NPJC-PDet.
HP-PJCS-PGEN High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PGen) is a
count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PGen or
HP-NPJC-PGen.
Table 11-24 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
11-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16 OTU2_XP Card
The OTU2_XP card is a single-slot card with four ports with XFP-based multirate (OC-192/STM-64,
10GE, 10G FC, IB_5G) Xponder for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI platforms. The OTU2_XP card
supports multiple configurations.
Table 11-25 describes the different configurations supported by the OTU2_XP card and the ports that
must be used for these configurations.
All the four ports are ITU-T G.709 compliant and support 40 channels (wavelengths) at 100-GHz
channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1530.33 nm to 1561.42 nm wavelength range).
The OTU2_XP card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The OTU2_XP card supports
SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and ZR XFPs, and 10G FC
MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs.
Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a
shelf where the OTU2_XP card is installed.
11.16.1 Key Features
The OTU2_XP card has the following high-level features:
• 10G transponder, regenerator, and splitter protection capability on the ONS 15454 DWDM
platform.
• Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ETSI ONS 15454 shelf
assembly, and the ETSI ONS 15454 high-density shelf assembly. Compatible with TCC2/TCC2P/
TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards.
• Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards.
Table 11-25 OTU2_XP Card Configurations and Ports
Configuration Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
2 x 10G transponder Client port 1 Client port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2
2 x 10G standard regenerator
(with enhanced FEC (E-FEC)
only on one port)
Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2
10 GE LAN Phy to WAN Phy Client port Client port in
transponder or
trunk port in
regenerator
configuration
Trunk port Trunk port in
transponder or
regenerator
configuration
1 x 10G E-FEC regenerator
(with E-FEC on two ports)
Not used Not used Trunk port Trunk port
1 x 10G splitter protected
transponder
Client port Not used Trunk port
(working)
Trunk port
(protect)
11-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
• Four port, multirate (OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy, 10G Fibre
Channel, IB_5G) client interface. The client signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal
using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring
and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous mapping. Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) with
ITU-T G.709 ODU with greater than 8 dB coding gain.
• The trunk rate remains the same irrespective of the FEC configuration. The error coding
performance can be provisioned as follows:
– FEC—Standard ITU-T G.709.
– E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 (subclause I.7)
• IEEE 802.3 frame format supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame size is
64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable.
• Supports fixed/no fixed stuff mapping (insertion of stuffing bytes) for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
signals (only in transponder configuration).
• Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to 10G Ethernet WAN Phy conversion on Ports 1 (client port) and
3 (trunk port).
• Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion using CTC and TL1. When enabled on
the OTU2_XP card, the first Channel (Ports 1 and 3) supports LAN to WAN conversion. The second
channel carries normal 10GE, 10G FC, and OC192/STM64 traffic.
• The LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion functions in accordance to WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS)
mechanism as defined by IEEE802.3ae (IEEE Std 802.3ae-2002, Amendment to CSMA/CD).
• Default configuration is transponder, with trunk ports configured as ITU-T G.709 standard FEC.
• In transponder or regenerator configuration, if one of the ports is configured the corresponding port
is automatically created.
• In regenerator configuration, only Ports 3 and 4 can be configured as E-FEC. Ports 1 and 2 can be
configured only with standard FEC.
• When port pair 1-3 or 2-4 is configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is standard regenerator),
the default configuration on Ports 3 and 4 is automatically set to standard FEC.
• When Ports 3 and 4 are configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is E-FEC regenerator), the
default configuration on both these ports is automatically set to E-FEC.
• In splitter protected transponder configuration, the trunk ports (Ports 3 and 4) are configured as
ITU-T G.709 standard FECor E-FEC.
• Supports protection through Y-cable protection scheme.
Note When enabled, the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature does not support
Y-cable protection on the LAN to WAN interface (ports 1 and 3).
• Client ports support SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and
ZR XFPs, and 10G FC MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs.
• Following are the OTU2 link rates that are supported on the OTU2_XP trunk port:
– Standard G.709 (10.70923 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “SONET” (including 10G
Ethernet WAN PHY) (9.95328 Gbps).
11-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
– G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.2 (11.0491 Gbps)
when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed
Stuff” enabled.
– G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.1 (11.0957 Gbps)
when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed
Stuff” disabled.
– G.709 proprietary overclocking mode to transport 10G FC (11.3168 Gbps) when the client is
provisioned as “10G Fiber Channel” (10.518 Gbps).
– Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
• The MTU setting is used to display the ifInerrors and OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk
and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops,
from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-22 shows the OTU2_XP card faceplate and block diagram.
11-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
Figure 11-22 OTU2_XP Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Note The Swan FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is enabled
on the OTU2_XP card. The Barile FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy
conversion feature is disabled on the OTU2_XP card.
241984
SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES
Barile
FPGA
SWAN
FPGA
XFP 1 XFP 3
SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES
MPC8360 core Power supply Clocking
XFP 2
SCL
FPGA
XFP 4
11-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.3 OTU2_XP Card Interface
The OTU2_XP card is a multi-functional card that operates in different configurations, such as
transponder, standard regenerator, E-FEC regenerator, and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
conversion mode. The OTU2_XP card acts as a protected transponder, when the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
to WAN Phy is in splitter protected transponder configuration mode.
Depending on the configuration of the OTU2_XP card, the ports act as client or trunk ports (see
Table 11-25). This following section describes the client and trunk rates supported on the OTU2_XP
card for different card configurations:
11.16.3.1 Client Interface
In transponder and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy card configurations, Ports 1 and 2 act as client
ports and in splitter protected transponder configuration, Port 1 acts as a client port. For these card
configurations, the client rates supported are:
• OC-192/STM-64
• 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G Fibre Channel
• IB_5G
11.16.3.2 Trunk Interface
In transponder, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, and splitter protected transponder card
configurations, Ports 3 and 4 act as trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rates supported
are:
• OC-192/STM-64
• 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G Fibre Channel
• OTU2 G.709
• Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
In standard regenerator card configuration, all four ports act as trunk ports and in E-FEC regenerator
configuration, Ports 3 and 4 act as the trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rate supported
is OTU2 G.709
Note The above mentioned OTU2 signal must be an OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy,
10G Ethernet LAN Phy, or 10G Fibre Channel signal packaged into an OTU2 G.709 frame.
Additionally, the standard regenerator and E-FEC regenerator configuration supports an OTU2 signal
that is OTU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals.
11-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.4 Configuration Management
The OTU2_XP card supports the following configuration management parameters:
• Card Configuration—Provisionable card configuration: Transponder, Standard Regen, Enhanced
FEC, or Mixed, or 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy.
• Port Mode—Provisionable port mode when the card configuration is set as Mixed. The port mode
can be chosen as either Transponder or Standard Regen for each port pair (1-3 and 2-4). For card
configurations other than Mixed, CTC automatically sets the port mode depending on the selected
card configuration. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the
port pair (1-3) as 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy. Port pair (2-4) in
10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode is selected as Transponder or Standard Regen.
• Termination Mode—Provisionable termination mode when the card configuration is set as either
Transponder or Mixed. The termination mode can be chosen as Transparent, Section, or Line. For
Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configurations, CTC automatically sets the termination
mode as Transparent. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the
Termination Mode of port pair (1-3) as Line. You cannot provision the Termination Mode parameter.
• AIS/Squelch—Provisionable AIS/Squelch mode configuration when the card configuration is set as
either Transponder, Mixed, or Standard Regen. The AIS/Squelch mode configuration can be chosen
as AIS or Squelch. For Enhanced FEC card configuration, CTC automatically sets the AIS/Squelch
mode configuration as AIS. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, the CTC automatically
selects the AIS/Squelch of port pair (1-3) as Squelch. You cannot provision the AIS/Squelch
parameter.
Note When AIS/Squelch is enabled in Standard Regen configuration with port pairs (1-3) and (2-4),
Squelch is supported on ports 1 and 2 and AIS on ports 3 and 4.
Note When you choose the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion, the Termination mode is
automatically set to LINE. The AIS/Squelch is set to SQUELCH and ODU Transparency is set to Cisco
Extended Use for Ports 1 and 3.
• Regen Line Name—User-assigned text string for regeneration line name.
• ODU Transparency—Provisionable ODU overhead byte configuration, either Transparent Standard
Use or Cisco Extended Use. See the “11.16.7 ODU Transparency” section on page 11-104 for more
detailed information. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the
ODU Transparency as Cisco Extended Use. You cannot provision the ODU Transparency parameter.
• Port name—User-assigned text string.
• Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status.
• ALS Mode—Provisionable ALS function.
• Reach—Provisionable optical reach distance of the port.
• Wavelength—Provisionable wavelength of the port.
• AINS Soak—Provisionable automatic in-service soak period.
11-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules
The following rules apply to OTU2_XP card configurations:
• When you preprovision the card, port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 come up in the default Transponder
configuration.
• The port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 can be configured in different modes only when the card configuration is
Mixed. If the card configuration is Mixed, you must choose different modes on port pairs 1-3 and
2-4 (that is, one port pair in Transponder mode and the other port pair in Standard Regen mode).
• If the card is in Transponder configuration, you can change the configuration to Standard Regen or
Enhanced FEC.
• If the card is in Standard Regen configuration and you have configured only one port pair, then
configuring payload rates for the other port pair automatically changes the card configuration to
Mixed, with the new port pair in Transponder mode.
• If the card is in Standard Regen configuration, you cannot directly change the configuration to
Enhanced FEC. You have to change to Transponder configuration and then configure the card as
Enhanced FEC.
• If the card is in Enhanced FEC configuration, Ports 1 and 2 are disabled. Hence, you cannot directly
change the configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed. You must remove the Enhanced FEC group
by moving the card to Transponder configuration, provision PPM on Ports 1 and 2, and then change
the card configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed.
• If the card is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC configuration, you cannot change the payload rate
of the port pairs. You have to change the configuration to Transponder, change the payload rate, and
then move the card configuration back to Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC.
• If any of the affected ports are in IS (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) state, you cannot change
the card configuration.
• If IB_5G payload has to be provisioned, the NE Default should match the values listed in the
Table 11-26. For more information on editing the NE Default values, see the “NTP-G135 Edit
Network Element Defaults” task on page 24-23.
• If the card is changed to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, the first PPM port is deleted and
replaced by a 10G Ethernet port; the third PPM port is deleted and automatically replaced with
OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH) port. The third PPM port is automatically deleted and the third PPM
port is replaced with OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH).
Table 11-27 provides a summary of transitions allowed for the OTU2_XP card configurations.
Table 11-26 OTU2_XP Card Configuration for IB_5G Payload Provisioning
Parameter NE Default Name Value
FEC OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.FEC Standard
ITU-T G.709 OTN OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.G709OTN Enable
Termination Mode OTU2-XP.config.port.TerminationMode Transparent
ODU Transparency OTU2-XP.config.port.OduTransparency Cisco Extended Use
AIS/Squelch OTU2-XP.config.port.AisSquelchMode Squelch
11-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.6 Security
The OTU2_XP card, when an XFP is plugged into it, implements the Cisco Standard Security Code
Check Algorithm that keys on vendor ID and serial number.
If a PPM is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check because it is not a Cisco
PPM, a NON-CISCO-PPM Not Reported (NR) condition occurs.
If a PPM with a non-qualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card, that is, the PPM passes the
security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the OTU2_XP card, a
UNQUAL-PPM NR condition occurs.
11.16.7 ODU Transparency
A key feature of the OTU2_XP card is the ability to configure the ODU overhead bytes (EXP bytes and
RES bytes 1 and 2) using the ODU Transparency parameter. The two options available for this parameter
are:
• Transparent Standard Use—ODU overhead bytes are transparently passed through the card. This
option allows the OTU2_XP card to act transparently between two trunk ports (when the card is
configured in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC).
• Cisco Extended Use—ODU overhead bytes are terminated and regenerated on both ports of the
regenerator group.
Table 11-27 Card Configuration Transition Summary
Card
Configuration
Transition To
Transponder Standard Regen Enhanced FEC Mixed 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy to WAN Phy
Transponder — Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standard Regen Yes — No Yes Yes
Enhanced FEC Yes No — No No
Mixed Yes Yes No — Yes
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to
WAN Phy
Yes Yes No The 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN
Phy to Mixed is
supported if the
Port pair 1-3 is
chosen as
Transponder.
The 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN
Phy to Mixed is
not supported if
the Port pair 1-3
is chosen as
Standard Regen.
—
11-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
The ODU Transparency parameter is configurable only for Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card
configuration. For Transponder card configuration, this parameter defaults to Cisco Extended Use and
cannot be changed.
Note The Forward Error Correction (FEC) Mismatch (FEC-MISM) alarm will not be raised on OTU2_XP card
when you choose Transparent Standard Use.
11.16.8 OTU2_XP Functions
The functions of the OTU2_XP card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection, page G-27
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12
11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OTU2_XP card:
• NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds,
page 11-426
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 11-166
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is a multirate transponder for the ONS 15454 platform. The card is fully
backward compatible with TXP_MR_10E_C cards (only when the error decorrelator is disabled in the
CTC on the TXP_MR_10EX_C card). It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps,
100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is tunable over the 82 channels of
C-band (82 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid).
You can install TXP_MR_10EX_C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card can be provisioned in
linear, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP configurations or as a regenerator. The card can be
used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent
termination mode. The TXP_MR_10EX_C card features an MLSE-based Universal Transponder
1550-nm tunable laser and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2
1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port.
Note The PRE FEC BER performance of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card may be significantly low when
compared to the TXP_MR_10E card. However, this does not affect the Post FEC BER performance, but
could possibly affect any specific monitoring application that relies on the PRE FEC BER value (for
example, protection switching). In this case, the replacement of TXP_MR_10E card with the
TXP_MR_10EX_C may not work properly.
11-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card must be installed in a
high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13)
On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for
the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled.
11.17.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are:
• A multi-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately):
– OC-192 (SR1)
– 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
– 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
– (ONS-XC-10G-S1 version 3 only) IB_5G
• An MLSE-based UT module tunable through 82 channels of C-band. The channels are spaced at
50 GHz on the ITU grid.
• OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping.
• Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
• The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client
port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11.17.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-23 shows the TXP_MR_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram.
11-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
Figure 11-23 TXP_MR_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10EX_C card in
a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with this card, because they can cause
irreparable damage to the card.
11.17.3 TXP_MR_10EX_C Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
247063 Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Backplane
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10E MR
TXP L
TX RX
RX
TX
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
82 tunable channels (C-band)
on the 50-GHz ITU
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
or 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
11-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10EX_C
card:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports
transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G
10EX MXP.” The card multiplexes four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4xOC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single
10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The card provides wavelength transmission service for
the four incoming 2.5-Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder passes all
SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM.
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card works with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports
ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18.
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support
transparent termination mode.
You can install the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision a card in a
linear configuration, a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be
used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent
termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is
tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The card
features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs
(labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on
the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC
fiber connector.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode, which are necessary to
provision the 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.18.1 Key Features
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has the following high-level features:
11-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
• Four 2.5-Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10-Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals
are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm.
• Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has modular interfaces.
Two types of optic modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an OC-48/STM-16
SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications)
and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in
S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
• High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor
and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its
overhead bytes transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help
reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card normally synchronizes
from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as
maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available,
the card automatically synchronize to one of the input client-interface clocks.
• Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if
LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each
card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
11.18.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-24 shows the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram.
11-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
Figure 11-24 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-1.
11.18.3 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MXP L
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RAM Processor
247064
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Backplane
FEC/
Wrapper
E-FEC
Processor
(G.709 FEC)
Serial bus
uP bus
Onboard
Flash
memory
SR-1
(short reach/intra-office)
or IR-1
(intermediate range)
SFP client
optics modules
DWDM
(trunk)
10GE
(10GBASE-LR)
11-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.15 Jitter, page G-19
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10
11.18.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card implements the MLSE-based UT module. The
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2.
Table 11-28 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card.
The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-28 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
11-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
card:
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card aggregates a mix of client SAN service-client inputs (GE, FICON, and
Fibre Channel) into one 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one
long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU-T
G.957.
The card supports aggregation of the following signal types:
• 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-28 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
• 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet
• 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)
• 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it carefully.
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card works with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports
ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18.
Note You cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is enabled, then FEC cannot be
disabled.
Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to
a maximum limit of 10 Gbps.
You can install the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Note The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not
support transparent termination mode.
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser
is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. Each card
features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs
(labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on
the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC
fiber connector.
Table 11-29 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The
current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols,
including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON.
In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to
an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed
SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second
STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel.
Table 11-29 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes
11-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card includes two FPGAs, and a group of four ports is mapped to each
FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5 through 8. Table 11-30
shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for Ports 1 through 4, and
Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port.
GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE
and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE.
A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port
indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to
stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card
supports FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.1
miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to 400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The
feature can be enabled or disabled.
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or
850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The card contains eight 12.5-degree
downward-tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC
connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with
a 45-degree downward angle.
11.19.1 Key Features
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has the following high-level features:
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm.
2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
1.06 Gbps Yes
Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes
Table 11-29 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation (continued)
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
Table 11-30 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8
Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC
1 5 X X X X
2 6 X X — —
3 7 X X X —
4 8 X X — —
11-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
• Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has modular interfaces.
Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an
OC-48/STM-16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and
intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is
defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
• Y-cable protection: The card supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports
with the same port number and signal rate. See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on
page G-27 for more detailed information.
• High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• ALS: This safety mechanism is used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS
provisioning for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, see the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS
Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448.
• Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor
and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its
OH (overhead) bytes transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help
reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card normally synchronizes
from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as
maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available,
the card automatically synchronizes to one of the input client-interface clocks.
Note MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card cannot be used for line timing.
• Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client-interface output if
LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each
card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
• You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association
between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
11.19.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-25 shows the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C faceplate and block diagram.
11-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
Figure 11-25 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the card in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the card, because they can cause irreparable damage
to the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
11.19.3 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Functions
The functions of the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
10DME-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
247065
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
DWDM 4
RX TX
SPF 1/1
4G FC
SerDes
1 x QDR
2M x 36bit Burst4
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA Framer G.709/FEC
OTN MXP UT2
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 2/1
SPF 3/1
CPU
Core
FPGA
Power supply
SPF 4/1
SPF 6/1
4G FC
SerDes
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 7/1
SPF 8/1
SPF 9/1
Client
ports
Group 1
Group 2
11-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
11.19.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card uses a C-band version of the MLSE-based UT module.
Table 11-31 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. The laser is tunable over
82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-31 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
11-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card:
• NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-300
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-31 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
The AR_MXP (Any-Rate Muxponder) and AR_XP (Any-Rate Xponder) cards are supported on ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and
ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The AR_MXP card supports a trunk bandwidth of up to 10 Gbps, and the AR_XP card supports a trunk
bandwidth of up to 20 Gbps. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards aggregate a mix of client SAN services (FC or FICON 1G/2G/4G/8G,
ESCON and ISC3-STP 1G/2G), Ethernet (GE, FE), OCn (OC3/STM-1, OC12/STM-4, and OC48/STM-16), OTU (OTU1,
OTU2e/1e), and Video (SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI) into one 10 Gbps signal on the trunk side.
The cards support aggregation of the following signal types:
• SONET/SDH:
– STM-1/OC-3
– STM-4/OC-12
– STM-16/OC-48
11-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
• OTN:
– OTU-1
– OTU-2 (OTU1E/OTU2E)
• Ethernet:
– Fast Ethernet (FE)
– Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
• SAN:
– Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON)
– 1 Gigabit Fiber Channel or fiber connectivity (FICON)
– 2 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON
– 4 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON
– 8 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON
– 1G ISC3-STP
– 2G ISC3-STP
• Video:
– SD-SDI (270 Mbps)
– HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps)
– Third-generation SDI (3G-SDI) (2.970 Gbps)
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.
Caution The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards can be damaged if dropped. Handle it safely.
Table 11-32 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The digital
wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set
up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards work
with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The client can be OTU1 with standard G.975 FEC or
disabled FEC. The cards provide standard 4 x OTU1 to OTU2 multiplexing. The OTU2 card is equipped
with standard G.709 FEC, E-FEC I.4, E-FEC I.7 and disabled FEC. The cards support ODU1 to OTU1
or OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. For more details on multiplexing, see “G.12 Multiplexing
Function” section on page G-18.
Table 11-32 AR_MXP and AR_XP Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP Encapsulation
OC3/ STM1 155.52 Mbps —
OC12/STM4 622.08 Mbps —
OC48/STM16 2.488 Gbps —
FE 100 Mbps GFP-F
GE 1.125 Gbps GFP-F
1GFC 1.06 Gbps GFP-T
11-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
11.20.1 Key Features
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the following key features:
• Multiple Operating Modes—The AR_MXP or AR_XP cards can be configured into multiple
operating modes. The cards are equipped with pluggables for client and trunk options, and offer a
large variety of configurations. For more information about multiple operating modes, see
11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes, page 11-126.
• Operating Mode to Client Payload Mapping—Each operating mode supports a specific set of client
payloads. Table 11-33 and Table 11-34 lists the supported payloads for each operating mode.
Table 11-33 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Supported Client-Payload Mapping—SONET/SDH, Ethernet, OTU1, and FC
2GFC 2.125 Gbps GFP-T
4GFC 4.25 Gbps GFP-T
8GFC 8.5 Gbps GFP-T
OTU1 2.66 Gbps —
OTU2 10.7 Gbps —
ESCON 200 Mbps GFP-T
1G ISC3-STP 1.06 Gbps GFP-T
2G ISC3-STP 2.125 Gbps GFP-T
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbps GFP-F
SD-SDI 270 Mbps GFP-F
3G-SDI 2.970 Gbps GFP-F
Table 11-32 AR_MXP and AR_XP Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP Encapsulation
Card Mode Rate
SONET/SDH Ethernet OTU FC
OC3/
STM1
OC12/
STM4
OC48/
STM16 FE GE OTU1 OTU2e
FICON1G/
FC1G
FICON2G/
FC2G
FICON4G/
FC4G
TXP_MR LOW Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
HIGH No No No No No No Yes No No No
TXPP_MR LOW N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
HIGH N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
MXP_DME HIGH No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
MXPP_DME HIGH No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
MXP_MR LOW Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
HIGH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
MXPP_MR LOW Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
HIGH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
MXP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No Yes No No Yes No No No No
11-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Table 11-34 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Supported Client-Payload Mapping—ISC and Video
• Auto Sensing—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support auto sensing of client payloads. The line
card analyzes the received client signal and configures the payload on the client port automatically
without user intervention.
Auto sensing feature is supported on the Gigabit Ethernet, OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and
OC-48/STM-16 payloads. Following operating card modes support the autosensing feature:
– TXP (low rate)
– TXPP (low rate)
– MXP_MR (low and high Rate)
– MXPP_MR (low and high rate)
CTC supports the configuration of all the provisioning parameters supported by the autosensed
payload. However, creation and deletion of the
MXPP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No Yes No No Yes No No No No N
MXP-VD-10G HIGH No No No No No No No No No No N
REGEN HIGH No No No No No No Yes No No No N
LOW No No No No No Yes No No No No N
ISC Video
Card Mode Rate ISC-1
ISC3_S
TP_1G
ISC3_S
TP_2G SD-SDI HD-SDI 3G-SDI
TXP_MR LOW No Yes Yes No No No
HIGH No No No No No No
TXPP_MR LOW N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
HIGH N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
MXP_DME HIGH No No No No No No
MXPP_DME HIGH No No No No No No
MXP_MR LOW No No No No No No
HIGH No No No Yes Yes No
MXPP_MR LOW No No No No No No
HIGH No No No Yes Yes No
MXP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No No No No No
MXPP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No No No No No
MXP-VD-10G HIGH No No No No No Yes
REGEN HIGH No No No No No No
LOW No No No No No No
Card Mode Rate
SONET/SDH Ethernet OTU FC
OC3/
STM1
OC12/
STM4
OC48/
STM16 FE GE OTU1 OTU2e
FICON1G/
FC1G
FICON2G/
FC2G
FICON4G/
FC4G
FI
FC
11-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
circuits are the only configurations supported on the “AUTO” payload.
• Video Multiplexing—The AR_XP cards support the capability to multiplex SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and
3G-SDI signals over the OTU2 trunk interface allowing to maximize the wavelength bandwidth,
maintain full transparency for uncompressed signals, and reduce latency. The video multiplexing of
3G-SDI signal is not supported on the AR_MXP card.
• Regenerator Mode—This mode regenerates the OTU2e or OTU1 signals with ODU transparent or
CISCO Extended Use options. For OTU2e, FEC can be Disabled, Standard G.975, EFEC I.4 or
EFEC I.7, and for OTU1, FEC can be Standard G.975 or Disabled.
• High Speed GCCs—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the provisioning of GCC channel on
OTN (OTU1/OTU2) enabled client and trunk ports. A maximum of five GCC channels on the
Cisco ONS 15454 shelf and ten GCC channels on Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6
shelf can be created. The high speed GCC enables you to create the GCC when both the NE and FE
line cards are in Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The legacy GCC on
Cisco ONS 15454 shelf can be selected on one side and the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf on the other side.
• Y-cable protection—Y-cable protection between the same card type is supported only on ports with
the same port number and signal rate. For more detailed information, see “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable
Protection” section on page G-27.
• Licensing—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards offer you an unprecedented flexibility. The cards
support a wide range of different applications and configurations. To help you take advantage of
such flexibility to lower capital expenditures (CapEx) on your network, Cisco provides a licensing
model for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards. For more information on licensing, see the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Licensing Configuration Guide.
11.20.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-26 shows the AXP_MXP and AR_XP faceplates.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have eight SFP and two XFP ports. The client and trunk ports are either
SFP (2.5 G) or XFP (10 G) based ports.
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be tuned to any wavelength over the C-band by inserting the required
DWDM SFP or XFP on client or trunk ports. For optical termination, each XFP/SFP uses two LC
connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate.
11-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-26 AR_MXP and AR_XP Faceplates
Figure 11-27 shows the AXP_MXP and AR_XP block diagram.
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR
1040.10 AND 1040.11
EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT
TO LASER
NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
AR-MXP
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX RX
9 10
TX RX
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 6 7 8
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR
1040.10 AND 1040.11
EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT
TO LASER
NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
AR-XP
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX RX
9 10
TX RX
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 6 7 8
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
246868
11-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-27 AR_MXP and AR_XP Block Diagram
For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-4.
Caution A 15 to 20 dB fiber attenuator must be used when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port.
Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage
to the DWDM/CWDM XFP/SFPs plugged in AXP_MXP or AR_XP card.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards can be installed in Slot 1 to Slot 6 and Slot 12 to Slot 17 in the
Cisco ONS 15454 chassis, the Slot 2 to Slot 7 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis, and Slot 2 and Slot 3
in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards do not interoperate with all the
existing TXP or MXP cards. The AR_MXP card allows you to configure only one high rate XFP port.
This can be a muxponder mode where N [N= 1 to 8] client ports goes out via 1 trunk XFP port or in a
transponder mode where client and trunk are XFP ports. There is no limitation in the AR_XP card, where
you can use both high rate trunk ports simultaneously.
The AR_XP card allows you to configure two high rate operational modes, where as you can configure
only one high rate operational mode on the AR_MXP card.
246867 Backplane
Switch L2
PROTO Only
Arrow
PROTO Only
OTN
Framer/ASIC
PCIe
Switch Soliera
Flash FPGA
FE PHY FE PHY
TNC
Main
RMII
MII MII RGMII
SCC
Optional ASIC
Control Channel
TNC
Protect
Local Bus eTSEC1 DDR2
Controller
DDR2
1Gbit
DDR2
1Gbit
Log Flash
Flash
16bit
PCIe SPI
16bit
SGMII
32bit
Pallerone
FPGA
GTX0
GTX1
16bit
UCC3
TNC
DMA controller e500 Core MPC8568E
UCC1
SCL
UCC7 UCC5
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
11-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes
A single AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured into multiple operating modes. Criteria for
selecting a particular operational mode are defined by the network level design. CTP helps you to choose
the appropriate operational mode. Each operating mode is divided into two categories based on the trunk
rate:
– Low rate (trunk rate < 5G)
– High rate (trunk rate > 5G)
When you configure the AR_MXP or AR_XP card in to multiple operational modes, make sure that the
following tasks are completed:
• The OCHCC circuit should be created for Any-rate mode.
• Same operational mode is configured at both ends and ensure the port numbers are same on both
ends.
• The OCHCC circuit should be created between the same client port numbers at the near and far end.
• Ensure ODU and TS are matching on both ends.
• For auto sensing payloads created on auto ports, you should check the Auto Sensing checkbox in the
provisioning pane.
• Check the Auto Sensing checkbox in the provisioning pane on the auto provisioned ports for the auto
sensing payload.
• WSON circuits cannot be created for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards.
• PPMs must be provisioned on all ports before configuring the operational mode.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the following operating modes:
• TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder), page 11-126
• TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder), page 11-128
• MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder), page 11-129
• MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder), page 11-130
• MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder), page 11-131
• MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder), page 11-133
• MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder), page 11-134
• MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder), page 11-135
• REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator), page 11-135
• MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder), page 11-137
TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate TXP_MR card mode.
Note OTN cannot be enabled for 4GFC trunk ports.
11-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
• Low Rate—A maximum of four TXP_MR configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP
or AR_XP card (Figure 11-28). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate
TXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Two SFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 1-5, 2-6, 3-7,
and/or 4-8.
2. Ports 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, or 7 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 can be configured as client ports.
Note The trunk port is not created when the low-rate TXP_MR card operating mode is configured. It is created
after the client payload is created.
Figure 11-28 Low-Rate TXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—Only one TXP_MR configuration can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP
card (Figure 11-29). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate TXP_MR card
by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. XFP ports 9 and 10 must be grouped.
2. Port 10 must be configured as a trunk port.
3. Port 9 must be configured as a client port.
11-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-29 High-Rate TXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXPP_MR card mode. A maximum of
two TXPP_MR configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-30).
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXPP_MR card by adhering to the
following provisioning rules:
1. Three SFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-5-6 or 2-7-8, or both.
2. Ports 5 and 6, and 7 and 8 must be configured as trunk ports, where 6 and 8 are the protect trunk
ports for 5 and 6 respectively.
3. Ports 1 and 2 must be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 5-6 and 7-8.
11-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-30 Low-Rate TXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:1 or 8:1 MXP_DME card mode. The AR_MXP card
can be configured as a high rate 8:1 MXP_DME card mode.
• 4:1 MXP_DME mode—A maximum of two MXP_DME configurations can be provisioned on a
single AR_XP card (Figure 11-31). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:1
MXP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Four SFP ports and one XFP port must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9 or
5-6-7-8-10, or both.
2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, and 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be configured as client ports.
• 8:1 MXP_DME mode—Only one MXP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single
AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-31). The AR_MXP or AR_XP can be configured card as a
high-rate 8:1 MXP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Eight SFP ports and one XFP port must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9.
2. Port 9 must be configured as a trunk port.
3. Ports 1 to 8 must be configured as client ports.
11-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-31 High-Rate MXP_DME Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:2 or 8:2 MXPP_DME card mode.
• 4:2 MXP_DME mode—Only one MXPP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single
AR_XP card (Figure 11-32). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:2 MXPP_DME
card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Four SFP ports and two XFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9-10 or
5-6-7-8-9-10.
2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, or 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
• 8:2 MXPP_DME mode—Only one MXPP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single
AR_XP card (Figure 11-32). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 8:2 MXPP_DME
card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Eight SFP ports and two XFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10.
2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 must be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
11-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-32 High-Rate MXPP_DME Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate MXP_MR card mode.
• Low Rate—A maximum of two MXP_MR configurations can be provisioned depending on the
availability of client ports (Figure 11-33). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a
low-rate MXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. N:1 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 7.
2. Only ports 5, 6, 7, or 8 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports, if they are not configured as trunk ports.
Any client port can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without
impacting the traffic on the existing services. Minimum of two client ports should be part of the
operational mode group.
11-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-33 Low-Rate MXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—A maximum of two MXP_MR configurations can be provisioned on an AR_XP card
and only one such configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP card (Figure 11-34). The
AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP_MR card by adhering to the
following provisioning rules:
1. N:1 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 8.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports.
Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without
impacting the traffic on the existing services.
Figure 11-34 High-Rate MXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
11-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate MXPP_MR card mode.
• Low Rate—A maximum of two MXPP_MR configurations can be provisioned depending on the
availability of client ports (Figure 11-35). Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk
bandwidth supports the new payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services.
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate MXPP_MR card by adhering to the
following provisioning rules:
1. N:2 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 6.
2. Only ports 5 and 6 or 7 and 8, or both can be configured as trunk port.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports, if ports are not configured as a trunk ports and are
not part of another muxponder.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 5 and 6 or 7 and 8.
Figure 11-35 Low-Rate MXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—A maximum of one MXPP_MR configuration can be provisioned on an AR_XP card
(Figure 11-36). Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new
payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services.
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXPP_MR card by adhering to the following
provisioning rules:
1. N:2 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 8.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
11-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-36 High-Rate MXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP-4x2.5-10G card mode. Only one
MXP-4x2.5-10G configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP card and a maximum of two on an
AR_XP card (Figure 11-37).
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be provisioned as MXP-4x2.5-10G card by adhering to the following
provisioning rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9 or 5-6-7-8-10, or both.
2. Ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1-2-3-4 or 5-6-7-8 can be configured as client ports.
Figure 11-37 High-Rate MXP-4x2.5-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration
11-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXPP-4x2.5-10G card mode. Only one
MXPP-4x2.5-10G configuration can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-38).
The AR_XP card can be configured as MXPP-4x2.5-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning
rules:
1. Four SFP ports and two XFP ports must be configured. The allowed port pair is 1-2-3-4-9-10 or
5-6-7-8-9-10, or both.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1-2-3-4 or 5-6-7-8 can be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
Figure 11-38 High-Rate MXPP-4x2.5-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration
REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or high-rate REGEN card mode.
11-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
• Low Rate—A maximum of four REGEN configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP
or AR_XP card (Figure 11-39). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate
REGEN card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 or 1-5, 2-6, 3-7, 4-8.
Figure 11-39 Low-Rate REGEN Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—Only one REGEN configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card
(Figure 11-40). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high rate REGEN card by
adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 9-10.
Figure 11-40 High-Rate REGEN Card Operating Mode Configuration
The 10 GE over OTU2e/OTU1e signal with disabled FEC, standard FEC, I.4 or I.7 EFEC mode can be
regenerated. The ODU transparency can either be CISCO Extended or Use or Transparent Standard Use.
Note Payload PMs are not supported in this operating mode.
11-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP-VD-10G card mode. A maximum of two
MXP-VD-10G configurations can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-41).
The AR_XP card can be configured as MXP-VD-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning
rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-9 or 5-6-7-10.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1-2-3 and 5-6-7 can be configured as client ports.
Figure 11-41 High-Rate MXP-VD-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration
11.20.4 Scenarios of Different Operational mode Configurations on an AR_MXP or AR_XP Card
The following section provides a few sample scenarios of different operational modes that can be
configured on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card:
Scenario 1
In this example (Figure 11-44), the following three operational modes are configured on the AR_MXP
card:
• Low-rate TXP_MR (Cl=1;Tr=5)
• Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=3,4;Tr=7)
• High-rate 3:1 MXP_MR (Cl=2,6,8;Tr=9)
11-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-42 Scenario 1
Scenario 2
In this example (Figure 11-43), high-rate MXP_DME (8:1) operational mode is configured on the
AR_MXP card.
Figure 11-43 Scenario 2
300201
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OC48
FC4
FC1
GE
OTU1
OTU2
OC48
OTU1
GE
300202
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OC48
FC1
FC2
FE
GE
OTU2
FC1
GE
FC2
11-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Scenario 3
In this example (Figure 11-44), the following four operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card:
• Low-rate TXP_MR (Cl=1;Tr=2)
• 8G FC TXP (Cl=9;Tr=10)
• Low-rate MR_MXP (Cl=4,7;TR=8)
• Low-rate MR_MXP (Cl=3,6;TR=5)
Figure 11-44 Scenario 3
Scenario 4
In this example (Figure 11-45), the following two operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card:
• High-rate MXP-4x2.5-10G (Cl=1,2,3,4;Tr=9)
• High-rate 4:1 MXP_DME (Cl=5,6,7,8;Tr=10)
300203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FC2
OTU1
OC12
FC4
OTU1
FC8
OTU2
FE
FC4
FC4
11-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-45 Scenario 4
Scenario 5
In this example (Figure 11-46), the following three operational modes are configured on the AR_XP
card:
• Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=1,2,3;Tr=5)
• Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=3,6,8;Tr=7)
• REGEN(Cl=9;Tr=10)
Figure 11-46 Scenario 5
300204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OTU1
OC48
OC48
OTU1
FC4
OTU2
OTU2
FC1
GE
FC2
300205 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
STM4
FE
STM1
STM4
OTU1
OTU2
OTU2
STM4
OTU1
STM4
11-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Scenario 6
In this example (Figure 11-47), the following two operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card:
• Low-rate MXPP_MR (Cl=1,3,4;Tr=5,6)
• High-rate MXPP_MR (Cl=2,7,8;Tr=9,10)
Figure 11-47 Scenario 6
11.20.5 AR_MXP and AR_XP Functions and Features
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have the following functions and features:
• Client Interface—G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• DWDM Interface—G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• DWDM Trunk Interface—G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
• Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature—G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• Timing Synchronization—G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• Y-Cable Protection—G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection, page G-27
• Jitter Considerations—G.37 Jitter Considerations, page G-32
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.20.6 Related Procedures for AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AR_MXP and AR_XP
cards:
300206
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OC3
OTU1
OC12
FE
OTU1
OTU2
OTU2
OTU1
FC4G
OTU1
11-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MLSE UT
• “NTP-G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards” section on
page 11-454.
• “NTP-G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds”
section on page 11-454.
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance.
11.21 MLSE UT
The maximum likelihood sequence estimation (MLSE) based universal transponder (UT) modules are
added to the TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards to support
the error decorrelator functionality to enhance system performance.
11.21.1 Error Decorrelator
The MLSE feature uses the error decorrelator functionality to reduce the chromatic dispersion (CD) and
polarization mode dispersion (PMD), thereby extending the transmission range on the trunk interface.
You can enable or disable the error decorrelator functionality using CTC or TL1. The dispersion
compensation unit (DCU) is also used to reduce CD and PMD. The MLSE-based UT module helps to
reduce CD and PMD without the use of a DCU.
11.22 SFP and XFP Modules
SFPs and 10-Gbps SFPs (XFPs) are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial
links from a port or slot to the network. For more information on SFPs/XFPs and for a list of SFPs/XFPs
supported by the transponder and muxponder cards, see the Installing the GBIC, SFP, SFP+, and XFP
Optical Modules in Cisco ONS Platforms.
In CTC, SFPs/XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). To provision SFPs/XFPs and change the
line rate for multirate PPMs, see the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” section on page 11-152.
11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
The procedures described below explain how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP),
Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must
be performed before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and
create circuits.
11.23.1 Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a
scheduled maintenance window.
11-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 11-144—Complete this procedure to provision a
multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete
a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception
of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162—As needed, complete this procedure
for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected
with Y-cable protection.
3. NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 11-166—As needed,
complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card.
4. NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-168—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
5. NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds, page 11-171—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings
for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
6. NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings
for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
cards.
7. NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 6-72—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards.
8. NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM
Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-237—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the
transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
9. NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
10. NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-282—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
11. NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-300—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
12. NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-322—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
13. NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group
Settings, page 11-345—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings
for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
14. NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings,
page 11-356—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
11-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
15. NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings,
page 11-368—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
16. NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings,
page 11-373—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
17. NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line
Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 11-379—As needed, complete this procedure to change the
transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
18. NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-423—As needed, complete
this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring.
19. NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds,
page 11-426—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
OTU2_XP cards.
20. NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings, page 11-448—As needed, complete this
procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.
21. NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update, page 11-450—As needed, complete this procedure to force an
upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
22. NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group, page 11-451—As
needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is
part of a protection group.
23. NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator, page 11-452—As needed, complete this procedure to
enable error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport
Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values
can be changed after you install the PPM.
Purpose Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the
optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate
PPM.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules
(PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable I/O devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information
about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the “DLP-G235 Change
the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode” task on page 11-146. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
card, complete the “DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode” task on page 11-147. If
not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the “DLP-G379
Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149. If not,
continue with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the “DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode”
task on page 11-151. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the “DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G
PPM and Port” task on page 11-150. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are provisioning a PPM on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card, complete the “NTP-G321 Provision
Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards” task on page 11-454. If not, continue with
Step 9.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152 for TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you
already preprovisioned the multirate PPM (DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73),
skip this step and continue with Step 10.
Step 10 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference – Control Link Oscillator) or
InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete “DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for
ETR_CLO and ISC Services” task on page 11-153. Otherwise, continue with Step 11.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” task on page 11-155 to assign a line rate to
a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not
performed for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.)
Step 12 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task
on page 11-161.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
11-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed:
• FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports
1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1
only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
• Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and
ONE_GE (Port 1–1 only), ESCON (Ports 5–1 through 8-1 only)
• ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the
supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths.
For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Purpose This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which
PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port
mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode,
all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second
port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second
port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned
for the selected port group is deleted (see the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task on page 11-161).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 11-35.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on
page 11-152.
Purpose This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the
wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band
wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If
the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present.
Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported.
Table 11-35 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
Parameter Description Options
Port 1-4 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for Ports
1-1 through 4-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through
4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1
through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
• FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Port 5-8 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for
Ports 5-1 through
8-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through
8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1
through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
• FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).
11-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4.
If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 11-36.
:
Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card
mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2
Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be
provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G
Ethernet MXP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-36 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
L2 over DWDM GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as
a Layer 2 switch.
10GE TXP 10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit
Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port
1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic
received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to
10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1.
11-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do
not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames
are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any
one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Step 6 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
10GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit
Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent
to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1.
20GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
Table 11-36 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
Purpose This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down
list.
– Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE
– Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12
– Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the
current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the
OTU2_XP card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab.
Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,
disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete
the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS, DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked, disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed:
• Transponder—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3
and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration.
Purpose This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines
which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• Standard Regen—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator
(with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators.
• Enhanced FEC—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator
(with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are
not used.
• Mixed—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard
regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder
and the other port pair as a standard regenerator.
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to
enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN
Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator.
Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G
Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed.
Note Table 11-174 on page 11-439 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the
OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in
the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2
and 4.
For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, see the “11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card
Configuration Rules” section on page 11-103.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on
page 14-73 this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous
Management, Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, or unassigned (ETSI)
service state.
Purpose This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to
provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 3 through 5. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service.
The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
• Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets
of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Figure 11-48 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Purpose This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM
ETR_CLO and ISC services.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner site plan
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Figure 11-48 Single-Span Topology
• Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating)
sites cannot be installed. Figure 11-49 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in
Cisco TransportPlanner.
Figure 11-49 Point-to-Point Topology
• Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 11-50 shows two hub nodes with no line
amplifier nodes installed. Figure 11-51 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
134361
Site 1 Site 4
W E
134360
Site 1 Site 4
Site 2
E W
E
W
Site 3
E
W
11-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Figure 11-50 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 11-51 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Site 1
Site 2
W
E
E
W
134358
Purpose This task provisions the line rate for TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services,
page 11-153, if you are provisioning an ETR_CLO service.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
134359
Site 1 Site 2
Site 2
W
E
E
W
W E
E W
Site 4
11-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete
the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152 if the trunk port is out of service. If
the optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you
provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM
ports. If the data rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3
(for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps.
Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply.
Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. For all other cards, go
to Step 4.
Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click Create and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The
supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM
in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM.
For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears
as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
• Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the
supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 11-37 on page 11-157 for definitions of the supported
rates on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP
card.
Step 7 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue
if the SFP is not installed.
If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service
(for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings.
Step 8 Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.
11-157
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types
Card Port Type
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
• OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
• OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal)
• DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
• SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video
signal type 1
• HDTV—High Definition Television
• PASS-THRU—Not specified
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
• ETR_CLO—External Time Reference–Control Link Oscillator
• ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
• ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
• DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital
Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface
• ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal)
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1
TXP_MR_10G2 • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
11-158
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
• SONET (OC-768)/SDH (STM-256)
• 40G Ethernet LAN Phy
• OTU3
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
If the card mode is FC_GE:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port 1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and
2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type
11-159
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1
only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1,
6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port
that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1
through 8-1)
• ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not
available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a
PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
• FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports
are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM
provisioned.)
• FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports
that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
40G-MXP-C
40E-MXP-C
40ME-MXP-C
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
• FC8G
• FC10G
• TEN_GE
• OTU2
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
• GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1
• 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and
GE_XPE trunk ports1
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type
11-160
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
OTU2_XP • SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps
Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been
generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose
SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be
transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator
configuration.
AR_MXP
AR_XP
• OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
• OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
• Gigabit Ethernet—1.125 Gbps
• Fast Ethernet—100 Mbps
• ESCON-Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal)
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
• FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps
• FC8G—Fibre Channel 8.5 Gbps
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 (IBM signal)
• FICON8G—Fiber connectivity 8.5 Gbps (IBM signal)
• SD-SDI—270 Mbps
• HD-SDI—1.485 Gbps
• Third-generation SDI (3G-SDI)—2.970 Gbps
• OTU2E —11.09 Gbps
• OTU1—2.66 Gbps
1. Automatically provisioned when the PPM is created if the trunk port is out of service.
2. Provisioned on the Data Rate Selection tab.
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type
11-161
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane.
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete
the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate” task on page 11-192.
Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a
PPM if the card configuration is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to
delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is OOS,DSBLD. If the PPM port is OOS,DSBLD, go to Step 3.
If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 11-144,
to change the Service State of the PPM port to OOS,DSBLD.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes
to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the
Pluggable Ports area.
Purpose This task deletes PPM provisioning for SFPs or XFPs installed on TXP,
MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 or
• DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-162
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client
port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled
(ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC)
or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits,
or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port
(except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the
last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
• In the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card view, CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
• If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to
the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC.
The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the
equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or
XFP” task on page 14-74.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Purpose This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports
of two TXP, MXP, AR_XP, AR_MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable
protection, see “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27.
Tools/Equipment • Installed TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
• Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
• NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files,
page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-163
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned
for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in
the TXP card mode.
Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the
Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see
the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings”
task on page 11-381.
Note There is a traffic hit of up to a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the
client ports.
Note The OTU2-XP and 40E-MXP-C card cannot implement Y-cable protection for the client ports in 10 GE
LAN PHY mode. Hence, a pair of OTU2_XP cards is used at each end in pass-through mode
(Transponder mode with G.709 disabled) to implement Y-cable protection. The 40E-MXP-CE card can
implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2-XP card for the client ports in LAN PHY GFP mode.
However, the 40E-MXP-CE card cannot implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2-XP card for
the client ports in LAN PHY WIS mode.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see the Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site. Verify
the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that
need Y-cable protection groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with “Y-Cable” in the
Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. For more information, see to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP
cards are installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109. Table 11-38
lists the protection types available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
11-164
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-38 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements
Y-cable MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
40G-MXP-C
40E-MXP-C
40ME-MXP-C
GE_XP1
10GE_XP2
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
OTU2_XP
AR_MXP
AR_XP
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect
transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a
different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as
the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the
same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port
2, and so on.
Note The working and protect card must be in the same shelf for a
multishelf node.
11-165
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you want to
create the Y-cable protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP
card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tab.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type
and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the
pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a
new rate to match using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 or
replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 14-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric
(a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use
question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to
the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
Splitter TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
AR_MXP
AR_XP
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a
TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card is
installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name.
OTU2_XP A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You
can create a splitter protection group on ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP
card using the “NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the
OTU2_XP Card” procedure on page 11-166.
1+1 GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the
card against client port and card failure.
1. When provisioned in 10GE MXP or 20GE MXP card mode.
2. When provisioned in 10GE TXP card mode.
Table 11-38 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements
11-166
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53.
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases:
• On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload.
• On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In
this case bidirectional switching is:
– Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled.
– Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled.
The bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card
Purpose This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports
of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection,
see the “G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection” section on page G-30.
Tools/Equipment Installed OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
11-167
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM
card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection
group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card.
Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder
configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is
the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a splitter protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see the Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site. Verify
which OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated
with “Splitter” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on
page 14-109.
Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable
port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and
that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the
pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the
same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the
“DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 or replace the pluggable port
(SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 14-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
• NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-168
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Splitter from the drop-down list.
• Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards
are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in
the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53.
Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port
and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For
additional information about 1+1 protection, see the “G.35.2 1+1
Protection” section on page G-30.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
• NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
11-169
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to protect the card against
client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109.
Step 3 Complete the NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 14-114 by selecting the Trunk to
Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection.
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” task on page 11-169 to create a protection group.
Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to None or Squelch. For detailed
information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX SFP, and
ONS-SE-ZE-EL SFP is used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel
cable (not Y-cable)
Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection
Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in
unexpected switching behavior.
Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other
values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the “DLP-G380
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on
page 11-381.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords, page 16-61
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-170
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose L2 1+1 (port) from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53.
Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the
Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
11-171
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-172
• DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-173
• DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-176
• DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings,
page 11-178
• DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G
FC/FICON Payloads, page 11-181
• DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-182
• DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-184
• DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-188
• DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-177
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-172
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-39.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type
shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed
in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for
the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-173
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Table 11-39 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation (option only
supported for SONET/SDH payloads).
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration
Section (ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section
(ETSI)
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card
to create a regeneration peer group. A
regeneration peer group facilitates the
management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group
synchronizes provisioning of the two
cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709
optical transport network (OTN) changes
made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the
peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot
be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in
a regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
Regeneration
Group Name
Sets the regeneration peer group name. User defined
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-174
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-40.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the “DLP-G305 Provision the
2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds” task on page 11-182.
Table 11-40 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each of the
ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
fail bit error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
degrade bit error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
11-175
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. • Disabled (default)
• Auto Restart
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km
distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through
1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by
asterisks (**)
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical
transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
Table 11-40 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-176
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-41.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-41 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
11-177
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-42.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this display updated automatically.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-41 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-178
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 11-43.
Table 11-42 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1,
OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-179
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Some parameters and options in Table 11-43 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does
not appear in CTC.
Table 11-43 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-180
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-43 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
11-181
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line
threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-44 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Purpose This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings
for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the
1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-44 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
8b10bDataOrderedSets Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.
11-182
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 11-45 and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-183
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 5 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 11-46, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low
depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-45 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off
DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R —
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber
connectivity (FICON)
2.125 Gbps 3R1
1. No monitoring
On or Off
High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R —
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off
OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R —
SDI/D1 video 270 Mbps 2R —
ISC-1 Compact 1.06 Gbps 3R Off
ISC-3 1.06 or
2.125 Gbps
2R —
ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R —
Table 11-46 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Signal TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High
3R –23 dBm –9 dBm
2R –24 dBm –9 dBm
11-184
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is
–26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-47, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-185
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-47 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –23 –8 –21 –2
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –24 –10 –21 –2
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –18 –3 –16 3
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–18 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–21 –14 –35 –8
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –18 –3 –16 3
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
— — — —
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
11-186
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 11-48, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power
High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as
needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and
hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–17 0 –16 3
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –26 –5 –17 –6
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –27 –7 –17 –6
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –21 0 –12 –1
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–21 0 –12 –1
Table 11-47 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
11-187
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–24 –11 –31 –12
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –21 0 –12 –5
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
— — — —
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
11-188
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-49 through 11-52.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings
independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-49 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–20 3 –12 –2
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
11-189
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-50 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-51 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-49 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Enable
• Disable
SF BER (Display only) The signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 11-50 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
11-190
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-52 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-51 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-52 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TIM
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
11-191
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G
Data Rate” task on page 11-192, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C
card, complete the “DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate” task on
page 11-193. If not, continue with Step 4.
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate
transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-52 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-192
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-193
• DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-195
• DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-200
• DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 11-202
• DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy Payloads, page 11-205
• DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-209
• DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-210
• DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-212
• DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-201
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card
where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-193
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G FIBER Channel
• (TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G
Step 9 Click Ok.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-194
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-53.
Table 11-53 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is
only available for SONET/SDH payloads).
• Transparent
• Section (TXP_MR_10E
only)
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(TXP_MR_10E only)
• Multiplex Section
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
only) Sets the transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Squelch
• AIS
• Squelch
• AIS
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a
regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer
group facilitates the management of two
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes
provisioning of the two cards. Payload type
and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network
(OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card
are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be
created on TXP cards that are in a
regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
11-195
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves
when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G
Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when
10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-54.
Regeneration
Group Name
(Display only) The regeneration peer group
name.
— —
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is
installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or
TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last
supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and
number of supported wavelengths are shown in
the format: first wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency spacing-number of
supported wavelengths. For example, the
TXP_MR_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed. The
TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed.
— —
Purpose This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-53 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
11-196
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note In Table 11-54, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards.
If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only)
Displays the port
number.
• 1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel
is provisioned on the
TXP_MR_10E card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
• 1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified
port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service
state. For more
information about
administrative states,
see the
Administrative and
Service States.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
11-197
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service State (Display only)
Identifies the
autonomously
generated state that
gives the overall
condition of the port.
Service states appear
in the format:
Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about
service states, see the
Administrative and
Service States.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) Sets the signal
fail bit error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) Sets the signal
degrade bit error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) The optical
transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
• SONET
• SDH
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-198
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports
ALS according to
ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be
disabled, or it can be
set for one of three
mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut
down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage
are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be
manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage
are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
AINS Soak (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) Sets the
automatic in-service
soak period.
Double-click the time
and use the up and
down arrows to
change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesSync (TXP_MR_10E,
OC192 only) Sets the
ProvidesSync card
parameter. If
checked, the card is
provisioned as a
network element
(NE) timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-199
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SyncMsgIn (TXP_MR_10E,
OC192 only) Sets the
EnableSync card
parameter. Enables
synchronization
status messages (S1
byte), which allow
the node to choose
the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Max Size (TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN
Phy only) Sets the
maximum Ethernet
packet size.
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
Incoming
MAC Address
(TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN
Phy only) Sets the
incoming MAC
address.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Wavelength Displays the
wavelength of the
client port.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz
ITU spacing; coarse wavelength
division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are
marked by asterisks (**)
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked
by asterisks (**)
Reach Displays the optical
reach distance of the
client port.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-200
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are
provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or
10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-55.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-55 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 (OC192)
• 2—Trunk
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2—Trunk
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
11-201
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port.
Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-56.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-55 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH
11-202
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Table 11-56 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 2 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. If the physical
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this
field is display-only.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and
TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does
not apply to TXP_MR_10G or
TXP_MR_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For TXP_MR_10G and
TXP_MR_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads,
including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-203
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-57.
Note Parameters shown in Table 11-57 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the
parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 (OC192)
• 2 (Trunk)
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-204
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
OFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Out of frame
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
11-205
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet
LAN payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
11-206
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-58 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer,
that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrorBytePkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive error bytes.
ifInFramingErrorPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive framing error counters.
ifInJunkInterPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
ifOutOctets
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
txTotalPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of transmit packets.
ifOutMulticastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
ifOutBroadcastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence
(FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size
permitted.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
11-207
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast
packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets
directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and
were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)
11-208
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and
1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
rxPauseFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
rxControlFrames Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the
MAC control sublayer.
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode
that is not supported by the device.
Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)
11-209
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-59, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port
alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-59 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
11-210
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-60, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Table 11-60 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-211
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-61, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing
value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-62, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Table 11-61 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
–1 –11 –1 –6
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C
uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
Version 3
1.0 –14.0 5.0 12.0
11-212
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the OTN settings.
Table 11-62 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
3 –16 1 –8
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C
uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
Version 3
3.0 –16 1.0 –8
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-213
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-63 through 11-66.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-63 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-64 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-63 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709
OTN should be enabled.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the
FEC should be enabled.
• Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC
is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the
ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the
optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping
11-214
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-64 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-215
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-65 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-66 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-64 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-65 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Table 11-66 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
11-216
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Table 11-66 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-217
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards does not support PPMs.
Note The maximum ambient operating temperature for 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards is 500 Celsius.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card, complete the “DLP-G656 Provision the
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate” task on page 11-218. If not, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-218
• DLP-G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-219
• DLP-G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings,
page 11-221
• DLP-G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-225
• DLP-G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 11-228
• DLP-G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-230
• DLP-G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-231
• DLP-G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-232
Purpose This procedure changes the line settings, PM parameters, and threshold
settings for 40G multirate transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if
necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-218
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) OC-768 or SDH (ETSI) STM-256
• 40G Ethernet LAN Phy (only when overclock mode is ON)
• OTU3
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-67.
Purpose This task changes the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the card settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-219
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the line settings.
Table 11-67 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454(ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH(ETSI)
Options
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another 40E-TXP-C
or 40ME-TXP-C card to create a regeneration
peer group. A regeneration peer group
facilitates the management of two
40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C cards that are
needed to perform a complete signal
regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes
provisioning of the two cards. Payload type
and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network
(OTN) changes made on one 40E-TXP-C or
40ME-TXP-C card is reflected on the peer
40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be
created on TXP cards that are in a
regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
Regeneration
Group Name
(Display only) The regeneration peer group
name.
— —
Trunk
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is
installed. The 40E-TXP-C, or 40ME-TXP-C
that is installed shows the C-band
wavelengths that it supports.
— —
Purpose This task changes the line settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-220
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-68.
Table 11-68 Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 1 and 2
Port Name Assigns a logical name for each of the ports
shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or
special characters, or both. The port name is blank by default.
For information about assigning a port name, see the
“DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)
ALS Mode (Client port only) Sets the ALS function
mode.
• Disabled (default)—ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss of
signal (LOS) occurs.
• Auto Restart: (OC-768/STM-256/OTU-3 only) ALS is on;
the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions
that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outage or LOS occurs. However, the
laser must be manually restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
Reach (Display only) Displays the optical reach
distance of the port.
• Autoprovision—(trunk port only) The system
automatically provisions the reach.
• VSR—(client port only) The system provisions very short
reach (VSR) for the port.
Wavelength Provisions the wavelength for the port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing.
The wavelengths carried by the card are identified with
two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
11-221
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the SONET, SDH, or Ethernet line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-69.
Squelch (Display only) Applicable only to
client port 1. When the termination mode is
set to transparent, squelch is enabled. For
section/line termination mode, AIS is
enabled.
For trunk port, squelch is disabled.
• Squelch
• AIS
• Disable
Note Both Squelch and AIS options are supported when the
selected Termination Mode is Transparent. If the
Termination Mode selected is Section or Line, then
only AIS is supported. This is applicable for
OC-192/STM-64 and OC-768/STM-256.
For OTN payloads, both Squelch and AIS options are
supported.
Overclock Enables or disables overclock mode on
trunk port.
• OFF (default)
• ON
Rx Wavelength Provisions the wavelength of the trunk port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing.
The wavelengths carried by the card are identified with
two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the SONET, SDH, or Ethernet line settings for
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-68 Line Settings (continued)of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-222
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note In Table 11-69, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 40G multirate transponder cards.
If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 11-69 SONET, SDH Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
• 1 (OC-768)
• 1 (40G Ethernet LAN Phy)
• 1 (OTU3)
• 1 (STM-256)
• 1 (40G Ethernet LAN
Phy)
• 1 (OTU3)
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Sets the signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as
a network element (NE) timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
EnableSync card parameter.
Enables synchronization status
messages (S1 byte), which allow
the node to choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the synchronization
status message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference Source
(Stratum 1)
• STU—Sync traceability unknown
• ST2—Stratum 2
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality level set
by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
11-223
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Send
DoNotUse
(OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a do not use (DUS)
message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Indicates the optical transport
type.
• SONET
• SDH
• SONET
• SDH
Termination
Mode
(OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
mode of operation.
Note This option is only
available for SONET/SDH
payloads.
• Transparent
• Section
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(RS)
• Multiplex Section (MS)
Table 11-70 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that support
OC192 payload in a
single-card configuration.
These ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/GE
)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the
specified port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be up
to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Table 11-69 SONET, SDH Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-224
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Admin State Sets the port service state. For more
information about administrative
states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInServic
e
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary
State Qualifier, Secondary State.
For more information about service
states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenanc
e
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The
DWDM transmitter supports ALS
according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or it can be set
for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off;
the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur. However, the laser must
be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is
off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak
period. Double-click the time and
use the up and down arrows to
change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal,
in hh.mm format, after which
the card becomes in service
(IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state is
not supported on interlink
ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state
is not supported on
interlink ports.
Reach Displays the optical reach distance
of the client port.
The Reach options depend on the
traffic type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
Table 11-70 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-225
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the line section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-71.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-71 Section Trace Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1 (OC-768)
• 2 (OC-768)
• 1 (STM-256)
• 2 (STM-256)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on Section overhead alarm is raised
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
11-226
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Default to restore default values.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G692 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTU Settings
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).The
supported range for 1 bit Hex TX trace is 20
to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside this
range, client transmits 00.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Expected String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every 5
seconds, if checked.
Checked or unchecked
(default)
Checked or unchecked
(default)
Purpose This task changes the OTU settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C
transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-71 Section Trace Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-227
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C or
40ME-TXP-C card where you want to change the OTU settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > OTU tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-72.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-72 OTU Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number that is applicable only for
OC-192/STM-64 payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
SyncMsgIn (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the EnableSync card
parameter. Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best
timing source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM Overrides the synchronization status
message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• ST2—Stratum 2
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
ProvidesSync (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element
(NE) timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
11-228
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-73.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings of 40E-TXP-C and
40ME-TXP-C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads,
including the physical 40G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-73 Line Threshold Settings for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1 (OC-768)
• 2 (OC-768)
• 1 (STM-256)
• 2 (STM-256)
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-229
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Table 11-73 Line Threshold Settings for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-230
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types area, verify that the TCA radio button is selected. If not, click it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-74, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter,
then click Apply.
Step 5 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 11-74, verify the trunk port (Port 2) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter,
then click Apply.
Step 9 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C trunk port alarm
and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-74 Trunk Port TCA Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Card
TCA RX Power
High (dbm)
TCA RX Power
Low (dbm)
TCA TX Power
High (dbm)
TCA TX Power
Low (dbm)
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
–9.0 –22.0 9.0 0.0
11-231
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Click Default to restore default values.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types area, verify that the TCA radio button is selected. If not, click it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-76, verify the client port (Port 1) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing
value, and entering the new value. Press Enter, then click Apply.
Step 5 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 11-75 Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
–9.0 –22.0 9.0 0.0
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-232
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 11-77, provision the client port (Port 1) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX
Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Step 9 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Table 11-76 Client Interface TCA Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Pluggable Port
Rate
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
40G Ethernet LAN
Phy
3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0
OC-768/STM-256 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0
OTU3 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0
Table 11-77 Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Pluggable Port
Rate
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
40G Ethernet
LAN Phy
5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0
OC-768/STM-256 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0
OTU3 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-233
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-78 through 11-81.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End, 15 Min and 1 Day, and SM and PM independently. To
do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-78 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-79 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-78 OTN Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 1 (only when data rate is set to
OTU3)
• 2
ITU-T G.709
OTN
(Display only) Displays the OTN lines
according to ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Standard or Enhanced. Standard is
the same as enabling FEC. Enhanced FEC
mode can be enabled to provide greater
range and lower bit error rate.
• Standard
Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced
Enhanced FEC is on.
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
11-234
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-79 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
11-235
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Table 11-79 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-80 FEC Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
11-236
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Default to restore default settings.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-81 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1 (OTU3)
• 2 (Trunk)
• 1 (OTU3)
• 2 (Trunk)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on Section overhead alarm is raised
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every 5
seconds, if checked.
Checked or unchecked
(default)
Checked or unchecked
(default)
11-237
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the ADM-10G card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the “DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group” task on
page 11-238.
Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the “DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet
Settings” task on page 11-239.
Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings, page 11-240
• DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-245
• DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads, page 11-247
• DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload,
page 11-251
Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-254
• DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-255
• DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings, page 11-256
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure creates an ADM-10G peer group and changes line settings,
PM parameters, and threshold settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150 (if
necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-238
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card
can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18).
Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17.
Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion
ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any
wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates peer group protection for two ADM-10G cards within the
same node, located on the same shelf.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69, for
two ADM-10G cards (located on the same shelf) for which a peer group is
desired.
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-239
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 11-82. The parameters that appear
depend on the card mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-82 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n) and
rate.
—
MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet frames
accepted by the port.
Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216
Numeric: 1548
Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. 1000 Mbps
Framing Sets the framing type. • GFP-F
• HDLC
CRC Encap Sets the CRC encap values for the framing
type.
CRC encap value for GFP-F:
• None (default)
• 32-Bit
CRC encap value for HDLC:
• 16-Bit
• 32-Bit (default)
AINS Soak Automatic in-service soak time. The duration
of time that must pass with an uninterrupted
signal before the traffic/termination
transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or
unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
11-240
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-83 as needed.
Note In Table 11-83, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does
not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-241
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified port
a name.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin
State
Sets the port service
state. For more
information about
administrative states,
see the Administrative
and Service States
document.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInServ
ice
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
11-242
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service
State
(Display only)
Identifies the
autonomously
generated state that
gives the overall
condition of the port.
Service states appear in
the format: Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about
service states, see the
Administrative and
Service States
document.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenan
ce
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports
ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or
it can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-243
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH tabs.
Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-84 as needed.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic
in-service soak period.
Double-click the time
and use the up and down
arrows to change
settings.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
Reach Displays the optical
reach distance of the
client port.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
Wavelength Tunable wavelength. Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-244
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-84 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the client and trunk port
number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC192)
• 18-1 (OC192/Interlink)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1(STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64/Interlink)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
ProvidesSync When checked, the card is
provisioned as an NE
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to
choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
Send
DoNotUse
When checked, sends a
DUS message on the S1
byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
11-245
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18
[only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-85.
Type (Display only) Type of
node.
• SONET
• SDH
• SDH
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the
synchronization status
message (SSM)
synchronization
traceability unknown
(STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM
signal, it defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• ST2—Stratum 2
• TNC—Transit node clock
• ST3E—Stratum 3E
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-84 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-246
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-85 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/G
E)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
OC192 payload in
a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM1
6/GE)
• 17-1 (STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
STM64 payload
in a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Received
Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit
Section
Trace
String
Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
Current Current Transmit String
displays the current
transmit string; New
Transmit String sets a
new transmit string.
Current String Type
allows you to choose
between ASCII or
Hexadecimal format.
Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal
(button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to
change the display to
ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
11-247
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-86.
Received (Display only) Current
Received String displays
the current received
string. You can click
Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or
check the Auto-refresh
every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refr
esh
If checked, automatically
refreshes the display
every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying
SONET payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-85 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-248
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
• 17-1 (STM 64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that support
STM64 payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink ports
in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer group).
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
11-249
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
FC (Line Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-250
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
PSC Protection Switching
Count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
PSD Protection Switching
Duration
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-251
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit
Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 11-87 for a list of
available Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card
carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error-free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or
sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer.
ifInErrorBytePkts Number of receive error bytes.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame
check sequence (FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted
maximum size.
11-252
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that
contain an opcode not supported by this device.
dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an
opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3OutPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with
an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less
than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets).
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is
because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255
octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including
FCS octets.
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)
11-253
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the
broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface
that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (alignment error).
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmit packets.
Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)
11-254
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-88, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX
Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking
the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-89, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter.
Purpose This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and
threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-88 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Port
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
–7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm
11-255
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-47 on page 11-185 and Table 11-48 on page 11-186, verify the Port 1 to 16
(Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low
based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking
the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Table 11-89 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
1.0 dBm –13.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
–5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-256
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-47 and Table 11-48 on page 11-186, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for
RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds
as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value,
and pressing Enter.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-90 through 11-93.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh.
Table 11-90 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-257
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-91 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-90 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ITU-TG.709
OTN
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
Synch mapping
11-258
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-91 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ES Errored seconds. Selecting the SM
(OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-259
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-92 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-93 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-91 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-92 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals.
11-260
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-93 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on
Section/Path overhead alarm arises
because of a J0/J1 overhead string
mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication
(FDI) signal is sent to the downstream
nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Current Transmit String displays the
current transmit string; New sets a new
transmit string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Current Expected String displays the
current expected string; New sets a new
expected string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Current Received String
displays the current received string. You
can click Refresh to manually refresh this
display, or check the Auto-refresh every
5 sec check box to keep this panel
updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh
(every 5 sec)
If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)
11-261
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings, page 11-262
• DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings, page 11-264
• DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-266
• DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings, page 11-268
• DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings, page 11-271
• DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-273
• DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-275
• DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings, page 11-277
• DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-269
Step 4 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69.
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-262
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-94.
Note Parameters shown in Table 11-94 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter
or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type,
termination mode, and wavelength.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-263
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-94 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. Options that
do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on
SONET/SDH multiplexing. The
transparent mode terminates and rebuilds
the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the
incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2
byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L,
and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully
transparent in transparent mode based on
the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing
scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte
or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into
ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an
OTU2.
For ANSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Section (MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
• Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G,
only)
• Regeneration Section
(MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
AIS/Squelch (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the
transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Ais
• Squelch
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the
card is installed. For the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and
last supported wavelength, frequency
spacing, and number of supported
wavelengths are shown in the format: first
wavelength-last wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example, the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E
show the four wavelengths supported by
the card that is installed.
—
11-264
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-95.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client
ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk
(OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength
services. Client ports will not appear of the
pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
11-265
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can
be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted
when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type Sets the optical transport type. • SONET
• SDH
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to choose the best timing
source. (This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-266
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the section trace settings.
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked,
the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
(This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client
port.
Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-267
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-96.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 11-96 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. Select either
radio button.
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
11-268
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the
trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-97.
Purpose This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-97 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is
the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides
wavelength services.
5 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
11-269
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-97 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
11-270
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-98.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-98 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band available from the card that is
installed. If the card is preprovisioned,
the field can be provisioned to the band of
the card that will be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field
does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or
MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and
MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
11-271
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-99.
Note In Table 11-99, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder
cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold
settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-99 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-272
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
Table 11-99 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-273
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C trunk
port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Table 11-99 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-274
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Select TCA (if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click Refresh.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-100, verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-101, verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-100 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
11-275
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-102, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX
Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the
other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Table 11-101 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-276
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 11-103, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX
Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to provision each additional client port.
Table 11-102 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 0 –18 6 –11
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 0 –18 6 –11
Table 11-103 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client
Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 3 –21 3 –8
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 3 –21 3 –8
11-277
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
OTN G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-104 through 11-107.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-104 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 11-104, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not
apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-104 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
5 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
11-278
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-105 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC
mode can be Disabled or Enabled.
With the MXP_2.5G_10E card,
Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be
enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies
only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
• Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only)
FEC is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The
MXP_2.5G_10E can perform
standard ODU multiplexing
according to ITU-T G.709. The card
uses this to aggregate the four OC-48
client signals.
• ODU Multiplex
Table 11-104 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-279
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-105 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-280
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-106 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-107 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-105 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-106 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the interval selected.
The interval can be set for 15 minutes or
one day.
Numeric
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words during the interval selected. The
interval can be set for 15 minutes or one
day.
Numeric
11-281
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-107 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. The trail trace
identifier is applicable only to the trunk
interface, which handles ITU-T G.709
frames.
5 (Trunk)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
11-282
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 11-283
• DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 11-285
• DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings,
page 11-287
• DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-289
• DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-292
• DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads, page 11-294
• DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-296
• DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-297
• DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-291
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-283
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-108.
Purpose This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-108 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown by filling in this
field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric
Manager to create a link association between that SAN port
and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
11-284
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service
State
Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Table 11-108 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-285
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the
client port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz
ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-108 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-286
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS,DSBLD).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports
(Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. A client port must be provisioned for the tab to be present.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 Locate the Client port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following
substeps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according
to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in Table 11-109.
Table 11-109 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number • 1
• 2
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate
with the Cisco Multilayer Director
Switch (MDS) storage products.
Checked or unchecked
Auto Detect
Credits
Allows automatic detection of buffer
credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
Checked or unchecked
11-287
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G
card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in Table 11-110.
Credits
Available
(Display only) Displays the number of
buffer credits available.
Numeric (range depends on the client
equipment attached to the card)
Autoadjust
GFP Buffer
Threshold
Allows the threshold of the generic
framing procedure (GFP) buffer between
two MXP_MR_2.5G or two
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be
automatically adjusted.
Checked or unchecked
GFP Buffers
Available
Displays the number of GFP buffers
available between two MXP_MR_2.5G
or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Numeric
Purpose This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-109 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-288
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-110 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and Service
States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1 Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER1 Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
11-289
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-110 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-290
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 11-111.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-111 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (trunk ports for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can
click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)
11-291
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-112.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G
and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-112 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band that can be provisioned.
C—Only the C band is available
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning. This field does not apply to
MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G
cards
—
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.
11-292
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 11-113.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 11-113, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-113 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Port (Display only)
Port number
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
EB Path Errored
Block indicates
that one or
more bits are in
error within a
block
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
CV Coding
violations
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
11-293
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ES Errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SES Severely
errored seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
BBE Background
block errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SEFS (Section or
Regeneration
Section only)
Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
FC (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Table 11-113 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
11-294
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold
settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-114 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or
1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-114 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInDiscards Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent
their being transmitted.
11-295
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC)
and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the maximum
transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and
GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is
used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
Table 11-114 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
(continued)
11-296
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10
(MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 3 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High is –9 dBm and for RX Power Low is –23 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 4 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-297
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-115, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-298
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-116, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 11-115 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –21 –14 –32 –11
11-299
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client
ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-116 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –24 –11 –35 –8
11-300
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 11-301
• DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 11-303
• DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-305
• DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings,
page 11-306
• DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-308
• DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-309
• DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON,
or ISC/ISC3 Payloads, page 11-311
• DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-314
• DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-315
• DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings, page 11-319
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-301
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-117.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-117 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 1 through 8
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each
of the ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards,
which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link
association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a
Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see
the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
11-302
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.)
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.)
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.)
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.)
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.)
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to
ISC COMPACT payloads.)
• Squelch
• Disable
Table 11-117 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-303
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port
(Port 9).
Note The client port must be in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state in order to change
the distance extension settings. If a Y-cable is provisioned on the client port, both the working and
protect client ports must be in OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state before you change
the distance extension settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-118.
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre
Channel or FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-118 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Up to eight
ports might appear based on the number
of pluggable port modules that are
provisioned.
—
11-304
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will
interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage
products.
Checked or unchecked
Fast Switch If unchecked, the end-to-end fiber
channel link is reinitialized every time a
Y-cable protection switch occurs. If
checked, reinitialization of the link is
avoided when a Y-cable protection switch
occurs, thus reducing the traffic hit
considerably.
This feature is supported for FC1G,
FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, and
FICON4G trunk failures as well as
user-initiated Y-cable protection switch
such as, Manual, Force, or Lockout. It is
recommended that you do not enable the
Fast Switch option as the link may not
come up after a Y-cable protection switch
in certain cases.
Note This option can be used only if
you have unchecked Enable
Distance Extension option.
Checked or unchecked (default)
Table 11-118 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-305
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in Table 11-119.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-119 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 9 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. The field is display-only
when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the
card is provisioned in CTC only, you can
provision the band for the card that will
be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning.
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU
spacing
11-306
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET
(OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-120.
Purpose This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-120 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and Service
States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1 Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
11-307
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SD BER1 Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Table 11-120 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-308
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 11-121.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-121 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk only)
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)
11-309
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 11-122.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 11-122, some parameters and options do not apply to all MXP_MR_10DME cards. If
the parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-122 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 9 (Trunk) • 9 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-310
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-122 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-311
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(ONE_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3
payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-122 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-312
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 11-123
for a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 11-124 for a list of FC and FICON variables,
Table 11-125 for a list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and Table 11-126 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 11-123 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the
8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 11-124 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutOversizePkts Total number of oversized packets output from the
interface.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
11-313
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
fcStatsZeroTxCredits This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx
credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
fcStatsRxRecvrReady Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
fcStatsTxRecvrReady Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 11-125 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 11-126 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with
single bit errors in the core header (these errors are
correctable).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that
contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsCSFRaised Number of Rx client management frames with Client
Signal Fail indication.
gfpStatsLFDRaised The number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error
when in frame. It is a count of when the state
machine goes out of frame.
Table 11-124 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables (continued)
Variable Description
11-314
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and
TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-315
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –9 dBm
• RX Power Low: –18 dBm
• TX Power High: 9 dBm
• TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –8 dBm
• RX Power Low: –20 dBm
• TX Power High: 7 dBm
• TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
11-316
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm
and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-127, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-127 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –15 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
11-317
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-128, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX 0 –17 3 –16
ONS-SE-G2F-LX 0 –20 3 –16
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
Table 11-128 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
Table 11-127 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
11-318
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –13 –1
ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –13 0
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
Table 11-128 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
11-319
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-129 through 11-132.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-129 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-130 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-129 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping
11-320
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-131 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-132 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-130 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
Table 11-131 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-132 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
11-321
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Table 11-132 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-322
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to save the existing settings
before modifying.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings, page 11-323
• DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings, page 11-324
• DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings, page 11-326
• DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-328
• DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-331
• DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC
Payloads, page 11-333
• DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-337
• DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-338
• DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings, page 11-342
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and parameter threshold settings of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (Optional)
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (Optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-323
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify either of the settings described in Table 11-133.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the card settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-133 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Card Mode Sets the card mode. • Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
OOS,DSBLD state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
• Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
locked,disabled
state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
Trunk
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows supported wavelengths
of the trunk port after the card is installed. The
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C card that is installed shows the
C-band wavelengths that it supports.
— —
11-324
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Tabs and parameters vary according to the PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-134.
Purpose This task changes the line settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-134 Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1 through 4 (client)
• 5 (trunk)
Port Name Assigns a logical name for each of the port. User-defined. This can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special
characters, or both. The port name is blank by default.
For information about assigning a port name, see the
“DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Note You can assign a port name for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card, enabling the
MDS Fabric Manager to associate the SAN port and a
SAN port on the Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Shows the general condition
of the port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)
11-325
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode (Client ports only) Activates the ALS
mode.
• Disabled (default)—ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss of
signal (LOS) occurs.
• Auto Restart—(OC-192/STM-64 only) ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down during LOS. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outage or LOS occurs. However, the
laser must be manually restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and
down arrows to the change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card status changes to in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
• Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value
on the hardware.
• EW
• LW
• SW
• LRM
• ER
• LR
• SR
• ZR
• IR 2
• LR 2
• DWDM
• CWDM40km
Wavelength Provisions the port wavelength. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Table 11-134 Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-326
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameters vary according
to the PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-135.
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects.
• Squelch
Note Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.
• Disable
Note Both Squelch and AIS options are supported when the
selected Termination Mode is Transparent. If the
Termination Mode selected is Section or Line, then
only AIS is supported. This is applicable for
OC-192/STM-64 and OC-768/STM-256.
For OTN payloads, both Squelch and AIS options are
supported.
Overclock (Trunk port only) Enables or disables
overclock mode on the trunk port.
• OFF (default)
• ON
Rx Wavelength (Trunk port only) Provisions the trunk port
wavelength.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the SONET OC-192 or SDH STM-64 settings for the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-134 Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-327
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-135 Line SONET or SDH Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Port Name Assigns a logical name assigned to a port. This
field is blank by default.
User-defined. This can be up to 32 alphanumeric or
special characters, or both. The port name is blank by
default.
For information about assigning a port name, see the
“DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (Display only) Displays the ProvidesSync card
parameter state.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
Type Indicates the optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
Termination
Mode
(Display-only for Standard Regeneration and
Enhanced FEC card configurations) Sets the
mode of operation.
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (RS)
(ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (MS) (ETSI)
11-328
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
the PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-136.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings of the 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-136 Line Section Trace Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number that is applicable only
for OC-192/STM-64 payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables the alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1
bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside
this range, client transmits 00.
Transmit string size
11-329
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G691 Change the 40G Muxponder OTU Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the OTU settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > OTU tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to the PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-137.
Expected Displays and sets the current expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1
bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside
this range, client transmits 00.
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. Click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. • Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the OTU settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-136 Line Section Trace Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-330
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-137 OTU Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number that is applicable only for
OC-192/STM-64 payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
SyncMsgIn (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the EnableSync card
parameter. Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best
timing source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM Overrides the synchronization status
message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• ST2—Stratum 2
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
ProvidesSync (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element
(NE) timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
11-331
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings shown in Table 11-138.
Note In Table 11-138, some parameters and options do not apply to all 40-G-MXP-C cards. If the
parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-138 Line Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number.
Applicable for only
OC-192/STM-64
payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
—
11-332
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Table 11-138 Line Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-333
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in the card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the payload port— for example “1-1 (TEN_GE)”, or the equivalent
ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet or FC variable. See Table 11-139 for a list of
available Ethernet variables, Table 11-140 for a list of FC, and Table 11-140 for a list of GFP variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings of 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card carrying Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-139 Ethernet Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInUcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher
sub-layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub-layer.
inInMulticastPkts Number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher
sub-layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group
and Functional addresses.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher
sub-layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sub-layer.
ifInErrors Total number of received errors.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
11-334
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Count of frames received on a particular interface that are an
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) check.
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed
the maximum permitted frame size.
dot3StatsInPauseFrames Count of frames received on this interface with an opcode
indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3StatsOutPauseFrames Count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with
an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and
had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets.
etherStatsPkts Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast
packets, and multicast packets) transmitted and received by the
interface.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 65 and 127
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 256 and 511
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
Table 11-139 Ethernet Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
11-335
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octet
s
Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to a multicast address. Note that
this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast
address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an integral number
of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
transmitted and received by the interface on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 11-140 FC Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInErrors Total number of received errors.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutErrors Number of outbound packets or transmission units that
could not be transmitted because of errors.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
Table 11-139 Ethernet Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
11-336
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose an alarm type. The alarm type indicates whether or not an
event is triggered by the type of threshold.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the number of Sample Period occurrences.
Step 9 Enter the number of Rising Threshold occurrences.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTooLong Total number of transmitted data frames that are less than
5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port
statistics.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTruncated Number of transmitted data frames that exceed the MTU.
This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
Table 11-141 GFP RMON Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxFrame Total number of received data frames.
gfpStatsTxFrame Total number of transmitted data frames.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks where each contains Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsRxOctets Total number of GFP data octets received.
gfpStatsTxOctets Total number of GFP data octets transmitted.
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received GFP frames with single bit errors in the core
header (these errors can be corrected).
gfpStatsRxMBitErrors Received GFP frames with multiple bit errors in the core
header (these errors cannot be corrected).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that
contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsLFDRaised Count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors.
Note This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when
in frame. This can be looked at as a count of when
the state machine goes out of frame.
gfpRxCmfFrame —
gfpTxCmfFrame —
Table 11-140 FC Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
11-337
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
To trigger the alarm, the measured value of a threshold must always move from below the falling
threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network moves from below a rising threshold
of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds to 1001 collisions.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the exact opposite of a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above
the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded.
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 95.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –9.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –22.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 9.0
Purpose This task changes the trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-338
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• TX Power Low (dBm): 0.0
Provision new thresholds as needed by replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 5 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 98.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –8.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –24.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 7.0
• TX Power Low (dBm): 3.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-142, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by replacing the old values with new ones.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-339
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Table 11-142 Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM –9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 1.0 –14.0 5.0 –12.0
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 0.0 0.0 6.0 –6.0
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-SR-M
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –24.0 6.5 –2.5
11-340
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision the additional client ports.
Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 11-143, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
OC-192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –9.0 –26.0 8.0 –8.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –11.0 5.0 –12.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
1. In CTC, SFPs, and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the
“11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Table 11-142 Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
11-341
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-143 Client Interface Alarm Thresholds of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
1. In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the
“11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 2.0 –2.0 2.0 –2.0
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
OC-192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –28.0 4.0 –4.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –13.0 1.0 –8.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
11-342
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision additional client ports.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-144 through 11-147.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End, 15 Min and 1 Day, and SM and PM independently. To
do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-144 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-144 OTN Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ITU-T G.709
Thresholds
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
11-343
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-145 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 11-144 OTN Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-145 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the
port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and
ports with OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default values.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
11-344
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-146 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-147 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-146 FEC Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-147 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Transmit string size
11-345
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the channel group
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Expected Displays and sets the current expected
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Expected String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. Click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box
to keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every
5 seconds.
• Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-147 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-346
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-346
• DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-347
• DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-351
• DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-352
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards Using CTC, page 11-354
• DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 11-355
• DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 11-355
• DLP-G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
• DLP-G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
Note You can create up to 11 channel groups on the GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to 2 channel groups
on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards. You can create a channel group with ports only when the ports
do not have any UNI QinQ settings or NNI SVLAN settings. Otherwise, the channel group will be
created with empty ports.
For information about interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a channel group. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109.
Purpose This task creates a channel group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-347
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 4 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 5 Click Create. The Channel Group Creation dialog box appears.
Step 6 Enter the name of the channel group in the Name field.
Step 7 From the Stand Alone list, choose the ports that will belong to this channel group and click the right
arrow button to move the selected ports to the Bundled list.
Step 8 From the LACP Mode drop-down list, choose the LACP mode as needed:
• On—Default mode. In this mode, the ports will not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
• Active—In this mode, the ports will send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
• Passive—In this mode, the ports will not send LACP packets until the partner ports send LACP
packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports will send LACP packets.
Step 9 From the LACP Hashing drop-down list, select the LACP hashing algorithm that the protocol uses to
perform the load balancing task between the bundled ports.
The following hashing algorithms are supported:
• Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Step 10 Click Create.
A new row is added in the LACP table and all the other parameters in the channel group are set to default
values. The default values of these parameters are taken from the first port that is attached to the channel
group.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose This task modifies the parameters of the channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-348
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Ports cannot be added or removed using this procedure. For adding or removing the ports, see the
“DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC” task on
page 11-351.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task the node where you want to modify the parameters of the
channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to modify the parameters of the channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Modify the channel group settings as described in Table 11-148.
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Channel Group (Display only) ID and name of the channel group. N.A.
Name Sets the name of the channel group. —
Ports (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE of the channel group).
N.A.
LACP Mode Sets the LACP mode. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• On
• Active
• Passive
Hashing Sets the LACP hashing algorithm. The channel
group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Ucast SA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN
Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP
TCP UDP
Admin State Sets the administrative state on the channel group. • IS
• OOS, DSBLD
Service State (Display only) Sets the service state that indicates
the operational state of the channel group.
• IS-NR
• OOS-MA, DSBLD
11-349
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MTU Sets the maximum transfer unit (MTU), which sets
the maximum number of bytes per frame accepted
on the port. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state. The default MTU value
in the channel group is taken from the default
settings in the node.
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range: 64 to 9700
Mode Sets the provisional port mode. If the port mode is
Auto, the Expected Speed field determines which
ports can belong to the bundle. The member ports
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Auto
• 1000 Mbps
Expected Speed Sets the expected speed of ports of the channel
group. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 10 Mbps
• 100 Mbps
• 1000 Mbps
Duplex (Display only) Expected duplex capability of ports
of the channel group.
• Full
Committed Info
Rate
Sets the guaranteed information rate as per the service
provider service-level agreement. The channel group
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
Committed
Burst Size
Sets the maximum number of bits transferred per
second. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
11-350
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Excess Burst
Size
Sets the maximum number of bits credited for later
transfer if the committed burst rate cannot be
transmitted. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
NIM Sets the network interface mode (NIM) for the
channel group. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
The channel group NIM is set to UNI or NNI based
on the mode of the first port that is added to the
channel group.
• UNI Mode
(Default)—provisions
the port as a
User-Network
Interface (UNI). This
is the interface that
faces the subscriber.
• NNI
Mode—provisions
the port as a
Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI). This
is the interface that
faces the service
provider network.
Ingress CoS Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress class of service
(CoS). Ingress CoS is used to set the priority of the
Ethernet frame in the service provider network. The
member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 0
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 7
• Trust
• CVLAN
• DSCP
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
11-351
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed
Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst
Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
Inner Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field indicates which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state to modify the Inner
Ethertype value to a non-default value.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std
802.1Q customer VLAN
tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff.
Outer Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field identifies which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE
standard 802.1Q service
provider VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff
MAC Learning Enables or disables MAC learning for the port on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to
learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so that
the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right
location. In GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE cards, enable
MAC address learning per SVLAN.
• Checked—MAC
learning is enabled
for this port.
• Unchecked—(Default)
MAC learning is
disabled for this port.
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task adds or removes ports to or from an existing channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-352
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• You can assign up to eight ports to a channel group on GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to three
ports on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards.
• You can assign the ports to a channel group only if the ports are in OOS-DSBLD admin state. The
ports must not have any UNI QinQ rule or NNI SVLAN configuration.
• If the channel group is configured in UNI mode, only the UNI ports can be added to the channel
group. If the channel group is configured in NNI mode, only the NNI ports can be added to the
channel group.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want add ports to an existing channel
group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to add ports to an existing channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Click Add/Remove Ports. The Add/Remove Ports dialog box appears.
Step 6 To add ports to an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Stand Alone list, choose the required ports and click the right arrow button to move the selected
ports to the Bundled list.
Step 7 To remove ports from an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Bundled list, choose the required ports and click the left arrow button to move the selected ports
to the Stand Alone list.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete the channel group. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XP card where you want to delete the channel group.
Purpose This task deletes a channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-353
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view and retrieve
information on the channel group, REP, CFM, and EFM. If you are already logged in, continue with Step
2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Maintenance > Show Commands tabs.
Step 4 From the Command drop-down list, choose a command.
The following commands are supported:
• ETH LACP—Displays detailed LACP information from the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• REP TOPO—Displays the topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP TOPO ARCHIVE—Displays the previous topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP INTERFACE—Displays information on the REP interface status and configuration. You can
retrieve detailed information for each segment by selecting Detailed from the Level drop-down list
and providing the segment ID.
• OAM DISCOVERY—Displays discovery information for all the EFM interfaces or for a specific
EFM interface.
• OAM SUMMARY—Displays the active EFM sessions on a device.
• OAM STATISTICS—Displays detailed information about the EFM packets.
Purpose This task enables you to view and retrieve information on the channel
group, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM), and Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-354
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• OAM STATUS—Displays information about the EFM configurations for all the EFM interfaces or
for a specific interface.
For more information, see the Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference document.
Step 5 From the Level drop-down list, choose Normal or Detailed.
Step 6 Click Show. Depending on the command, the appropriate output appears in the text area.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the channel group PM
counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group statistics. The card view
appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Statistics tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
Statistics tab.
View the PM parameter names in the Param column. The current PM parameter values appear in the Port
# (CHGRP) column. For PM parameter definitions, see the Monitor Performance document.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables you to view current statistical performance monitoring
(PM) counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards
and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-355
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the channel group
utilization PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view, double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view
the channel group utilization. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Utilization tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. The utilization percentages for each channel group on the card appear in the Utilization
tab.
View the Port # column to find the channel group you want to monitor.
The transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) bandwidth utilization values, for the previous time intervals, appear
in the Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, see the Monitor Performance document.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose This task enables you to view line utilization PM counts on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect
possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task enables you to view historical PM counts at selected time
intervals on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and
channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-356
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the channel group
history PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group history PM data. The card
view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > History tabs.
Step 4 From the Port field, choose a channel group.
Step 5 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
History tab.
View the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column. The PM parameter values appear in the
Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, see the Monitor Performance document.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the CFM settings.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC, page 11-357
• DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC, page 11-358
• DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 11-359
• DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 11-360
Purpose This procedure changes the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-357
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 11-361
• DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 11-362
• DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 11-362
• DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC,
page 11-363
• DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC, page 11-364
• DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC, page 11-365
• DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC, page 11-365
• DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC, page 11-366
• DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC, page 11-367
• DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC, page 11-367
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
• DLP-G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC
Note CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM
service to work.
For information about interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility
list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable or disable CFM on
the card. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-358
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Security tab.
Step 4 Uncheck the MAC security check box to disable MAC security.
Step 5 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 6 Check the Enable CFM check box that is present at the bottom of the screen.
Step 7 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between maintenance end points (MEPs).
The CC Timer field is used to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 8 Click Apply to enable CFM on the card.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box to disable CFM on the card.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC
Note CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM service to work. However, CFM is
enabled on all the ports by default.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable or disable CFM for
each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 4 If you want to enable CFM on a specific port, check the Enable CFM check box against that port.
Step 5 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM for each port on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-359
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between MEPs. The CC Timer field is used
to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 6 Click Apply to enable CFM on the port.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box against the port to disable CFM on the port.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can create up to eight maintenance domain profiles on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• The maximum number of characters for the maintenance domain profile and the maintenance
association profile must not exceed 43 characters.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a maintenance domain
profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the domain profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the domain in the Domain Name field.
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-360
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 Enter the level of the domain profile in the Level field. The range of the domain profile level is from 0
to 7.
Step 7 Click Store.
Step 8 Choose the card slot where you want to store this domain profile and click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a maintenance domain
profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the domain profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-361
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note You can create up to 1500 maintenance association profiles on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a maintenance
association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the maintenance association profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the maintenance association in the Maintenance Profile Name field.
Step 6 Enter the VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Check the CC Enable check box to receive Continuity Check messages.
Step 8 Click Store.
Step 9 Choose the card slot where you want to store this maintenance association profile and click OK.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-362
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to modify is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to modify a maintenance
association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to modify.
Step 5 Click Modify Selected Profile(s). The Modify MA Profile dialog box appears.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to delete is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Purpose This task allows you to modify a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-363
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a maintenance
association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that you have already created maintenance domain profiles and maintenance association profiles.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to map a maintenance
association profile to a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA-Domain Mapping tabs.
Step 4 From the main drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain profile.
Step 5 Click Link MA Profiles. The Link MA Profiles dialog box appears.
Step 6 From the Available Profiles list, choose the required MA profiles and click the right arrow button to
move the MA profiles to the Linked Profiles list and click OK.
Purpose This task allows you to map a maintenance association profile to a
maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-364
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The maintenance association profiles that are mapped with a specific maintenance domain
profile must have a unique SVLAN ID.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a MEP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MEP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MEP.
Note CFM must be enabled on the port to create a MEP. The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Domain drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN ID in the Vlan Id field.
Note The specified VLAN must be configured on the selected port. The specified VLAN must also appear in
the MA-Domain Mapping table.
Step 8 Enter the MP ID (identifier of the maintenance end point) in the MPID field and click OK. The range of
the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
The MP ID must not be the same between the maintenance end points.
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) for a
given VLAN range on a specific maintenance domain.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-365
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a MEP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MEPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a MIP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This task allows you to delete a MEP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP)
for a given VLAN range with a specific maintenance level.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-366
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MIP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MIP.
Note The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Level drop-down list, choose a maintenance level. The range of the maintenance level is from
0 to 7.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN range in the Vlan range field. The range of the SVLAN is from 1 to 4093.
Note The specified SVLAN must be configured on the selected port.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a MIP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MIPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to delete a MIP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-367
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to ping MEP. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Ping tabs.
Step 4 Enter the MP ID value in the MPID field. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Note Remote MP ID user cannot ping local MP ID.
Step 5 (Optional) Enter the MAC address of the remote maintenance point in the Mac Addr field. The format
of MAC address is abcd.abcd.abcd.
Step 6 Enter the SVLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the SVLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name field.
Step 8 Enter the size of the ping packet in the DataGram Size field. The default value is 100.
Step 9 Enter the number of ping packets in the No of Requests field. The default value is 5.
Step 10 Click Ping. The output of the ping command appears in the Ping Response area.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC
Purpose This task allows you to display the output of the ping command on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to display the output of the traceroute command on
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-368
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the output of the
traceroute command. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Traceroute tabs.
Step 4 Enter the remote MP ID value in the MPID field. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Step 5 (Optional) Enter the MAC address of the remote maintenance point in the Mac Addr field. The format
of MAC address is abcd.abcd.abcd.
Step 6 Enter the SVLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the SVLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name field.
Step 8 Click TraceRoute Response.
The output of the traceroute command appears in the TraceRoute Response area.
• Verify the RlyHit message is shown in the traceroute display and LTM reaches a maintenance point
whose MAC address matches the target MAC address.
• Verify the RlyFDB message is shown in the traceroute display when the next hop address is found
in the forwarding database.
• Verify the RlyMPDB message is shown in the traceroute display when the next hop address is found
in the CCDN.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the EFM settings.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure changes the EFM settings of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-369
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC, page 11-369
• DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC, page 11-370
• DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC, page 11-371
• DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC, page 11-373
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G643 Enable EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G644 Configure the EFM Mode on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can enable EFM on both UNI and NNI ports.
• You cannot enable or disable EFM for ports that belong to a channel group.
• For information about interaction of EFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable or disable EFM for
each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Configuration tabs. The EFM details appear for each
port.
Step 4 From the EFM State drop-down list, choose Enabled.
Step 5 Click Apply to enable EFM for that port.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable EFM for each port on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-370
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note From the EFM State drop-down list, choose Disabled to disable EFM for that port.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to configure EFM parameters.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Configuration tabs.
Step 4 Modify the EFM parameter settings as described in Table 11-149.
Purpose This task allows you to configure EFM parameters on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Table 11-149 EFM Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE).
—
EFM State Sets the state of the EFM protocol for each port. • Enabled
• Disabled
Mode Sets the operating mode of the port. If the mode is
Active, the port sends OAM Protocol Data Units
(OAMPDUs) at regular intervals to the partner
ports. If the mode is Passive, the port will not send
OAMPDUs until the partner ports send OAMPDUs.
• Active
• Passive
11-371
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to configure EFM link
monitoring parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Link Monitoring tabs.
Link Fault Sets the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) action. If
the link is down on a port, the link fault RFI is sent
to the partner port through OAMPDU. An alarm
indicating the remote failure indication link fault
(RFI-LF) is raised. The alarm is cleared after you
clear the link fault condition.
You can specify the following actions for link fault
RFI:
• Error Block—The interface is placed in the
error-block state and the RFI-LF alarm is
raised.
• None—Only the RFI-LF alarm is raised.
Note Dying Gasp and critical events are not
supported.
• Error Block
• None
Session Timer Sets the duration up to when the EFM session is
retained with the partner port without receiving
OAMPDUs.
Default: 5 seconds
Range: 2 to 30 seconds
Table 11-149 EFM Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task allows you to configure EFM link monitoring parameters for
each port on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-372
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Modify the EFM link monitoring parameter settings as described in Table 11-150.
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-150 EFM Link Monitoring Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE).
—
EF Max Sets the threshold value for the maximum number
of errored frames to detect during a specific period.
Range: 1 to 65535
EF Min Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of
errored frames to detect during a specific period.
Range: 0 to 65535
EF Action Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the
maximum threshold value, the applicable action is
None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum
threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient
condition) is generated.
• None
• Squelch
EF Window Period in which the errored frame parameters are
monitored.
Range: 10 to 600
EFP Max Sets the threshold value for the maximum number
of errored frames within the last n frames.
Range: 1 to 65535
EFP Min Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of
errored frames within the last n frames.
Range: 0 to 65535
EFP Action Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the
maximum threshold value, the applicable action is
None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum
threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient
condition) is generated.
• None
• Squelch
EFP Window Period in which the EFP parameters are monitored. Range: 1 to 65535
EFSS Max Sets the threshold value for the maximum number
of errored seconds within the last m seconds.
Range: 1 to 900
EFSS Min Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of
errored seconds within the last m seconds.
Range: 0 to 900
EFSS Action Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the
maximum threshold value, the applicable action is
None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum
threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient
condition) is generated.
• None
• Squelch
EFSS Window Specifies the period when the EFSS parameters are
monitored.
Range: 100 to 9000
11-373
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable the remote loopback
for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Loopback tabs.
The remote loopback type details appear for each port.
Step 4 From the Remote Loopback Type drop-down list, choose Remote Loopback.
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings
Purpose This task allows you to enable remote loopback for each port on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This procedure changes the REP settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-374
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the REP settings. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC, page 11-374
• DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC, page 11-375
• DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC, page 11-377
• DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC, page 11-378
• DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC, page 11-379
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G649 Create a Segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G650 Configure STCN on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G651 Configure Preemption Delay on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI
• DLP-G652 Configure VLAN Load Balancing on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC
Note One administrative CVLAN and one administrative SVLAN can be provisioned for each card. The REP
segments using NNI ports send Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) messages using the administrative
SVLAN. The REP segments using UNI ports send HFL messages using the administrative CVLAN. The
two VLANs need not be the same.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to provision administrative
VLAN. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Admin VLAN Configuration tabs.
Step 4 To provision administrative VLAN for NNI ports in a REP segment, perform the following steps:
a. From the SVLAN drop-down list, choose a SVLAN.
b. Click Apply.
Purpose This task allows you to provision administrative VLAN for NNI and
UNI ports in a REP segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-375
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
c. To associate the chosen SVLAN with the NNI ports, see “DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS
to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports” task on page 11-396.
Step 5 To provision administrative VLAN for UNI ports in a REP segment, perform the following steps:
a. Enter the CVLAN in the CVLAN field.
b. Click Apply.
c. To associate the CVLAN with the UNI ports, see “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings” task on page 11-399.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can create up to three segments on a card. Each segment can have up to two ports on the same
switch.
• You must configure the REP administrative VLAN to activate the Hardware Flood Layer (HFL).
• Before creating REP segments, you must configure the administrative VLAN or use the default
VLAN 1 and add the ports to the segment. Only one SVLAN can be configured per card for all the
three segments. REP uses the administrative VLAN to flood its own control traffic.
• The administrative CVLAN is required if a REP port is configured as a UNI port. However, the REP
ports are configured as NNI ports in many configurations, and hence the administrative CVLAN is
not required in these configurations. The option to configure the administrative CVLAN is present
in CTC.
• You must configure two edge ports in the segment. A segment has only one primary edge port. If
you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different
switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority.
• If REP is enabled on two ports on a switch, both the ports must be either regular ports or edge ports.
However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can be an edge port and another port can
be a regular port.
• You can also optionally configure where to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs)
and VLAN load balancing (VLB). STCNs are enabled only for primary edge ports. VLB
configurations are enabled on any edge ports.
Purpose This task allows you to create a segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-376
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• For information about interaction of REP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a segment. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create Segment wizard appears.
Step 5 Enter the segment ID in the Segment field. The range of the segment ID is from 1 to 1024.
Step 6 From the Port drop-drown list, choose a REP port that must belong to this segment.
Note A REP port can belong to only one segment.
Step 7 From the Port Role area, choose whether you want to configure the port as an edge port or a regular port.
The options are:
a. Edge—The port is configured as an edge port.
• Check the Primary check box to configure the edge port as a primary edge port. A segment can
have only one primary edge port.
Note If an edge port is configured as primary edge port, the other edge port in the ring
automatically becomes secondary edge port. If neither edge port is configured as primary
edge port, one edge port is automatically selected as primary edge port, and the other edge
port is secondary edge port. Configuring an edge port as a primary edge port is not
mandatory. However, it is recommended since VLAN load balancing must be configured on
the node with the primary edge port.
• Uncheck the Primary check box to configure the edge port as a secondary edge port.
• (Optional) Check the Preferred check box to configure the regular or edge port as a preferred
alternate port (alternate to primary edge port). This port blocks a range of SVLANs for VLAN
load balancing. There is no limit on the number of preferred ports in a REP ring. The preferred
port, if configured, is relevant even without VLAN load balancing, as it takes priority over
non-preferred ports for alternate port election.
Note Configuring a port as preferred does not ensure that it becomes the alternate port; it only
gets preference over the other ports that are not configured as preferred when an alternate
port is elected.
• Check the NoNeighbor check box if the edge port must not have a neighbor port. REP does not
check for neighbor adjacency.
Note When the NoNeighbor check box is checked, ensure that only one segment is created.
11-377
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
b. None—The port is configured as a regular port. If you choose this option, Segment Topology
Change Notifications (STCN) and VLAN Load Balancing (VLB) configurations are disabled.
Check the Preferred check box to configure the regular port as a preferred alternate port.
Step 8 From the STCN area, configure the destination of STCN messages:
a. Check the Enable check box to enable sending STCN messages.
b. From the Port drop-down list, choose the STCN port to send STCN messages or enter the segment
ID in the Segment field to send STCN messages. The STCN port and REP port must be unique.
Step 9 From the VLAN Load Balancing area, configure VLAN Load Balancing on the primary edge port:
a. Check the Enable check box to enable VLB.
b. Enter a single SVLAN or range of SVLANs in the SVLAN field. These SVLANs are blocked at the
alternate ports. The primary edge port blocks the remaining VLANs.
c. Enter the Rep PortId in the Rep PortId field to identify the VLAN blocking alternate port. This
unique port ID is automatically generated when REP is enabled.
d. Check the Preferred check box to select the segment port previously identified as the preferred
alternate port for VLAN load balancing.
When you check Preferred under VLAN Load Balancing area, you configure VLAN load balancing
to use one of the previously configured preferred ports (under the Port Role area) to be the load
balancing port. This restricts the load balancing port to be one among the preferred ports, but you
cannot select a specific preferred port.
Step 10 From the VLB Preempt Delay area, enter the trigger delay for automatic VLB activation. The range is
15 to 300 seconds.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 Enter the details of the second port to add it to the segment.
Repeat Step 6 to 10 when the first port is configured as a regular port and the second port is configured
as a primary edge port. Repeat Step 6 to 7 when the first port is configured as a primary edge port and
the second port is configured as a regular port.
Step 13 Click Finish.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC
Purpose This task allows you to edit a segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-378
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You can edit only the STCN and VLB entries for a segment.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to edit a segment. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Edit.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click Finish.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
Note When VLAN load balancing is activated, the default configuration is manual preemption with the delay
timer disabled.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to activate VLAN load
balancing. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Activate VLB.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to activate VLAN load balancing on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-379
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to deactivate VLAN load
balancing. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Deactivate VLB.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the card settings. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Purpose This task allows you to deactivate VLAN load balancing on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This procedure changes Ethernet, line, and PM threshold settings for the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-380
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Verify the card mode:
a. Display the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
– L2-over-DWDM (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE)
– 10GE TXP (10GE_XP or 10 GE_XPE)
– 10GE MXP (GE_XP or GE_XPE)
– 20GE MXP (GE_XP or GE_XPE)
If the card mode is set correctly, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet
Settings” task on page 11-381.
Step 5 If the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted in the GE_XPE card, complete the
following tasks, as needed.
• DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings, page 11-389
• DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings, page 11-391
Step 6 If the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode is L2-over-DWDM, complete the
following tasks, as needed. If the card mode is not L2-over-DWDM, continue with Step 7.
• DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings,
page 11-393
• DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database, page 16-79
• DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI
Ports, page 11-396
• DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings,
page 11-397
• DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings, page 11-399
• NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-406.
• DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card, page 11-402
• NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-411 or NTP-G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI.
• NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card, page 11-413 or
NTP-G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
• DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC, page 11-401 or NTP-G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
Step 7 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-414
• DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-416
11-381
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds,
page 11-417
• DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings, page 11-420
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 11-151. The parameters that appear
depend on the card mode.
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n)
and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE TXP
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet
frames accepted by the port. The port
must be in OOS/locked state.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE TXP
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range 64 to 9700 (for R9.1 and later) (jumbo
frame)
11-382
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. The port
must be in OOS/locked state before
setting the card mode.
Note For GE_XP and GE_XPE
cards that are in Y-cable
protection groups, Mode
must be set to 1000 Mbps for
those client ports that are
configured in Y-cable.
For 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE cards that are in
Y-cable protection groups,
Mode must be set to 10000
Mbps.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE TXP
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• Auto (default)
• Display Only
• 1000 Mbps
• 10000 Mbps
• Auto_Fdx (10Mbps Full). This option
applies to ONS-SE-ZE-EL copper SFP that
carries traffic from GE_XP and GE_XPE
cards.
Note If Mode is set to Auto on the GE_XP or
GE_XPE port, autonegotiation gets
enabled on the peer port.
Note On GE_XP card, the copper Pluggable
Port Module (PPM) interface can
auto-negotiate and carry traffic even
when the peer interface operates at
rates other than 1000 Mbps.
Flow Control Enables/disables flow control
messaging with its peer port. When
enabled, the port can send and
receive PAUSE frames when buffer
congestion occurs. When disabled,
no PAUSE frames are transmitted
and the PAUSE frames received are
discarded.
Note Flow control messaging is
symmetric and not
negotiated. When flow
control is enabled on one
port, the other end of the link
(peer port) is not considered.
That is, even if flow control is
disabled on the peer port, the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
card will send PAUSE
frames.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 10GE TXP
• 20GE MXP
• ON—Flow control is enabled.
• OFF (default)—Flow control is disabled.
• Display Only.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-383
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Media Type (GE_XPE card only) Sets the Media
Type.
Note PROV-MISMATCH alarm is
raised if the Media Type is
not set to Ethernet Over DS1
(ANSI) or Ethernet Over E1
(ETSI) for
ONS-SC-EOP1,Ethernet
Over DS3 (ANSI) or Ethernet
Over E3 (ETSI) for
ONS-SC-EOP3, or DS1 Over
Ethernet (ANSI) or E1 Over
Ethernet (ETSI) for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or DS3
Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E3
Over Ethernet (ETSI)
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW. Set the
correct Media Type to clear
the PROV-MISMATCH
alarm.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• Ethernet Over DS1 (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP1)
• Ethernet Over E1 (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP1)
• Ethernet Over DS3 (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP3)
• Ethernet Over E3 (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP3)
• DS1 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
• DS3 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
• E1 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
• E3 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
Committed
Info Rate
Sets the guaranteed information rate
as provided by the service provider
service-level agreement. The port
must be in OOS/locked state.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
Committed
Burst Size
Sets the maximum number of bits
that will be transferred per second.
The port must be in OOS/locked state
before the Committed Burst Size is
provisioned.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1MB
• 2MB
• 8MB
• 16MB
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-384
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Excess Burst
Size
The maximum number of bits that are
credited for later transfer in the event
the committed burst rate cannot be
transmitted. The port must be in
OOS/locked state before the Excess
Burst Size is provisioned.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• None
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1MB
• 2MB
• 8MB
• 16MB
NIM Sets the port network interface mode
(NIM). This parameter classifies port
types designed for the Metro
Ethernet market to simplify
deployment, management, and
troubleshooting. The port must be in
OOS/locked state before the NIM is
provisioned.
L2-over-DWDM • UNI Mode—provisions the port as a
user-to-network interface (UNI). This is
the interface that faces the subscriber.
• NNI Mode—provisions the port as a
network-to-network interface. This is the
interface that faces the service provider
network.
Egress QoS Enables Quality of Service (QoS) on
the port’s egress or output queues.
The port must be in OOS/locked state
before the Egress QoS is provisioned.
L2-over-DWDM • Checked—QoS is enabled on the port’s
egress queues.
• Unchecked—(Default) QoS is disabled on
the port’s egress queues.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-385
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MAC
Learning
Enables or disables MAC learning
for the port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
MAC learning is used by Layer 2
switches to learn the MAC addresses
of network nodes so the Layer 2
switches send traffic to the right
location. Layer 2 switches, including
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards in L2-over-DWDM
mode with MAC Learning
configured, maintain a MAC learning
table that associates the MAC
addresses and VLANs with a given
port.
Note MAC addresses on SVLANs
attached to the port must also
be enabled to provision MAC
address learning on GE_XPE
and 10GE_XPE cards.
Note MAC address table aging is
300 seconds. It cannot be
changed.
L2-over-DWDM • Checked—MAC learning is enabled for
this port.
• Unchecked—(Default) MAC learning is
disabled.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-386
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Ingress CoS Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress
Class of Service (CoS). The CoS .1p
bits set the Ethernet frame priority.
The port must be in OOS/locked state
before the Ingress CoS is
provisioned.
Ingress CoS is used to set the priority
of the Ethernet frame in the service
provider network, This parameter is
used to set the CoS .1p bits in the
SVLAN tag.
Ingress CoS applies only to ports
provisioned as UNI mode. It does not
apply to ports provisioned as NNI
mode.
L2-over-DWDM • 0—(default) All incoming frames on the
port will have the CoS .1p bits in the
SVLAN tag set to 0.
• 1—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 1.
• 2—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 2.
• 3—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 3.
• 4—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 4.
• 5—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 5.
• 6—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 6.
• 7—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 7.
• Trust—Automatically copies customer
VLAN tag into the service provider VLAN
tag.
• CVLAN—CoS can be provisioned based
on CVLAN. For information on how CoS
can be provisioned on the IEEE 802.1QinQ
CVLAN tags, refer to the “DLP-G384
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”
task on page 11-399.
If CVLAN CoS is configured on a GE_XP
or a 10GE_XP card, a PROV-MISMATCH
alarm is raised. Until this alarm is cleared,
provisioning on the card is not possible.
The CVLAN CoS configuration takes
effect only after QinQ is configured.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-387
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Inner
Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the inner Ethertype field.
The Ethertype field indicates which
protocol is being transported in an
Ethernet frame.
The inner Ethertype applies to ports
provisioned in UNI mode only. It
does not apply to ports provisioned as
NNI mode. The ports must be
OOS/locked before the inner
Ethertype is provisioned.
L2-over-DWDM Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std 802.1Q customer
VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x0600 to 0xFFFF
Outer
Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the outer Ethertype field.
The Ethertype field identifies which
protocol is being transported in an
Ethernet frame. The ports must be
OOS/locked before the Outer
Ethertype is provisioned.
Note The PROV-MISMATCH
alarm is raised on GE_XPE
and 10GE_XPE cards if more
than four different Outer
Ethertype options are
configured per card.
L2-over-DWDM Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE 802.1Q customer VLAN
tag type)
Range: 0x0600 to 0xFFFF
IGMP Static
Router Port
Adds multicast-capable ports to the
forwarding table for every IP
multicast.
L2-over-DWDM • Checked—IGMP static router port is
enabled.
• Unchecked—(Default) IGMP static router
port is disabled.
AIS Action Defines the AIS action type
provisioned on the port.
L2-over-DWDM • None—No action.
• Squelch—When an AIS packet is received
on a SVLAN terminating on the UNI-port,
the UNI port is squelched.
Protection
Action
Configures the standby port behavior.
Set Protection Action to None if
Media Type is set to Ethernet Over
DS1 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over E1
(ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP1, Ethernet
Over DS3 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over
E3 (ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP3, or
DS1 Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E1
Over Ethernet (ETSI) for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or DS3 Over
Ethernet (ANSI) or E3 Over Ethernet
(ETSI) for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW.
L2-over-DWDM • None—No action.
• Squelch—The laser on the standby port in
a 1+1 protection group is squelched. This
setting has no effect if the port is not part
of the 1+1 protection group.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-388
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02